Index

210

English is not an official language of the Swiss Confederation. This translation is provided for information purposes only and has no legal force.

Swiss Civil Code

of 10 December 1907 (Status as of 1 July 2020)

The Federal Assembly of the Swiss Confederation,

based on Article 64 of the Federal Constitution1,2 and having considered the Dispatch of the Federal Council dated 28 May 19043,

decrees:

  Introduction

Art. 1 A. Application of the law

A. Application of the law

1 The law applies according to its wording or interpretation to all legal questions for which it contains a provision.

2 In the absence of a provision, the court1 shall decide in accordance with customary law and, in the absence of customary law, in accordance with the rule that it would make as legislator.

3 In doing so, the court shall follow established doctrine and case law.


1 Term in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). This amendment is taken into consideration throughout the Code.

Art. 2 B. Scope and limits of legal relationships / I. Acting in good faith

B. Scope and limits of legal relationships

I. Acting in good faith

1 Every person must act in good faith in the exercise of his or her rights and in the performance of his or her obligations.

2 The manifest abuse of a right is not protected by law.

Art. 3 B. Scope and limits of legal relationships / II. Good faith

II. Good faith

1 Where the law makes a legal effect conditional on the good faith of a person, there shall be a presumption of good faith.

2 No person may invoke the presumption of good faith if he or she has failed exercise the diligence required by the circumstances.

Art. 4 B. Scope and limits of legal relationships / III. Judicial discretion

III. Judicial1 discretion

Where the law confers discretion on the court or makes reference to an assessment of the circumstances or to good cause, the court must reach its decision in accordance with the principles of justice and equity.


1 Term in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). This amendment is taken into consideration throughout the Code.

Art. 5 C. Federal law and cantonal law / I. Cantonal civil law and local custom

C. Federal law and cantonal law

I. Cantonal civil law and local custom

1 Insofar as federal law reserves the application of cantonal law, the cantons may enact or repeal civil law provisions.

2 Where the law makes reference to practice or local custom, the existing cantonal law is deemed a valid expression thereof, provided no divergent practice is shown to exist.

Art. 6 C. Federal law and cantonal law / II. Cantonal public law

II. Cantonal public law

1 Federal civil law does not restrict the right of the cantons to enact public law.

2 The cantons are entitled within the limits of their sovereignty to restrict or prohibit the trade in certain goods or to declare transactions involving such goods legally invalid.

Art. 7 D. General provisions of the Code of Obligations

D. General provisions of the Code of Obligations

The general provisions of the Code of Obligations1 concerning the formation, performance and termination of contracts also apply to other civil law matters.


1 SR 220

Art. 8 E. Rules of evidence / I. Burden of proof

E. Rules of evidence

I. Burden of proof

Unless the law provides otherwise, the burden of proving the existence of an alleged fact shall rest on the person who derives rights from that fact.

Art. 9 E. Rules of evidence / II. Proof by public document

II. Proof by public document

1 Public registers and public deeds constitute full proof of the facts evidenced by them, unless their content is shown to be incorrect.

2 Such proof of incorrectness does not require to be in any particular form.

Art. 101

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

  Part One: Law of Persons

  Title One: Natural Persons

  Chapter One: Legal Personality

Art. 11 A. Personality in general / I. Legal capacity

A. Personality in general

I. Legal capacity

1 Every person has legal capacity.

2 Accordingly, within the limits of the law, every person has the same capacity to have rights and obligations.

Art. 12 A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 1. Nature

II. Capacity to act

1. Nature

A person who has capacity to act has the capacity to create rights and obligations through his actions.

Art. 131A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / a. In general

2. Requirements

a. In general

A person who is of age and is capable of judgement has the capacity to act.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 141A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / b. Majority

b. Majority

A person is of age if he or she has reached the age of 18.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), with effect from 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 151A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / c. ...

c. ...


1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, with effect from 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 161A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / d. Capacity of judgement

d. Capacity of judgement

A person is capable of judgement within the meaning of the law if he or she does not lack the capacity to act rationally by virtue of being under age or because of a mental disability, mental disorder, intoxication or similar circumstances.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 171A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 1. In general

III. Incapacity

1. In general

A person does not have the capacity to act if he or she is incapable of judgement or is under age or is subject to a general deputyship.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 18 A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 2. Lack of capacity of judgement

2. Lack of capacity of judgement

A person who is incapable of judgement cannot create legal effect by his or her actions, unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 19 A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act. / a. Principle

3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act.

a. Principle1

1 Persons who are capable of judgement but lack the capacity to act may only enter into obligations or give up rights with the consent of their legal representative.2

2 Without such consent, they may only accept advantages that are free of charge or carry out minor everyday transactions.3

3 They are liable in damages for unpermitted acts.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19a1A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act. / b. Consent of the legal representative

b. Consent of the legal representative

1 Unless the law provides otherwise, the legal representative may consent expressly or tacitly in advance or approve the transaction retrospectively.

2 The other party is relieved of any obligation if approval is not given within a reasonable period that he or she fixes or has fixed by a court.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19b1A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act. / c. Absence of consent

c. Absence of consent

1 If the legal representative does not grant approval, either party may demand restitution of any performance already made. A person lacking capacity to act is however only liable to the extent that he or she has already benefited from the performance or to which he or she has been enriched at the time of the demand or has alienated the benefits in bad faith.

2 If the person lacking capacity to act has induced the other party to erroneously assume that he or she has the capacity to act, he or she is liable for the damage incurred.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19c1A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 4. Strictly personal rights

4. Strictly personal rights

1 Persons capable of judgement but lacking capacity to act exercise their strictly personal rights independently; cases where the law requires the consent of the legal representative are reserved.

2 The legal representative acts for a person lacking capacity of judgement unless a right is so strictly personal that any form of representation is excluded.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19d1A. Personality in general / IIIbis. Restriction of the capacity to act

IIIbis. Restriction of the capacity to act

The capacity to act may be restricted by an adult protection measure.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 20 A. Personality in general / IV. Kinship by blood and by marriage / 1. Blood kinship

IV.1 Kinship by blood and by marriage

1. Blood kinship

1 The degree of kinship2 is determined by the number of intermediary generations.

2 Lineal kinship exists between two persons where one is descended from the other and collateral kinship exists between two persons where both are descended from a third person and are not related lineally.


1 Amended of margin title in accordance with No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819, 1973 92; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 211A. Personality in general / IV. Kinship by blood and by marriage / 2. Kinship by marriage

2. Kinship by marriage

1 Where one person is related to another, he or she is related as an in-law to the latter’s spouse or registered partner in the same line and to the same degree.

2 Kinship by marriage is not ended by dissolution of the marriage or of the registered partnership which created it.


1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Registered Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 22 A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 1. Origin

V. Place of origin and domicile

1. Origin

1 The place of origin of a person is determined by his or her citizenship.

2 Citizenship is governed by public law.

3 If a person is a citizen of more than one place, his or her place of origin is the one in which he or she is or was most recently resident or, in the absence of any such residence, the one in which he or she or his or her ancestors last acquired citizenship.

Art. 23 A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / a. Definition

2. Domicile

a. Definition

1 A person’s domicile is the place in which he or she resides with the intention of settling; residence for the purpose of education or the accommodation of a person in an educative institution or care home, a hospital or a penal institution does not by itself establish domicile.1

2 No person may have more than one domicile at a time.

3 This provision does not apply to places of business.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 24 A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / b. Change of domicile, temporary residence

b. Change of domicile, temporary residence

1 A person retains his or her domicile until such time as a new one is acquired.

2 A person’s domicile is deemed to be the place in which he or she is temporarily resident if no previously established domicile may be proven or if he or she was formerly resident abroad and has not yet established a domicile in Switzerland.

Art. 251A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / c. Domicile of minors

c. Domicile of minors2

1 The domicile of a child subject to parental responsibility3 is deemed to be that of the parents or, if the parents have different domiciles, that of the parent with whom the child is resident; in all other cases it is deemed to be the child’s temporary domicile.

2 Children under guardianship are domiciled at the seat of the child protection authority.4


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Term in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). This amendment is taken into consideration throughout the Code.
4 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 261A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / d. Persons in institutions

d. Persons in institutions

Adults subject to a general deputyship are domiciled at the location of the adult protection authority.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 27 B. Protection of legal personality / I. Against excessive restriction

B. Protection of legal personality

I. Against excessive restriction1

1 No person may, wholly or in part, renounce his or her legal capacity or his or her capacity to act.

2 No person may surrender his or her freedom or restrict the use of it to a degree which violates the law or public morals.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 281B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 1. Principle

II. Against infringements

1. Principle

1 Any person whose personality rights are unlawfully infringed may petition the court for protection against all those causing the infringement.

2 An infringement is unlawful unless it is justified by the consent of the person whose rights are infringed or by an overriding private or public interest or by law.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28a1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 2. Actions / a. In general

2. Actions

a. In general2

1 The applicant may ask the court:

1.
to prohibit a threatened infringement;
2.
to order that an existing infringement cease;
3.
to make a declaration that an infringement is unlawful if it continues to have an offensive effect.

2 In particular the applicant may request that the rectification or the judgment be notified to third parties or published.

3 Claims for damages and satisfaction and for handing over profits in accordance with the provisions governing agency without authority are reserved.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats and Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 28b1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 2. Actions / b. Violence, threats or harassment

b. Violence, threats or harassment

1 To obtain protection from violence, threats or harassment, the applicant may request the court in particular to order the offending party to refrain from:

1.
approaching the applicant or from entering a defined area around the applicant’s dwelling;
2.
frequenting specified locations, notably particular streets, squares or districts;
3.
from making contact with the applicant, especially by telephone, in writing or electronically, or from harassing the applicant in any other way.

2 If the applicant lives in the same dwelling as the offending party, the applicant may ask the court to order the offending party to leave the dwelling for a specified period. This period may be extended on one occasion for good cause.

3 Where justified by the circumstances, the court may:

1.
require the applicant to pay reasonable compensation for his or her exclusive use of the dwelling; or
2.
with the landlord’s consent, transfer the rights and obligations under the lease to the applicant alone.

3bis It shall give notice of its decision to the competent child and adult protection authorities, the competent cantonal authority under paragraph 4 and other authorities and third parties, provided this appears necessary in order to fulfil its responsibilities or for the protection of the applicant, or enables the decision to be enforced.2

4 The cantons shall designate an authority which in urgent cases may order the immediate expulsion of the offending party from the joint dwelling and shall enact rules governing the procedure.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636). Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats and Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 14 Dec. 2018 on Improving the Protection given to Victims of Violence, in force since 1 July 2020 (AS 2019 2273; BBl 2017 7307).

Art. 28c–28f1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 3. ...

3. ...


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636). Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 28g1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / a. Principle

4. Right of reply

a. Principle2

1 Any person whose personality rights are directly affected by a representation of events in periodically appearing media, especially the press, radio or television, shall have a right of reply.

2 There is no right of reply in respect of accurate reports of the public dealings of an authority in which the affected person took part.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats and Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 28h1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / b. Form and content

b. Form and content

1 The text of the reply must be succinct and confine itself to the subject matter of the contentious representation.

2 The reply may be refused if it is plainly incorrect or violates the law or public morals.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28i1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / c. Procedure

c. Procedure

1 The author of the reply must send the text to the media company within 20 days of learning of the contentious representation, but at the latest within three months of publication.

2 The media company must immediately inform the author of the reply when it will be published or why it is rejected.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28k1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / d. Publication

d. Publication

1 The reply must be published as soon as possible and in such a manner as to ensure that it reaches the same audience or readership as the contentious representation.

2 The reply must be identified as such; the media company is not permitted to make any addition except to state whether it stands by its representation or to indicate its sources.

3 The reply must be published free of charge.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28l1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / e. Recourse to the courts

e. Recourse to the courts

1 If the media company obstructs the right of reply, rejects the reply or fails to publish it correctly, the party in question may petition the court.

2 ...2

3 and 4 ...3


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
3 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 29 B. Protection of legal personality / III. Right to use one’s name / 1. Protection of one’s name

III. Right to use one’s name

1. Protection of one’s name

1 If a person’s use of his or her name is disputed, he or she may apply for a court declaration confirming his rights.

2 If a person is adversely affected because another person is using his or her name, he or she may seek an order prohibiting such use and, if the user is at fault, may bring a claim for damages and, where justified by the nature of the infringement, for satisfaction.

Art. 30 B. Protection of legal personality / III. Right to use one’s name / 2. Change of name / a. General

2. Change of name

a. General1

1 The government of the canton of residence may permit a person to change his or her name for good cause.2

2 ...3

3 A person adversely affected by a change of name may contest the same in court within one year of learning thereof.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).
3 Repealed by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), with effect from 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 30a1B. Protection of legal personality / III. Right to use one’s name / 2. Change of name / b. On the death of a spouse

b. On the death of a spouse

A person whose spouse dies may, if that person changed his or her surname on marriage, at any time declare before the civil registrar the wish to revert to the name by which he or she was known prior to the marriage.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 31 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / I. Birth and death

C. Beginning and end of personality rights

I. Birth and death

1 Personality rights begin on the birth of the living child and end on death.

2 An unborn child has legal capacity provided that it survives birth.

Art. 32 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / II. Proof / 1. Burden of proof

II. Proof

1. Burden of proof

1 Any person who, in exercising a right, relies on the fact that another person is living or has died or was alive at a particular time or survived another person must produce evidence thereof.

2 If it cannot be proved that, of a group of several deceased persons, one survived another, all are deemed to have died at the same time.

Art. 33 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / II. Proof / 2. Evidence / a. In general

2. Evidence

a. In general

1 Proof of the birth or death of a person is established by the records kept by the civil register.

2 If records are missing or shown to be incorrect, proof may be adduced in another form.

Art. 34 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / II. Proof / 2. Evidence / b. Presumption of death

b. Presumption of death

The death of a person is deemed proven, even if no-one has seen the corpse, if that person has disappeared in circumstances in which his death may be considered certain.

Art. 35 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 1. In general

III. Declaration of presumed death

1. In general

1 If it is highly probable that a person is dead because he or she has disappeared in extremely life-threatening circumstances or has been missing for a lengthy period without any sign of life, the court may declare that person presumed dead on application by any person deriving rights from his or her death.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 36 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 2. Procedure

2. Procedure

1 The application may be made when at least one year has elapsed since the life-threatening event or five years have elapsed since the last sign of life.

2 The court must, by suitable public means, call on any person who may provide information about the missing person to come forward within a specified period.

3 The period shall run for at least one year following the first public notice.

Art. 37 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 3. Failure of application

3. Failure of application

If the missing person comes forward within the set period or if news of the missing person is received or if the date of his or her death is proved, the application fails.

Art. 38 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 4. Effect

4. Effect

1 If no news is received during the set period, the missing person is declared presumed dead and rights derived from the fact of his or her death may be enforced as if death were proven.

2 The declaration of presumed death has retroactive effect from the time of the life-threatening event or the last sign of life.

3 A declaration of presumed death dissolves a marriage.1


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).


  Chapter Two:1  Registration of Civil Status

Art. 391A. Registers / I. In general

A. Registers

I. In general

1 Civil status is recorded in an electronic register (civil register).

2 Civil status includes in particular:

1.
a person’s particulars, such as those relating to birth, marriage, registered civil partnership and death;
2.
a person’s status under the law of persons and family law, such as majority, parentage, marriage or registered civil partnership;
3.
names;
4.
cantonal and communal citizenship;
5.
nationality.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 40 A. Registers / II. Duty to notify

II. Duty to notify1

1 The Federal Council determines which persons and authorities have a duty to furnish the information necessary to record civil status.

2 It may provide that breaches of said duty be punishable by fines.

3 ...2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).
2 Repealed by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), with effect from 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 41 A. Registers / III. Proof of undisputed information

III. Proof of undisputed information

1 Where documentary proof of information concerning civil status is required but is impossible or unreasonably difficult to obtain despite making reasonable efforts, the cantonal supervisory authority may accept a declaration made in the presence of the registrar as proof provided such information is not disputed.

2 The registrar shall remind any person making such a declaration of his or her duty to tell the truth and that a false declaration may lead to prosecution.

Art. 42 A. Registers / IV. Rectification / 1. By court order

IV. Rectification

1. By court order

1 Any person who satisfies the court that he or she has a personal interest warranting protection may seek an order for the registration of disputed information concerning personal status or the rectification or removal of an entry. The court shall hear the relevant cantonal supervisory authority, to which it shall notify its judgment.

2 The cantonal supervisory authorities are likewise entitled to make such applications.

Art. 43 A. Registers / IV. Rectification / 2. By the register authorities

2. By the register authorities

The register authorities must of their own accord rectify mistakes resulting from an obvious oversight or error.

Art. 43a1A. Registers / V. Data protection and disclosure

V. Data protection and disclosure

1 In relation to the registration of civil status, the Federal Council is responsible for safeguarding the personality and constitutional rights of persons in respect of whom data is processed.

2 It regulates the disclosure of data to private persons who may show a direct interest warranting protection.

3 It stipulates those authorities, in addition to the register authorities, to whom the data necessary for the performance of their legal duties may be disclosed periodically or on request. The disclosure provisions under cantonal law are reserved.

3bis The register authorities are required to report to the competent authority any criminal offences that come to their attention while carrying out their official duties.2

4 The following bodies have online access to data required for proving the identity of a person:

1.
the issuing authorities under the Federal Act of 22 June 20013 on Identification Documents for Swiss Nationals;
2.4
the federal agency responsible for operating the computerised police search system under Article 15 of the Federal Act of 13 June 20085 on the Federal Police Information Systems and the filtering agencies of the cantonal and communal police forces linked into the search system;
3.
the federal agency responsible for keeping the computerised register of convictions under Art. 359 of the Criminal Code6;
4.
the federal agency responsible for investigations regarding missing persons7;
5.8
the Federal Intelligence Service for the early detection and prevention of threats to internal or external security in accordance with Article 6 paragraph 1 letter a of the Intelligence Service Act of 25 September 20159;
6.10
the authorities responsible for keeping the cantonal and communal registers of residents in accordance with the Register Harmonisation Act of 23 June 200611;
7. 12
the federal agencies responsible for keeping the central registers of insured persons in accordance with Article 71 paragraph 4 letter a of the Federal Act of 20 December 194613 on Old-Age and Survivors Insurance;
8. 14
the federal agencies at the Federal Department of Foreign Affairs responsible for keeping the register of Swiss living abroad in accordance with Article 4 paragraph 1 of the Federal Act of 24 March 200015 on the Processing of Personal Data.

1 Introduced by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).
2 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
3 SR 143.1
4 Amended by Annex 1 No 4 of the FA of 13 June 2008 on the Federal Police Information Systems, in force since 5 Dec. 2008 (AS 2008 4989; BBl 2006 5061).
5 SR 361
6 Now: Art. 365.
7 Currently the Federal Office of Police.
8 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the Intelligence Service Act of 25 Sept. 2015, in force since 1 Sept. 2017 (AS 2017 4095; BBl 2014 2105).
9 SR 121
10 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
11 SR 431.02
12 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
13 SR 831.10
14 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
15 SR 235.2

Art. 44 B. Organisation / I. Civil register authorities / 1. Civil registrars

B. Organisation

I. Civil register authorities

1. Civil registrars

1 In particular, the registrars shall perform the following tasks:

1.
they maintain the civil register;
2.
they make notifications and provide extracts;
3.
they carry out the preparatory procedure for weddings and conduct the wedding ceremony;
4.
they record declarations as to civil status.

2 Exceptionally, the Federal Council may entrust a representative of Switzerland abroad with these tasks.

Art. 45 B. Organisation / I. Civil register authorities / 2. Supervisory authorities

2. Supervisory authorities

1 Each canton shall appoint a supervisory authority.

2 In particular, the supervisory authority shall perform the following tasks:

1.
it supervises the register offices;
2.
it supports and advises the register offices;
3.
it assists in maintaining the civil register and in carrying out the preparatory procedure for weddings;
4.
it issues directives on recognition and recording of matters relating to civil status that occur abroad and of foreign judicial and administrative decisions concerning civil status;
5.
it provides for the basic and continuing education and training of persons working in the civil register service.

3 The Confederation is responsible for oversight. It may have recourse to cantonal appeal procedures against the decisions of the registrars and the supervisory authorities.1


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 45a1B. Organisation / Ia. Central civil information system

Ia. Central civil information system

1 The Confederation shall operate and develop a central civil information system for running a centralised civil register.

2 The Confederation bears the operating and development costs.

3 The cantons shall pay the Confederation an annual fee for the use of the system for the purposes of managing the register of civil status.

4 The Confederation shall involve the cantons in the development of the system and provide technical support in its use.

5 In cooperation with the cantons, the Federal Council regulates:
1.
the details of the cantons’ involvement in developing the system;
2.
the amount to be paid by the cantons for its use;
3.
the rights of access of the civil register authorities and other agencies with access rights;
4.
how the Confederation and cantons cooperate over running the system;
5.
the organisational and technical measures necessary to safeguard data protection and data security;
6.
data archiving.

6 It may provide for the costs of services for third parties for purposes unrelated to civil status matters to be charged to these third parties.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register) (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639). Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 46 B. Organisation / II. Liability

II. Liability

1 Any person suffering loss caused unlawfully by persons employed in the civil register service in the exercise of their official duties is entitled to damages and, where justified by the gravity of the loss, to satisfaction.

2 The canton is liable; it may have recourse against persons who have caused loss wilfully or through gross negligence.

3 The Government Liability Act of 14 March 19581 applies in relation to persons employed by the Confederation.


Art. 47 B. Organisation / III. Disciplinary measures

III. Disciplinary measures

1 Wilful or negligent breaches of official duty by persons working in civil register offices are subject to disciplinary measures taken by the cantonal supervisory authority.

2 Disciplinary measures shall consist of reprimands, fines of up to CHF 1000 or, in serious cases, removal from office.

3 The right to prosecute is reserved.

Art. 48 C. Implementing provisions / I. Federal law

C. Implementing provisions

I. Federal law

1 The Federal Council issues the provisions on implementation.

2 In particular it regulates:

1.
the registers to be maintained and the information to be recorded;

2. the use of the OASI number in accordance with Article 50c of the Federal Act of 20 December 19461 on the Old-Age and Survivors' Insurance for the purpose of electronic data exchange between official registers of persons;

3. the maintenance of the register;

4.
supervision.2

3 To ensure technically reliable implementation the Federal Council may set minimum requirements for the basic and continuing education and training of personnel in the civil register service and for the function of registrar.

4 It determines the fees charged by the civil register service.

5 It determines the conditions on which it is permissible by electronic means:

1.
to provide civil status information;
2.
to make declarations concerning civil status;
3.
to make notifications and provide extracts from the civil register.3

1 SR 831.10
2 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Register Harmonisation Act of 23 June 2006, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2006 4165; BBl 2006 427).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic Civil Register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 49 C. Implementing provisions / II. Cantonal law

II. Cantonal law

1 The cantons define the civil register districts.

2 They enact the provisions necessary for implementation within the framework of federal law.

3 Such cantonal provisions, with the exception of those concerning remuneration of personnel, are subject to approval by the Confederation.

Art. 50 and 51

Repealed


  Title Two: Legal Entities

  Chapter One: General Provisions

Art. 52 A. Legal personality

A. Legal personality

1 Associations of persons organised as corporate bodies and independent bodies with a specific purpose acquire legal personality on being entered in the commercial register.

2 Public law corporations and bodies, and associations that do not have a commercial purpose do not require registration.1

3 Associations of persons and bodies which pursue an immoral or unlawful purpose may not acquire legal personality.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 12 Dec. 2014 on the Implementation of the 2012 Revision of the Recommendations of the Financial Action Task Force, in force since 1 Jan. 2016 (AS 2015 1389; BBl 2014 605).

Art. 53 B. Legal capacity

B. Legal capacity

Legal entities have all the rights and duties other than those which presuppose intrinsically human attributes, such as gender, age or kinship.

Art. 54 C. Capacity to act / I. Requirements

C. Capacity to act

I. Requirements

Legal entities have capacity to act once the governing bodies required by law and their articles of association have been appointed.

Art. 55 C. Capacity to act / II. Action on behalf of the legal entity

II. Action on behalf of the legal entity

1 The governing bodies express the will of the legal entity.

2 They bind the legal entity by concluding transactions and by their other actions.

3 The governing officers are also personally liable for their wrongful acts.

Art. 561D. Seat

D. Seat

The seat of the legal entity is located where its administration is carried out, unless its articles of association provide otherwise.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 57 E. Dissolution / I. Application of assets

E. Dissolution

I. Application of assets

1 On dissolution of a legal entity, and unless provided otherwise by law, the articles of association, the founding charter or the governing bodies, its assets pass to the state authority (Confederation, canton, commune) to which the entity had been assigned according to its objects.

2 Such assets must be used as far as possible for the original purpose.

3 Where a legal entity is dissolved due to its pursuit of immoral or unlawful objects, the assets pass to the state authority even where contrary provision has been made.1


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 58 E. Dissolution / II. Liquidation

II. Liquidation

The procedure for liquidating the assets of the legal entity is governed by the regulations for cooperatives.

Art. 59 F. Reservation of public law and company law

F. Reservation of public law and company law

1 Public and ecclesiastical corporations and institutions are governed by federal and cantonal public law.

2 Associations of persons which pursue a commercial purpose are subject to the provisions on companies and cooperatives.

3 Common land cooperatives and similar bodies remain subject to the provisions of cantonal law.


  Chapter Two: Associations

Art. 60 A. Formation / I. Corporate group of persons

A. Formation

I. Corporate group of persons

1 Associations with a political, religious, scientific, cultural, charitable, social or other non-commercial purpose acquire legal personality as soon as their intention to exist as a corporate body is apparent from their articles of association.

2 The articles of association must be done in writing and indicate the objects of the association, its resources and its organisation.

Art. 61 A. Formation / II. Entry in the commercial register

II. Entry in the commercial register1

1 Once the articles of association have been ratified and the committee appointed, the association is eligible for entry in the commercial register.

2 The association must be registered if it:

1.
conducts a commercial operation in pursuit of its objects;
2.
is subject to an audit requirement.2

3 The articles of association and a list of committee members must be enclosed with the application for registration.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 62 A. Formation / III. Associations lacking legal personality

III. Associations lacking legal personality

Associations which cannot acquire or have not yet acquired legal personality are treated as simple partnerships.

Art. 63 A. Formation / IV. Relationship between articles of association and the law

IV. Relationship between articles of association and the law

1 Where the articles of association do not provide rules for the association’s organisation or its relationship with its members, the following provisions apply.

2 Mandatory provisions of law cannot be altered by the articles of association.

Art. 64 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 1. Function, convening of meetings

B. Organisation

I. General meeting

1. Function, convening of meetings

1 The general meeting of members is the supreme governing body of the association.

2 The general meeting is called by the committee.

3 General meetings must be convened in accordance with the rules set out in the articles of association and also, as required by law, if one-fifth of the members so request.

Art. 65 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 2. Powers

2. Powers

1 The general meeting of members decides on admission and exclusion of members, appoints the committee and decides all matters which are not reserved to other governing bodies of the association.

2 It supervises the activities of the governing bodies and may at any time dismiss the latter without prejudice to any contractual rights of those dismissed.

3 The right of dismissal exists by law whenever justified by good cause.

Art. 66 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 3. Resolutions / a. Form

3. Resolutions

a. Form

1 Resolutions are passed by the general meeting.

2 The written consent of all members to a proposal is equivalent to a resolution of the general meeting.

Art. 67 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 3. Resolutions / b. Voting rights and majority

b. Voting rights and majority

1 All members have equal voting rights at the general meeting.

2 Resolutions require a majority of the votes of the members present.

3 Resolutions may be taken on matters for which proper notice has not been given only where this is expressly permitted by the articles of association.

Art. 68 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 3. Resolutions / c. Exclusion from voting

c. Exclusion from voting

Each member is by law excluded from voting on any resolution concerning a transaction or dispute between him or her, his or her spouse or a lineal relative on the one hand and the association on the other.

Art. 69 B. Organisation / II. Committee / 1. Rights and duties in general

II. Committee

1. Rights and duties in general1

The committee is entitled and obliged as defined under the articles of association to manage and represent the association.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 69a1B. Organisation / II. Committee / 2. Accounting

2. Accounting

The committee shall maintain the association’s business ledgers. The provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on commercial bookkeeping and accounting apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names) (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 23 Dec. 2011 (Accounting Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 6679; BBl 2008 1589).
2 SR 220

Art. 69b1B. Organisation / III. Auditors

III. Auditors

1 The association must submit its accounts to a full audit by external auditors if two of the following figures are exceeded in two successive business years:

1.
total assets of CHF 10 million;
2.
turnover of CHF 20 million;
3.
average annual total of 50 full-time staff.

The association must submit its accounts to a limited audit by external auditors if a member with personal liability or an obligation to provide further capital so requests.

The provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on external auditors for companies apply mutatis mutandis.

4 In all other cases the articles of association and the general meeting3 are free to make such auditing arrangements as they deem fit.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 SR 220
3 Corrected by the Federal Assembly Drafting Committee (Art. 58 para. 1 ParlA; SR 171.10).

Art. 69c1B. Organisation / IV. Organisational defects

IV. Organisational defects

1 If the association lacks one of the prescribed governing bodies, a member or a creditor may apply to the court for an order that the necessary measures be taken.

2 In particular, the court may set the association a time limit in which to restore the situation required by law and may, if necessary, appoint an administrator.

3 The association bears the cost of such measures. The court may order the association to make an advance payment to the persons appointed.

4 For good cause, the association may apply to the court for the removal of the persons it appointed.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 70 C. Membership / I. Admission, resignation

C. Membership

I. Admission, resignation

1 Members may be admitted at any time.

2 All members have a legal right to resign subject to six months’ notice expiring at the end of the calendar year or, if an administrative period is provided for, at the end of such period.

3 Membership is neither transferable nor heritable.

Art. 711C. Membership / II. Duty to pay subscriptions

II. Duty to pay subscriptions

Members have a duty to pay subscriptions if the articles of association so provide.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 Dec. 2004 (Determination of Subscription Duties for Association Members), in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 2117; BBl 2004 4835 4843).

Art. 72 C. Membership / III. Exclusion

III. Exclusion

1 The articles of association may specify the grounds on which a member may be excluded, but exclusion may also occur without reasons being given.

2 In such cases, the exclusion may not be challenged based on the reasons.

3 Unless the articles of association provide otherwise, exclusion requires a resolution by the members and good cause.

Art. 73 C. Membership / IV. Status of former members

IV. Status of former members

1 Members who resign or are excluded have no claim on the assets of the association.

2 They are liable for the subscriptions due during the period of their membership.

Art. 74 C. Membership / V. Protection of the objects of the association

V. Protection of the objects of the association

No member may be forced against his or her will to accept a change in the objects of the association.

Art. 75 C. Membership / VI. Protection of members

VI. Protection of members

Any member who has not consented to a resolution which infringes the law or the articles of association is entitled by law to challenge such resolution in court within one month of learning thereof.

Art. 75a1Cbis. Liability

Cbis. Liability

The association is liable for its obligations with its assets. Such liability is limited to the assets unless the articles of association provide otherwise.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 Dec. 2004 (Determination of Subscription Duties for Association Members), in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 2117; BBl 2004 4835 4843).

Art. 76 D. Dissolution / I. Manner of dissolution / 1. By resolution

D. Dissolution

I. Manner of dissolution

1. By resolution

The association may be dissolved at any time by resolution of the members.

Art. 77 D. Dissolution / I. Manner of dissolution / 2. By operation of law

2. By operation of law

The association is dissolved by operation of law if it is insolvent or if the committee may no longer be appointed in accordance with the articles of association.

Art. 78 D. Dissolution / I. Manner of dissolution / 3. By court order

3. By court order

Where the objects of the association are unlawful or immoral, the competent authority or an interested party may apply for a court order of dissolution.

Art. 79 D. Dissolution / II. Deletion from the commercial register

II. Deletion from the commercial register

Where the association is registered, the committee or the court shall inform the commercial registrar of the dissolution so that the entry may be deleted.


  Chapter Three: Foundations

Art. 80 A. Formation / I. In general

A. Formation

I. In general

A foundation is established by the endowment of assets for a particular purpose.

Art. 81 A. Formation / II. Form of establishment

II. Form of establishment

1 A foundation may be created by public deed or by testamentary disposition.1

2 The foundation is entered in the commercial register based on its charter and, as the case may be, in accordance with any directions issued by the supervisory authority, and the entry must indicate the members of the board of trustees.

3 The probate authority shall inform the commercial registrar of the creation of the foundation by testamentary disposition.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 82 A. Formation / III. Challenge

III. Challenge

A foundation may be challenged by the founder’s heirs or creditors in the same manner as a gift.

Art. 831B. Organisation / I. In general

B. Organisation

I. In general

The foundation charter shall stipulate the foundation’s governing bodies and the manner in which it is to be administered.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 83a1B. Organisation / II. Bookkeeping

II. Bookkeeping

1 The supreme governing body of the foundation shall maintain its business ledgers. The provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on commercial bookkeeping and accounting apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 23 Dec. 2011 (Accounting Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 6679; BBl 2008 1589).
2 SR 220

Art. 83b1B. Organisation / III. Auditors / 1. Duty of audit and applicable law

III. Auditors

1. Duty of audit and applicable law

1 The board of trustees shall appoint external auditors.

2 The supervisory authority may exempt a foundation from the duty to appoint external auditors. The Federal Council determines the conditions for such exemption.

3 Where there are no special provisions for foundations, the provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on external auditors for public limited companies apply mutatis mutandis.

If the foundation has a duty to carry out a limited audit, the supervisory authority may require a full audit where necessary for a reliable assessment of the foundation’s financial situation.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 SR 220

Art. 83c1B. Organisation / III. Auditors / 2. Supervisory authority

2. Supervisory authority

The external auditors must provide the supervisory authority with a copy of the audit report and all important communications with the foundation.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 83d1B. Organisation / IV. Organisational defects

IV. Organisational defects

1 If the planned system of organisation proves inadequate or if the foundation lacks one of the prescribed governing bodies or one such body is not lawfully constituted, the supervisory authority must take the necessary measures. In particular it may:

1.
set a time limit within which the foundation must restore the legally required situation; or
2.
appoint the body which is lacking or an administrator.

2 In the event that the foundation is unable to organise itself effectively, the supervisory authority shall transfer its assets to another foundation with as similar objects as possible.

3 The foundation bears the cost of such measures. The supervisory authority may require the foundation to make an advance payment to the persons appointed.

4 For good cause, the foundation may request the supervisory authority to remove persons whom it has appointed.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 84 C. Supervision

C. Supervision

1 Foundations are supervised by the state authority (Confederation, canton, commune) to which they are assigned.

1bis The cantons may subject foundations at communal level to supervision at cantonal level.1

2 The supervisory authority must ensure that the foundation’s assets are used for their declared purpose.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 84a1Cbis. Measures in the event of overindebtedness and insolvency

Cbis. Measures in the event of overindebtedness and insolvency

1 Where there are grounds for concern that the foundation is overindebted or will no longer be able to meet its obligations in the longer term, its board of trustees must draw up an interim balance sheet at liquidation values and submit it to the external auditors. If the foundation has no external auditors, the board of trustees must submit the interim balance sheet to the supervisory authority.

2 If the external auditors establish that the foundation is overindebted or will no longer be able to meet its obligations in the longer term, it must submit the interim balance sheet to the supervisory authority.

3 The supervisory authority shall direct the board of trustees to take the necessary measures. If it fails to do so, the supervisory authority takes such measures itself.

4 If necessary, the supervisory authority shall take legal enforcement measures; the provisions of company law on commencement or deferral of compulsory dissolution apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 84b1

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Repealed by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), with effect from 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 851D. Modification of the foundation / I. Reorganisation

D. Modification of the foundation

I. Reorganisation

At the request of the supervisory authority and having heard the board of trustees, the competent federal or cantonal authority may modify the foundation’s organisation where such a step is urgently required in order to preserve the foundation’s assets or safeguard the pursuit of its objects.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 86 D. Modification of the foundation / II. Amendment of objects / 1. Request by the supervisory authority or the board of trustees

II. Amendment of objects

1. Request by the supervisory authority or the board of trustees1

1 At the request of the supervisory authority or the board of trustees, the competent federal or cantonal authority may amend the objects of the foundation where the original objects have altered in significance or effect to such an extent that the foundation has plainly become estranged from the founder’s intentions.2

2 Subject to the same requirements, conditions that are detrimental to the objects of the foundation may be revoked or amended.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 86a1D. Modification of the foundation / II. Amendment of objects / 2. At the founder’s request or in accordance with his testamentary disposition

2. At the founder’s request or in accordance with his testamentary disposition

1 The competent federal or cantonal authority shall amend the objects of the foundation at the founder’s request or in accordance with his or her testamentary disposition, provided that the charter reserves the right to amend the objects and that at least ten years have elapsed since the foundation was established or since the last amendment requested by the founder.

2 Where the foundation pursues public or charitable objects within the meaning of Art. 56 lit. g of the Federal Act of 14 December 1990 on Direct Federal Taxation2, such new objects must likewise be public or charitable.

3 The right to amend a foundation’s objects is neither transferable nor heritable. If the founder is a legal entity, the right extinguishes at the latest 20 years after the establishment of the foundation.

4 Joint founders may only jointly request an amendment of the foundation’s objects.

5 The probate authority shall inform the competent authority of any testamentary disposition concerning the amendment of the foundation’s objects.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 SR 642.11

Art. 86b1D. Modification of the foundation / III. Minor amendments to the charter

III. Minor amendments to the charter

Having heard the board of trustees, the supervisory authority may make minor amendments to the foundation charter provided these are objectively justified and do not impair the rights of any third party.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 87 E. Family and ecclesiastical foundations

E. Family and ecclesiastical foundations

1 Family and ecclesiastical foundations are not subject to supervision, unless otherwise provided by public law.

1bis They are exempt from the duty to appoint external auditors.1

2 Private law disputes are decided by the courts.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 881F. Dissolution and deletion from the register / I. Dissolution by the competent authority

F. Dissolution and deletion from the register

I. Dissolution by the competent authority

1 The competent federal or cantonal authority shall dissolve the foundation on application or of its own accord if:

1.
its objects have become unattainable and the foundation cannot be maintained by modifying its charter; or
2.
its objects have become unlawful or immoral.

2 Family and ecclesiastical foundations shall be dissolved by court order.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 891F. Dissolution and deletion from the register / II. Right to apply for dissolution, deletion from the register

II. Right to apply for dissolution, deletion from the register

1 Any interested party may file an application or bring an action for the dissolution of a foundation.

2 Dissolution must be reported to the commercial registrar so that the entry may be deleted.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 89a1G. Employee benefits schemes

G. Employee benefits schemes2

1 The following additional provisions apply to employee benefits schemes established in accordance with Art. 331 of the Code of Obligations3 in the form of a foundation.4

2 The foundation’s governing bodies must furnish the beneficiaries with the necessary information concerning the foundation’s organisation, activities and assets.

3 If employees pay contributions into the benefits scheme, they are entitled to participate in its administration at least in proportion to their contributions; wherever possible, the employees must elect their representative from among their employer’s personnel.5

4 ...6

5 The beneficiaries may sue the foundation for the distribution of benefits if they have paid contributions into it or if according to the foundation’s regulations they have a legal entitlement to such benefits.

6 For employee benefits schemes providing old age, survivors’ and invalidity pensions which are subject to the Vested Benefits Act of 17 December 19937 (VBA), the provisions of the Federal Act of 25 June 1982 on Occupational Old Age, Survivors’ and Invalidity Pension Provision (OPA)8 on the following matters apply:9

1.10
the definition and principles of occupational pension arrangements and the insurable salary or income (Art. 1, 33a and 33b);
2.11
the requirement of being subject to OASI (Art. 5 para. 1);
3.
the beneficiaries in the case of survivors’ benefits (Art. 20a);
3a.12
the adjustment of the invalidity pension following the equitable division of occupational pensions (Art. 24 para. 5);
3b.13
the provisional continuation of insurance and of the entitlement to benefits on the reduction or termination of the invalidity pension (Art. 26a);
4.14
the adjustment of plan benefits to inflation (Art. 36 para. 2–4);
4a.15 the agreement on a lump sum payment (Art. 37a);
5.
the prescription of claims and the safekeeping of insurance documents (Art. 41);
5a.16
the use, processing and disclosure of the OASI number for the Old Age and Survivors’ Insurance (Art. 48 para. 4, Art. 85a lit. f and Art. 86a para. 2 lit. bbis);
6.
liability (Art. 52);
7.17
the licensing and duties of the supervisory bodies (Art. 52a–52e);
8.18
the integrity and loyalty of the persons responsible, transactions with close associates and conflicts of interest (Art. 51b, 51c and 53a);
9.
partial or total liquidation (Art. 53b–53d);
10.19
termination of contracts (Art. 53e);
11.
the guarantee fund (Art. 56 para. 1 lit. c and para. 2–5, Art. 56a, 57 and 59);
12.20
supervision and oversight (Art. 61–62a and 64–64c);
13.21
...
14.22
financial security (Art. 65 para. 1, 3 and 4, Art. 66 para. 4, Art. 67 and Art. 72a–72g);
15.
transparency (Art. 65a);
16.
reserves (Art. 65b);
17.
insurance contracts between occupational benefits schemes and insurance institutions (Art. 68 para. 3 and 4);
18.
asset management (Art. 71);
19.
legal recourse (Art. 73 and 74);
20.
criminal provisions (Art. 75–79);
21.
buy-in (Art. 79b);
22.
insurable salary and income (Art. 79c);
23.
provision of information to insured persons (Art. 86b).23

7 For employee benefits schemes providing old age, survivors’ and invalidity pensions but which are not subject to the VBA, such as employer-sponsored welfare funds with discretionary benefits and financing foundations, only the following provisions of the OPA apply:

1.
the requirement of being subject to OASI (Art. 5 para. 1);
2.
the use, processing and disclosure of the OASI number (Art. 48 para. 4, 85a let. f and 86a para. 2 let. bbis);
3.
liability (Art. 52);
4.
the licensing and duties of the auditors (Art. 52a, 52b and 52c para. 1 let. a–d and g, 2 and 3);
5.
the integrity and loyalty of the persons responsible, transactions with close associates and conflicts of interest (Art. 51b, 51c and 53a);
6.
total liquidation (Art. 53c);
7.
supervision and oversight (Art. 61–62a and 64–64b);
8.
legal recourse (Art. 73 and 74);
9.
criminal provisions (Art. 75–79);
10.
tax treatment (Art. 80, 81 para. 1 and 83).24

8 For employee benefits schemes under paragraph 7, the following provisions also apply:

1.
they manage their assets so that security, an adequate yield on investments and the required liquidity for their tasks are guaranteed.
2.
the supervisory authority shall rule on partial liquidation matters related to employer-sponsored welfare funds with discretionary benefits at the request of the foundation board.
3.
they shall respect the principles of equal treatment and fairness mutatis mutandis.25

1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 21 March 1958, in force since 1 July 1958 (AS 1958 379; BBl 1956 II 825). Originally Art. 89bis, until the entry into force of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
3 SR 220
4 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
5 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
6 Repealed by No III of the FA of 21 June 1996, with effect from 1 Jan. 1997 (AS 1996 3067; BBl 1996 I 564 580).
7 SR 831.42
8 SR 831.40
9 Amended by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
10 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Measures to Facilitate the Employment of Older Persons), in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 4427; BBl 2007 5669).
11 Amended by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
12 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 18 March 2011 (6th InvI Revision, first set of measures) (AS 2011 5659; BBl 2010 1817). Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
13 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
14 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 4635; BBl 2003 6399).
15 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
16 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 23 June 2006 (New OASI Insurance Number), in force since 1 Dec. 2007 (AS 2007 5259; BBl 2006 501).
17 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
18 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
19 Amended by No II of the FA of 20 Dec. 2006 (Change of Employee Benefits Scheme), in force since 1 May 2007 (AS 2007 1803 1805; BBl 2005 5941 5953).
20 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
21 Repealed by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
22 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 17 Dec. 2010 (Funding of benefits schemes for public corporations), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3385; BBl 2008 8411).
23 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1982 on Old Age, Survivors’ and Disability Insurance (AS 1983 797; BBl 1976 I 149). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 3 Oct. 2003 (1st revision of OPA), No 6, 7, 10–12, 14 (with the exception of Art. 66 para. 4), 15, 17–20 and 23 in force since 1 April 2004, No 3–5, 8, 9, 13, 14 (Art. 66 para. 4) and 16 in force since 1 Jan. 2005, No 1, 21 and 22 in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2004 1677; BBl 2000 2637).
24 Inserted by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
25 Inserted by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).


  Title Twobis:2  3  Collective Assets

Art. 89b A. No management

A. No management

1 In the case of a public collection for charitable purposes, if no arrangements have been made for the management or use of the collective assets, the competent authority shall take the required measures.

2 It may appoint an administrator for the collective assets or allocate the assets to an association or a foundation with objects that are as similar as possible.

3 The administrator is subject, mutatis mutandis, to the regulations on deputyships in context of adult protection.

Art. 89c B. Jurisdiction B. Jurisdiction

B. Jurisdiction

1 The canton in which the main part of the collective is managed has jurisdiction.

2 Unless the canton provides otherwise, the authority that supervises the foundations has jurisdiction.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Corrected by the Federal Assembly Drafting Committee (Art. 58 Abs. 1 ParlA; SR 171.10).3 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

  Part Two: Family Law

  Division One: Marital Law

  Title Three:1  Marriage

  Chapter One: Engagement

Art. 90 A. Betrothal

A. Betrothal

1 Engagement is constituted by mutual promises to marry.

2 Minors incur no obligation through betrothal without the consent of their legal representative.1

3 Engagement does not give rise to any actionable obligation to marry.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 91 B. Ending the engagement / I. Gifts

B. Ending the engagement

I. Gifts

1 If the engagement is ended, the engaged parties may demand the return of gifts made to each other, with the exception of the usual occasional gifts, unless the engagement has ended as a result of death.

2 Where such gifts are no longer at hand, restitution is subject to the provisions governing unjust enrichment.

Art. 92 B. Ending the engagement / II. Duty to contribute

II. Duty to contribute

If one of the engaged couple has in good faith incurred expense in anticipation of the marriage ceremony and the engagement is then ended, that party may claim a reasonable contribution from the other where this is not inequitable in the overall circumstances.

Art. 93 B. Ending the engagement / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

Claims arising from the engagement prescribe one year from the ending of the engagement.


  Chapter Two: Requirements for Marriage

Art. 94 A. Capacity to marry

A. Capacity to marry

1 To be able to marry, the prospective spouses must have reached 18 years of age and have the capacity of judgement.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), with effect from 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 95 B. Impediments / I. Kinship

B. Impediments

I. Kinship1

1 Marriage between lineal relatives and between siblings or half-siblings, whether related to each other by parentage or adoption, is prohibited.2

2 Adoption does not remove the impediment to marriage constituted by kinship between the adopted child and his issue on the one hand and his adoptive family on the other.


1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Civil Partnerships Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).
2 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Civil Partnerships Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 96 B. Impediments / II. Previous marriage

II. Previous marriage

A person wishing to remarry must prove that any previous marriage has been annulled or dissolved.


  Chapter Three: Preparation and Wedding Ceremony

Art. 97 A. General principles

A. General principles

1 The wedding ceremony takes place in the presence of the civil registrar after the preparatory procedure has been taken.

2 The engaged couple may marry in the civil register district of their choice.

3 No religious wedding ceremony is permitted prior to the civil ceremony.

Art. 97a1Abis. Circumvention of the legislation on foreign nationals

Abis. Circumvention of the legislation on foreign nationals

1 The civil registrar shall not consider a request for marriage if the bride or groom clearly has no intention of living together but wishes to circumvent the provisions on the admission and residence of foreign nationals.

2 The civil registrar shall grant a hearing to the prospective spouses and may obtain information from other authorities or third parties.


1 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 on Foreign Nationals, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).

Art. 98 B. Preparatory procedure / I. Request

B. Preparatory procedure

I. Request

1 The preparatory procedure is carried out at the civil register office at the domicile of the bride or groom at their request.

2 They must appear in person. If they may show that they clearly cannot be required to do so, the preparatory procedure may be carried out in writing.

3 They must furnish documentary proof of identity and personally declare at the civil register office that they satisfy the legal requirements for marriage; they must also produce any necessary consent.

4 Engaged couples who are not Swiss citizens must prove during the preparatory procedure that they are lawfully resident in Switzerland.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 12 June 2009 (Prevention of Marriages in the event of Unlawful Residence), in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 3057; BBl 2008 2467 2481).

Art. 99 B. Preparatory procedure / II. Conduct and completion of the preparatory procedure

II. Conduct and completion of the preparatory procedure

1 The civil register office verifies that:

1.
the request has been duly submitted;
2.
the identity of the engaged couple has been established; and
3.1
the requirements for marriage are satisfied, and in particular whether there are any circumstances that suggest that the request clearly does not reflect the free will of the engaged couple.

2 Provided these requirements are fulfilled, the civil register office shall inform the betrothed parties that the preparatory procedure has been completed and of the legally prescribed time limits for holding the wedding ceremony.2

3 After consulting the engaged couple and in conformity with cantonal regulations, the civil register office sets the date of the wedding ceremony or, upon request, authorises that it may be conducted in another civil register district.

4 The civil register office must inform the competent authority of the identity of any engaged couple who have not proven that they are lawfully resident in Switzerland.3


1 Amended by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 28 Sept. 2018, in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2019 3813; BBl 2017 6769).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 12 June 2009 (Prevention of Marriages in the event of Unlawful Residence), in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 3057; BBl 2008 2467 2481).

Art. 1001B. Preparatory procedure / III. Time limits

III. Time limits

The wedding ceremony may take place within three months following notification of completion of the preparatory procedure.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 28 Sept. 2018, in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2019 3813; BBl 2017 6769).

Art. 101 C. Wedding ceremony / I. Venue

C. Wedding ceremony

I. Venue

1 The wedding ceremony takes place at the wedding venue of the civil register district chosen by the engaged couple.

2 Where the preparatory procedure was conducted in a different civil register district, the engaged couple must produce a marriage licence.

3 If the engaged couple show that they cannot reasonably be required to appear at the official venue, the wedding may take place at another location.

Art. 102 C. Wedding ceremony / II. Form

II. Form

1 A wedding is a public ceremony that takes place in the presence of two adult witnesses who are capable of judgement.1

2 The civil registrar asks the bride and groom individually whether each wishes to marry the other.

3 If both answer in the affirmative, they are pronounced married by mutual consent.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 103 D. Implementing provisions

D. Implementing provisions

The Federal Council and, within the scope of their powers, the cantons shall enact the necessary implementing provisions.


  Chapter Four: Annulment of Marriage

Art. 104 A. General principle

A. General principle

A marriage contracted before a civil registrar may be annulled only on one of the grounds provided in this chapter.

Art. 105 B. Annulment not subject to a time limit / I. Grounds

B. Annulment not subject to a time limit

I. Grounds

Grounds for annulment are:

1.
that one of the spouses1 was already married at the time of the wedding and the previous marriage had not been dissolved by divorce or by the death of the previous spouse;
2.
that one of the spouses lacked capacity of judgement at the time of the wedding and has not regained such capacity since;
3.2
that the marriage was prohibited due to kinship;
4.3
one of the spouses has no intention of living with the other, but wishes to circumvent the provisions on the admission and residence of foreign nationals;
5.4
a spouse has not married of his or her own free will;
6.5
one of the spouses is a minor, unless the continuation of the marriage is in the overriding interest of this spouse.

1 Footnote relevant to German text only.
2 Amended by No 8 of the Civil Partnerships Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).
3 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 on Foreign Nationals, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).
4 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
5 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 106 B. Annulment not subject to a time limit / II. Action for annulment

II. Action for annulment

1 An action for annulment is brought ex officio by the competent cantonal authority at the domicile of the spouses; in addition, any interested party is entitled to bring such action. Provided this is compatible with their duties, the federal and cantonal authorities shall contact the authority competent for the action if they have reason to believe that there are grounds for annulment.1

2 If the marriage has been otherwise dissolved, the authority may no longer seek an annulment ex officio; however, any interested party may seek a declaration of annulment.

3 An action for annulment may be brought at any time.


1 Last sentence inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 107 C. Annulment subject to a time limit / I. Grounds

C. Annulment subject to a time limit

I. Grounds

A spouse may seek a declaration of annulment if he or she:

1.
temporarily lacked capacity of judgement at the time of the wedding;
2.
married in error, whether because he or she did not wish to marry at all or did not wish to marry the other person;
3.
contracted the marriage because he or she was intentionally deceived with regard to essential personal attributes of the other spouse;
4.1
...

1 Repealed by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced– Marriages, with effect from 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 108 C. Annulment subject to a time limit / II. Action for annulment

II. Action for annulment

1 An action for annulment must be brought within six months of learning of the grounds for annulment or of the date on which the threat ceased, but in any event within five years of the wedding.

2 The right to bring an action for annulment does not pass to heirs; however, an heir may continue an action already brought.

Art. 109 D. Effects of judgment

D. Effects of judgment

1 A marriage does not become invalid until a court has declared it annulled; prior to such judgment it has all the effects of a valid marriage with the exception of claims under inheritance law, which in any event the surviving spouse loses.

2 The provisions governing divorce apply mutatis mutandis to the effects of a court declaration of annulment on the spouses and their children.

3 The presumption of paternity in favour of the husband does not apply if the marriage is annulled because it served to circumvent the provisions on the admission and residence of foreign nationals.1


1 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 on Foreign Nationals, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).

Art. 1101

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Title Four:2  Divorce and Separation

  Chapter One: Requirements for Divorce

Art. 1111A. Divorce by joint request / I. Comprehensive agreement

A. Divorce by joint request

I. Comprehensive agreement

1 Where the spouses jointly request divorce and submit a comprehensive agreement on the consequences of the divorce along with any necessary documents and with joint applications in respect of the children, the court shall hear the spouses both separately and together. The hearing may comprise two or more sessions.

2 If the court is persuaded that desire for divorce and the agreement are the product of free will and careful reflection and that the agreement with the applications in respect of the children may be approved, the court shall issue the divorce decree.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2009 (Reflection Period in Divorce Proceedings by joint Application), in force since 1 Feb. 2010 (AS 2010 281; BBl 2008 1959 1975).

Art. 112 A. Divorce by joint request / II. Partial agreement

II. Partial agreement

1 The spouses may jointly request divorce and ask the court to decide matters on which they cannot reach agreement.

2 As in the case of comprehensive agreement, the court shall hear the parties on those consequences of the divorce on which they have reached agreement and on their request that the remaining consequences be decided by the court.

3 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 1131

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 1141B. Divorce at the petition of one spouse / I. After living apart

B. Divorce at the petition of one spouse

I. After living apart

A spouse may petition for divorce if, at the time the petition is filed or at the time the divorce request is replaced by a divorce petition, the spouses have lived apart for at least two years.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 (Separation Period in Divorce Law), in force since 1 June 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).

Art. 1151B. Divorce at the petition of one spouse / II. Irretrievable breakdown

II. Irretrievable breakdown

Prior to the expiry of the two-year period, a spouse may petition for divorce if the marriage has irretrievably broken down for compelling reasons for which he or she is not responsible.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 (Separation Period in Divorce Law), in force since 1 June 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).

Art. 1161

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Chapter Two: Separation

Art. 117 A. Requirements and procedure

A. Requirements and procedure

1 Spouses may petition for a separation decree subject to the same requirements as apply to divorce.

2 ...1

3 The right to petition for divorce is unaffected by the separation decree.


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 118 B. Effects of separation

B. Effects of separation

1 By operation of the law, the separation decree implements the marital property separation of property regime.

2 Otherwise, the provisions governing measures for the protection of the marital union apply mutatis mutandis.


  Chapter Three: Consequences of Divorce

Art. 1191A. Civil status of divorced spouses

A. Civil status of divorced spouses

1 A spouse who has changed his or her surname on marriage retains that surname following divorce; he or she may at any time declare before the civil registrar the wish to revert to the name by which he or she was known prior to the marriage.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 120 B. Marital property law and inheritance law

B. Marital property law and inheritance law

1 The provisions of marital property law apply to the division of marital property.

2 Divorced spouses have no rights of inheritance in relation to each other and may not make claims based on testamentary dispositions made before their divorce proceedings were made pending.

Art. 121 C. Family home

C. Family home

1 If a spouse must remain in the family home because of the children or for other compelling reasons, the court may transfer the rights and obligations under the tenancy agreement to that spouse provided this is not inequitable for the other.

2 The previous tenant is jointly and severally liable for payment of the rent up to the date on which the tenancy ends or may be terminated pursuant to the tenancy agreement or by law, but for a maximum period of two years; if an action is brought to recover rent due, he or she is entitled to set off the amount paid in instalments equal to the amount of the monthly rent against any maintenance payments owed to the other spouse.

3 If the home belongs to the family of one of the spouses, the court may, on the same conditions, grant the other spouse a right of residence for a fixed term in return for reasonable compensation or set-off against maintenance payments. Where new and compelling reasons so require, such right of residence may be restricted or revoked.

Art. 1221D. Occupational pensions / I. Principle

D. Occupational pensions

I. Principle

In the event of divorce, any occupational pension assets accrued during the marriage up to the point at which divorce proceedings commence are divided equitably.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 1231D. Occupational pensions / II. Equitable division of termination benefits

II. Equitable division of termination benefits

1 Termination benefits including vested benefits and early withdrawals for purchasing owner-occupied property are divided equally.

2 Paragraph 1 does not apply to one-off contributions from individual property in accordance with the law.

3 The termination benefits to be divided are calculated on the basis of Articles 15–17 and 22a or 22b of the Vested Benefits Act of 17 December 19932.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 831.42

Art. 1241D. Occupational pensions / III. Equitable division of invalidity pension prior to statutory retirement age

III. Equitable division of invalidity pension prior to statutory retirement age

1 If, at the point at which divorce proceedings commence, a spouse is drawing an invalidity pension prior to the statutory retirement age, the amount to which he or she would be entitled under Article 2 paragraph 1ter of the Vested Benefits Act of 17 December 19932 following cancellation of the invalidity pension counts as the termination benefits.

2 The provisions on the equitable division of termination benefits apply mutatis mutandis.

3 The Federal Council determines in which cases the amount under paragraph 1 may not be applied in the division because there has been a reduction due to over-compensation.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 831.42

Art. 124a1D. Occupational pensions / IV. Equitable division in the case of invalidity pensions after statutory retirement age and in the case of retirement pensions

IV. Equitable division in the case of invalidity pensions after statutory retirement age and in the case of retirement pensions

1 If, at the point at which divorce proceedings commence, a spouse is drawing an invalidity pension after the statutory retirement age or drawing a retirement pension, the court decides at its own discretion how the pension is to be divided. In doing so it primarily takes into account the duration of the marriage and the pension requirements of each spouse.

2 The share of the pension awarded to the spouse entitled thereto is converted into a life-long pension. This is paid to the entitled spouse by the liable spouse’s occupational pension fund or is transferred to the entitled spouse’s own occupational pension fund.

3 The Federal Council regulates:

1.
the actuarial conversion of the share of the pension into a life-long pension;
2.
the procedure in cases in which the retirement benefits are postponed or the invalidity pension is reduced due to over-compensation.

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124b1D. Occupational pensions / V. Exceptions

V. Exceptions

1 The spouses may, in an agreement on the consequences of the divorce, agree not to divide the assets equally or not to divide them at all if there are sufficient retirement pension and invalidity pension funds otherwise.

2 The court may award the entitled spouse less than half of the termination benefits or rule that they should not be divided if good cause exists. Good cause exists above all when equal division would be unreasonable:

1.
in view of the division of marital property or the economic circumstances following divorce;
2.
in view of the pension requirements, in particular with regard to the difference in age between the spouses.

3 The court may award the entitled spouse more than half of the termination benefits if he or she cares for joint children following the divorce and the liable spouse continues to have sufficient retirement and invalidity pension assets.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124c1D. Occupational pensions / VI. Offset of mutual entitlements

VI. Offset of mutual entitlements

1 The spouses’ mutual entitlements to termination benefits or a share of a pension are offset. The pension entitlement is offset before the share of the pension awarded to the entitled spouse is converted into a life-long pension.

2 Termination benefits may only be offset against a share of a pension if the spouses and the occupational pension institutions agree.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124d1D. Occupational pensions / VII. Unreasonableness

VII. Unreasonableness

If, having considered the pension requirements of both spouses, an equitable division of occupational pension assets is unreasonable, the liable spouse shall owe the entitled spouse a lump sum payment.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124e1D. Occupational pensions / VIII. Impossibility

VIII. Impossibility

1 If the equitable division of pension fund assets is not possible, the liable spouse shall owe the entitled spouse adequate compensation in the form of a lump sum payment or as a pension.

2 A Swiss judgment may be amended at the request of the liable spouse if pension entitlements existing abroad have been offset by adequate compensation pursuant to paragraph 1 and such pension entitlements are then divided up in a foreign decision that is binding on the foreign party liable to pay pension contributions.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 125 E. Post-marital maintenance / I. Requirements

E. Post-marital maintenance

I. Requirements

1 If a spouse cannot reasonably be expected to provide for his or her own maintenance, including an appropriate level of retirement provision, the other spouse must pay a suitable contribution.

2 In deciding whether such a contribution is to be made and, if so, in what amount and for how long, the following factors in particular must be considered:

1.
the division of duties during the marriage;
2.
the duration of the marriage;
3.
the standard of living during the marriage;
4.
the age and health of the spouses;
5.
the income and assets of the spouses;
6.
the extent and duration of child care still required of the spouses;
7.
the vocational training and career prospects of the spouses and the likely cost of reintegration into working life;
8.
expectancy of federal old age and survivor’s insurance benefits and of occupational or other private or state pensions, including the expected proceeds of any division of withdrawal benefits.

3 Exceptionally, a maintenance contribution may be denied or reduced if it would clearly be inequitable, particularly because the spouse otherwise entitled to receive such contribution:

1.
has grossly neglected his or her duty to contribute to the maintenance of the family;
2.
has wilfully brought about his or her own indigence;
3.
has committed a serious criminal offence against the other spouse or a person close to him or her.
Art. 126 E. Post-marital maintenance / II. Modalities of maintenance contributions

II. Modalities of maintenance contributions

1 The court shall fix an amount to be paid periodically by way of maintenance contribution and set the date on which the duty of maintenance commences.

2 Where justified in specific circumstances, a lump sum settlement may be ordered instead of regular payments.

3 The court may attach conditions to the maintenance contribution.

Art. 127 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 1. Special terms

III. Regular payments

1. Special terms

The spouses may wholly or in part exclude any alteration of the regular maintenance payments stipulated in the agreement.

Art. 128 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 2. Adjustment for inflation

2. Adjustment for inflation

The court may direct that the maintenance contribution will automatically increase or decrease depending on specified changes in the cost of living.

Art. 129 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 3. Adjustment by court order

3. Adjustment by court order

1 In the event of a substantial and enduring change in circumstances, the periodic maintenance payments may be reduced, cancelled or suspended for a certain time; an improvement in the circumstances of the party entitled to maintenance may be taken into account only if the payments stipulated in the divorce decree provided sufficient maintenance.

2 The party entitled to maintenance may request that the payments be adjusted in line with future inflation if the income of the other party has increased unexpectedly since the divorce.

3 Within five years of the divorce, the party entitled to maintenance may request that payments be ordered or increased provided the divorce decree states that it was not possible at that time to order sufficient maintenance payments and provided the economic circumstances of the party obliged to pay maintenance have since improved.

Art. 130 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 4. Expiry by law

4. Expiry by law

1 The duty to pay maintenance expires on the death of either the receiving party or the paying party.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, it likewise expires on the remarriage of the party entitled to receive maintenance.

Art. 1311E. Post-marital maintenance / IV. Enforcement / 1. Enforcement assistance

IV. Enforcement

1. Enforcement assistance

1 Where the liable party fails to pay maintenance, an official agency designated by cantonal law shall on request, in an appropriate way and usually without charge, assist the party entitled to maintenance to enforce his or her claims.

2 The Federal Council determines the terms of enforcement assistance.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 131a1E. Post-marital maintenance / IV. Enforcement / 2. Advance payments

2. Advance payments

1 Public law may provide for advance payments to be made should the liable person fail to make the necessary maintenance payments.

2 If the state authority makes maintenance payments to the entitled person, the maintenance entitlement with all rights is assigned to the state authority.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 132 E. Post-marital maintenance / IV. Enforcement / 3. Directions to debtors and posting security

3. Directions to debtors and posting security1

1 If the party obliged to pay maintenance fails to do so, the court may order his debtors to make payment in whole or in part to the party entitled to maintenance.

2 If the party obliged to pay maintenance persistently fails to do so, or if there are grounds to suspect that said party is preparing to abscond or is dissipating or concealing his assets, the court may order him to post appropriate security for future maintenance contributions.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 1331F. Children / I. Parental rights and obligations

F. Children

I. Parental rights and obligations

1 The court regulates parental rights and obligations in accordance with the provisions on the legal effects of the parent-child relationship. In particular it regulates:

1.
parental responsibility;
2.
residence;
3.
contact (Art. 273) or the sharing of parenting duties; and
4.
child maintenance contributions.

2 It shall consider all circumstances important to the child's best interests. It shall take account of a joint proposal by the parents and, if feasible, the opinion of the child.

3 It may order that the child maintenance contribution continue to be paid after the child reaches the age of majority.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 134 F. Children / II. Change of circumstances

II. Change of circumstances

1 At the request of either parent, the child or the child protection authority, new arrangements for parental responsibility shall be made by the child protection authority provided this is in the child’s best interests due to a substantial change in circumstances.

2 The requirements for the modification of other parental rights and -obligations are governed by the provisions on the effects of the parent-child relationship.1

3 If the parents agree, the child protection authority reassesses parental responsibility, residence and approves a child support agreement. In the other cases, the court competent to modify the divorce decree decides.2

4 If the court is required to decide on the modification of parental responsibility, residence or the child maintenance contribution for a minor child, it shall if necessary also reassess contact or sharing of parenting duties; in the other cases, the child protection authority shall decide on the modification of contact or sharing of parenting duties.3


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 1351491

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 150–158

Repealed


  Title Five:3  General Effects of Marriage

Art. 159 A. Marital union; rights and duties of spouses

A. Marital union; rights and duties of spouses

1 The wedding ceremony binds the spouses in marital union.

2 They mutually undertake to strive to safeguard the interests of the marital union and to care jointly for the children.

3 They owe each other loyalty and support.

Art. 1601B. Surname

B. Surname

1 Each spouse retains his or her surname.

2 However, the prospective spouses may declare to the civil registrar that they wish bear the surname of the bride or the groom as the family surname.

3 If the prospective spouses retain their surnames, they decide which of the surnames their children will bear. In justified cases, the civil registrar may relieve the prospective spouses of this obligation.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 1611C. Cantonal and communal citizenship

C. Cantonal and communal citizenship

Each spouse retains his or her cantonal and communal citizenship.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 162 D. Marital home

D. Marital home

The spouses jointly decide where to establish the marital home.

Art. 163 E. Maintenance of the family / I. In general

E. Maintenance of the family

I. In general

1 The spouses jointly provide for the proper maintenance of the family, each according to his or her ability.

2 They agree on the contributions each of them will make, notably by providing money, looking after the household, caring for the children or supporting the other’s career or business.

3 In so doing they take due account of the needs of the marital union and of their own personal circumstances.

Art. 164 E. Maintenance of the family / II. Allowance for personal use

II. Allowance for personal use

1 A spouse who looks after the household, cares for the children or supports the career or business of the other spouse is entitled to receive from the latter a reasonable allowance for his or her own personal use.

2 When determining said allowance, account must be taken of the personal resources of the receiving spouse and the need to provide conscientiously for the family, career and business.

Art. 165 E. Maintenance of the family / III. Extraordinary contributions by one spouse

III. Extraordinary contributions by one spouse

1 Where the contribution made by one spouse to the other’s career or business is significantly greater than required in the light of the latter’s contribution to the maintenance of the family, he or she is entitled to reasonable compensation.

2 The same applies if a spouse has contributed significantly more of his or her own income or assets to the maintenance of the family than he or she was obliged to contribute.

3 However, a spouse is not entitled to compensation if such extraordinary contribution was made under a work, loan or partnership agreement or on the basis of some other legal relationship.

Art. 166 F. Representation of the marital union

F. Representation of the marital union

1 While living together under the same roof, both spouses represent the marital union with regard to the day-to-day needs of the family.

2 A spouse may represent the marital union with regard to the other needs of the family only if:

1.
authorised so to do by the other spouse or by court order;
2.
the interests of the marital union brook no delay and the other spouse is unable to consent due to illness, absence or other similar reasons.

3 Each spouse is personally liable for his or her own actions and, to the extent that these do not exceed his or her powers of representation in a manner apparent to third parties, also renders the other spouse jointly and severally liable for such actions.

Art. 167 G. Spouses’ career or business

G. Spouses’ career or business

In the choice and pursuit of his or her career or business, each spouse must have due regard to the other and to the welfare of the marital union.

Art. 168 H. Transactions by the spouses / I. In general

H. Transactions by the spouses

I. In general

Each spouse may enter into transactions with the other or with third parties unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 169 H. Transactions by the spouses / II. Family home

II. Family home

1 A spouse may terminate a tenancy agreement, alienate the family home or limit the rights in respect of the family home by other transactions only with the express consent of the other.

2 If the spouse cannot obtain such consent or it is withheld without good cause, he or she may petition the court.

Art. 170 J. Duty to inform

J. Duty to inform

1 Each spouse has the right to demand information from the other concerning his or her income, assets and debts.

2 At the request of one spouse, the court may order the other spouse or a third party to furnish the information required and to produce the necessary documents.

3 This does not apply to any information held by lawyers, solicitors, doctors, clergy and their auxiliary staff which is subject to professional confidentiality.

Art. 171 K. Protection of the marital union / I. Counselling agencies

K. Protection of the marital union

I. Counselling agencies

The cantons must ensure that spouses experiencing marital problems may seek help individually or jointly from marriage guidance or family counselling agencies.

Art. 172 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 1. In general

II. Court measures

1. In general

1 If a spouse fails to fulfil his or her duties to the family or if the spouses disagree on matters of importance to the marital union, they may apply jointly or separately to the court for mediation.

2 The court reminds the spouses of their duties and attempts to settle their differences; if the spouses consent, experts may be consulted or they may be referred to a marriage guidance or family counselling agency.

3 If necessary, at the request of one spouse the court will take the steps envisaged by law. The provision governing the protection of the person from violence, threats or harassment applies mutatis mutandis.1


1 Second sentence inserted by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats or Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 173 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 2. While living together / a. Financial contributions

2. While living together

a. Financial contributions

1 At the request of one spouse, the court determines the amounts to be paid for the maintenance of the family.

2 Likewise, at the request of one spouse, it determines the allowance payable to the spouse who looks after the household, cares for the children or supports the other’s career or business.

3 Payments may be claimed for the future and for one year preceding the request.

Art. 174 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 2. While living together / b. Revocation of powers of representation

b. Revocation of powers of representation

1 If a spouse exceeds his or her power to represent the marital union or proves incapable of exercising it, at the other spouse’s request the court may revoke such power in whole or in part.

2 The spouse making such request may inform third parties of the revocation only by communications in person.

3 The revocation is effective towards third parties acting in good faith only if it has been made public by order of the court.

Art. 175 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 3. Suspension of joint household / a. Grounds

3. Suspension of joint household

a. Grounds

A spouse is entitled to suspend the joint household for as long as his or her personality rights or financial security or the welfare of the family are seriously endangered by living together.

Art. 176 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 3. Suspension of joint household / b. Arrangements for living apart

b. Arrangements for living apart

1 If the suspension of the joint household is justified, at the request of one spouse the court will:

1.1
determine the maintenance paid to any children and the other spouse;
2.
issue directions on the use of the home and the household effects;
3.
order a separation of property where justified in the circumstances.

2 A spouse may also make such request if living together is impossible, in particular because the other spouse refuses to do so without good cause.

3 If the spouses have minor children, the court must take the necessary steps in accordance with the provisions governing the legal effects of the parent-child relationship.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 176a1K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 4. Enforcement / a. Enforcement assistance and advance payments

4. Enforcement

a. Enforcement assistance and advance payments

The provisions governing enforcement assistance and advance payments on divorce and consequent to the parent-child relationship apply.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 177 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 4. Enforcement / b. Directions to debtors

b. Directions to debtors1

If a spouse fails to fulfil his or her duty to maintain the family, the court may order his or her debtors to make payment in full or in part to the other spouse.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 178 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 5. Restriction of power to dispose of assets

5. Restriction of power to dispose of assets

1 To the extent required to ensure the family’s financial security or fulfilment of a financial obligation arising from the marital union, at the request of one spouse the court may make the power to dispose of certain assets conditional on its consent.

2 The court orders the appropriate protective measures.

3 If it prohibits a spouse from disposing of land it must have a note to this effect recorded in the land register.

Art. 1791K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 6. Change of circumstances

6. Change of circumstances2

1 If there is a change in circumstances, at the request of either spouse the court shall modify the measures or revoke the same if they are no longer justified. The provisions on a change of circumstances in divorce cases apply mutatis mutandis.3

2 If the spouses resume living together, the measures ordered in connection with living apart lapse, with the exception of the separation of property and the child protection measures.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 1801

Repealed


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).


  Title Six:4  Marital Property Law

  Chapter One: General Provisions

Art. 181 A. Ordinary property regime

A. Ordinary property regime

Spouses are subject to the provisions governing participation in acquired property provided they have not agreed otherwise in a marital agreement and provided no extraordinary marital property regime has come into effect.

Art. 182 B. Marital agreement / I. Choice of regime

B. Marital agreement

I. Choice of regime

1 A marital agreement may be concluded before or after the wedding.

2 The prospective spouses or the spouses may choose, set aside or modify their marital property regime only within the limits of the law.

Art. 183 B. Marital agreement / II. Capacity to enter into an agreement

II. Capacity to enter into an agreement

1 A person wishing to enter into a marital agreement must have capacity of judgement.

2 Minors, or adults subject to a deputyship that covers the conclusion of a marital agreement require the consent of their legal representative.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 184 B. Marital agreement / III. Form of the agreement

III. Form of the agreement

The marital agreement must be executed as a public deed and signed by the parties and, where applicable, by the legal representative.

Art. 185 C. Extraordinary property regime / I. At the request of one spouse / 1. By court order

C. Extraordinary property regime

I. At the request of one spouse

1. By court order

1 At the request of one spouse, the court shall order a separation of property where there is good cause to do so.

2 In particular, good cause exists:

1.
if the other spouse is overindebted or his or her share of the common property has been distrained;
2.
if the other spouse is endangering the interests of the applicant or of the marital union;
3.
if the other spouse unreasonably withholds the consent required for the disposal of common property;
4.
if the other spouse refuses to provide the applicant with information concerning his or her income, assets and debts or concerning common property;
5.
if the other spouse permanently lacks capacity of judgement.

3 Where a spouse permanently lacks capacity of judgement, his or her legal representative may likewise request separation of property for this reason.

Art. 1861C. Extraordinary property regime / I. At the request of one spouse / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 187 C. Extraordinary property regime / I. At the request of one spouse / 3. Revocation

3. Revocation

1 The spouses may at any time reinstate their previous marital property regime or implement a new one by marital agreement.

2 If the reason for the separation of property no longer exists, at the request of one spouse the court may direct that the previous marital property regime be reinstated.

Art. 188 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 1. Bankruptcy

II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint

1. Bankruptcy

If a spouse living under the community of property regime is declared bankrupt, separation of property takes effect ex officio.

Art. 189 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 2. Distraint / a. By court order

2. Distraint

a. By court order

If a spouse living under the community of property regime is pursued for a personal debt and his or her share of the common property is distrained, the debt enforcement supervisory authority may request that the court order a separation of property.

Art. 190 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 2. Distraint / b. Request

b. Request1

1 The request is directed against both spouses.

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 191 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 3. Revocation

3. Revocation

1 If the creditors have been satisfied, at the request of one spouse the court may order the restoration of the community of property regime.

2 By marital agreement, the spouses may opt for the participation in acquired property regime.

Art. 192 C. Extraordinary property regime / III. Liquidation of the previous marital property regime

III. Liquidation of the previous marital property regime

Whenever the separation of property regime comes into effect, the liquidation of the previous regime is governed by the provisions applicable to the latter, unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 193 D. Protection of creditors

D. Protection of creditors

1 The establishment, variation or liquidation of a marital property regime may not have the effect of releasing an asset with which one of the spouses or the marital union had hitherto been liable to creditors from such liability.

2 If such an asset has been transferred to the other spouse, the latter must pay the debt but may be released from such liability to the extent that he or she may prove that the asset received is worth less than the debt.

Art. 1941E. ...

E. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 195 F. Management of one spouse’s assets by the other

F. Management of one spouse’s assets by the other

1 Where one spouse expressly or tacitly entrusts management of his or her assets to the other, the provisions governing agency apply unless otherwise agreed.

2 The provisions governing settlement of debts between spouses are reserved.

Art. 195a G. Inventory

G. Inventory

1 Each spouse may at any time require the other’s cooperation in drawing up an inventory of their joint assets in the form of a public deed.

2 Such an inventory is deemed accurate if made within one year of the inclusion of such assets under the regime.


  Chapter Two: Statutory Marital Property Regime of Participation in Acquired Property

Art. 196 A. Ownership / I. Categories

A. Ownership

I. Categories

The marital property regime of participation in acquired property comprises the property acquired during the marriage and the individual property of each spouse.

Art. 197 A. Ownership / II. Acquired property

II. Acquired property

1 Acquired property comprises those assets which a spouse has acquired for valuable consideration during the marital property regime.

2 In particular, the acquired property of a spouse comprises:

1.
the proceeds from his or her employment;
2.
benefits received from staff welfare schemes, social security and social welfare institutions;
3.
compensation for inability to work;
4.
income derived from his or her own property;
5.
property acquired to replace acquired property.
Art. 198 A. Ownership / III. Individual property / 1. By operation of law

III. Individual property

1. By operation of law

By operation of law, a spouse’s individual property comprises:

1.
personal effects used exclusively by that spouse;
2.
assets belonging to one spouse at the beginning of the marital property regime or acquired later at no cost by inheritance or otherwise;
3.
claims for satisfaction;
4.
acquisitions that replace individual property.
Art. 199 A. Ownership / III. Individual property / 2. By marital agreement

2. By marital agreement

1 Under a marital agreement, spouses may declare acquired property to be individual property set aside for professional or business use.

2 Furthermore, spouses may stipulate in a marital agreement that income from individual property does not qualify as acquired property.

Art. 200 A. Ownership / IV. Proof

IV. Proof

1 Any person who asserts that a specific object or asset is owned by one or other spouse bears the burden of proof.

2 If no such proof may be adduced, the object or asset is presumed to be in the co-ownership of both spouses.

3 Until proven otherwise, all assets of a spouse are deemed to be acquired property.

Art. 201 B. Management, benefits and power of disposal

B. Management, benefits and power of disposal

1 Within the limits of the law, each spouse administers and enjoys the benefits of his or her individual property and has power of disposal over it.

2 If an asset is in the co-ownership of both spouses, neither spouse may dispose of his or her share in it without the other’s consent, unless otherwise agreed.

Art. 202 C. Liability toward third parties

C. Liability toward third parties

Each spouse is liable for his or her debts with all his or her property.

Art. 203 D. Debts between spouses

D. Debts between spouses

1 The marital property regime does not affect the maturity of debts contracted between spouses.

2 However, if payment of debts or the restitution of objects owed by a spouse would cause him or her serious difficulties which might endanger the marital union, such spouse may request a time limit within which to satisfy the claim; the claim is to be secured where reasonable in the circumstances.

Art. 204 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / I. Time of dissolution

E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation

I. Time of dissolution

1 The marital property regime is dissolved on the death of a spouse or on implementation of a different regime.

2 In the case of divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or a court order for separation of property, the dissolution of the marital property regime takes retroactive effect as of the date on which the application was filed.

Art. 205 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / II. Taking back property and settling debts / 1. In general

II. Taking back property and settling debts

1. In general

1 Each spouse shall take back any of his or her property that is in the other’s possession.

2 Where one spouse shows an overriding interest in gaining sole possession of an object or asset in co-ownership, and notwithstanding any other legal measures available, he or she may request that said object or asset be allocated to him or her in return for compensation.

3 The spouses settle their debts to each other.

Art. 206 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / II. Taking back property and settling debts / 2. Participation in increased value

2. Participation in increased value

1 Where a spouse has contributed to the acquisition, improvement or preservation of an asset belonging to the other without receiving equivalent compensation, and where at the time of the liquidation that asset has increased in value, then his or her claim corresponds to his or her proportionate contribution and is calculated according to the current value of the asset; if, conversely, the asset has decreased in value, his or her claim corresponds to the original contribution.

2 If such an asset had already been alienated beforehand, the claim is calculated according to the proceeds obtained and is due immediately.

3 By written agreement, spouses may exclude participation in the increased value or vary the proportion thereof.

Art. 207 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 1. Separation of acquired property and individual property

III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse

1. Separation of acquired property and individual property

1 The property acquired during marriage and the individual property of each spouse are separated according to their value at the time of the dissolution of the marital property regime.

2 Lump sum pension or invalidity benefits received by a spouse are added to his or her individual property in an amount equivalent to the present value of the pension or invalidity annuity to which he or she would be entitled on dissolution of the marital property regime.

Art. 208 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 2. Additions

2. Additions

1 The following are added to the property acquired during marriage:

1.
the value of dispositions made without consideration by one spouse without the other’s consent during the five years preceding the dissolution of the marital property regime, save for the usual occasional gifts;
2.
the value of assets disposed of by one spouse during the marital property regime with the intention of diminishing the other’s share.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 209 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 3. Compensation operations between acquired property and individual property

3. Compensation operations between acquired property and individual property

1 Where debts incurred in connection with acquired property have been paid out of individual property or where debts incurred in connection with individual property have been paid out of acquired property, there is a claim for compensation when the marital property regime is liquidated.

2 A debt encumbers the property in relation to which it was incurred, and in the event of doubt, it encumbers the acquired property.

3 If assets belonging to one category of property have contributed to the acquisition, improvement or preservation of assets belonging to the other and if the value of the latter has increased or diminished, the claim for compensation corresponds to the proportionate contribution made and is calculated according to the value of the assets at the time of the liquidation or their disposal.

Art. 210 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 4. Surplus

4. Surplus

1 The remaining total value of the acquired property, including the assets added in and claims for compensation, and after deduction of the debts encumbering the acquired property, constitutes the surplus.

2 A deficit is disregarded.

Art. 211 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 1. Market value

IV. Valuation

1. Market value

For the purpose of liquidating the marital property regime, assets are stated at their market value.

Art. 212 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 2. Capitalised value / a. In general

2. Capitalised value

a. In general

1 An agricultural enterprise which one spouse continues to operate as owner or in respect of which the surviving spouse or one of the issue makes a justified claim for undivided allocation is stated at its capitalised value when calculating the proportionate added value and the claim for participation.

2 The owner of the agricultural enterprise or his or her heirs may bring a claim against the other spouse for proportionate added value or participation only in the amount they would receive if the business were stated at its market value.

3 The inheritance law provisions governing valuation and the participation of co-heirs in the profit apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 213 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 2. Capitalised value / b. Special circumstances

b. Special circumstances

1 The allocation value may be increased by a suitable amount if justified by special circumstances.

2 Special circumstances include in particular the maintenance requirements of the surviving spouse, the purchase price of the agricultural enterprise including capital investments, and the financial circumstances of the spouse to whom the agricultural enterprise belongs.

Art. 214 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 3. Defining juncture

3. Defining juncture

1 For the purpose of valuing the acquired property at hand at the time of the dissolution of the marital property regime, the defining juncture is the time of the division.

2 For assets added to the acquired property, the defining juncture is the date on which they were alienated.

Art. 215 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Participation in the surplus / 1. By law

V. Participation in the surplus

1. By law

1 Each spouse or his or her heirs is or are entitled to one-half of the surplus of the other spouse.

2 The claims are set off.

Art. 216 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Participation in the surplus / 2. By agreement / a. In general

2. By agreement

a. In general

1 A different participation in the surplus may be agreed by marital agreement.

2 Such agreements must not adversely affect the statutory inheritance entitlements of children who are not the common issue of the spouses or those of the issue of such children.

Art. 217 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Participation in the surplus / 2. By agreement / b. On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by court order

b. On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by court order

In the case of divorce, separation, annulment of marriage or separation of property by court order, agreements varying the statutory participation in the surplus are valid only if the marital property agreement expressly so provides.

Art. 218 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value / 1. Deferred payment

VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value

1. Deferred payment

1 If immediate payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value would cause serious difficulties for the debtor, he or she may request a deferral.

2 Unless otherwise agreed by the spouses, the participation claim and the share of the increased value bear interest as of completion of the division of property and, where justified in the circumstances, security must be furnished.

Art. 219 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value / 2. Home and household effects

2. Home and household effects

1 To ensure that the surviving spouse may maintain his or her accustomed lifestyle, at his or her request he or she will be granted a usufruct of or a right of residence in the home in which the spouses lived and which belonged to the deceased spouse, and this will be set off against his or her entitlement, subject to any contrary provision in the marital agreement.

2 On the same conditions, he or she may request that ownership of the household effects be transferred to him or her.

3 Where justified in the circumstances, at the request of the surviving spouse or the other legal heirs of the deceased spouse, ownership of the home may be granted rather than a usufruct or right of residence.

4 The surviving spouse may not claim such rights in respect of premises in which the deceased practised a profession or ran a business and which are required by one of his or her issue in order to continue said profession or business, subject to the provisions of agricultural inheritance law.

Art. 220 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value / 3. Claims against third parties

3. Claims against third parties

1 If the assets of the debtor or his or her estate are insufficient to cover the participation claim on division of the property, the entitled spouse or his or her heirs may demand from third-party beneficiaries the return of such dispositions as are to be added to the acquired property up to the amount of the shortfall.

2 The right to bring a claim is extinguished one year after the spouse or his or her heirs learn of the infringement of their rights, but in any event ten years after the dissolution of the marital property regime.

3 Moreover, the provisions governing claims in abatement under inheritance law apply mutatis mutandis.1


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).


  Chapter Three: Community of Property

Art. 221 A. Ownership / I. Categories

A. Ownership

I. Categories

The marital property regime of community of property comprises the common property and the individual property of each spouse.

Art. 222 A. Ownership / II. Common property / 1. General community of property

II. Common property

1. General community of property

1 The general community of property combines the assets and income of the spouses into common property, with the exception of those assets which by law constitute individual property.

2 The common property belongs to both spouses jointly.

3 Neither spouse is entitled to dispose of his or her share of the common property.

Art. 223 A. Ownership / II. Common property / 2. Limited community of property / a. Community restricted to acquired property

2. Limited community of property

a. Community restricted to acquired property

1 By marital agreement, the spouses may restrict community of property to the property acquired during marriage.

2 Revenue from individual property becomes common property.

Art. 224 A. Ownership / II. Common property / 2. Limited community of property / b. Further community of property regimes

b. Further community of property regimes

1 By marital agreement, the spouses may exclude from the community of property specific assets or types of assets, such as land, a spouse’s income from work or assets used to practise a profession or run a business.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, income from such assets does not become common property.

Art. 225 A. Ownership / III. Individual property

III. Individual property

1 Individual property may be created by marital agreement, dispositions by third parties or by law.

2 By law, items for the exclusive personal use of a spouse and claims for satisfaction constitute individual property.

3 A spouse’s statutory inheritance entitlement may not pass to him or her from his or her relatives as individual property where the marital agreement provides that such assets are common property.

Art. 226 A. Ownership / IV. Proof

IV. Proof

All assets are presumed to be common property unless proven to be the individual property of a spouse.

Art. 227 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 1. Everyday housekeeping

B. Management and power of disposal

I. Common property

1. Everyday housekeeping

1 The spouses must manage the common property in the best interests of the marital union.

2 Within the limits of everyday housekeeping, each spouse may incur commitments on behalf of the marital union and dispose of common property.

Art. 228 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 2. Extraordinary housekeeping

2. Extraordinary housekeeping

1 Outside the limits of everyday housekeeping, the spouses may incur commitments on behalf of the common property and dispose thereof only jointly or individually with the other’s consent.

2 Third parties are entitled to presume such consent provided they do not know or cannot be expected to know that it is absent.

3 The provisions governing representation of the marital union are reserved.

Art. 229 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 3. Use of common property for professional or business purposes

3. Use of common property for professional or business purposes

If a spouse practises a profession or runs a business on his or her own using common property with the other’s consent, he or she may conclude all transactions that such activities entail.

Art. 230 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 4. Renunciation and acceptance of inheritances

4. Renunciation and acceptance of inheritances

1 Without the other’s consent, a spouse is not entitled to renounce an inheritance which would become common property or accept inheritance of an overindebted estate.

2 If the spouse is unable to obtain consent or if it is withheld without good cause, he or she may petition the court.1


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 231 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 5. Liability and management costs

5. Liability and management costs

1 In relation to dealings concerning common property, on dissolution of the marital property regime, each spouse is liable as if he or she were an agent.

2 The costs of management are borne by the common property.

Art. 232 B. Management and power of disposal / II. Individual property

II. Individual property

1 Each spouse administers and disposes of his or her individual property within the limits of the law.

2 If income accrues to individual property, the management costs are borne by such property.

Art. 233 C. Liability toward third parties / I. Full liability

C. Liability toward third parties

I. Full liability

Each spouse is liable with his or her individual property and the common property:

1.
for debts incurred in exercising his or her powers to represent the marital union or in managing the common property;
2.
for debts incurred in the pursuit of a profession or business, provided common property has been used for this or the income therefrom becomes common property;
3.
for debts for which the other spouse is also personally liable;
4.
for debts in respect of which the spouses have agreed with third parties that their common property as well as the debtor’s individual property will be liable.
Art. 234 C. Liability toward third parties / II. Individual liability

II. Individual liability

1 For all other debts a spouse is liable only to the extent of his or her individual property and half the value of the common property.

2 Claims arising from the unjust enrichment of the marital union are reserved.

Art. 235 D. Debts between spouses

D. Debts between spouses

1 The marital property regime does not affect the maturity of debts contracted between spouses.

2 However, if payment of debts or the restitution of objects owed by a spouse would cause him or her serious difficulties which might endanger the marital union, such spouse may request to be granted a time limit in which to satisfy the claim; the claim is to be secured where reasonable in the circumstances.

Art. 236 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / I. Time of dissolution

E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation

I. Time of dissolution

1 The marital property regime is dissolved on the death of a spouse, the implementation of a different regime or when one of the spouses is declared bankrupt.

2 In the case of divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or a court order for separation of property, the dissolution of the marital property regime takes retroactive effect as of the date on which the application was filed.

3 When determining the composition of common property and individual property, the defining juncture is the dissolution of the marital property regime.

Art. 237 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / II. Allocation to individual property

II. Allocation to individual property

Lump sum pension or invalidity benefits received by a spouse that have become common property are added to his or her individual property in the capitalised amount equivalent to the pension or invalidity annuity to which he or she would be entitled on dissolution of the marital property regime.

Art. 238 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Compensation operations between joint and individual property

III. Compensation operations between joint and individual property

1 Where debts encumbering one category of property were paid out of assets belonging to the other, respective compensation claims between the common property and the individual property of each spouse arise on the dissolution of the marital property regime.

2 A debt encumbers the property in relation to which it was incurred, but in the case of doubt it encumbers the common property.

Art. 239 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Participation in increased value

IV. Participation in increased value

Where the individual property of a spouse or the common property has contributed to the acquisition, improvement or preservation of an asset belonging to another category of property, the provisions governing increased value in relation to participation in acquired property apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 240 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Valuation

V. Valuation

For the purpose of valuing the common property at hand at the time of the dissolution of the marital property regime, the defining juncture is the time of the division.

Art. 241 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Division / 1. On death or implementation of a different marital property regime

VI. Division

1. On death or implementation of a different marital property regime

1 If the community of property regime is dissolved by the death of a spouse or the implementation of a different marital property regime, each party or his or her heirs is entitled to one-half of the common property.

2 A different method of division may be agreed by marital agreement.

3 Such agreements must not adversely affect the statutory inheritance entitlements of the spouse’s issue.

Art. 242 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Division / 2. In other cases

2. In other cases

1 On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by law or court order, each spouse shall take back from the common property such property as would have been his or her individual property under the participation in acquired property regime.

2 The remaining common property is divided equally between the spouses.

3 Agreements to vary the statutory method of division are valid only if the marital agreement expressly so provides.

Art. 243 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 1. Individual property

VII. Division of the property

1. Individual property

If the community of property is dissolved by the death of a spouse, the surviving spouse may request that such property as would have been his or her individual property under the participation in acquired property regime be allocated to him or her and count toward his or her share of the estate.

Art. 244 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 2. Home and household effects

2. Home and household effects

1 If the home in which the spouses lived or any household effects belong to the common property, the surviving spouse may request that such property be allocated to him or her and count toward his or her share of the estate.

2 Where justified in the circumstances, at the request of the surviving spouse or the other legal heirs of the deceased spouse, a usufruct or right of residence may be granted in lieu of ownership.

3 If the community of property is not dissolved by death, each spouse may make such requests where he or she may show an overriding interest.

Art. 245 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 3. Other assets

3. Other assets

If a spouse demonstrates an overriding interest, he or she may also demand that other assets be allocated to him or her and count toward his or her share.

Art. 246 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 4. Further provisions

4. Further provisions

In other respects the provisions governing the division of property in co-ownership and the division of estates apply mutatis mutandis.


  Chapter Four: Separation of Property

Art. 247 A. Management, benefits and power of disposal / I. In general

A. Management, benefits and power of disposal

I. In general

Within the limits of the law, each spouse shall administer and enjoy the benefits of his or her own property and has power of disposal over it.

Art. 248 A. Management, benefits and power of disposal / II. Proof

II. Proof

1 Any person who asserts that a specific object or asset is owned by one or other spouse bears the burden of proof.

2 If no such proof may be adduced, there is a presumption of co-ownership.

Art. 249 B. Liability toward third parties

B. Liability toward third parties

Each spouse is liable for his or her debts with all his or her property.

Art. 250 C. Debts between spouses

C. Debts between spouses

1 The marital property regime does not affect the maturity of debts contracted between spouses.

2 However, if payment of debts or the restitution of objects owed by a spouse would cause him or her serious difficulties which might endanger the marital union, such spouse may request to be granted a time limit in which to satisfy the claim; the claim is to be secured where reasonable in the circumstances.

Art. 251 D. Allocation of property in co-ownership

D. Allocation of property in co-ownership

Where one spouse shows an overriding interest in gaining sole possession of an object or asset in co-ownership, and notwithstanding any other legal measures available, he or she may request that said object or asset be allocated to him or her in return for compensation.


  Division Two: Kinship

  Title Seven: Formation of the Parent-child Relationship5 

  Chapter One: General Provisions6 

Art. 2521A. Formation of parent-child relationship in general

A. Formation of parent-child relationship in general

1 The parent-child relationship is formed between child and mother on the birth of the child.

2 It is formed between child and father by virtue of the latter being married to the mother, by recognition or by court declaration.

3 Moreover, the parent-child relationship is formed by adoption.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2531B. ...

B. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 2541

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Chapter Two: Paternity of the Husband7 

Art. 2551A. Presumption

A. Presumption

1 Where a child is born in wedlock, the husband is deemed to be the father.

2 If the husband dies, he is deemed to be the father provided the child is born within 300 days of his death or, if born thereafter, if it is shown that the child was conceived before the husband’s death.

3 If the husband has been declared presumed dead, he is deemed to have been the father provided the child is born within 300 days of the life-threatening event or the last sign of life.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 2561B. Challenge / I. Right to challenge

B. Challenge

I. Right to challenge

1 The presumption of paternity may be challenged in court:

1.
by the husband;
2.2
by the child if the spouses cease living together while the child is still a minor.

2 The husband’s challenge is directed against the child and the mother, that of the child against the husband and the mother.

3 The husband has no right of challenge if he consented to impregnation by a third party. The child’s right to challenge paternity is subject to the Reproductive Medicine Act of 18 December 19983.4


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 SR 810.11
4 Amended by Art. 39 of the Federal Act on Medically Assisted Reproduction of 18 Dec. 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 3055; BBl 1996 III 205).

Art. 256a1B. Challenge / II. Grounds for challenge / 1. In the case of conception in wedlock

II. Grounds for challenge

1. In the case of conception in wedlock

1 If a child was conceived in wedlock, the challenging party must show that the husband is not the father.

2 The child is presumed to have been conceived in wedlock if it was born no earlier than 180 days after the wedding and no later than 300 days after the marriage was dissolved as a result of death.2


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 256b1B. Challenge / II. Grounds for challenge / 2. In the case of conception before marriage or while spouses were living apart

2. In the case of conception before marriage or while spouses were living apart

1 If a child was conceived before the marriage was concluded or at a time when the spouses were living apart, no further grounds need be given for the challenge.

2 However, in such cases the paternity of the husband is still presumed where the court is satisfied that he had sexual intercourse with the mother around the date of the conception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 256c1B. Challenge / III. Time limits

III. Time limits

1 The husband must file the challenge within one year of learning of the birth and of the fact that he is not the father or that another man had sexual intercourse with the mother around the date of the conception, but in any event not later than five years after the birth.

2 The child’s challenge must be filed at the latest within one year of attaining the age of majority.2

3 Once these time limits have expired, a challenge of paternity is admissible provided there is good cause for the delay.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2571C. Conflict of presumptions

C. Conflict of presumptions

1 Where a child was born within 300 days of the dissolution of the marriage as a result of death and the mother has since remarried, the second husband is deemed to be the father.2

2 If this presumption is disproved, the first husband is deemed to be the father.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 2581D. Challenge by the parents

D. Challenge by the parents

1 If the husband died or lost capacity of judgement before the time limit expired, his father or his mother may challenge his paternity.

2 In this case the provisions governing a challenge by the husband apply mutatis mutandis.

3 The one-year time limit for bringing the claim begins at the earliest on the date on which the father or mother learns of the husband’s death or loss of capacity of judgement.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2591E. Marriage of the parents

E. Marriage of the parents

1 If the parents marry each other, the provisions governing children born in wedlock apply mutatis mutandis to a child born prior to the marriage, providing the paternity of the husband is established by recognition or court declaration.

2 Recognition may be challenged:

1.
by the mother;
2.2
by the child or, after his or her death, by his or her issue if the spouses ceased living together while the child was still a minor or if recognition did not occur until after the child's twelfth birthday;
3.
by the husband’s commune of origin or residence;
4.
by the husband.

3 The provisions governing challenge of recognition apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).


  Chapter Three: Recognition and Court Declaration of Paternity8 

Art. 2601A. Recognition / I. Admissibility and form

A. Recognition

I. Admissibility and form

1 Where the parent-child relationship exists only with the mother, the father may recognise the child.

2 Where the recognising person is a minor or subject to a general deputyship or if the adult protection authority has issued a related order, recognition requires the consent of his or her legal representative.2

3 Recognition is effected by means of a declaration made before the civil registrar or by testamentary disposition or, if an action to declare paternity is pending, by a declaration made to the court.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 260a1A. Recognition / II. Challenge / 1. Right to challenge

II. Challenge

1. Right to challenge

1 Recognition may be challenged before the courts by any interested party, namely the mother, the child or, after its death, its issue, and by the commune of origin or domicile of the recognising person.

2 The recognising person is entitled to file a challenge only if he or she recognised the child under threat of imminent and substantial risk to his or her own life, limb, reputation or property or to those of a person close to him or her, or in the erroneous belief that he was the father.

3 The challenge is directed against the recognising person and the child, insofar as they themselves are not the challenging persons.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 260b1A. Recognition / II. Challenge / 2. Grounds

2. Grounds

1 The challenging person must prove that the recognising person is not the child’s father.

2 However, mother and child are only required to prove this if the recognising person may satisfy the court that he had sexual intercourse with the mother around the time of the child’s conception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 260c1A. Recognition / II. Challenge / 3. Time limits

3. Time limits

1 The challenge must be filed within one year of the date on which the claimant learned of the recognition and the fact that the recognising person is not the father, or that another man had sexual intercourse with the mother around the time of the conception, or on which he or she learned of his or her error or on which the threat ceased, but in any event within five years of the recognition.

2 In all cases, the child may file the challenge at any time prior to the elapse of one year after attaining the age of majority.2

3 Once these time limits have expired, a challenge of recognition is admissible provided there is good cause for the delay.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2611B. Action to determine paternity / I. Right to bring the action

B. Action to determine paternity

I. Right to bring the action

1 Both mother and child are entitled to bring an action to declare the existence of the parent-child relationship between the child and the father.

2 The action is brought against the father or, if he has died, in order of priority against his issue, parents or siblings or, where none exist, against the competent authority of his last domicile.

3 If the father has died, the court must inform his wife that the action has been brought so that she may safeguard her interests.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2621B. Action to determine paternity / II. Presumption

II. Presumption

1 If the defendant had sexual intercourse with the mother during the period between the 300th day and the 180th day before the child’s birth, his paternity is presumed.

2 Paternity is also presumed even if the child was conceived prior to the 300th day or after the 180th day prior to birth provided the defendant had sexual intercourse with the mother during the period in which the child was conceived.

3 There is no such presumption if the defendant shows that his paternity is either impossible or less probable than that of another man.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2631B. Action to determine paternity / III. Time limits

III. Time limits

1 The action is admissible both before and after the birth but must be brought:

1.
by the mother within one year of the birth;
2.2
by the child at any time prior to the elapse of one year after attaining the age of majority.

2 If a parent-child relationship already exists with another man, the action may in any event be brought within one year of the date on which said relationship is annulled.

3 Once these time limits have expired, an action for determination of paternity is admissible provided there is good cause for the delay.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).


  Chapter Four:9  Adoption

Art. 2641A. Adoption of minors / I. General requirements

A. Adoption of minors

I. General requirements

1 A minor child may be adopted if the persons wishing to adopt have raised and cared for the child for at least one year and provided the general circumstances suggest that establishing a parent-child relationship would be in the child’s best interests without being unfair for any other children of the adoptive parents.

2 Adoption is only possible, if the persons wishing to adopt the child are able to provide for the child up to the child’s majority on the basis of their age and their personal circumstances.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264a1A. Adoption of minors / II. Joint adoption

II. Joint adoption

1 Spouses may adopt a child jointly if they have been in the same household for at least three years and both are at least 28 years old.

2 Exceptions from the minimum age may be made if this is necessary for the welfare of the child. The spouses must justify the exception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877)

Art. 264b1A. Adoption of minors / III. Adoption by a single person

III. Adoption by a single person

1 A person who is not married and does not live in a registered partnership is permitted to adopt a child alone if he or she is at least 28 years old.

2 A married person who is at least 28 years old is permitted to adopt alone where the other spouse permanently lacks capacity of judgement or has been of unknown whereabouts for more than 2 years or if the spouses have been separated by court order for more than 3 years.

3 A person living in a registered partnership who is at least 28 years old is permitted to adopt a child alone if his or her registered partner permanently lacks capacity of judgement or has been of unknown whereabouts for more than 2 years.

4 Exceptions from the minimum age may be made if this is necessary for the welfare of the child. The person wishing to adopt must justify the exception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877)

Art. 264c1A. Adoption of minors / IV. Adoption of a stepchild

IV. Adoption of a stepchild

1 A person is permitted to adopt the child of the person:

1.
to whom he or she is married;
2.
with whom he or she lives in a registered partnership;
3.
with whom he or she cohabits.

2 The couple must have been in the same household for at least three years.

3 Persons who cohabit are not permitted to be married or to be bound by a registered partnership.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264d1A. Adoption of minors / V. Difference in age

V. Difference in age

1 The age difference between the child and the persons wishing to adopt may not be less than 16 years and not more than 45 years.

2 Exceptions may be made if this is necessary for the welfare of the child. The person wishing to adopt must justify the exception.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2651A. Adoption of minors / VI. Consent of the child and the child protection authority

VI. Consent of the child and the child protection authority

1 If the child is capable of judgement, its consent is required for the adoption.

2 Where the child has a legal guardian or a legal representative, adoption requires the consent of the child protection authority even if the child is capable of judgement.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 265a1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 1. Form

VII. Parents’ consent2

1. Form

1 Adoption requires the consent of the child’s father and mother.

2 Such consent must be given by oral or written declaration to the child protection authority of the parents’ or child’s domicile or temporary residence and must be recorded.

3 Such consent is valid even if the persons wishing to adopt are not named or not yet determined.3


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 265b1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 2. Time of consent

2. Time of consent

1 Consent to adoption may not be given until at least six weeks after the birth of the child.

2 It may be revoked within six weeks of having been accepted.

3 Where consent, having been revoked, is given again, it is then final.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 265c1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 3. Dispensing with consent / a. Requirements

3. Dispensing with consent

a. Requirements

The consent of a parent may be dispensed with if the identity of that parent is unknown, or if he or she has been of unknown whereabouts for some length of time, or permanently lacks capacity of judgement.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 265d1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 3. Dispensing with consent / b. Decision

b. Decision

1 Where the child is entrusted to persons wishing to adopt with a view to subsequent adoption and the consent of one parent is not forthcoming, the child protection authority at the child’s domicile shall , at the request of the legal guardian or a legal representative, an adoption agency or the persons wishing to adopt, decide whether such consent can be dispensed with, as a rule before the child is placed in care.2

2 In all other cases, the decision is made at the time of the adoption.

3 ...3


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Repealed by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), with effect from 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2661B. Adoption of an adult

B. Adoption of an adult

1 An adult may be adopted if:

1.
he or she is permanently in need of help for physical, mental or psychological reasons and the persons wishing to adopt have looked after him or her for at least one year;
2.
the persons wishing to adopt raised and cared for the person for at least one year while he or she was still a minor; or
3.
there are other good reasons and he or she has lived in the same household with the persons wishing to adopt for at least one year.

2 In all other respects, the provisions governing adoption of minors apply mutatis mutandis, with the exception of the provision on parental consent.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 2671C. Effects / I. In general

C. Effects

I. In general

1 The adoptive child acquires the legal status of a child of the persons wishing to adopt.

2 Previous parent-child relationships are extinguished.

3 The child’s relationship with the parent who:

1.
is married to;
2.
lives in a registered partnership with;
3.
cohabits with;

the adopting person is not extinguished.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 267a1C. Effects / II. Name

II. Name

1 In the case of joint adoption and adoption by a single person, the minor may be given a new first name if there are good reasons for doing so. Prior to this, the child is heard in person in an appropriate manner by the competent authority or by a third party appointed for this purpose, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or for other good cause. If the child is at least twelve years of age, a change of name requires his or her consent.

2 The name of the child is determined in accordance with the provisions governing the legal effects of the parent-child relationship. These apply mutatis mutandis to the adoption of the child by the registered partner of its mother or father.

3 The competent authority may authorise an adult to be adopted to continue using his or her existing name if there are good reasons for doing so.

4 The change of name of an adult to be adopted does not affect the naming of persons whose name is derived from the previous name of the person to be adopted, unless they expressly agree to a change of name.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581)

Art. 267b1C. Effects / III. Citizenship

III. Citizenship

The citizenship of a minor is determined by provisions governing the legal effects of the parent-child relationship.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2681 D. Procedure / I. In general

D. Procedure

I. In general

1 Adoption is pronounced by the competent cantonal authority at the adoptive parents’ domicile.

2 The adoption requirements must already be met when the application is submitted.2

3 Once the application has been submitted, the death or loss of capacity of judgement of the person wishing to adopt does not preclude the adoption provided the other requirements are still fulfilled.3

4 If the child attains the age of majority after the application for adoption has been submitted, the provisions governing the adoption of minors continue to apply provided the requirements for adoption were previously fulfilled.4

5 The adoption decision shall contain all the information required for entry in the civil register relating to the first name, surname and citizenship of the adopted person.5


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
4 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
5 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268a1D. Procedure / II. Investigation

II. Investigation

1 An application for adoption may not be upheld until all material circumstances have been thoroughly investigated, where necessary in consultation with the relevant specialists.

2 In particular, the investigation must look into the character and health of the persons wishing to adopt and the child, their mutual relationship, their suitability as parents, their financial situation, motives and family circumstances and the history of the child care relationship.2

3 ...3


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Repealed by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), with effect from 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268abis1D. Procedure / III. Hearing for the child

III. Hearing for the child

1 The child shall be heard in person in an appropriate manner by the cantonal authority responsible for the adoption procedure or by a third party appointed for this purpose, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or for other good cause.

2 Minutes shall be kept of the hearing.

3 A child capable of judgement may appeal against a decision to refuse a hearing.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268ater1D. Procedure / IV. Representation for the child

IV. Representation for the child

1 The cantonal authority responsible for the adoption procedure shall order the child to be represented and appoint a person experienced in welfare and legal matters as the child's deputy.

2 If a child with the capacity to consent so requests, a representative must be appointed.

3 The child may challenge the rejection of his or her request by filing an objection.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268aquater1D. Procedure / V. Taking account of the attitude of family members

V. Taking account of the attitude of family members

1 Where the persons wishing to adopt have issue of their own, the latter’s attitude to the adoption must be taken into account.

2 Prior to the adoption of an adult, the attitude of following persons must also be taken into account:

1.
the spouse or registered partner of the person to be adopted;
2.
the biological parents of the person to be adopted
3.
the issue of the person to be adopted, unless this is inadvisable due to their age or for other good cause.

3 These persons shall, if possible, be notified of the adoption decision.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268b1Dbis. Confidentiality of adoption information

Dbis. Confidentiality of adoption information

1 The adopted child and the adoptive parents are entitled to confidentiality of adoption information.

2 Identifying information about the minor or his or her adoptive parents may only be disclosed to the biological parents if the child is capable of judgement, and the adoptive parents and the child have consented to disclosure.

3 Identifying information about the adult child may be disclosed to the biological parents and their direct descendants if the child has consented to disclosure.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 268c1Dter. Information on the adoption, the biological parents and their issue

Dter. Information on the adoption, the biological parents and their issue

1 The adoptive parents must inform the child of his or her adoption when his or her age or maturity permits.

2 A minor is entitled to information about his or her biological parents, provided it is not possible to draw conclusions about their identity. The child shall be given identifying information only if he or she can show an interest worthy of protection.

3 An adult child may at any time request that the personal details of his or her biological parents and further information about them be disclosed to him or her. The adult child may also request that information about the direct descendants of his or her biological parents be disclosed to him or her if the descendants are of age and have consented to the disclosure.


1 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Adoption Convention and Measures to Protect Children in respect of Inter-Country Adoption (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268d1Dquater. Cantonal information centre and tracing services

Dquater. Cantonal information centre and tracing services

1 Information about the biological parents, their direct descendants and the child may be obtained from the cantonal authority responsible for the adoption procedure.

2 The authority shall inform the person referred to in the request for information about the request and, where necessary, obtain his or her consent to contact the person requesting information. The authority may delegate these tasks to a specialised tracing service.

3 If the person referred to in the request for information refuses to make personal contact, the authority or the authorised tracing service shall inform the person requesting information and draw his or her attention to the personal rights of the person referred to in the request for information.

4 The cantons shall designate a body to provide advice to the biological parents, their direct descendants or the child on request.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268e1Dquinquies. Contact with the biological parents

Dquinquies. Contact with the biological parents

1 The adoptive parents and the biological parents may agree that the biological parents be entitled to reasonable contact with the minor. This agreement and any amendments thereto shall be submitted to the child protection authority at the child’s place of residence for approval. The child protection authority or a third party appointed by it shall hear the child in person in an appropriate manner before the decision is taken, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or for other good cause. If the child is capable of judgement, its consent is required for the agreement.

2 If the best interests of the child are at risk or if there is disagreement about the implementation of the agreement, the child protection authority shall decide.

3 The child may refuse contact with its biological parents at any time. The adoptive parents may not pass on information to the biological parents against the child’s will.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2691E. Challenge / I. Grounds / 1. Lack of consent

E. Challenge

I. Grounds

1. Lack of consent

1 Where for no just cause consent has not been obtained, those persons whose consent is required may bring an action to challenge the adoption providing this does not seriously impair the interests of the child.

2 However, the parents are not entitled to bring such action where they may appeal against the decision to the Federal Supreme Court.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269a1E. Challenge / I. Grounds / 2. Other defects

2. Other defects

1 If the adoption displays other grave defects, it may be challenged by any interested party and in particular by the commune of origin or domicile.

2 However, a challenge is excluded if the defect has been rectified in the interim or if it relates solely to procedural provisions.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269b1E. Challenge / II. Time limits

II. Time limits

An action to challenge the adoption must be brought within six months of discovering the grounds for the challenge and in any event within two years of the adoption.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269c1F. Adoption agency services

F. Adoption agency services

1 The Confederation is responsible for supervising child adoption agency activities.

2 Any person engaging in such activities professionally or in connection with his or her professional activities requires an official licence; this does not apply to agency services rendered by the child protection authority.2

3 The Federal Council enacts the implementing regulations and determines the manner in which the cantonal authorities responsible for placing children in foster care with a view to subsequent adoption are to be involved in assessing fulfilment of the requirements for approval of adoption and in carrying out the necessary supervision.

4 ...3


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Adoption Convention and Measures to Protect Children in respect of Inter-Country Adoption, in force since 1 Jan. 2003 (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Repealed by Annex No 15 of the Federal Administrative Court Law of 17 June 2005, with effect from 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2006 2197; BBl 2001 4202).


  Title Eight: Effects of the Parent-Child Relationship10 

  Section One: Community of Parents and Children11 

Art. 2701A. Family surname / I. Child of married parents

A. Family surname

I. Child of married parents

1 Where the parents are married to each other but bear different surnames, the child takes the surname that the parents decided would be given to their children when they married.

2 Within one year of the birth of their first child, the parents may request that the child take the surname of the other parent.

3 If the parents bear a joint family name, the child takes that name.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 270a1A. Family surname / II. Child of unmarried parents

II. Child of unmarried parents

1 If one parent has parental responsibility, the child takes that parent's surname before marriage. If the parents share parental responsibility, they decide which of their surnames before marriage their children should take.

2 If joint parental responsibility is established after the birth of the first child, either parent may within a year of its establishment declare before the civil registrar that the child should take the other parent's name before marriage. This declaration applies to all common children, regardless of who is given parental responsibility.

3 If neither parent has parental responsibility, the child takes the mother's name before marriage.

4 A change in the allocation of parental responsibility has no effect on names. The provisions on changing names are reserved.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship) (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581). Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 270b1A. Family surname / III. Consent of the child

III. Consent of the child

If the child has attained the age of twelve, his or her surname may only be changed if he or she consents.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 2711B. Citizenship

B. Citizenship

1 The child acquires the cantonal and communal citizenship of the parent whose surname the child bears.

2 Where a child acquires the surname of the other parent while still a minor, the child acquires the cantonal and communal citizenship of that parent.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 2721C. Support and common welfare

C. Support and common welfare

Parents and children owe each other such support, consideration and respect as the good of the family community requires.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2731D. Contact / I. Parents and children / 1. Principle

D. Contact

I. Parents and children

1. Principle

1 Parents not granted parental responsibility or whose children are not resident with them are entitled to reasonable contact with their minor children, and their children are entitled to contact with them.2

2 The child protection authority may remind parents, foster parents or the child of their duties and issue them with instructions where the exercise or failure to exercise contact entitlements is detrimental to the child or where such reminder or direction is required for some other reason.

3 Contact entitlements must be stipulated if either the father or the mother so requests.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2741D. Contact / I. Parents and children / 2. Restrictions

2. Restrictions

1 The father and the mother must refrain from any conduct that impairs the child’s relationship with the other parent or makes the task of the person with custody more difficult.2

2 Where contact with the child is not in its best interests, or the parents breach their duties in the course of such contact or have not cared for the child to any meaningful degree, or other good cause exists, the parents’ right of contact with the child may be refused or withdrawn.

3 Where the parents have consented to the adoption of their child or their consent may be dispensed with, their right of contact with the child is extinguished as soon as the child is placed in foster care with a view to future adoption.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 274a1D. Contact / II. Third parties

II. Third parties

1 In extraordinary circumstances, a right of contact with the child may also be granted to other persons and in particular to relatives, to the extent this serves the child’s best interests.

2 The restrictions on parents’ visiting rights apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2751D. Contact / III. Responsible authorities

III. Responsible authorities

1 Responsibility for orders regulating rights of contact with the child lies with the child protection authority at the child’s domicile and with that of his or her place of temporary residence, insofar as the latter has taken or is taking child protection measures.

2 If the court regulates parental responsibility, residence or the child maintenance contribution in accordance with the provisions on the divorce and protection of the marital union, it shall also regulate contact.2

3 Where no orders have yet been issued regulating the father’s and mother’s contact entitlements, no contact may be had against the will of the person granted parental responsibility or with whom the child resides.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 275a1E. Right to information

E. Right to information

1 Parents who do not exercise parental responsibility should be informed of special events in the child’s life and consulted before important decisions affecting its development are taken.

2 They are entitled to obtain information concerning the child’s condition and development from third parties involved in its care, such as teachers and doctors, in the same manner as the person with parental responsibility.

3 The provisions governing responsibility for and limitations on contact with the child apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).


  Section Two: Parents’ Duty of Maintenance12 

Art. 2761A. General / I. Object and scope

A. General

I. Object and scope2

1 Maintenance is provided by caring for and raising the child and in the form of monetary payments.3

2 The parents must, each according to their own abilities, provide for the child’s maintenance, including the costs of caring for and raising the child, his or her education and measures taken for his or her protection.4

3 The parents are released from their duty of maintenance to the extent that the child may reasonably be expected to meet the costs thereof from his or her own earnings or other resources.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
4 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 276a1A. General / II. Precedence of maintenance for minors

II. Precedence of maintenance for minors

1 The duty of maintenance towards a minor shall take precedence over other maintenance duties under family law.

2 In justified cases, the court may disregard this rule, in particular in order to prevent any disadvantage to a child entitled to maintenance who is of age.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2771B. Duration

B. Duration

1 The parents’ duty of maintenance lasts until the child attains the age of majority.2

2 If at that juncture the child has not yet had a suitable education, the parents must pay for his or her maintenance, to the extent conscionable in the overall circumstances, until such time as the child can complete a suitable education within the customary timescale.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 2781C. Married parents

C. Married parents

1 For the duration of their marriage, the parents bear the costs of maintenance in accordance with the provisions of marital law.

2 Each spouse must give the other all reasonable assistance in discharging the duty to maintain children born prior to the marriage.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2791D. Court action / I. Right to sue

D. Court action

I. Right to sue2

1 The child is entitled to sue the father or the mother or both for maintenance in future and for one year prior to the bringing of such action.

23 ...3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
3 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 2802841D. Court action / II. and III. ...

II. and III. ...


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 2851D. Court action / IV. Amount of child maintenance contribution / 1. Parents’ contribution

IV. Amount of child maintenance contribution

1. Parents’ contribution

1 The child maintenance contribution should correspond to the child’s needs and to the parents’ financial circumstances and resources; the child’s assets and income must be taken into account.

2 The child maintenance contribution also serves to ensure that the child is cared for by the parents or by third parties.

3 The child maintenance contribution is payable in advance on the dates stipulated by the court.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 285a1D. Court action / IV. Amount of child maintenance contribution / 2. Other payments for maintenance of the child

2. Other payments for maintenance of the child

1 Family allowance credits paid to the parent required to pay maintenance must be paid in addition to the maintenance.

2 Unless the court rules otherwise, any child allowance, social security children’s supplement and similar child support benefits to which the parent subject to the duty of maintenance is entitled must be paid in addition to the child maintenance contribution.

3 Where as a result of old age or invalidity the parent subject to the duty of maintenance subsequently receives social security, children’s supplements or similar child support benefits which replace his or her employment income, he or she must pay said benefits to the child; by operation of law, his or her existing child maintenance contribution is automatically reduced by the amount of such new benefits.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2861D. Court action / V. Change of circumstances / 1. In general

V. Change of circumstances

1. In general2

1 The court may order that the child maintenance contribution be automatically increased or decreased in the event of specified changes in the child’s needs, the parents’ financial resources or the cost of living.

2 If circumstances change considerably, at the request of one parent or the child the court will set a new level of child maintenance contribution or revoke it entirely.

3 Should the child have unforeseen, extraordinary needs the court may order the parents to make a special financial contribution.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 286a1D. Court action / V. Change of circumstances / 2. Shortfalls

2. Shortfalls

1 If it was previously established in an approved maintenance agreement or a decision that no maintenance contribution could be set to provide due maintenance for the child, and should the circumstances of the parent liable to pay maintenance have since improved substantially, the child is entitled to claim payments that were not met by this parent during the previous five years in which payments were owed to provide due maintenance.

2 This claim must be brought within one year of it being known that the circumstances have improved substantially.

3 This claim passes with all rights to the other parent or to the state authority in as far as this parent or the state authority has met the missing share of the due maintenance.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2871E. Maintenance agreements / I. Regular payments

E. Maintenance agreements

I. Regular payments

1 Maintenance agreements are binding on the child only once they have been approved by the child protection authority.

2 Child maintenance contributions stipulated in such agreements may be modified, providing such changes have not been excluded with the approval of the child protection authority.

3 If the agreement is concluded in court proceedings, such approval must be given by the court.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 287a1E. Maintenance agreements / II. Scope of a maintenance agreement

II. Scope of a maintenance agreement

Where maintenance contributions are set in a maintenance agreement, the agreement must specify:

a.
the income and assets of each parent and each child from which the set amount is calculated;
b.
the amount set for each child;
c.
the amount required to cover any shortfall in the due maintenance of each child;
d.
if and to what extent the maintenance contributions will be adjusted to reflect changes in living costs.

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2881E. Maintenance agreements / III. Final settlement

III. Final settlement2

1 Full and final settlement of the child’s maintenance entitlement may be agreed if it is in the child’s best interests.

2 The settlement agreement becomes binding on the child only:

1.
once the child protection authority or, in the case of an agreement reached during court proceedings, the court has approved it, and
2.
once the settlement amount has been paid into the account designated in the approval.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Originally No II.

Art. 2891F. Fulfilment / I. Entitlement

F. Fulfilment

I. Entitlement

1 The right to child maintenance contributions is that of the child and, so long as he or she is a minor, is fulfilled by payment to the child's legal representative or to the person with whom the child resides, unless the court decides otherwise.2

2 However, where the state authority assumes the cost of maintaining the child, such claim and all attendant rights pass to the state authority.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2901F. Fulfilment / II. Enforcement / 1. Enforcement assistance

II. Enforcement

1. Enforcement assistance

1 If a father or mother does not fulfil his or her obligation to provide maintenance, a specialist office designated by cantonal law shall, on application, help the child and the other parent to enforce the maintenance claim appropriately and free of charge.

2 The Federal Council determines the terms of enforcement assistance.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2911F. Fulfilment / II. Enforcement / 2. Directions to debtors

2. Directions to debtors

If the parents neglect to take due care of the child, the court may order their debtors to make payment in whole or in part to the child’s legal representative.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2921F. Fulfilment / III. Security

III. Security

If the parents are persistently neglectful in their duty of maintenance, or if there are grounds to suspect that they are preparing to abscond or are dissipating or concealing their assets, the court may order them to furnish appropriate security for future child maintenance contributions.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2931G. Public law

G. Public law

1 Subject to the duty of relatives to provide support, public law determines who must bear the costs of maintenance if neither the parents nor the child may defray them.

2 Public law also governs the provision of advances to maintain the child if the parents fail to fulfil their duty of maintenance.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2941H. Foster parents

H. Foster parents

1 Foster parents are entitled to receive an appropriate fostering allowance unless otherwise agreed or clearly dictated by the circumstances.

2 Where children are fostered by close relatives or with a view to subsequent adoption there is a presumption that no remuneration is due.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2951J. Rights of the unmarried mother

J. Rights of the unmarried mother

1 Up to one year after the birth at the latest, the mother may file a claim against the father or his legal heirs for compensation:2

1.
in respect of the confinement costs;
2.
in respect of the costs of maintenance for at least four weeks prior to the birth and at least eight weeks thereafter;
3.
in respect of other expenses rendered necessary by the pregnancy or confinement, including the initial equipment for the child.

2 On grounds of equity, the court may award partial or full compensation for such costs if the pregnancy ends prematurely.

3 Third-party payments to which the mother is entitled by law or by contract must be taken into consideration to the extent justified in the circumstances.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Section Three: Parental Responsibility13 

Art. 2961A. Principles

A. Principles

1 Parental responsibility serves the best interests of the child.

2 Until such time as they attain the age of majority, children remain the joint parental responsibility of their father and mother.

3 Parents who are minors or subject to a general deputyship may not exercise parental responsibility. When the parents attain the age of majority, they are assigned parental responsibility. If the general deputyship is revoked, the child protection authority shall assign parental responsibility in a manner appropriate to the child's best interests.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 2971Abis. Death of a parent

Abis. Death of a parent

1 If the parents have joint parental responsibility and one parent dies, the surviving parent retains sole parental responsibility.

2 If a parent who has sole parental responsibility dies, the child protection authority shall assign parental responsibility to the surviving parent or if a legal guardian is appointed for the child, to the person more suited to safeguarding the child's best interests.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 2981Ater. Divorce and other marital proceedings

Ater. Divorce and other marital proceedings

1 In divorce proceedings or proceedings to protect the marital union, the court shall assign one parent sole parental responsibility if this is necessary to safeguard the child's best interests.

2 It may limit itself to regulating residence, contact or sharing of parenting duties if there is no prospect of the parents agreeing on these matters.

2bis When regulating residence, contact and the sharing of parenting duties it shall take account of the right of the child to maintain regular personal relationships with both parents.2

2ter Where joint parental responsibility is awarded, with respect to the child’s best interests, it shall consider the possibility of the child residing with both parents on an alternating basis, if this is requested by one of the parents or by the child.3

3 It shall request the child protection authority to appoint a legal guardian for the child if neither the mother nor the father can be expected to accept parental responsibility.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298a1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / I. Joint declaration by the parents

Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity

I. Joint declaration by the parents

1 If the parents are not married to each other and if the father recognises the child, or the parent-child relationship is established by court judgment but joint parental responsibility was not ordered at the time of the judgment, joint parental responsibility is established based on a joint declaration by the parents.

2 In the declaration, the parents confirm that they:

1.
are prepared to accept joint responsibility for the child; and
2.
have agreed on residence and contact or on the sharing of parenting duties and on the child maintenance contribution for the child.

3 Before making the declaration, the parents may seek advice from the child protection authority.

4 If the parents make the declaration at the same time as recognising paternity, the declaration is made to the civil registrar. A subsequent declaration must be made to the child protection authority at the child's domicile.

5 Unless and until the declaration has been made, the mother has sole parental responsibility.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 298b1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / II. Decision of the child protection authority

II. Decision of the child protection authority

1 If a parent refuses to make a declaration on joint parental responsibility, the other parent may request the child protection authority at the child's domicile to intervene.

2 The child protection authority shall order joint parental responsibility, unless the mother should retain sole parental responsibility or sole parental responsibility should be assigned to the father in order to safeguard the child's best interests.

3 At the same time as deciding on parental responsibility, the child protection authority shall regulate any other matters in dispute. An action for payment of the maintenance contribution may be brought before the competent court; in such a case the court also decides on parental responsibility and other matters relating to the child.2

3bis In its decision on residence, contact and the sharing of parenting duties, the child protection authority shall take account of the right of the child to maintain regular personal relationships with both parents.3

3ter Where joint parental responsibility is awarded, with respect to the child’s best interests, it shall consider the possibility of the child residing with both parents on an alternating basis, if this is requested by one of the parents or by the child.4

4 If the mother is a minor or subject to a general deputyship, the child protection authority shall assign parental responsibility to the father or appoint a legal guardian for the child, depending on which measure is more suitable to safeguard the child's best interests.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Second sentence amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
4 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298c1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / III. Paternity action

III. Paternity action

If the court upholds a paternity action, it shall order joint parental responsibility unless the mother retains sole parental responsibility or sole parental responsibility is assigned to the father in order to safeguard the child's best interests.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 298d1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / IV. Change in circumstances

IV. Change in circumstances

1 At the request of either parent, the child or ex officio, the child protection authority shall reassign parental responsibility if this is necessary to safeguard the child's best interests due to a substantial change in circumstances.

2 It may limit itself to regulating residence, contact or the sharing of parenting duties.

3 An action for a change to the maintenance payments may be brought to the competent court; in such a case the court may make a new ruling on parental responsibility and other matters relating to the child.2


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298e1Aquinquies. Change in the situation after the adoption of a stepchild in a cohabitation relationship

Aquinquies. Change in the situation after the adoption of a stepchild in a cohabitation relationship

If the person who adopts the child cohabits with the child’s mother or father, and there is a substantial change in the circumstances, the provision on the change of circumstances applies mutatis mutandis in the case of recognition and judgement of paternity.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2991Asexies. Step-parents

Asexies. Step-parents2

Each spouse must give the other reasonable support in exercising parental responsibility over the latter’s children and must represent the other spouse as circumstances require.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 3001Asepties. Foster parents

Asepties. Foster parents2

1 If a child is placed in foster care with third parties, unless the relevant orders provide otherwise, these third parties exercise parental responsibility over the child in loco parentis to the extent required for the proper fulfilment of their duties.

2 Foster parents must be consulted before any important decisions are taken regarding the child.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 3011B. Scope / I. In general

B. Scope

I. In general

1 The parents raise and care for a child with his or her best interests in mind and take all necessary decisions unless the child has capacity to act.

1bis The parent who is taking care of the child may decide alone if:

1.
the matter is routine or urgent;
2.
the other parent cannot be consulted without incurring unreasonable trouble or expense.2

2 The child owes his or her parents obedience; according to how mature the child is, the parents shall allow the child the freedom to shape his or her own life and, wherever feasible, take due account of the child’s opinion in important matters.

3 The child is not permitted to leave the family home without the parents’ consent, nor may he or she be unlawfully removed from them.

4 The parents give the child his or her first name.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 301a1B. Scope / II. Deciding on the place of residence

II. Deciding on the place of residence

1 Parental responsibility includes the right to decide on the child's place of residence.

2 If parents exercise joint parental responsibility and if one parent wishes to change the child's place of residence, this requires the consent of the other parent or a decision of the court or the child protection authority if:

a.
the new place of residence is outside Switzerland; or
b.
the change of place of residence has serious consequences for the ability of the other parent to exercise parental responsibility and have contact.

3 If one parent has sole parental responsibility and if he or she wishes to change the child's place of residence, he must inform the other parent of this in good time.

4 A parent who wishes to change his or her own domicile has the same duty to provide information.

5 If required, the parents shall agree to modify the rules on parental responsibility, residence, contact and the child maintenance contribution in such a way as to safeguard the child's best interests. If they are unable to agree, the court or the child protection authority decides.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3021B. Scope / III. Upbringing

III. Upbringing2

1 The parents must raise the child according to their circumstances and encourage and safeguard the child's physical, mental and moral development.

2 The parents must arrange for the child, especially if he or she has physical or learning disabilities, to receive an appropriate general and vocational education that corresponds as closely as possible to the child’s abilities and inclinations.

3 To that end, the parents must co-operate as appropriate with school authorities and, where required, with public and charitable youth support agencies.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3031B. Scope / IV. Religious upbringing

IV. Religious upbringing2

1 The parents are free to determine the child’s religious upbringing.

2 Any agreement restricting this freedom is invalid.

3 Once a child is 16 years of age, he or she is free to decide his or her own religious denomination.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3041B. Scope / V. Representation / 1. In relation to third parties / a. In general

V. Representation

1. In relation to third parties

a. In general2

1 By operation of law, the parents are vested with the power to represent the child in all dealings with third parties to the extent they have parental responsibility for the child.3

2 If both parents have parental responsibility, all third parties acting in good faith may assume that each parent acts with the other’s consent.4

3 Parents acting as their child's representative may not provide any financial guarantees, establish any foundations or make gifts on behalf of the client, with the exception of customary occasional gifts.5


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
4 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
5 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3051B. Scope / V. Representation / 1. In relation to third parties / b. Child’s legal status

b. Child’s legal status2

1 A child under parental responsibility may by his or her own acts establish rights and obligations and exercise strictly personal rights under the law of persons.3

2 The child is liable with all his or her assets for any obligations entered into, without regard to the parents’ property rights.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3061B. Scope / V. Representation / 2. Within the family community

2. Within the family community

1 Children with capacity of judgement who are under parental responsibility may, with their parents’ consent, act for the family as a whole, but in so doing engage not themselves but their parents.2

2 If the parents are prevented from acting or if they have interests in a matter that conflict with those of the child, the child protection authority shall appoint a deputy or regulate the matter itself.3

3 In the event of a conflict of interests, the parents' powers become automatically void by law in relation to the matter concerned.4


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3071C. Child protection / I. Appropriate measures

C. Child protection

I. Appropriate measures

1 If the child’s best interests are threatened and the parents are unwilling or unable to remedy the situation, the child protection authority must take all appropriate measures to protect the child.

2 The child protection authority has the same duty with regard to children placed with foster parents or otherwise living outside the family home.

3 In particular it is entitled to remind parents, foster parents or the child of their duties, issue specific instructions regarding care, upbringing or education and appoint a suitable person or agency with powers to investigate and monitor the situation.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3081C. Child protection / II. Deputyship

II. Deputyship2

1 Where circumstances so require, the child protection authority shall appoint a child deputy whose function is to help the parents look after the child by providing advice and practical support.

2 It may assign special powers to the deputy, in particular to represent the child in the paternity action, in safeguarding the child's right to child support and the child's other rights and in supervising contact.3

3 Parental responsibility may be restricted accordingly.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3091

1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), with effect from 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3101C. Child protection / III. Revocation of the right to decide on place of residence

III. Revocation of the right to decide on place of residence2

1 Where there is no other way to avert a threat to the child’s best interests, the child protection authority must remove the child from the parents or from any third parties with whom he or she is staying and place the child in a suitable location.

2 At the request of the parents or the child, the child protection authority must do likewise if relations between them have deteriorated to the extent that it is no longer conscionable for the child to remain in the family home and provided no other practical remedy is available in the circumstances.

3 Where a child has lived for some length of time with foster parents, the child protection authority may forbid the parents to take the child back if such action might pose a serious risk to the child’s development.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3111C. Child protection / IV. Withdrawal of parental responsibility / 1. Ex-officio

IV. Withdrawal of parental responsibility

1. Ex-officio2

1 If other child protection measures have failed or offer little prospect of proving adequate, the child protection authority shall revoke parental responsibility:3

1.4
if the parents are unable to exercise parental responsibility as required on account of inexperience, illness, disability, absence, violent behaviour or other similar reasons;
2.
if the parents have not cared for the child to any meaningful degree or have flagrantly violated their duties towards the child.

2 Where parental responsibility is withdrawn from both parents, a legal guardian is appointed for their children.

3 Unless expressly ordered otherwise, the withdrawal of parental responsibility is effective in respect of all the children, including those born subsequently.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19. Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3121C. Child protection / IV. Withdrawal of parental responsibility / 2. With the parents' consent

2. With the parents' consent2

The child protection authority shall withdraw parental responsibility:3

1.
if the parents so request for good cause;
2.
if the parents have consented to having the child adopted in future by unnamed third parties.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3131C. Child protection / V. Change in circumstances

V. Change in circumstances

1 If circumstances change, the child protection measures in place must be adapted to suit the new situation.

2 On no account may parental responsibility be restored within less than one year of its withdrawal.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3141C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 1. General

VI. Procedure

1. General

1 The provisions on the procedure before the adult protection authority apply mutatis mutandis.

2 In appropriate cases, the child protection authority may request the parents to attempt mediation.

3 If the child protection authority appoints a deputy, it shall state the tasks of the deputy and any restrictions on parental responsibility in the decision.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314a1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 2. Hearing for the child

2. Hearing for the child

1 The child is heard in person in an appropriate manner by the child protection authority or by a third party appointed for this purpose, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or other good cause.

2 The record of the hearing contains only the findings of relevance to the decision. The parents are informed of these findings.

3 A child capable of judgement may appeal against a decision to refuse a hearing.


1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 6 Oct. 1978 (AS 1980 31; BBl 1977 III 1). Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314abis1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 3. Representation for the child

3. Representation for the child

1 If necessary, the child protection authority shall order the child to be represented and appoint a person experienced in welfare and legal matters as the child's deputy.

2 The child protection authority shall consider the appointment of a representative in particular if:

1.
the proceedings relate to the child's accommodation;
2.
the parties file differing applications in relation to regulating parental responsibility or important contact issues.

3 The child's deputy may file applications and appeals.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314b1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 4. Committal to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital

4. Committal to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital

1 If the child must be committed to a secure institution or a psychiatric hospital, the adult protection provisions on care-related hospitalisation apply mutatis mutandis.

2 If the child is capable of judgement, he or she may petition the court directly.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314c1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 5. Right to notify

1 Any person may notify the child protection authorities if a child’s physical, mental or sexual integrity appears to be at risk.

5. Right to notify

2 If a report is in the interest of the child, persons who are subject to professional confidentiality under the Swiss Criminal Code2 are also entitled to notify the authorities. This provision does not apply to auxiliary persons bound by professional confidentiality under the Criminal Code.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0

Art. 314d1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 6. Duty to notify

6. Duty to notify

1 The following persons, provided they are not subject to professional confidentiality under the Swiss Criminal Code2, are obliged to report if there are clear indications that the physical, psychological or sexual integrity of a child is at risk and that they cannot remedy the threat as part of their professional activities:

1.
specialists from the fields of medicine, psychology, care services, childcare, education, counselling, religion and sport who have regular contact with children;
2.
persons who learn of such a case in their official capacity.

2 The duty to notify is fulfilled when a person notifies a superior.

3 The cantons may provide for further notification obligations.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0

Art. 314e1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 7. Cooperation and administrative assistance

7. Cooperation and administrative assistance

1 The persons and third parties involved in the proceedings are obliged to cooperate in ascertaining the facts of the case. The child protection authority issues the necessary orders to protect any interests worthy of protection. If necessary, it shall issue an order for the compulsory enforcement of the duty to cooperate.

2 Persons bound by professional confidentiality in accordance with the Swiss Criminal Code2 are entitled to cooperate without having to be released from this confidentiality requirement beforehand. This provision does not apply to auxiliary persons bound by professional confidentiality under the Criminal Code.

3 Persons bound by professional confidentiality in accordance with the Swiss Criminal Code are obliged to cooperate if the person entitled to confidentiality has authorised them to do so or if the superior authority or the supervisory authority has released them from professional confidentiality at the request of the child protection authority. Article 13 of the Lawyers Act of 23 June 20003 remains reserved.

4 Administrative authorities and courts shall pass on the necessary documentation, reports and information, provided there is no conflict with interests worthy of protection.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0
3 SR 935.61

Art. 3151C. Child protection / VII. Jurisdiction / 1. In general

VII. Jurisdiction

1. In general2

1 Child protection measures are ordered by the child protection authorities at the child’s domicile.3

2 If the child lives with foster parents or otherwise outside the parental family home or if there is risk in delay, responsibility also rests with the authorities of the place in which the child is currently staying.

3 If the latter authorities implement a child protection measure, they must inform the authority at the child’s domicile.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 315a1C. Child protection / VII. Jurisdiction / 2. In marital proceedings / a. Jurisdiction of the court

2. In marital proceedings

a. Jurisdiction of the court

1 If the court is called on to rule on relations between the parents and the children in accordance with the provisions governing divorce or protection of the marital union, it must also order all necessary child protection measures and instruct the child protection authority to implement them.2

2 The court may also modify child protection measures already in place to take account of changes in circumstances.

3 However, the child protection authority retains the power:3

1.
to continue child protection proceedings introduced prior to the court proceedings;
2.
to order such measures as are required immediately to protect the child where the court is unlikely to be able to do so in good time.

1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1). Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 315b1C. Child protection / VII. Jurisdiction / 2. In marital proceedings / b. Amendment of court orders

b. Amendment of court orders

1 The court has jurisdiction to amend court orders regarding custody awards and child protection:

1.
during divorce proceedings;
2.
in proceedings to alter the divorce decree pursuant to the regulations governing divorce;
3.
in proceedings to modify measures for protection of the marital union; the regulations governing divorce are applicable mutatis mutandis.

2 In all other cases jurisdiction lies with the child protection authority.2


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3161C. Child protection / VIII. Supervision of foster children

VIII. Supervision of foster children

1 Any person taking in foster children requires authorisation from and is under the supervision of the child protection authority at his domicile or some other body designated by the canton.

1bis Where a child is fostered with a view to subsequent adoption, a single cantonal authority is responsible.2

2 The Federal Council enacts implementing regulations.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Adoption Convention and Measures to Protect Children in respect of Inter-Country Adoption, in force since 1 Jan. 2003 (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795).

Art. 3171C. Child protection / IX. Cooperation in youth support

IX. Cooperation in youth support

The cantons issue such regulations as are required to ensure effective cooperation between the authorities and official bodies in the areas of child protection under civil law, the criminal law relating to young offenders and other youth support activities.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).


  Section Four: Property of the Child14 

Art. 3181A. Management

A. Management

1 As long as they have parental responsibility for the child, the parents have the right and the duty to administer the child’s property.

2 If a parent dies, the surviving parent must file an inventory of the child's property with the child protection authority.2

3 If the child protection authority regards it as appropriate in view of the nature and extent of the child's property and the personal circumstances of the parents, it shall order an inventory to be prepared or regular accounts and reports to be submitted.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3191B. Use of income

B. Use of income

1 The parents are permitted to use the income from the child’s property for the child’s maintenance, upbringing and education and, where equitable, also for the requirements of the household.

2 Any surplus accrues to the child’s property.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3201C. Drawing on the child’s assets

C. Drawing on the child’s assets

1 Settlements, compensation and similar payments may be used in portions to fund the child’s maintenance in accordance with its current requirements.

2 Where necessary to meet the costs of maintenance, upbringing or education, the child protection authority may permit the parents to make use of other parts of the child’s assets in specific amounts.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3211D. Freely disposable property of the child / I. Endowments

D. Freely disposable property of the child

I. Endowments

1 The parents are not permitted to draw on revenue from the child’s assets if, when given to the child, they were designated as interest-bearing investments or savings or use of the revenue by the parents was expressly excluded.

2 Management by the parents is excluded only where expressly so provided when the child is endowed with the assets.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3221D. Freely disposable property of the child / II. Statutory entitlement

II. Statutory entitlement

1 By testamentary disposition the child’s statutory inheritance entitlement may also be excluded from management by the parents.

2 If the testator appoints a third party to administer the bequest, the child protection authority may require the latter to carry out periodic accounting and reporting.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3231D. Freely disposable property of the child / III. Employment income, professional and business assets

III. Employment income, professional and business assets

1 The child manages and enjoys the benefits of all fruits of his or her own labour and of those of his or her assets that are released by his or her parents for use in the child's professional or business activities.

2 If the child lives with its parents in the family home, they may require the child to make an appropriate contribution to his or her maintenance.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3241E. Protection of the child’s property / I. Appropriate measures

E. Protection of the child’s property

I. Appropriate measures

1 Where there is no adequate guarantee that the child’s property will be diligently managed, the child protection authority takes the necessary measures to protect it.

2 In particular, the child protection authority may issue instructions regarding such management and, where the periodic accounting and reporting is insufficient, may order the parents to deposit the property or furnish security.

3 Procedure and jurisdiction are regulated mutatis mutandis by the provisions governing child protection.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3251E. Protection of the child’s property / II. Withdrawal of management

II. Withdrawal of management

1 If there is no other way to avert a threat to the child’s property, the child protection authority shall appoint a child welfare advocate to manage it.

2 The child protection authority does likewise if a child’s property that is not managed by the parents is threatened.

3 Where there is serious concern that income from the child’s property or the amounts designated for use or released to cover the child’s needs are not being used as intended, the child protection authority may also appoint a child welfare advocate to manage those assets.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3261F. End of asset management / I. Return of property

F. End of asset management

I. Return of property

On termination of parental responsibility or the parents’ management, the parents must hand over the child’s property together with a final statement of account to the adult child or to the child’s legal representative.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3271F. End of asset management / II. Liability

II. Liability

1 The parents are liable to make restitution as if they were authorised agents.

2 The parents must surrender the proceeds of any property alienated in good faith.

3 The parents do not owe compensation for any authorised expenditures on the child or the household.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).


  Section Five:15  Minors subject to Guardianship

Art. 327a A. Principle

A. Principle

If a child is not subject to parental responsibility, the child protection authority shall appoint a guardian for the child.

Art. 327b B. Legal status / I. Of the child

B. Legal status

I. Of the child

A child subject to guardianship has the same legal status as a child subject to parental responsibility.

Art. 327c B. Legal status / II. Of the guardian

II. Of the guardian

1 A guardian has the same rights as the parents.

2 The provisions on adult protection, and in particular on appointing a and acting as a deputy and the involvement of the adult protection authority apply mutatis mutandis.

3 If the child must be committed to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital, the adult protection provisions on care-related hospitalisation apply mutatis mutandis.


  Title Nine: Family Community

  Chapter One: Duty of Assistance

Art. 3281A. Persons obliged to lend assistance

A. Persons obliged to lend assistance

1 A person living in financial comfort has a duty to lend assistance to any lineal relatives of older or younger generations who would suffer hardship without such assistance.

2 The duty of maintenance of parents, spouses and registered partners is reserved.2


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Federal Act on Partnerships of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 329 B. Scope and enforcement of the claim for assistance

B. Scope and enforcement of the claim for assistance1

1 The claim for assistance is directed against those with a duty to provide it in order of their inheritance entitlements; the amount is dependent on the degree of assistance required to maintain the indigent claimant and on the circumstances of the person obliged to provide it.

1bis No claim for support may be made if the hardship arises from a restriction in the ability to pursue gainful employment owing to the care of one’s own children.2

2 Where in the light of special circumstances the court deems it inequitable to require a person to fulfil his duty of assistance, the court may restrict such duty or revoke it entirely.3

3 The provisions governing child maintenance entitlement and the transfer of such entitlement to the state authority are applicable mutatis mutandis.4


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
4 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 330 C. Maintenance of foundlings

C. Maintenance of foundlings

1 Foundlings are maintained by the commune in which they have become naturalised.

2 If a foundling’s parentage is established, the commune may require those relatives with a duty of assistance and, as a last recourse, the state authority under such duty to compensate it for the costs incurred in maintaining the foundling.


  Chapter Two: Authority within the Household

Art. 331 A. Requirement

A. Requirement

1 Where by law, agreement or family custom persons living in common household have a head of the family, such person holds authority within the household.

2 The authority extends over all persons living in the household, whether relatives by blood1 or by marriage or employees or persons in a similar position based on a contractual relationship.2


1 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 2 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).

Art. 332 B. Effect / I. House rules and welfare

B. Effect

I. House rules and welfare

1 The house rules to which the household members are subject must take due account of the interests of all involved.

2 In particular, the household members must be allowed the freedom required for their education, occupation and religious practices.

3 All property brought in by the household members must be kept safe and sound by the head of the family with the same care and attention given to his own property.

Art. 333 B. Effect / II. Liability

II. Liability

1 If damage is caused by a member of the household who is a minor, suffers from a mental disability, is subject to a general deputyship, or is mentally ill, the head of the family is liable unless he can show that his supervision of the household was as diligent as would normally be expected in the circumstances prevailing.1

2 The head of the family is obliged to ensure that the condition of a household member who suffers from a mental disability or a mental illness does not result in risk or damage to himself or to others.2

3 Where necessary, the head of the family must notify the competent authority with a view to having the requisite precautionary measures put in place.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3341B. Effect / III. Claims of children and grandchildren / 1. Requirements

III. Claims of children and grandchildren

1. Requirements

1 Adult children or grandchildren who have contributed their labour or income to parents or grandparents with whom they live in a common household are entitled to suitable compensation in return.2

2 In the event of dispute the court determines the amount of compensation, the security required and the payment method.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, in force since 15 Feb. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 334bis1B. Effect / III. Claims of children and grandchildren / 2. Asserting claims

2. Asserting claims

1 The compensation due to children or grandchildren may be claimed on the debtor’s death.

2 It may also be claimed during the debtor’s lifetime if his property is distrained or he is declared bankrupt, the common household ceases to exist or the business changes hands.

3 The claim is not subject to prescription, but must be brought at the latest on division of the deceased debtor’s estate.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, in force since 15 Feb. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).


  Chapter Three: Family Property

Art. 335 A. Family foundations

A. Family foundations

1 A body of assets may be tied to a family by means of a family foundation created under the law of persons or inheritance law in order to meet the costs of raising, endowing or supporting family members or for similar purposes.

2 It is no longer permitted to establish a fee tail.

Art. 336 B. Ownership in undivided shares / I. Formation / 1. Authority

B. Ownership in undivided shares

I. Formation

1. Authority

Members of a family may tie a body of assets to the family by placing all or part of an inheritance or other property under joint ownership in undivided shares.

Art. 337 B. Ownership in undivided shares / I. Formation / 2. Form

2. Form

The agreement establishing joint ownership in undivided shares is valid only if done as a public deed signed by all co-owners or their representatives.

Art. 338 B. Ownership in undivided shares / II. Duration

II. Duration

1 Joint ownership in undivided shares may be constituted for a limited or indefinite duration.

2 If constituted for an indefinite duration, it may be terminated by any co-owner subject to six months’ notice.

3 Where the co-owned asset is an agricultural enterprise, such notice must always expire on a spring or autumn date in accordance with local custom.

Art. 339 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 1. Type of ownership

III. Effect

1. Type of ownership

1 Joint ownership in undivided shares binds the co-owners together in common economic activity.

2 Unless otherwise provided, they enjoy equal rights in the co-owned property.

3 For the duration of their joint ownership in undivided shares, they may neither seek a division of the property nor dispose of their own share.

Art. 340 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 2. Management and representation / a. In general

2. Management and representation

a. In general

1 The affairs of the joint ownership in undivided shares are regulated by all the co-owners acting collectively.

2 Each co-owner may take ordinary administrative actions on his own initiative.

Art. 341 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 2. Management and representation / b. Manager's powers

b. Manager's powers

1 The co-owners may appoint one of their number to act as their manager.

2 The manager represents the co-owners in all external dealings and directs their economic activities.

3 Where representation by the other co-owners is excluded, such exclusion may be invoked against third parties acting in good faith only if the sole representative is entered in the commercial register.

Art. 342 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 3. Common property and personal property

3. Common property and personal property

1 The property under joint ownership in undivided shares is owned collectively by all the co-owners.

2 The co-owners are jointly and severally liable for debts encumbering such property.

3 Except where otherwise agreed, all property belonging to a co-owner besides that owned collectively in undivided shares, and all property inherited or acquired in some other manner without valuable consideration during the co-ownership is the personal property of that co-owner.

Art. 343 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 1. Grounds

IV. Dissolution

1. Grounds

Joint ownership in undivided shares is dissolved:

1.
by agreement or notice of termination;
2.
on expiry of the period for which ownership in undivided shares was established, providing it is not tacitly renewed;
3.
on realisation of a co-owner’s share of the property that has been distrained;
4.
if a co-owner is declared bankrupt;
5.
at the request of a co-owner for good cause.
Art. 344 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 2. Notice, insolvency, marriage

2. Notice, insolvency, marriage

1 If one co-owner gives notice to terminate joint ownership in undivided shares or is declared bankrupt, or if his share is realised after having been distrained, joint ownership in undivided shares may be maintained by the other co-owners provided they reach a settlement with him or his creditors.

2 A co-owner who marries is entitled to request such settlement without giving notice of termination.

Art. 345 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 3. Death of a co-owner

3. Death of a co-owner

1 On the death of a co-owner, heirs who are not also co-owners are entitled only to settlement of his share.

2 Where he is survived by issue entitled to inherit his share, with the consent of the other co-owners such issue may accede to the joint ownership in undivided shares in his place.

Art. 346 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 4. Division

4. Division

1 Division of the collectively owned property or settlement of a withdrawing co-owner’s share is based on the condition of the property when the grounds for dissolution arose.

2 Its implementation may not be requested at an inopportune time.

Art. 347 B. Ownership in undivided shares / V. Revenue-generating co-ownership / 1. Nature

V. Revenue-generating co-ownership

1. Nature

1 The co-owners may entrust the exploitation and representation of the collectively owned property to one of their number on condition that he pay each co-owner a share of the net profit annually.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, such share is determined equitably on the basis of the average revenues generated by the property over a sufficiently long period and with due regard to the work done by the person managing it.

Art. 348 B. Ownership in undivided shares / V. Revenue-generating co-ownership / 2. Special grounds for dissolution

2. Special grounds for dissolution

1 If the collectively owned property is not properly managed or the managing co-owner fails to meet his obligations towards the other co-owners, the joint ownership in undivided shares may be dissolved.

2 Where there is good cause, a co-owner may request the court to authorise him to assume joint management of the property, taking due consideration of the provisions governing the division of the estate.

3 In all other respects, revenue-generating joint ownership in undivided shares is subject to the provisions governing the joint ownership in undivided shares of a collectively managed business.

Art. 349–3581

1 Repealed by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, with effect from 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 3591

1 Repealed by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Federal Government, with effect from 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).


  Division Three:16  The Protection of Adults

  Title Ten: Own Arrangements for Care and Statutory Measures

  Section One: Own Arrangements for Care

  Subsection One: The Advance Care Directive

Art. 360 A. Principle

A. Principle

1 A person with capacity to act may instruct a natural person or legal entity to take responsibility for his or her personal care or the management of his or her assets or to act as his or her legal agent in the event that he or she is no longer capable of judgement.

2 He or she must define the tasks that are to be assigned and may issue instructions on how these tasks are to be fulfilled.

3 He or she may provide for a replacement for the event that the appointee is not suitable for the tasks, does not accept the mandate or terminates the mandate.

Art. 361 B. Execution and revocation / I. Execution

B. Execution and revocation

I. Execution

1 The advance care directive must be executed in holographic form or publicly authenticated.

2 A holograph advance care directive must be handwritten, dated and signed by the client from beginning to end.

3 On request, the Civil Register Office shall record in the central database the fact that a person has executed an advance care directive and the place where it is kept. The Federal Council shall issue the required provisions, in particular on the access to the data.

Art. 362 B. Execution and revocation / II. Revocation

II. Revocation

1 The client may revoke the advance care directive at any time in either of the ways provided for its execution.

2 He or she may also revoke the advance care directive by destroying the document.

3 If he or she executes a new advance care directive without expressly revoking the previous directive, the new advance care directive replaces the previous one unless it is clearly no more than an amendment to the same.

Art. 363 C. Decision on effectiveness and acceptance

C. Decision on effectiveness and acceptance

1 Where the adult protection authority learns that a person is no longer capable of judgement, but it is unaware if there is an advance care directive, it shall enquire at the Civil Register Office.

2 If there is an advance care directive, the adult protection authority shall verify if:

1.
the directive has been validly executed;
2.
the requirements for its effectiveness are met;
3.
the appointee is fit for his or her duties; and
4.
if further adult protection measures are required.

3 If the appointee accepts the advance care directive, the authority shall advise him or her of his or her obligations under the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency contracts and issue him or her with a formal document stating his or her powers.


1 SR 220

Art. 364 D. Interpretation and clarification

D. Interpretation and clarification

The appointee may request the adult protection authority to interpret the advance care directive and to add clarification to secondary points.

Art. 365 E. Fulfilment

E. Fulfilment

1 The appointee shall represent the client in accordance with the advance care directive and fulfil his or her duties with due care in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency contracts.

2 Where transactions must be carried out that are not covered by the advance care directive, or if the appointee has an interest in a matter that conflicts with that of the client, the appointee shall notify the adult protection authority immediately.

3 In the event of a conflict of interest, the powers of the appointee cease to apply by law.


1 SR 220

Art. 366 F. Remuneration and expenses

F. Remuneration and expenses

1 If the advance care directive has no instructions on the remuneration of the appointee, the adult protection authority shall specify appropriate remuneration provided this appears justified given the extent of the duties or if the services provided by the appointee are normally remunerated.

2 The remuneration and the required expenses are charged to the client.

Art. 367 G. Termination

G. Termination

1 The appointee may terminate the advance care directive at any time subject to giving two months' written notice to the adult protection authority.

2 For good cause, the appointee may terminate the directive without notice.

Art. 368 H. Intervention by the adult protection authority

H. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 If the interests of the client are endangered or no longer protected, the adult protection authority may take the required measures ex officio or at the request of a closely associated person.

2 It may in particular issue the appointee with instructions, order the appointee to file an inventory, regular accounts and reports or revoke all or some of his or her powers.

Art. 369 I. Regaining the capacity of judgement

I. Regaining the capacity of judgement

1 If the client regains the capacity of judgement, the advance care directive shall by law cease to have effect.

2 If the interests of the client are endangered thereby, the appointee must continue to carry out the tasks assigned to him or her until the client can safeguard his or her own interests.

3 The appointee is bound as if the directive still applies by transactions that he or she enters into before he or she learns that the directive has ceased to apply.


  Subsection Two: The Patient Decree

Art. 370 A. Principle

A. Principle

1 A person who is capable of judgement may specify in a patient decree which medical procedures he or she agrees or does not agree to in the event that he or she is no longer capable of judgement.

2 He or she may also designate a natural person who in the event that he or she is no longer capable of judgement should discuss the medical procedures with the attending doctor and decide on his or her behalf. He or she may issue instructions to this person.

3 He or she may issue alternative instructions for the event that the designated person is not suitable for the tasks, does not accept the mandate or terminates the mandate.

Art. 371 B. Execution and revocation

B. Execution and revocation

1 The patient decree must be executed in writing, and be dated and signed.

2 Any person who has executed a patient decree may have this fact and the place where it is kept entered on his or her health insurance card. The Federal Council shall issue the required provisions, in particular on the access to the data.

3 The provision on revoking an advance care directive applies mutatis mutandis.

Art. 372 C. Loss of capacity of judgement

C. Loss of capacity of judgement

1 If the patient lacks capacity of judgement and it is not known if there is a patient decree, the attending doctor shall ascertain the position from the health insurance card. The foregoing does not apply to urgent cases.

2 The doctor shall comply with the patient decree unless it violates statutory regulations or there is reasonable doubt that it is based on the patient's free will or still corresponds to his or her presumed will.

3 The doctor shall make a note in the patient records of any reasons why the patient decree was not complied with.

Art. 373 D. Intervention by the adult protection authority

D. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 Any person closely related to the patient may contact the adult protection authority in writing and claim that:

1.
the patient decree is not being complied with;
2.
the interests of the patient are being endangered or no longer safeguarded;
3.
the patient decree is not based on the patient's free will.

2 The provision on intervention by the adult protection authority in the case of an advance care directive applies mutatis mutandis.


  Section Two: Statutory Measures for Persons lacking Capacity of Judgement

  Sub-Section One: Representation by the Spouse or Registered Partner

Art. 374 A. Requirements for and extent of the right to act as representative

A. Requirements for and extent of the right to act as representative

1 Any person who as spouse or registered partner cohabits with a person who is no longer capable of judgement or who regularly and personally provides that person with support has a statutory right to act as that person's representative if there is no advance care directive and no deputy has been appointed.

2 The right to act as representative includes:

1.
all legal acts that are normally required to meet the need for support;
2.
due management of income and other assets; and
3.
the right to open and deal with post, if necessary.

3 For legal acts involving exceptional asset management, the spouse or the registered partner must obtain the consent of the adult protection authority.

Art. 375 B. Exercise of the right to act as representative

B. Exercise of the right to act as representative

The exercise of the right to act as representative is governed by the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency contracts mutatis mutandis.


1 SR 220

Art. 376 C. Intervention by the adult protection authority

C. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 If there is any doubt as to whether the requirements for representation are met, the adult protection authority shall decide on the right to act as representative and if required shall provide the spouse or the registered partner with a document stating his or her powers.

2 If the interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement are endangered or no longer safeguarded, the adult protection authority shall at the request of a closely associated person or ex officio revoke the power of the spouse or registered partner to act as representative partly or fully and shall appoint a deputy.


  Sub-Section Two: Representation in relation to Medical Procedures

Art. 377 A. Treatment plan

A. Treatment plan

1 If a person lacking capacity of judgement has not given instructions on treatment in a patient decree, the attending doctor shall plan the required treatment in consultation with the person entitled to act as representative in relation to medical procedures.

2 The doctor shall inform the representative about all the important aspects of the planned medical procedures, and in particular about the reasons therefor, their purpose, form, methods, risks, side effects and costs, the consequences of not carrying out the treatment and any alternative treatment options.

3 If possible, the person lacking capacity of judgement shall also be involved in making the decision.

4 The treatment plan shall be adapted to ongoing developments.

Art. 378 B. The representative

B. The representative

1 The following persons are entitled in the following order to represent the person lacking capacity of judgement and to grant or refuse consent to the planned out-patient or in-patient measures:

1.
a person appointed in a patient decree or in an advance care directive;
2.
a deputy with a right to act as representative in relation to medical procedures;
3.
any person who as a spouse or registered partner cohabits with the person lacking capacity of judgement or who regularly and personally provides him or her with support;
4.
any person who cohabits with the person lacking capacity of judgement and who regularly and personally provides him or her with support;
5.
issue who regularly and personally provide the person lacking capacity of judgement with support;
6.
the parents, if they regularly and personally provide the person lacking capacity of judgement with support;
7.
siblings, if they regularly and personally provide the person lacking capacity of judgement with support.

2 If two or more persons have the right to act as representative, the doctor, acting in good faith, may require that each act with the agreement of the others.

3 If a patient decree contains no instructions, the representative shall decide according to the presumed wishes and interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement.

Art. 379 C. Urgent cases

C. Urgent cases

In urgent cases, the doctor may carry out medical procedures according to the presumed wishes and interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement.

Art. 380 D. Treatment of a mental disorder

D. Treatment of a mental disorder

The treatment of a mental disorder of a person lacking capacity of judgement in a psychiatric hospital is governed by the provisions on care-related hospitalisation.

Art. 381 E. Intervention by the adult protection authority

E. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 The adult protection authority shall establish a representative deputyship if there is no representative available or the representative does not wish to exercise the right to act.

2 It shall appoint a representative or establish a representative deputyship if:

1.
it is unclear who has a right to act as representative
2.
the persons with a right to act as representative are unable to agree; or
3.
the interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement are endangered or no longer safeguarded.

3 It shall act at the request of the doctor, another closely associated person or ex officio.


  Sub-Section Three: Stays in Residential or Care Institutions

Art. 382 A. Care agreement

A. Care agreement

1 If a person lacking capacity of judgement is cared for in a residential or nursing institution for a longer period, a written care agreement must be drawn up to regulate the services that the institution provides and the costs thereof.

2 In determining the services provided by the institution, account must be taken of the wishes of the person concerned as far as possible.

3 Responsibility for representing the person lacking capacity of judgement in concluding, amending or terminating the care agreement is governed mutatis mutandis by the provisions on representation relating to medical procedures.

Art. 383 B. Restriction of freedom of movement / I. Requirements

B. Restriction of freedom of movement

I. Requirements

1 The residential or nursing institution may restrict the freedom of movement of the person lacking capacity of judgement only if less stringent measures are clearly insufficient or prove to be so and the measure serves to:

1.
prevent serious danger to the life or physical integrity of the client or third parties; or
2.
remedy serious disruption to life in and around the institution.

2 Before his or her freedom of movement is restricted, it shall be explained to the person concerned what is happening, why the measure has been ordered, how long it will probably last and who will be responsible for the person concerned during this period. The foregoing does not apply in emergencies.

3 An order to restrict freedom of movement shall be revoked as soon as possible and in every case reviewed regularly to ascertain whether it is still required.

Art. 384 B. Restriction of freedom of movement / II. Records and Information

II. Records and Information

1 A record shall be kept of any measure restricting freedom of movement. This shall contain in particular the names of the person ordering the measure, the purpose, the nature and the duration the measure.

2 The representative in relation to medical procedures shall be notified of the measure restricting freedom of movement and may inspect the record at any time.

3 The persons supervising the residential or nursing institution shall also have a right to inspect the record.

Art. 385 B. Restriction of freedom of movement / III. Intervention by the adult protection authority

III. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 The person concerned or a closely related person may submit a written request at any time for the adult protection authority at the location of the institution to intervene in relation to a measure restricting freedom of movement.

2 If the adult protection authority establishes that the measure fails to meet the statutory requirements, it shall amend the measure, revoke it or order an official adult protection measure. If necessary, it shall notify the institution's supervisory authority.

3 Any request for an assessment to be made by the adult protection authority shall be passed on to the authority immediately.

Art. 386 C. Protection of privacy

C. Protection of privacy

1 The residential or nursing institution shall protect the privacy of a person lacking capacity of judgement and where possible encourage contacts with persons outside the institution.

2 If no one outside the institution expresses an interest in the client, the residential or nursing institution shall notify the adult protection authority.

3 The freedom to choose one's doctor shall be respected unless there is good cause for not doing so.

Art. 387 D. Supervision of residential and care institution

D. Supervision of residential and care institution

The cantons shall make residential and care institution in which person lacking capacity of judgement are cared for subject to supervision, unless federal regulations already guarantee supervision.


  Title Eleven: Official Measures

  Section One: General Principles

Art. 388 A. Aim

A. Aim

1 Official adult protection measures shall aim to secure the best interests and protection of persons in need.

2 Where possible, they should preserve and encourage the independence of the persons concerned.

Art. 389 B. Subsidiarity and proportionality

B. Subsidiarity and proportionality

1 The adult protection authority shall order a measure if:

1.
support for the person in need offered by his or her family, other closely related persons or private or public services is or proves to be insufficient;
2.
where the person in need is no longer capable of judgement, he or she has failed to make any or sufficient arrangements for his or her own care and the statutory measures are insufficient.

2 Any official measure must be necessary and suitable.


  Section Two: The Deputyship

  Sub-Section One: General Provisions

Art. 390 A. Requirements

A. Requirements

1 The adult protection authority shall establish a deputyship if an adult:

1.
due to a learning disability, a mental disorder or a similar inherent debility is wholly or partially unable to manage his or her own affairs;
2.
due to a temporary loss of the capacity of judgement or temporary absence is neither able to take care of matters that must be dealt with, nor has appointed a representative.

2 Account must be taken of the burden on and the protection of family members and third parties.

3 The deputyship shall be established at the request of the person concerned (the client) or a closely associated person or ex officio.

Art. 391 B. Scope of responsibilities

B. Scope of responsibilities

1 The adult protection authority shall define the scope of the deputyship's responsibilities according to the needs of the client.

2 The scope of responsibilities shall relate to personal care, the management of his or her assets or legal matters.

3 Without the consent of the client, the deputy may only open his or her post or enter his or her residence if the adult protection authority has expressly granted the power to do so.

Art. 392 C. Dispensing with a deputyship

C. Dispensing with a deputyship

If establishing a deputyship is clearly a disproportionate measure due the extent of the work involved, the adult protection authority may:

1.
do what is required itself, and in particular consent to a transaction;
2.
instruct third parties to carry out individual tasks; or
3.
designate a suitable person or agency that must be consulted and informed on specific matters.

  Sub-Section Two: Types of Deputyship

Art. 393 A. Assistance deputyship

A. Assistance deputyship

1 An assistance deputyship is established with the consent of the person in need if he or she needs assistance in order to deal with certain matters.

2 The assistance deputyship does not limit the capacity of the client to act.

Art. 394 B. Representative deputyship / I. In general

B. Representative deputyship

I. In general

1 A representative deputyship is established if the person in need is unable to deal with certain matters and therefore must be represented.

2 The adult protection authority may limit the capacity of the client to act accordingly.

3 Even if his or her capacity to act has not been limited, the client is bound by the acts of the deputy.

Art. 395 B. Representative deputyship / II. Asset management

II. Asset management

1 If the adult protection authority establishes a representative deputyship to manage assets, it shall specify the assets to be managed by the deputy. It may make all or part of the income, all or part of the capital or all or part of the income and capital subject to the deputy's management.

2 The management powers also cover savings from the managed income or the revenue from the managed capital unless the adult protection authority provides otherwise.

3 Without limiting the capacity of the client to act, the adult protection authority may prohibit him or her from accessing individual assets.

4 If the adult protection authority prohibits the client from disposing of heritable property, it must arrange for a note to be made in the land register.

Art. 396 C. Advisory deputyship

C. Advisory deputyship

1 An advisory deputyship shall be established if the client requires for his or her own protection that certain acts be made subject to the consent of the deputy.

2 The client's capacity to act shall thus be limited accordingly by law.

Art. 397 D. Combination of deputyships

D. Combination of deputyships

Assistance, representative and advisory deputyships may be combined with each other.

Art. 398 E. General deputyship

E. General deputyship

1 A general deputyship is established if a person, in particular due to permanent loss of capacity of judgement, is in particular need.

2 It covers all aspects of personal care, management of assets and legal matters.

3 The client's capacity to act is revoked by law.


  Sub-Section Three: End of the Deputyship

Art. 399

1 The deputyship ends by law on the death of the client.

2 The adult protection authority shall terminate a deputyship at the request of the client or of a closely associated person or ex officio as soon as there is no reason for it to continue.


  Sub-Section Four: The Deputy

Art. 400 A. Appointment / I. General requirements

A. Appointment

I. General requirements

1 The adult protection authority shall appoint as deputy a natural person who has the personal aptitude and knowledge to carry out the planned tasks, who has the time required to do so and who can carry out the tasks in person. Where circumstances require, it may appoint two or more persons.

2 The person may only be appointed with their consent.1

3 The adult protection authority shall ensure that the deputy receives the instructions, advice and support that he or she requires


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 29 Sept. 2017, in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2801; BBl 2017 1811 3205).

Art. 401 A. Appointment / II. Wishes of the client or his or her closely associated persons

II. Wishes of the client or his or her closely associated persons

1 If the client proposes someone as his or her deputy, the adult protection authority shall agree to the proposal provided the person proposed is suitable and is prepared to accept the deputyship

2 It shall if possible take account of the wishes of family members or other closely associated persons.

3 If the client rejects a specific person as the deputy, the adult protection authority shall respect this wish provided it is reasonable.

Art. 402 A. Appointment / III. Appointment of two or more persons

III. Appointment of two or more persons

1 If the adult protection authority appoints two or more persons as deputies, it shall specify whether their tasks should be carried out jointly or who is responsible for which tasks.

2 Two or more deputies may be required to carry out their tasks jointly only if they agree to do so.

Art. 403 B. Incapacity and conflict of interests

B. Incapacity and conflict of interests

1 If the deputy is unable to act or if the deputy's interests conflict with those of the client, the adult protection authority shall appoint a substitute deputy or regulate the matter itself.

2 In the event of a conflict of interests, the powers of the deputy cease to apply by law in the relevant matter.

Art. 404 C. Remuneration and expenses

C. Remuneration and expenses

1 The deputy is entitled to appropriate remuneration and to the reimbursement of necessary expenses from the assets of the client. In the case of professional deputies, the remuneration is paid and expenses reimbursed by the employer.

2 The adult protection authority determines the level of remuneration. It takes account in particular of the extent and the complexity of the tasks assigned to the deputy.

3 The cantons shall issue implementing provisions and rules on remuneration and reimbursing expenses if they cannot be paid out of the assets of the client.


  Sub-Section Five: Deputyship Tasks

Art. 405 A. Assumption of office

A. Assumption of office

1 The deputy shall obtain the information required to fulfil his or her tasks and shall make personal contact with the client.

2 If the deputyship involves asset management, the deputy shall immediately make an inventory of the assets to be managed in cooperation with the adult protection authority.

3 If justified in the circumstances, the adult protection authority may order a public inventory to be made. This has the same effect for creditors as a public inventory under the law of succession.

4 Third parties are obliged to provide all the information required for the inventory to be made.

Art. 406 B. Relationship with the client

B. Relationship with the client

1 The deputy shall carry out his or her tasks in the interests of the client, take account of the client's opinions, where possible, and respect the client's desire to organise his or her life in a way that corresponds to his or her abilities and accords with his or her wishes and ideas.

2 The deputy shall try to develop a relationship of mutual trust with the client and to prevent any deterioration in the client's debility or to reduce the effect thereof.

Art. 407 C. Client's autonomy

C. Client's autonomy

Even if his or her capacity to act has been revoked, a client who is capable of judgement may through his or her own acts establish rights and obligations under the law of persons, and exercise strictly personal rights.

Art. 408 D. Asset management / I. Tasks

D. Asset management

I. Tasks

1 The deputy shall manage the assets with due care and carry out all the legal acts connected with their management.

2 In particular the deputy may:

1.
accept payments due to the client by third parties thus discharging their obligations;
2.
pay debts where appropriate;
3.
represent the client in attending to his or her everyday needs, if necessary.

3 The Federal Council shall issue provisions on the investment and safe custody of assets.

Art. 409 D. Asset management / II. Personal allowance

II. Personal allowance

The deputy shall provide the client with an allowance from the client's assets which the client is free to spend.

Art. 410 D. Asset management / III. Accounts

III. Accounts

1 The deputy shall keep accounts and submit them to the adult protection authority for approval at regular intervals specified by the authority, and at least every two years.

2 The deputy shall explain the accounts to the client and provide him or her with a copy on request.

Art. 411 E. Reporting

E. Reporting

1 The deputy shall submit a report on the client's situation and the deputyship to the adult protection authority as often as necessary, but at least every two years.

2 The deputy shall if possible consult the client when preparing the report and provide the client with a copy request.

Art. 412 F. Special transactions

F. Special transactions

1 The deputy may not provide any financial guarantees, establish any foundations or make gifts on behalf of the client, with the exception of customary occasional gifts.

2 Assets that are of special value to the client or his or her family shall not be disposed of if possible.

Art. 413 G. Duties of care and confidentiality

G. Duties of care and confidentiality

1 In fulfilling his or her tasks, the deputy shall have the same duty of care as an agent under the provisions of the Code of Obligations1.

2 The deputyship is subject to a duty of confidentiality unless this is contrary to overriding interests.

3 Third parties must be notified of the existence of the deputyship provided this is required for the deputy to duly fulfil his or her tasks.


1 SR 220

Art. 414 H. Amendment of conditions

H. Amendment of conditions

The deputy shall notify the adult protection authority immediately of any circumstances that require the measure to be amended or make the termination of the deputyship possible.


  Sub-Section Six: Role of the Adult Protection Authority

Art. 415 A. Examination of accounts and report

A. Examination of accounts and report

1 The adult protection authority shall examine the accounts and grant or refuse approval thereof; if necessary, they shall require the accounts to be corrected.

2 It shall examine the report and, if necessary, require it to be amended.

3 If necessary, it shall take measures to safeguard the interests of the client appropriately.

Art. 416 B. Transactions requiring consent / I. By law

B. Transactions requiring consent

I. By law

1 The consent of the adult protection authority is required before the deputy may carry out any of the following transactions on behalf of the client:

1.
liquidation of the household, terminating the lease on a dwelling where the client lives;
2.
long-term contracts for the client's accommodation;
3.
acceptance or renunciation of a inheritance if an express declaration is required therefor, as well as contracts of succession and contracts dividing an estate;
4.
the acquisition, sale, pledge and other burdening of immovable property and the construction of buildings that goes beyond ordinary administrative activities;
5.
the acquisition, sale and pledge of other assets and the creation of a usufruct where such transactions do not fall under the conduct of ordinary administration and management;
6.
the acceptance and granting of substantial loans, entering into bill-of-exchange-related liabilities;
7.
life annuity and lifetime maintenance agreements as well as life assurance, provided these do not form part of an occupational pension in connection with a contract of employment;
8.
the takeover or liquidation of a business, involvement in a company with personal liability or a substantial capital participation;
9.
declaration of inability to pay, conduct of legal proceedings, conclusion of a settlement, an arbitration agreement or a composition agreement, subject to the reservation of provisional measures by the deputy in cases of urgency.

2 The adult protection authority's consent is not required if a client who is capable of judgement grants his or her consent and his or her capacity to act is not limited by the deputyship.

3 Contracts between the deputy and the client shall always require the adult protection authority's consent other than in the case of assignments issued by the client that do not involve the payment of a fee.

Art. 417 B. Transactions requiring consent / II. By order

II. By order

The adult protection authority may for good cause order that other transactions should require its consent.

Art. 418 B. Transactions requiring consent / III. Lack of consent

III. Lack of consent

If a transaction has been entered into without the required consent of the adult protection authority, this shall only affect the client to the extent provided for under the provisions of the law of persons on lack of consent from a legal representative.


  Sub-Section Seven: Intervention by the Adult Protection Authority

Art. 419

The client, a closely related person or any person with a legitimate interest may call on the adult protection authority to intervene in relation to acts or omissions by the deputy or by a third party or agency to which the adult protection authority has issued an assignment.


  Sub-Section Eight: Special Provisions for Family Members

Art. 420

If the client's spouse, registered partner, parents, issue, sibling, or de facto life partner is appointed deputy, the adult protection authority may wholly or partly absolve the deputy of the obligations to prepare an inventory, submit regular reports and accounts, and obtain consent for specific transaction if this is justified by the circumstances.


  Sub-Section Nine: Termination of the Office of Deputy

Art. 421 A. By law

A. By law

The office of deputy terminates by law:

1.
on expiry of a term of office set by the adult protection authority, unless the deputy is confirmed in office;
2.
with the end of the deputyship;
3.
with termination of employment as a professional deputy;
4.
in the event that the deputy is made subject to a deputyship, becomes incapable of judgement, or dies.
Art. 422 B. Discharge / I. At the deputy's request

B. Discharge

I. At the deputy's request

1 The deputy may request to be discharged at the earliest after serving a term of four years.

2 Prior to this, the deputy may request to be discharged for good cause.

Art. 423 B. Discharge / II. Other cases

II. Other cases

1 The adult protection authority shall discharge the deputy if:

1.
he or she is no longer suitable to carry out the tasks;
2.
there is other good cause for his or her discharge.

2 The client or a closely associated person may request that the deputy be discharged.

Art. 424 C. Continuation of transactions

C. Continuation of transactions

The deputy must continue with transactions that cannot be postponed until a successor takes over office, unless the adult protection authority orders otherwise. This provision does not apply to a professional deputy.

Art. 425 D. Final report and final accounts

D. Final report and final accounts

1 When the term of office ends, the deputy shall submit a final report to the adult protection authority and if applicable file the final accounts. The adult protection authority may waive this requirement for professional deputies if the employment relationship ends.

2 The adult protection authority shall examine and approve the final report and the final accounts in the same way as the regular reports and accounts.

3 It shall pass on the final report and final accounts to the client or his or her heirs and if applicable to the new deputy and shall at the same time draw the attention of these persons to the provisions on accountability.

4 It shall also inform them whether it exonerated the deputy or refused to approve the final report or the final accounts.


  Section Three: Care-Related Hospitalisation

Art. 426 A. The measures / I. Hospitalisation for treatment or care

A. The measures

I. Hospitalisation for treatment or care

1 A person suffering from a mental disorder or mental disability or serious neglect (the patient) may be committed to an appropriate institution if the required treatment or care cannot be provided otherwise.

2 The burden that the patient places on family members and third parties and their protection must be taken into account.

3 The patient shall be discharged as soon as the requirements for hospitalisation no longer are fulfilled.

4 The patient or a closely related person may request his or her discharge at any time. A decision must be made on the request immediately.

Art. 427 A. The measures / II. Detention of persons admitted voluntarily

II. Detention of persons admitted voluntarily

1 If a person suffering from a mental disorder who has entered an institution voluntarily wishes to leave the institution, he or she may be detained by the institution's medical management for a maximum of three days if he or she:

1.
is a risk to his or her own life or limb; or
2.
is a serious risk to the life or the physical integrity of others.

2 At the end of the three day period, the patient may leave the institution unless he or she is subject to an enforceable hospitalisation order.

3 The patient shall be notified in writing that he or she may petition the court.

Art. 428 B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge / I. Adult protection authority

B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge

I. Adult protection authority

1 The adult protection authority is responsible for ordering hospitalisation and discharge.

2 In specific cases, it may delegate responsibility for discharge to the institution.

Art. 429 B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge / II. Doctors / 1. Responsibility

II. Doctors

1. Responsibility

1 The cantons may designate doctors who in addition to the adult protection authority are authorised to order hospitalisation for a period specified by cantonal law. The period may not exceed six weeks.

2 Hospitalisation may not continue beyond the specified period at the latest unless an enforceable hospitalisation order from the adult protection authority applies.

3 The institution decides on discharge.

Art. 430 B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge / II. Doctors / 2. Procedures

2. Procedures

1 The doctor shall examine and interview the patient in person.

2 The hospitalisation order shall contain at least the following information:

1.
the place and date of the examination;
2.
the name of the doctor;
3.
the diagnosis, reasons therefor and the purpose of hospitalisation;
4.
instructions on rights of appeal.

3 An appeal does not have suspensive effect unless the doctor or the competent court orders otherwise.

4 A copy of the hospitalisation order shall be given to the patient; a further copy shall be given to the institution on the patient's admission.

5 The doctor shall if possible notify a person closely related to the patient in writing on his or her committal and on the rights of appeal.

Art. 431 C. Regular review

C. Regular review

1 The adult protection authority shall conduct a review at the latest six months after hospitalisation of whether the requirements for hospitalisation are still being met and whether the institution is still suitable.

2 It shall conduct a second review within the following six months. Thereafter it shall conduct a review as often as necessary, but at least once every year.

Art. 432 D. Authorised representative

D. Authorised representative

Any person committed to an institution may appoint a person that he or she trusts as a representative to support him or her during his or her stay and until the conclusion of all related procedures.

Art. 433 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / I. Treatment plan

E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder

I. Treatment plan

1 If a person is committed to an institution to be treated for a mental disorder, the attending doctor shall draw up written treatment plan in consultation with the patient and if applicable his or her authorised representative.

2 The doctor shall inform the patient and the authorised representative of all matters relevant to the planned medical procedures, and in particular the reasons therefor, their purpose, nature, modalities, risks and side effects, of the consequences of not undergoing treatment and of any alternative treatment options.

3 The treatment plan shall be given to the patient so that he or she may consent. Where the patient is incapable of judgement, account must be taken of any patient decree.

4 The treatment plan is adjusted to take account of ongoing developments.

Art. 434 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / II. Treatment without consent

II. Treatment without consent

1 In the absence of the patient's consent, the chief physician in the department may order in writing the medical procedures planned in the treatment plan if:

1.
failure to carry out the treatment could lead to serious damage to the patient's health or seriously endanger the life or the physical integrity of third parties;
2.
the patient is unable to exercise judgement in relation to his or her need for treatment; and
3.
no appropriate measure is available that is less invasive.

2 Written notice of the order shall be given to the patient and his or her authorised representative together with instructions on rights of appeal.

Art. 435 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / III. Emergencies

III. Emergencies

1 In an emergency, essential medical procedures may be carried out immediately to protect the patient or third parties.

2 If the institution is aware how the person wishes to be treated, it shall take account of those wishes.

Art. 436 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / IV. Pre-discharge interview

IV. Pre-discharge interview

1 If there is a risk that the medical condition will recur, the attending doctor shall attempt to agree with the client before discharge on principles for treatment in the event that the patient is committed to the institution again.

2 The pre-discharge interview must be documented.

Art. 437 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / V. Cantonal law

V. Cantonal law

1 The cantons shall regulate follow-up care.

2 They may provide for out-patient measures.

Art. 438 F. Measures restricting freedom of movement

F. Measures restricting freedom of movement

Measures restricting the patient's freedom of movement in the institution are governed by the provisions on restricting the freedom of movement of patients in residential or care institutions mutatis mutandis. The right to appeal to the court is reserved.

Art. 439 G. Petition to the court

G. Petition to the court

1 In the following cases, the patient or a closely related person may petition the competent court in writing:

1.
in cases of hospitalisation ordered by a doctor;
2.
in cases where the patient is detained by the institution;
3.
in cases where a request for discharge is refused by the institution;
4.
in cases where a mental disorder is treated without consent;
5.
in cases of measures restricting freedom of movement.

2 The deadline for appealing to the court is ten days from the date on which notice of the decision is given. In the case of measures restricting freedom of movement, an appeal may be made to the court at any time.

3 The procedure is governed mutatis mutandis by the provisions on proceedings before a judicial appellate authority.

4 An application for judicial assessment must be passed on to the competent court immediately.


  Title Twelve: Organisation

  Section One: Authorities and Local Jurisdiction

Art. 440 A. Adult protection authority

A. Adult protection authority

1 The adult protection authority is a specialist authority. It is appointed by the cantons.

2 It has a quorum of three members for taking decisions. The cantons may provide for exceptions for specific matters.

3 It also carries out the tasks of the child protection authority.

Art. 441 B. Supervisory authority

B. Supervisory authority

1 The cantons shall appoint the supervisory authorities.

2 The Federal Council may issue provisions on supervision.

Art. 442 C. Local jurisdiction

C. Local jurisdiction

1 The adult protection authority at the place of residence of the client has jurisdiction. In ongoing proceedings, the same authority retains jurisdiction until the case has been concluded.

2 In urgent cases, the authority where the client is actually residing has jurisdiction. If this authority carries out a measure, it shall notify the authority in the client's normal place of residence.

3 In the case of a deputyship due to absence, the authority at the place where the majority of the assets have been managed or have been transferred to the client has jurisdiction.

4 The cantons are entitled to declare the authority in the client's place of origin rather than place of residence to have jurisdiction over citizens of the canton who are resident in the canton, provide the commune of origin is wholly or partly responsible for supporting persons in need.

5 If a person subject to a measure changes place of residence, the authority at the new place shall take responsibility for the measure immediately, unless there is good cause for not doing so.


  Section Two: Procedure

  Sub-section One: Before the Adult Protection Authority

Art. 443 A. Notification rights and obligations

A. Notification rights and obligations

1 Any person may notify the adult protection authority if a person appears to be in need of assistance. The provisions on professional confidentiality are reserved.

2 Any person who while acting in an official capacity learns that a person needs assistance and is unable to provide this assistance in the context of their professional activities is required to notify the adult protection authority. The provisions on professional confidentiality remain reserved.1

3 The cantons may provide for further notification obligations.2


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).

Art. 444 B. Verification of jurisdiction

B. Verification of jurisdiction

1 The adult protection authority shall verify its jurisdiction ex officio.

2 If it decides that it has no jurisdiction, it shall assign the case immediately to the authority that it regards as having jurisdiction.

3 If it is uncertain as to whether it has jurisdiction, it shall consult the authority that it believes may have jurisdiction.

4 If no agreement is reached after consultation, the authority originally involved shall refer the question of jurisdiction to the appellate authority.

Art. 445 C. Precautionary measures

C. Precautionary measures

1 The adult protection authority shall at the request of a person participating in the proceedings or ex officio take all the precautionary measures required for the duration of the proceedings. It may in particular order an adult protection measure as a precautionary measure.

2 In cases of particular urgency, it may take precautionary measures immediately without hearing the persons participating in the proceedings. At the same time, it shall give these persons the opportunity to express their views, after which it shall review its decision.

3 An appeal against precautionary measures may be filed within ten days of notice thereof being given.

Art. 446 D. Procedural principles

D. Procedural principles

1 The adult protection authority investigates the circumstances of the case ex officio.

2 It shall conduct the required enquiries and gather the required evidence. It may instruct a suitable person or agency to carry out enquiries. If necessary, it shall commission an opinion from an expert.

3 It is not limited by the requests made by the persons participating in the proceedings.

4 It shall apply the law ex officio.

Art. 447 E. Hearing

E. Hearing

1 The client shall be heard in person unless to do so appears inappropriate.

2 In a case involving care-related hospitalisation, the adult protection authority shall normally hear the client normally as a panel.

Art. 448 F. Obligations to cooperate and administrative assistance

F. Obligations to cooperate and administrative assistance

1 The persons participating in the proceedings and third parties are obliged to cooperate in the enquiries into the circumstances. The adult protection authority shall make the arrangements required to safeguard legitimate interests. If necessary, it shall order the enforcement of the duty to cooperate.

2 Doctors, dentists, pharmacists, midwives and birth assistants, chiropractors and psychologists and their auxiliary personnel are only obliged to cooperate if the person entitled to confidentiality has authorised them to do so or if a superior authority or the supervisory authority has relieved them of the obligation of professional confidentiality at their own request or at the request of the adult protection authority.1

3 Members of the clergy, lawyers, defence agents, mediators and former welfare deputies appointed in the case are not subject to the obligation to cooperate.

4 Administrative authorities and courts shall hand over the required files, draw up reports and provide information unless legitimate interests require otherwise.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).

Art. 449 G. Assessment in an institution

G. Assessment in an institution

1 If a psychiatric assessment is essential and cannot be carried out on an out-patient basis, the adult protection authority shall have the client admitted to a suitable institution for assessment.

2 The provisions on the procedure for care-related hospitalisation apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 449a H. Appointment of a representative

H. Appointment of a representative

If necessary, the adult protection authority shall order that the client be represented and appoint a person experienced in care-related and legal matters as deputy.

Art. 449b I. Inspection of files

I. Inspection of files

1 The persons participating in the proceedings have the right to inspect the case files, unless legitimate interests require otherwise.

2 If a person participating in the proceedings is refused access to any case files, the information therein may only be used in the proceedings if the authority discloses the content relevant to the case verbally or in writing to the person concerned.

Art. 449c J. Notification duty

J. Notification duty

The adult protection authority shall notify the civil register office if:

1.
it makes a person subject to a general deputyship due to permanent loss of the capacity of judgement;
2.
an advance care directive become effective for a person permanently lacking capacity of judgement.

  Sub-section Two: Before the Appellate Authority

Art. 450 A. Object and right of appeal

A. Object and right of appeal

1 Decisions of the adult protection authority are subject to a right of appeal to the competent court.

2 The following persons have a right of appeal:

1.
persons participating in the proceedings;
2.
persons closely associated with the client;
3.
persons with a legitimate interest in the contested decision being reversed or amended.

3 The appeal must be filed with the court in writing and with a statement of the grounds.

Art. 450a B. Grounds of appeal

B. Grounds of appeal

1 The appeal may challenge:

1.
an infringement of the law;
2.
an incorrect or incomplete finding of legally relevant fact;
3.
an inappropriate decision.

2 An appeal is also competent on the grounds of denial of justice or unjustified delay.

Art. 450b C. Deadline for filing the appeal

C. Deadline for filing the appeal

1 The appeal must be filed within thirty days of notification of the decision. This deadline also applies to persons entitled to appeal who are not required to be notified of the decision.

2 In the case of a decision concerning care-related accommodation, the appeal must be filed within ten days of notification of the decision.

3 An appeal on the grounds of denial of justice or unjustified delay may be filed at any time.

Art. 450c D. Suspensive effect

D. Suspensive effect

An appeal has suspensive effect unless the adult protection authority or the judicial appellate authority rules otherwise.

Art. 450d E. Consultation with the lower instance and reconsideration

E. Consultation with the lower instance and reconsideration

1 The judicial appellate authority shall give the adult protection authority the opportunity to express its position.

2 Instead of submitting its views, the adult protection authority may reconsider its decision.

Art. 450e F. Special provisions in the case of care-related hospitalisation

F. Special provisions in the case of care-related hospitalisation

1 A statement of grounds is not required for an appeal against a decision relating to care-related hospitalisation.

2 The appeal does not have suspensive effect unless the adult protection authority or the judicial appellate authority rules otherwise.

3 In cases involving mental disorders, the decision must be based on the opinion of an expert.

4 The judicial appellate authority shall normally hear the client as a panel of judges. If necessary, it shall order that the client be represented and appoint a person experienced in care-related and legal matters as deputy.

5 Normally, it decides within five working days of the appeal being filed.


  Sub-Section Three: Joint Provision

Art. 450f

In addition, the provisions of the Civil Procedure Ordinance apply mutatis mutandis, unless the cantons provide otherwise.


  Sub-Section Four: Enforcement

Art. 450g

1 The adult protection authority shall enforce decisions on request or ex officio.

2 If the adult protection authority or the judicial appellate authority in the decision has already ordered compulsory enforcement measures, these may be enforced directly.

3 The person responsible for enforcement may enlist the help of the police if necessary. Normally a warning must be given before direct compulsory measures are applied.


  Section Three: Relationship with Third parties and Duty of Cooperation

Art. 451 A. Duty of confidentiality and information

A. Duty of confidentiality and information

1 The adult protection authority is subject to a duty of confidentiality in the absence of overriding interests.

2 Any person who shows a credible interest may request the adult protection authority to provide information on the existence and the effects of an adult protection measure.

Art. 452 B. Effect of the measures on third parties

B. Effect of the measures on third parties

1 An adult protection measure may be cited in opposition to third parties even if they are acting in good faith.

2 If the deputyship limits the capacity of the client to act, debtors must be notified that contractual performance only relieves them of their obligations payment if it is made to the deputy. Prior to notice being given, the deputyship may not be cited in opposition to debtors acting in good faith.

3 If a person subject to an adult protection measure induces other persons to accept his or her capacity to act in error, he or she is liable to them for any damage caused thereby.

Art. 453 C. Duty of cooperation

C. Duty of cooperation

1 If there is a serious risk that a person in need will endanger himself or herself or commit a felony or misdemeanour that seriously damages another person physically or mentally or causes them material loss, the adult protection authority shall cooperate with the agencies concerned and the police.

2 In such cases, persons subject to official or professional confidentiality are entitled to notify the adult protection authority.


  Section Four: Accountability

Art. 454 A. Principle

A. Principle

1 Any person who is injured by an unlawful act or omission related to official adult protection measures has the right to damages and, if justified by the seriousness of the injury, to satisfaction.

2 The same right applies if the adult protection authority or the supervisory authority behaves unlawfully in relation to other adult protection matters.

3 The canton is liable; the person suffering damage has no right to damages against the person who caused the damage.

4 The canton's right of recourse against the person that caused the damage is governed by the cantonal law.

Art. 455 B. Prescription

B. Prescription

1 The right to claim damages or satisfaction prescribes in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on the law of tort.2

2 If the person who caused the damage committed a criminal offence through his or her conduct, the right to claim damages or satisfaction prescribes at the earliest when the right to prosecute the offence prescribes. If the right to prosecute is no longer liable to prescription because a first instance criminal judgment has been issued, the right to claim damages or satisfaction prescribes at the earliest three years after notice of the judgment is given.3

3 If the injury is related to the ordering or conduct of a long-term measure, the prescriptive period for a claim against the canton does not begin before the long-term measure ends or is continued by another canton.


1 SR 220
2 Amended by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).
3 Amended by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 456 C. Liability under agency law C. Liability under agency law

C. Liability under agency law

The liability of a person entrusted with another's care as well as that of a spouse or registered partner of a person lacking capacity of judgement or of a representative in the case of medical measures, insofar as that person is not a welfare deputy is governed by the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency.


1 SR 220


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Amended by No I 3 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).3 Amendment of Title Five in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). See also Art. 8–8b of the Final Title below.4 Amended of Title Six in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). See also Art. 9–11a of the Final Title below.5 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).6 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).7 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).8 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).9 Originally Chapter Three.10 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).11 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).12 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).13 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1). Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).14 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978(AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).15 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).16 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

  Part Three: Law of Succession

  Division One: Heirs

  Title Thirteen: Statutory Heirs

Art. 457 A. Related heirs / I. Issue

A. Related1 heirs

I. Issue

1 The nearest heirs of a deceased person are his or her issue.

2 Children inherit in equal parts.

3 Predeceased children are replaced by their own issue in all degrees per stirpes.


1 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 458 A. Related heirs / II. Parental line

II. Parental line

1 Where the deceased is not survived by any issue, the estate passes to the parental line.

2 The father and mother each inherit one-half of the estate.

3 A predeceased parent is replaced by his or her issue in all degrees per stirpes.

4 Where there are no issue on one side, the entire estate passes to the heirs on the other.

Art. 459 A. Related heirs / III. Grandparental line

III. Grandparental line

1 Where the deceased is survived by neither issue nor heirs in the parental line, the estate passes to the line of the grandparents.

2 Where the grandparents of the paternal and maternal lines survive the deceased, they inherit in equal parts on both sides.

3 A predeceased grandparent is replaced by his or her issue in all degrees per stirpes.

4 If a grandparent on the paternal or maternal side has predeceased without issue, that entire half of the estate is inherited by the heirs on that side.

5 If there are no heirs in either the paternal or the maternal side, the entire estate passes to the heirs in the other side.

Art. 4601A. Related heirs / IV. Scope of succession rights

IV. Scope of succession rights

The succession rights of relatives end with the line of the grandparents.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 4611

1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, with effect from 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 4621B. Surviving spouses and registered partners

B. Surviving spouses and registered partners

Surviving spouses and registered partners receive:

1.
one-half of the estate, where they are obliged to share with the deceased’s issue;
2.
three-quarters of the estate, where they are obliged to share with heirs in the parental line;
3.
the entire estate, where no heirs exist in the parental line either.

1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4634641C...

C...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 4651

1 Repealed by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, with effect from 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). However, see Art. 12a Final Title below.

Art. 4661D. State authority

D. State authority

Where the deceased leaves no heirs, his or her estate passes to the canton in which he or she was last resident or to the commune designated by the law of that canton.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).


  Title Fourteen: Testamentary Dispositions

  Section One: Testamentary Capacity

Art. 467 A. Wills

A. Wills

Any person who has the capacity of judgement and is at least 18 years old has the right to draw up a will disposing of his or her property in accordance with the limits and forms prescribed by law.

Art. 4681B. Contract of succession

B. Contract of succession

1 Any person who is capable of judgement and has reached the age of 18 may conclude a contract of succession as a testator.

2 Persons subject to a deputyship that covers the conclusion of a contract of succession require the consent of their legal representative.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 469 C. Voidable dispositions

C. Voidable dispositions

1 Dispositions made in error or under the influence of malicious deception, threats or coercion are void.

2 However, they become valid if not revoked by the testator within one year of his or her discovering the error or deception or of his or her release from the threat or coercion.

3 If a disposition contains an obvious error with regard to persons or objects and the testator’s true intention may be established with certainty, the disposition shall be rectified accordingly.


  Section Two: Testamentary Freedom

Art. 470 A. Disposable part / I. Scope of testamentary powers

A. Disposable part

I. Scope of testamentary powers

1 A person who is survived by issue, parents, a spouse or a registered partner may make a testamentary disposition of that part of his or her property which exceeds the statutory entitlement of the survivor or survivors.1

2 A person who is not survived by any such heirs may dispose of his or her entire property by testamentary disposition.


1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4711A. Disposable part / II. Statutory entitlement

II. Statutory entitlement

The statutory entitlement is:

1.
for any issue, three-quarters of their statutory succession rights;
2.
for each parent, one-half;
3.2
for the surviving spouse or registered partner, one-half.

1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4721A. Disposable part / III. ...

III. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 473 A. Disposable part / IV. Dispositions in favour of the spouse

IV. Dispositions in favour of the spouse

1 By a testamentary disposition, the testator may grant the surviving spouse a usufruct of the entire part of the estate passing to their common issue.1

2 This usufruct shall replace the statutory succession right due to the spouse where the common issue are co-heirs with the spouse. In addition to this usufruct, the disposable part is one-quarter of the estate.2

3 If the surviving spouse remarries, the usufruct ceases to apply to that part of the estate which, on succession, could not have been encumbered by a usufruct under the provisions ordinarily governing the statutory entitlements of the deceased’s issue.3


1 Amended by No I of the Swiss Civil Code of 5 Oct. 2001, in force since 1 March 2002 (AS 2002 269; BBl 2001 1121 2011 2111).
2 Amended by No I of the Swiss Civil Code of 5 Oct. 2001, in force since 1 March 2002 (AS 2002 269; BBl 2001 1121 2011 2111).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 474 A. Disposable part / V. Calculation of the disposable part / 1. Deduction of debts

V. Calculation of the disposable part

1. Deduction of debts

1 The disposable part is calculated on the basis of the value of the deceased’s assets at the time of his or her death.

2 In calculating this value, the deceased’s debts, the funeral expenses, the costs of sealing and of drawing up the inventory and the maintenance claims of members of the household for one month are deducted from value of the estate.

Art. 475 A. Disposable part / V. Calculation of the disposable part / 2. Inter vivos gifts

2. Inter vivos gifts

Inter vivos gifts are added to the estate insofar as they are subject to an action in abatement.

Art. 476 A. Disposable part / V. Calculation of the disposable part / 3. Insurance claims

3. Insurance claims

Where a life assurance claim maturing on the death of the deceased was established in favour of a third party by an inter vivos or testamentary disposition or mortis causa or was transferred by the deceased during his or her lifetime to a third party without valuable consideration, the redemption value of such insurance claim at the time of death is added to the estate.

Art. 477 B. Disinheritance / I. Grounds

B. Disinheritance

I. Grounds

The testator has the power to deprive an heir of his or her statutory entitlement by means of a testamentary disposition:

1.1
if the heir has committed a serious crime against the testator or a person close to him or her;
2.
if the heir has seriously breached his or her duties under family law towards the testator or the latter’s dependants.

1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 478 B. Disinheritance / II. Effect

II. Effect

1 The disinherited person may neither participate in the estate nor bring an action in abatement.

2 Unless disposed of otherwise by the testator, the disinherited person’s portion passes to the testator’s statutory heirs as if the disinherited person had predeceased.

3 The disinherited person’s issue retain their statutory entitlements as if he or she had predeceased.

Art. 479 B. Disinheritance / III. Burden of proof

III. Burden of proof

1 A disinheritance is valid only if the testator indicates the reason for the disinheritance in his or her testamentary disposition.

2 If the disinherited person challenges the disinheritance on the grounds that the reason therefor is incorrect, any heir or legatee wishing to benefit from the disinheritance must prove that the reason is correct.

3 Where no such proof may be adduced or no reason for the disinheritance is indicated, the disposition shall be upheld insofar as it does not deprive the disinherited person of his or her statutory entitlement unless it was made by the testator in obvious error regarding the reason for the disinheritance.

Art. 480 B. Disinheritance / IV. Disinheritance of an insolvent person

IV. Disinheritance of an insolvent person

1 If unpaid debt certificates exist in respect of any of the issue of the testator, the latter may deprive the said issue of one-half of his or her statutory entitlement providing he or she leaves that half to the existing or subsequently born children of the said issue.

2 At the disinherited person’s request, the disinheritance is void if, on commencement of the succession process, the unpaid debt certificates no longer exist against him or her or if their total amount does not exceed one-quarter of his or her share of the estate.


  Section Three: Types of Disposition

Art. 481 A. In general

A. In general

1 Within the limits of his or her right to dispose of his or her property, the testator may dispose of it in part or in full by will or by contract of succession.

2 Any property in respect of which no testamentary disposition has been made passes to the statutory heirs.

Art. 482 B. Burdens and conditions

B. Burdens and conditions

1 The testator may attach burdens or conditions to the disposition, the fulfilment of which may be requested by any interested party once the disposition becomes effective.

2 Immoral or unlawful burdens or conditions render the disposition null and void.

3 Where they are merely onerous to third parties or meaningless, they are deemed not to exist.

4 If an animal receives a bequest by testamentary disposition, this disposition is deemed to be a burden by which the animal must be cared for according to its needs.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 483 C. Naming of heirs

C. Naming of heirs

1 The testator may name one or more heirs to the entire estate or to a fraction thereof.

2 Any disposition by which a beneficiary should receive all or a specified fraction of the deceased’s estate is deemed to constitute the naming of an heir.

Art. 484 D. Legacy / I. Nature

D. Legacy

I. Nature

1 The testator may bequeath a legacy to a beneficiary without naming that person as an heir.

2 He or she may bequeath a specific legacy or the usufruct of the whole or a part of the estate, or he or she may instruct the heirs or other legatees to make payments to that person from the value of the estate or to release that person from obligations.

3 If the testator bequeaths a specific legacy but the object is not part of the estate and no other intention is evident from the disposition, no obligation is placed on the obligor of the legacy.

Art. 485 D. Legacy / II. Duty on the obligor of the legacy

II. Duty on the obligor of the legacy

1 The object must be delivered to the beneficiary in the same condition that it was in at the commencement of the succession process, including damage and growth and with or without encumbrance.

2 With regard to expenditure on and deterioration of the legacy since the commencement of the succession process, the obligor of the legacy has the same rights and duties as an agent without authority.

Art. 486 D. Legacy / III. Relationship to the estate

III. Relationship to the estate

1 Where the legacies exceed the value of the estate or of the bequest to the obligor or of the disposable part, application may be made to have them abated proportionately.

2 If the obligors do not survive the testator, are unworthy to inherit or disclaim their inheritance, the legacies remain nonetheless effective.

3 If the testator has bequeathed a legacy to a statutory or named heir, the latter has the right to claim the legacy even if he or she disclaims his or her inheritance.

Art. 487 E. Substitution

E. Substitution

In his or her disposition, the testator may designate one or more persons to whom the estate or legacy shall pass in the event that the initial heir or legatee is predeceased or disclaims it.

Art. 488 F. Remaindermen / I. Designation of a remainderman

F. Remaindermen

I. Designation of a remainderman

1 The testator is entitled in his or her dispositions to require the named heir, as provisional heir, to deliver the estate to a third party, as remainderman.

2 No such obligation may be imposed on the remainderman.

3 The same provisions apply to legacies.

Art. 489 F. Remaindermen / II. Time of delivery

II. Time of delivery

1 Except where the disposition stipulates otherwise, the time of delivery is deemed to be the death of the provisional heir.

2 Where a different time is specified and that time has not yet occurred on the death of the provisional heir, the inheritance passes to his or her heirs against security.

3 If for whatever reason that time may no longer occur, the inheritance passes unreservedly to the heirs of the provisional heir.

Art. 490 F. Remaindermen / III. Security

III. Security

1 In all cases in which remaindermen are designated, the competent authority must order an inventory to be drawn up.

2 Delivery of the inheritance to the provisional heir is made only against security, except where the testator has expressly released him or her from such an obligation; in the case of immovable property, security may be provided by entering the delivery obligation under priority notice in the land register.

3 If the provisional heir is unable to provide security or jeopardises the remainderman’s expectancy, the inheritance must be placed under probate administration.

Art. 491 F. Remaindermen / IV. Legal status / 1. Of the provisional heir

IV. Legal status

1. Of the provisional heir

1 A provisional heir acquires the inheritance in the same manner as any named heir.

2 He or she becomes the owner of the inheritance with an obligation to deliver it.

Art. 492 F. Remaindermen / IV. Legal status / 2. Of the remainderman

2. Of the remainderman

1 The remainderman acquires the testator’s bequest if he or she is alive at the stipulated delivery time.

2 If he or she dies before then, the inheritance passes to the provisional heir unless the testator has ordered otherwise.

3 If the provisional heir dies before the testator or is unworthy of inheritance or disclaims the inheritance, it passes to the remainderman.

Art. 492a1F. Remaindermen / V. Issue lacking capacity of judgement

V. Issue lacking capacity of judgement

1 If any issue permanently lacks capacity of judgement and if he or she is not survived by issue or a spouse, the testator may designate a remainderman in respect of the residue.

2 The designation of the remainderman ceases to apply by law if the issue, contrary to expectation, becomes capable of judgement.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 493 G. Foundations

G. Foundations

1 The testator is entitled to bequeath all or part of the disposable portion of his or her property to a foundation for any purpose of his or her choosing.

2 However, the foundation is valid only if it conforms to the legal requirements.

Art. 494 H. Contracts of succession / I. Contracts naming heirs and making legacies

H. Contracts of succession

I. Contracts naming heirs and making legacies

1 The testator may, by contract of succession, undertake to another person to bequeath his or her estate or a legacy to that person or a third party.

2 He or she is free to dispose of his or her property as he or she sees fit.

3 However, testamentary dispositions or gifts that are incompatible with obligations entered into under the contract of succession are subject to challenge.

Art. 495 H. Contracts of succession / II. Renunciation of inheritance / 1. Significance

II. Renunciation of inheritance

1. Significance

1 The testator may conclude an inheritance renunciation contract with an heir with or without valuable consideration.

2 The renouncing party is not deemed to be an heir on succession.

3 Unless the contract provides otherwise, the renunciation of an inheritance also applies to the issue of the renouncing party.

Art. 496 H. Contracts of succession / II. Renunciation of inheritance / 2. Void renunciation

2. Void renunciation

1 Where certain persons are named in the renunciation contact as heirs in lieu of the renouncing party, the renunciation is void if such persons fail to acquire the inheritance for whatever reason.

2 Where an inheritance is renounced in favour of co-heirs, the renunciation is presumed to be effective only in respect of the heirs of the line descending from their nearest common ascendant and has no effect with regard to more distant heirs.

Art. 497 H. Contracts of succession / II. Renunciation of inheritance / 3. Rights of the creditors of the estate

3. Rights of the creditors of the estate

If the deceased was insolvent on commencement of the succession process and his or her creditors are not satisfied by the heirs, the renouncing party and his or her heirs may be held liable to the extent that they received valuable consideration for the renounced inheritance within the five years prior to the death of the deceased and were still enriched by such consideration on succession.


  Section Four: Formal Requirements of Testamentary Dispositions

Art. 498 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 1. In general

A. Wills

I. Drawing up a will

1. In general

The testator may make his or her will in the form of a public deed or in holographic or oral form.

Art. 499 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / a. Formal requirements

2. By public deed

a. Formal requirements

A will by public deed is made in the presence of two witnesses by a public official, notary public or other person authorised under cantonal law to conduct such business.

Art. 500 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / b. Role of the public official

b. Role of the public official

1 The testator must inform the official of his or her wishes, whereupon the official draws up the deed or causes it to be drawn up and gives it to the testator to read.

2 The deed must be signed by the testator.

3 The official must date and sign the deed.

Art. 501 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / c. Role of the witnesses

c. Role of the witnesses

1 As soon as the public deed has been signed and dated, the testator must declare to the two witnesses, in the presence of the official, that he or she has read the document and that it contains his or her will.

2 The witnesses must sign the deed and in so doing confirm that the testator made said declaration in their presence and that, in their judgment, in so doing he or she was in full possession of testamentary capacity.

3 It is not necessary for the witnesses to be informed of the content of the deed.

Art. 502 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / d. Drawing up a will without the testator reading and signing it

d. Drawing up a will without the testator reading and signing it

1 If the testator does not read and sign the deed, the official must read it out in the presence of the two witnesses and the testator, who must then declare that the deed contains his or her will.

2 In this case the witnesses must not only attest to the testator’s declaration and their judgment concerning his or her testamentary capacity but must also confirm, by appending their signatures, that the deed was read out to the testator by the official in their presence.

Art. 503 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / e. Persons involved

e. Persons involved

1 Persons who lack capacity to act, have been deprived of their civil rights due to a criminal conviction1 or are unable to read or write, lineal relatives2 or siblings of the testator or their spouses and the testator’s spouse are not permitted to act as authenticating officials or witnesses when making a will in the form of a public deed.

2 No disposition may be made in the will in favour of any authenticating officer or witness or his or her lineal relatives, siblings or spouse.


1 The suspension of civil rights and privileges due to criminal conviction has been abolished (see AS 1971 777; BBl 1965 I 561 and AS 1974 55; BBl 1974 I 1457).
2 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 504 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / f. Safekeeping of wills

f. Safekeeping of wills

The cantons must ensure that public officials entrusted with wills either keep the original or a copy of such deeds themselves or else forward them to an authority for safekeeping.

Art. 505 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 3. Holographic will

3. Holographic will

1 A holographic will must be written in the testator’s own hand from start to finish, include an indication of the day, month and year on which it is drawn up, and be signed by the testator.1

2 The cantons must ensure that such wills can be forwarded, whether open or sealed, to an authority for safekeeping.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 1995, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 506 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 4. Oral will / a. Dispositions

4. Oral will

a. Dispositions

1 Where the testator is prevented from using any other form of will by extraordinary circumstances such as the imminent risk of death, breakdown in communications, epidemic or war, he or she is entitled to make a will in oral form.

2 To do so, he or she must declare his or her will in the presence of two witnesses and instruct them to have it drawn up as required in the form of a deed.

3 The witnesses are subject to the same disqualification provisions as apply to wills made in the form of public deeds.

Art. 507 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 4. Oral will / b. Conversion into deed

b. Conversion into deed

1 The oral will, including the place, day, month and year, must be written down immediately by one of the witnesses, then signed by both and lodged without delay with a judicial authority together with a declaration that the testator was in full possession of his or her testamentary capacity and that he or she informed them of his or her will in the special circumstances prevailing at that time.

2 The two witnesses may instead have the will recorded by a judicial authority along with the same declaration.

3 If the testator makes his or her oral will while on military service, an officer with the rank of captain or higher may take the place of the judicial authority.

Art. 508 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 4. Oral will / c. Loss of validity

c. Loss of validity

If the testator subsequently has the opportunity to draw up his or her will in another form, the oral will ceases to be valid 14 days after such opportunity arises.

Art. 509 A. Wills / II. Revocation and destruction / 1. Revocation

II. Revocation and destruction

1. Revocation

1 The testator may revoke his or her will at any time in one of the forms envisaged for drawing it up.

2 Such revocation may apply to all or part of the will.

Art. 510 A. Wills / II. Revocation and destruction / 2. Destruction

2. Destruction

1 The testator may revoke his or her will by destroying the deed.

2 If the deed is destroyed by others wilfully or by accident, the will likewise becomes void inasmuch as its content may no longer be ascertained precisely and completely; claims for damages are reserved.

Art. 511 A. Wills / II. Revocation and destruction / 3. Subsequent wills

3. Subsequent wills

1 If the testator makes a will without expressly revoking a previous will, the later will supersedes the earlier unless it is manifestly no more than a codicil thereto.

2 Likewise, a bequest of a specific object is revoked if the testator subsequently makes a new disposition of the same object that is incompatible with the previous disposition.

Art. 512 B. Contracts of succession / I. Execution

B. Contracts of succession

I. Execution

1 In order to be valid, a contract of succession must meet the same formal requirements as a will executed as a public deed.

2 The contracting parties must simultaneously declare their intentions to the public official and sign the deed before him or her and two witnesses.

Art. 513 B. Contracts of succession / II. Revocation / 1. Inter vivos / a. By contract and by will

II. Revocation

1. Inter vivos

a. By contract and by will

1 The contract of succession may be revoked at any time by written agreement between the parties.

2 The testator may unilaterally revoke the naming of an heir or a legacy provided the heir or legatee is guilty of conduct constituting grounds for disinheritance after the contract was concluded.

3 The unilateral revocation must be done in one of the forms prescribed for drawing up wills.

Art. 514 B. Contracts of succession / II. Revocation / 1. Inter vivos / b. By withdrawal from the contract

b. By withdrawal from the contract

A person entitled to benefits inter vivos under a contract of succession may declare his or her withdrawal from the contract in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 in the event of failure to perform such benefits or to furnish security for them.


1 SR 220

Art. 515 B. Contracts of succession / II. Revocation / 2. Predeceased heir

2. Predeceased heir

1 Where the heir or legatee does not survive the testator, the contract becomes void.

2 Where at the time of the heir’s death the testator has been enriched as a result of the contract of succession, unless otherwise provided, the heirs of the deceased may demand restitution of the amount involved.

Art. 516 C. Restriction of testamentary freedom

C. Restriction of testamentary freedom

If a testator becomes subject to a restriction of testamentary freedom after he or she has made a testamentary disposition, the disposition is not annulled but is subject to action in abatement.


  Section Five: Executors

Art. 517 A. Appointment of executors

A. Appointment of executors

1 In the will, the testator may appoint one or more persons with capacity to act to execute the will.

2 The probate authority shall notify these persons of the appointment ex officio and they must state whether they accept it within 14 days of such notification, silence being deemed tacit acceptance.

3 They are entitled to adequate recompense for their activities.

Art. 518 B. Function of an executor

B. Function of an executor

1 Unless otherwise provided by the testator, the executors have the same rights and duties as an official estate administrator.

2 The executors’ function is to represent the testator’s wishes and, in particular, to administer the estate, settle debts left by the testator, distribute legacies and divide the estate in accordance with the testator’s instructions or as required by law.

3 Where more than one executor has been appointed, these powers are exercised jointly, unless the testator has provided otherwise.


  Section Six: Declaration of Invalidity and Abatement of Dispositions

Art. 519 A. Action for declaration of invalidity / I. On grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, lack of free will, unlawfulness or immorality

A. Action for declaration of invalidity

I. On grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, lack of free will, unlawfulness or immorality

1 Where contested, a testamentary disposition may be declared invalid:

1.
if it was made by the testator at a time when he or she lacked testamentary capacity;
2.
if it is the product of a lack of free will;
3.
if its content or a condition attached to it is immoral or unlawful.

2 An action of declaration of invalidity may be brought by any interested heir or legatee.

Art. 520 A. Action for declaration of invalidity / II. On grounds of formal defect / 1. In general

II. On grounds of formal defect

1. In general1

1 If the testamentary disposition is formally defective, it is declared invalid on being contested before a court.

2 If the formal defect consists in the certain persons being party to the execution of the disposition who or whose family members are beneficiaries under the testamentary disposition, only the clauses relating to those beneficiaries shall be declared invalid.

3 The right of action is governed by the same provisions as apply in the event of a lack of testamentary capacity.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 1995, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 520a1A. Action for declaration of invalidity / II. On grounds of formal defect / 2. In holographic wills

2. In holographic wills

If the formal defect in a holographic will consists in the day, month or year not being indicated correctly or at all, the will may be declared invalid only if the precise date cannot be ascertained in some other manner and is necessary in order to determine the testator’s testamentary capacity, the chronological order of multiple wills or any other issue affecting the validity of the will.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 23 June 1995, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 521 A. Action for declaration of invalidity / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

1 The right to bring an action of declaration of invalidity prescribes one year after the contesting party learned of the will and the ground for nullity and in any event a maximum of ten years after the commencement of probate proceedings.

2 In all cases, the right to bring an action on grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, immorality or unlawfulness against a beneficiary acting in bad faith does not prescribe until 30 years have elapsed.

3 Invalidity may be invoked as a defence at any time.

Art. 522 B. Action in abatement / I. Requirements / 1. In general

B. Action in abatement

I. Requirements

1. In general

1 Where the testator has exceeded his or her testamentary freedom, those heirs who do not receive the full value of their statutory entitlement may sue to have the disposition abated to the permitted amount.

2 Clauses contained in testamentary dispositions relating to the entitlements of the statutory heirs are deemed merely to be instructions for dividing the estate unless it is evident from the disposition that the testator intended otherwise.

Art. 523 B. Action in abatement / I. Requirements / 2. Bequests in favour of heirs with a statutory entitlement

2. Bequests in favour of heirs with a statutory entitlement

Where a testamentary disposition contains legacies in favour of several heirs with a statutory entitlement and the testator has exceeded his or her testamentary freedom, such legacies shall be abated among the co-heirs in proportion to the amounts by which they exceed each co-heir’s statutory entitlement.

Art. 524 B. Action in abatement / I. Requirements / 3. Rights of creditors

3. Rights of creditors

1 Where the testator has exceeded his or her testamentary freedom to the detriment of an heir and the latter fails to bring a action in abatement despite being instructed to do so by the bankruptcy administrators or by creditors holding unpaid debt certificates on succession, the administrators or creditors themselves may bring an action in abatement for the amount necessary to cover their claims within the same time limit that applies to the heir.

2 The same right applies in the case of a disinheritance not contested by the person disinherited.

Art. 525 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 1. Of abatement in general

II. Effect

1. Of abatement in general

1 Abatement is applied in equal proportion in respect of all named heirs and legatees unless it is evident from the disposition that the testator intended otherwise.

2 Where the abatement applies to a legacy whose beneficiary is also the obligor of other legacies, subject to the same proviso such beneficiary may request that those other legacies be abated proportionately.

Art. 526 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 2. On specific legacies

2. On specific legacies

Where a specific legacy that cannot be divided without loss of value is to be abated, the legatee may either claim it and pay the balance or claim the disposable amount in lieu of the object.

Art. 527 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 3. On dispositions inter vivos / a. Cases

3. On dispositions inter vivos

a. Cases

The following are subject to abatement in the same manner as testamentary dispositions:

1.
advances against a person’s share of an inheritance made in the form of wedding gifts, settlements or assignments of assets, to the extent these are not subject to hotchpot;
2.
compensation payments in settlement of future rights of inheritance;
3.
gifts that were freely revocable by the deceased or made in the five years prior to his or her death, with the exception of customary occasional gifts;
4.
assets alienated by the deceased with the obvious intention of circumventing the limitations on his or her testamentary freedom.
Art. 528 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 3. On dispositions inter vivos / b. Restitution

b. Restitution

1 A person acting in good faith has a duty of restitution only to the extent that he or she is still enriched by such transactions with the deceased at the time of succession.

2 Where benefits conferred under a contract of succession are subject to abatement, the beneficiary is entitled to reclaim a proportionate amount of the counter-performance made to the testator.

Art. 529 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 4. On assurance claims

4. On assurance claims

Where a life assurance claim maturing on the death of the deceased was established in favour of a third party by a disposition inter vivos or by a testamentary disposition or was transferred by the deceased during his or her lifetime to a third party without valuable consideration, such claim is subject to abatement at its redemption value.

Art. 530 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 5. On usufruct and annuities

5. On usufruct and annuities

If the testator has encumbered the estate with rights of usufruct and annuities such that their capitalised value over their probable duration exceeds the disposable part of the estate, the heirs are entitled either to seek proportionate abatement of such rights or to redeem them by surrendering the disposable part of the estate to the beneficiaries.

Art. 5311B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 6. On naming of remaindermen

6. On naming of remaindermen

The naming of a remainderman in respect of an heir entitled to a statutory entitlement is invalid as to that part of the estate; the provision on issue who are incapable of judgement is reserved.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 532 B. Action in abatement / III. Order of abatement

III. Order of abatement

Abatement applies first to testamentary dispositions and thereafter to dispositions inter vivos in reverse chronological order until the statutory entitlement has been reconstituted.

Art. 533 B. Action in abatement / IV. Prescription

IV. Prescription

1 A claim in abatement prescribes one year after the date on which the heirs learned of the infringement of their rights and in any event after ten years have elapsed since the succession, in the case of testamentary disposition, or since the testator’s death, in the case of other dispositions.

2 If the declaration of the invalidity of a later disposition revives an earlier one, the prescriptive periods begin on the date on which invalidity was declared.

3 The entitlement to abatement may be invoked as a defence at any time.


  Section Seven: Claims under Contracts of Succession

Art. 534 A. Claims in respect of lifetime transfers

A. Claims in respect of lifetime transfers

1 If the testator transfers his or her property during his or her lifetime to the contractual heir, the latter may arrange for a public inventory to be taken.

2 Where the testator has not transferred all his or her property or has acquired property since the transfer, except where otherwise provided the contract applies only to the property transferred.

3 Where such transfer takes place during the testator’s lifetime, except where otherwise provided all rights and obligations arising from the contract pass to the heirs of the named heir.

Art. 535 B. Hotchpot in the case of renunciation of inheritance / I. Abatement

B. Hotchpot in the case of renunciation of inheritance

I. Abatement

1 If the testator during his or her lifetime conferred benefits on a renouncing heir that exceed that heir’s share of the estate, his or her co-heirs may request abatement.

2 However, such benefits are subject to abatement only to the extent they exceed the statutory entitlement of the renouncing heir.

3 Allowance is made for them according to the provisions governing hotchpot.

Art. 536 B. Hotchpot in the case of renunciation of inheritance / II. Reimbursement

II. Reimbursement

If as a result of abatement a renouncing heir is obliged to reimburse the estate, he or she has the choice of either taking the reimbursement upon himself or of placing the entire benefit into hotchpot and participating in the division as if he or she had never renounced.


  Division Two: Succession

  Title Fifteen: Commencement of the Succession Process

Art. 537 A. Requirements for the deceased

A. Requirements for the deceased

1 Succession commences on the death of the deceased.

2 Insofar as dispositions and divisions made during deceased's lifetime are relevant under law of succession, they are taken into account according to the condition of the estate as at the time of his or her death.

Art. 538 B. Place where succession commences

B. Place where succession commences1

1 The succession process commences in respect of the entire estate at the deceased’s last domicile.

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 539 C. Requirements for the heirs / I. Capacity / 1. Legal capacity

C. Requirements for the heirs

I. Capacity

1. Legal capacity

1 Every person is capable of being an heir and acquiring property by testamentary disposition unless by law he or she is deemed incapable of inheritance.

2 Bequests with a designated purpose to groups of persons not constituting a legal entity are acquired by all such persons individually with an obligation to use them as prescribed or, where this is not practical, give rise to a trust.

Art. 540 C. Requirements for the heirs / I. Capacity / 2. Unworthiness to inherit / a. Grounds

2. Unworthiness to inherit

a. Grounds

1 A person is unworthy of inheriting or acquiring anything by a testamentary disposition if:

1.
he or she wilfully and unlawfully caused or attempted to cause the death of the person now deceased;
2.
he or she wilfully and unlawfully rendered the person now deceased permanently incapable of making a testamentary disposition;
3.
by malice, coercion or threat he or she induced the person now deceased to make or revoke a testamentary disposition or prevented him or her from doing so;
4.
he or she wilfully and unlawfully eliminated or invalidated a testamentary disposition in such a manner as to prevent the person now deceased from drawing up a new one.

2 Unworthiness to inherit does not apply if the person now deceased has forgiven the person concerned.

Art. 541 C. Requirements for the heirs / I. Capacity / 2. Unworthiness to inherit / b. Effect on issue

b. Effect on issue

1 Unworthiness to inherit applies only to the person concerned.

2 His or her issue inherit from the deceased as if the person unworthy to inherit were predeceased.

Art. 542 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 1. As heir

II. Capacity to inherit on succession

1. As heir

1 In order to inherit, an heir must be alive and capable of inheriting at the time of succession.

2 If an heir dies after commencement of succession, his or her rights of inheritance in respect of the estate pass to his or her own heirs.

Art. 543 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 2. As legatee

2. As legatee

1 A legatee surviving the testator and capable of inheriting acquires a claim to the legacy.

2 If he or she dies before the testator, his or her legacy is extinguished in favour of the person who would have been obliged to deliver the legacy to him, unless some other intention is evident from the disposition.

Art. 544 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 3. Unborn child

3. Unborn child

1 A child is capable of inheriting from the moment of conception onwards, providing he or she is subsequently born alive.

1bis If it is required to protect the child's interests, the child protection authority shall establish a deputyship.1

2 If the child is stillborn, it is disregarded for inheritance purposes.2


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 545 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 4. Remaindermen

4. Remaindermen

1 The testator may bequeath his or her estate or part thereof to a person not yet living when succession commences by designating such person a remainderman.

2 Where no provisional heir is named, the statutory heirs are deemed to be the provisional heirs.

Art. 546 D. Presumption of death / I. Inheriting from persons presumed dead / 1. Devolution against security

D. Presumption of death

I. Inheriting from persons presumed dead

1. Devolution against security

1 Where a person has been declared presumed dead, before his or her heirs or legatees succeed to the estate, they must furnish security for the restitution of the property to those with a prevailing claim or to the missing person himself.

2 Such security shall be furnished for five years in the case of disappearance in life-threatening circumstances and for 15 years in the case of absence without sign of life, but never beyond the date on which the missing person would have become 100 years old.

3 The five-year period runs from the date on which the estate is transferred and the 15-year period from the last sign of life.

Art. 547 D. Presumption of death / I. Inheriting from persons presumed dead / 2. Annulment of presumption of death and restitution

2. Annulment of presumption of death and restitution

1 If the person who is presumed dead returns or other parties assert prevailing claims to the estate, those put in possession of the estate must return it according to the rules governing possession.

2 Provided they acted in good faith, they are liable to parties with prevailing claims only during the period in which action may be brought for reclamation of the estate.

Art. 548 D. Presumption of death / II. Succession rights of persons presumed dead

II. Succession rights of persons presumed dead

1 If it is impossible to determine whether an heir is alive or dead when succession commences because he or she has disappeared, his or her share of the inheritance is placed under official administration.

2 Those who would succeed to the missing heir’s share if he or she were dead may request the court to declare the heir presumed dead one year after his or her disappearance in life-threatening circumstances or five years after the last sign of life and, once such declaration has been made, may apply for release of their shares of his or her inheritance.

3 Such shares are released according to the provisions governing release to the heirs of persons presumed dead.

Art. 549 D. Presumption of death / III. Correlation of the two cases

III. Correlation of the two cases

1 If the heirs of the person presumed dead are already in possession of his or her property and an inheritance passes to him or her, his or her co-heirs may invoke this fact and request that such inheritance be released to them without need for a second declaration of presumed death.

2 The heirs of the person presumed dead may likewise invoke a declaration of presumed death obtained by the co-heirs.

Art. 550 D. Presumption of death / IV. Procedure ex officio

IV. Procedure ex officio

1 Where the missing person’s property or succession rights have been under official administration for ten years or more, or he or she would have reached the age of 100, at the request of the competent authority the declaration of presumed death is pronounced ex officio.

2 If no rightful heirs come forward during the public notice period, the property of the person presumed dead passes to the state authority with right to succeed or, if he or she was never resident in Switzerland, to the canton of origin.

3 The local authority or canton concerned has the same duty of restitution as those put in possession of the estate towards the person presumed dead and parties with prevailing claims.


  Title Sixteen: Effect of Succession

  Chapter One: Measures to Safeguard Succession

Art. 551 A. In general

A. In general

1 The competent authority must of its own accord take all measures necessary to ensure proper succession.1

2 In the cases envisaged by law, in particular, such measures include sealing the estate, drawing up the inventory, appointing the estate administrators and reading out the wills of the deceased.

3 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 552 B. Sealing the estate

B. Sealing the estate

The order to seal the estate is given whenever provided for by cantonal law.

Art. 553 C. Inventory

C. Inventory

1 The order to draw up an inventory is given:

1.
where an heir is under guardianship or is to be made a ward of court;
2.
where an heir is permanently absent and without representation;
3.
at the request of one of the heirs;
4.
where an adult heir is or is to be made subject to a general deputyship.1

2 The inventory is drawn up in accordance with the provisions of cantonal law and normally must be completed within two months of the death of the deceased.

3 Cantonal legislation may require that an inventory be drawn up in other cases.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 554 D. Estate administrators / I. In general

D. Estate administrators

I. In general

1 Estate administrators are appointed:

1.
where such an appointment is in the best interests of an heir who is permanently absent and without representation;
2.
where none of the claimants may adequately establish his or her succession rights or the existence of an heir is uncertain;
3.
where not all heirs are known;
4.
in special cases provided for by law.

2 Where the deceased had named an executor, administration of the estate is entrusted to him or her.

3 Where the deceased was subject to a deputyship that covers asset management, the deputy is responsible for administering the estate unless other instructions apply.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 555 D. Estate administrators / II. In the case of unknown heirs

II. In the case of unknown heirs

1 If the authority is uncertain as to whether the deceased is survived by heirs or whether it is aware of all the heirs, the authority must by appropriate public means call on all persons with succession rights to come forward and claim them within one year.

2 If no such person comes forward during this time and if no heirs are known to the authority, the estate passes to the state authority with right to succeed, subject to any action for recovery of inheritance.

Art. 556 E. Probate proceedings / I. Duty to submit the will

E. Probate proceedings

I. Duty to submit the will

1 If the deceased left a will, this must be submitted to the authority without delay even if it appears to be invalid.

2 The public official by whom the will was recorded or with whom it was deposited or any other person who had custody of the will or found it among the personal effects of the deceased is personally responsible on learning of the testator’s death for ensuring that the will is submitted to the authority.

3 Once the will has been submitted, the authority must, where feasible after hearing all interested parties, either release the estate to the statutory heirs on a provisional basis or appoint estate administrators.

Art. 557 E. Probate proceedings / II. Reading the will

II. Reading the will

1 The testator’s will must be opened and read out by the competent authority within one month of its submission.

2 All heirs known to the authority are summoned to attend the reading.

3 If the testator left more than one will, all are to be submitted to the authority and opened and read out by it.

Art. 558 E. Probate proceedings / III. Notification of interested parties

III. Notification of interested parties

1 At the estate’s expense, all interested parties receive a copy of the provisions of the will as relate to them.

2 Legatees of unknown whereabouts are informed by appropriate public notice.

Art. 559 E. Probate proceedings / IV. Release of the estate

IV. Release of the estate

1 One month after notification of the interested parties, at the request of the named heirs the probate authority issues such persons with a certificate confirming them as heirs, subject to action of declaration of invalidity and for recovery of inheritance, providing their entitlement has not expressly been challenged by the statutory heirs or the legatees of an earlier will.

2 At the same time the estate administrator will be instructed, where applicable, to release the estate into their possession.


  Chapter Two: Vesting of the Estate

Art. 560 A. Vesting / I. Heirs

A. Vesting

I. Heirs

1 On the death of the deceased, the estate in its entirety vests by operation of law in the heirs.

2 Subject to the statutory exceptions, the deceased’s claims, rights of ownership, limited rights in rem and rights of possession automatically pass to the heirs and the debts of the deceased become the personal debts of the heirs.

3 Vesting in the named heirs takes effect retroactively from the date on which the succession process commenced and the statutory heirs must relinquish the estate to them according to the rules governing possession.

Art. 5611A. Vesting / II. ...

II. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 562 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 1. Vesting

III. Legatees

1. Vesting

1 The legatees have a personal claim against the obligors of their legacies or, where no-one is specifically named as such, against the legal or named heirs.

2 Unless otherwise provided by testamentary disposition, the claim becomes due once the obligor has accepted the inheritance or is no longer able to disclaim it.

3 If the heirs fail to fulfil their obligation, they may be sued for release of the bequeathed property or, where the legacy pertains to performance of some action, for damages.

Art. 563 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 2. Object

2. Object

1 Where the bequest to the legatee is a usufruct or annuity or other recurring benefit, unless otherwise stipulated, his or her claim is determined according to the provisions of property law and the Code of Obligations.

2 If the legacy is a life assurance claim maturing on the death of the testator, the legatee is entitled to assert that claim directly.

Art. 564 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 3. Relationship between creditors and legatees

3. Relationship between creditors and legatees

1 The claims of the testator’s creditors precede those of legatees.

2 The claims of the heir’s creditors rank equally with those of the testator’s creditors, provided the heir acquired the inheritance without reservation.

Art. 565 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 4. Abatement

4. Abatement

1 If, after the legacies have been distributed, the heirs pay debts of the estate that were previously unknown to them, they are entitled to reimbursement from the legatees of an amount corresponding to the proportionate abatement of such legacies that the heirs could have claimed.

2 However, the legatees may be held liable only in the amount by which they are enriched at the time such reimbursement is demanded.

Art. 566 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 1. Right to renounce

B. Disclaimer

I. Declaration

1. Right to renounce

1 The legal and named heirs are entitled to disclaim the inheritance passing to them.

2 There is a presumption of a disclaimer if at the time of his or her death the deceased had been officially declared insolvent or was manifestly insolvent.

Art. 567 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 2. Time limit / a. In general

2. Time limit

a. In general

1 The time limit for a disclaimer is three months.

2 For statutory heirs, this limit begins on the date on which they learned of the death, unless they can show that they did not learn of their succession rights until later, and for named heirs it begins on the date on which they received official notification of the testator’s disposition.

Art. 568 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 2. Time limit / b. In the case of an inventory

b. In the case of an inventory

If an inventory has been drawn up as a precautionary measure, the disclaimer time limit for all heirs begins on the date on which the authority notified them that the inventory was complete.

Art. 569 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 3. Passing of right to disclaim

3. Passing of right to disclaim

1 If an heir dies before disclaiming or accepting an inheritance, the right to disclaim passes to his or her heirs.

2 For such heirs, the disclaimer time limit begins on the date on which they learned that the inheritance passed to the deceased heir and ends no sooner than the date on which the time limit for disclaiming the inheritance from the deceased heir expires.

3 Where such heirs disclaim the inheritance and it passes to other heirs who previously had no succession rights, the disclaimer time limit for the latter begins on the date on which they learned of the disclaimer.

Art. 570 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 4. Form

4. Form

1 An heir must declare his or her disclaimer orally or in writing to the competent authority.

2 It must be unconditional and without reservation.

3 The authority keeps an official record of disclaimers.

Art. 571 B. Disclaimer / II. Forfeiture of right to disclaim

II. Forfeiture of right to disclaim

1 If the heir fails to declare that he or she disclaims the inheritance within the relevant time limit, he or she acquires it without reservation.

2 Where an heir has interfered in the affairs of the estate before expiry of the disclaimer time limit or has acted in a manner not conducive to administering the estate or maintaining the deceased’s business activities, or where he or she has appropriated or concealed objects belonging to the estate, he or she is no longer entitled to disclaim the inheritance.

Art. 572 B. Disclaimer / III. Disclaimer by one co-heir

III. Disclaimer by one co-heir

1 Where the deceased has not made a testamentary disposition and one of two or more heirs disclaims the inheritance, his or her share of the estate passes to the other heirs as if he or she had predeceased.

2 Where the deceased has made testamentary disposition, any share of the estate disclaimed by a named heir passes to the testator’s nearest statutory heirs, unless other intentions on the part of the testator are evident from the disposition.

Art. 573 B. Disclaimer / IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs / 1. In general

IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs

1. In general

1 Where the inheritance is disclaimed by all the nearest heirs, the estate is liquidated by the bankruptcy office.

2 If liquidation produces a surplus after payment of debts, this passes to those entitled to inherit as if they had not disclaimed it.

Art. 574 B. Disclaimer / IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs / 2. Entitlement of surviving spouse

2. Entitlement of surviving spouse

If the deceased’s issue have disclaimed the inheritance, the authority notifies the disclaimer to the surviving spouse, who is entitled to declare acceptance within one month.

Art. 575 B. Disclaimer / IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs / 3. Disclaimer in favour of subsequent heirs

3. Disclaimer in favour of subsequent heirs

1 When disclaiming the inheritance, the heirs may request that it be offered to their subsequent heirs before the estate is liquidated.

2 In this event, the authority informs the subsequent heirs that the preceding heirs have disclaimed, and if the former fail to declare their acceptance of the inheritance within one month, they are likewise deemed to have disclaimed it.

Art. 576 B. Disclaimer / V. Extension of time limit

V. Extension of time limit

Where there is good cause, the competent authority may grant the legal and named heirs an extension of the time limit or set a new one.

Art. 577 B. Disclaimer / VI. Disclaimer of a legacy

VI. Disclaimer of a legacy

Where a legatee disclaims a legacy, it becomes void in favour of the obligor, unless other intentions on the part of the testator are evident from his or her disposition.

Art. 578 B. Disclaimer / VII. Security for the heir’s creditors

VII. Security for the heir’s creditors

1 Where an overindebted heir has disclaimed an inheritance in order to withhold it from his or her creditors, the latter or the bankruptcy administrators may challenge the disclaimer within six months unless their claims are secured.

2 If their challenge is upheld, the inheritance is placed in official liquidation.

3 Any surplus serves first to satisfy the challenging creditors and any balance remaining after redemption of the other debts passes to the heirs in whose favour the disclaimer was made.

Art. 579 B. Disclaimer / VIII. Liability in the event of disclaimer

VIII. Liability in the event of disclaimer

1 Where the deceased was insolvent and his or her heirs disclaim the inheritance, they remain liable to his or her creditors to the extent that in the five years prior to his or her death they received property or assets from him or her which on division of the estate would have been subject to hotchpot.

2 The endowment of newly-weds according to local custom and the costs of raising and educating children are not affected by such liability.

3 Heirs acting in good faith are liable only to the extent they are still enriched.


  Chapter Three: Public Inventory

Art. 580 A. Requirements

A. Requirements

1 Any heir entitled to disclaim his or her inheritance has the right to request a public inventory.

2 The request must be made to the competent authority within one month in the same form as the disclaimer.

3 A request made by one heir is also valid for the others.

Art. 581 B. Procedure / I. Inventory

B. Procedure

I. Inventory

1 The public inventory is drawn up by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of cantonal law and consists of a list of all the assets and debts of the estate, together with an appraisal of the value of each item in the inventory.

2 Any person able to provide information on the financial circumstances of the deceased is personally obliged to give the authority all the information it requires.

3 In particular, the heirs must inform the authority of any debts of the deceased that are known to them.

Art. 582 B. Procedure / II. Formal call to account

II. Formal call to account

1 In the course of drawing up the inventory, the authority shall make a formal call to account whereby appropriate public notices are issued calling on all creditors and debtors of the deceased, including creditors under a surety, to come forward and register their claims and debts within a specified time limit.

2 Such notices must alert the creditors to the consequences of any failure to register.

3 The time limit for registering must not be earlier than one month from the date of the first public notice.

Art. 583 B. Procedure / III. Inclusion ex officio

III. Inclusion ex officio

1 Claims and debts evident from the public registers or from the papers of the deceased are included ex officio.

2 The debtors and creditors must be notified of any such inclusion.

Art. 584 B. Procedure / IV. Result

IV. Result

1 On expiry of the published time limit, the inventory is closed and made available for perusal by all interested parties for at least one month.

2 The costs are borne by the estate and, where this is insufficient, by the heirs who requested the inventory.

Art. 585 C. Situation of the heirs during the inventory / I. Administration

C. Situation of the heirs during the inventory

I. Administration

1 While the inventory is being drawn up, only the necessary administrative actions may be taken.

2 Where the authority authorises an heir to continue the deceased’s business activities, the co-heirs may request that security be furnished.

Art. 586 C. Situation of the heirs during the inventory / II. Debt enforcement, litigation, prescription

II. Debt enforcement, litigation, prescription

1 While the inventory is being drawn up, no action may be taken to enforce the debts of the deceased.

2 ...1

3 Except in urgent matters, court proceedings may neither be commenced nor continued.


1 Repealed by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), with effect from 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 587 D. Effect / I. Time limit for declaration of intention

D. Effect

I. Time limit for declaration of intention

1 Once the inventory is closed, all the heirs are requested to declare within one month their intentions with regard to acquiring the inheritance due to them.

2 Where justified in the circumstances, the competent authority may set a further time limit for obtaining appraisals, settling disputed claims and the like.

Art. 588 D. Effect / II. Declaration of intention

II. Declaration of intention

1 During the set time limit, an heir may disclaim his or her inheritance or request official liquidation or accept the inheritance either subject to public inventory or without reservation.

2 Where an heir makes no declaration, he or she is deemed to have accepted the inheritance subject to public inventory.

Art. 589 D. Effect / III. Effects of acceptance subject to public inventory / 1. Liability as per inventory

III. Effects of acceptance subject to public inventory

1. Liability as per inventory

1 Where an heir accepts the inheritance subject to public inventory, the debts of the deceased listed in the inventory and the assets pass to him or her.

2 The acquisition of the inheritance with all attendant rights and obligations takes effect retroactively from the date on which the succession process commenced.

3 The heir is liable for debts listed in the inventory both with the inheritance and with his or her own assets.

Art. 590 D. Effect / III. Effects of acceptance subject to public inventory / 2. Liability beyond the inventory

2. Liability beyond the inventory

1 The heirs are not liable either personally or with the inheritance towards creditors of the estate whose claims were not included in the inventory because the creditors failed to register them in time.

2 Where such failure to register claims in the inventory was through no fault of the creditor or his or her claims were not included in the inventory despite having been registered, the heir is liable to the extent he or she is enriched by the inheritance.

3 In all cases, creditors may assert claims to the extent these are secured by a lien on the estate assets.

Art. 591 E. Liability for debts subject to a surety

E. Liability for debts subject to a surety

Any debts under a surety given by the deceased are listed separately in the inventory and may be asserted against an heir, even where he or she accepts the inheritance, only in the amount that would be allocated to the surety debt if all debts of the estate were to be redeemed under the rules governing bankruptcy.

Art. 592 F. Acquisition by a state authority

F. Acquisition by a state authority

Where an estate passes to a state authority, a formal call to account is made ex officio and the state authority is liable for the debts of the estate only in the amount of the assets it has inherited from the estate.


  Chapter Four: Official Liquidation

Art. 593 A. Requirements / I. At the request of an heir

A. Requirements

I. At the request of an heir

1 Rather than disclaim the inheritance or accept it subject to public inventory, each heir is entitled to request official liquidation.

2 However, such request may not be granted if at least one co-heir accepts the inheritance.

3 In the event of official liquidation, the heirs are not liable for the debts of the estate.

Art. 594 A. Requirements / II. At the request of the deceased’s creditors

II. At the request of the deceased’s creditors

1 Where the deceased’s creditors have good cause to fear that their claims will not be met and such claims are not satisfied or secured at their request, within three months of the death of the deceased or the reading of the will they may demand the official liquidation of the estate.

2 Subject to the same conditions, legatees may request provisional measures by way of security.

Art. 595 B. Procedure / I. Administration

B. Procedure

I. Administration

1 The official liquidation is carried out by the competent authority or by one or more estate administrators acting at the authority’s behest.

2 It begins with the taking of an inventory and the attendant formal call to account.

3 The estate administrator is under the authority’s supervision and the heirs may appeal to the authority against any measures taken or planned by the administrator.

Art. 596 B. Procedure / liquidation

II. Ordinary

liquidation

1 For the purpose of liquidation, any business activities of the deceased still in operation are brought to a close, his or her obligations are performed, his or her claims are called in, his or her legacies are distributed where possible, his or her rights and duties are determined at law, where necessary, and his or her assets are converted into cash.

2 Land formerly belonging to the deceased is sold at public auction; it may be disposed of by private sale only with the consent of all the heirs.

3 The heirs are entitled even during the liquidation process to request that some or all of the objects and monies that are not required for the liquidation be released into their possession.

Art. 597 B. Procedure / III. Liquidation by the bankruptcy office

III. Liquidation by the bankruptcy office

If the estate is overindebted, its liquidation is carried out by the bankruptcy office in accordance with the provisions governing bankruptcy.


  Chapter Five: Action for Recovery of Inheritance

Art. 598 A. Requirements

A. Requirements

1 A person who believes that, as a legal or named heir, he or she has a better claim than the current possessor to an estate or a part thereof may assert his or her claim by bringing an action for recovery of inheritance.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 599 B. Effect

B. Effect

1 If the claim is upheld, the possessor must relinquish the estate or the part thereof to the claimant in accordance with the rules governing possession.

2 The defendant cannot invoke adverse possession in respect of property belonging to the estate.

Art. 600 C. Prescription

C. Prescription

1 The right to bring an action for recovery of inheritance against a defendant acting in good faith prescribes one year after the date on which the claimant learned that the property was possessed by the defendant and that he or she has a better claim to it, but in all cases ten years after the death of the deceased or the date on which the will was read.

2 The prescriptive period for the right to bring an action against a defendant acting in bad faith is always 30 years.

Art. 601 D. Action by a legatee

D. Action by a legatee

The right of a legatee to bring an action prescribes ten years after notification of the testamentary disposition or from the subsequent date on which the legacy became due.


  Title Seventeen: Division of the Estate

  Chapter One: Community of Heirs prior to Division

Art. 602 A. Effect of succession / I. Community of heirs

A. Effect of succession

I. Community of heirs

1 Where several heirs inherit the estate, on succession and until such time as it is divided they form a community in respect of all rights and obligations of the estate.

2 They become joint owners of the property belonging to the estate and have joint power of disposal over the rights of the estate, subject to contractual or statutory powers of representation and administration.

3 At the request of one co-heir, the competent authority may appoint a representative of the community of heirs until the estate is divided.

Art. 603 A. Effect of succession / II. Liability of the heirs

II. Liability of the heirs

1 The heirs are jointly and severally liable for the debts of the deceased.

2 The appropriate compensation due to children or grandchildren for contributions made to the household they shared with the deceased must be added to the debts of the estate unless this would render the estate overindebted.1


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, in force since 15 Feb. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).

Art. 604 B. Right to division

B. Right to division

1 Any heir may at any time request that the estate be divided unless he or she is under a contractual or statutory obligation to remain a member of the community of heirs.

2 On application by an heir, the court may order a temporary deferral of the division of the estate or specific parts thereof where immediate division would substantially impair their value.

3 Where one heir is insolvent, his or her co-heirs may apply for provisional measures to secure their own claims immediately upon succession.

Art. 605 C. Deferral of division

C. Deferral of division

1 If on succession the rights of an unborn child need to be taken into consideration, the division of the estate must be deferred until the child is born.

2 In the interim, the child’s mother is entitled to enjoy the benefits of the joint estate to the extent required for her maintenance.

Art. 606 D. Claims of household members

D. Claims of household members

Heirs who were members of the household of and maintained by the deceased at the time of his or her death may demand that they be maintained for a further month at the estate’s expense.


  Chapter Two: Method of Division

Art. 607 A. In general

A. In general

1 Statutory heirs must divide the estate among themselves and with the named heirs according to the same principles.

2 Except where provided otherwise, they are free to decide on the method of division.

3 Co-heirs in possession of estate property or in debt to the deceased must provide precise information regarding such circumstances prior to the division.

Art. 608 B. Instructions concerning the division / I. Testamentary disposition

B. Instructions concerning the division

I. Testamentary disposition

1 The testator is entitled by means of testamentary disposition to give his or her heirs instructions concerning the division and the formation of portions.

2 Such instructions are binding on the heirs, subject to measures to balance out the portions in the event of an inequality not intended by the testator.

3 Unless other intentions on the part of the testator are evident from his or her disposition, any bequest of a given part of the estate to one particular heir is deemed to be merely an instruction concerning the division rather than a specific legacy.

Art. 609 B. Instructions concerning the division / II. Assistance from the authorities

II. Assistance from the authorities

1 At the request of a creditor who has acquired or distrained an inheritance that has passed to an heir or who holds unpaid debt certificates against him or her, the authorities must assist in the division in place of that heir.

2 Cantonal law may provide for official intervention in the division process in other cases.

Art. 610 C. Performing the division / I. Equal rights of heirs

C. Performing the division

I. Equal rights of heirs

1 Except where other provisions apply, all heirs have an equal right to the estate property.

2 They must disclose to each other all circumstances concerning their relationship with the deceased insofar as these pertain to the just and equitable division of the estate.

3 Each heir may request that the debts of the deceased be redeemed or secured prior to division of the estate.

Art. 611 C. Performing the division / II. Formation of lots

II. Formation of lots

1 The heirs form as many portions or lots as there are heirs or stirpes.

2 If they are unable to reach agreement, at the request of one heir the competent authority must form the lots with due regard to local custom and the personal circumstances and wishes of the majority of the co-heirs.

3 The lots are distributed among the heirs either as agreed or by the drawing of lots.

Art. 612 C. Performing the division / III. Allocation and sale of specific objects

III. Allocation and sale of specific objects

1 Where the value of an object belonging to the estate would be substantially diminished if such object were divided, it is allocated in its entirety to one of the heirs.

2 Where the heirs are unable to agree on the division or allocation of an object, it must be sold and the proceeds divided.

3 At the request of an heir, such sale must be carried out at auction and, in the absence of agreement among the heirs, the competent authority decides whether such auction is to be public or only among the heirs.

Art. 612a1C. Performing the division / IV. Allocation of the home and household effects to the surviving spouse

IV. Allocation of the home and household effects to the surviving spouse

1 Where the house or apartment in which the spouses lived or the household effects form part of the estate, the surviving spouse may request that such property be allocated to him or her against his or her portion.

2 Where justified in the circumstances, at the request of the surviving spouse or the other statutory heirs of the deceased, a usufruct or right of residence may be granted rather than ownership of the home.

3 The surviving spouse cannot claim such rights in respect of premises in which the deceased practised a profession or ran a business and which are required by one of his or her issue in order to continue the profession or business, subject to the provisions of agricultural law of succession.

4 The same provisions apply mutatis mutandis to registered partners.2


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Inserted by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 613 D. Special items / I. Items that belong together, family documents

D. Special items

I. Items that belong together, family documents

1 Items which by their nature belong together must not be separated if one of the heirs objects to such separation.

2 Family documents and items of special sentimental value to the family must not be sold if any of the heirs objects.

3 If the heirs cannot reach agreement, the competent authority decides whether to sell such items or to allocate them, against the recipient’s portion or otherwise, giving due regard to local custom and, in the absence of such custom, to the personal circumstances of the heirs.

Art. 613a1D. Special items / I.bis Agricultural inventory

I.bis Agricultural inventory

Where the tenant of an agricultural enterprise dies and one of his or her heirs continues the lease on his or her own, on request he or she may have the entire inventory (livestock, machinery, supplies, etc.) allocated to him or her and charged to his or her portion at its utility value.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 614 D. Special items / II. Claims of the deceased against his or her heirs

II. Claims of the deceased against his or her heirs

Claims of the deceased against an heir are charged to the latter’s portion.

Art. 615 D. Special items / III. Pledged estate property

III. Pledged estate property

If as a result of the division an heir receives estate property that is pledged to secure the debts of the deceased, the debt to the pledgee is likewise transferred to him or her.

Art. 6161

1 Repealed by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct 1991 on Rural Land Rights, with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 6171D. Special items / IV. Land / 1. Method of allocation / a. Imputed value

IV. Land

1. Method of allocation

a. Imputed value

Land is charged to the heirs’ portions at its market value as at the time of the division.


1 Amended by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 618 D. Special items / IV. Land / 1. Method of allocation / b. Valuation procedure

b. Valuation procedure

1 Where the heirs are unable to agree on the market value, it is estimated by an officially appointed expert.1

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).
2 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, with effect from 15 Feb. 1994 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).

Art. 6191D. Special items / V. Agricultural businesses and land

V. Agricultural businesses and land

The method of including and allocating agricultural enterprises and agricultural land is governed by the Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural Land Rights.


1 Amended by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 620–6251

1 Repealed by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct 1991 on Rural Land Rights with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).


  Chapter Three: Hotchpot

Art. 626 A. Hotchpot duty of the heirs

A. Hotchpot duty of the heirs

1 The statutory heirs are under a mutual obligation to place into hotchpot any property received from the deceased during his or her lifetime as advancements against their share of the estate.

2 Unless the deceased expressly instructed otherwise, anything gifted or granted to his or her issue by way of dowry, endowment or assignment of assets, debt remission and the like is subject to hotchpot.

Art. 627 B. Hotchpot if heirs cease to be heirs

B. Hotchpot if heirs cease to be heirs

1 If a person ceases to be an heir before or after succession, his or her duty of hotchpot passes to the heirs that replace him or her.

2 The issue of an heir have a duty of hotchpot in respect of advancements made in his or her favour even if those advancements have not devolved on them.

Art. 628 C. Calculation method / I. In kind or by imputation of value

C. Calculation method

I. In kind or by imputation of value

1 When placing property in hotchpot, the heirs may at their discretion do so either in kind or by imputing its value, even if the advancements made in their favour exceed the value of their share of the estate.

2 The above provisions are subject to any contrary instructions issued by the testator and to the co-heirs’ right to abatement of the advancements.

Art. 629 C. Calculation method / II. Correlation with share of the estate

II. Correlation with share of the estate

1 Where advancements to an heir exceed the value of his or her share of the estate, subject to claims in abatement, the surplus is exempt from hotchpot if it may be shown that the deceased intended to favour said heir by such advancements.

2 Exemption from hotchpot is presumed in the case of endowments in the usual order of magnitude made to the issue on their marriage.

Art. 630 C. Calculation method / III. Hotchpot value

III. Hotchpot value

1 Hotchpot is calculated according to the value of the advancements on succession or, where the advanced property has previously been sold, the sale proceeds obtained.

2 Any expenditure on and damage to the property and the natural produce derived therefrom must be allowed for among the heirs according to the rules governing possession.

Art. 631 D. Education costs

D. Education costs

1 Unless it is shown that the deceased intended otherwise, sums expended by him or her on the upbringing and education of individual children are subject to hotchpot only insofar as they exceed the normal amounts.

2 Children still in education or who suffer from disabilities must be granted appropriate advance payments on division of the estate.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 632 E. Occasional gifts

E. Occasional gifts

Customary occasional gifts are not subject to hotchpot.

Art. 6331

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, with effect from 15 Feb. 1994 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).


  Chapter Four: Completion and Effect of Division

Art. 634 A. Agreement / I. Contract of division

A. Agreement

I. Contract of division

1 The division of the estate becomes binding on the heirs once the lots have been formed and received or on conclusion of the contract of division.

2 In order to be valid, the contract of division must be done in writing.

Art. 635 A. Agreement / II. Contracts regarding shares of the estate

II. Contracts regarding shares of the estate

1 In order to be valid, contracts between heirs regarding assignment of shares of the estate must be done in writing.1

2 If such contracts are concluded by an heir with third parties, they do not give the latter any right to participate in the division of the estate, but merely confer a claim on the share allocated to that heir as a result of the division.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 636 A. Agreement / III. Contracts prior to succession

III. Contracts prior to succession

1 Contracts concluded without the involvement and authorisation of the testator between one heir and another or between an heir and a third party regarding an inheritance that has not yet devolved on the heir are not binding.

2 Any performance rendered under such contracts may be reclaimed.

Art. 637 B. Liability among co-heirs / I. Warranty

B. Liability among co-heirs

I. Warranty

1 On completion of the division, the co-heirs are mutually liable for the estate property as if they were purchasers and vendors.

2 They must mutually warrant the existence of claims allocated to them in the division and, except in the case of securities with a market price, are mutually liable as simple guarantors for the debtor’s solvency in the amount at which such claims were brought into account.

3 Claims under such warranty prescribe one year after the division or the subsequent date on which the claims fell due.

Art. 638 B. Liability among co-heirs / II. Challenging the division

II. Challenging the division

A contract of division may be challenged in accordance with the provisions governing challenge of contract in general.

Art. 639 C. Liability toward third parties / I. Joint and several liability

C. Liability toward third parties

I. Joint and several liability

1 Even after the division of the estate, the heirs remain jointly and severally liable with their entire property for the debts of the testator to his or her creditors, providing the latter have not expressly or tacitly agreed to a division or transfer of such debts.

2 The joint and several liability of the co-heirs prescribes five years after the division or the subsequent date on which the debt claim fell due.

Art. 640 C. Liability toward third parties / II. Recourse against co-heirs C. Liability toward third parties / II. Recourse against co-heirs

II. Recourse against co-heirs

1 If an heir has paid a debt owed by the deceased that was not allocated to him or her in the division, or if he or she has paid more of a debt than he or she has assumed, he or she has right of recourse against the co-heirs.

2 Recourse is taken first against the person who assumed such debt in the division.

3 In all other respects, the heirs must bear the debts in proportion to their shares in the estate, unless otherwise agreed.

  Part Four: Property Law

  Division One: Ownership

  Title Eighteen: General Provisions

Art. 641 A. Nature of ownership / I. In general

A. Nature of ownership

I. In general1

1 The owner of an object is free to dispose of it as he or she sees fit within the limits of the law.

2 He or she has the right to reclaim it from anyone withholding it from him or her and to protect it against any unwarranted interference.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 641a1A. Nature of ownership / II. Animals

II. Animals

1 Animals are not objects.

2 Where no special provisions exist for animals, they are subject to the provisions governing objects.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 642 B. Scope of ownership / I. Constituent parts

B. Scope of ownership

I. Constituent parts

1 The owner of an object also has ownership of all its constituent parts.

2 A constituent part is anything which, according to local custom, is held to be an essential part of an object and which cannot be detached without destroying, damaging or altering it.

Art. 643 B. Scope of ownership / II. Natural fruits

II. Natural fruits

1 The owner of an object also has ownership of its natural fruits.

2 Natural fruits are the periodic produce and revenues customarily derived from an object used according to its purpose.

3 Prior to separation, the natural fruits are an integral part of the object.

Art. 644 B. Scope of ownership / III. Accessories / 1. Definition

III. Accessories

1. Definition

1 Any disposition affecting an object also applies to its accessories, unless an exception is made.

2 Accessories are those chattels which, according to local custom or the clear will of the main object's owner, permanently facilitate the management, use or preservation of the main object and are auxiliary thereto by virtue of having been joined to it, adapted to it or otherwise connected with it.

3 If an object is an accessory, it remains so regardless of temporary separation from the main object.

Art. 645 B. Scope of ownership / III. Accessories / 2. Exclusions

2. Exclusions

Chattels do not qualify as accessories if they are intended for temporary use or consumption by the possessor of the main object, are not intrinsically related to it or are connected with it only for storage, sale or hire purposes.

Art. 646 C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 1. Relationship among co-owners

C. Collective ownership

I. Co-ownership

1. Relationship among co-owners

1 Co-ownership exists where several persons own a share in an object which is physically undivided.

2 Unless otherwise stipulated, they are co-owners in equal measure.

3 Each co-owner has the rights and obligations of ownership in respect of his or her share in the object, and said share may be alienated and pledged by him or her, or distrained by his or her creditors.

Art. 6471C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 2. Use and administration rules

2. Use and administration rules

1 The co-owners may agree rules on use and administration that deviate from the statutory provisions and provide therein that the rules may be amended with the consent of the majority of all co-owners.2

1bis Any amendment to the provisions of the use and administration rules on the allocation of exclusive rights of use also requires the consent of the co-owners who are directly affected.3

2 Such rules cannot annul or restrict the rights of each co-owner:

1.
to request such measures as are necessary to preserve the object’s value and serviceability and, where required, to have these ordered by a court;
2.
to take, on his or her own initiative and at the expense of all co-owners, such measures as are urgently needed to safeguard the object against imminent or incremental damage.

1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 647a1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 3. Ordinary administration

3. Ordinary administration

1 Each co-owner may attend to ordinary administration and in particular carry out repairs, sowing and harvesting, short-term custody and supervision, may conclude contracts for such purposes and may exercise the powers derived from such contracts and from rental, lease, work and service agreements, including the payment and acceptance of monies on behalf of all the co-owners.

2 With the consent of the majority of the co-owners, the authority to carry out administration may be submitted to a different regime, subject to the statutory provisions governing necessary and urgent measures.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647b1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 4. Major administrative acts

4. Major administrative acts

1 By the consent of a majority of the co-owners together representing a majority share in the object, major administrative acts may be carried out, notably including changes in methods of cultivation or use, conclusion and termination of rental and lease agreements, participation in land improvements and the appointment of an administrator whose authority extends beyond ordinary administrative acts.

2 The provisions governing necessary construction work are reserved.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647c1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 5. Construction work / a. Necessary work

5. Construction work

a. Necessary work

Maintenance, reconstruction and renovation work necessary to preserve the object’s value and serviceability may be carried out with the consent of the majority of co-owners where such work does not fall under the authority of each individual co-owner to take ordinary administrative steps.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647d1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 5. Construction work / b. Useful work

b. Useful work

1 Renovations and refurbishments aimed at enhancing the value or improving the object’s profitability or serviceability require the approval of a majority of the co-owners together representing a majority share in the object.

2 Alterations which permanently hinder or render unprofitable a co-owner’s use or exploitation of the object for its existing purpose may not be carried out without the consent of that co-owner.

3 Where an alteration would require a co-owner to bear unreasonable costs, in particular because they are disproportionate to the value of his or her share, the alteration may be carried out without his or her consent only if the other co-owners assume such part of his or her share of the costs as exceeds that which he or she may reasonably be expected to meet.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647e1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 5. Construction work / c. Works to improve appearance or convenience

c. Works to improve appearance or convenience

1 Building works serving merely to embellish the object, improve its appearance or make its use more comfortable or convenient may only be carried out with the consent of all the co-owners.

2 If such works are commissioned with the consent of the majority of the co-owners who also represent a majority share in the object, they may be carried out even against the wishes of a dissenting co-owner providing they do not permanently impair the latter’s right of use and enjoyment and the other co-owners compensate him or her for the merely temporary impairment and assume his or her share of the costs.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993 ; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6481C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 6. Power of disposal over the object

6. Power of disposal over the object

1 Each co-owner is entitled to represent, use and exploit the object insofar as is compatible with the rights of the other co-owners.

2 The alienation or encumbrance of the object and the modification of its designated purpose require the consent of all co-owners, unless they have unanimously agreed some other arrangement.

3 Where mortgage rights or real burdens apply to co-ownership shares, the co-owners are not permitted to further encumber the object itself with such charges.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6491C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 7. Costs and expenses

7. Costs and expenses

1 Except where otherwise provided, the administrative costs, taxes and other expenses arising from co-ownership or in relation to the object in co-ownership are borne by the co-owners in proportion to their shares.

2 If a co-owner has borne more than his or her fair share of such costs, he or she is entitled to compensation from the others to an equivalent extent.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 649a1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 8. Binding nature of rules and noting in the land register

8. Binding nature of rules and noting in the land register2

The use and administration rules agreed by the co-owners, their administrative decisions and all relevant court judgments and orders are also binding on a co-owner’s legal successor and on any person acquiring a right in rem to a co-ownership share.

2 They may be noted next to co-ownership shares of immovable property in the land register.3


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 649b1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 9. Exclusion from collective ownership / a. Co-owners

9. Exclusion from collective ownership

a. Co-owners

1 A co-owner may be excluded from the community of co-owners by court order if, as a result of his or her conduct or that of persons to whom he or she granted use of the object or for whom he or she is responsible, his or her duties towards the other co-owners individually or collectively are so seriously violated that continuation of the community of co-owners becomes unreasonable.

2 Where the community comprises only two co-owners, each has the right to sue the other; in other cases, unless otherwise agreed, legal action against one co-owner must be authorised by a majority of all the co-owners excluding the person to be sued.

3 If the court rules in favour of excluding the defendant, it shall order him or her to alienate his or her share and, should he or she fail to do so within the allowed time limit, shall order it to be sold at public auction in accordance with the provisions governing the forced sale of land to the exclusion of the provisions governing dissolution of co-ownership.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 649c1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 9. Exclusion from collective ownership / b. Further entitled persons

b. Further entitled persons

The provisions governing exclusion of co-owners apply mutatis mutandis to usufructuaries and to owners of other rights in rem or personal rights of use entered under priority notice in the land register in respect of co-ownership shares.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6501C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 10. Dissolution / a. Right to request division

10. Dissolution

a. Right to request division

1 Every co-owner has the right to request the dissolution of the co-ownership unless this is excluded by an agreement, by division of the object into condominium units or by the dedication of the object to a permanent purpose.

2 Dissolution may be excluded for a maximum of 50 years by means of an agreement which, where the object is land, is valid only if done as a public deed and which may be entered under priority notice in the land register.2

3 Dissolution may not be requested at an inopportune time.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 651 C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 10. Dissolution / b. Form of partition

b. Form of partition

1 Dissolution is effected by means of physical division, by private sale or sale at auction and division of the sale proceeds, or by transfer of the entire object to one or more co-owners who buy out the others.

2 If the co-owners are unable to agree on the method of dissolution, the court will order the physical division of the object or, where this is impossible without substantially diminishing its value, its sale at public auction or private auction among the co-owners.

3 Physical division giving rise to unequal shares may entail monetary payments to balance out the shares.

Art. 651a1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 10. Dissolution / c. Animals kept as pets

c. Animals kept as pets

1 In the event of disputes over ownership of animals kept as pets rather than for investment or commercial purposes, the court will award sole ownership to whichever party offers the better conditions of animal welfare in which to keep the animal.

2 The court may order the person to whom ownership of the animal is awarded to provide appropriate compensation to the other party; the court determines the amount at its discretion.

3 The court shall take all necessary provisional measures, in particular in relation to the animal’s care in the interim.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 652 C. Collective ownership / II. Joint ownership / 1. Prerequisites

II. Joint ownership

1. Prerequisites

If several persons bound together into a community by legal provision or contract own an object by virtue of that community, they are joint owners and the rights of each joint owner attach to the whole object.

Art. 653 C. Collective ownership / II. Joint ownership / 2. Effect

2. Effect

1 The rights and obligations of the joint owners are determined by the rules governing their legal or contractual community.

2 Unless otherwise provided, the unanimous decision of all the joint owners is required in order to exercise ownership rights and in particular to dispose of the object in any way.

3 For the duration of the community, the right to divide the object or make dispositions relating to a fraction of it is excluded.

Art. 654 C. Collective ownership / II. Joint ownership / 3. Dissolution

3. Dissolution

1 Dissolution occurs when the object is alienated or the community is terminated.

2 Unless otherwise provided, division of the object is effected according to the provisions governing co-ownership.

Art. 654a1C. Collective ownership / III. Joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and land

III. Joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and land

The dissolution of joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and agricultural land is governed by the Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural Land Rights.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11


  Title Nineteen: Land Ownership

  Chapter One: Object, Acquisition and Loss of Land Ownership

Art. 6551A. Subject matter / I. Immovable property

A. Subject matter

I. Immovable property2

1 The object of land ownership is all immovable property.

2 Within the meaning of this Code, immovable property includes:

1.
parcels of land and the buildings thereon;
2.
distinct and permanent rights recorded in the land register;
3.
mines;
4.
co-ownership shares in immovable property.

3 An easement relating to immovable property may be recorded in the land register as an independent and permanent right if it:

1.
is not created in favour of a benefited property nor exclusively for a specific person; and
2.
is established for at least 30 years or for an unlimited period.3

1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 655a1A. Subject matter / II. Dependent property

II. Dependent property

1 A parcel of land may be linked to another parcel of land such that the owner of the main parcel of land is also the owner of the attached parcel of land. The attached parcel shares the same legal destiny as the main parcel and may not be alienated, pledged or encumbered separately.

2 If the parcels are linked for a permanent purpose, the statutory right of pre-emption of the co-owners and the right to demand dissolution may not be claimed.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 656 B. Acquisition / I. Registration

B. Acquisition

I. Registration

1 The acquisition of land ownership must be recorded in the land register.

2 In the case of appropriation, inheritance, compulsory purchase, debt enforcement or court judgment, the acquirer becomes the owner even before registration in the land register but obtains the power of disposal over the immovable property only once he or she has been recorded as the owner in the land register.

Art. 657 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 1. Transfer

II. Types of acquisition

1. Transfer

1 In order to be binding, a contract to transfer land ownership must be executed as a public deed.

2 Testamentary disposition and marital contracts require the forms prescribed by the law of succession and marital property law.

Art. 658 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 2. Appropriation

2. Appropriation

1 Immovable property recorded in the land register may be appropriated only if the register establishes that it has no owner.

2 Appropriation of land not recorded in the land register is subject to the provisions governing ownerless objects.

Art. 659 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 3. Formation of new land

3. Formation of new land

1 If new exploitable land is formed from previously ownerless land as a result of alluvion, filling or ground displacement, changes in the course or level of public waters or in some other manner, such land belongs to the canton in which it lies.

2 The cantons are free to allocate such land to owners of adjoining land.

3 If a person can show that parts of ground have become detached from his or her property, he or she is entitled to take them back within an appropriate period.

Art. 660 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 4. Ground displacement / a. In general

4. Ground displacement

a. In general1

1 Ground displacement from one parcel of land to another does not alter the boundaries of the parcels.

2 Earth and other objects moving from one parcel to the other in the process are subject to the provisions governing driftage or the joining and mixing of chattels.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 660a1B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 4. Ground displacement / b. Constant ground displacement

b. Constant ground displacement

1 The general principle whereby ground displacement does not alter land boundaries does not apply to areas designated by the cantons as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.

2 When designating such areas, due consideration shall be given to the characteristics of the land in question.

3 Where a parcel of land forms part of such an area, this fact must be notified in an appropriate manner to the interested parties and recorded in the land register.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 660b1B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 4. Ground displacement / c. Redrawing of boundaries

c. Redrawing of boundaries

1 If a land boundary is rendered impractical by ground displacement, any affected landowner may request that it be redrawn.

2 Any loss or gain in value shall be balanced out.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 661 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 5. Adverse possession / a. Ordinary adverse possession

5. Adverse possession

a. Ordinary adverse possession

Where a person has been wrongly recorded in the land register as the owner of immovable property, his or her ownership may no longer be challenged if he or she has been in possession of it in good faith, uninterruptedly and without challenge for ten years.

Art. 662 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 5. Adverse possession / b. Extraordinary adverse possession

b. Extraordinary adverse possession

1 Where a person has been in possession of immovable property not recorded in the land register uninterruptedly and without challenge for 30 years as if it were his or her property, he or she has the right to be registered as the owner.

2 The same right applies on the same conditions to a person in possession of immovable property whose owner is not evident from the land register or who was declared dead or presumed dead at the beginning of the 30-year adverse possession period.

3 However, such registration may be made only by court order on expiry of a publicly notified period for objections, provided no such objections have been raised or those raised have been dismissed.

Art. 663 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 5. Adverse possession / c. Time limits

c. Time limits

The rules for computing, interrupting and suspending adverse possession time limits are determined mutatis mutandis by the provisions governing prescription of debt claims.

Art. 664 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 6. Ownerless and public objects

6. Ownerless and public objects

1 Ownerless and public objects are subject to the sovereignty of the canton on whose territory they are situated.

2 No rights of private ownership apply to public waters or to land not suitable for cultivation, such as rocks and scree, firn and glaciers, or to springs rising therefrom, unless proof to the contrary is produced.

3 The cantons shall enact the provisions required to govern the appropriation of ownerless land, exploitation and common use of public objects such as roads, town and village squares, waterways and riverbeds.

Art. 665 B. Acquisition / III. Right to registration

III. Right to registration

1 By virtue of acquisition, the acquirer gains a personal claim against the owner to be recorded in the land register and, should the owner refuse, the right to have ownership awarded by court order.

2 In the case of appropriation, inheritance, compulsory purchase, debt enforcement or court judgment, the acquirer may obtain such registration on his or her own initiative.

3 Changes to land ownership occurring by operation of law as a result of marital community of property or the dissolution thereof shall be recorded in the land register at the request of either spouse.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 666 C. Loss

C. Loss

1 Land ownership is extinguished on deletion of the land register entry and on complete loss of the immovable property.

2 In the case of compulsory purchase, the time at which the loss occurs is determined according to federal and cantonal compulsory purchase law.

Art. 666a1D. Judicial measures / I. Where the owner cannot be found

D. Judicial measures

I. Where the owner cannot be found

1 If the owner recorded in the land register cannot be identified, if his or her address is unknown or if the name or address of one or more of his or her heirs is unknown, the court may on application order the required measures.
2 The court may in particular appoint a representative. On application, it shall stipulate the extent of the powers of representation. Unless it stipulates otherwise, such powers shall be limited to measures to maintain the property.

3 The following may apply for measures to be ordered:

1.
any person with a legitimate interest;
2.
the land register at the location of the immovable property.

4 The ordering of measures does not interrupt the period required to obtain extraordinary adverse possession.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 666b1D. Judicial measures / II. In the absence of the required management bodies

II. In the absence of the required management bodies

If a legal entity or other rights holder that is recorded in the land register as the owner no longer has the required management bodies, and person with a legitimate interest or the land register at the location of the immovable property may apply to the court for the required measures relating to the immovable property to be ordered.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Two: Substance and Limitation of Land Ownership

Art. 667 A. Substance / I. Scope

A. Substance

I. Scope

1 Land ownership extends upwards into the air and downwards into the ground to the extent determined by the owner’s legitimate interest in exercising his or her ownership rights.

2 Within the limits prescribed by law, it includes all buildings and plants as well as springs.

Art. 668 A. Substance / II. Boundaries / 1. Type of boundary

II. Boundaries

1. Type of boundary

1 Land boundaries are established by the land register plans and by boundary markings on the land itself.

2 In the event of discrepancy between the existing land register plans and the boundary markings, the land register plans are presumed correct.

3 The foregoing presumption does not apply to areas designated by the canton as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 669 A. Substance / II. Boundaries / 2. Duty to establish boundaries

2. Duty to establish boundaries

Every landowner is obliged, at the request of his or her neighbour, to co-operate in establishing the boundary where it is unclear, whether by amendment of the land register plans or by affixing boundary markers.

Art. 670 A. Substance / II. Boundaries / 3. Co-ownership of boundary markers

3. Co-ownership of boundary markers

Where boundaries are marked by features such as walls, hedges and fences, such features are presumed to be jointly owned by the two neighbouring landowners.

Art. 671 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 1. Land and building materials / a. Ownership

III. Buildings on the parcel of land

1. Land and building materials

a. Ownership

1 Where a person uses materials belonging to another in building work on his or her own land or materials of his or her own on land belonging to another, such materials become an integral part of the parcel of land.

2 However, where such materials are used against the will of their owner, the latter is entitled to demand that the materials be removed and returned to him or her at the landowner’s expense to the extent this is possible without causing disproportionate damage.

3 On the same condition, where the materials were used against the will of the landowner, the latter may demand that they be removed from his or her land at the expense of the builder.

Art. 672 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 1. Land and building materials / b. Compensation

b. Compensation

1 Where the materials are not removed from the land, the landowner must provide appropriate compensation for the cost of the materials.

2 Where the landowner on whose land the building work was carried out acted in bad faith, the court may award full damages.

3 Where the owner of the materials used in the building work acted in bad faith, the damages awarded may not exceed the minimum value of the building work to the landowner.

Art. 673 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 1. Land and building materials / c. Assignment of land ownership

c. Assignment of land ownership

Where the value of the building plainly exceeds the value of the land, the party acting in good faith may request that ownership of both building and land be assigned to the owner of the materials in exchange for appropriate compensation.

Art. 674 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 2. Encroaching buildings

2. Encroaching buildings

1 Buildings and other structures encroaching from one parcel of land onto another remain part of the parcel from which they originate, providing their owner has a right in rem to their existence.

2 The right to encroach on neighbouring land may be recorded as an easement in the land register.

3 If an injured party fails to object in timely manner to an unauthorised encroachment, despite being aware of it, where justified in the circumstances the builder of the encroaching structure, provided he or she acted in good faith, may be granted ownership of the encroaching part thereof or of the land below it in exchange for appropriate compensation.

Art. 675 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 3. Building right

3. Building right

1 Buildings and other structures that are dug into or built onto land belonging to another person or otherwise permanently connected with that parcel of land on or below its surface may have a separate owner provided their existence is recorded as an easement in the land register.

2 The creation of rights to buildings in respect of individual storeys of a building is not permitted.

Art. 676 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 4. Pipes, cables, conduits

4. Pipes, cables, conduits

1 Pipes, cables and conduits for water, gas, electricity and the like located outside the parcel of land which they serve are, except where otherwise regulated, the property of the utility plant from which they come or to which they lead.1

2 Where the provisions of the law of neighbours do not apply, the encumbrance of parcels of land by rights in rem relating to such pipes, cables and conduits belonging to another person is established by way of easement.

3 If the pipe, cable or conduit is visible, the easement is created when the pipe, cable or conduit is laid. In other cases, it is created by entry in the land register.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 677 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 5. Movable structures

5. Movable structures

1 Sheds, huts, shacks, cabins and the like retain their separate owner if they are constructed on land belonging to another person without the intention of becoming a permanent fixture.

2 Their existence is not recorded in the land register.

Art. 678 A. Substance / IV. Plants grown on the parcel of land

IV. Plants grown on the parcel of land

1 Where a person uses another person’s plants on his or her own land or his or her own plants on another person’s land, the same rights and obligations arise as for the use of building materials or for movable structures.

2 An easement corresponding to a building right may be created in respect of individual plants and plantations for a minimum of ten and a maximum of 100 years.1

3 The servient owner may request the termination of the easement before the end of the agreed duration in the event of the termination of a lease agreement concluded between him or her and the easement beneficiary concerning the use of the land. The court shall determine the financial consequences taking due account of all the circumstances.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).

Art. 679 A. Substance / V. Landowner’s liability / 1. Acts in excess of ownership rights

V. Landowner’s liability

1. Acts in excess of ownership rights1

1 Where a person incurs or is at risk of damage because a landowner acts in excess of his or her ownership rights, he or she may sue for abatement of the damage or for protection against any imminent damage and for damages.

2 Where a building or installation deprives a neighbouring parcel of land of certain properties, the aforementioned rights apply only if the regulations that applied at the time the building or installation was constructed were not complied with.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 679a1A. Substance / V. Landowner’s liability / 2. Lawful management of the land

2. Lawful management of the land

Where a landowner temporarily causes excessive and unavoidable disadvantages to a neighbour while managing his or her parcel of land lawfully, in particular by building and thus causes damage, the neighbour may only claim damages from the landowner.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 680 B. Limitations / I. In general

B. Limitations

I. In general

1 Statutory restrictions on ownership exist irrespective of whether they are recorded in the land register.

2 Any lifting or modification thereof by agreement is invalid unless executed in the form of a public deed and recorded in the land register.

3 Public law restrictions on ownership may not be revoked or modified.

Art. 6811B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 1. General principles

II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption

1. General principles

1 Statutory rights of pre-emption may also be exercised in the case of compulsory sale at auction, but only at the auction itself and on the conditions that apply to a sale to the highest bidder; in other respects statutory rights of pre-emption may be exercised subject to the conditions that apply to contractual rights of pre-emption.

2 The right of pre-emption becomes void if the land is sold to a person with a right of pre-emption of equal or higher rank.

3 Statutory rights of pre-emption may neither be inherited nor assigned. They take precedence over contractual rights of pre-emption.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 681a1B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 2. Exercise

2. Exercise

1 Where a purchase agreement is concluded, the vendor must notify persons with a right of pre-emption of the terms thereof.

2 If a person wishes to exercise his or her right of pre-emption, he or she must assert it within three months of learning of the conclusion and terms of the purchase agreement. Such a right may no longer be exercised once two years have elapsed since the entry of the new owner in the land register.

3 During that time a person may exercise a right of pre-emption against any owner of the land.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 681b1B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 3. Modification, waiver

3. Modification, waiver

1 An agreement excluding or modifying a statutory right of pre-emption is valid only if executed in the form of a public deed. It may be entered under priority notice in the land register provided the right of pre-emption is held by the current owner of another parcel of land.

2 The beneficiary may waive his or her statutory right of pre-emption in writing once the event that triggers it has occurred.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 6821B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 4. In respect of co-ownership and building rights

4. In respect of co-ownership and building rights2

1 Co-owners have a right of pre-emption against any person acquiring a share who is not a co-owner. If several co-owners exercise their right of pre-emption, the share is allocated to them in proportion to their existing shares.3

2 The owner of a parcel of land encumbered with a distinct and permanent building right shall also have a right of pre-emption in respect of that right over anyone wishing to acquire it, and the holder of the right has a right of pre-emption in respect of the parcel of land it encumbers, providing the land is used in the exercise of his or her right.

3...4


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
4 Repealed by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 682a1B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 5. Right of pre-emption of farms and farmland

5. Right of pre-emption of farms and farmland

Rights of pre-emption of agricultural enterprises and agricultural land are also governed by the Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural land Rights.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 6831

1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 684 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 1. Excess detriment

III. Law of neighbours

1. Excess detriment1

1 In exercising their ownership rights, including in particular the right to run a business on his or her land, landowners are obliged to refrain from any excess detrimental to neighbouring properties.

2 In particular all harmful effects that are not justified by the location and character of the land or by local custom such as air pollution emissions of noxious vapours, noise, vibrations, radiation or the deprivation of sunlight or daylight are prohibited.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 685 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 2. Excavation and construction / a. Rule

2. Excavation and construction

a. Rule

1 When carrying out excavation or construction work, the owner is not permitted to damage the adjoining properties by causing their terrain to shift, exposing it to the risk of shifting or by weakening existing structures.

2 Buildings which contravene the provisions of the law of neighbours are subject to the provisions governing encroaching buildings.

Art. 686 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 2. Excavation and construction / b. Cantonal regulations

b. Cantonal regulations

1 The cantons may set minimum separation distances to be observed in excavation and construction works.

2 They have the right to issue further building regulations.

Art. 687 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 3. Plants / a. Rule

3. Plants

a. Rule

1 Overhanging branches and roots encroaching beyond the boundary may be severed and kept by the neighbour if they are damaging his or her property and have not been removed within a reasonable time following his or her complaint in relation thereto.

2 If a landowner tolerates branches overhanging cultivated or developed land, he or she is entitled to the fruit that grows on them.

3 These provisions do not apply to adjoining parcels of woodland.

Art. 688 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 3. Plants / b. Cantonal regulations

b. Cantonal regulations

The cantons are authorised to set minimum separation distances for plantations depending on the type of land and plants involved or to oblige the landowner to permit the overhanging branches or encroaching roots of fruit trees and to regulate or annul his or her right to take the fruit from such branches.

Art. 689 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 4. Flowing waters

4. Flowing waters

1 Every landowner is obliged to receive the waters flowing naturally from a higher-lying parcel of land, such as rain water, melting snow and water from unchannelled springs.

2 No person may alter the natural course of flow to his or her neighbour’s damage.

3 Water flowing to a lower-lying parcel of land and required by that property may be withheld only to the extent that such water is indispensable to the higher-lying parcel of land.

Art. 690 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 5. Drainage

5. Drainage

1 Where a higher-lying parcel of land is drained, the owner of lower-lying parcel of land is obliged to receive such water as previously flowed naturally onto his or her land without being entitled to compensation.

2 If he or she suffers damage as a result of drainage channels, he or she may require the owner of the higher-lying parcel of land to continue such channels through the lower-lying parcel of land at the latter’s expense.

Art. 691 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 6. Pipes, cables, conduits / a. Duty to permit

6. Pipes, cables, conduits

a. Duty to permit

1 Every landowner is obliged to permit water conduits, drainage pipes, gas pipes and the like and subterranean or overhead cables to traverse his or her land in exchange for full compensation, to the extent that such works would be impossible or prohibitively expensive if they did not traverse his or her land.1

2 The right for pipes, cables and conduits to traverse an adjoining parcel of land may not be claimed on the basis of the law of neighbours in cases subject to compulsory purchase under cantonal or federal law.

3 At the request of the dominant or the servient owner, such rights shall be recorded in the land register as an easement at the expense of the dominant owner. The right for pipes, cables and conduits to traverse an adjoining parcel of land may be cited in opposition to a person acquiring a parcel of land in good faith, even if it is not registered.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 692 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 6. Pipes, cables, conduits / b. Safeguarding the interests of the servient landowner

b. Safeguarding the interests of the servient landowner

1 The servient owner is entitled to just and equitable consideration of his or her own interests.

2 Where justified by extraordinary circumstances, he or she may request that the piece of the land above which overhead pipes, cables and conduits are to be routed together with a reasonable portion of the surrounding land be purchased from him or her at its full value.

Art. 693 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 6. Pipes, cables, conduits / c. Change of circumstances

c. Change of circumstances

1 If circumstances change, the servient owner may request that the route of the pipe, cable or conduit be altered in accordance with his or her interests.

2 The costs of such re-routing are normally borne by the owner of the dominant property.

3 However, where justified by special circumstances, an appropriate portion of the costs may be charged to the servient owner.

Art. 694 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 7. Rights of way / a. Necessary right of way

7. Rights of way

a. Necessary right of way

1 Where a landowner does not have adequate access from his or her land to a public thoroughfare, he or she has the right to require his or her neighbours to grant him or her the necessary right of way in exchange for full compensation.

2 This right is in the first place exercised against the neighbour who, in the light of existing ownership and access circumstances, may most reasonably be expected to grant such right of way, and secondly in respect of the neighbour for whom it is least damaging.

3 When determining the route of a right of way, the interests of both parties must be taken into consideration.

Art. 695 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 7. Rights of way / b. Other rights of way

b. Other rights of way

The cantons reserve the right to enact more detailed provisions which govern the landowner’s right to enter neighbouring land for the purposes of managing his or her own land or carrying out repairs or building works and which regulate rights of way for the purpose of tillage, watering cattle, transit over fallow ground or in the dead season, transit for timber gathering, and the like.

Art. 696 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 7. Rights of way / c. Notation in the land register

c. Notation in the land register

1 Rights of way established directly by law exist without need for registration.

2 However, if permanent they are noted in the land register.

Art. 697 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 8. Enclosure

8. Enclosure

1 The costs of enclosing a parcel of land are borne by its owner, subject to the provisions governing co-ownership of boundary markers.

2 Cantonal law may enact provisions governing the duty to enclose and the manner of enclosure.

Art. 698 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 9. Duty to maintain

9. Duty to maintain

The costs of any structures required for the exercise of rights under the law of neighbours are borne by the landowners in proportion to their interests.

Art. 699 B. Limitations / IV. Right of access and to ward off danger / 1. Access

IV. Right of access and to ward off danger

1. Access

1 Any person has the right to enter woodlands and meadows and to gather wild berries, fungi and the like to the extent permitted by local custom except where the competent authority enacts specific limited prohibitions in the interests of conservation.

2 Cantonal law may enact more detailed regulations on access to land owned by others for the purposes of hunting and fishing.

Art. 700 B. Limitations / IV. Right of access and to ward off danger / 2. Retrieval of driftage and the like

2. Retrieval of driftage and the like

1 If objects are carried onto another parcel of land by water, wind, avalanche or other force of nature or by chance event, or if animals such as livestock, swarms of bees, poultry and fish stray onto his or her property, the landowner must grant the rightful owner access to his or her land to search for and retrieve them.

2 The landowner is entitled to claim damages for any damage caused and to that end has a special lien as to such objects and animals.

Art. 701 B. Limitations / IV. Right of access and to ward off danger / 3. Trespass to ward off danger or damage

3. Trespass to ward off danger or damage

1 If a person is able to ward off imminent damage or present danger from himself or herself or others only by trespassing on land belonging to another, the latter is obliged to tolerate such trespass to the extent that such danger or damage would be considerably greater than the detriment caused by the trespass.

2 Appropriate compensation is owed for any resultant damage.

Art. 702 B. Limitations / V. Public law restrictions on ownership / 1. In general

V. Public law restrictions on ownership

1. In general

The Confederation, cantons and communes reserve the right to impose restrictions on ownership that are in the public interest, and in particular that relate to building, fire and health regulations, forestry and road services, towpaths, erection of boundary markings and triangulation pillars, land improvements, fragmentation of landholdings, consolidation of agricultural land and building land, conservation of antiquities and natural monuments, preservation of areas of natural beauty and scenic vantage points and protection of mineral springs.

Art. 7031B. Limitations / V. Public law restrictions on ownership / 2. Land improvements

2. Land improvements

1 Where it is possible to carry out land improvements, such as watercourse modifications, drainage, irrigation, reforestation, path-building, land consolidation procedures and the like, only by collective endeavour and such endeavour has been approved by the majority of the landowners owning more than half of the land involved, the other landowners are obliged to participate. Landowners who choose not to participate in the decision-making process are deemed to consent. Participation is recorded in the land register.

2 The cantons regulate the procedure. In particular, they must issue detailed rules on consolidation of landholdings.

3 Cantonal legislation may further facilitate the realisation of such land improvements and may declare that the corresponding provisions also apply to building land and to areas designated as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.2


1 Amended by Art. 121 of the Agriculture Act of 3 oct. 1951, in force since 1 Jan. 1954 (AS 1953 1073; BBl 1951 I 130).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 704 C. Rights to springs and wells / I. Spring ownership and spring rights

C. Rights to springs and wells

I. Spring ownership and spring rights

1 Springs are an integral part of the land and their ownership may be acquired only through ownership of the land from which they rise.

2 Rights to spring water on land owned by others are established as easements by entry in the land register.

3 Groundwater is deemed equivalent to springs.

Art. 705 C. Rights to springs and wells / II. Diversion of springs

II. Diversion of springs

1 Cantonal law may regulate, restrict or prohibit the diversion of spring waters to safeguard the public interest.

2 In the event of conflict between cantons, the final decision rests with the Federal Council.

Art. 706 C. Rights to springs and wells / III. Cutting off springs / 1. Damages

III. Cutting off springs

1. Damages

1 Where springs and wells that enjoy considerable use or whose waters are collected for further use are cut off, diminished or contaminated by building works, installations or other measures to the detriment of their owners or rightful users, such persons are entitled to claim damages.

2 Where the damage was done neither intentionally nor through negligence, or the injured parties are themselves at fault, the court determines the amount and manner of compensation at its discretion.

Art. 707 C. Rights to springs and wells / III. Cutting off springs / 2. Restoration

2. Restoration

1 If springs and wells that are indispensable for the exploitation or habitation of a parcel of land or for the supply of drinking water are cut off or contaminated, those affected have the right to demand that the status quo ante be restored where at all possible.

2 In other cases restoration of the status quo ante may be demanded only where this is justified by special circumstances.

Art. 708 C. Rights to springs and wells / IV. Community of spring owners

IV. Community of spring owners

1 Where springs located near to each other and belonging to different owners form a group rising from a common catchment basin, each of the owners may request that the springs be collectively captured and channelled to the rightful users in proportion to the existing volume of flow.

2 The costs of the common installations are borne by the rightful users in proportion to their respective interests.

3 If one user opposes the request, each user has the right to capture and divert his or her own spring in the normal manner, even if the volume of flow of the other springs is thereby diminished, and is liable to pay compensation only to the extent that his or her own spring is augmented by the new works.

Art. 709 C. Rights to springs and wells / V. Use of springs

V. Use of springs

The cantons have the right to determine the extent to which privately owned springs, wells and streams may also be used by neighbours and other persons for drawing water, watering livestock and the like.

Art. 710 C. Rights to springs and wells / VI. Right to use an essential water source

VI. Right to use an essential water source

1 If a parcel of land lacks the water required for domestic and farming requirements and if such water cannot be obtained from anywhere else except at an entirely disproportionate cost and effort, the owner may request that a neighbour able to spare such water without suffering hardship allow him or her a share of the latter’s spring or well to him or her in exchange for full compensation.

2 When determining which water source is thus affected, the interests of the person required to supply the water are the primary consideration.

3 Where circumstances change, a modification of the arrangement in place may be requested.

Art. 711 C. Rights to springs and wells / VII. Duty to cede / 1. Water sources

VII. Duty to cede

1. Water sources

1 Where landowners make no use of springs, wells or streams, or make very little use thereof in comparison with their potential utility, they may be required to cede them in exchange for full compensation for supplying drinking water, fire hydrants or other uses in the public interest.

2 Such compensation may take the form of water supplied from the new installation.

Art. 712 C. Rights to springs and wells / VII. Duty to cede / 2. Land

2. Land

Owners of drinking water utilities have the right to expropriate the land surrounding their springs to the extent necessary to protect them from contamination.


  Chapter Three:1  Condominium

Art. 712a A. Definition and object / I. Definition

A. Definition and object

I. Definition

1 Condominium is a form of co-ownership of immovable property that gives the co-owner the exclusive right to make sole use of specific parts of a building thereon and design the interior of such parts.

2 Each condominium owner is free to manage, use and design the structure of his or her own parts of the building as he or she wishes but must not obstruct any other condominium owners in the exercise of their own rights or in any way damage the common parts of the building, fittings and installations or impair their functional effectiveness or appearance.

3 Each condominium owner is obliged to maintain his or her parts of the building in the manner required to preserve the sound condition and good appearance of the building as a whole.

Art. 712b A. Definition and object / II. Object

II. Object

1 The object of the exclusive right may be individual storeys or parts of a storey which must be self-contained with their own access and used either as dwellings or as self-contained units of rooms used for business or other purposes, although separate ancillary rooms are allowed.

2 The condominium owner may not be granted an exclusive right to the following:

1.
the land on which the building stands and the building right by virtue of which it is constructed;
2.
the parts of the building that are vital to the soundness, structure and stability of the building as a whole or of the units of other condominium owners or that determine the outward form and appearance of the building;
3.
the fittings and installations that also serve the other condominium owners in the use of their units.

3 The deed of constitution or a subsequent agreement among the condominium owners executed in the same form may stipulate that other parts of the building are common property, failing which they are presumed to be the object of a exclusive right.

Art. 712c A. Definition and object / III. Power of disposal

III. Power of disposal

1 Condominium owners do not by law have first right of refusal in respect of a third party acquiring a share, but such right may be stipulated in the deed of constitution or by subsequent agreement and entered under priority notice in the land register.

2 Similarly, it may be stipulated that the alienation, encumbrance with usufruct or right of residence or letting of a unit is valid only if the other co-owners do not object by resolution made within 14 days of receiving notice of such transaction.

3 The objection is ineffective if made without good cause.1


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 712d B. Creation and extinction / I. Deed of constitution

B. Creation and extinction

I. Deed of constitution

1 Condominium is constituted by entry in the land register.

2 Such entry may be requested:

1.
on the basis of an agreement between the condominium owners to constitute their shares as condominium;
2.
on the basis of a declaration by the owner of the property or the holder of a distinct and permanent building right to form shares in co-ownership and to constitute the same as condominium.

3 In order to be valid, the constitution of condominium must be executed in the form of a public deed or, where provided for in a testamentary disposition or in a contract of division of estate, in the form prescribed by the law of succession.

Art. 712e B. Creation and extinction / II. Layout of the condominium units and shares in the property

II. Layout of the condominium units and shares in the property1

1 The deed of constitution must specify the manner in which the property is divided into condominium units and define the share that each unit represents of the value of the property or of the building right expressed as fractions with a common denominator.2

2 Alteration of the size of a share requires the consent of all directly involved parties and the approval of the assembly of condominium owners; however, each condominium owner is entitled to seek rectification if his or her share has been defined incorrectly in error or is no longer accurate owing to structural modifications to the building or its surroundings.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712f B. Creation and extinction / III. Extinction

III. Extinction

1 Condominium is extinguished on the loss of the property or the building right and its deletion from the land register.

2 Such deletion may be requested in accordance with a termination agreement or by a single condominium owner holding all the shares, but it requires the consent of all persons with rights in rem to the individual units which cannot be transferred to the property as a whole without detriment.

3 Any condominium owner may request termination of the condominium where:

1.
more than half the value of the building has been destroyed and reconstruction would impose an onerous burden on him; or
2.
the building has been divided into condominium units for more than 50 years and can no longer be used in accordance with the regulations due to its poor structural condition.1

4 Condominium owners wishing to maintain the condominium may prevent such termination by buying out the others.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712g C. Administration and use / I. Applicable provisions

C. Administration and use

I. Applicable provisions

1 The provisions governing co-ownership regulate the authority to take administrative action and instruct construction work.

2 Except where such provisions are mandatory, they may be replaced by others set out in the deed of constitution or adopted by unanimous resolution of the assembly of condominium owners.

3 Moreover, each condominium owner is entitled to request that a set of rules governing administration and use be drawn up and noted in the land register, such rules being binding once accepted by resolution passed by a majority of the condominium owners who together represent more than one-half of the property and being subject to amendment by the same majority even if included in the deed of constitution.

4 Any amendment to the allocation of exclusive rights of use in accordance with the regulations shall also require the consent of the condominium owners directly affected.1


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712h C. Administration and use / II. Communal charges and costs / 1. Definition and distribution

II. Communal charges and costs

1. Definition and distribution

1 The condominium owners bear the charges in relation to the communal parts of the property and the costs of joint administration in proportion to the value of their shares.

2 In particular, such charges and costs include:

1.
regular maintenance, repairs and renovations of the communal parts of the parcel of land and the building and shared fittings and installations;
2.
administration, including remuneration of the administrator;
3.
public duties and taxes imposed collectively on the co-owners;
4.
interest and capital repayments to lenders to whom the property is pledged or to whom the condominium owners are jointly and severally liable.

3 Where specific parts of the building, fittings or installations are of little or no benefit to certain condominium owners, the allocation of shared costs must take this into account.

Art. 712i C. Administration and use / II. Communal charges and costs / 2. Liability for cost contributions / a. Statutory lien

2. Liability for cost contributions

a. Statutory lien

1 The community of condominium owners is entitled to establish a lien on each condominium owner’s unit as security for his or her portion of the shared costs over the previous three years.

2 Registration of the lien may be requested by the administrator or, where no administrator has been appointed, by any condominium owner so authorised by majority resolution or court order and by any person for whom the claim for shared costs has been distrained.

3 In other respects, the provisions governing the establishment of a building contractor’s lien apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 712k C. Administration and use / II. Communal charges and costs / 2. Liability for cost contributions / b. Special lien

b. Special lien

The community of condominium owners has the same special lien that a lessor would have on the chattels located in the condominium owner’s unit as security for shared costs over the previous three years.

Art. 712l C. Administration and use / III. Community’s capacity to act

III. Community’s capacity to act

1 The community of condominium owners acquires under its own name the revenue derived from its administrative activities, including in particular contributions from the individual condominium owners and the resultant funds, such as the renovation fund.

2 The community of condominium owners may sue and collect debts in its own name and may be sued or subjected to debt enforcement proceedings.1


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 712m D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 1. Competence and legal status

D. Organisation

I. Assembly of condominium owners

1. Competence and legal status

1 In addition to those rights stipulated in other provisions, the assembly of condominium owners has the following rights in particular:

1.
to decide on all administrative matters outside the administrator’s remit;
2.
to appoint the administrator and supervise his or her activities;
3.
to elect a committee or person to whom it may delegate administrative matters, including in particular the tasks of advising the administrator, superintending his or her management activities, and reporting and making recommendations to the assembly on such matters;
4.
to approve the budget, accounts and division of costs among the condominium owners each year;
5.
to establish a renovation fund for maintenance and renovation;
6.
to safeguard the building against fire and other risks and to take out the customary liability insurance and, furthermore, to require any condominium owner who has fitted his or her unit out at extraordinary expense to pay an additional premium unless he or she has arranged supplementary insurance for his or her own account.

2 In the absence of any specific provisions in the law, the assembly of condominium owners and its delegates are subject to the provisions on governing bodies of associations and challenges to resolutions of associations.

Art. 712n D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 2. Convening and chairing meetings

2. Convening and chairing meetings

1 The assembly of condominium owners is convened and chaired by the administrator, unless the assembly resolves otherwise.

2 Minutes are taken of the assembly’s resolutions and held in safekeeping by the administrator or the chairman of the meeting.

Art. 712o D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 3. Voting rights

3. Voting rights

1 Where a unit is owned by more than one person, these persons together have only one vote, to be cast by one of their number as their representative.

2 Similarly, the owner and the usufructuary of a unit must agree on the exercise of their voting rights, failing which the usufructuary is deemed to hold the right to vote on all administrative matters with the exception of building work carried out for merely useful or decorative purposes or to enhance comfort or convenience.

Art. 712p D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 4. Quorum

4. Quorum

1 The assembly of condominium owners is quorate if one half of the condominium owners representing one half of the shares in condominium, and in any event at least two condominium owners, are present or represented.

2 If the assembly is not quorate, a second meeting must be convened which may be held no earlier than ten days after the first.

3 The second meeting is quorate if one third of the condominium owners, and in any event at least two condominium owners, are present or represented.

Art. 712q D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 1. Appointment

II. Administrator

1. Appointment

1 If the assembly of condominium owners fails to appoint an administrator, any condominium owner is entitled to request the court to appoint one.

2 Other interested parties, such as the pledgee or insurer, have the same right to request court appointment of an administrator.

Art. 712r D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 2. Removal

2. Removal

1 By resolution of the assembly of condominium owners, the administrator may be removed from his or her position at any time, subject to claims for compensation.

2 If the assembly of condominium owners refuses to remove the administrator despite good cause to do so, any condominium owner may, within one month, request the court to remove him or her.

3 A court-appointed administrator may not be removed prior to expiry of the period for which he or she was appointed.

Art. 712s D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 3. Duties / a. Implementation of provisions and resolutions concerning administration and use

3. Duties

a. Implementation of provisions and resolutions concerning administration and use

1 The administrator shall take all action required for collective administration in accordance with the relevant legal provisions, the rules and resolutions passed by the assembly of condominium owners and must of his or her own accord take all measures urgently needed to prevent or remedy damage to the property.

2 He or she divides the communal costs and charges among the condominium owners, makes out the relevant invoices, collects contributions, manages the available funds and applies them as required by law.

3 He or she ensures that the condominium owners exercise their exclusive rights and use the communal parts of the property and the communal fittings and installations in accordance with the relevant legal provisions, regulations and house rules.

Art. 712t D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 3. Duties / b. External representation

b. External representation

1 The administrator shall represent the condominium owners both as a community and as individuals in all external dealings relating to communal administration within the scope of his or her statutory duties.

2 Except in summary proceedings, the administrator must obtain the prior approval of the assembly of condominium owners to act as plaintiff or defendant in civil proceedings unless the matter is urgent, in which case such approval may be obtained retrospectively.

3 Declarations, demands, judgments and court orders addressed to the community of condominium owners are deemed duly notified once they are served on the administrator at his or her domicile or at the place where the property is situated.


  Title Twenty: Chattel Ownership

Art. 713 A. Object

A. Object

Chattel ownership relates to movable physical objects and to forces of nature that may be the subject of legal rights and which do not form part of any immovable property.

Art. 714 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 1. Delivery of possession

B. Forms of acquisition

I. Transfer

1. Delivery of possession

1 Transfer of chattel ownership requires the delivery of possession to the acquirer.

2 A person who in good faith receives possession of a chattel as owner will become its owner even if the transferor is not authorised to alienate it as soon his or her possession of it is protected according to the provisions governing possession.

Art. 715 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 2. Reservation of ownership / a. In general

2. Reservation of ownership

a. In general

1 Reservation of ownership in respect of a chattel transferred to the acquirer is only effective provided it is entered in the official register kept by the debt enforcement office at his or her current domicile.

2 Reservation of ownership is not permitted in livestock trading.

Art. 716 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 2. Reservation of ownership / b. Transactions involving payment by instalments

b. Transactions involving payment by instalments

An object transferred under reservation of ownership may be reclaimed by the owner only on condition that he or she reimburse any payments made for it by the acquirer after deduction of an appropriate rental charge and compensation for wear and tear.

Art. 717 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 3. Acquisition without possession

3. Acquisition without possession

1 If as a result of a special legal relationship, the chattel remains in the transferor’s possession, this transfer of ownership is null and void in relation third parties if the underlying intention was to disadvantage them or to circumvent the provisions governing the pledging of chattels.

2 The court shall rules on this at its discretion.

Art. 718 B. Forms of acquisition / II. Appropriation / 1. Ownerless chattels

II. Appropriation

1. Ownerless chattels

Ownership of an ownerless chattel is acquired by the act of taking it into possession with the intention of becoming its owner.

Art. 719 B. Forms of acquisition / II. Appropriation / 2. Escaped animals

2. Escaped animals

1 Captured animals become ownerless if they regain their freedom and their owner fails to search for them immediately and persistently with a view to recapturing them.

2 Domesticated animals become ownerless once they regress to a feral state and no longer return to their masters.

3 Swarms of bees do not become ownerless by virtue of straying onto land belonging to others.

Art. 720 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 1. Reporting, tracing / a. In general

III. Found property

1. Reporting, tracing

a. In general1

1 A person finding a lost object must inform its owner and, if the latter is unknown, either report the find to the police or himself take appropriate steps to publicise the find and trace the owner.

2 He or she has a duty to report the find to the police if the value of the object clearly exceeds ten francs.

3 A person who finds an object in an occupied house or on premises used for public services or public transport must deposit it with the head of the household, the tenant or the supervisor.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 720a1B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 1. Reporting, tracing / b. Animals

b. Animals

1 A person who finds a lost animal must, subject to Art. 720 para. 3, inform the owner or, if the latter is unknown, report his or her find.

2 The cantons designate the authority to which such finds must be reported.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806). Para. 2 comes into force on 1 April 2004.

Art. 721 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 2. Safekeeping and auction

2. Safekeeping and auction

1 A find must be held in appropriate safekeeping.

2 If it requires expensive maintenance or is susceptible to rapid deterioration, or if the police or a public body has held it for more than one year, it may be sold at public auction with the prior authorisation of the competent authority.

3 The proceeds of sale at auction replace the object.

Art. 722 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 3. Acquisition of ownership, return

3. Acquisition of ownership, return

1 A person who has discharged his or her duties as finder acquires ownership of the find if it has not been possible to trace the rightful owner within five years of the announcement or public notice being given of the find.

1bis In the case of animals kept as pets rather than for investment or commercial purposes, the period is two months.1

1ter If the finder puts the animal in a home with the intention of renouncing its ownership, on expiry of the two-month period the animal home is at liberty to dispose of the animal as it sees fit.2

2 If the find is returned to its owner, the finder is entitled to compensation for all outlays and to a suitable finder’s reward.

3 In the case of a find made in an occupied house or on premises used for public services or public transport, the head of the household, tenant or supervisor is deemed to be the finder but is not entitled to any finder’s reward.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 723 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 4. Treasure trove

4. Treasure trove

1 If an object of value is found in circumstances indicating with certainty that it has lain buried or hidden so long that it will not be possible to trace its owner, it is treated as treasure trove.

2 Subject to the provisions governing objects of scientific value, treasure trove belongs to the owner of the land or chattel where it was found.

3 The finder is entitled to an appropriate finder’s reward not exceeding one-half of the treasure’s value.

Art. 724 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 5. Objects of scientific value

5. Objects of scientific value

1 Ownerless natural specimens and antiquities of scientific value are the property of the canton on whose territory they are found.1

1bis Such objects must not be alienated without the consent of the competent cantonal authorities. They may not be purchased in good faith or acquired through adverse possession. There is no prescriptive period on the canton’s right to recover them.2

2 The owner of the land on which such objects are found is obliged to permit their excavation in exchange for compensation for the damage caused.

3 The finder, and in the case of treasure trove also the owner is entitled to an appropriate finder’s reward not exceeding one-half of the value of the find.


1 Amended by Art. 32 No 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).
2 Inserted by Art. 32 No 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 725 B. Forms of acquisition / IV. Driftage

IV. Driftage

1 If chattels are carried onto a person’s property by water, wind, avalanche or other force of nature or by chance event, or if animals belonging to others stray onto his or her property, such a person has the rights and obligations of the finder of a lost object.

2 If a swarm of bees flies into an occupied beehive belonging to another person, the owner of that hive acquires said swarm without obligation to compensate.

Art. 726 B. Forms of acquisition / V. Processing

V. Processing

1 If a person has processed or reworked an object that does not belong to him, the newly created object becomes the property of that person if the work is more valuable than the material, failing which it belongs to the original owner.

2 Where the person doing such work did not act in good faith, the court may award the newly created object to the original owner even if his or her work is more valuable than the material.

3 Claims for damages and unjust enrichment are reserved.

Art. 727 B. Forms of acquisition / VI. Joining and mixing chattels

VI. Joining and mixing chattels

1 If chattels belonging to different owners are mixed or joined together such that they may no longer be separated without substantial damage or prohibitive labour and expense, those involved acquire joint ownership rights in the new object in proportion to the value of the constituent parts at the time that they were mixed or joined.

2 If one chattel is mixed with or joined to another such that it acquires the character of a secondary component of the latter, the entire object belongs to the owner of the primary component.

3 Claims for damages and unjust enrichment are reserved.

Art. 728 B. Forms of acquisition / VII. Adverse possession

VII. Adverse possession

1 If a person has possessed a chattel belonging to another person uninterruptedly and without challenge for five years believing in good faith that he or she owns it, he or she becomes its owner by adverse possession.

1bis In the case of animals kept as pets rather than for investment or commercial purposes, the period is two months.1

1ter Subject to exceptions prescribed by law, the time limit for adverse possession in the case of objects of cultural heritage within the meaning of Art. 2 para. 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 20032 is 30 years.3

2 Involuntary loss of possession does not interrupt adverse possession provided the possessor regains the chattel within one year or by means of legal action brought within the same time limit.

3 The computation, interruption and suspension of adverse possession time limits are governed mutatis mutandis by the provisions on the prescription of debts.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).
2 SR 444.1
3 Inserted by Art. 32 No 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 729 C. Loss

C. Loss

Even where possession has been lost, ownership of the chattel is not extinguished until the owner relinquishes his or her right or until another person subsequently acquires ownership.


  Division Two: Limited Rights in rem

  Title Twenty-One: Easements and Real Burdens

  Chapter One: Easements

Art. 730 A. Object

A. Object

1 A parcel of land may be encumbered in favour of another property such that the servient owner must permit the owner of the dominant property to exercise certain rights over it to or may not exercise certain of the rights attaching to his or her property for the benefit of the owner of the dominant property.

2 An obligation to carry out certain acts may only be accessory to an easement. Any person acquiring the dominant or servient property is only bound by such an obligation if it is based on an entry in the land register.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 731 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 1. Registration

B. Creation and extinction

I. Creation

1. Registration

1 An easement is created by entry in the land register.

2 The provisions governing land ownership apply to the acquisition or registration of an easement, except where otherwise provided.

3 Adverse possession of an easement is possible only in respect of parcels of land which may be possessed adversely.

Art. 7321B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 2. Legal transaction

2. Legal transaction

1 The legal transaction creating an easement is only valid if done as a public deed.

2 If in the circumstances the exercise of the easement is limited to part of the dominant property and if the geographical location is not sufficiently identifiable in the certificate of legal title, it must be shown in a diagram in an extract of the plan for the land register.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 733 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 3. Creation in favour of own property

3. Creation in favour of own property

The owner of a property may create an easement on a property in favour of another property which he or she also owns.

Art. 734 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction / 1. In general

II. Extinction

1. In general

An easement is extinguished with the deletion of its registration or the complete loss of either the servient or the dominant property.

Art. 735 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Amalgamation

2. Amalgamation

1 If the beneficiary of an easement becomes the servient owner, he or she may have the easement deleted from the land register.

2 If it is not deleted, the easement remains in place as a right in rem.

Art. 736 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. By court order

3. By court order

1 If an easement is of no value to the dominant property, the servient owner may request its deletion.

2 If the dominant property still derives a benefit from the easement but this is minor and disproportionate to the encumbrance, the easement may be partly or wholly cancelled in return for compensation.

Art. 737 C. Nature / I. Scope / 1. In general

C. Nature

I. Scope

1. In general

1 The beneficiary is entitled to take all measures necessary to preserve and exercise the easement.

2 However, he or she is obliged to exercise his or her rights as benignly as possible.

3 The servient owner must not do anything to obstruct the exercise of the easement or render it more difficult.

Art. 738 C. Nature / I. Scope / 2. As defined by land register entry

2. As defined by land register entry

1 The land register entry for an easement defines the scope of the easement, provided it clearly indicates the attendant rights and duties.

2 Within the limits of such entry, the scope of the easement may be inferred from the reason for its creation or from the fact that it has been exercised unchallenged and in good faith for some length of time.

Art. 739 C. Nature / I. Scope / 3. If needs change

3. If needs change

Additional encumbrances may not be imposed on the servient owner if the needs of the dominant property change.

Art. 740 C. Nature / I. Scope / 4. Cantonal law and local custom

4. Cantonal law and local custom

In the absence of any other specific arrangement in a given case, cantonal law and local custom shall govern rights of way, such as footpaths, bridle paths, carriageways, field paths, rights of transit in the dead season or for carting wood, rights of pasture, of transit for watering cattle or for irrigation and similar rights.

Art. 740a1C. Nature / I. Scope / 5. In the case of two or more beneficiaries

5. In the case of two or more beneficiaries

1 If two or more beneficiaries benefit from common fixtures based on the same easement and if no other agreement exists, the provisions applicable to co-owners apply by analogy.

2 The right to leave the community by waiving the easement may be excluded for a maximum of 30 years by agreement in the form specified for the easement agreement. The agreement may be noted in the land register.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 741 C. Nature / II. Duty of maintenance

II. Duty of maintenance

1 The beneficiary is responsible for maintaining any fixtures required for the exercise of an easement.

2 If the fixture also serves the interests of the servient owner, both parties are responsible for its maintenance in proportion to their interests. An alternative arrangement is binding on the acquirer of the dominant and the acquirer of the servient property if there is proof thereof in the land register.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 742 C. Nature / III. Relocation of the encumbrance

III. Relocation of the encumbrance1

1 If only part of a property is affected by the exercise of an easement, the servient owner is entitled, provided he or she can show a legitimate interest and bears the cost, to request that the right be transferred to another location which is no less suitable for the beneficiary.

2 He or she is entitled to do so even if the easement is recorded in the land register as being in a specific location.

3 ...2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7431C. Nature / IV. Partition of a property

IV. Partition of a property

1 If the dominant property is partitioned, the easement normally continues to exist in favour of each part of the dominant property.

2 If according to the documentary evidence or the circumstances the exercise of the easement is limited to individual parts of the property, it must be deleted in respect of the other parts.

3 The revision procedure is governed by the regulations on the deletion and amendment of land register entries.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7441

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Two: Usufruct and other Personal Servitudes

Art. 745 A. Usufruct / I. Object

A. Usufruct

I. Object

1 A usufruct may be held over chattels, immovable property, rights or assets.

2 Unless otherwise provided, it confers complete enjoyment of the object on the usufructuary.

3 A usufruct of immovable property may be limited to a specific part thereof.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).

Art. 746 A. Usufruct / II. Establishment / 1. In general

II. Establishment

1. In general

1 A usufruct of chattels or debts is established by transfer to the acquirer and a usufruct of immovable property by entry in the land register.

2 The provisions governing ownership apply to the acquisition of a usufruct of chattels and of immovable property as well as to entry in the land register, except where otherwise provided.

Art. 7471A. Usufruct / II. Establishment / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 748 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 1. Grounds

III. Extinction

1. Grounds

1 Usufruct is extinguished in the event of the complete loss of the object to which it applies and in the case of immovable property on deletion of the entry from the land register where the entry was required to establish the usufruct.

2 Other grounds for extinction, such as the passage of time or the renunciation or death of the usufructuary, confer on the owner only a right to apply for the deletion of the entry.

3 A statutory usufruct ends on cessation of its cause.

Art. 749 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 2. Duration

2. Duration

1 Usufruct ceases with the death of the usufructuary and in the case of legal entities on their dissolution.

2 In the case of legal entities, however, it may not last more than 100 years.

Art. 750 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 3. Replacement on extinction of usufruct

3. Replacement on extinction of usufruct

1 The owner of the object of a usufruct is not obliged to replace or restore the object if it has been destroyed.

2 If it is replaced or restored the usufruct is restored with it.

3 If an object that has been destroyed is replaced, as may be the case with compulsory purchase and insurance indemnities, the usufruct continues on the replacement object.

Art. 751 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 4. Return / a. Duty

4. Return

a. Duty

When the usufruct ends, the person in possession of the object must return it to the owner.

Art. 752 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 4. Return / b. Liability

b. Liability

1 The usufructuary is liable for complete loss or deterioration of the object, unless he or she shows that he or she was not at fault.

2 He or she must replace any items which have been used up if such consumption is not intrinsic to the use of the object.

3 He or she is not obliged to compensate for any depreciation caused by the proper use of the object.

Art. 753 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 4. Return / c. Costs

c. Costs

1 If the usufructuary has of his or her own free will incurred costs or made improvements, on return of the object he or she may request compensation in accordance with the provisions governing agency without authority.

2 He or she is entitled to remove any fixtures he or she has installed for which the owner is not prepared to pay compensation; he or she is, however, obliged to restore the object to its previous condition.

Art. 754 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 5. Prescription of compensation rights

5. Prescription of compensation rights

The owner’s right to compensation for alterations or depreciation and the usufructuary’s right to compensation for expenditure or to remove fixtures prescribe one year after the return of the object.

Art. 755 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / a. In general

IV. Scope

1. Rights of the usufructuary

a. In general

1 The usufructuary has the rights of possession, use and enjoyment of the object.

2 He or she is responsible for looking after it.

3 In the exercise of these rights, he or she must exercise reasonable care.

Art. 756 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / b. Natural fruits

b. Natural fruits

1 Natural fruits belong to the usufructuary if they have ripened during the period of the usufruct.

2 The person who has cultivated the land is entitled to claim equitable compensation for his or her costs from the person who receives the ripe fruits, whereby this compensation should not exceed their value.

3 Constituent parts of the usufruct other than fruits or produce belong to the owner.

Art. 757 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / c. Interest

c. Interest

Interest on usufructuary capital and other periodic returns accrue to the usufructuary from the day on which the usufruct begins until the day on which it ends, even if they mature at a later date.

Art. 758 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / d. Assignability

d. Assignability

1 Unless it is a strictly personal right, the exercise of the usufruct may be assigned to another person.

2 The owner is entitled to assert his or her rights directly against such person.

Art. 759 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / a. Supervision

2. Rights of the owner

a. Supervision

The owner may object to any unlawful or inappropriate use of the object.

Art. 760 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / b. Security

b. Security

1 The owner is entitled to request security from the usufructuary providing he or she may show that his or her rights are jeopardised.

2 He or she is entitled to request security without such showing and already before transfer where consumable objects or securities are the object of the usufruct.

3 If securities are the object of the usufruct, their deposit constitutes sufficient security.

Art. 761 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / c. Security in the case of gifts and statutory usufruct

c. Security in the case of gifts and statutory usufruct

1 A person who has transferred an object as a gift while reserving a personal right of usufruct may not be required to provide security.

2 The obligation to provide security in the case of statutory usufruct is subject to the specific rules governing the legal relationship.

Art. 762 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / d. Consequence of failure to provide security

d. Consequence of failure to provide security

If the usufructuary fails to provide security within the reasonable time limit set for that purpose, or if he or she persists in using the object unlawfully despite the owner’s objections, the court may dispossess him or her of the object until further notice and appoint a trustee.

Art. 763 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 3. Inventory

3. Inventory

The owner and the usufructuary have the right at any time to request that a publicly notarised inventory of the objects subject to the usufruct be drawn up at their joint expense.

Art. 764 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / a. Preservation of the object

4. Costs

a. Preservation of the object

1 The usufructuary must preserve the object in its original condition and of his or her own accord carry out such repairs and renovations as constitute normal maintenance.

2 If more substantial work or measures are necessary to protect the object, the usufructuary must inform the owner and allow such work to be carried out.

3 If the owner does not attend to the matter, the usufructuary is authorised to take the necessary steps at the owner’s expense.

Art. 765 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / b. Maintenance and administration

b. Maintenance and administration

1 The usufructuary must bear the costs of the normal maintenance and administration of the object, the interest on the attendant debt and taxes and other duties for the duration of his or her rights over the object.

2 If the taxes and duties are payable by the owner, the usufructuary must compensate him or her to the same extent.

3 All other charges are borne by the owner, but if the usufructuary does not advance the owner the necessary funds on request, he or she is entitled to dispose of parts of the usufruct for this purpose.

Art. 766 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / c. Duty to pay interest on usufruct of assets

c. Duty to pay interest on usufruct of assets

In the case of a usufruct of assets, the usufructuary must pay interest on the debts but, where justified in the circumstances, is entitled on request to be released from that obligation by redemption of the debt so that afterwards the usufruct is confined to the remainder of the assets.

Art. 767 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / d. Insurance

d. Insurance

1 The usufructuary must insure the object in favour of the owner against fire and other risks to the extent such insurance is required under the duty of care required by local custom.

2 Where this is the case, and also where a usufruct is established on an already insured object, the usufructuary bears the costs of the insurance for the duration of the usufruct.

Art. 768 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / a. Fruits

V. Special cases

1. Land

a. Fruits

1 The usufructuary of immovable property must ensure that it is not exploited beyond the normal limits by the type of use to which it is put.

2 To the extent that fruits are collected beyond such limits they belong to the owner.

Art. 769 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / b. Use

b. Use

1 The usufructuary must not change the intended use of the immovable property in a manner that is significantly detrimental to the owner.

2 He or she must neither transform nor substantially modify the object.

3 He or she may dig quarries, marl pits, peat cuttings and the like only after giving prior notice to the owner and on condition that the intended use of the immovable property is not substantially changed.

Art. 770 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / c. Woodland

c. Woodland

1 The usufructuary of woodland is entitled to farm it within the limits of a reasonable business plan.

2 Both owner and usufructuary may require compliance with a plan which takes due account of their rights.

3 Where there is large-scale loss of woodland caused by storm, snow, fire, insect infestation or other factors, either the exploitation must gradually be reduced or the business plan adapted to the changed circumstances; income realised from the clearing of timber must be invested at interest and serves as compensation for the loss of woodland.

Art. 771 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / d. Mines

d. Mines

The provisions governing the usufruct of woodland apply mutatis mutandis to the usufruct of objects, such as mines, whose use involves the extraction of substances from the earth.

Art. 772 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 2. Consumables and valued chattels

2. Consumables and valued chattels

1 In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the usufructuary becomes the owner of consumable objects but is liable to replace the value they had at the beginning of the usufruct.

2 Where any other chattels which have been valued are transferred to the usufructuary he or she may, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, freely dispose of them but is liable for their replacement if he or she exercises such right.

3 Agricultural equipment, herds of animals, stores of goods and the like may be replaced with objects of the same kind and quality.

Art. 773 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 3. Claims / a. Scope

3. Claims

a. Scope

1 A usufruct of debts entitles the usufructuary to retain the realised revenue.

2 Notices of termination to the debtor and dispositions relating to securities subject to a usufruct must be made jointly by the creditor and the usufructuary; notices of termination by the debtor must be addressed to both.

3 If a debt is at risk, the creditor and the usufructuary have a mutual right to request each other’s consent to such measures as are required to ensure diligent administration.

Art. 774 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 3. Claims / b. Repayments and reinvestment

b. Repayments and reinvestment

1 If the debtor is not specifically authorised to repay either the creditor or the usufructuary, he or she must pay them jointly or deposit the amount.

2 The benefit received, such as the repayment of the principal, if under the usufruct.

3 Both creditor and usufructuary are entitled to a secure, interest-bearing reinvestment of the principal.

Art. 775 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 3. Claims / c. Right to assignment

c. Right to assignment

1 The usufructuary has the right to request the assignment of the debts and securities over which he or she has a usufruct within three months of the beginning thereof.

2 Once assignment has been effected, he or she is liable to the former creditor for the value of the debts and securities as at the date of assignment and is required to provide security for that amount unless waived by the creditor.

3 If the creditor has not waived his or her right to security, the assignment becomes effective only once security has been posted.

Art. 776 B. Right of residence / I. In general

B. Right of residence

I. In general

1 The right of residence is the right to live in all or part of a building.

2 It is neither transferable nor heritable.

3 It is subject to the provisions governing usufruct unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 777 B. Right of residence / II. Rights of the usufructuary

II. Rights of the usufructuary

1 The scope of the right of residence is generally tailored to the personal requirements of the usufructuary.

2 However, unless the right is expressly restricted to the person of the holder, he or she may share the residence with his or her family and household.

3 If the right of residence is limited to part of a building, the holder may use the fittings and installations intended for common use.

Art. 778 B. Right of residence / III. Maintenance costs

III. Maintenance costs

1 If the right of residence is exclusive, the usufructuary bears the costs of ordinary maintenance.

2 If the right of residence is exercised jointly with the owner, the latter bears the maintenance costs.

Art. 779 C. Building right / I. Object and entry in the land register

C. Building right

I. Object and entry in the land register1

1 Immovable property may be encumbered with an easement entitling a third party to erect or maintain a construction above or below ground on such land.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, this right is transferable and heritable.

3 If the building right has the character of a distinct and permanent right it may be recorded in the land register as immovable property.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779a1C. Building right / II. Legal transaction

II. Legal transaction

1 The legal transaction creating a building right is only valid if done as a public deed.

2 If the remuneration for the building right and any other contractual provisions should be noted in the land register, they are also only valid if done as a public deed.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969). Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779b1C. Building right / III. Nature, scope and noting

III. Nature, scope and noting2

1 Contractual provisions on the nature and scope of a building right, such as location, design, size and purpose of the buildings, as well as on the use of land which, although not built on, is used in the exercise of the building right, are binding on every new owner of the right and the servient property.

2 Additional contractual provisions may be noted in the land register, if the parties so agree.3


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779c1C. Building right / IV. Consequences of expiry / 1. Reversion

IV. Consequences of expiry

1. Reversion

When the building right expires, any existing construction reverts to the landowner and becomes an integral part of his or her parcel of land.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779d1C. Building right / IV. Consequences of expiry / 2. Compensation

2. Compensation

1 The landowner must pay the holder of the expired right adequate compensation for the buildings which have reverted to his or her ownership, but such compensation is subject to the outstanding claims of creditors to whom the building right was pledged as security and is not payable to the holder of the building right without their consent.

2 If the compensation has neither been paid nor secured, the holder of the expired right or a creditor to whom the building right was pledged as security may request that a mortgage right be registered in place of and with the same rank as the expired right as security for the compensation claim.

3 Such registration must be made within three months of expiry of the building right.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779e1

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969). Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779f1C. Building right / V. Premature reversion / 1. Prerequisites

V. Premature reversion

1. Prerequisites

If the holder of the building right grossly violates his or her right in rem or his or her contractual obligations, the owner is entitled to premature reversion by requesting that the building right with all rights and encumbrances be transferred back to him or her.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779g1C. Building right / V. Premature reversion / 2. Exercising the right of reversion

2. Exercising the right of reversion

1 The right of reversion may be exercised only provided adequate compensation is paid for the reverting buildings, the amount payable being susceptible to reduction if the holder of the building right is at fault.

2 The building right will not be transferred to the owner until the compensation has been paid or secured.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779h1C. Building right / V. Premature reversion / 3. Other applicable cases

3. Other applicable cases

The provisions governing the exercise of the right of reversion apply to all rights reserved by the landowner to terminate or reclaim the building right prematurely in the event of breach of duty.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779i1C. Building right / VI. Liability for remuneration for the right / 1. Right to establish a lien

VI. Liability for remuneration for the right

1. Right to establish a lien

1 Provided the building right is recorded in the land register, the landowner is entitled to established a lien thereon against each current holder as security for up to three annual payments.

2 Where the remuneration does not consist of equal annual payments, the landowner is entitled to record a statutory lien for an amount aggregating three annual payments.


1 Inserted by section I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779k1C. Building right / VI. Liability for remuneration for the right / 2. Registration

2. Registration

1 The lien may be recorded at any time during the existence of the building right and is exempt from deletion in compulsory sale proceedings.

2 The provisions governing recording of a building contractor’s lien apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by section I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779l1C. Building right / VII. Maximum duration

VII. Maximum duration

1 A building right may be established as a distinct right for a maximum of 100 years.

2 It may be prolonged at any time for a further period of up to 100 years in the same form as that required for its establishment, but any obligation to do so stipulated in advance is not binding.


1 Inserted by section I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 780 D. Right of access to water sources

D. Right of access to water sources

1 The right of access to a water source on a parcel of land owned by another encumbers such land with a servitude permitting the drawing and channelling-off of water.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, the right is transferable and heritable.

3 If the right of access to water is distinct and permanent, it may be recorded in the land register as immovable property.

Art. 781 E. Other servitudes

E. Other servitudes

1 An owner may establish other servitudes on his or her property in favour of any person or group if such servitudes meet a particular need, such as rights of access for shooting practice or rights of way.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, such servitudes are non-transferable and their nature and scope is based on the beneficiaries’ normal needs.

3 In other respects they are subject to the provisions governing easements.

Art. 781a1F. Judicial measures

F. Judicial measures

The beneficiaries of an easement recorded in the land register are subject by analogy to the provisions on judicial measures in the event that the owner cannot be found or in the absence of the required management bodies of a legal entity.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Three: Real Burdens

Art. 782 A. Object

A. Object

1 A real burden obliges an owner of immovable property to fulfil an obligation to a beneficiary for which he or she is liable solely with the immovable property.

2 The current owner of another property may be designated as the beneficiary.

3 Other than in the case of public law real burdens, a real burden may have as its object only one obligation, which is determined either by the nature of the servient property or the economic needs of the benefited property.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 783 B. Establishment and extinction / I. Establishment / 1. Registration and form of acquisition

B. Establishment and extinction

I. Establishment

1. Registration and form of acquisition

1 A real burden is established by recording in the land register.

2 The entry must stipulate a total value for the real burden denominated in Swiss currency which, in the case of periodic payments and in the absence of any agreement to the contrary, shall equal twenty times the annual payment.

3 The provisions governing land ownership apply to the acquisition or registration of real burdens, unless otherwise provided.

Art. 7841B. Establishment and extinction / I. Establishment / 2. Public law real burdens

2. Public law real burdens

The establishment of public law real burdens and their effect in relation to third parties acting in good faith is governed by analogy by the provisions of cantonal law on statutory liens.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7851

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 786 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 1. In general

II. Extinction

1. In general

1 A real burden is extinguished on deletion of the entry or on the complete loss of the servient property.

2 In the case of redemption, replacement or other causes of extinction, the burdened owner acquires a right against the beneficiary for the deletion of the entry.

Art. 787 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Redemption / a. By the creditor

2. Redemption

a. By the creditor

1 The creditor may request redemption of the real burden by agreement and also:1

1.2
if the servient property has been divided and the creditor does not accept the transfer of the debt to the divided parts;
2.
if the owner reduces the value of the land without providing other security by way of replacement;
3.
if the debtor is in arrears for three years’ worth of performance.

2 If the creditor requests redemption due to the division of the property, the he or she must give one year’s notice of termination within one month of the transfer becoming legally binding.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 788 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Redemption / b. By the debtor

b. By the debtor

1 The debtor may request redemption of the real burden by agreement, and also:

1.
if the beneficiary fails to abide by the agreement establishing the real burden;
2.
if the real burden has been in existence for thirty years, even where a longer duration or a charge in perpetuity was agreed.

2 If the debtor wishes to redeem the charge after thirty years, he or she must in every case give notice of termination one year in advance.

3 The real burden may not be redeemed in such manner if it is linked with a perpetual easement.

Art. 789 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Redemption / c. Redemption sum

c. Redemption sum

The redemption sum is equal to the amount recorded in the land register as the total value of the real burden, unless its real value is shown to be less.

Art. 790 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Prescription

3. Prescription

1 A real burden is not subject to prescription.

2 Each individual obligation is subject to prescription from the time it becomes the obligor’s personal debt.

Art. 791 C. Scope / I. Creditor’s rights

C. Scope

I. Creditor’s rights

1 The real burden creditor has no personal claim against the debtor, but only the right to satisfaction from the servient property.

2 However, three years after it if due, each individual obligation becomes a personal obligation for which the property is no longer liable.

Art. 792 C. Scope / II. Debt liability

II. Debt liability

1 If the land changes ownership, the new owner automatically becomes the obligor under the real burden.

2 If the land is divided, the owners of the divided parts become debtors under the real burden. The debt is apportioned over the divided parts of the property in accordance with the provisions on mortgage contracts.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Title Twenty-Two: Mortgages

  Chapter One: General Provisions

Art. 793 A. Requirements / I. Types

A. Requirements

I. Types

1 A mortgage may be created on immovable property in the form of a mortgage contract or a mortgage certificate.1

2 No other types of mortgage are permitted.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 794 A. Requirements / II. Form of the debt / 1. Amount

II. Form of the debt

1. Amount

1 Whenever a mortgage is created, a specific amount denominated in Swiss currency must be indicated as the debt.

2 If the amount of the debt is unspecified, a maximum amount must be indicated up to which the property is liable for all claims of the creditor.

Art. 795 A. Requirements / II. Form of the debt / 2. Interest

2. Interest

1 The interest payable may be set at any level at the parties’ discretion within the legal limits imposed to prevent abusive interest rates.

2 Cantonal law may provide for a maximum permissible interest rate for debts secured by mortgages.

Art. 796 A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 1. Property subject to a charge

III. Immovable property

1. Property subject to a charge

1 A mortgage may be created only on immovable property recorded in the land register.

2 The cantons may prohibit or enact special provisions to regulate the creation of mortgages over publicly owned land or over common land and pastures owned by corporations, and over any associated rights of use.

Art. 797 A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 2. Specification / a. In the case of a single property

2. Specification

a. In the case of a single property

1 Where a mortgage is created, the immovable property that it encumbers must be clearly specified.

2 Parts of a property may not be made subject to a mortgage unless the division of the property has been recorded in the land register.

Art. 798 A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 2. Specification / b. In the case of more than one property

b. In the case of more than one property

1 A mortgage right may be created on two or more properties for a single debt provided the properties are all owned by the same person or by debtors who are jointly and severally liable.

2 In all other cases where more than one property is made subject to a mortgage as security for a single debt, each of the properties shall be encumbered for a specified portion of the total debt.

3 Unless otherwise agreed, the total amount secured by the mortgage is divided in proportion to the values of the properties.

Art. 798a1A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 3. Agricultural properties

3. Agricultural properties

The Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural Land Rights applies to the establishment of mortgages over agricultural properties.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 799 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 1. Registration

B. Creation and extinction

I. Creation

1. Registration

1 Subject to exceptions provided by law, a mortgage is created by its recording in the land register.

2 A legal transaction creating a mortgage is valid only if done as a public deed.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 800 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 2. In the case of joint ownership

2. In the case of joint ownership

1 In the case of joint ownership of a property, each joint owner may create a mortgage over his or her share.

2 In the case of collective ownership, the property may be made subject to a mortgage only as a whole and in the name of all co-owners.

Art. 801 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction

II. Extinction

1 A mortgage is extinguished on deletion of the entry or the complete loss of the property.

2 Extinction as a result of compulsory purchase is governed by federal and cantonal compulsory purchase law.

Art. 802 B. Creation and extinction / III. Charges on consolidated land / 1. Transfer of liens

III. Charges on consolidated land

1. Transfer of liens

1 In the case of land consolidation procedures carried out with the assistance or under the supervision of the public authorities, the mortgage rights assigned are transferred with the same ranking to the land allotted by way of replacement.

2 Where one parcel of land replaces several parcels which are subject to a mortgage as security for different debts, or not all of which are subject to a mortgage, the liens will be applied to the single parcel of land and their ranking preserved wherever possible.

Art. 803 B. Creation and extinction / III. Charges on consolidated land / 2. Redemption by the debtor

2. Redemption by the debtor

The debtor is entitled to redeem liens on parcels of land involved in a land consolidation procedure by giving three months’ notice expiring on the date on which such consolidation takes effect.

Art. 804 B. Creation and extinction / III. Charges on consolidated land / 3. Monetary compensation

3. Monetary compensation

1 Where monetary compensation is received in connection with the consolidation of parcels of land subject to mortgages, such funds are distributed among the creditors according to their rank or, if of equal rank, in proportion to the size of their claims.

2 Such compensation must not be paid to the debtor without the creditors’ consent if it exceeds one-twentieth of the secured debt, or if the new parcel of land no longer provides sufficient security.

Art. 805 C. Effect / I. Extent of security

C. Effect

I. Extent of security

1 A mortgage right encumbers the entire property including all its constituent parts and accessories.

2 If accessories, such as machines or hotel furnishings, are expressly listed in the mortgage agreement and noted as such in the land register, they are treated accordingly unless it is shown that the law precludes their qualification as accessories.

3 Rights of third parties to the accessories are reserved.

Art. 806 C. Effect / II. Rent

II. Rent

1 If the mortgaged property is let, the mortgage covers the rent claims which accrue between the date on which foreclosure proceedings are commenced or the date on which the debtor is declared bankrupt and the date of realisation.

2 Tenants and lessees are bound by the mortgage only once they have been informed of the enforcement proceedings or the bankruptcy has been published.

3 Transactions by the property owner involving claims for unmatured rent and any actions of distraint by other creditors are invalid in respect of any mortgage creditor who initiated foreclosure proceedings before the rent claims matured.

Art. 807 C. Effect / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

Claims for which a mortgage has been recorded in the land register are not subject to prescription.

Art. 808 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 1. In the event of a reduction in value / a. Court order and action by the creditor

IV. Safeguarding powers

1. In the event of a reduction in value

a. Court order and action by the creditor

1 If the owner reduces the value of the mortgaged property, the creditor may request that the court prohibit any further detrimental action.

2 The creditor may be authorised by the court to take appropriate measures and may do so even without authorisation if there is risk in delay.

3 He or she may request compensation for the costs of such measures from the owner and shall acquire a lien on the property for the corresponding amount. This lien does not require to be recorded in the land register and takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances.1

4 If the amount of the lien exceeds 1000 francs and the lien is not recorded in the land register within four months of completion of the measures, it may not cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 809 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 1. In the event of a reduction in value / b. Security, restoration, redemption

b. Security, restoration, redemption

1 If the property has depreciated, the creditor has the right to request that the debtor secure his or her debts or restore the property to its previous state.

2 He or she may also demand security in the case of imminent depreciation.

3 If the debtor does not comply within the time limit set by the court, the creditor may request redemption of such portion of the debt as is appropriate to compensate for the reduced degree of security.

Art. 810 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 2. Depreciation without owner’s fault

2. Depreciation without owner’s fault

1 In the event of depreciation without fault on the owner’s part, the creditor has a right to security or redemption only if the owner is indemnified for the damage.

2 However, the creditor is entitled to take measures to prevent or eliminate the depreciation. He or she shall acquire a lien on the property for his or her costs which does not render the owner personally liable. This lien does not require to be recorded in the land register and takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances.1

3 If the amount of the lien exceeds 1000 francs and the lien is not recorded in the land register within four months of completion of the measures, it may not be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 811 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 3. Disposal of minor portions of the property

3. Disposal of minor portions of the property

If a part of the property worth less than one-twentieth of the secured debt is disposed of, the creditor may not refuse to release this portion from liability under the lien provided a proportionate repayment of the debt is made or the rest of the property provides him or her with sufficient security.

Art. 812 C. Effect / V. Further encumbrances

V. Further encumbrances

1 Any waiver by the owner of right to create further charges over the servient property is non-binding.

2 If, after the mortgage right has been created, the immovable property is encumbered with an easement or a real burden without the mortgage creditor’s consent, the mortgage right takes precedence over the later encumbrances, which will be deleted if, in the event of enforcement proceedings, their existence is prejudicial to the mortgage creditor.

3 However, the beneficiary of the easement or real burden has a claim for payment of the value of his or her right out of the enforcement proceeds, such claim taking precedence over the beneficiaries of encumbrances subsequently recorded in the land register.

Art. 813 C. Effect / VI. Rank / 1. Effect of rank

VI. Rank

1. Effect of rank

1 A mortgage is confined to the rank indicated in the entry.

2 Mortgage rights may be established in a second or any lower rank provided the amount taking precedence is specified in the entry.

Art. 814 C. Effect / VI. Rank / 2. Ranking

2. Ranking

1 If mortgage rights of different rank are created on an immovable property, any deletion does not entitle the beneficiaries of lower-ranking mortgage to advance in rank.

2 The owner may create another mortgage in place of one which has been deleted.

3 An agreement providing for mortgage creditors to advance in rank only has in rem effect where it is recorded as a priority notice in the land register.

Art. 815 C. Effect / VI. Rank / 3. Vacant ranks

3. Vacant ranks

If a subordinate mortgage right is created and no higher-ranking mortgage exists, or if the debtor has not yet made use of an existing higher-ranking right to create a mortgage, or if a precedent claim is worth less than the amount recorded in the land register, in the event of foreclosure, the proceeds are distributed among the actual mortgage creditors according to their rank and irrespective of vacant ranks.

Art. 816 C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 1. Mode

VII. Foreclosure

1. Mode

1 In the event of default on the part of the debtor, the creditor has the right to payment out of the proceeds of the sale of the property.

2 Any agreement stipulating that the property subject to the mortgage will become the property of the creditor in the event of default on the part of the debtor is invalid.

3 Where several properties are made subject to a mortgage as security for a single claim, foreclosure proceedings must be brought simultaneously against all such properties, while individual properties are sold only if deemed necessary by the debt enforcement office.

Art. 817 C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 2. Distribution of the proceeds

2. Distribution of the proceeds

1 The proceeds from the sale of the property are distributed among the mortgage creditors according to their rank.

2 Creditors of the same rank are entitled to equal satisfaction.

Art. 818 C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 3. Extent of security

3. Extent of security

1 A mortgage right secures the creditor:

1.
for the principal;
2.
for the costs of debt enforcement and default interest;
3.1
for three years’ accrued annual interest due on the date of the application for foreclosure or the debtor is declared bankrupt, plus the interest due since the last maturity date; in the case of a mortgage certificate only the interest actually due is secured by the mortgage.

2 The interest rate originally agreed must not exceed five per cent to the detriment of subordinate mortgage creditors.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 8191C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 4. Security for maintenance costs

4. Security for maintenance costs

1 If a creditor has incurred expenses necessary for the maintenance of the property, in particular by paying insurance premiums owed by the owner, such expenses are secured by a lien over the property. This lien does not require to be recorded in the land register and takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances.

2 If the amount of the lien exceeds 1000 francs and the lien is not recorded in the land register within four months of the compensatory act being carried out, it may not be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 820 C. Effect / VIII. Lien in the case of land improvements / 1. Precedence

VIII. Lien in the case of land improvements

1. Precedence

1 If a rural property increases in value due to improvements carried out with the help of the public authorities, the owner may record a lien in the land register as security for his or her share of the costs which takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances on the property.

2 If such land improvement is made without state subsidy, the owner may enter the lien for a maximum of two-thirds of his or her costs.

Art. 821 C. Effect / VIII. Lien in the case of land improvements / 2. Extinction of debt and lien

2. Extinction of debt and lien

1 If a land improvement is made without state subsidy, the debt in relation to the lien must be repaid in annual payments of at least five per cent of the registered amount of the lien.

2 The lien is extinguished for the claim and for each annual payment three years after maturity, and any lower-ranking mortgage creditors advance in rank.

Art. 822 C. Effect / IX. Entitlement to insurers’ payments

IX. Entitlement to insurers’ payments

1 A payment under insurance policy may be made to the owner of the insured property only with the consent of all the charge creditors.

2 However, it may be made to the owner for the purposes of restoring the property subject to the charge provided adequate security is furnished.

3 In other respects, the cantonal provisions governing fire insurance are reserved.

Art. 8231C. Effect / X. Untraceable creditor

X. Untraceable creditor

Where the name or place of residence of the creditor is unknown, the court may, at the request of the debtor or other interested parties, order the necessary measures in cases where the law requires that a creditor take personal action as a matter of urgency.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Two: The Mortgage Contract

Art. 824 A. Purpose and nature

A. Purpose and nature

1 A mortgage contract may secure any kind of debt, be it current, future or contingent.

2 The mortgaged property need not be owned by the debtor.

Art. 825 B. Establishment and extinction / I. Establishment

B. Establishment and extinction

I. Establishment

1 A mortgage contract is created in a specific rank even if the secured amount is indeterminate or variable, and it retains such rank notwithstanding any fluctuations in the secured amount.

2 The creditor may request that the land registrar provide him or her with an extract concerning the mortgage contract. Such an extract has only evidential status and does not constitute a negotiable instrument.

3 In lieu of such evidence, a certificate of registration may be appended to the mortgage contract deed.

Art. 826 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 1. Right to have entry deleted

II. Extinction

1. Right to have entry deleted

If the debt is extinguished, the owner of the mortgaged property may request the creditor to authorise the deletion of the entry from the land register.

Art. 827 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Position of owner

2. Position of owner

1 If the property owner is not the debtor of the secured debt, he or she may redeem the mortgage on the same conditions as the debtor may repay the debt.

2 If he or she satisfies the creditor, the claim passes to him or her.

Art. 828 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Unilateral redemption / a. Conditions and procedure

3. Unilateral redemption

a. Conditions and procedure

1 Where a property is mortgaged for more than its value in respect of debts for which the acquirer is not personally liable, and providing no debt enforcement proceedings are pending, cantonal law may authorise the acquirer to redeem the mortgage rights either by paying the purchase price to the creditors or, where the property was acquired without payment, the amount at which he or she values the property.

2 He or she must give the creditors six months’ notice in writing of his or her intention to redeem the mortgage.

3 The redemption amount is distributed among the creditors according to their rank.

Art. 829 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Unilateral redemption / b. Public auction

b. Public auction

1 Within one month of the acquirer’s notification, the creditors are entitled to request that the mortgaged property be sold at public auction provided that they advance the costs, such auction to be announced publicly and held within one month of the date on which it was requested.

2 If a higher price than the one offered is obtained at auction, the mortgage is redeemed at that higher price.

3 The costs of the public auction are borne by the acquirer if a higher price is obtained, or otherwise by the creditor who requested the auction.

Art. 830 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Unilateral redemption / c. Official valuation

c. Official valuation

Cantonal law may provide that the redemption amount be determined by an official valuation rather than by sale at public auction.

Art. 831 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 4. Termination

4. Termination

Where the owner of the mortgaged property is not also the debtor, notice given by the creditor to terminate his or her claim is binding on the owner only if it is served on both him or her and the debtor.

Art. 832 C. Effect / I. Ownership and liability / 1. Alienation

C. Effect

I. Ownership and liability

1. Alienation

1 The alienation of a mortgaged property does not affect liability under the mortgage contract and of the debtor unless otherwise agreed.

2 However, if the new owner has assumed liability for the secured debt, the previous debtor is discharged unless the creditor notifies him or her in writing within one year that he or she intends to retain him or her as debtor.

Art. 833 C. Effect / I. Ownership and liability / 2. Division

2. Division

1 If part of a mortgaged property or one of two or more mortgaged properties belonging to the same owner is alienated or if the mortgaged property is divided, unless otherwise agreed, liability under the mortgage will be reallocated in proportion to the value of the different parts.

2 If the creditor does not wish to accept such reallocation, within one month of its becoming final he or she may request repayment of his or her debt within one year.

3 Where the new owners have assumed liability for the debts secured by their properties, the previous debtor is discharged unless the creditor notifies him or her in writing within one year that he or she intends to retain him or her as debtor.

Art. 834 C. Effect / I. Ownership and liability / 3. Notice of assumption of debt

3. Notice of assumption of debt

1 If the new owner assumes the debt, the land registrar notifies the creditor accordingly.

2 The one-year time limit for the creditor’s declaration runs as of such notice.

Art. 835 C. Effect / II. Assignment of a debt

II. Assignment of a debt

The assignment of a debt secured by a mortgage contract is valid without entry in the land register.

Art. 8361D. Statutory mortgage right / I. Under cantonal law

D. Statutory mortgage right

I. Under cantonal law

1 Where cantonal law grants the creditor the right to a lien in respect of debts that are directly related to the servient property, the lien is created when it is recorded in the land register.

2 Where statutory liens amounting to over 1000 francs are created under cantonal law without being recorded in the land register and if they are not recorded in the land register within four months of the underlying debt becoming due, or at the latest within two years of the debt arising, on expiry of the period allowed for registration they may no longer be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.

3 More restrictive regulations under cantonal law are reserved.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 8371D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 1. Cases in point

II. With entry

1. Cases in point

1 The right to establish a statutory mortgage right applies to:

1.
the vendor’s claim to the sale price;
2.
the claims of co-heirs and other co-owners in undivided shares arising from the division of immovable property which belonged to the community;
3.
the claims of tradesmen and building contractors who have supplied labour and materials, or labour alone, for construction or other works, for demolition work, scaffolding work or for securing the construction pit or similar on the property whether the debtor is the owner of the property, tradesman or building contractor, tenant or any other person with rights to the property.

2 If a tenant or other person with rights to the property is liable for debts due to tradesmen or building contractors, the claim is valid only if the property owner has consented to the work being done.

3 The beneficiary may not waive such statutory mortgage rights in advance.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 838 D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 2. Vendor, co—heirs and co—owners

2. Vendor, co—heirs and co—owners

A lien in favour of the vendor, co-heirs or co-owners in undivided shares must be registered within three months of transfer of ownership.

Art. 8391D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 3. Tradesmen and building contractors / a. Registration

3. Tradesmen and building contractors

a. Registration

1 A tradesman's or building contractor’s lien may be recorded in the land register as of the date of his or her undertaking to perform work.

2 Application for such entry must be made within four months of completion of the work.

3 The lien is entered only if the claim has been acknowledged by the owner or confirmed in a court judgment and may not be requested if the owner provides the claimant with adequate security.

4 If the property is indisputably administrative assets and if the owner's liability for the debt is not based on contractual obligations, the owner shall be liable to the tradesmen or building contractor for debts that are acknowledged or determined by a court in accordance with the provisions on a debt subject to a simple surety, provided a written claim for the debt making reference to the statutory surety was made against the owner no later than four months after completion of the work.

5 If there is a dispute as to whether immovable property constitutes administrative assets, the tradesman or building contractor may apply for the provisional recording of the lien in the land register no later than four months after completion of the work.

6 If it is held in a court judgment that the immovable property constitutes administrative assets, the provisional recording of the lien must be deleted. It shall be replaced by the statutory surety provided the requirements of paragraph 4 are met. The deadline is met with the provisional recording of the lien.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 840 D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 3. Tradesmen and building contractors / b. Rank

b. Rank

If more than one statutory building contractor’s lien is recorded in the land register, such liens confer an equal entitlement to satisfaction from the mortgaged property even if the entries were made on different dates.

Art. 841 D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 3. Tradesmen and building contractors / c. Privileged claim

c. Privileged claim

1 Where the claims of tradesmen and building contractors are not wholly satisfied by foreclosure, the shortfall must be compensated for by the higher-ranking creditors out of such portion of the proceeds as exceeds the land value, provided it is apparent to such creditors that their liens have encumbered the property to the detriment of the tradesmen and building contractors.

2 If the higher-ranking creditor alienates his or her mortgage security, he or she must compensate the tradesmen and building contractors for any sum of which they are deprived by such alienation.

3 Once an interested party has had the beginning of the work noted in the land register, until the time limit for registration has expired, liens may only be registered in the form of mortgage contracts.


  Chapter Three:2  Mortgage Certificates

Art. 842 A. Mortgage certificate / I. Purpose; Relationship with the debt arising from the basic relationship

A. Mortgage certificate

I. Purpose; Relationship with the debt arising from the basic relationship

1 A mortgage certificate gives rise to a personal debt secured by a mortgage.

2 In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the mortgage certificate, where applicable, co-exists with the debt to be secured that arises from the basic relationship between the creditor and the debtor

3 The debtor may raise the personal objections arising from the basic relationship against the creditor and his or her legal successors where they do not act in good faith.

Art. 843 A. Mortgage certificate / II. Form

II. Form

The mortgage certificate takes the form of either a register mortgage certificate or a mortgage certificate on paper.

Art. 844 A. Mortgage certificate / III. Position of owner

III. Position of owner

1 The owner of a mortgaged property who is not also the debtor under the mortgage certificate is subject to the provisions governing mortgage contracts.

2 In the case of a mortgage certificate, the owner of the mortgaged property may raise the same objections as the debtor.

Art. 845 A. Mortgage certificate / IV. Sale. Division

IV. Sale. Division

The consequences of the sale and the division of the property are governed by the provisions on mortgage contracts.

Art. 846 A. Mortgage certificate / V. Mortgage certificate debt and ancillary agreements / 1. In general

V. Mortgage certificate debt and ancillary agreements

1. In general

1 The mortgage certificate debt must neither relate to the basic relationship nor include conditions or considerations in return.

2 The mortgage certificate may include debt-related ancillary agreements on the rate of interest, repayment instalments and discharge as well as other ancillary provisions relating to the mortgage certificate debt. A reference to a separate agreement is permitted.

Art. 847 A. Mortgage certificate / V. Mortgage certificate debt and ancillary agreements / 2. Notice

2. Notice

1 The mortgage certificate may be discharged by the creditor or the debtor at six months notice at the end of any month unless otherwise agreed.

2 Any agreement may not allow the creditor a shorter period of notice than three months, unless the debtor defaults in making the repayments or paying the interest.

Art. 848 A. Mortgage certificate / VI. Protection of persons acting in good faith

VI. Protection of persons acting in good faith

For any person relying on the land register in good faith, the details of the mortgage certificate debt and the lien accord with the entry.

Art. 849 A. Mortgage certificate / VII. Objections by the debtor

VII. Objections by the debtor

1 The debtor may raise only such objections as arise from the entry in the land register or to which he or she is personally entitled with regard to the creditor or to document of title in the case of a mortgage certificate on paper.

2 Agreements including ancillary provisions on the mortgage certificate debt may only be cited in opposition to an acquirer of the mortgage certificate acting in good faith if they are referred to in the land register and on the document of title in the case of a mortgage certificate on paper.

Art. 850 A. Mortgage certificate / VIII. Authorised person

VIII. Authorised person

On the issue of a mortgage certificate, a person may be granted a power of attorney. This person must make and receive payments, receive notices, consent to releases from liability under the mortgage and in general safeguard the rights of the creditors, debtor and owner with all due care and impartiality

2 The name of the authorised person must be recorded in the land register and on the document of title.

3 If the power of attorney lapses and the persons involved are unable to agree, the court shall make the necessary arrangements.

Art. 851 A. Mortgage certificate / IX. Place of payment

IX. Place of payment

1 The debtor must make all payments at the domicile of the creditor unless otherwise agreed.

2 If the creditor’s domicile is unknown or has changed to the detriment of the debtor, the latter may discharge his or her obligation by depositing payment with the competent authority at his or her own domicile or at the creditor’s former domicile

Art. 852 A. Mortgage certificate / X. Changes in the legal relationship

X. Changes in the legal relationship

1 Where the legal relationship changes to the advantage of the debtor, in particular through the repayment of the debt, the debtor may request the creditor to agree to an amendment being recorded in the land register.

2 In the case of a mortgage certificate on paper, the land register shall note the amendment on the document of title.

3 In the absence of such an entry or the note on the document of title, the effect of the change in the legal relationship has no effect on an acquirer of the mortgage certificate acting in good faith.

Art. 853 A. Mortgage certificate / XI. Discharge

XI. Discharge

If the mortgage certificate debt is discharged, the debtor may request the creditor:

1.
to agree to transfer the register mortgage certificate into the name of the debtor; or
2.
to hand over the document of title to the paper mortgage certificate without cancelling the same.
Art. 854 A. Mortgage certificate / XII. Extinction / 1. In the absence of a creditor

XII. Extinction

1. In the absence of a creditor

1 If there is no longer a creditor, or if the creditor waives his or her lien, the debtor has the option of either having the entry deleted or allowing it to remain in the land register.

2 The debtor also has the right to continue to use the mortgage certificate.

Art. 855 A. Mortgage certificate / XII. Extinction / 2. Deletion

2. Deletion

A mortgage certificate on paper may not be deleted from the land register before the document of title has been cancelled or declared void by the court.

Art. 856 A. Mortgage certificate / XIII. Public call to creditors

XIII. Public call to creditors

1 If the creditor under a mortgage certificate has not come forward for ten years and if no demand has been made for interest during that period, the owner of the mortgaged property may ask the court to make a public call for the creditor to come forward within six months

2 If the creditor fails to come forward within this period and if an investigation concludes that there is a high probability that a valid claim no longer exists, the court shall:

1.
in the case of a register mortgage certificate, delete the lien from the land register; or
2.
cancel the mortgage certificate on paper and delete the lien from the land register.
Art. 857 B. Register mortgage certificate / I. Establishment

B. Register mortgage certificate

I. Establishment

1 A register mortgage certificate is created when it is recorded in the land register.

2 It is recorded in the name of the creditor or of the landowner.

Art. 858 B. Register mortgage certificate / II. Transfer

II. Transfer

1 The transfer of a register mortgage certificate is achieved by recording the new creditor in the land register based on a written declaration from the previous creditor.

2 Payments by the debtor only have a discharging effect if they are made to the person who at the time of payment is recorded as the creditor in the land register.

Art. 859 B. Register mortgage certificate / III. Pledging, distraint and usufruct

III. Pledging, distraint and usufruct

1 The pledging of the register mortgage certificate is achieved by recording the creditor of a charge on chattels in the land register based on a written declaration from the creditor recorded in the land register.

2 A distraint order is executed by recording the restriction on power of disposal in the land register.

3 The usufruct is created by its recording in the land register.

Art. 860 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / I. Creation / 1. Registration

C. Mortgage certificate on paper

I. Creation

1. Registration

1 The creation of a mortgage certificate on paper always requires an entry in the land register and a document of title

2 The bearer or a specific person, in particular the landowner, may be named as the creditor under the paper mortgage certificate.

3 The mortgage certificate shall take effect on registration even if the document of title has not yet been issued.

Art. 861 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / I. Creation / 2. Document of title

2. Document of title

1 The mortgage certificate on paper is issued by the land register issued.

2 It must be signed by the land registrar in order to be valid. Other requirements as to form shall be imposed by the Federal Council.

3 It may be delivered to the creditor or his or her authorised agent only with the express consent of the debtor and of the owner of the servient property.

Art. 862 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / II. Protection of persons acting in good faith

II. Protection of persons acting in good faith

1 For any person relying on the land register in good faith, the rights stated in the document of title duly issued as a mortgage certificate on paper apply.

2 If the wording of the document of title does not correspond to the entry or if there is no entry, the land register is authoritative.

3 A person who has acquired a document of title in good faith is entitled to damages in accordance with the provisions governing the land register.

Art. 863 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / III. Creditor's rights / 1. Claims

III. Creditor's rights

1. Claims

1 A claim arising from a mortgage certificate may not be alienated, pledged or otherwise asserted unless the claimant is in possession of the document.

2 This does not apply to the assertion of a claim in cases where the document of title has been cancelled or not yet issued

Art. 864 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / III. Creditor's rights / 2. Assignment

2. Assignment

1 The assignment of a mortgage certificate debt requires the delivery of the document of title to the assignee.

2 If the title is in the names of a person, the title must also be endorsed and the name of the assignee given.

Art. 865 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / IV. Cancellation

IV. Cancellation

1 Where a document of title has been lost or destroyed without the intention of repaying the debt, the creditor may request the court to cancel the document of title and order the debtor to make payment or that a new document of title be issued for as yet unmatured claims

2 The cancellation is made in accordance with the provisions governing the cancellation of bearer securities but subject to a notice period of six months

3 Likewise, the debtor may request that a lost certificate which has already been redeemed be cancelled.

Art. 866874

Repealed


  Chapter Four: Issue of Bonds secured by a Mortgage Right

Art. 875 A. Bond issues secured by a lien

A. Bond issues secured by a lien

Registered or bearer bonds may be secured by a mortgage:

1.
by issuing a mortgage contract or a mortgage certificate for the entire series and appointing an agent for the creditors and the borrower;
2.
by establishing a mortgage right for the entire bond issue in favour of the issuer and establishing a mortgage on that debt in favour of the bond holders.
Art. 8768831

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Title Twenty-Three: Charges on Chattels

  Chapter One: Pledges of Chattels and Special Liens

Art. 884 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 1. Possession by pledgee

A. Pledges

I. Establishment

1. Possession by pledgee

1 Except where otherwise provided by law, chattels may be pledged only by the transfer of possession of the chattel to the pledgee.

2 Any person who in good faith takes a chattel in pledge acquires a general lien over it, provided that third parties do not have rights over the chattel as a result of prior possession, even if the pledger had no authority to alienate it.

3 The general lien is not established as long as the pledger retains exclusive possession of the chattel.

Art. 885 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 2. Pledge of livestock

2. Pledge of livestock

1 A general lien on livestock to secure the claims of lending institutions and co-operatives authorised to carry out such transactions by the competent authority of the canton in which they have their seat may be established without transfer of possession by entry in a public register and notification to the debt enforcement office.

2 The Federal Council regulates the keeping of the register.1

3 The cantons may levy fees for entries in the register and the associated administration; they determine the register districts and the responsible officials.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 886 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 3. Subordinate pledge

3. Subordinate pledge

A subordinate pledge is established by notifying the pledgee in writing and instructing him or her to deliver the pledged chattel to the subordinate pledgee after his or her claim has been satisfied.

Art. 887 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 4. Further pledge by pledgee

4. Further pledge by pledgee

The pledgee may only give the pledged chattel in further pledge with the pledger’s consent.

Art. 888 A. Pledges / II. Extinction / 1. Loss of possession

II. Extinction

1. Loss of possession

1 The general lien is extinguished once the pledgee no longer possesses the pledged chattel and is unable to demand its return from third parties.

2 The effects of the lien are suspended as long as the pledger has exclusive possession of the pledged chattel with the pledgee’s consent.

Art. 889 A. Pledges / II. Extinction / 2. Return

2. Return

1 The pledgee must return the pledged chattel to the entitled party where the pledge is extinguished due to payment of the debt or for some other reason.

2 He or she is not obliged to return the pledged chattel, in whole or in part, until his or her claim has been fully satisfied.

Art. 890 A. Pledges / II. Extinction / 3. Liability of the pledgee

3. Liability of the pledgee

1 The pledgee is liable for the depreciation or loss of the pledged chattel, unless he or she shows that he or she is not at fault.

2 If the pledgee has alienated the pledged chattel or given it in further pledge without authority, he or she is liable for any resulting damage.

Art. 891 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 1. Rights of the pledgee

III. Effect

1. Rights of the pledgee

1 If the debtor is in default the creditor has the right to satisfy his or her claim from the proceeds of the pledge.

2 The general lien provides the creditor with security for his or her claim, including contractual interest, debt enforcement costs and default interest.

Art. 892 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 2. Scope of the general lien

2. Scope of the general lien

1 The general lien encumbers the pledged chattel including its accessories.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, the pledgee must deliver the natural fruits of the pledged chattel to the owner once they are no longer a constituent part thereof.

3 Fruits which are a constituent part of the pledged chattel at the time of its realisation are included in it.

Art. 893 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 3. Rank

3. Rank

1 Where there are several pledges on the same chattel, the pledgees are satisfied according to their rank.

2 Rank is determined by the date on which the pledges were established.

Art. 894 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 4. Default agreements

4. Default agreements

Any agreement stipulating that the pledged chattel will become the property of the pledgee in the event of default on the part of the debtor is invalid.

Art. 895 B. Special lien / I. Requirements

B. Special lien

I. Requirements

1 A creditor has the right to retain chattels and securities which have come into his or her possession with the debtor’s consent until his or her claim has been satisfied, providing such claim is due and intrinsically connected with the retained objects.

2 Between persons engaged in commerce, an intrinsic connection exists where both the claim and the retained objects relate to their commercial dealings.

3 The creditor has a special lien provided that third parties do not have rights as a result of prior possession, even if the chattel which he or she has received in good faith does not belong to the debtor.

Art. 896 B. Special lien / II. Exceptions

II. Exceptions

1 No special lien may be asserted over chattels which by their nature are not realisable.

2 Equally, no special lien may be asserted where to do so would be incompatible with an obligation assumed by the creditor or with instructions issued by the debtor prior to or upon transfer of the chattel or with public policy.

Art. 897 B. Special lien / III. In the event of insolvency

III. In the event of insolvency

1 In the event of the debtor’s insolvency, the creditor has a special lien even if his or her claim is not yet due.

2 If the insolvency did not occur or become known to the creditor until after transfer of the chattel, the special lien may be exercised even if incompatible with a prior obligation or with a special instruction issued by the debtor.

Art. 898 B. Special lien / IV. Effect

IV. Effect

1 If the debtor is in default and fails to provide sufficient security, the creditor is entitled to realise the retained object in the same manner as a pledged chattel after notifying the debtor.

2 Where retained registered securities are to be realised, the debt enforcement or bankruptcy official must take the necessary steps on the debtor’s behalf.


  Chapter Two: Liens on Debts and Other Rights

Art. 899 A. In general

A. In general

1 Debts or other rights may be pledged provided they are assignable.

2 Unless otherwise provided, a general lien on debts and other rights is regulated by the provisions governing the pledging of chattels.

Art. 900 B. Establishment / I. In the case of ordinary claims

B. Establishment

I. In the case of ordinary claims

1 In order to pledge a debt not evidenced in writing or for which only a borrower’s note exists, the pledge agreement must be executed in writing and, where applicable, the borrower’s note transferred.

2 The pledgee and the pledger may inform the debtor of the pledge.

3 In order to pledge other rights, a written pledge agreement must be drawn up and any form required for the transfer must be observed.

Art. 901 B. Establishment / II. In the case of securities

II. In the case of securities

1 In the case of bearer securities, delivery of the certificate to the pledgee is sufficient to establish the pledge.

2 In the case of other securities, the certificate must be delivered and either endorsed or accompanied by a declaration of assignment.

3 The pledging of intermediated securities is governed exclusively by the Intermediated Securities Act of 3 October 20081.2


1 SR 957.1
2 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the Intermediated Securities Act of 3 Oct. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2010 (AS 2009 3577; BBl 2006 9315).

Art. 902 B. Establishment / III. In the case of documents of title to goods

III. In the case of documents of title to goods

1 Where there are documents of title to goods, the goods may be pledged by pledging the documents.

2 Where a special warrant exists in addition to a document of title to goods, pledging the warrant is sufficient to pledge the goods, provided notice of the pledge including the amount of the debt and the maturity date is entered on the document of title.

Art. 903 B. Establishment / IV. Subordinate pledge

IV. Subordinate pledge

A subordinate pledge of a debt is valid only if the prior ranking pledgee is notified in writing of the subordinate pledge by the creditor or by the subordinate pledgee.

Art. 904 C. Effect / I. Extent of security

C. Effect

I. Extent of security

1 Unless otherwise agreed, a pledge of interest-bearing debts or other debts conferring periodic subsidiary benefits, such as dividends, is limited to the current debt and the creditor is not entitled to payments which have already fallen due.

2 However, where such subsidiary rights are evidenced by separate documents, unless otherwise agreed, they are also covered by pledged to the extent that the pledge has been validly established.

Art. 905 C. Effect / II. Representation of pledged shares and capital contributions to limited liability companies

II. Representation of pledged shares and capital contributions to limited liability companies1

1 Pledged shares are represented at general meetings of shareholders by the shareholder rather than the pledgee.

2 Pledged capital contributions to a limited liability company are represented in the members' general meeting by the member rather than the pledgee.2


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 906 C. Effect / III. Administration and payment

III. Administration and payment

1 If diligent administration so requires, the creditor may give notice to terminate the pledged claim and collect the debt and the pledgee is entitled to request that such procedures be carried out.

2 Once notified of the pledge, the debtor may make payment to either the creditor or the pledgee, but only with the other party’s consent.

3 Where no such consent is forthcoming, he or she must deposit the amount due.


  Chapter Three: Pawnbroking

Art. 907 A. Pawnbrokers / I. Licensing

A. Pawnbrokers

I. Licensing

1 Any person wishing to operate as a pawnbroker requires a licence from the cantonal government.

2 Cantonal law may provide that such licences are granted only to cantonal or communal bodies and charitable organisations.

3 The cantons may levy fees from pawnbrokers.

Art. 908 A. Pawnbrokers / II. Duration of licence

II. Duration of licence

1 A licences is granted to private pawnbrokers for a specific period only, but may be renewed.

2 A licence may be revoked at any time if the pawnbroker fails to comply with the provisions applicable to his or her business.

Art. 909 B. Pawning / I. Establishment

B. Pawning

I. Establishment

A chattel is pawned by delivering it to the pawnbroker against receipt.

Art. 910 B. Pawning / II. Effect / 1. Sale of pawned chattel

II. Effect

1. Sale of pawned chattel

1 If the pawned chattel is not redeemed by the redemption deadline, the pawnbroker may sell it at public auction after making a prior call for redemption.

2 The pawnbroker has no claim against the pledger.

Art. 911 B. Pawning / II. Effect / 2. Right to surplus

2. Right to surplus

1 If the auction proceeds exceed the pawned amount, the pledger is entitled to the surplus.

2 Several claims against the same pledger may be treated as a single claim for the purpose of calculating the surplus.

3 The claim to the surplus prescribes five years after the sale of the pawned chattel.

Art. 912 B. Pawning / III. Redemption of the pawned chattel / 1. Right of redemption

III. Redemption of the pawned chattel

1. Right of redemption

1 Provided it has not yet been sold, the pledger may redeem the pawned chattel against return of the receipt.

2 If the pledger is unable to present the receipt, he or she is entitled to redeem the pawned chattel after the redemption deadline provided he or she establishes his or her entitlement.

3 As of six months after the redemption deadline, the pledger also has such right even where the pawnbroker has expressly reserved the right to release the pawned chattel only against return of the receipt.

Art. 913 B. Pawning / III. Redemption of the pawned chattel / 2. Pawnbroker’s rights

2. Pawnbroker’s rights

1 On redemption the pawnbroker is entitled to charge interest for the full current month.

2 If the pawnbroker has expressly reserved the right to return the pawned chattel to any bearer of the pawn receipt, he or she may do so as long as he or she does not know and could not reasonably be expected to know that the bearer acquired the receipt unlawfully.

Art. 914 C. Purchase with right of repurchase

C. Purchase with right of repurchase

Commercial purchases with right of repurchase are deemed equivalent to pawnbroking.

Art. 915 D. Rules governing pawnbroking

D. Rules governing pawnbroking

1 Cantonal law may issue further regulations governing pawnbroking.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Section II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, with effect from 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).


  Chapter Four: ...

Art. 916–9181

1 Repealed by Art. 52 No 2 of the Mortgage Bond Act of 25 June 1930, with effect from 1 Feb. 1931 (BS 2 747; BBl 1925 III 527).


  Division Three: Possession and the Land Register

  Title Twenty-Four: Possession

Art. 919 A. Definition and types / I. Definition

A. Definition and types

I. Definition

1 Effective control over a thing constitutes possession of it.

2 In the case of easements and real burdens, effective exercise of the right constitutes possession.

Art. 920 A. Definition and types / II. Direct and derivative possession

II. Direct and derivative possession

1 Where the possessor transfers an object to a third party in order to confer on him or her a limited right in rem or a personal right, both are considered to have possession.

2 The owner of the object has direct possession and any other possessor has derivative possession.

Art. 921 A. Definition and types / III. Temporary interruption

III. Temporary interruption

Possession is not lost if the exercise of effective control is impeded or interrupted by occurrences of a temporary nature.

Art. 922 B. Transfer / I. Among parties present in person

B. Transfer

I. Among parties present in person

1 Possession is transferred by the delivery of the object itself or of the means by which the recipient may gain effective control of it.

2 Transfer is complete once the transferee is able to exercise effective control over the object with the consent of the prior possessor.

Art. 923 B. Transfer / II. Among absent persons

II. Among absent persons

Transfer among persons who are absent is completed on delivery of the object to the transferee or his or her representative.

Art. 924 B. Transfer / III. Without physical transfer

III. Without physical transfer

1 Possession of an object may be acquired without physical delivery if a third party or the transferor himself retains possession of it in terms of a special legal relationship.

2 The transfer is not binding on the third party who retains possession of the object until he or she has been notified thereof by the transferor.

3 The third party is entitled to refuse delivery to the acquirer for the same reasons for which he or she could have refused delivery to the transferor.

Art. 925 B. Transfer / IV. In the case of documents of title to goods

IV. In the case of documents of title to goods

1 Delivery of documents of title to goods which have been consigned to a carrier or a warehouse is equivalent to the delivery of the goods themselves.

2 However, where a bona fide acquirer of the document of title to goods is in conflict with a bona fide acquirer of the goods, the latter has priority.

Art. 926 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 1. Defence against interference

C. Legal remedies

I. Protection of possession

1. Defence against interference

1 A possessor has the right to use force in self-defence against any unlawful interference.

2 If he or she has been dispossessed of an object by force or by clandestine means, he or she has the right to recover it immediately by expelling the trespasser from the property or, in the case of a chattel, by taking it from a person caught in the act and pursued immediately.

3 In doing so, he or she must abstain from all force not justified by the circumstances.

Art. 927 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 2. Action for restitution

2. Action for restitution

1 A person who wrongfully dispossesses another of an object is obliged to return it, even if he or she claims a better right to it.

2 If the defendant may immediately show a better right entitling him or her to reclaim the object from the claimant, he or she may refuse to return it.

3 The claim is for restitution of the object plus damages.

Art. 928 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 3. Action for trespass

3. Action for trespass

1 A possessor disturbed by trespass may bring an action against the trespasser even if the latter claims to be in the right.

2 The claim is for cessation of trespass, prohibition of further trespass and damages.

Art. 929 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 4. Admissibility and prescription

4. Admissibility and prescription

1 An action for restitution or trespass is only admissible if the possessor sues for restitution of the object or for cessation of trespass immediately on becoming aware of the interference in his or her rights and the identity of the trespasser.

2 The action prescribes one year after the date of the trespass or dispossession even if the claimant did not become aware of the interference in his or her rights and the identity of the trespasser until a later date.

Art. 930 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 1. Presumption of ownership

II. Remedies

1. Presumption of ownership

1 The possessor of a chattel is presumed to be its owner.

2 Each previous possessor is presumed to have been the owner of the chattel while it was in his or her possession.

Art. 931 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 2. Presumption of indirect ownership

2. Presumption of indirect ownership

1 The possessor of a chattel who does not purport to be its owner may invoke the presumption that the person from whom he or she received it in good faith is the owner.

2 Where a person possessing a chattel invokes a limited right in rem or a personal right, the existence of such a right is presumed, but such presumption cannot be invoked against the person from whom the possessor received the chattel.

Art. 932 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 3. Action against the possessor

3. Action against the possessor

The possessor of a chattel may invoke the presumption of his or her better right in any action brought against him, subject to the provisions governing wrongful dispossession or trespass.

Art. 933 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / a. Entrusted objects

4. Power of disposal and right of restitution

a. Entrusted objects

A person who takes possession of a chattel in good faith in order to become its owner or to acquire a limited right in rem is protected therein even if the chattel was entrusted to the transferor without any authority to effect the transfer.

Art. 934 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / b. Stolen or lost chattels

b. Stolen or lost chattels

1 A possessor whose chattel has been stolen or lost, or who has otherwise been dispossessed of it against his or her will, may reclaim it from any possessor within a period of five years. Article 722 is reserved.1

1bis The right to recover an object of cultural heritage as defined by Article 2 paragraph 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 20032, possession of which has been lost against the owner’s will, prescribes one year after the owner becomes aware of where and by whom such object is being held, but at the latest 30 years after the loss.3

2 If a chattel has been sold at public auction, or on the market, or by a merchant dealing in goods of the same kind, it may be reclaimed from the first and any subsequent bona fide purchaser only against reimbursement of the price paid.

3 In other respects, restitution is subject to the provisions governing possession in good faith.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5086).
2 SR 444.1
3 Inserted by Art. 32 No 1 of the Federal Act on Transfer of Cultural Heritage of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 935 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / c. Cash and bearer securities

c. Cash and bearer securities

Cash and bearer securities cannot be reclaimed from a recipient in good faith even if the possessor was dispossessed of them against his or her will.

Art. 936 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / d. Bad faith

d. Bad faith

1 A person who has not acquired a chattel in good faith may be required by the previous possessor to return it at any time.

2 However, if the previous possessor likewise did not acquire the chattel in good faith, he or she cannot reclaim the chattel from any subsequent possessor.

Art. 937 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 5. Presumption of title to land

5. Presumption of title to land

1 In respect of land recorded in the land register, only the person registered may invoke presumption of title and bring an action for recovery of possession.

2 However, a person who exercises effective control over the land may bring an action for wrongful dispossession or trespass.

Art. 938 C. Legal remedies / III. Liability / 1. Possessor in good faith / a. Use

III. Liability

1. Possessor in good faith

a. Use

1 A person possessing an object in good faith is not liable to its rightful owner for the consequences of using it in accordance with his or her presumed right.

2 He or she is not obliged to replace what has been lost or damaged.

Art. 939 C. Legal remedies / III. Liability / 1. Possessor in good faith / b. Indemnity

b. Indemnity

1 Where the rightful owner requests restitution of an object, the possessor in good faith may request indemnification for any necessary or useful expenditure incurred and may refuse to surrender the object until such indemnification is forthcoming.

2 He or she has no right to indemnification of other expenditure, but where none is proffered, he or she may remove anything for which he or she has incurred cost, provided this may be done without damaging the property.

3 Any fruits collected by a possessor are set off against his or her claim for indemnification.

Art. 940 C. Legal remedies / III. Liability / 2. Possession in bad faith

2. Possession in bad faith

1 A person possessing an object in bad faith must return it to the rightful owner and compensate him or her for any damage resulting from such wrongful possession, including any fruits he or she collected or failed to collect.

2 He or she may claim indemnification only of such expenditure as the rightful owner would also have had to incur.

3 As long as a possessor does not know to whom he or she must surrender the object, he or she is only liable for damage for which he or she is at fault.

Art. 941 C. Legal remedies / IV. Adverse possession

IV. Adverse possession

A possessor fulfilling the requirements of adverse possession may count his or her predecessor’s period of possession as part of his or her own provided his or her predecessor’s possession also qualified as adverse possession.


  Title Twenty-Five: The Land Register

Art. 942 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 1. In general

A. Organisation

I. Constituent parts

1. In general

1 The land register is kept as a record of property rights.

2 It consists of the main register, the plans, property directories, supporting documents and property descriptions appended to the main register, and the journal.

3 The land register may be kept on paper or electronically.1

4 Where the land register is kept electronically, legal effect attaches to such data as are properly stored in the system and legible in letters and figures or displayed on plans by means of the technical capabilities of the devices and equipment used by the land register.2


1 Inserted by Annex 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).
2 Inserted by Annex 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 9431A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 2. Registered data / a. Object

2. Registered data

a. Object

1 The following are recorded in the land register as immovable property:

1.
parcels of land and the buildings thereon;
2.
distinct and permanent rights recorded in the land register;
3.
mines;
4.
co-ownership shares in immovable property.

2 The Federal Council issues detailed regulations governing the prerequisites for and method of registration of distinct and permanent rights, mines and co-ownership shares in immovable property.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 944 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 2. Registered data / b. Exceptions

b. Exceptions

1 Immovable property which is not privately owned and is in public use will be recorded in the land register only if rights in rem attaching to such property are to be registered or if cantonal law provides for its registration.

2 If registered immovable property is transformed into property that is not subject to registration, it is deleted from the land register.

3 ...1


1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immoveable Property Law) and the Code of Obligations (Sale of Immoveable Property), with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 945 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / a. Main Register

3. Registers

a. Main Register

1 Each item of immovable property has its own folio and number in the main register.

2 The procedure to be followed in the event of the division or consolidation of immovable property is determined by Federal Council ordinance.

Art. 946 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / b. Folio

b. Folio

1 The following data is entered in separate sections on each folio:

1.
ownership;
2.
the easements and real burdens established in favour of or encumbering the property;
3.
the liens with which it is encumbered.

2 Accessories may be noted on the folio at the owner’s request and, once noted, may be deleted only with the consent of all such interested parties as are evident from the land register.

Art. 947 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / c. Joint folio

c. Joint folio

1 Two or more parcels of land may be entered on one folio with the owner’s consent, regardless of whether they are contiguous.

2 The entries on such folio are valid for all the land in question with the exception of easements.

3 The owner may at any time request that entries for individual parcels of land be removed from a joint folio, all rights being reserved.

Art. 948 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / d. Journal, supporting documents

d. Journal, supporting documents

1 Applications for entry in the land register are recorded without delay in the journal in chronological order indicating the applicant and the object of his or her request.

2 Supporting documents are duly classified and archived.

3 In cantons where the land registrar is authorised to draw up public deeds, the supporting documents may be replaced by an official record whose entries constitute public deeds.

Art. 949 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / a. In general

4. Implementing ordinances

a. In general1

1 The Federal Council prescribes the land register forms, issues the necessary regulations and regulates at its discretion the keeping of auxiliary registers.

2 The cantons may establish special provisions governing the registration of rights in rem on land under cantonal law, but such provisions become valid only when approved by the Confederation.


1 Amended by No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 949a1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / b. For electronic registers

b. For electronic registers

1 A canton wishing to keep the land register electronically must obtain the approval of the Federal Department of Justice and Police.

2 The Federal Council regulates:

1.
the authorisation procedure;
2.
the scope and technical details of the electronic land register, particularly the procedure by which entries become effective;
3.
whether and on what conditions electronic communication with the land register is permissible;
4.
whether and on what conditions the public will be given access to unrestricted data recorded in the main register;
5.
data access, the logging of retrieval requests and conditions for the withdrawal of user entitlements in the event of abuse;
6.
data protection;
7.
long-term data security and data archiving.

3 The Federal Department of Justice and Police and the Federal Department of Defence, Civil Protection and Sport define data models and standard interfaces for the land register and official land surveys.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land; AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953). Amended by No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 949b1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / 4a. ...

4a. ...


1 Not yet in force (AS 2018 4017).

Art. 949c1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / 4b. ...

4b. ...


1 Not yet in force (AS 2018 4017).

Art. 949d1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4c. Commissioning private individuals to use the electronic version of the land register

4c. Commissioning private individuals to use the electronic version of the land register

1 The cantons which maintain the land register electronically may commission private individuals to:

1.
ensure access to the data in the land register in the retrieval process;
2.
ensure public access to the data of the main register which can be viewed without proof of interest;
3.
to carry out electronic transactions with the land registry.

2 The commissioned individuals are subject to the oversight of the cantons and of the Confederation.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 9501A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 5. Official cadastral survey

5. Official cadastral survey

1 The entry for and description of each parcel of land in the register are based on the official cadastral survey, and in particular on a plan drawn for the land register.

2 The Geoinformation Act of 5 October 20072 regulates the qualitative and technical requirements of the official cadastral survey.


1 Amended by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, in force since 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).
2 SR 510.62

Art. 951 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 1. Districts / a. Allocation to districts

II. Keeping the register

1. Districts

a. Allocation to districts

1 For land register purposes the cantons are divided into districts.

2 Immovable property is entered in the register for the district in which it is situated.

Art. 952 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 1. Districts / b. Land straddling more than one district

b. Land straddling more than one district

1 Immovable property that lies in more than one district is entered in the register of each district, with reference being made to the register of the other districts.

2 Entries which establish rights are to be made in the register of the district in which the largest part of the property is situated.

3 Entries in this land register will be notified by the registrar to the other land registries.

Art. 953 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 2. Land registries

2. Land registries

1 The cantons are responsible for setting up the land registries, the demarcation of the districts, the appointment and remuneration of officials and supervision arrangements.

2 The regulations issued by the cantons, save for those concerning the appointment and remuneration of officials, are subject to approval by the Confederation.1


1 Amended by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 954 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 3. Fees

3. Fees

1 The cantons may levy fees for entry in the land register and for the necessary surveys.

2 No charge may be made for entries relating to land improvements or to land exchanges for the purpose of agricultural consolidation.

Art. 955 A. Organisation / III. Liability

III. Liability1

1 The cantons are liable for any damage arising from the maintenance of the land register.

2 They have a right of recourse against the land register officials and employees and against the immediate supervisory bodies if they are at fault.

3 They may require the officials and employees to provide security.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9561A. Organisation / IV. Administrative supervision

IV. Administrative supervision

1 The management of the land registries is subject to the administrative supervision of the cantons.

2 The Confederation exercises the supervisory control.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 956a1A. Organisation / V. Legal protection / 1. Right of appeal

V. Legal protection

1. Right of appeal

1 A ruling issued by the land registry may be contested before an authority designated by the canton; a ruling includes the unlawful refusal to carry out or delay in carrying out an official act.

2 The following persons are entitled to appeal:

1.
any person who suffers particular prejudice due to a ruling issued by the land registry and who has a legitimate interest in its revocation or amendment;
2.
the cantonal administrative supervisory authority it has a right of appeal under cantonal law;
3.
the federal supervisory authority.

3 No appeal may be brought against an entry, amendment or deletion of rights in rem or priority notices executed in the main register.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 956b1A. Organisation / V. Legal protection / 2. Appeal proceedings

2. Appeal proceedings

1 The period within which an appeal to the cantonal appellate authorities must be filed amounts to 30 days.

2 Where the land registry refuses to carry out or delays in carrying out a specific official act, however, an appeal may be filed at any time.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9571

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 958 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 1. Ownership and rights in rem

B. Registration

I. Land register entries

1. Ownership and rights in rem

The following rights to immovable property are recorded in the land register:

1.
ownership;
2.
easements and real burdens;
3.
liens.
Art. 959 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / a. Personal rights

2. Priority notices

a. Personal rights

1 Personal rights may be entered under priority notice in the land register where such notices are expressly provided for by law, as is the case for a right of pre-emption, right of repurchase, right of purchase, usufructuary lease and tenancy.

2 By virtue of being entered under priority notice, they may be invoked against any rights subsequently acquired.

Art. 960 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / b. Restrictions on powers of disposal

b. Restrictions on powers of disposal

1 Restrictions on powers of disposal may be entered under priority notice for individual parcels of land if they result from:

1.
an official order made to secure disputed or enforceable claims;
2.1
a distraint order;
3.2
a case in which entry under priority notice is envisaged by law, such as a remainderman’s expectancy.

2 On entry under priority notice, the restrictions on powers of disposal become effective against all subsequently acquired rights.


1 Amended by Annex No 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1997 (AS 1995 1227; BBl 1991 III 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the Federal Act of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 961 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / c. Provisional entries

c. Provisional entries

1 Provisional entries may be made in the land register:

1.
in order to secure asserted rights in rem;
2.
in the cases where the law permits the applicant to complete his or her application.

2 They are made either with the consent of all interested parties or by court order and the right, provided it is later confirmed, becomes effective in rem as of the date of the provisional entry.

3 The court rules on the application and, provided the applicant satisfies the court of his or her entitlement, approves the provisional entry, precisely specifying its nature, duration and effect and, where necessary, setting a time limit within which the applicant must bring an action to assert his or her rights.1


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 961a1B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / d. Entry of subordinate rights

d. Entry of subordinate rights

A priority notice in the land register does not preclude the registration of a right with a subordinate rank.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 9621B. Registration / II. Noting / 1. Restrictions under public law

II. Noting

1. Restrictions under public law

1 The state authority or another public body must arrange for a public law restriction on ownership ordered in respect of a specific property that imposes a permanent restriction on use or power of disposal or duty relating to the property on the owner to be noted in the land register.

2 Where the restriction on ownership ceases to apply, the state authority or the other public body must arrange for the note to be deleted from the land register. If the state authority or the other public body fails to act, the land register may delete the note ex officio.

3 The Federal Council shall stipulate the areas of cantonal law in which restrictions on ownership must be noted in the land register. The cantons may provide for additional notes. They shall draw up a list of circumstances requiring a note, which must be passed on to the Confederation.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 962a1B. Registration / II. Noting / 2. Of representatives

2. Of representatives

The following may be noted in the land register:

1.
the statutory representative at his or her request or at the request of the competent authority;
2.
the estate administrator, the representative of the heirs, the official liquidator and the executors at their request or at the request of the heirs or the competent authority;
3.
the representative of an owner, charge creditor or easement beneficiary whose whereabouts are unknown at his or her request or at the request of the court;
4.
the representative of a legal entity or other rights holder in the absence of the required management body at his or her request or at the request of the court;
5.
the administrator of a condominium association at his or her request or at the request of the condominium owners meeting or of the court.

1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 963 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 1. Applications / a. For an entry

III. Requirements for entry

1. Applications

a. For an entry

1 Entries in the land register are based on a written declaration by the owner of the immovable property to which the entry relates.

2 No declaration by the owner is required where the acquirer may rely on a provision of the law, a final court judgment or a document having effect equal to that of a court judgment.

3 The officials authorised to execute public deeds may be instructed by the cantons to notify the transactions certified by such deeds for entry in the land register.

Art. 964 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 1. Applications / b. For a deletion

b. For a deletion

1 Amendment or deletion of an entry in the land register requires an declaration in writing by the person whose entitlement results from the entry.

2 Such application may be made by signing the journal.

Art. 965 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 2. Authority / a. Valid proof of authority

2. Authority

a. Valid proof of authority

1 A disposition in the land register, such as an entry, amendment or deletion, may be made only on the basis of documents establishing the right to make such disposition and its legal basis.

2 Authority to request a disposition is established by proof that the applicant is the person entitled by virtue of the entry in the land register or has been duly vested with a power of attorney by said person.

3 The legal basis for the requested disposition is established by proof that the formal requirements have been observed.

Art. 966 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 2. Authority / b. Completion of application

b. Completion of application

1 Where the documentation required for a disposition in the land register is not forthcoming, the application is rejected.

2 However, provided the legal basis is established and the application lacks only certain documents, a provisional entry may be made with the owner’s consent or by court order.

Art. 967 B. Registration / IV. Manner of entry / 1. In general

IV. Manner of entry

1. In general

1 The entries in the main register are made in the order in which applications are received or in which certifications and declarations are signed by the land registrar.

2 Interested parties will be provided on request with an extract of the entry.

3 The formal requirements for entries, deletions and extracts are regulated by the Federal Council.

Art. 968 B. Registration / IV. Manner of entry / 2. For easements

2. For easements

Easements are entered and deleted on the folios of both the dominant and servient properties.

Art. 969 B. Registration / V. Duty to notify

V. Duty to notify

1 The registrar must notify interested parties of all dispositions in the land register made without their knowledge; he or she shall, in particular, notify any acquisition of ownership by a third party to parties with rights of pre-emption which are entered under priority notice in the land register or to parties with rights which exist by law and are evident from the land register.1

2 The time limit for challenging such dispositions begins on receipt of such notification.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 9701C. Public nature of land register / I. Information and right of consultation

C. Public nature of land register

I. Information and right of consultation

1 Any person showing a legitimate interest is entitled to consult the land register or to be provided with an extract.

2 A person is entitled to obtain the following information from the main register without showing a legitimate interest:

1.
the name and description of the immovable property;
2.
the name and identity of the owner;
3.
the form of ownership and the date of acquisition.

3 The Federal Council shall specify other particulars of easements, real burdens and notices in the register which may be made public without the need to show a legitimate interest. It shall pay due regard to the protection of personal privacy.

4 An objection based on ignorance of a land register entry is inadmissible.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 970a1C. Public nature of land register / II. Publication

II. Publication

1 The cantons may provide that all acquisitions of immovable property be published.

2 They may not publish the consideration involved in a division of estate, an advance against a person’s share of an inheritance, a marital agreement or a liquidation of marital property.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land; AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 971 D. Effect / I. Need for an entry

D. Effect

I. Need for an entry

1 Where the establishment of a right in rem is subject to entry in the land register, such right has effect in rem only if it has been entered.

2 Within the limits of such entry, the scope of a right may be established by supporting documents or in some other manner.

Art. 972 D. Effect / II. Effect of entry / 1. In general

II. Effect of entry

1. In general

1 Rights in rem are established and assigned their rank and date by virtue of being entered in the main register.

2 The entry has retroactive effect as of its recording in the journal, provided the supporting documents required by law are included with the application or, in the case of provisional entries, are submitted in good time.

3 In cantons where the registrar draws up public deeds by means of an entry in an official record of title, such a record constitutes entry in the journal.

Art. 973 D. Effect / II. Effect of entry / 2. In relation to third parties acting in good faith

2. In relation to third parties acting in good faith

1 Any person who, relying in good faith on an entry in the land register, has acquired property or any other right in rem in reliance thereon, is protected in such acquisition.

2 This rule does not apply to boundaries of land in areas designated by the cantons as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 974 D. Effect / II. Effect of entry / 3. In relation to third parties acting in bad faith

3. In relation to third parties acting in bad faith

1 If the entry of a right in rem is unwarranted, a third party who is or ought to be aware thereof may not rely on the entry.

2 An entry is unwarranted if it is without legal basis or was made on the basis of an invalid transaction.

3 A person whose rights in rem are infringed by such an entry may invoke its defectiveness directly against the third party acting in bad faith.

Art. 974a1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / I. Revision / 1. On the division of property

E. Deletion and amendment of entries

I. Revision

1. On the division of property

1 If a property is divided, the easements, priority notices and notes for each divided part must be revised.

2 The owner of the property being divided must advise the land registry which entries to delete and which to transfer to the divided parts. If this is not done, the application must be rejected.

3 Where an entry according to the supporting documents or the circumstances does not relate to a divided part, it must be deleted. The procedure is governed by the regulations on the deletion of an entry.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 974b1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / I. Revision / 2. In the case of the consolidation of parcels of land

2. In the case of the consolidation of parcels of land

1 Two or more parcels of land belonging to one owner may only be consolidated if no mortgage rights or real burdens have to be transferred from the individual parcels to the consolidated property or if the creditor consents.

2 If easements, priority notices or notes encumbering the property must be recorded, they may be consolidated only if the beneficiaries consent or if their rights are not prejudiced due to the nature of the encumbrance.

3 If easements, priority notices or notes benefiting the property real estate must be recorded, they may only be consolidated if the owner of the servient property consents or if the encumbrance is not increased by consolidation.

4 The provisions on revision on the division of property apply by analogy.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 975 E. Deletion and amendment of entries / II. Unwarranted entries

II. Unwarranted entries1

1 Where an entry of a right in rem is unwarranted or a correct entry has been deleted or modified in an unwarranted manner, any person whose rights in rem are thereby infringed may bring an action for deletion or amendment of the entry.

2 Rights in rem acquired in good faith by third parties relying on the entry and claims for damages are reserved.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9761E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 1. Clearly insignificant entries

III. Simplified deletion

1. Clearly insignificant entries

The land register may delete an entry ex officio if the entry:

1.
is limited in time and has lost its legal significance as it has expired;
2.
relates to a non-assignable or non-heritable right of a deceased person;
3.
cannot affect the property due to the local situation;
4.
relates to a property that no longer exists.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976a1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 2. Other entries / a. In general

2. Other entries

a. In general

1 If an entry in all probability has no legal importance, in particular because according to the supporting documents or the circumstances it does not relate to the property, then any person encumbered may request its deletion.

2 If the land registry regards the request as justified, it shall inform the beneficiary that it will delete the entry unless he or she files an objection with land registry within 30 days.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976b1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 2. Other entries / b. On objection

b. On objection

1 If the beneficiary files an objection, the land registry shall reassess the request for deletion at the request of the encumbered person.

2 If the land registry concludes that the request should be granted despite the objection, it shall notify the beneficiary that it will delete the entry from the main register unless the beneficiary brings a court action to declare that the entry is of legal significance.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976c1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 3. Public revision procedure

3. Public revision procedure

1 If conditions have changed in fact or law in a specific area and as a result a large number of easements, priority notices or notes have completely or largely lapsed or if the situation can no longer be determined, the authority designated by the canton may order a revision in this area.

2 This order must be noted in the corresponding land register folios.

3 The cantons shall regulate the details and the procedure. They may further simplify the revision procedure or issue regulations that deviate from federal law.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 977 E. Deletion and amendment of entries / IV. Corrections E. Deletion and amendment of entries / IV. Corrections

IV. Corrections1

1 Unless the interested parties consent in writing, the land registrar may correct the register only in accordance with a court order.

2 Instead of correcting an unwarranted entry, the registrar may delete it and make a new one.

3 The land registrar may correct typographical errors of his or her own accord in accordance with regulations to be issued by the Federal Council.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

  Final Title: Commencement and Implementing Provisions1 

  Chapter One: Application of Former and New Law2 

Art. 1 A. General provisions / I. General rule of non-retroactive effect

A. General provisions

I. General rule of non-retroactive effect

1 When this Code comes into force, the legal effects of circumstances which occurred previously remain subject to those provisions of federal or cantonal law which were applicable when the circumstances occurred.

2 Accordingly, the legally binding nature and consequences of acts which took place before the commencement hereof remain subject to the law which was applicable at the time.

3 However, circumstances occurring after the commencement hereof are subject to the new law, unless this Code provides otherwise.

Art. 2 A. General provisions / II. Retroactive effect / 1. Public policy and good morals

II. Retroactive effect

1. Public policy and good morals

1 The provisions of this Code specifically enacted in the interests of public policy and good morals apply when it comes into force to all circumstances, unless this Code provides otherwise.

2 Accordingly, provisions of the previous law which under the new law are deemed to contravene public policy and good morals cease to apply when the new law comes into force.

Art. 3 A. General provisions / II. Retroactive effect / 2. Relationships defined by law

2. Relationships defined by law

When this Code comes into force, legal relationships whose content is defined by law irrespective of the will of the parties concerned are subject to the new law, even if previously such relationships were valid.

Art. 4 A. General provisions / II. Retroactive effect / 3. Non-vested rights

3. Non-vested rights

The legal effects of circumstances which occurred while the previous law was still in force and which enjoy no protection under the new law are subject to the latter once it has come into force.

Art. 5 B. Law of persons / I. Capacity to act

B. Law of persons

I. Capacity to act

1 Capacity to act shall be assessed in all cases in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

2 However, any person who has the capacity to act under the previous law when this Code comes into force but who would not have the capacity to act under the new law will also be recognised as having the capacity to act when this Code comes into force.

Art. 6 B. Law of persons / II. Presumed death

II. Presumed death

1 The declaration of presumed death becomes subject to the new law when this Code comes into force.

2 When this Code comes into force, declarations of death or absence under the previous law have the same effects as a declaration of presumed death under the new law, but the consequences that have occurred under the previous law prior to this Code coming into force, such as succession or dissolution of marriage, remain valid.

3 Proceedings ongoing when the new law comes into force shall be restarted in accordance with the provisions of this Code, taking account of the time that has elapsed, or, if requested by the parties, concluded in accordance with the previous procedure, respecting the previous deadlines.

Art. 6a1B. Law of persons / IIa. Central civil register database

IIa. Central civil register database

1 The Federal Council regulates the transition from the former procedure for keeping the civil register to the electronic civil register.

2 The Confederation assumes the capital investment costs up to an amount of 5 million francs.


1 Inserted by No 1 of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 6b1B. Law of persons / III. Legal entities / 1. In general

III. Legal entities

1. In general2

1 Associations of persons and institutions or foundations that had acquired legal personality under the previous law, retain their personality under the new law even where they would not acquire legal personality under the new law.

2 Existing legal entities that require to be entered in the public register in accordance with this Code must register within five years of the commencement of the new law even if no provision was made for registration under the previous law and are no longer recognised as legal entities on expiry of this time limit.

2bis Religious foundations and family foundation that are not entered in the commercial register when the Amendment of 12 December 2014 (Art. 52 para. 2) comes into force continue to be recognised as legal entities. They must be entered in the commercial register within five years of the Amendment coming into force. The Federal Council shall take the special circumstances of religious foundations into account when determining the requirements for entry in the commercial register.3

3 The status of the legal personality of all legal entities is determined by the new law as soon as this Code comes into force.


1 Originally Art. 6a. Previously Art. 7.
2 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 12 Dec. 2014 on the Implementation of the 2012 Revision of the Recommendations of the Financial Action Task Force, in force since 1 Jan. 2016 (AS 2015 1389; BBl 2014 605).

Art. 6c1B. Law of persons / III. Legal entities / 2. Accounting and auditors

2. Accounting and auditors

The provisions of the Amendment of 16 December 20052 relating to accounting and auditors apply from first financial year that begins on or after the commencement of this Code.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969

Art. 6d1B. Law of persons / IV. Protection of the individual against violence, threats or stalking

IV. Protection of the individual against violence, threats or stalking

The new law applies to proceedings that are already pending when the amendment of 14 December 2018 comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 14 Dec. 2018 on Improving the Protection given to Victims of Violence, in force since 1 July 2020 (AS 2019 2273; BBl 2017 7307).

Art. 71C. Family law / I. Marriage

C. Family law

I. Marriage

1 The new law applies to marriage as soon as the Federal Act of 26 June 19982 has come into force.

2 Marriages subject to grounds for annulment under the previous law may, once the new law has come into force, only be annulled under the new law. However the period that has lapsed before this date will be taken into account in determining time limits.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7a1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 1. Principle

Ibis. Divorce

1. Principle

1 Divorce proceedings are governed by the new law as soon as the Federal Act of 26 June 19982 has come into force.

2 Divorces that had taken full legal effect under the previous law remain valid; the new provisions on enforcement apply to periodic maintenance payments or lump sum settlement that are fixed as an alternative to maintenance or as a maintenance contribution.

3 Any amendment of the divorce decree is carried out in accordance with the previous law with the exception of the provisions on children and procedural matters.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7b1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 2. Pending divorce proceedings

2. Pending divorce proceedings

1 The new law applies to divorce proceedings that are pending on the commencement of the Federal Act of 26 June 19982 and which must be judged by a cantonal authority.

2 New legal requests that are required due to the change in the applicable law are permitted; uncontested parts of the judgment remain binding, unless they are materially so closely connected with the requests that remain to be judged that it makes sense to reassess the entire case

3 The Federal Supreme Court decides in accordance with the previous law in cases where the contested judgment was issued before the commencement of the Federal Act of 26 June 1998; this also applies if the case is referred back to the cantonal authority.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7c1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 3. Period of separation for pending divorce proceedings

3. Period of separation for pending divorce proceedings

For divorce proceedings that are pending on commencement of the Amendment of 19 December 20032 and must be judged by a cantonal authority, the period of separation under the new law applies.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 (Period of Separation under Divorce Law), in force since 1 June 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).
2AS 2004 2161

Art. 7d1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 4. Occupational pension

4. Occupational pension

1 The new law on occupational pensions on divorce applies as soon as the amendment of 19 June 2015 comes into force.

2 The new law applies to divorce cases pending before a cantonal court at the time when the amendment of 19 June 2015 comes into force.

3 When the contested decision was made before the amendment of 19 June 2015 came into force, the Federal Supreme Court shall decide under previous law; this also applies when a case is referred back to the cantonal court.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 7e1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 5. Conversion of existing pensions

5. Conversion of existing pensions

1 If on divorce under the previous law the court, when deciding on the equitable division of pensions, has awarded compensation to the entitled spouse in the form of a pension that terminates on the death of the liable or the entitled spouse, the entitled spouse may, within one year of the amendment of 19 June 2015 coming into force, demand that he or she be granted a life-long pension in accordance with Article 124a instead, should the liable spouse draw an old-age pension or an invalidity pension after the commencement of the statutory pension age.

2 In the case of decisions made abroad, jurisdiction is determined by Article 64 of the Federal Act of 18 December 19872 on International Private Law.

3 Any pension payments already made under previous law are considered part of the pension awarded.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 291

Art. 81C. Family law / Iter. Effects the marriage in general / 1. Principle

Iter. Effects the marriage in general

1. Principle

For the effects of the marriage in general, the new law applies as soon as the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 has come into force.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 8a1C. Family law / Iter. Effects the marriage in general / 2. Surname

2. Surname

A spouse who changed his or her name on marriage before the amendment to this Code of 30 September 2011 came into force may declare to the civil registrar at any time that he or she wishes to use his or her name before marriage again.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 8b1C. Family law / Iter. Effects the marriage in general / 3. Citizenship

3. Citizenship

A Swiss woman who married under the previous law may within one year of the new law coming into force declare to the competent authority of her former canton of origin that she wishes to retain the citizenship that she held as a single woman.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 91C. Family law / II. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted before 1 January 1912

II. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted before 1 January 19122

The legal effects on marital property of marriages contracted before 1 January 1912 are governed by the provisions of the Civil Code on the application of the previous and new law that came into force on that day.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 For the application of the transitional law, see also the previous provisions of the Sixth Title at the end of the Civil Code.

Art. 9a1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 1. In general

IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 19122

1. In general

1 The new law applies to marriages that exist when the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force, unless otherwise provided.

2 The legal effects on marital property of marriages that were dissolved before the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 came into force are governed by the previous law.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 See the provisions applicable until 31 Dec. 1987 at the end of this text.

Art. 9b1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property / a. Change to the bodies of assets

2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property

a. Change to the bodies of assets

1 Spouses who have hitherto been subject to a union of property regime are now subject to the regulations on participation in acquired property in relation to each other and to third parties.

2 The assets of each spouse become his or her own property or acquisitions in accordance with the regulations on participation in acquired property; separate property in terms of a marital agreement becomes personal assets.

3 The wife reclaims the property she brought into the marriage that became her husband's property or makes a claim for compensation.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9c1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property / b. Preferential right

b. Preferential right

In the event of the husband's bankruptcy and the distraint of his assets, the previous provisions on the wife's right to compensation in respect of property that she has brought into the marriage and which is no longer available continue to apply for ten years after the new law comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9d1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property / c. Division of marital property under the new law

c. Division of marital property under the new law

1 After the new law comes into force, the division of marital property between the spouses is governed for the entire duration of the previous and the new statutory marital property regime by the regulations on participation in acquired property, unless the spouses have completed the division of marital property in accordance with the provisions on union of property at the time when the new law comes into force.

2 Before the new law comes into force, either spouse may give written notice to the other that the current marital property regime of union of property must be dissolved in accordance with the previous law.

3 If the marital property regime is dissolved because an action filed before the new law comes into force is upheld, the division of marital property is governed by the previous law.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9e1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 3. Retention of the union of property regime

3. Retention of the union of property regime

1 Spouses subject to the statutory marital property regime of union of property who have not changed this marital property regime by marital agreement may by one year at the latest after the new law comes into force elect to retain the union of property regime by filing a joint written declaration with the marital property register office at their domicile; the marital property register office shall maintain a register of such declarations that anyone may inspect.

2 The marital property regime may only be cited in opposition to a third party if that third party is or should be aware of it.

3 The new regulations on the separation of property apply in future to the spouses' separate property.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9f1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 4. Retention of separation of property by operation of law or by court order

4. Retention of separation of property by operation of law or by court order

In the case of a separation of property established by operation of the law or by court order, the spouses are subject to the new provisions on the separation of property.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 101C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / a. In general

5. Marital agreement

a. In general

1 If the spouses have entered into a marital agreement in accordance with the Civil Code, this marital agreement continues to apply and their entire marital property regime continues to be governed by the previous law, subject to the reservation of the provisions of this Title on separate property, legal effect on third parties and the contractual separation of property.

2 The new regulations on the separation of property apply in future to the spouses' separate property.

3 Agreements on participation in a surplus or deficit in the case of a union of property regime must not adversely affect the statutory inheritance entitlements of children who are not the common issue of the spouses or those of the issue of such children.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10a1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / b. Legal effect in relation to third parties

b. Legal effect in relation to third parties

1 The marital property regime may only be cited in opposition to a third party if that third party is or should be aware of it.

2 If the marital property agreement has no legal effect in relation to third parties, the provisions on participation in acquired property apply from now on in relation to such parties.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10b1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / c. Application of the new law

c. Application of the new law

1 Spouses subject to a union of property regime who have changed this marital property regime by marital agreement may by one year at the latest after the new law comes into force elect to make their legal rights subject to the new statutory marital property regime of participation in acquired property by filing of a joint written declaration with marital property register office at their domicile.

2 In this event, contractual participation in the surplus shall in future apply to the total amount of the surplus of both spouses, unless a marital property agreement provides otherwise.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10c1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / d. Contractual separation of property according to previous law

d. Contractual separation of property according to previous law

If the spouses agreed to a separation of property under the previous law, they are subject in future to the new provisions on the separation of property.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10d1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / e. Marital agreements concluded with a view to the new law coming into force

e. Marital agreements concluded with a view to the new law coming into force

Marital agreements concluded before the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force but which are intended to take effect only under the new law do not require the approval of the child protection authority.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10e1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / f. Register of marital property

f. Register of marital property

1 After the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force, no further entries will be made in the register of marital property.

2 The right to inspect the register continues to apply.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 111C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 6. Repayment of debts in the case of separation of assets under the law of marital property

6. Repayment of debts in the case of separation of assets under the law of marital property

If a separation of assets under the law of marital property in connection with the new law coming into force causes serious difficulties for a spouse who is liable to pay debts or the replace property that is due, he or she may request additional time to pay; the debt must be secured if this is justified by the circumstances.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 11a1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 7. Protection of creditors

7. Protection of creditors

If the marital property rights change when the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force, the provisions on the protection the creditors in the event of a change in the marital property regime govern liability.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 121C. Family law / III. The parent-child relationship in general

III. The parent-child relationship in general

1 As soon as this Code comes into force, the establishment and effects of the parent-child relationship are governed by the new law; the surname and the citizenship acquired under previous law are retained.

2 Children who are subject to parental authority by operation of the new law but who are under guardianship when the new law comes into force must be placed under parental authority no later than one year after that date unless the contrary was ordered under the provisions on the withdrawal of parental of authority.

3 A transfer or withdrawal of parental authority officially ordered under the previous law remains effective after the new law comes into force.

4 When the Amendment of 21 June 2013 comes into force, if parental responsibility is assigned to only one parent, the other parent may within one year of this Amendment coming into force request the competent authority to order joint parental responsibility. Article 298b applies mutatis mutandis.2

5 A parent whose parental responsibility is revoked on divorce may file a request with the competent court only if the divorce was decreed less than five years before the Amendment of 21 June 2013 comes into force.3


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 12a1C. Family law / IIIbis. Adoption / 1. Continuation of the previous law

IIIbis. Adoption

1. Continuation of the previous law

1 An adoption pronounced before the new provisions of the Federal Act of 30 June 1972 on the Amendment of the Swiss Civil Code come into force continues to be governed by the law that came into force on 1 January 19122; consents validly given in accordance with this law remain effective in every case.

2 Persons who are not yet 20 years old when the Federal Act of 7 October 1994 comes into force may still be adopted in accordance with the provisions on minority after attaining majority provided the application is filed within two years of the Federal Act coming into force and of their 20th birthday.3


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Art. 465 Civil Code in the version of 1 Jan. 1912: 1 An adoptive child and his or her issue have the same rights of succession in respect of the adoptive parents as the issue of their marriage. 2 Adoptive parents and their blood relatives have no rights of succession in respect of an adoptive child.
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 12b1C. Family law / IIIbis. Adoption / 2. Pending proceedings

2. Pending proceedings

The new law applies to adoption procedures pending at the time the amendment of 17 June 2016 comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12c1C. Family law / IIIbis. Adoption / 3. Application of the new law

3. Application of the new law

The provisions of the amendment of 17 June 2016 on the confidentiality of adoption information, on information about the biological parents and their direct descendants and on the possibility of arranging contact between the biological parents and the child also apply to adoptions which are granted prior to the amendment coming into force or which are pending at the time it comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12cbis1

1 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Convention on Adoption and on Measures to Protect Children in International Adoption Cases (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795). Repealed by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), with effect from 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12d1C. Family law / IIIter. Contesting a declaration of legitimacy

IIIter. Contesting a declaration of legitimacy

The contesting of a declaration of legitimacy made under the previous law is governed by analogy by the provisions of the new laws on the contesting of recognition following the parents' marriage.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 131C. Family law / IV. Paternity actions / 1. Pending actions

IV. Paternity actions

1. Pending actions

1 Actions pending when the new law comes into force are judged in accordance with the new law.

2 The effects until the new law comes into force are determined by the previous law.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 13a1C. Family law / IV. Paternity actions / 2. New actions

2. New actions

1 If a pecuniary obligation on the father's part is established by court decision or by contract before the new law comes into force, and if the child has not yet reached the age of ten when the new law comes into force, the child may within two years bring an action under the provisions of the new law to have the parent-child relationship declared.

2 If the Defendant proves that he or she is not the father or is less likely to be the father than another person, the right to claim future maintenance lapses.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 13b1C. Family law / IVbis. Time limit for declaring or challenging the parent-child relationship

IVbis. Time limit for declaring or challenging the parent-child relationship

Any person who attains majority due to the Federal Act of 7 October 1994 coming into force may in any case file an action within one year to declare or challenge the parent-child relationship.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 13c1C. Family law / IVter. Maintenance contributions / 2. Pending proceedings

IVter. Maintenance contributions

1. Existing maintenance titles

The child may apply for the revision of any maintenance payments set in an approved maintenance agreement or in a decision before the amendment of 20 March 2015 came into force. If they were set at the same time as maintenance payments to one of the parents, payments shall only be revised if there has been a substantial change in circumstances.

Art. 13cbis2

2. Pending proceedings

1 The new legislation applies to proceedings that are pending at the time of the amendment of 20 March 2015 coming into force.

2 When the contested decision was made before the amendment of 20 March 2015 came into force, the Federal Supreme Court shall decide under the previous law; this also applies when a case is referred back to the cantonal court.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169). Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 13d1C. Family law / IVquater. Name of the child

IVquater. Name of the child

1 If after the amendment to this Code of 30 September 2011 comes into force the parents on the basis of a declaration under Article 8a of this Title no longer have the same surname, they may declare within one year of the new law coming into force that their children will take the surname before marriage of the parent who made the declaration.

2 If the parental responsibility of a child of parents who are not married to each other is transferred to both parents or the father alone before the amendment to this Code of 30 September 2011 comes into force, the declaration provided for in Article 270a paragraphs 2 and 3 may be made within one year of the new law coming into force.

3 In accordance with Article 270b, this shall be subject to the child's consent.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 141C. Family law / V. Adult protection / 1. Existing measures

V. Adult protection

1. Existing measures

1 The new law governs adult protection as soon as the Amendment of 19 December 20082 comes into force.

2 Persons who have been made wards of court under the previous law shall be made subject to a general deputyship under the new law. The adult protection authority shall adapt to the new law as soon as possible. Unless the authority has decided otherwise in the case of extended parental responsibility, parents are exempt from the obligation to prepare an inventory, report and file accounts regularly and to obtain consent for certain transactions.

3 Other measures ordered under the previous law cease to apply three years after the Amendment of 19 December 2008 comes into force unless the adult protection authority transforms them into a measure under the new law.

4 Where a doctor based on Article 397b paragraph 2 in its version of 1 January 19813 ordered the care-related detention of a mentally ill person, this measure shall continue to apply. The relevant institution shall notify the adult protection authority six months at the latest after the new law comes into force whether it regarded the requirements for hospitalisation to be met. The adult protection authority shall carry out the required enquiries in accordance with the provisions on regular review and if applicable confirm the hospitalisation decision.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2AS 2011 725
3 AS 1980 31

Art. 14a1C. Family law / V. Adult protection / 2. Pending proceedings

2. Pending proceedings

1 Pending proceedings shall be continued by the new competent authority after the Amendment of 19 December 20082 comes into force.

2 The new procedural law applies.

3 The authority shall decide whether and to what extent the previous proceedings require to be amended.


1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 6 Oct. 1978 (AS 1980 31; BBl 1977 III 1). Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2AS 2011 725

Art. 15 D. Succession law / I. Heirs and succession

D. Succession law

I. Heirs and succession

1 The succession rights and the related and inseparable effects on marital property under cantonal law of the death of a father, a mother or a spouse are determined, provided the deceased dies before this Code comes into force, by the previous law.

2 The foregoing applies both to heirs and to succession.

Art. 16 D. Succession law / II. Testamentary dispositions

II. Testamentary dispositions

1 The making or revocation of a testamentary disposition carried out before this Code comes into force, if done by a person subsequently deceased who had testamentary capacity under the law that applied at the time, may not be contested on the grounds that the deceased died following the commencement of the new law and would not have had testamentary capacity under its provisions.

2 A testamentary disposition may not be contested due to a formal defect if it complies with the provisions on form that applied when it was made or at the time of death.

3 The contesting of a disposition on the grounds that the testator exceeded his or her testamentary freedom or due to the nature of the disposition is governed in the case of all testamentary dispositions by the provisions of the new law if the deceased died after the commencement of this Code.

Art. 17 E. Property law / I. Rights in rem in general

E. Property law

I. Rights in rem in general

1 Rights in rem existing when this Code comes into force continue to be recognised under the new law subject to the reservation of the regulations on the land register.

2 However, the scope of rights of ownership and restricted rights in rem is subject to the new law after this Code comes into force unless the Code provides otherwise.

3 Rights that can no longer be created under the new law remain subject to the previous law.

Art. 18 E. Property law / II. Right to entry in the land register

II. Right to entry in the land register

1 Rights to create a right in rem that were established before this Code comes into force are recognised as valid provided they correspond to the form required by the former or the new law.

2 The ordinance on maintaining the land register determines what documentary proof is required for the registration of such rights.

3 The scope of a right in rem established before this Code comes into force by a legal transaction remains recognised under the new law, provided it is compatible with the same.

Art. 19 E. Property law / III. Adverse possession

III. Adverse possession

1 Adverse possession is governed by the new law after this Code comes into force.

2 If however adverse possession recognised under the new law has begun under the previous law, the time that elapsed before this Code comes into force is taken into account in the calculating the period of adverse possession.

Art. 201E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 1. Trees on another person's land

IV. Special rights of ownership

1. Trees on another person's land

1 Existing rights of ownership in relation to trees on another person's land continue to be recognised under cantonal law.

2 The cantons shall have the power to limit or revoke these conditions.


1 Amended by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20bis1E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 2. Condominium / a. Original

2. Condominium

a. Original

Condominium governed by the former cantonal law is subject to the new provisions of this Code even if the storeys or parts of storeys are not divided into self-contained dwellings or business units.


1 Inserted by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20ter1E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 2. Condominium / b. Converted

b. Converted

1 The cantons may also make condominium recorded in the land register in forms that accord with the law that came into force on 1 January 1912 subject to the new regulations on condominium.

2 The new law becomes effective when the corresponding amendment is made to the entries in the land register.


1 Inserted by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20quater1E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 2. Condominium / c. Correction of the land registers

c. Correction of the land registers

In order to make the converted condominium subject to the new regulations and to register existing condominium, the cantons may order the correction of the land registers and issue special procedural regulations for this purpose.


1 Inserted by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 21 E. Property law / V. Easements

V. Easements

1 The easements created before this Code comes into force remain valid following the introduction of the land register even if not registered, but until registered may not be enforced against third parties acting in good faith.

2 Obligations ancillary to easements that were established before the amendment of 11 December 20091 came into force and which are based solely on land register supporting documents may continue to be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1AS 2011 4637
2 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 22 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 1. Recognition of the existing document of title

VI. Mortgage rights

1. Recognition of the existing document of title

1 Documents of title existing when this Code comes into force remain in force without having to be adapted to the new law.

2 The cantons have the right to require new versions of existing documents of title to be drawn up on the basis of the new law within specific time limits.

Art. 23 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 2. Creation of liens

2. Creation of liens

1 After this Code comes into force, new mortgage rights may only be created in the forms recognised herein.

2 Until the introduction of the land register, the previous cantonal legal forms for their creation remain valid.

Art. 24 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 3. Repayment of securities

3. Repayment of securities

1 The repayment and modification the title, release from liability under a lien and suchlike are subject to the new provisions following the commencement of the new law.

2 However, until the introduction of the land register, the forms are governed by cantonal law.

Art. 25 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 4. Extent of liability under the lien

4. Extent of liability under the lien

1 In the case of all mortgage rights, the extent of liability under the lien is determined by the new law.

2 However, if by virtue of a special agreement the creditor has validly received certain objects with the property pledged, the lien continues to apply to these objects even if they could not be pledged under the new law.

Art. 26 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage / a. In general

5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage

a. In general

1 The rights and obligations of the creditor and of the debtor in relation to the contractual effect of liens existing when this Code comes into force are governed by the previous law.

2 In relation to effects that arise by operation of the law which cannot be modified contractually, the new law also applies to existing liens.

3 If the lien applies to two or more parcels of land, liability under the lien continues to be governed by the previous law.

Art. 27 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage / b. Rights to security

b. Rights to security

The rights of the lien creditor during the existing legal relationship, such as rights to security, and the rights of the debtor are governed by the new law in relation to all liens from the time at which this Code comes into force.

Art. 28 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage / c. Termination, transfer

c. Termination, transfer

For liens existing when this Code comes into force, the termination of the secured debts and the transfer the document of title are governed by the previous law, subject to the reservation of the mandatory provisions of the new law.

Art. 29 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 6. Ranking

6. Ranking

1 Until the introduction of the land register, the ranking of liens is governed by the previous law.

2 Following the introduction of the land register, the ranking of creditors is governed by the land register law contained in this Code.

Art. 30 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 7. Ranking positions

7. Ranking positions

1 In relation to a fixed ranking position or the right of a creditor to claim a vacant position or an advancement in ranking, the new law applies on the introduction of the land register and in every case from five years after this Code comes into force, subject to the reservation of creditors' existing special claims.

2 The cantons may enact further transitional provisions.1


1 Amended by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Legislation by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 31 and 321E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 8. ...

8. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 33 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 9. Equal status of previous forms of lien with those under the new law

9. Equal status of previous forms of lien with those under the new law

1 The cantonal implementing legislation may stipulate that in general or in a specific legal relationship a form of mortgage under the previous law shall be regarded as equivalent to a form of mortgage under the new law.

2 If this occurs, the provisions of this Code also apply to such cantonal liens from the date on which the Code comes into force.

3 ...1


1 Repealed by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Legislation by the Confederation (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 33a1E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 10. Continued application of previous law to existing forms of lien

10. Continued application of previous law to existing forms of lien

1 Land charge certificates and mortgage certificates issued in series remain recorded in the land register.

2 They remain governed by the provisions of the previous law.

3 Cantonal law may provide for the conversion of land charge certificates created under federal law or earlier law into forms of lien under the current law. Conversion may also involve the introduction of personal liability for the owner of the mortgaged property for minor sums.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 33b1E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 11. Conversion the form of the mortgage certificate

11. Conversion the form of the mortgage certificate

The landowner and the mortgage certificate creditors may jointly request in writing that a mortgage certificate on paper recorded before the amendment of 11 December 20092 comes into force be converted into a register mortgage certificate.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2AS 2011 4637

Art. 34 E. Property law / VII. Charges on chattels / 1. Provisions on form

VII. Charges on chattels

1. Provisions on form

1 From the date on which the Code comes into force, charges on chattels may only be created in the forms provided for herein.

2 Where a charge on chattels has been created in another form before this time, it is extinguished after a period of six months which begins to run if the debt is due for payment from the date on which the new law comes into force and in other cases from the date on which it becomes due for payment or when termination is permitted.

Art. 35 E. Property law / VII. Charges on chattels / 2. Effect

2. Effect

1 The effects of the charge on chattels, the rights and obligations of the pledgee, of the pledger and of the pledge debtor are governed from the date on which this Code comes into force by the new law, even if the charge was created before that date.

2 An agreement stipulating that the pledged chattel will become the property of the pledgee in the event of default on the part of the debtor that is concluded before this Code comes into force ceases to be valid from that date.

Art. 36 E. Property law / VIII. Special lien

VIII. Special lien

1 A special lien under this Code also extends to objects that were subject to the power of disposal of the creditor before this Code comes into force.

2 It may also be exercised by the creditors in respect of claims that originated before this date.

3 The effect of special liens originating at an earlier date is subject to the provisions of this Code.

Art. 37 E. Property law / IX. Possession

IX. Possession

When this Code comes into force, possession becomes subject to the new law.

Art. 38 E. Property law / X. Land register / 1. Establishment of the land register

X. Land register

1. Establishment of the land register

1 After consulting the cantons, the Federal Council shall draw up a plan for the introduction of the land register. It may delegate this responsibility to the competent department or office.1

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, in force since 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).
2 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 391E. Property law / X. Land register / 2. Official cadastral survey / a. ...

2. Official cadastral survey

a. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817)

Art. 40 E. Property law / X. Land register / 2. Official cadastral survey / b. Relation to the land register

b. Relation to the land register

1 As a general rule, the surveying should precede the establishment of the land register.

2 With consent of the Confederation, however, the land register may be established beforehand if adequate descriptions of the properties are available.

Art. 41 E. Property law / X. Land register / 2. Official cadastral survey / c. Time schedule

c. Time schedule

1 ...1

2 The surveying and the introduction of the land register may be carried out successively for the individual districts of a canton.


1 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 October 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 421

1 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 October 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 43 E. Property law / X. Land register / 3. Registration of rights in rem / a. Procedure

3. Registration of rights in rem

a. Procedure

1 On the introduction of the land register, rights in rem that already exist shall be recorded in the register.

2 For this purpose, an announcement must be made to the public requesting them to give notice of and register these rights.

3 Rights in rem registered under the previous law in public books shall, provided they may be created under the new law, be entered ex officio in the land register.

Art. 44 E. Property law / X. Land register / 3. Registration of rights in rem / b. Consequences of non-registration

b. Consequences of non-registration

1 Rights in rem under the previous law that are not registered remain valid but may not be cited in opposition to third parties who rely in good faith on the land register.

2 The Confederation or the cantons may however enact legislation to have all rights in rem that are not recorded in the land register declared invalid after a specific date subject to prior notice.

3 Unregistered public law real burdens and statutory liens under cantonal law created before the amendment of 11 December 20091 comes into force may for a period of ten years from the date on which the amendment comes into force be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1AS 2011 4637
2 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 451E. Property law / X. Land register / 4. Abolished rights

4. Abolished rights

1 Rights in rem that may no longer be established under the land register law such as the ownership of trees on another person's land, liens on usufructs and suchlike are not recorded in the land register but must be noted in an appropriate manner.

2 If such rights have lapsed for whatever reason, they may not be re-established.


1 Amended by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 46 E. Property law / X. Land register / 5. Postponement in the introduction of the land register

5. Postponement in the introduction of the land register

1 The introduction of the land register in accordance with the provisions of this Code may be postponed by the cantons with the authorisation of the Federal Council provided the cantonal provisions on forms of notice, with or without amendments appear to be sufficient to guarantee the effects that the new law requires of the land register.

2 The forms of notice under cantonal law that are intended to guarantee the effects required by the new law must be precisely specified.

Art. 47 E. Property law / X. Land register / 6. Introduction of the property law before the land register

6. Introduction of the property law before the land register

The property law under this Code in general comes into force even if the land registers have not been established.

Art. 48 E. Property law / X. Land register / 7. Effect of cantonal forms

7. Effect of cantonal forms

1 When the property law comes into force and before the introduction of the land register, the cantons may designate the procedures, such those for drawing up documents or registration in the registers for land, liens and servitudes, that will immediately have the effect of being recorded in the land register.

2 Even without or before the introduction of the land register, it may be provided that these procedures have the same effect as being recorded in the land register in the case of the creation, transfer, modification and extinction of rights in rem.

3 However, in the event that the land register itself is not introduced or another equivalent institution established, these procedures do not have the same effect as being recorded in the land register in relation to third parties relying thereon in good faith.

Art. 491F. Prescription

F. Prescription

1 Where the new law specifies a longer period than the previous law, the new law applies, provided prescription has not yet taken effect under the previous law.

2 Where the new law specifies a shorter period, the previous law applies.

3 The entry into force of the new law does not change the date on which an ongoing prescriptive period began, unless the law provides otherwise.

4 Otherwise, the new law governs prescription from the time it comes into force.


1 Amended by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 50 G. Forms of contract

G. Forms of contract

Contracts concluded before this Code comes into force remain valid even if their form is not in accordance with the provisions of the new law.


  Chapter Two: Introductory and Transitional Provisions

Art. 51 A. Repeal of cantonal civil law

A. Repeal of cantonal civil law

On commencement of the Civil Code, cantonal civil law provisions are repealed unless federal law provides otherwise.

Art. 52 B. Supplementary cantonal provisions / I. Rights and duties of the cantons

B. Supplementary cantonal provisions

I. Rights and duties of the cantons

1 The cantons shall enact the provisions required to supplement the Civil Code, including in particular those governing the competent authorities1 and the establishment of civil registries, guardianship authorities and land registries.

2 The cantons shall enact any such supplementary provisions as are required to implement the Civil Code and may do so provisionally in the form of ordinances.2

3 Cantonal provisions on register law require federal approval.3

4 Notice of cantonal provisions on other matters must be given to the Federal Office of Justice.4


1 Presently the Adult protection authority (see Art. 440).
2 Amended by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Inserted by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333). Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 53 B. Supplementary cantonal provisions / II. Substitute ordinances

II. Substitute ordinances

1 Where a canton has failed to enact the necessary provisions in time, the Federal Council shall provisionally enact substitute ordinances and notify the Federal Assembly.

2 Where a canton refrains from exercising its powers in respect of matters for which supplementary legislation is not indispensable, the provisions of the Civil Code remain applicable.

Art. 54 C. Designation of competent authorities

C. Designation of competent authorities

1 Where the Civil Code makes reference to a competent authority, the cantons shall designate such authority, be it existing or yet to be created.

2 Where the Civil Code does not make express reference to a court or an administrative authority, the cantons may designate either as the competent authority.

3 Unless the Civil Procedure Code of 19 December 20081 applies, the cantons regulate proceedings.2


1 SR 272
2 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 55 D. Public deeds / I. In general

D. Public deeds

I. In general1

1 The cantons shall regulate the manner in which public deeds are drawn up on their territory.

2 They enact provisions for the drawing up of public deeds in foreign languages.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 55a1D. Public deeds / II. Electronic copies and legalisations

II. Electronic copies and legalisations

1 The cantons may authorise the authenticating officials to make electronic copies of the public deeds that they issue.

2 They may also authorise the authenticating officials to certify electronically that the electronic copies that they create correspond to the original documents on paper and that the signatures are genuine.

3 The authenticating official must use a qualified electronic signature based on a qualified certificate from a recognised provider of certification services in accordance with the Federal Act of 18 March 20162 on Electronic Signatures.3

4 The Federal Council shall issue implementing provisions that guarantee the interoperability of computer systems and the integrity, authenticity and security of the data.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 SR 943.03
3 Amended by Annex No II 3 of the FA of 18 March 2016 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 4651; BBl 2014 1001).

Art. 561E. Allocation of water rights

E. Allocation of water rights

Until such time as federal law regulates the allocation of water rights, the following provision applies:

Rights to public waters may be recorded in the land register as distinct and permanent rights, provided they have been granted for at least 30 years or indefinitely and are not allocated to a dominant property in the form of an easement.


1 See current Art. 59 of the FA of 22 Dec. 1916 on Exploitation of Water Resources (SR 721.80).

Art. 571F.–H. ...

F.–H. ...


1 Repealed by Art. 53 para. 1 item b of the FA of 8 Nov. 1934 on Banks and Savings Banks, with effect from 1 March 1935 (AS 51 117; BS 10 337; BBl 1934 I 171).

Art. 581J. Debt enforcement and bankruptcy

J. Debt enforcement and bankruptcy

When this Code comes into force, the Federal Act of 11 April 18892 on Debt enforcement and Bankruptcy is amended as follows:

...3


1 Last four articles renumbered owing to revocation of the original Art. 58 and 59, in accordance with No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 SR 281.1
3 For text, see the federal act referred to. For the wording of Art. 132bis, 141 para. 3 and 258 para. 4, see AS 24 233 Final Title Art. 60.

Art. 591K. Application of Swiss and foreign law

K. Application of Swiss and foreign law

1 The Federal Act of 25 June 18912 on the Civil Law Status of Immigrants and Temporary Residents remains in force in respect of the legal status of Swiss nationals abroad and of foreigners in Switzerland and insofar as different laws apply in the cantons.

2 ...3

3 The following provisions are inserted in the Federal Act of 25 June 1891:

Art. 7a–7i

...


1 Last four articles renumbered owing to revocation of the original Art. 58 and 59, in accordance with No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 [BS 2 737; AS 1972 2819 II 1, 1977 237 II 1, 1986 122 II 1. AS 1988 1776 Annex No I para. a]. See current IPLA of 18 Dec. 1987 (SR 291).
3 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 601L. Repeal of federal civil law

L. Repeal of federal civil law

1 When this Code comes into force, any provisions of federal civil law which contradict it are repealed.

2 In particular, the following are repealed: the Federal Act of 24 December 18742 on the Determination and Documentation of Civil Status and Marriage; the Federal Act of 22 June 18813 on Personal Capacity to Act; the Federal Act of 14 June 18814 on the Code of Obligations.

3 The special acts concerning the railways, steamships, the post, telegraph and telephone services, the seizure and compulsory liquidation of railways, the laws relating to factory employment and liability arising from the operation of factories and other enterprises, and all federal laws on matters governed by the Code of Obligations which have been enacted to supplement the Federal Act of 14 June 1881 on the Code of Obligations, remain in force.


1 Amended by No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 [AS 1 506]
3 [AS 5 556]
4 [AS 5 635, 11 490; BS 2 784 Art. 103 para. 1]

Art. 611M. Final Provision M. Final Provision

M. Final Provision

1 This Code comes into force on 1 January 1912.

2 Subject to the Federal Assembly’s approval, the Federal Council is authorised to declare individual provisions effective at an earlier date.


1 Last four articles renumbered owing to revocation of the original Art. 58 and 59, in accordance with No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

  Text of the Previous Provisions1  of Title Six

  Title Six: Marital Property Law


1 BS 2 3. These provisions apply as transitional law insofar as provided by Art. 9a ff. Final Title (Revision of Marital Law of 5 Oct. 1984). The provisions have not been translated into English.

  Table of Contents

A. Application of the law Art. 1

I. Acting in good faith Art. 2

II. Good faith Art. 3

III. Judicial discretion Art. 4

I. Cantonal civil law and local custom Art. 5

II. Cantonal public law Art. 6

D. General provisions of the Code of Obligations Art. 7

I. Burden of proof Art. 8

II. Proof by public document Art. 9

Repealed Art. 10

I. Legal capacity Art. 11

1. Nature Art. 12

2. Requirements

a. In general Art. 13

b. Majority Art. 14

c. ... Art. 15

d. Capacity of judgement Art. 16

1. In general Art. 17

2. Lack of capacity of judgement Art. 18

3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act.

a. Principle Art. 19

b. Consent of the legal representative Art. 19a

c. Absence of consent Art. 19b

4. Strictly personal rights Art. 19c

IIIbis. Restriction of the capacity to act Art. 19d

1. Blood kinship Art. 20

2. Kinship by marriage Art. 21

1. Origin Art. 22

2. Domicile

a. Definition Art. 23

b. Change of domicile, temporary residence Art. 24

c. Domicile of minors Art. 25

d. Persons in institutions Art. 26

I. Against excessive restriction Art. 27

1. Principle Art. 28

2. Actions

a. In general Art. 28a

b. Violence, threats or harassment Art. 28b

3. ... Art. 28c–28f

4. Right of reply

a. Principle Art. 28g

b. Form and content Art. 28h

c. Procedure Art. 28i

d. Publication Art. 28k

e. Recourse to the courts Art. 28l

1. Protection of one’s name Art. 29

2. Change of name

a. General Art. 30

b. On the death of a spouse Art. 30a

I. Birth and death Art. 31

1. Burden of proof Art. 32

2. Evidence

a. In general Art. 33

b. Presumption of death Art. 34

1. In general Art. 35

2. Procedure Art. 36

3. Failure of application Art. 37

4. Effect Art. 38

I. In general Art. 39

II. Duty to notify Art. 40

III. Proof of undisputed information Art. 41

1. By court order Art. 42

2. By the register authorities Art. 43

V. Data protection and disclosure Art. 43a

1. Civil registrars Art. 44

2. Supervisory authorities Art. 45

Ia. Central civil information system Art. 45a

II. Liability Art. 46

III. Disciplinary measures Art. 47

I. Federal law Art. 48

II. Cantonal law Art. 49

Repealed Art. 50 and 51

A. Legal personality Art. 52

B. Legal capacity Art. 53

I. Requirements Art. 54

II. Action on behalf of the legal entity Art. 55

D. Seat Art. 56

I. Application of assets Art. 57

II. Liquidation Art. 58

F. Reservation of public law and company law Art. 59

I. Corporate group of persons Art. 60

II. Entry in the commercial register Art. 61

III. Associations lacking legal personality Art. 62

IV. Relationship between articles of association and the law Art. 63

1. Function, convening of meetings Art. 64

2. Powers Art. 65

3. Resolutions

a. Form Art. 66

b. Voting rights and majority Art. 67

c. Exclusion from voting Art. 68

1. Rights and duties in general Art. 69

2. Accounting Art. 69a

III. Auditors Art. 69b

IV. Organisational defects Art. 69c

I. Admission, resignation Art. 70

II. Duty to pay subscriptions Art. 71

III. Exclusion Art. 72

IV. Status of former members Art. 73

V. Protection of the objects of the association Art. 74

VI. Protection of members Art. 75

Cbis. Liability Art. 75a

1. By resolution Art. 76

2. By operation of law Art. 77

3. By court order Art. 78

II. Deletion from the commercial register Art. 79

I. In general Art. 80

II. Form of establishment Art. 81

III. Challenge Art. 82

I. In general Art. 83

II. Bookkeeping Art. 83a

1. Duty of audit and applicable law Art. 83b

2. Supervisory authority Art. 83c

IV. Organisational defects Art. 83d

C. Supervision Art. 84

Cbis. Measures in the event of overindebtedness and insolvency Art. 84a

Art. 84b

I. Reorganisation Art. 85

1. Request by the supervisory authority or the board of trustees Art. 86

2. At the founder’s request or in accordance with his testamentary disposition Art. 86a

III. Minor amendments to the charter Art. 86b

E. Family and ecclesiastical foundations Art. 87

I. Dissolution by the competent authority Art. 88

II. Right to apply for dissolution, deletion from the register Art. 89

G. Employee benefits schemes Art. 89a

A. No management Art. 89b

B. Jurisdiction Art. 89c

A. Betrothal Art. 90

I. Gifts Art. 91

II. Duty to contribute Art. 92

III. Prescription Art. 93

A. Capacity to marry Art. 94

I. Kinship Art. 95

II. Previous marriage Art. 96

A. General principles Art. 97

Abis. Circumvention of the legislation on foreign nationals Art. 97a

I. Request Art. 98

II. Conduct and completion of the preparatory procedure Art. 99

III. Time limit Art. 100

I. Venue Art. 101

II. Form Art. 102

D. Implementing provisions Art. 103

A. General principle Art. 104

I. Grounds Art. 105

II. Action for annulment Art. 106

I. Grounds Art. 107

II. Action for annulment Art. 108

D. Effects of judgment Art. 109

Repealed Art. 110

I. Comprehensive agreement Art. 111

II. Partial agreement Art. 112

Repealed Art. 113

I. After living apart Art. 114

II. Irretrievable breakdown Art. 115

Repealed Art. 116

A. Requirements and procedure Art. 117

B. Effects of separation Art. 118

A. Civil status of divorced spouses Art. 119

B. Marital property law and inheritance law Art. 120

C. Family home Art. 121

I. Principle Art. 122

II. Equitable division of termination benefits Art. 123

III. Equitable division of invalidity pension prior to statutory retirement age Art. 124

IV. Equitable division in the case of invalidity pensions after statutory retirement age and in the case of retirement pensions Art. 124a

V. Exceptions Art. 124b

VI. Offset of mutual entitlements Art. 124c

VII. Unreasonableness Art. 124d

VIII. Impossibility Art. 124e

I. Requirements Art. 125

II. Modalities of maintenance contributions Art. 126

1. Special terms Art. 127

2. Adjustment for inflation Art. 128

3. Adjustment by court order Art. 129

4. Expiry by law Art. 130

1. Enforcement assistance Art. 131

2. Advance payments Art. 131a

3. Directions to debtors and posting security Art. 132

I. Parental rights and obligations Art. 133

II. Change of circumstances Art. 134

Repealed Art. 135–158

A. Marital union; rights and duties of spouses Art. 159

B. Surname Art. 160

C. Cantonal and communal citizenship Art. 161

D. Marital home Art. 162

I. In general Art. 163

II. Allowance for personal use Art. 164

III. Extraordinary contributions by one spouse Art. 165

F. Representation of the marital union Art. 166

G. Spouses’ career or business Art. 167

I. In general Art. 168

II. Family home Art. 169

J. Duty to inform Art. 170

I. Counselling agencies Art. 171

1. In general Art. 172

2. While living together

a. Financial contributions Art. 173

b. Revocation of powers of representation Art. 174

3. Suspension of joint household

a. Grounds Art. 175

b. Arrangements for living apart Art. 176

4. Enforcement

a. Enforcement assistance and advance payments Art. 176a

b. Directions to debtors Art. 177

5. Restriction of power to dispose of assets Art. 178

6. Change of circumstances Art. 179

Repealed Art. 180

A. Ordinary property regime Art. 181

I. Choice of regime Art. 182

II. Capacity to enter into an agreement Art. 183

III. Form of the agreement Art. 184

1. By court order Art. 185

2. ... Art. 186

3. Revocation Art. 187

1. Bankruptcy Art. 188

2. Distraint

a. By court order Art. 189

b. Request Art. 190

3. Revocation Art. 191

III. Liquidation of the previous marital property regime Art. 192

D. Protection of creditors Art. 193

E. ... Art. 194

F. Management of one spouse’s assets by the other Art. 195

G. Inventory Art. 195a

I. Categories Art. 196

II. Acquired property Art. 197

1. By operation of law Art. 198

2. By marital agreement Art. 199

IV. Proof Art. 200

B. Management, benefits and power of disposal Art. 201

C. Liability toward third parties Art. 202

D. Debts between spouses Art. 203

I. Time of dissolution Art. 204

1. In general Art. 205

2. Participation in increased value Art. 206

1. Separation of acquired property and individual property Art. 207

2. Additions Art. 208

3. Compensation operations between acquired property and individual property Art. 209

4. Surplus Art. 210

1. Market value Art. 211

2. Capitalised value

a. In general Art. 212

b. Special circumstances Art. 213

3. Defining juncture Art. 214

1. By law Art. 215

2. By agreement

a. In general Art. 216

b. On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by court order Art. 217

1. Deferred payment Art. 218

2. Home and household effects Art. 219

3. Claims against third parties Art. 220

I. Categories Art. 221

1. General community of property Art. 222

2. Limited community of property

a. Community restricted to acquired property Art. 223

b. Further community of property regimes Art. 224

III. Individual property Art. 225

IV. Proof Art. 226

1. Everyday housekeeping Art. 227

2. Extraordinary housekeeping Art. 228

3. Use of common property for professional or business purposes Art. 229

4. Renunciation and acceptance of inheritances Art. 230

5. Liability and management costs Art. 231

II. Individual property Art. 232

I. Full liability Art. 233

II. Individual liability Art. 234

D. Debts between spouses Art. 235

I. Time of dissolution Art. 236

II. Allocation to individual property Art. 237

III. Compensation operations between joint and individual property Art. 238

IV. Participation in increased value Art. 239

V. Valuation Art. 240

1. On death or implementation of a different marital property regime Art. 241

2. In other cases Art. 242

1. Individual property Art. 243

2. Home and household effects Art. 244

3. Other assets Art. 245

4. Further provisions Art. 246

I. In general Art. 247

II. Proof Art. 248

B. Liability toward third parties Art. 249

C. Debts between spouses Art. 250

D. Allocation of property in co-ownership Art. 251

A. Formation of parent-child relationship in general Art. 252

B. ... Art. 253

Repealed Art. 254

A. Presumption Art. 255

I. Right to challenge Art. 256

1. In the case of conception in wedlock Art. 256a

2. In the case of conception before marriage or while spouses were living apart Art. 256b

III. Time limits Art. 256c

C. Conflict of presumptions Art. 257

D. Challenge by the parents Art. 258

E. Marriage of the parents Art. 259

I. Admissibility and form Art. 260

1. Right to challenge Art. 260a

2. Grounds Art. 260b

3. Time limits Art. 260c

I. Right to bring the action Art. 261

II. Presumption Art. 262

III. Time limits Art. 263

I. General requirements Art. 264

II. Joint adoption Art. 264a

III. Adoption by a single person Art. 264b

IV. Adoption of a stepchild Art. 264c

V. Difference in age Art. 264d

VI. Consent of the child and the child protection authority Art. 265

1. Form Art. 265a

2. Time of consent Art. 265b

3. Dispensing with consent

a. Requirements Art. 265c

b. Decision Art. 265d

B. Adoption of an adult Art. 266

I. In general Art. 267

II. Name Art. 267a

III. Citizenship Art. 267b

I. In general Art. 268

II. Investigation Art. 268a

III. Hearing for the child Art. 268abis

IV. Representation for the child Art. 268ater

V. Taking account of the attitude of family members Art. 268aquater

Dbis.Confidentiality of adoption information Art. 268b

Dter. Information on the adoption, the biological parents and their issue Art. 268c

Dquater. Cantonal information centre and tracing services Art. 268d

Dquinquies. Contact with the biological parents Art. 268e

1. Lack of consent Art. 269

2. Other defects Art. 269a

II. Time limits Art. 269b

F. Adoption agency services Art. 269c

I. Child of married parents Art. 270

II. Child of unmarried parents Art. 270a

III. Consent of the child Art. 270b

B. Citizenship Art. 271

C. Support and common welfare Art. 272

1. Principle Art. 273

2. Restrictions Art. 274

II. Third parties Art. 274a

III. Responsible authorities Art. 275

E. Right to information Art. 275a

I. Object and scope Art. 276

II. Precedence of maintenance for minors Art. 276a

B. Duration Art. 277

C. Married parents Art. 278

I. Right to sue Art. 279

II. and III. ... Art. 280–284

1. Parents’ contribution Art. 285

2. Other payments for maintenance of the child Art. 285a

1. In general Art. 286

2. Shortfalls Art. 286a

I. Regular payments Art. 287

II. Scope of a maintenance agreement Art. 287a

III. Final settlement Art. 288

I. Entitlement Art. 289

1. Enforcement assistance Art. 290

2. Directions to debtors Art. 291

III. Security Art. 292

G. Public law Art. 293

H. Foster parents Art. 294

J. Rights of the unmarried mother Art. 295

A. Principles Art. 296

Abis. Death of a parent Art. 297

Ater. Divorce and other marital proceedings Art. 298

I. Joint declaration by the parents Art. 298a

II. Decision of the child protection authority Art. 298b

III. Paternity action Art. 298c

IV. Change in circumstances Art. 298d

Aquinquies. Change in the situation after the adoption of a stepchild in a cohabitation relationship Art. 298e

Asexies. Step-parents Art. 299

Asepties. Foster parents Art. 300

I. In general Art. 301

II. Deciding on the place of residence Art. 301a

III. Upbringing Art. 302

IV. Religious upbringing Art. 303

1. In relation to third parties

a. In general Art. 304

b. Child’s legal status Art. 305

2. Within the family community Art. 306

I. Appropriate measures Art. 307

II. Deputyship Art. 308

Repealed Art. 309

III. Revocation of the right to decide on place of residence Art. 310

1. Ex-officio Art. 311

2. With the parents' consent Art. 312

V. Change in circumstances Art. 313

1. General Art. 314

2. Hearing for the child Art. 314a

3. Representation for the child Art. 314abis

4. Committal to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital Art. 314b

5. Right to notify Art. 314c

6. Duty to notify Art. 314d

7. Cooperation and administrative assistance Art. 314e

1. In general Art. 315

2. In marital proceedings

a. Jurisdiction of the court Art. 315a

b. Amendment of court orders Art. 315b

VIII. Supervision of foster children Art. 316

IX. Cooperation in youth support Art. 317

A. Management Art. 318

B. Use of income Art. 319

C. Drawing on the child’s assets Art. 320

I. Endowments Art. 321

II. Statutory entitlement Art. 322

III. Employment income, professional and business assets Art. 323

I. Appropriate measures Art. 324

II. Withdrawal of management Art. 325

I. Return of property Art. 326

II. Liability Art. 327

A. Principle Art. 327a

I. Of the child Art. 327b

II. Of the guardian Art. 327c

A. Persons obliged to lend assistance Art. 328

B. Scope and enforcement of the claim for assistance Art. 329

C. Maintenance of foundlings Art. 330

A. Requirement Art. 331

I. House rules and welfare Art. 332

II. Liability Art. 333

1. Requirements Art. 334

2. Asserting claims Art. 334bis

A. Family foundations Art. 335

1. Authority Art. 336

2. Form Art. 337

II. Duration Art. 338

1. Type of ownership Art. 339

2. Management and representation

a. In general Art. 340

b. Manager's powers Art. 341

3. Common property and personal property Art. 342

1. Grounds Art. 343

2. Notice, insolvency, marriage Art. 344

3. Death of a co-owner Art. 345

4. Division Art. 346

1. Nature Art. 347

2. Special grounds for dissolution Art. 348

Repealed Art. 349–359

A. Principle Art. 360

I. Execution Art. 361

II. Revocation Art. 362

C. Decision on effectiveness and acceptance Art. 363

D. Interpretation and clarification Art. 364

E. Fulfilment Art. 365

F. Remuneration and expenses Art. 366

G. Termination Art. 367

H. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 368

I. Regaining the capacity of judgement Art. 369

A. Principle Art. 370

B. Execution and revocation Art. 371

C. Loss of capacity of judgement Art. 372

D. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 373

A. Requirements for and extent of the right to act as representative Art. 374

B. Exercise of the right to act as representative Art. 375

C. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 376

A. Treatment plan Art. 377

B. The representative Art. 378

C. Urgent cases Art. 379

D. Treatment of a mental disorder Art. 380

E. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 381

A. Care agreement Art. 382

I. Requirements Art. 383

II. Records and Information Art. 384

III. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 385

C. Protection of privacy Art. 386

D. Supervision of residential and care institution Art. 387

A. Aim Art. 388

B. Subsidiarity and proportionality Art. 389

A. Requirements Art. 390

B. Scope of responsibilities Art. 391

C. Dispensing with a deputyship Art. 392

A. Assistance deputyship Art. 393

I. In general Art. 394

II. Asset management Art. 395

C. Advisory deputyship Art. 396

D. Combination of deputyships Art. 397

E. General deputyship Art. 398

Art. 399

I. General requirements Art. 400

II. Wishes of the client or his or her closely associated persons Art. 401

III. Appointment of two or more persons Art. 402

B. Incapacity and conflict of interests Art. 403

C. Remuneration and expenses Art. 404

A. Assumption of office Art. 405

B. Relationship with the client Art. 406

C. Client's autonomy Art. 407

I. Tasks Art. 408

II. Personal allowance Art. 409

III. Accounts Art. 410

E. Reporting Art. 411

F. Special transactions Art. 412

G. Duties of care and confidentiality Art. 413

H. Amendment of conditions Art. 414

A. Examination of accounts and report Art. 415

I. By law Art. 416

II. By order Art. 417

III. Lack of consent Art. 418

Art. 419

Art. 420

A. By law Art. 421

I. At the deputy's request Art. 422

II. Other cases Art. 423

C. Continuation of transactions Art. 424

D. Final report and final accounts Art. 425

I. Hospitalisation for treatment or care Art. 426

II. Detention of persons admitted voluntarily Art. 427

I. Adult protection authority Art. 428

1. Responsibility Art. 429

2. Procedures Art. 430

C. Regular review Art. 431

D. Authorised representative Art. 432

I. Treatment plan Art. 433

II. Treatment without consent Art. 434

III. Emergencies Art. 435

IV. Pre-discharge interview Art. 436

V. Cantonal law Art. 437

F. Measures restricting freedom of movement Art. 438

G. Petition to the court Art. 439

A. Adult protection authority Art. 440

B. Supervisory authority Art. 441

C. Local jurisdiction Art. 442

A. Notification rights and obligations Art. 443

B. Verification of jurisdiction Art. 444

C. Precautionary measures Art. 445

D. Procedural principles Art. 446

E. Hearing Art. 447

F. Obligations to cooperate and administrative assistance Art. 448

G. Assessment in an institution Art. 449

H. Appointment of a representative Art. 449a

I. Inspection of files Art. 449b

J. Notification duty Art. 449c

A. Object and right of appeal Art. 450

B. Grounds of appeal Art. 450a

C. Deadline for filing the appeal Art. 450b

D. Suspensive effect Art. 450c

E. Consultation with the lower instance and reconsideration Art. 450d

F. Special provisions in the case of care-related hospitalisation Art. 450e

Art. 450f

Art. 450g

A. Duty of confidentiality and information Art. 451

B. Effect of the measures on third parties Art. 452

C. Duty of cooperation Art. 453

A. Principle Art. 454

B. Prescription Art. 455

C. Liability under agency law Art. 456

I. Issue Art. 457

II. Parental line Art. 458

III. Grandparental line Art. 459

IV. Scope of succession rights Art. 460

Art. 461

B. Surviving spouses and registered partners Art. 462

Repealed Art. 463–464

C... Art. 465

D. State authority Art. 466

A. Wills Art. 467

B. Contract of succession Art. 468

C. Voidable dispositions Art. 469

I. Scope of testamentary powers Art. 470

II. Statutory entitlement Art. 471

III. ... Art. 472

IV. Dispositions in favour of the spouse Art. 473

1. Deduction of debts Art. 474

2. Inter vivos gifts Art. 475

3. Insurance claims Art. 476

I. Grounds Art. 477

II. Effect Art. 478

III. Burden of proof Art. 479

IV. Disinheritance of an insolvent person Art. 480

A. In general Art. 481

B. Burdens and conditions Art. 482

C. Naming of heirs Art. 483

I. Nature Art. 484

II. Duty on the obligor of the legacy Art. 485

III. Relationship to the estate Art. 486

E. Substitution Art. 487

I. Designation of a remainderman Art. 488

II. Time of delivery Art. 489

III. Security Art. 490

1. Of the provisional heir Art. 491

2. Of the remainderman Art. 492

V. Issue lacking capacity of judgement Art. 492a

G. Foundations Art. 493

I. Contracts naming heirs and making legacies Art. 494

1. Significance Art. 495

2. Void renunciation Art. 496

3. Rights of the creditors of the estate Art. 497

1. In general Art. 498

2. By public deed

a. Formal requirements Art. 499

b. Role of the public official Art. 500

c. Role of the witnesses Art. 501

d. Drawing up a will without the testator reading and signing it Art. 502

e. Persons involved Art. 503

f. Safekeeping of wills Art. 504

3. Holographic will Art. 505

4. Oral will

a. Dispositions Art. 506

b. Conversion into deed Art. 507

c. Loss of validity Art. 508

1. Revocation Art. 509

2. Destruction Art. 510

3. Subsequent wills Art. 511

I. Execution Art. 512

1. Inter vivos

a. By contract and by will Art. 513

b. By withdrawal from the contract Art. 514

2. Predeceased heir Art. 515

C. Restriction of testamentary freedom Art. 516

A. Appointment of executors Art. 517

B. Function of an executor Art. 518

I. On grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, lack of free will, unlawfulness or immorality Art. 519

1. In general Art. 520

2. In holographic wills Art. 520a

III. Prescription Art. 521

1. In general Art. 522

2. Bequests in favour of heirs with a statutory entitlement Art. 523

3. Rights of creditors Art. 524

1. Of abatement in general Art. 525

2. On specific legacies Art. 526

3. On dispositions inter vivos

a. Cases Art. 527

b. Restitution Art. 528

4. On assurance claims Art. 529

5. On usufruct and annuities Art. 530

6. On naming of remaindermen Art. 531

III. Order of abatement Art. 532

IV. Prescription Art. 533

A. Claims in respect of lifetime transfers Art. 534

I. Abatement Art. 535

II. Reimbursement Art. 536

A. Requirements for the deceased Art. 537

B. Place where succession commences Art. 538

1. Legal capacity Art. 539

2. Unworthiness to inherit

a. Grounds Art. 540

b. Effect on issue Art. 541

1. As heir Art. 542

2. As legatee Art. 543

3. Unborn child Art. 544

4. Remaindermen Art. 545

1. Devolution against security Art. 546

2. Annulment of presumption of death and restitution Art. 547

II. Succession rights of persons presumed dead Art. 548

III. Correlation of the two cases Art. 549

IV. Procedure ex officio Art. 550

A. In general Art. 551

B. Sealing the estate Art. 552

C. Inventory Art. 553

I. In general Art. 554

II. In the case of unknown heirs Art. 555

I. Duty to submit the will Art. 556

II. Reading the will Art. 557

III. Notification of interested parties Art. 558

IV. Release of the estate Art. 559

I. Heirs Art. 560

II. ... Art. 561

1. Vesting Art. 562

2. Object Art. 563

3. Relationship between creditors and legatees Art. 564

4. Abatement Art. 565

1. Right to renounce Art. 566

2. Time limit

a. In general Art. 567

b. In the case of an inventory Art. 568

3. Passing of right to disclaim Art. 569

4. Form Art. 570

II. Forfeiture of right to disclaim Art. 571

III. Disclaimer by one co-heir Art. 572

1. In general Art. 573

2. Entitlement of surviving spouse Art. 574

3. Disclaimer in favour of subsequent heirs Art. 575

V. Extension of time limit Art. 576

VI. Disclaimer of a legacy Art. 577

VII. Security for the heir’s creditors Art. 578

VIII. Liability in the event of disclaimer Art. 579

A. Requirements Art. 580

I. Inventory Art. 581

II. Formal call to account Art. 582

III. Inclusion ex officio Art. 583

IV. Result Art. 584

I. Administration Art. 585

II. Debt enforcement, litigation, prescription Art. 586

I. Time limit for declaration of intention Art. 587

II. Declaration of intention Art. 588

1. Liability as per inventory Art. 589

2. Liability beyond the inventory Art. 590

E. Liability for debts subject to a surety Art. 591

F. Acquisition by a state authority Art. 592

I. At the request of an heir Art. 593

II. At the request of the deceased’s creditors Art. 594

I. Administration Art. 595

liquidation Art. 596

III. Liquidation by the bankruptcy office Art. 597

A. Requirements Art. 598

B. Effect Art. 599

C. Prescription Art. 600

D. Action by a legatee Art. 601

I. Community of heirs Art. 602

II. Liability of the heirs Art. 603

B. Right to division Art. 604

C. Deferral of division Art. 605

D. Claims of household members Art. 606

A. In general Art. 607

I. Testamentary disposition Art. 608

II. Assistance from the authorities Art. 609

I. Equal rights of heirs Art. 610

II. Formation of lots Art. 611

III. Allocation and sale of specific objects Art. 612

IV. Allocation of the home and household effects to the surviving spouse Art. 612a

I. Items that belong together, family documents Art. 613

I.bis Agricultural inventory Art. 613a

II. Claims of the deceased against his or her heirs Art. 614

III. Pledged estate property Art. 615

Repealed Art. 616

1. Method of allocation

a. Imputed value Art. 617

b. Valuation procedure Art. 618

V. Agricultural businesses and land Art. 619

Repealed Art. 620–625

A. Hotchpot duty of the heirs Art. 626

B. Hotchpot if heirs cease to be heirs Art. 627

I. In kind or by imputation of value Art. 628

II. Correlation with share of the estate Art. 629

III. Hotchpot value Art. 630

D. Education costs Art. 631

E. Occasional gifts Art. 632

Repealed Art. 633

I. Contract of division Art. 634

II. Contracts regarding shares of the estate Art. 635

III. Contracts prior to succession Art. 636

I. Warranty Art. 637

II. Challenging the division Art. 638

I. Joint and several liability Art. 639

II. Recourse against co-heirs Art. 640

I. In general Art. 641

II. Animals Art. 641a

I. Constituent parts Art. 642

II. Natural fruits Art. 643

1. Definition Art. 644

2. Exclusions Art. 645

1. Relationship among co-owners Art. 646

2. Use and administration rules Art. 647

3. Ordinary administration Art. 647a

4. Major administrative acts Art. 647b

5. Construction work

a. Necessary work Art. 647c

b. Useful work Art. 647d

c. Works to improve appearance or convenience Art. 647e

6. Power of disposal over the object Art. 648

7. Costs and expenses Art. 649

8. Binding nature of rules and noting in the land register Art. 649a

9. Exclusion from collective ownership

a. Co-owners Art. 649b

b. Further entitled persons Art. 649c

10. Dissolution

a. Right to request division Art. 650

b. Form of partition Art. 651

c. Animals kept as pets Art. 651a

1. Prerequisites Art. 652

2. Effect Art. 653

3. Dissolution Art. 654

III. Joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and land Art. 654a

I. Immovable property Art. 655

II. Dependent property Art. 655a

I. Registration Art. 656

1. Transfer Art. 657

2. Appropriation Art. 658

3. Formation of new land Art. 659

4. Ground displacement

a. In general Art. 660

b. Constant ground displacement Art. 660a

c. Redrawing of boundaries Art. 660b

5. Adverse possession

a. Ordinary adverse possession Art. 661

b. Extraordinary adverse possession Art. 662

c. Time limits Art. 663

6. Ownerless and public objects Art. 664

III. Right to registration Art. 665

C. Loss Art. 666

I. Where the owner cannot be found Art. 666a

II. In the absence of the required management bodies Art. 666b

I. Scope Art. 667

1. Type of boundary Art. 668

2. Duty to establish boundaries Art. 669

3. Co-ownership of boundary markers Art. 670

1. Land and building materials

a. Ownership Art. 671

b. Compensation Art. 672

c. Assignment of land ownership Art. 673

2. Encroaching buildings Art. 674

3. Building right Art. 675

4. Pipes, cables, conduits Art. 676

5. Movable structures Art. 677

IV. Plants grown on the parcel of land Art. 678

1. Acts in excess of ownership rights Art. 679

2. Lawful management of the land Art. 679a

I. In general Art. 680

1. General principles Art. 681

2. Exercise Art. 681a

3. Modification, waiver Art. 681b

4. In respect of co-ownership and building rights Art. 682

5. Right of pre-emption of farms and farmland Art. 682a

Repealed Art. 683

1. Excess detriment Art. 684

2. Excavation and construction

a. Rule Art. 685

b. Cantonal regulations Art. 686

3. Plants

a. Rule Art. 687

b. Cantonal regulations Art. 688

4. Flowing waters Art. 689

5. Drainage Art. 690

6. Pipes, cables, conduits

a. Duty to permit Art. 691

b. Safeguarding the interests of the servient landowner Art. 692

c. Change of circumstances Art. 693

7. Rights of way

a. Necessary right of way Art. 694

b. Other rights of way Art. 695

c. Notation in the land register Art. 696

8. Enclosure Art. 697

9. Duty to maintain Art. 698

1. Access Art. 699

2. Retrieval of driftage and the like Art. 700

3. Trespass to ward off danger or damage Art. 701

1. In general Art. 702

2. Land improvements Art. 703

I. Spring ownership and spring rights Art. 704

II. Diversion of springs Art. 705

1. Damages Art. 706

2. Restoration Art. 707

IV. Community of spring owners Art. 708

V. Use of springs Art. 709

VI. Right to use an essential water source Art. 710

1. Water sources Art. 711

2. Land Art. 712

I. Definition Art. 712a

II. Object Art. 712b

III. Power of disposal Art. 712c

I. Deed of constitution Art. 712d

II. Layout of the condominium units and shares in the property Art. 712e

III. Extinction Art. 712f

I. Applicable provisions Art. 712g

1. Definition and distribution Art. 712h

2. Liability for cost contributions

a. Statutory lien Art. 712i

b. Special lien Art. 712k

III. Community’s capacity to act Art. 712l

1. Competence and legal status Art. 712m

2. Convening and chairing meetings Art. 712n

3. Voting rights Art. 712o

4. Quorum Art. 712p

1. Appointment Art. 712q

2. Removal Art. 712r

3. Duties

a. Implementation of provisions and resolutions concerning administration and use Art. 712s

b. External representation Art. 712t

A. Object Art. 713

1. Delivery of possession Art. 714

2. Reservation of ownership

a. In general Art. 715

b. Transactions involving payment by instalments Art. 716

3. Acquisition without possession Art. 717

1. Ownerless chattels Art. 718

2. Escaped animals Art. 719

1. Reporting, tracing

a. In general Art. 720

b. Animals Art. 720a

2. Safekeeping and auction Art. 721

3. Acquisition of ownership, return Art. 722

4. Treasure trove Art. 723

5. Objects of scientific value Art. 724

IV. Driftage Art. 725

V. Processing Art. 726

VI. Joining and mixing chattels Art. 727

VII. Adverse possession Art. 728

C. Loss Art. 729

A. Object Art. 730

1. Registration Art. 731

2. Legal transaction Art. 732

3. Creation in favour of own property Art. 733

1. In general Art. 734

2. Amalgamation Art. 735

3. By court order Art. 736

1. In general Art. 737

2. As defined by land register entry Art. 738

3. If needs change Art. 739

4. Cantonal law and local custom Art. 740

5. In the case of two or more beneficiaries Art. 740a

II. Duty of maintenance Art. 741

III. Relocation of the encumbrance Art. 742

IV. Partition of a property Art. 743

Repealed Art. 744

I. Object Art. 745

1. In general Art. 746

2. ... Art. 747

1. Grounds Art. 748

2. Duration Art. 749

3. Replacement on extinction of usufruct Art. 750

4. Return

a. Duty Art. 751

b. Liability Art. 752

c. Costs Art. 753

5. Prescription of compensation rights Art. 754

1. Rights of the usufructuary

a. In general Art. 755

b. Natural fruits Art. 756

c. Interest Art. 757

d. Assignability Art. 758

2. Rights of the owner

a. Supervision Art. 759

b. Security Art. 760

c. Security in the case of gifts and statutory usufruct Art. 761

d. Consequence of failure to provide security Art. 762

3. Inventory Art. 763

4. Costs

a. Preservation of the object Art. 764

b. Maintenance and administration Art. 765

c. Duty to pay interest on usufruct of assets Art. 766

d. Insurance Art. 767

1. Land

a. Fruits Art. 768

b. Use Art. 769

c. Woodland Art. 770

d. Mines Art. 771

2. Consumables and valued chattels Art. 772

3. Claims

a. Scope Art. 773

b. Repayments and reinvestment Art. 774

c. Right to assignment Art. 775

I. In general Art. 776

II. Rights of the usufructuary Art. 777

III. Maintenance costs Art. 778

I. Object and entry in the land register Art. 779

II. Legal transaction Art. 779a

III. Nature, scope and noting Art. 779b

1. Reversion Art. 779c

2. Compensation Art. 779d

Repealed Art. 779e

1. Prerequisites Art. 779f

2. Exercising the right of reversion Art. 779g

3. Other applicable cases Art. 779h

1. Right to establish a lien Art. 779i

2. Registration Art. 779k

VII. Maximum duration Art. 779l

D. Right of access to water sources Art. 780

E. Other servitudes Art. 781

F. Judicial measures Art. 781a

A. Object Art. 782

1. Registration and form of acquisition Art. 783

2. Public law real burdens Art. 784

Repealed Art. 785

1. In general Art. 786

2. Redemption

a. By the creditor Art. 787

b. By the debtor Art. 788

c. Redemption sum Art. 789

3. Prescription Art. 790

I. Creditor’s rights Art. 791

II. Debt liability Art. 792

I. Types Art. 793

1. Amount Art. 794

2. Interest Art. 795

1. Property subject to a charge Art. 796

2. Specification

a. In the case of a single property Art. 797

b. In the case of more than one property Art. 798

3. Agricultural properties Art. 798a

1. Registration Art. 799

2. In the case of joint ownership Art. 800

II. Extinction Art. 801

1. Transfer of liens Art. 802

2. Redemption by the debtor Art. 803

3. Monetary compensation Art. 804

I. Extent of security Art. 805

II. Rent Art. 806

III. Prescription Art. 807

1. In the event of a reduction in value

a. Court order and action by the creditor Art. 808

b. Security, restoration, redemption Art. 809

2. Depreciation without owner’s fault Art. 810

3. Disposal of minor portions of the property Art. 811

V. Further encumbrances Art. 812

1. Effect of rank Art. 813

2. Ranking Art. 814

3. Vacant ranks Art. 815

1. Mode Art. 816

2. Distribution of the proceeds Art. 817

3. Extent of security Art. 818

4. Security for maintenance costs Art. 819

1. Precedence Art. 820

2. Extinction of debt and lien Art. 821

IX. Entitlement to insurers’ payments Art. 822

X. Untraceable creditor Art. 823

A. Purpose and nature Art. 824

I. Establishment Art. 825

1. Right to have entry deleted Art. 826

2. Position of owner Art. 827

3. Unilateral redemption

a. Conditions and procedure Art. 828

b. Public auction Art. 829

c. Official valuation Art. 830

4. Termination Art. 831

1. Alienation Art. 832

2. Division Art. 833

3. Notice of assumption of debt Art. 834

II. Assignment of a debt Art. 835

I. Under cantonal law Art. 836

1. Cases in point Art. 837

2. Vendor, co—heirs and co—owners Art. 838

3. Tradesmen and building contractors

a. Registration Art. 839

b. Rank Art. 840

c. Privileged claim Art. 841

I. Purpose; Relationship with the debt arising from the basic relationship Art. 842

II. Form Art. 843

III. Position of owner Art. 844

IV. Sale. Division Art. 845

1. In general Art. 846

2. Notice Art. 847

VI. Protection of persons acting in good faith Art. 848

VII. Objections by the debtor Art. 849

VIII. Authorised person Art. 850

IX. Place of payment Art. 851

X. Changes in the legal relationship Art. 852

XI. Discharge Art. 853

1. In the absence of a creditor Art. 854

2. Deletion Art. 855

XIII. Public call to creditors Art. 856

I. Establishment Art. 857

II. Transfer Art. 858

III. Pledging, distraint and usufruct Art. 859

1. Registration Art. 860

2. Document of title Art. 861

II. Protection of persons acting in good faith Art. 862

1. Claims Art. 863

2. Assignment Art. 864

IV. Cancellation Art. 865

Repealed Art. 866–874

A. Bond issues secured by a lien Art. 875

Repealed Art. 876–883

1. Possession by pledgee Art. 884

2. Pledge of livestock Art. 885

3. Subordinate pledge Art. 886

4. Further pledge by pledgee Art. 887

1. Loss of possession Art. 888

2. Return Art. 889

3. Liability of the pledgee Art. 890

1. Rights of the pledgee Art. 891

2. Scope of the general lien Art. 892

3. Rank Art. 893

4. Default agreements Art. 894

I. Requirements Art. 895

II. Exceptions Art. 896

III. In the event of insolvency Art. 897

IV. Effect Art. 898

A. In general Art. 899

I. In the case of ordinary claims Art. 900

II. In the case of securities Art. 901

III. In the case of documents of title to goods Art. 902

IV. Subordinate pledge Art. 903

I. Extent of security Art. 904

II. Representation of pledged shares and capital contributions to limited liability companies Art. 905

III. Administration and payment Art. 906

I. Licensing Art. 907

II. Duration of licence Art. 908

I. Establishment Art. 909

1. Sale of pawned chattel Art. 910

2. Right to surplus Art. 911

1. Right of redemption Art. 912

2. Pawnbroker’s rights Art. 913

C. Purchase with right of repurchase Art. 914

D. Rules governing pawnbroking Art. 915

I. Definition Art. 919

II. Direct and derivative possession Art. 920

III. Temporary interruption Art. 921

I. Among parties present in person Art. 922

II. Among absent persons Art. 923

III. Without physical transfer Art. 924

IV. In the case of documents of title to goods Art. 925

1. Defence against interference Art. 926

2. Action for restitution Art. 927

3. Action for trespass Art. 928

4. Admissibility and prescription Art. 929

1. Presumption of ownership Art. 930

2. Presumption of indirect ownership Art. 931

3. Action against the possessor Art. 932

4. Power of disposal and right of restitution

a. Entrusted objects Art. 933

b. Stolen or lost chattels Art. 934

c. Cash and bearer securities Art. 935

d. Bad faith Art. 936

5. Presumption of title to land Art. 937

1. Possessor in good faith

a. Use Art. 938

b. Indemnity Art. 939

2. Possession in bad faith Art. 940

IV. Adverse possession Art. 941

1. In general Art. 942

2. Registered data

a. Object Art. 943

b. Exceptions Art. 944

3. Registers

a. Main Register Art. 945

b. Folio Art. 946

c. Joint folio Art. 947

d. Journal, supporting documents Art. 948

4. Implementing ordinances

a. In general Art. 949

b. For electronic registers Art. 949a

4b. ... Art. 949b

4c. ... Art. 949c

4c. Commissioning private individuals to use the electronic version of the land register Art. 949d

5. Official cadastral survey Art. 950

1. Districts

a. Allocation to districts Art. 951

b. Land straddling more than one district Art. 952

2. Land registries Art. 953

3. Fees Art. 954

III. Liability Art. 955

IV. Administrative supervision Art. 956

1. Right of appeal Art. 956a

2. Appeal proceedings Art. 956b

Repealed Art. 957

1. Ownership and rights in rem Art. 958

2. Priority notices

a. Personal rights Art. 959

b. Restrictions on powers of disposal Art. 960

c. Provisional entries Art. 961

d. Entry of subordinate rights Art. 961a

1. Restrictions under public law Art. 962

2. Of representatives Art. 962a

1. Applications

a. For an entry Art. 963

b. For a deletion Art. 964

2. Authority

a. Valid proof of authority Art. 965

b. Completion of application Art. 966

1. In general Art. 967

2. For easements Art. 968

V. Duty to notify Art. 969

I. Information and right of consultation Art. 970

II. Publication Art. 970a

I. Need for an entry Art. 971

1. In general Art. 972

2. In relation to third parties acting in good faith Art. 973

3. In relation to third parties acting in bad faith Art. 974

1. On the division of property Art. 974a

2. In the case of the consolidation of parcels of land Art. 974b

II. Unwarranted entries Art. 975

1. Clearly insignificant entries Art. 976

2. Other entries

a. In general Art. 976a

b. On objection Art. 976b

3. Public revision procedure Art. 976c

IV. Corrections Art. 977

I. General rule of non-retroactive effect Art. 1

1. Public policy and good morals Art. 2

2. Relationships defined by law Art. 3

3. Non-vested rights Art. 4

I. Capacity to act Art. 5

II. Presumed death Art. 6

IIa. Central civil register database Art. 6a

1. In general Art. 6b

2. Accounting and auditors Art. 6c

IV. Protection of the individual against violence, threats or stalking Art. 6d

I. Marriage Art. 7

1. Principle Art. 7a

2. Pending divorce proceedings Art. 7b

3. Period of separation for pending divorce proceedings Art. 7c

4. Occupational pension Art. 7d

5. Conversion of existing pensions Art. 7e

1. Principle Art. 8

2. Surname Art. 8a

3. Citizenship Art. 8b

II. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted before 1 January 1912 Art. 9

1. In general Art. 9a

2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property

a. Change to the bodies of assets Art. 9b

b. Preferential right Art. 9c

c. Division of marital property under the new law Art. 9d

3. Retention of the union of property regime Art. 9e

4. Retention of separation of property by operation of law or by court order Art. 9f

5. Marital agreement

a. In general Art. 10

b. Legal effect in relation to third parties Art. 10a

c. Application of the new law Art. 10b

d. Contractual separation of property according to previous law Art. 10c

e. Marital agreements concluded with a view to the new law coming into force Art. 10d

f. Register of marital property Art. 10e

6. Repayment of debts in the case of separation of assets under the law of marital property Art. 11

7. Protection of creditors Art. 11a

III. The parent-child relationship in general Art. 12

1. Continuation of the previous law Art. 12a

2. Pending proceedings Art. 12b

3. Application of the new law Art. 12c

Repealed Art. 12cbis

IIIter. Contesting a declaration of legitimacy Art. 12d

1. Pending actions Art. 13

2. New actions Art. 13a

IVbis. Time limit for declaring or challenging the parent-child relationship Art. 13b

1. Existing maintenance titles

2. Pending proceedings Art. 13c

IVquater. Name of the child Art. 13d

1. Existing measures Art. 14

2. Pending proceedings Art. 14a

I. Heirs and succession Art. 15

II. Testamentary dispositions Art. 16

I. Rights in rem in general Art. 17

II. Right to entry in the land register Art. 18

III. Adverse possession Art. 19

1. Trees on another person's land Art. 20

2. Condominium

a. Original Art. 20bis

b. Converted Art. 20ter

c. Correction of the land registers Art. 20quater

V. Easements Art. 21

1. Recognition of the existing document of title Art. 22

2. Creation of liens Art. 23

3. Repayment of securities Art. 24

4. Extent of liability under the lien Art. 25

5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage

a. In general Art. 26

b. Rights to security Art. 27

c. Termination, transfer Art. 28

6. Ranking Art. 29

7. Ranking positions Art. 30

8. ... Art. 31 and 32

9. Equal status of previous forms of lien with those under the new law Art. 33

10. Continued application of previous law to existing forms of lien Art. 33a

11. Conversion the form of the mortgage certificate Art. 33b

1. Provisions on form Art. 34

2. Effect Art. 35

VIII. Special lien Art. 36

IX. Possession Art. 37

1. Establishment of the land register Art. 38

2. Official cadastral survey

a. ... Art. 39

b. Relation to the land register Art. 40

c. Time schedule Art. 41

Repealed Art. 42

3. Registration of rights in rem

a. Procedure Art. 43

b. Consequences of non-registration Art. 44

4. Abolished rights Art. 45

5. Postponement in the introduction of the land register Art. 46

6. Introduction of the property law before the land register Art. 47

7. Effect of cantonal forms Art. 48

F. Prescription Art. 49

G. Forms of contract Art. 50

A. Repeal of cantonal civil law Art. 51

I. Rights and duties of the cantons Art. 52

II. Substitute ordinances Art. 53

C. Designation of competent authorities Art. 54

I. In general Art. 55

II. Electronic copies and legalisations Art. 55a

E. Allocation of water rights Art. 56

F.–H. ... Art. 57

J. Debt enforcement and bankruptcy Art. 58

K. Application of Swiss and foreign law Art. 59

L. Repeal of federal civil law Art. 60

M. Final Provision Art. 61


 AS 24 233, 27 207 and BS 2 3


1 [BS 1 3]. This provision corresponds to Art. 122 of the Federal Constitution of 18 April 1999 (SR 101).2 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).3 BBl 1904 IV 1, 1907 VI 367

Index

210

Codice civile svizzero

del 10 dicembre 1907 (Stato 1° gennaio 2021)

L’Assemblea federale della Confederazione Svizzera,

visto l’articolo 64 della Costituzione federale1 (Cost.);2 visto il messaggio del Consiglio federale del 28 maggio 1904,

decreta:

  Titolo preliminare

Art. 1 A. Applicazione del diritto

A. Applicazione del diritto

1 La legge si applica a tutte le questioni giuridiche alle quali può riferirsi la lettera od il senso di una sua disposizione.

2 Nei casi non previsti dalla legge il giudice decide secondo la consuetudine e, in difetto di questa, secondo la regola che egli adotterebbe come legislatore.

3 Egli si attiene alla dottrina ed alla giurisprudenza più autorevoli.

Art. 2 B. Limiti dei rapporti giuridici / I. Osservanza della buona fede

B. Limiti dei rapporti giuridici

I. Osservanza della buona fede

1 Ognuno è tenuto ad agire secondo la buona fede così nell’esercizio dei propri diritti come nell’adempimento dei propri obblighi.

2 Il manifesto abuso del proprio diritto non è protetto dalla legge.

Art. 3 B. Limiti dei rapporti giuridici / II. Effetti della buona fede

II. Effetti della buona fede

1 Quando la legge fa dipendere un effetto giuridico dalla buona fede di una persona, la buona fede si presume.

2 Nessuno può invocare la propria buona fede quando questa sia incompatibile con l’attenzione che le circostanze permettevano di esigere da lui.

Art. 4 B. Limiti dei rapporti giuridici / III. Apprezzamento del giudice

III. Apprezzamento del giudice

1 Il giudice è tenuto a decidere secondo il diritto e l’equità quando la legge si rimette al suo prudente criterio o fa dipendere la decisione dall’apprezzamento delle circostanze, o da motivi gravi.

Art. 5 C. Rapporti col diritto cantonale / I. Diritto civile dei Cantoni ed uso locale

C. Rapporti col diritto cantonale

I. Diritto civile dei Cantoni ed uso locale

1 I Cantoni sono autorizzati ad emanare ed abrogare disposizioni di diritto civile nelle materie riservate al diritto cantonale.

2 Quando la legge si riferisce all’uso od all’uso locale, il diritto cantonale finora esistente vale come espressione dei medesimi, in quanto non sia provato un uso che vi deroghi.

Art. 6 C. Rapporti col diritto cantonale / II. Diritto pubblico cantonale

II. Diritto pubblico cantonale

1 Il diritto civile federale non limita le competenze di diritto pubblico dei Cantoni.

2 I Cantoni possono, nei limiti della loro sovranità, interdire o limitare il commercio di determinate cose o dichiarare nulli i rapporti contrattuali relativi alle medesime.

Art. 7 D. Disposizioni generali del Codice delle obbligazioni

D. Disposizioni generali del Codice delle obbligazioni

Le disposizioni generali del Codice delle obbligazioni1 relative alla conclusione, all’adempimento ed alla risoluzione dei contratti sono applicabili anche ad altri rapporti di diritto civile.


1 RS 220

Art. 8 E. Prove / I. Onere della prova

E. Prove

I. Onere della prova

Ove la legge non disponga altrimenti, chi vuol dedurre il suo diritto da una circostanza di fatto da lui asserita, deve fornirne la prova.

Art. 9 E. Prove / II. Prova dei documenti pubblici

II. Prova dei documenti pubblici

1 I registri pubblici ed i pubblici documenti fanno piena prova dei fatti che attestano, finché non sia dimostrata l’inesattezza del loro contenuto.

2 Questa prova non è soggetta ad alcuna forma speciale.

Art. 101

1 Abrogato dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

  Libro primo: Del diritto delle persone

  Titolo primo: Delle persone fisiche

  Capo primo: Del diritto della personalità

Art. 11 A. Personalità in genere / I. Godimento dei diritti civili

A. Personalità in genere

I. Godimento dei diritti civili

1 Ogni persona gode dei diritti civili.

2 Spetta quindi ad ognuno, nei limiti dell’ordine giuridico, una eguale capacità d’avere diritti ed obbligazioni.

Art. 12 A. Personalità in genere / II. Esercizio dei diritti civili / 1. Oggetto

II. Esercizio dei diritti civili

1. Oggetto

Chi ha l’esercizio dei diritti civili ha la capacità di acquistare diritti e di contrarre obbligazioni con atti propri.

Art. 13 A. Personalità in genere / II. Esercizio dei diritti civili / 2. Condizioni / a. In genere

2. Condizioni

a. In genere

Chi è maggiorenne e capace di discernimento ha l’esercizio dei diritti civili.

Art. 141A. Personalità in genere / II. Esercizio dei diritti civili / 2. Condizioni / b. Maggiore età

b. Maggiore età

È maggiorenne chi ha compiuto gli anni 18.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 151A. Personalità in genere / II. Esercizio dei diritti civili / 2. Condizioni / c.

c.


1 Abrogato dal n. I 1 della LF del 7 ott. 1994, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1996 (RU 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 921).

Art. 161A. Personalità in genere / II. Esercizio dei diritti civili / 2. Condizioni / d. Capacità di discernimento

d. Capacità di discernimento

È capace di discernimento, nel senso di questa legge, qualunque persona che non sia priva della capacità di agire ragionevolmente per effetto della sua età infantile o di disabilità mentale, turba psichica, ebbrezza o stato consimile.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 171A. Personalità in genere / III. Incapacità d’agire / 1. In genere

III. Incapacità d’agire

1. In genere

Le persone incapaci di discernimento, i minorenni e le persone sotto curatela generale non hanno l’esercizio dei diritti civili.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 18 A. Personalità in genere / III. Incapacità d’agire / 2. Mancanza di discernimento

2. Mancanza di discernimento

Gli atti di chi è incapace di discernimento non producono alcun effetto giuridico, riservate le eccezioni stabilite dalla legge.

Art. 19 A. Personalità in genere / III. Incapacità d’agire / 3. Persone capaci di discernimento ma incapaci di agire / a. Principio

3. Persone capaci di discernimento ma incapaci di agire

a. Principio1

1 Le persone capaci di discernimento che non hanno l’esercizio dei diritti civili non possono assumere obbligazioni o rinunciare a diritti senza il consenso del loro rappresentante legale.2

2 Senza tale consenso possono conseguire vantaggi gratuiti e provvedere a piccole incombenze della vita quotidiana.3

3 Essi sono tenuti a risarcire i danni cagionati con atti illeciti.4


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
4 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 3 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).

Art. 19a1A. Personalità in genere / III. Incapacità d’agire / 3. Persone capaci di discernimento ma incapaci di agire / b. Consenso del rappresentante legale

b. Consenso del rappresentante legale

1 Salvo che la legge disponga altrimenti, il consenso del rappresentante legale può essere espresso o tacito oppure consistere in una ratifica a posteriori.

2 L’altra parte è liberata se la ratifica non interviene entro un congruo termine che può fissare essa stessa o far fissare dal giudice.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 19b1A. Personalità in genere / III. Incapacità d’agire / 3. Persone capaci di discernimento ma incapaci di agire / c. Difetto di ratifica

c. Difetto di ratifica

1 In difetto di ratifica ad opera del rappresentante legale, ciascuna parte può ripetere le prestazioni che ha fatto. Tuttavia la persona che non ha l’esercizio dei diritti civili risponde soltanto dell’utile che la prestazione le ha procurato o di quanto si trovi ancora arricchita al momento della ripetizione o si sia spossessata in mala fede.

2 Se la persona che non ha l’esercizio dei diritti civili ha indotto l’altra parte a credere erroneamente il contrario, essa risponde del danno che le ha cagionato in tal modo.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 19c1A. Personalità in genere / III. Incapacità d’agire / 4. Diritti strettamente personali

4. Diritti strettamente personali

1 Le persone capaci di discernimento che non hanno l’esercizio dei diritti civili esercitano in piena autonomia i diritti strettamente personali; sono fatti salvi i casi nei quali la legge prevede il consenso del rappresentante legale.

2 Il rappresentante legale agisce in nome delle persone incapaci di discernimento, sempre che un diritto non sia tanto strettamente connesso con la personalità da escludere ogni rappresentanza.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 19d1A. Personalità in genere / IIIbis. Limitazione dell’esercizio dei diritti civili

IIIbis. Limitazione dell’esercizio dei diritti civili

L’esercizio dei diritti civili può essere limitato da una misura di protezione degli adulti.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 20 A. Personalità in genere / IV. Parentela e affinità / 1. Parentela

IV. Parentela e affinità

1. Parentela

1 Il grado della parentela è determinato dal numero delle generazioni.1

2 Due persone sono fra loro parenti in linea retta se una discende dall’altra; sono parenti in linea collaterale se discendono da un autore comune, ma non l’una dall’altra.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 3 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).

Art. 211A. Personalità in genere / IV. Parentela e affinità / 2. Affinità

2. Affinità

1 Chi è parente di una persona è affine nella stessa linea e nello stesso grado con il coniuge o il partner registrato di questa.

2 L’affinità non cessa con lo scioglimento del matrimonio o dell’unione domestica registrata da cui deriva.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della L del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2007 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).

Art. 22 A. Personalità in genere / V. Cittadinanza e domicilio / 1. Cittadinanza

V. Cittadinanza e domicilio

1. Cittadinanza

1 L’attinenza di una persona è determinata dalla sua cittadinanza.

2 La cittadinanza è determinata dal diritto pubblico.

3 Se una persona è cittadina di più luoghi, fa stato per la sua attinenza il luogo dove ha il suo domicilio o dove l’ebbe da ultimo; e in mancanza di domicilio, il luogo dell’ultima cittadinanza acquistata da essa o da’ suoi ascendenti.

Art. 23 A. Personalità in genere / V. Cittadinanza e domicilio / 2. Domicilio / a. Nozione

2. Domicilio

a. Nozione

1 Il domicilio di una persona è nel luogo dove essa dimora con l’intenzione di stabilirvisi durevolmente; la dimora a scopo di formazione o il collocamento di una persona in un istituto di educazione o di cura, in un ospedale o in un penitenziario non costituisce di per sé domicilio.1

2 Nessuno può avere contemporaneamente il suo domicilio in più luoghi.

3 Questa disposizione non si applica al domicilio d’affari.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 24 A. Personalità in genere / V. Cittadinanza e domicilio / 2. Domicilio / b. Cambiamento di domicilio o dimora

b. Cambiamento di domicilio o dimora

1 Il domicilio di una persona, stabilito che sia, continua a sussistere fino a che essa non ne abbia acquistato un altro.

2 Si considera come domicilio di una persona il luogo dove dimora, quando non possa essere provato un domicilio precedente o quando essa abbia abbandonato il suo domicilio all’estero senza averne stabilito un altro nella Svizzera.

Art. 251A. Personalità in genere / V. Cittadinanza e domicilio / 2. Domicilio / c. Domicilio dei minorenni

c. Domicilio dei minorenni2

1 Il domicilio del figlio sotto l’autorità parentale è quello dei genitori o, se i genitori non hanno un domicilio comune, quello del genitore che ne ha la custodia; negli altri casi, è determinante il luogo di dimora.

2 Il domicilio dei minorenni sotto tutela è nella sede dell’autorità di protezione dei minori.3


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 261A. Personalità in genere / V. Cittadinanza e domicilio / 2. Domicilio / d. Domicilio dei maggiorenni sotto curatela generale

d. Domicilio dei maggiorenni sotto curatela generale

Il domicilio dei maggiorenni sotto curatela generale è nella sede dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 27 B. Protezione della personalità / I. Contro impegni eccessivi

B. Protezione della personalità

I. Contro impegni eccessivi

1 Nessuno può rinunciare, neppure in parte, alla capacità civile.

2 Nessuno può alienare la propria libertà, né assoggettarsi nell’uso della medesima ad una limitazione incompatibile col diritto o con la morale.

Art. 281B. Protezione della personalità / II. Contro lesioni illecite / 1. Principio

II. Contro lesioni illecite

1. Principio

1 Chi è illecitamente leso nella sua personalità può, a sua tutela, chiedere l’intervento del giudice contro chiunque partecipi all’offesa.

2 La lesione è illecita quando non è giustificata dal consenso della persona lesa, da un interesse preponderante pubblico o privato, oppure dalla legge.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I del LF del 16 dic. 1983, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1985 (RU 1984 778; FF 1982 II 628).

Art. 28a1B. Protezione della personalità / II. Contro lesioni illecite / 2. Azioni / a. In genere

2. Azioni

a. In genere2

1 L’attore può chiedere al giudice:

1.
di proibire una lesione imminente;
2.
di far cessare una lesione attuale;
3.
di accertare l’illiceità di una lesione che continua a produrre effetti molesti.

2 L’attore può in particolare chiedere che una rettificazione o la sentenza sia comunicata a terzi o pubblicata.

3 Sono fatte salve le azioni di risarcimento del danno, di riparazione morale e di consegna dell’utile conformemente alle disposizioni sulla gestione d’affari senza mandato.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 16 dic. 1983, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1985 (RU 1984 778; FF 1982 II 628).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 23 giu. 2006 (Protezione della personalità in caso di violenza, minacce o insidie), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2007 (RU 2007 137; FF 2005 6127 6151).

Art. 28b1B. Protezione della personalità / II. Contro lesioni illecite / 2. Azioni / b. Violenza, minacce o insidie

b. Violenza, minacce o insidie

1 Per proteggersi da violenze, minacce o insidie, l’attore può chiedere al giudice di vietare all’autore della lesione in particolare di:

1.
avvicinarglisi o accedere a un perimetro determinato attorno alla sua abitazione;
2.
trattenersi in determinati luoghi, in particolare vie, piazze o quartieri;
3.
mettersi in contatto con lui, in particolare per telefono, per scritto o per via elettronica, o importunarlo in altro modo.

2 Inoltre, se vive con l’autore della lesione nella stessa abitazione, l’attore può chiedere al giudice di farlo allontanare dall’abitazione per un periodo determinato. Questo periodo può essere prolungato una volta per motivi gravi.

3 Il giudice può, per quanto appaia giustificato considerate tutte le circostanze:

1.
obbligare l’attore a versare un’indennità adeguata all’autore della lesione per l’uso esclusivo dell’abitazione; o
2.
con il consenso del locatore, trasferire al solo attore i diritti e gli obblighi derivanti dal contratto di locazione.

3bis Il giudice comunica la sua decisione alle competenti autorità di protezione dei minori e degli adulti nonché al competente servizio cantonale di cui al capoverso 4 e ad altre autorità e terzi, per quanto ciò appaia necessario all’adempimento dei loro compiti o alla protezione dell’attore o serva all’esecuzione della decisione.2

4 I Cantoni designano un servizio che può decidere l’allontanamento immediato dell’autore della lesione dall’abitazione comune in caso di crisi e disciplinano la procedura.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 16 dic. 1983 (RU 1984 778; FF 1982 II 628). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 23 giu. 2006 (Protezione della personalità in caso di violenza, minacce o insidie), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2007 (RU 2007 137; FF 2005 6127 6151).
2 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 14 dic. 2018 intesa a migliorare la protezione delle vittime di violenza, in vigore dal 1° lug. 2020 (RU 2019 2273; FF 2017 6267).

Art. 28c a 28f1B. Protezione della personalità / II. Contro lesioni illecite / 3.

3.


1 Introdotti dal n. I della LF del 16 dic. 1983 (RU 1984 778; FF 1982 II 628). Abrogati dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 28g1B. Protezione della personalità / II. Contro lesioni illecite / 4. Diritto di risposta / a. Principio

4. Diritto di risposta

a. Principio2

1 Chi è direttamente toccato nella sua personalità dall’esposizione di fatti ad opera di mezzi di comunicazione sociale di carattere periodico, quali la stampa, la radio e la televisione, ha il diritto di rispondere con una propria esposizione dei fatti.

2 Il diritto di risposta non sussiste nel caso di un resoconto fedele di un pubblico dibattito di un’autorità al quale l’interessato ha partecipato.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 16 dic. 1983, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1985 (RU 1984 778; FF 1982 II 628).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 23 giu. 2006 (Protezione della personalità in caso di violenza, minacce o insidie), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2007 (RU 2007 137; FF 2005 6127 6151).

Art. 28h1B. Protezione della personalità / II. Contro lesioni illecite / 4. Diritto di risposta / b. Forma e contenuto

b. Forma e contenuto

1 Il testo della risposta deve limitarsi concisamente all’oggetto dell’esposizione di fatti contestata.

2 La risposta può essere rifiutata se è manifestamente inesatta o contraria alla legge o ai buoni costumi.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 16 dic. 1983, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1985 (RU 1984 778; FF 1982 II 628).

Art. 28i1B. Protezione della personalità / II. Contro lesioni illecite / 4. Diritto di risposta / c. Procedura

c. Procedura

1 L’interessato deve far recapitare il testo della risposta all’impresa responsabile del mezzo di comunicazione entro venti giorni dal momento in cui ha preso conoscenza dell’esposizione dei fatti contestata, ma in ogni caso entro tre mesi dalla divulgazione.

2 L’impresa comunica senza indugio all’interessato quando diffonderà la risposta o perché la rifiuta.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 16 dic. 1983, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1985 (RU 1984 778; FF 1982 II 628).

Art. 28k1B. Protezione della personalità / II. Contro lesioni illecite / 4. Diritto di risposta / d. Diffusione

d. Diffusione

1 La risposta dev’essere diffusa al più presto e in modo da raggiungere la stessa cerchia di persone cui era diretta l’esposizione di fatti contestata.

2 La risposta deve essere designata come tale; l’impresa responsabile del mezzo di comunicazione può aggiungervi soltanto una dichiarazione in cui indica se mantiene la propria versione dei fatti o su quali fonti d’informazione si è fondata.

3 La diffusione della risposta è gratuita.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 16 dic. 1983, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1985 (RU 1984 778; FF 1982 II 628).

Art. 28l1B. Protezione della personalità / II. Contro lesioni illecite / 4. Diritto di risposta / e. Intervento del giudice

e. Intervento del giudice

1 Se l’impresa responsabile del mezzo di comunicazione impedisce l’esercizio del diritto di risposta, rifiuta la risposta o non la diffonde correttamente, l’interessato può rivolgersi al giudice.

2 …2

3 e 4 ...3


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 16 dic. 1983, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1985 (RU 1984 778; FF 1982 II 628).
2 Abrogato dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).
3 Abrogati dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 29 B. Protezione della personalità / III. Diritto a nome / 1. Protezione

III. Diritto a nome

1. Protezione

1 Se a qualcuno è contestato l’uso del proprio nome, egli può chiederne in giudizio il riconoscimento.

2 Ove alcuno subisca pregiudizio per il fatto che altri usurpi il proprio nome, può chiedere in giudizio la cessazione dell’usurpazione stessa. In caso di colpa può chiedere il risarcimento del danno, e quando la natura dell’offesa lo giustifichi, il pagamento di una somma a titolo di riparazione morale.

Art. 30 B. Protezione della personalità / III. Diritto a nome / 2. Cambiamento del nome / a. In genere

2. Cambiamento del nome

a. In genere1

1 Il governo del Cantone di domicilio può, per motivi degni di rispetto, autorizzare una persona a cambiare nome.2

2 ...3

3 Chi da tale cambiamento fosse pregiudicato nei suoi diritti può contestarlo davanti al giudice, entro un anno da quando ne ebbe conoscenza.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).
3 Abrogato dal n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 30a1B. Protezione della personalità / III. Diritto a nome / 2. Cambiamento del nome / b. In caso di morte di un coniuge

b. In caso di morte di un coniuge

In caso di morte di un coniuge, il coniuge superstite, se ha cambiato cognome in occasione del matrimonio, può dichiarare in ogni tempo all’ufficiale dello stato civile di voler riprendere il proprio cognome da celibe o nubile.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 31 C. Principio e fine della personalità / I. Nascita e morte

C. Principio e fine della personalità

I. Nascita e morte

1 La personalità comincia con la vita individua fuori dall’alvo materno e finisce con la morte.

2 Prima della nascita, l’infante gode dei diritti civili a condizione che nasca vivo.

Art. 32 C. Principio e fine della personalità / II. Regole probatorie / 1. Onere della prova

II. Regole probatorie

1. Onere della prova

1 Chi per far valere un diritto afferma che una persona sia vivente, o sia morta, o sia vissuta in un certo momento, o sia sopravvissuta ad un’altra persona, deve fornirne la prova.

2 Se non può essere fornita la prova che di più persone una sia sopravvissuta all’altra, si ritengono morte simultaneamente.

Art. 33 C. Principio e fine della personalità / II. Regole probatorie / 2. Mezzi di prova / a. In genere

2. Mezzi di prova

a. In genere

1 La prova della nascita o della morte di una persona si fornisce cogli atti dello stato civile.

2 Se questi non esistono, o se sono dimostrati inesatti, la prova può essere fornita con altri mezzi.

Art. 34 C. Principio e fine della personalità / II. Regole probatorie / 2. Mezzi di prova / b. Indizio di morte

b. Indizio di morte

La morte di una persona può reputarsi provata ancorché nessuno ne abbia veduto il cadavere, quando essa sia sparita in circostanze tali da far ritenere la sua morte come certa.

Art. 35 C. Principio e fine della personalità / III. Dichiarazione della scomparsa / 1. In genere

III. Dichiarazione della scomparsa

1. In genere

1 Essendo una persona assai verosimilmente morta perché è sparita in pericolo imminente di morte o perché è da lungo tempo assente senza che se ne abbiano notizie, il giudice può dichiararne la scomparsa, ad istanza di chiunque invochi un diritto desumibile dalla sua morte.

2 …1


1 Abrogato dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).

Art. 36 C. Principio e fine della personalità / III. Dichiarazione della scomparsa / 2. Procedura

2. Procedura

1 L’istanza può essere fatta dopo un anno almeno dalla sparizione in pericolo di morte, o dopo cinque anni dall’ultima notizia.

2 Il giudice deve diffidare con adeguate pubblicazioni tutti coloro che potessero dar notizie intorno alla persona sparita od assente ad annunciarsi entro un dato termine.

3 Questo termine dev’essere di almeno un anno dalla prima pubblicazione.

Art. 37 C. Principio e fine della personalità / III. Dichiarazione della scomparsa / 3. Caducità della istanza

3. Caducità della istanza

L’istanza cade se, entro il termine indicato, la persona sparita od assente si annuncia, se ne giungono notizie o se è provata l’epoca della morte.

Art. 38 C. Principio e fine della personalità / III. Dichiarazione della scomparsa / 4. Effetti della scomparsa

4. Effetti della scomparsa

1 Se durante il tempo indicato non sopraggiungono notizie della persona sparita od assente, essa è dichiarata scomparsa e si possono far valere tutti i diritti derivanti dalla sua morte come se questa fosse provata.

2 Gli effetti della dichiarazione di scomparsa risalgono al momento del pericolo di morte o dell’ultima notizia.

3 La dichiarazione della scomparsa scioglie il matrimonio.1


1 Introdotto dal n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).


  Capo secondo:1  Degli atti dello stato civile

Art. 391A. Registro / I. In genere

A. Registro

I. In genere

1 Lo stato civile è documentato in un registro elettronico (registro dello stato civile).

2 Lo stato civile comprende in particolare i dati seguenti:

1.
i fatti dello stato civile come nascita, matrimonio, registrazione di un’unione domestica, morte;
2.
lo statuto personale e familiare come maggiore età, filiazione, vincolo coniugale, unione domestica registrata;
3.
i nomi;
4.
i diritti di attinenza cantonali e comunali;
5.
la cittadinanza nazionale.

1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Atti dello stato civile e registro fondiario), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 4017; FF 2014 3059).

Art. 40 A. Registro / II. Obbligo di notificazione

II. Obbligo di notificazione1

1 Il Consiglio federale designa le persone e le autorità tenute a notificare i dati necessari alla documentazione dello stato civile.

2 Esso può prescrivere che per le infrazioni all’obbligo di notificazione sia comminata una multa.

3 …2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 5 ott. 2001 (Gestione elettronica dei registri dello stato civile), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2004 (RU 2004 2911; FF 2001 1417).
2 Abrogato dal n. I della LF del 5 ott. 2001 (Gestione elettronica dei registri dello stato civile), con effetto dal 1° lug. 2004 (RU 2004 2911; FF 2001 1417).

Art. 41 A. Registro / III. Prova di dati non controversi

III. Prova di dati non controversi

1 L’autorità cantonale di vigilanza può autorizzare la prova di dati relativi allo stato civile mediante una dichiarazione all’ufficiale dello stato civile, qualora dopo adeguate ricerche l’accertamento per mezzo di documenti si riveli impossibile o non possa essere ragionevolmente preteso e i dati non sono controversi.

2 L’ufficiale dello stato civile rende attento il dichiarante sul suo obbligo di dire la verità e lo avverte delle conseguenze penali di una falsa dichiarazione.

Art. 42 A. Registro / IV. Rettificazione / 1. Da parte del giudice

IV. Rettificazione

1. Da parte del giudice

1 Chi rende verosimile un interesse degno di protezione può domandare al giudice di decretare l’iscrizione di dati relativi allo stato civile controversi, nonché la rettificazione o la radiazione di un’iscrizione. Il giudice sente le autorità cantonali di vigilanza interessate e notifica loro la sentenza.

2 Sono del pari legittimate a promuovere azione le autorità cantonali di vigilanza.

Art. 43 A. Registro / IV. Rettificazione / 2. Da parte delle autorità dello stato civile

2. Da parte delle autorità dello stato civile

Le autorità dello stato civile rettificano d’ufficio errori che dipendono da sbaglio o disattenzione manifesti.

Art. 43a1A. Registro / V. Protezione e divulgazione dei dati

V. Protezione e divulgazione dei dati

1 Il Consiglio federale provvede, nell’ambito della documentazione dello stato civile, alla tutela della personalità e dei diritti fondamentali delle persone i cui dati sono oggetto di elaborazione.

2 Disciplina la divulgazione di dati a privati che possono dimostrare un interesse diretto degno di protezione.

3 Designa le autorità estranee allo stato civile cui sono divulgati, regolarmente o su richiesta, i dati necessari all’adempimento dei loro compiti legali. È fatta salva la divulgazione di dati in virtù di prescrizioni previste da una legge cantonale.

3bis Le autorità dello stato civile sono tenute a denunciare alle autorità competenti i reati che hanno constatato nell’ambito della loro attività ufficiale.2

4 Hanno accesso mediante procedura di richiamo ai dati necessari alla verifica dell’identità di una persona:

1.
le autorità di rilascio ai sensi della legge federale del 22 giugno 20013 sui documenti d’identità dei cittadini svizzeri;
2.4
il servizio federale competente per la gestione del sistema di ricerca informatizzato di polizia di cui all’articolo 15 della legge federale del 13 giugno 20085 sui sistemi d’informazione di polizia della Confederazione e i servizi di filtraggio dei corpi di polizia cantonali e comunali collegati a tale sistema;
3.
il servizio federale competente per la gestione del casellario giudiziale informatizzato di cui all’articolo 3596 del Codice penale;
4.
il servizio federale competente per la ricerca di persone scomparse7;
5.8
il Servizio delle attività informative della Confederazione per individuare tempestivamente e sventare minacce per la sicurezza interna o esterna secondo l’articolo 6 capoverso 1 lettera a della legge federale del 25 settembre 20159 sulle attività informative;
6.10
le autorità competenti per la tenuta dei registri cantonali e comunali degli abitanti ai sensi della legge del 23 giugno 200611 sull’armonizzazione dei registri;
7.12
il servizio federale competente per la tenuta del registro centrale degli assicurati di cui all’articolo 71 capoverso 4 lettera a della legge federale del 20 dicembre 194613 sull’assicurazione per la vecchiaia e per i superstiti;
8.14
i servizi federali competenti per la gestione del registro degli Svizzeri all’estero di cui all’articolo 4 capoverso 1 della legge federale del 24 marzo 200015 sul trattamento di dati personali in seno al Dipartimento federale degli affari esteri.

1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 5 ott. 2001 (Gestione elettronica dei registri dello stato civile), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2004 (RU 2004 2911; FF 2001 1417).
2 Introdotto dal n. I 3 della LF del 15 giu. 2012 sulle misure contro i matrimoni forzati, in vigore dal 1° lug. 2013 (RU 2013 1035; FF 2011 1987).
3 RS 143.1
4 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. 1 n. 4 della LF del 13 giu. 2008 sui sistemi d’informazione di polizia della Confederazione, in vigore dal 5 dic. 2008 (RU 2008 4989; FF 2006 4631).
5 RS 361
6 Vedi ora l’art. 365.
7 Attualmente l’Ufficio federale di polizia.
8 Introdotto dall’all. n. II 4 della LF del 25 set. 2015 sulle attività informative, in vigore dal 1° set. 2017 (RU 2017 4095; FF 2014 1885).
9 RS 121
10 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Atti dello stato civile e registro fondiario), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 4017; FF 2014 3059).
11 RS 431.02
12 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Atti dello stato civile e registro fondiario), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 4017; FF 2014 3059).
13 RS 831.10
14 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Atti dello stato civile e registro fondiario), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 4017; FF 2014 3059).
15 RS 235.2

Art. 44 B. Organizzazione / I. Autorità dello stato civile / 1. Ufficiali dello stato civile

B. Organizzazione

I. Autorità dello stato civile

1. Ufficiali dello stato civile

1 Gli ufficiali dello stato civile adempiono in particolare i seguenti compiti:

1.
tengono i registri;
2.
notificano le comunicazioni e rilasciano gli estratti;
3.
istruiscono la procedura preparatoria del matrimonio e provvedono alla celebrazione del matrimonio;
4.
ricevono le dichiarazioni concernenti lo stato civile.

2 Il Consiglio federale può eccezionalmente assegnare a un rappresentante della Svizzera all’estero incombenze di ufficiale dello stato civile.

Art. 45 B. Organizzazione / I. Autorità dello stato civile / 2. Autorità di vigilanza

2. Autorità di vigilanza

1 Ogni Cantone designa l’autorità di vigilanza.

2 Questa autorità ha in particolare le seguenti incombenze:

1.
vigila sugli uffici dello stato civile;
2.
assiste e consiglia gli ufficiali dello stato civile;
3.
collabora alla tenuta dei registri e alla procedura preparatoria del matrimonio;
4.
decide circa il riconoscimento e la trascrizione dei fatti concernenti lo stato civile avvenuti all’estero, nonché delle decisioni relative allo stato civile prese da autorità estere;
5.1
assicura la formazione e la formazione continua delle persone operanti nell’ambito dello stato civile.

3 La Confederazione esercita l’alta vigilanza. Può impugnare le decisioni degli ufficiali dello stato civile e delle autorità di vigilanza mediante i rimedi giuridici cantonali.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della LF del 20 giu. 2014 sulla formazione continua, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 689; FF 2013 3085).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 5 ott. 2001 (Gestione elettronica dei registri dello stato civile), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2004 (RU 2004 2911; FF 2001 1417).

Art. 45a1B. Organizzazione / Ia. Sistema centrale d’informazione sulle persone

Ia. Sistema centrale d’informazione sulle persone

1 La Confederazione gestisce e sviluppa un sistema centrale d’informazione sulle persone per la tenuta del registro dello stato civile.

2 La Confederazione si assume i costi di gestione e sviluppo.

3 I Cantoni versano alla Confederazione un emolumento annuo per l’uso del sistema a scopi inerenti allo stato civile.

4 La Confederazione coinvolge i Cantoni nello sviluppo del sistema. Fornisce loro il sostegno tecnico per l’uso del sistema.

5 Con la partecipazione dei Cantoni, il Consiglio federale disciplina:

1.
i dettagli relativi al coinvolgimento dei Cantoni nello sviluppo del sistema;
2.
l’ammontare dell’emolumento versato dai Cantoni per l’uso del sistema;
3.
i diritti di accesso delle autorità dello stato civile e degli altri servizi aventi accesso al sistema;
4.
la collaborazione operativa tra la Confederazione e i Cantoni;
5.
le misure tecniche e organizzative necessarie per garantire la protezione e la sicurezza dei dati;
6.
l’archiviazione dei dati.

6 Il Consiglio federale può prescrivere che i costi delle prestazioni fornite a terzi per scopi non inerenti allo stato civile siano loro addebitati.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 5 ott. 2001 (Gestione elettronica dei registri dello stato civile (RU 2004 2911; FF 2001 1417). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Atti dello stato civile e registro fondiario), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 4017; FF 2014 3059).

Art. 46 B. Organizzazione / II. Responsabilità

II. Responsabilità

1 Chi è stato illecitamente danneggiato da persone operanti nell’ambito dello stato civile nell’esercizio delle loro attribuzioni ufficiali può chiedere il risarcimento del danno e, quando la gravità dell’offesa la giustifichi, la riparazione morale.

2 Il Cantone risponde del danno; esso può esercitare regresso verso le persone che hanno causato il danno intenzionalmente o per grave negligenza.

3 Alle persone impiegate dalla Confederazione si applica la legge del 14 marzo 1958 sulla responsabilità1.


Art. 47 B. Organizzazione / III. Misure disciplinari

III. Misure disciplinari

1 L’autorità cantonale di vigilanza reprime disciplinarmente le trasgressioni intenzionali o per negligenza ai doveri d’ufficio commesse dalle persone operanti negli uffici dello stato civile.

2 Le sanzioni disciplinari consistono nell’ammonimento, nella multa fino a franchi 1 000 oppure, in casi gravi, nella destituzione.

3 È fatta salva l’azione penale.

Art. 48 C. Disposizioni d’esecuzione / I. Diritto federale

C. Disposizioni d’esecuzione

I. Diritto federale

1 Il Consiglio federale emana le disposizioni d’esecuzione.

2 Esso disciplina in particolare

1.
i registri da tenere e i dati da registrare;
2.
l’utilizzazione del numero di assicurato conformemente all’articolo 50c della legge federale del 20 dicembre 19461 sull’assicurazione per la vecchiaia e per i superstiti (LAVS) ai fini dello scambio elettronico di dati tra i registri ufficiali di per-sone;
3.
la tenuta dei registri;
4.
la vigilanza.2

3 Per garantire un’esecuzione tecnicamente corretta il Consiglio federale può stabilire esigenze minime per la formazione e la formazione continua delle persone operanti nell’ambito dello stato civile, nonché per il tasso d’occupazione degli ufficiali dello stato civile.3

4 Stabilisce gli emolumenti da riscuotere in materia di stato civile.

5 Determina a quali condizioni è possibile procedere per via elettronica:

1.
alla notificazione di fatti dello stato civile;
2.
al rilascio di dichiarazioni concernenti lo stato civile;
3.
alla notificazione di comunicazioni e al rilascio di estratti dei registri.4

1 RS 831.10
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 2 della L del 23 giu. 2006 sull’armonizzazione dei registri, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2006 4165; FF 2006 397).
3 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della LF del 20 giu. 2014 sulla formazione continua, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 689; FF 2013 3085).
4 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 5 ott. 2001 (Gestione elettronica dei registri dello stato civile), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2004 (RU 2004 2911; FF 2001 1417).

Art. 49 C. Disposizioni d’esecuzione / II. Diritto cantonale

II. Diritto cantonale

1 I Cantoni fissano i circondari dello stato civile.

2 Nell’ambito del diritto federale adottano le necessarie disposizioni d’esecuzione.

3 Le prescrizioni cantonali, tranne quelle relative alla retribuzione delle persone operanti nell’ambito dello stato civile, devono essere approvate dalla Confederazione.

Art. 50 e 51

Abrogati


  Titolo secondo: Delle persone giuridiche

  Capo primo: Disposizioni generali

Art. 52 A. Personalità

A. Personalità

1 Le unioni di persone organizzate corporativamente e gli istituti autonomi e destinati ad un fine particolare conseguono il diritto alla personalità mediante l’iscrizione nel registro di commercio.

2 Le corporazioni, gli istituti di diritto pubblico e le associazioni che non si prefiggono uno scopo economico non abbisognano dell’iscrizione.1

3 Le unioni di persone e gli istituti che si propongono uno scopo illecito od immorale non possono ottenere la personalità.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 12 dic. 2014 concernente l’attuazione delle Raccomandazioni del Gruppo d’azione finanziaria rivedute nel 2012, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2016 (RU 2015 1389; FF 2014 563).

Art. 53 B. Godimento dei diritti civili

B. Godimento dei diritti civili

Le persone giuridiche sono capaci di ogni diritto ed obbligazione, che non dipendono necessariamente dallo stato o dalla qualità della persona fisica, come il sesso, l’età e la parentela.

Art. 54 C. Esercizio dei diritti civili / I. Condizioni

C. Esercizio dei diritti civili

I. Condizioni

Le persone giuridiche hanno l’esercizio dei diritti civili tosto che siano costituiti gli organi a ciò necessari conformemente alla legge ed agli statuti.

Art. 55 C. Esercizio dei diritti civili / II. Modo

II. Modo

1 Gli organi della persona giuridica sono chiamati ad esprimerne la volontà.

2 Essi obbligano la persona giuridica così nella conclusione dei negozi giuridici, come per effetto di altri atti od omissioni.

3 Le persone che agiscono sono inoltre responsabili personalmente per la loro colpa.

Art. 561D. Sede

D. Sede

La sede delle persone giuridiche, salvo diversa disposizione degli statuti, è nel luogo dove si tiene la loro amministrazione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).

Art. 57 E. Cessazione della personalità / I. Devoluzione del patrimonio

E. Cessazione della personalità

I. Devoluzione del patrimonio

1 Venendo sciolta una persona giuridica, il suo patrimonio decade agli enti pubblici (Confederazione, Cantone, Comune) ai quali è appartenuta secondo la sua destinazione, salvo che sia altrimenti disposto dalla legge, dagli statuti, dall’atto di fondazione o dai suoi organi competenti.

2 Il patrimonio dev’essere applicato a uno scopo quanto possibile affine a quello precedentemente seguito.1

3 Qualora una persona giuridica venga sciolta perché si propone un fine immorale o illecito, il patrimonio decade a favore degli enti pubblici nonostante ogni contraria disposizione.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 58 E. Cessazione della personalità / II. Liquidazione

II. Liquidazione

La procedura di liquidazione del patrimonio di una persona giuridica avviene con le norme stabilite per le società cooperative.

Art. 59 F. Riserve di diritto pubblico e di diritto particolare

F. Riserve di diritto pubblico e di diritto particolare

1 Per le corporazioni e gli istituti di diritto pubblico o di carattere ecclesiastico sono riservate le disposizioni di diritto pubblico della Confederazione e dei Cantoni.

2 Le unioni di persone che hanno un fine economico soggiacciono alle disposizioni del diritto federale circa le società e le cooperative.

3 I patriziati e simili corporazioni rimangono soggetti alle disposizioni del diritto cantonale.


  Capo secondo: Delle associazioni

Art. 60 A. Loro costituzione / I. Unioni corporative

A. Loro costituzione

I. Unioni corporative

1 Le associazioni che si propongono un fine politico, religioso, scientifico, artistico, benèfico o ricreativo, od altro fine non economico, conseguono la personalità tosto che la volontà di costruire una corporazione risulti dagli statuti.

2 Gli statuti devono essere stesi in forma scritta e contenere le necessarie disposizioni circa il fine, i mezzi e gli organi dell’associazione.

Art. 61 A. Loro costituzione / II. Iscrizione nel registro di commercio

II. Iscrizione nel registro di commercio

1 Approvati gli statuti e costituita la direzione, l’associazione è autorizzata a farsi iscrivere nel registro di commercio.

2 L’iscrizione è obbligatoria se l’associazione:

1.
per conseguire il suo fine esercita uno stabilimento d’indole commerciale;
2.
sottostà all’obbligo di revisione.1

3 Per ottenere l’iscrizione devono essere deposti gli statuti ed indicati i membri della direzione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).

Art. 62 A. Loro costituzione / III. Associazioni senza personalità

III. Associazioni senza personalità

Le associazioni che non possono avere o non hanno ancora la personalità giuridica sono parificate alle società semplici.

Art. 63 A. Loro costituzione / IV. Relazioni fra gli statuti e la legge

IV. Relazioni fra gli statuti e la legge

1 Ove gli statuti non dispongano circa l’organizzazione ed i rapporti fra l’associazione e i suoi membri, si applicano le disposizioni che seguono.

2 Gli statuti non possono derogare a quelle disposizioni la cui osservanza è prescritta per legge.

Art. 64 B. Loro organizzazione / I. Assemblea sociale / 1. Funzioni e convocazione

B. Loro organizzazione

I. Assemblea sociale

1. Funzioni e convocazione

1 L’assemblea sociale è l’organo superiore dell’associazione.

2 Essa è convocata dalla direzione.

3 La convocazione deve aver luogo a tenore dello statuto, ed anche per legge quando un quinto dei soci lo richieda.

Art. 65 B. Loro organizzazione / I. Assemblea sociale / 2. Competenze

2. Competenze

1 L’assemblea sociale risolve circa l’ammissione o l’esclusione dei soci, elegge la direzione e decide tutti gli oggetti non riservati ad altri organi dell’associazione.

2 Essa esercita la sorveglianza sopra la gestione di questi ultimi, e li può sempre revocare, impregiudicate le ragioni che loro competessero per contratto.

3 Il diritto di revoca esiste per legge nei casi in cui sia giustificato da gravi motivi.

Art. 66 B. Loro organizzazione / I. Assemblea sociale / 3. Risoluzioni sociali / a. Forma

3. Risoluzioni sociali

a. Forma

1 Le risoluzioni sociali sono prese dall’assemblea.

2 L’annuenza scritta di tutti i soci ad una proposta è parificata alla risoluzione sociale, quand’anche non sia stata tenuta un’assemblea.

Art. 67 B. Loro organizzazione / I. Assemblea sociale / 3. Risoluzioni sociali / b. Diritto di voto e maggioranza

b. Diritto di voto e maggioranza

1 Tutti i soci hanno egual diritto di voto nell’assemblea.

2 Le risoluzioni sociali sono prese a maggioranza dei voti dei soci presenti.

3 Non si può prendere una risoluzione sopra oggetti non debitamente preannunciati, eccettoché gli statuti espressamente lo permettano.

Art. 68 B. Loro organizzazione / I. Assemblea sociale / 3. Risoluzioni sociali / c. Esclusione dal diritto di voto

c. Esclusione dal diritto di voto

Nelle risoluzioni sociali concernenti un interesse privato od una controversia giuridica fra la società da una parte ed un socio, il suo coniuge od un suo parente in linea retta dall’altra parte, il socio è escluso per legge dal diritto di voto.

Art. 69 B. Loro organizzazione / II. Direzione / 1. Diritti e doveri in generale

II. Direzione

1. Diritti e doveri in generale1

La direzione ha il diritto e il dovere di curare gli interessi dell’associazione e di rappresentarla secondo le facoltà concesse dagli statuti.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).

Art. 69a1B. Loro organizzazione / II. Direzione / 2. Contabilità

2. Contabilità

La direzione tiene i libri di commercio dell’associazione. Le disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni2 concernenti la contabilità commerciale e la presentazione dei conti si applicano per analogia.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545). Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 23 dic. 2011 (Diritto contabile), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 6679; FF 2008 1321).
2 RS 220

Art. 69b1B. Loro organizzazione / III. Ufficio di revisione

III. Ufficio di revisione

1 L’associazione deve far verificare la sua contabilità mediante revisione ordinaria, effettuata da un ufficio di revisione, se due dei valori seguenti sono oltrepassati per due esercizi consecutivi:

1.
somma di bilancio di 10 milioni di franchi;
2.
cifra d’affari di 20 milioni di franchi;
3.
50 posti di lavoro a tempo pieno in media annua.

2 L’associazione deve far verificare la sua contabilità mediante revisione limitata, effettuata da un ufficio di revisione, se un socio personalmente responsabile o tenuto ad eseguire versamenti suppletivi lo chiede.

3 Le disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni2 sull’ufficio di revisione nell’ambito della società anonima si applicano per analogia.

4 Negli altri casi, gli statuti e l’assemblea sociale3 possono disciplinare liberamente la revisione.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).
2 RS 220
3 Testo rettificato dalla Commissione di redazione dell’AF (art. 58 cpv. 1 LParL; RS 171.10).

Art. 69c1B. Loro organizzazione / IV. Lacune nell’organizzazione

IV. Lacune nell’organizzazione

1 Se l’associazione è priva di uno degli organi prescritti o non dispone più di un domicilio legale presso la sua sede, un socio o un creditore può chiedere al giudice di prendere le misure necessarie.2

2 Il giudice può segnatamente assegnare all’associazione un termine per ripristinare la situazione legale e, se necessario, nominare un commissario.

3 L’associazione si assume le spese di queste misure. Il giudice può obbligarla a versare un anticipo alle persone nominate.

4 L’associazione può, per gravi motivi, chiedere al giudice la revoca di persone da lui nominate.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 17 mar. 2017 (Diritto del registro di commercio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2021 (RU 2020 957; FF 2015 2849).

Art. 70 C. Diritti e doveri dei soci / I. Ammissione e dimissione

C. Diritti e doveri dei soci

I. Ammissione e dimissione

1 L’ammissione di nuovi soci può avvenire in ogni tempo.

2 Il diritto di dimettersi è garantito per legge, purché la dimissione ne sia annunciata almeno sei mesi prima della fine dell’anno solare, o se è previsto un periodo amministrativo, sei mesi prima dell’anno della fine di questo.

3 La qualità di socio non si può alienare né trasmettere per successione.

Art. 711C. Diritti e doveri dei soci / II. Contributi

II. Contributi

Se gli statuti lo prevedono, i soci possono essere tenuti a versare contributi.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 dic. 2004 (Determinazione dei contributi dei membri di associazioni), in vigore dal 1° giu. 2005 (RU 2005 2117; FF 2004 4277 4285).

Art. 72 C. Diritti e doveri dei soci / III. Esclusione

III. Esclusione

1 Gli statuti possono stabilire i motivi per i quali un socio può essere escluso, come possono permetterne l’esclusione anche senza indicazione del motivo.

2 In questi casi il motivo dell’esclusione non può essere contestato in giudizio.

3 Se gli statuti non contengono disposizioni di tal natura, l’esclusione può aver luogo solo per decisione dell’assemblea e per motivi gravi.

Art. 73 C. Diritti e doveri dei soci / IV. Effetti della dimissione e dell’esclusione

IV. Effetti della dimissione e dell’esclusione

1 I soci che si sono dimessi o che sono stati esclusi non hanno alcun diritto sul patrimonio sociale.

2 Essi sono tenuti alle contribuzioni per il tempo durante il quale hanno fatto parte dell’associazione.

Art. 74 C. Diritti e doveri dei soci / V. Protezione del fine

V. Protezione del fine

A nessun socio può essere imposto un cambiamento del fine sociale.

Art. 75 C. Diritti e doveri dei soci / VI. Protezione dei diritti dei soci

VI. Protezione dei diritti dei soci

Ogni socio ha, per legge, il diritto di contestare davanti al giudice le risoluzioni contrarie alla legge od agli statuti ch’egli non abbia consentite, entro un mese da quando ne ha avuto conoscenza.

Art. 75a1Cbis. Responsabilità

Cbis. Responsabilità

Il patrimonio sociale risponde delle obbligazioni dell’associazione. Salvo disposizione contraria degli statuti, tale responsabilità è esclusiva.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 dic. 2004 (Determinazione dei contributi dei membri di associazioni), in vigore dal 1° giu. 2005 (RU 2005 2117; FF 2004 4277 4285).

Art. 76 D. Scioglimento / I. Modi / 1. Per risoluzione

D. Scioglimento

I. Modi

1. Per risoluzione

Lo scioglimento dell’associazione può in ogni tempo essere pronunciato dall’assemblea.

Art. 77 D. Scioglimento / I. Modi / 2. Per legge

2. Per legge

Lo scioglimento dell’associazione avviene per legge in caso di insolvenza o quando la direzione non possa più esser costituita conformemente agli statuti.

Art. 78 D. Scioglimento / I. Modi / 3. Per sentenza del giudice

3. Per sentenza del giudice

Lo scioglimento è pronunciato dal giudice ad istanza dell’autorità competente o di un interessato, quando il fine dell’associazione sia illecito od immorale.

Art. 79 D. Scioglimento / II. Cancellazione dal registro

II. Cancellazione dal registro

Se l’associazione è iscritta nel registro di commercio, la direzione od il giudice devono comunicare lo scioglimento all’ufficiale del registro per la cancellazione.


  Capo terzo: Delle fondazioni

Art. 80 A. Costituzione / I. In genere

A. Costituzione

I. In genere

Per costituire una fondazione occorre che siano destinati dei beni al conseguimento di un fine particolare.

Art. 81 A. Costituzione / II. Forma

II. Forma

1 La fondazione è costituita per atto pubblico o per disposizione a causa di morte.

2 L’iscrizione nel registro di commercio si eseguisce secondo l’atto di fondazione od, occorrendo, secondo le istruzioni dell’autorità di vigilanza; indica inoltre i nomi dei membri dell’amministrazione.1

3 L’autorità che procede alla pubblicazione della disposizione a causa di morte comunica all’ufficiale del registro di commercio la costituzione della fondazione.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).
2 Introdotto dal n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 82 A. Costituzione / III. Contestazione

III. Contestazione

La fondazione può essere contestata dagli eredi o creditori del fondatore al pari di una donazione.

Art. 831B. Organizzazione / I. In genere

B. Organizzazione

I. In genere

Gli organi della fondazione ed il modo di amministrarla sono determinati dall’atto di fondazione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).

Art. 83a1B. Organizzazione / II. Contabilità

II. Contabilità

L’organo superiore della fondazione tiene i libri di commercio della fondazione. Le disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni2 concernenti la contabilità commerciale e la presentazione dei conti si applicano per analogia.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (diritto delle fondazioni) (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093). Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 23 dic. 2011 (Diritto contabile), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 6679; FF 2008 1321).
2 RS 220

Art. 83b1B. Organizzazione / III. Ufficio di revisione / 1. Obbligo di revisione e diritto applicabile

III. Ufficio di revisione

1. Obbligo di revisione e diritto applicabile

1 L’organo superiore della fondazione designa un ufficio di revisione.

2 L’autorità di vigilanza può liberare la fondazione dall’obbligo di designare un ufficio di revisione. Il Consiglio federale ne definisce le condizioni.

3 Salvo disposizioni particolari vigenti per le fondazioni, si applicano per analogia le disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni2 sull’ufficio di revisione nell’ambito della società anonima.

4 Se la fondazione è tenuta a far effettuare una revisione limitata, l’autorità di vigilanza può imporle di procedere a una revisione ordinaria se necessario per valutarne affidabilmente la situazione patrimoniale e reddituale.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093). Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).
2 RS 220

Art. 83c1B. Organizzazione / III. Ufficio di revisione / 2. Rapporto con l’autorità di vigilanza

2. Rapporto con l’autorità di vigilanza

L’ufficio di revisione trasmette all’autorità di vigilanza una copia della relazione di revisione e di tutte le comunicazioni importanti destinate alla fondazione.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).

Art. 83d1B. Organizzazione / IV. Lacune nell’organizzazione

IV. Lacune nell’organizzazione

1 Se l’organizzazione prevista non è sufficiente, se la fondazione è priva di uno degli organi prescritti, se uno di tali organi non è composto conformemente alle prescrizioni o se la fondazione non dispone più di un domicilio legale presso la sua sede, l’autorità di vigilanza prende le misure necessarie. Essa può in particolare:2

1.
assegnare alla fondazione un termine per ripristinare la situazione legale; o
2.
nominare l’organo mancante o un commissario.

2 Se non è possibile organizzare la fondazione conformemente al suo fine, l’autorità di vigilanza ne devolve il patrimonio a un’altra fondazione avente uno scopo quanto possibile affine.

3 La fondazione si assume le spese di queste misure. L’autorità di vigilanza può obbligarla a versare un anticipo alle persone nominate.

4 La fondazione può, per gravi motivi, chiedere all’autorità di vigilanza la revoca di persone da essa nominate.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 17 mar. 2017 (Diritto del registro di commercio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2021 (RU 2020 957; FF 2015 2849).

Art. 84 C. Vigilanza

C. Vigilanza

1 Le fondazioni sono sottoposte alla vigilanza degli enti pubblici (Confederazione, Cantone o Comune) a cui appartengono per la loro destinazione.

1bis I Cantoni possono sottoporre alla vigilanza della competente autorità cantonale le fondazioni di pertinenza comunale.1

2 L’autorità di vigilanza provvede affinché i beni siano impiegati conformemente al fine della fondazione.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 84a1Cbis. Misure in caso di eccedenza dei debiti e d’insolvenza

Cbis. Misure in caso di eccedenza dei debiti e d’insolvenza

1 Se esiste fondato timore che la fondazione abbia un’eccedenza di debiti o che per lungo tempo non sarà più in grado di far fronte ai propri impegni, l’organo superiore della fondazione stila un bilancio intermedio in base al valore di alienazione dei beni e lo sottopone per verifica all’ufficio di revisione. Se la fondazione non dispone di un ufficio di revisione, l’organo superiore della fondazione sottopone il bilancio intermedio all’autorità di vigilanza.

2 Se constata che la fondazione ha un’eccedenza di debiti o che per lungo tempo non sarà più in grado di far fronte ai propri impegni, l’ufficio di revisione sottopone il bilancio intermedio all’autorità di vigilanza.

3 L’autorità di vigilanza ordina al consiglio di fondazione di prendere le misure necessarie. Se il consiglio di fondazione non vi provvede, l’autorità di vigilanza prende essa stessa le misure occorrenti.

4 All’occorrenza, l’autorità di vigilanza chiede che siano prese misure di esecuzione forzata; le disposizioni del diritto della società anonima concernenti la dichiarazione o il differimento del fallimento sono applicabili per analogia.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 84b1

1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093). Abrogato dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).

Art. 851D. Modificazione / I. Dell’organizzazione

D. Modificazione

I. Dell’organizzazione

L’autorità federale o cantonale competente può, su proposta dell’autorità di vigilanza e sentito l’organo superiore della fondazione, modificare l’organizzazione della fondazione quando ciò sia urgentemente richiesto per la conservazione del patrimonio o per il mantenimento del fine.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 86 D. Modificazione / II. Del fine / 1. Su proposta dell’autorità di vigilanza o dell’organo superiore della fondazione

II. Del fine

1. Su proposta dell’autorità di vigilanza o dell’organo superiore della fondazione1

1 L’autorità federale o cantonale competente può, su proposta dell’autorità di vigilanza o dell’organo superiore della fondazione, modificare il fine della fondazione se questo ha assunto un carattere o sortito un effetto affatto diverso da quello che aveva in origine, cosicché la fondazione manifestamente più non corrisponda all’intenzione del fondatore.2

2 Nelle stesse circostanze possono essere tolti o modificati gli oneri o le condizioni della fondazione che ne pregiudicano il fine.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 86a1D. Modificazione / II. Del fine / 2. Su richiesta del fondatore o in virtù di una sua disposizione a causa di morte

2. Su richiesta del fondatore o in virtù di una sua disposizione a causa di morte

1 L’autorità federale o cantonale competente modifica il fine della fondazione su richiesta del fondatore o in virtù di una sua disposizione a causa di morte se tale possibilità è stata prevista nell’atto di fondazione e sono trascorsi almeno dieci anni dalla costituzione della fondazione o dall’ultima modifica chiesta dal fondatore.

2 Se la fondazione persegue uno scopo pubblico o di utilità pubblica secondo l’articolo 56 lettera g della legge federale del 14 dicembre 19902 sull’imposta federale diretta, anche il nuovo fine dev’essere pubblico o di utilità pubblica.

3 Il diritto di esigere la modifica del fine non si può cedere e non si trasmette per successione. Se il fondatore è una persona giuridica, esso si estingue al più tardi dopo venti anni dalla costituzione della fondazione.

4 Se la fondazione è stata costituita da più persone, esse possono chiedere la modifica del fine soltanto congiuntamente.

5 L’autorità che procede alla pubblicazione della disposizione a causa di morte comunica all’autorità di vigilanza competente la prevista modifica del fine della fondazione.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).
2 RS 642.11

Art. 86b1D. Modificazione / III. Modifiche accessorie dell’atto di fondazione

III. Modifiche accessorie dell’atto di fondazione

L’autorità di vigilanza può, sentito l’organo superiore della fondazione, apportare modifiche accessorie all’atto di fondazione, sempreché esse siano richieste da motivi oggettivamente fondati e non pregiudichino i diritti di terzi.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 87 E. Fondazioni di famiglia ed ecclesiastiche

E. Fondazioni di famiglia ed ecclesiastiche

1 Non sono soggette alle autorità di vigilanza le fondazioni di famiglia e le fondazioni ecclesiastiche riservate le prescrizioni del diritto pubblico.

1bis Le fondazioni di famiglia e le fondazioni ecclesiastiche non sono tenute a designare un ufficio di revisione.1

2 Le controversie di diritto privato sono di competenza del giudice.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 881F. Soppressione e cancellazione dal registro / I. Soppressione da parte dell’autorità competente

F. Soppressione e cancellazione dal registro

I. Soppressione da parte dell’autorità competente

1 L’autorità federale o cantonale competente pronuncia la soppressione della fondazione, su richiesta o d’ufficio, se:

1.
il fine non può più essere conseguito e la fondazione non può essere mantenuta mediante una modifica dell’atto di fondazione; o
2.
il fine è diventato illecito o immorale.

2 La soppressione delle fondazioni di famiglia e delle fondazioni ecclesiastiche è pronunciata dal giudice.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 891F. Soppressione e cancellazione dal registro / II. Legittimazione attiva, cancellazione dal registro

II. Legittimazione attiva, cancellazione dal registro

1 La richiesta o azione di soppressione della fondazione può essere proposta da chiunque vi abbia un interesse.

2 La soppressione è notificata all’ufficiale del registro di commercio affinché proceda alla cancellazione dell’iscrizione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF dell’8 ott. 2004 (Diritto delle fondazioni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 4545; FF 2003 7053 7093).

Art. 89a1G. Fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale

G. Fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale2

1 Per le istituzioni di previdenza a favore del personale, costituite in forma di fondazioni in virtù dell’articolo 331 del Codice delle obbligazioni3 si applicano inoltre le disposizioni seguenti.4

2 Gli organi della fondazione devono dare ai beneficiari tutte le informazioni necessarie su l’ordinamento, l’attività e lo stato finanziario della fondazione.

3 I lavoratori che pagano contributi alla fondazione partecipano all’amministrazione almeno in ragione dei medesimi. Essi eleggono tra sé, a misura del possibile, i loro rappresentanti.

4 …5

5 I beneficiari possono esigere giudizialmente prestazioni della fondazione, se hanno pagato contributi oppure se un tale diritto è loro conferito nell’ordinamento della medesima.

6 Per le fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale che operano nel campo della previdenza professionale per la vecchiaia, i superstiti e l’invalidità e soggiacciono alla legge del 17 dicembre 19936 sul libero passaggio (LFLP) si applicano inoltre le seguenti disposizioni della legge federale del 25 giugno 19827 sulla previdenza professionale per la vecchiaia, i superstiti e l’invalidità (LPP) concernenti:8

1.9
la definizione e i principi della previdenza professionale e del salario o reddito assicurabile (art. 1, 33a e 33b),
2.10
l’assoggettamento delle persone all’AVS (art. 5 cpv. 1);
3.
i beneficiari di prestazioni per i superstiti (art. 20a),
3a.11
l’adeguamento della rendita d’invalidità dopo il conguaglio della previdenza professionale (art. 24 cpv. 5),
3b.12
la proroga provvisoria del rapporto di assicurazione e il mantenimento del diritto alle prestazioni in caso di riduzione o sop-pressione della rendita dell’assicurazione invalidità (art. 26a),
4.13
l’adeguamento delle prestazioni regolamentari all’evoluzione dei prezzi (art. 36 cpv. 2–4),
4a.14
il consenso alla liquidazione in capitale (art. 37a),
5.
la prescrizione dei diritti e la conservazione di documenti (art. 41),
5a.15 l’utilizzazione, il trattamento e la comunicazione del numero d’assicurato dell’assicurazione vecchiaia e superstiti (art. 48 cpv. 4, 85a lett. f e 86a cpv. 2 lett. bbis),
6.
la responsabilità (art. 52),
7.16
l’abilitazione e i compiti degli organi di controllo (art. 52a—52e),
8.17
l’integrità e la lealtà dei responsabili, i negozi giuridici con persone vicine e i conflitti d’interesse (art. 51b, 51c e 53a),
9.
la liquidazione parziale o totale (art. 53b–53d),
10.18
lo scioglimento dei contratti (art. 53e e 53f),
11.
il fondo di garanzia (art. 56 cpv. 1 lett. c e cpv. 2–5, 56a, 57 e 59),
12.19
la vigilanza e l’alta vigilanza (art. 61–62a e 64–64c),
13.20
...
14.21
la sicurezza finanziaria (art. 65 cpv. 1, 3 e 4, 66 cpv. 4, 67 e 72a–72g),
15.
la trasparenza (art. 65a),
16.
le riserve (art. 65b),
17.
i contratti assicurativi tra istituti di previdenza e istituti d’assicurazione (art. 68 cpv. 3 e 4),
18.
l’amministrazione del patrimonio (art. 71),
19.
il contenzioso (art. 73 e 74),
20.
le disposizioni penali (art. 75–79),
21.
il riscatto (art. 79b),
22.
il salario assicurabile e il reddito assicurabile (art. 79c),
23.
l’informazione degli assicurati (art. 86b).22

7 Per le fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale che operano nel campo della previdenza professionale per la vecchiaia, i superstiti e l’invalidità, ma non soggiacciono alla LFLP, come i cosiddetti fondi padronali di previdenza con prestazioni discrezionali e le fondazioni di finanziamento, si applicano soltanto le seguenti disposizioni della LPP concernenti:

1.
l’assoggettamento delle persone all’AVS (art. 5 cpv. 1);
2.
l’utilizzazione, il trattamento e la comunicazione del numero d’assicurato dell’AVS (art. 48 cpv. 4, 85a lett. f e 86a cpv. 2 lett. bbis);
3.
la responsabilità (art. 52);
4.
l’abilitazione e i compiti dell’ufficio di revisione (art. 52a, 52b e 52c cpv. 1 lett. a–d e g, 2 e 3);
5.
l’integrità e le lealtà dei responsabili, i negozi giuridici con persone vicine e i conflitti d’interesse (art. 51b, 51c e 53a);
6.
la liquidazione totale (art. 53c);
7.
la vigilanza e l’alta vigilanza (art. 61–62a e 64–64b);
8.
il contenzioso (art. 73 e 74);
9.
le disposizioni penali (art. 75–79);
10.
il trattamento fiscale (art. 80, 81 cpv. 1 e 83).23

8 Per le fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale di cui al capoverso 7 si applicano inoltre le disposizioni seguenti:

1.
esse amministrano il loro patrimonio in modo da garantire la sicurezza degli investimenti, la loro sufficiente redditività e le liquidità necessarie all’adempimento dei propri compiti;
2.
l’autorità di vigilanza decide, su richiesta del consiglio di fondazione, in merito a fatti concernenti la liquidazione parziale di fondi padronali di previdenza con prestazioni discrezionali;
3.
esse tengono conto, per analogia, dei principi della parità di trattamento e di adeguatezza.24

1 Introdotto dal n. II della LF del 21 mar. 1958, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1958 (RU 1958 393). Fino all’entrata della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione) il 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725): art. 89bis.
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II art. 2 n. 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1971, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1972 (RU 1971 1461; FF 1968 II 177).
3 RS 220
4 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II art. 2 n. 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1971, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1972 (RU 1971 1461; FF 1968 II 177).
5 Abrogato dal n. III della LF del 21 giu. 1996, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1997 (RU 1996 3067; FF 1996 I 493 509).
6 RS 831.42
7 RS 831.40
8 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 25 set. 2015 (Fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2016 (RU 2016 935; FF 2014 5295 5673).
9 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Misure per agevolare la partecipazione al mercato del lavoro dei lavoratori anziani), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 4427; FF 2007 5199).
10 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 25 set. 2016 (Fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2016 (RU 2016 935; FF 2014 5295 5673).
11 Introdotta dall’all. n. 2 della LF del 18 mar. 2011 (6a revisione AI, primo pacchetto di misure) (RU 2011 5659; FF 2010 1603). Nuovo testo giusta il n. 1 della LF del 19 giugno 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).
12 Introdotto dal n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).
13 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 18 giu. 2004, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2005 (RU 2004 4635; FF 2003 5557).
14 Introdotto dal n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).
15 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 23 giu. 2006 (Nuovo numero d’assicurato dell’AVS), in vigore dal 1° dic. 2007 (RU 2007 5259; FF 2006 471).
16 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II 1 della LF del 19 mar. 2010 (Riforma strutturale), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 3393; FF 2007 5199).
17 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II 1 della LF del 19 mar. 2010 (Riforma strutturale), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 3393; FF 2007 5199).
18 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II della LF del 20 dic. 2006 (Cambiamento dell’istituto di previdenza), in vigore dal 1° mag. 2007 (RU 2007 1803; FF 2005 5283 5295).
19 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II 1 della LF del 19 mar. 2010 (Riforma strutturale), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 3393; FF 2007 5199).
20 Abrogato dal n. II 1 della LF del 19 mar. 2010 (Riforma strutturale), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 3393; FF 2007 5199).
21 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II 1 della LF del 17 dic. 2010 (Finanziamento degli istituti di previdenza degli enti di diritto pubblico), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 3385; FF 2008 7339).
22 Introdotto dall’all. n. I della LF del 25 giu. 1982 sulla previdenza professionale per la vecchiaia, i superstiti e l’invalidità (RU 1983 797; FF 1976 I 113). Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 3 ott. 2003 (1a revisione della LPP); n. 6, 7, 10 a 12, 14 (ad eccezione dell’art. 66 cpv. 4), 15, 17 a 20 e 23 in vigore dal 1° apr. 2004; n. 3 a 5, 8, 9, 13, 14 (art. 66 cpv. 4) e 16 in vigore dal 1° gen. 2005; n. 1, 21 e 22 in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2004 1677; FF 2000 2416).
23 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 25 set. 2015 (Fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2016 (RU 2016 935; FF 2014 5295 5673).
24 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 25 set. 2015 (Fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2015 (RU 2016 935; FF 2014 5295 5673).


  Titolo secondobis:2  Delle collette pubbliche

Art. 89b A. Difetto di amministrazione

A. Difetto di amministrazione

1 Qualora non sia provveduto all’amministrazione o all’utilizzazione di beni raccolti mediante collette pubbliche per scopi di utilità pubblica, l’autorità competente ordina i provvedimenti necessari.

2 Essa può nominare un commissario o devolvere i beni a un’associazione o fondazione avente uno scopo quanto possibile affine a quello per il quale sono stati raccolti.

3 Le disposizioni sulla protezione degli adulti relative alle curatele si applicano per analogia al commissario.

Art. 89c B. Competenza B. Competenza

B. Competenza

1 È competente il Cantone nel quale è stata amministrata la maggior parte dei beni raccolti.

2 Salvo che il Cantone disponga altrimenti, è competente l’autorità incaricata di vigilare sulle fondazioni.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).2 Testo rettificato dalla Commissione di redazione dell’AF (art. 58 cpv. 1 LParL; RS 171.10). Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

  Libro secondo: Del diritto di famiglia

  Parte prima: Del diritto matrimoniale

  Titolo terzo:1  Del matrimonio

  Capo primo: Del fidanzamento

Art. 90 A. Promessa nuziale

A. Promessa nuziale

1 Il fidanzamento è costituito dalla promessa nuziale.

2 I minorenni non sono vincolati da una promessa nuziale fatta senza il consenso del loro rappresentante legale.1

3 Il fidanzamento non dà azione per la celebrazione del matrimonio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 91 B. Scioglimento del fidanzamento / I. Regali

B. Scioglimento del fidanzamento

I. Regali

1 Ad eccezione degli usuali regali di circostanza, i regali che i fidanzati si sono fatti possono essere rivendicati, sempre che il fidanzamento non sia stato sciolto per morte di uno dei fidanzati.

2 Se non si può fare la restituzione in natura, si applicano le norme dell’indebito arricchimento.

Art. 92 B. Scioglimento del fidanzamento / II. Partecipazione finanziaria

II. Partecipazione finanziaria

Il fidanzato che in buona fede ha sostenuto delle spese in vista del matrimonio può pretendere dall’altro una partecipazione adeguata purché, visto l’insieme delle circostanze, tale partecipazione non si palesi iniqua.

Art. 93 B. Scioglimento del fidanzamento / III. Prescrizione

III. Prescrizione

Le azioni derivanti dal fidanzamento si prescrivono in un anno dalla rottura del medesimo.


  Capo secondo: Dei requisiti del matrimonio

Art. 94 A. Capacità al matrimonio

A. Capacità al matrimonio

1 Per contrarre matrimonio, gli sposi devono aver compiuto il diciottesimo anno d’età ed essere capaci di discernimento.

2 ...1


1 Abrogato dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 95 B. Impedimenti al matrimonio / I. Parentela

B. Impedimenti al matrimonio

I. Parentela1

1 È proibito contrarre matrimonio tra parenti in linea retta nonché tra fratelli o sorelle germani, consanguinei o uterini, senza distinzione di parentela per discendenza o adozione.2

2 L’adozione non annulla l’impedimento della parentela esistente fra l’adottato e i suoi discendenti, da un lato, e la sua famiglia del sangue dall’altro.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della LF del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della LF del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).

Art. 96 B. Impedimenti al matrimonio / II. Matrimonio antecedente

II. Matrimonio antecedente

Chi vuol contrarre un nuovo matrimonio deve fornire la prova che il suo matrimonio antecedente è stato sciolto o è stato dichiarato nullo.


  Capo terzo: Della procedura preparatoria e della celebrazione del matrimonio

Art. 97 A. Principi

A. Principi

1 Il matrimonio è celebrato dall’ufficiale dello stato civile dopo la procedura preparatoria.

2 La celebrazione avviene nel circondario dello stato civile scelto dai fidanzati.

3 La cerimonia religiosa non può avvenire prima della celebrazione del matrimonio civile.

Art. 97a1Abis. Elusione del diritto in materia di stranieri

Abis. Elusione del diritto in materia di stranieri

1 L’ufficiale dello stato civile si rifiuta di procedere se il fidanzato o la fidanzata manifestamente non intende creare l’unione coniugale bensì eludere le disposizioni relative all’ammissione e al soggiorno degli stranieri.

2 Egli sente i fidanzati e può sollecitare informazioni da altre autorità o terzi.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. II 4 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 sugli stranieri, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 5437; FF 2002 3327).

Art. 98 B. Procedura preparatoria / I. Domanda

B. Procedura preparatoria

I. Domanda

1 I fidanzati inoltrano la domanda di aprire la procedura preparatoria all’ufficio dello stato civile del domicilio di uno di loro.

2 Essi compaiono personalmente. Se i fidanzati provano che ciò non può essere manifestamente preteso da loro, la procedura preparatoria è ammessa nella forma scritta.

3 I fidanzati provano la loro identità per mezzo di documenti e dichiarano personalmente all’ufficio dello stato civile di adempiere i requisiti del matrimonio; producono inoltre i necessari consensi.

4 I fidanzati che non hanno la cittadinanza svizzera devono provare la legalità del loro soggiorno in Svizzera durante la procedura preparatoria.1


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 12 giu. 2009 (Impedire la conclusione di matrimoni in caso di soggiorno irregolare), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 3057; FF 2008 2145 2159).

Art. 99 B. Procedura preparatoria / II. Esecuzione e chiusura della procedura preparatoria

II. Esecuzione e chiusura della procedura preparatoria

1 L’ufficio dello stato civile esamina se:

1.
la domanda sia stata depositata regolarmente;
2.
l’identità dei fidanzati sia accertata;
3.1
siano soddisfatti i requisiti del matrimonio, in particolare se non sussistano circostanze secondo cui la domanda manifestamente non corrisponde alla libera volontà dei fidanzati.

2 Se tale è il caso, l’ufficio dello stato civile comunica ai fidanzati la conclusione della procedura preparatoria nonché il termine legale per la celebrazione del matrimonio.2

3 L’ufficio dello stato civile fissa d’intesa con i fidanzati, nel quadro delle disposizioni cantonali, il momento della celebrazione del matrimonio oppure, se ne è richiesto, autorizza la celebrazione in un altro circondario dello stato civile.

4 L’ufficio dello stato civile comunica all’autorità competente l’identità dei fidanzati che non hanno fornito la prova della legalità del loro soggiorno in Svizzera.3


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 3 della LF del 15 giu. 2012 sulle misure contro i matrimoni forzati, in vigore dal 1° lug. 2013 (RU 2013 1035; FF 2011 1987).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 28 set. 2019, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2020 (RU 2019 3813; FF 2017 5777).
3 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 12 giu. 2009 (Impedire la conclusione di matrimoni in caso di soggiorno irregolare), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 3057; FF 2008 2145 2159).

Art. 1001B. Procedura preparatoria / III. Termine

III. Termine

Il matrimonio può essere celebrato al più tardi tre mesi dopo la comunicazione della chiusura della procedura preparatoria.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 28 set. 2019, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2020 (RU 2019 3813; FF 2017 5777).

Art. 101 C. Celebrazione del matrimonio / I. Luogo

C. Celebrazione del matrimonio

I. Luogo

1 Il matrimonio è celebrato nel locale a ciò destinato del circondario dello stato civile prescelto dai fidanzati.

2 Se la procedura preparatoria si è tenuta in un altro circondario dello stato civile, i fidanzati devono presentare un’autorizzazione a celebrare il matrimonio.

3 Il matrimonio può essere celebrato in un altro luogo se i fidanzati dimostrano che manifestamente non si può esigere da loro che si rechino nel locale dei matrimoni.

Art. 102 C. Celebrazione del matrimonio / II. Forma

II. Forma

1 Il matrimonio è celebrato pubblicamente, in presenza di due testimoni maggiorenni e capaci di discernimento.

2 L’ufficiale dello stato civile rivolge agli sposi singolarmente la domanda se vogliono unirsi in matrimonio.

3 Ricevute le risposte affermative, l’ufficiale dello stato civile dichiara che, in virtù di questo vicendevole consenso, il matrimonio è celebrato.

Art. 103 D. Disposizioni d’esecuzione

D. Disposizioni d’esecuzione

Il Consiglio federale e, nell’ambito della loro competenza, i Cantoni emanano le disposizioni d’esecuzione necessarie.


  Capo quarto: Della nullità del matrimonio

Art. 104 A. Principio

A. Principio

Il matrimonio celebrato da un ufficiale dello stato civile può essere annullato soltanto per uno dei motivi previsti dal presente capo.

Art. 105 B. Nullità assoluta / I. Cause

B. Nullità assoluta

I. Cause

È data una causa di nullità se:

1.
al momento della celebrazione uno degli sposi era già coniugato e il precedente matrimonio non era stato sciolto per divorzio o morte del coniuge;
2.
al momento della celebrazione uno degli sposi non era capace di discernimento e da allora non ha riacquistato la capacità di discernimento;
3.1
la celebrazione era vietata per parentela;
4.2
uno degli sposi non intendeva creare l’unione coniugale bensì eludere le disposizioni relative all’ammissione e al soggiorno degli stranieri;
5.3
uno degli sposi ha contratto matrimonio senza che ciò corrispondesse alla sua libera volontà;4
6.5
uno degli sposi è minorenne, salvo che interessi preponderanti dello stesso impongano il proseguimento del matrimonio.

1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della LF del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2006 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).
2 Introdotto dall’all. n. II 4 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 sugli stranieri, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 5437; FF 2002 3327).
3 Introdotto dal n. I 3 della LF del 15 giu. 2012 sulle misure contro i matrimoni forzati, in vigore dal 1° lug. 2013 (RU 2013 1035; FF 2011 1987).
4 Testo rettificato dalla Commissione di redazione dell’AF (art. 58 cpv. 1 LParl; RS 171.10).
5 Introdotto dal n. I 3 della LF del 15 mag. 2013 sulle misure contro i matrimoni forzati, in vigore dal 1° lug. 2013 (RU 2013 1035FF 2011 1987; FF 2011 1987).

Art. 106 B. Nullità assoluta / II. Azione

II. Azione

1 L’azione è promossa d’ufficio dall’autorità cantonale competente al domicilio dei coniugi; la può inoltre proporre qualsiasi interessato. Compatibilmente con i loro compiti, le autorità della Confederazione e dei Cantoni che hanno motivo di ritenere nullo un matrimonio ne informano l’autorità competente per promuovere l’azione.1

2 Dopo lo scioglimento del matrimonio l’azione di nullità non è più proponibile d’ufficio; ogni interessato può nondimeno proporla.

3 L’azione è proponibile in ogni tempo.


1 Per. introdotto dal n. I 3 della LF del 15 mag. 2012 sulle misure contro i matrimoni forzati, in vigore dal 1° lug. 2013 (RU 2013 1035; FF 2011 1987).

Art. 107 C. Nullità relativa / I. Cause

C. Nullità relativa

I. Cause

Un coniuge può domandare la nullità del matrimonio se:

1.
al momento della celebrazione del matrimonio era, per causa transitoria, incapace di discernimento;
2.
aveva dichiarato per errore di acconsentire alla celebrazione, sia che non intendesse sposarsi, sia che credesse di sposare un’altra persona;
3.
aveva contratto matrimonio perché intenzionalmente indotto in errore su qualità personali essenziali dell’altro;
4.1
...

1 Abrogato dal n. I 3 della LF del 15 giu. 2012 sulle misure contro i matrimoni forzati, con effetto dal 1° lug. 2013 (RU 2013 1035; FF 2011 1987).

Art. 108 C. Nullità relativa / II. Azione

II. Azione

1 L’azione di nullità deve essere promossa entro sei mesi dal giorno in cui l’avente diritto ha scoperto la causa di nullità o sono cessati gli effetti della minaccia, ma in ogni caso entro cinque anni dalla celebrazione del matrimonio.

2 L’azione di nullità del matrimonio non si trasmette agli eredi; un erede può tuttavia proseguire l’azione già promossa al momento del decesso.

Art. 109 D. Effetti della sentenza

D. Effetti della sentenza

1 La nullità del matrimonio produce effetti soltanto dopo essere stata pronunciata dal giudice; fino alla sentenza il matrimonio produce tutti gli effetti di un matrimonio valido, eccetto i diritti di successione che il coniuge superstite perde in ogni caso.

2 Le disposizioni relative al divorzio si applicano per analogia agli effetti della sentenza di nullità sui coniugi e sui figli.

3 La presunzione di paternità del marito decade se il matrimonio è dichiarato nullo perché contratto allo scopo di eludere le prescrizioni relative all’ammissione e al soggiorno degli stranieri.1


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. II 4 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 sugli stranieri, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 5437; FF 2002 3327).

Art. 1101

1 Abrogato dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).


  Titolo quarto:2  Del divorzio e della separazione coniugale

  Capo primo: Delle condizioni del divorzio

Art. 1111A. Divorzio su richiesta comune / I. Accordo completo

A. Divorzio su richiesta comune

I. Accordo completo

1 Se i coniugi domandano il divorzio mediante richiesta comune e producono una convenzione completa sugli effetti del divorzio, corredata dei documenti necessari e di conclusioni comuni relative ai figli, il giudice li sente separatamente e insieme. L’audizione può svolgersi in più sedute.

2 Se si è convinto che i coniugi hanno inoltrato la richiesta e stipulato la convenzione dopo matura riflessione e per libera scelta e che la convenzione con le conclusioni relative ai figli può essere omologata, il giudice pronuncia il divorzio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 25 set. 2009 (Periodo di riflessione nella procedura di divorzio su richiesta comune), in vigore dal 1° feb. 2010 (RU 2010 281; FF 2008 1667 1683).

Art. 112 A. Divorzio su richiesta comune / II. Accordo parziale

II. Accordo parziale

1 I coniugi possono domandare il divorzio mediante richiesta comune e dichiarare che il tribunale decida su quelle conseguenze accessorie in merito alle quali sussiste disaccordo.

2 I coniugi sono sentiti, come nel caso di accordo completo, sulla loro richiesta, sulle conseguenze del divorzio in merito alle quali sono pervenuti ad un accordo e sulla loro dichiarazione di demandare al giudice la decisione sulle altre conseguenze.

3 …1


1 Abrogato dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 1131

1 Abrogato dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 1141B. Divorzio su azione di un coniuge / I. Dopo la sospensione della vita comune

B. Divorzio su azione di un coniuge

I. Dopo la sospensione della vita comune

Un coniuge può domandare il divorzio se al momento della litispendenza o il giorno della sostituzione della richiesta comune con un’azione unilaterale i coniugi vivono separati da almeno due anni.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 19 dic. 2003 (Termine di separazione nel diritto del divorzio), in vigore dal 1° giu. 2004 (RU 2004 2161; FF 2003 7101 5066).

Art. 1151B. Divorzio su azione di un coniuge / II. Rottura del vincolo coniugale

II. Rottura del vincolo coniugale

Un coniuge può domandare il divorzio prima della scadenza del termine di due anni quando per motivi gravi che non gli sono imputabili non si possa ragionevolmente esigere da lui la continuazione dell’unione coniugale.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 19 dic. 2003 (Termine di separazione nel diritto del divorzio), in vigore dal 1° giu. 2004 (RU 2004 2161; FF 2003 7101 5066).

Art. 1161

1 Abrogato dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).


  Capo secondo: Della separazione coniugale

Art. 117 A. Condizioni e procedura

A. Condizioni e procedura

1 Alle stesse condizioni del divorzio, i coniugi possono chiedere la separazione.

2  1

3 Il diritto di domandare il divorzio non è toccato dalla sentenza di separazione.


1 Abrogato dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 118 B. Effetti della separazione

B. Effetti della separazione

1 Con la separazione personale subentra per legge la separazione dei beni.

2 Per il rimanente si applicano per analogia le disposizioni sulle misure a tutela dell’unione coniugale.


  Capo terzo: Degli effetti del divorzio

Art. 1191A. Cognome

A. Cognome

Il coniuge che ha cambiato cognome in occasione del matrimonio conserva il nuovo cognome anche dopo il divorzio; può tuttavia dichiarare in ogni tempo all’ufficiale dello stato civile di voler riprendere il proprio cognome da celibe o nubile.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 120 B. Regime matrimoniale e diritto successorio

B. Regime matrimoniale e diritto successorio

1 La liquidazione del regime dei beni è retta dalle disposizioni del diritto sul regime dei beni matrimoniali.

2 I coniugi divorziati cessano di essere eredi legittimi l’uno dell’altro e non possono avanzare pretese per disposizioni a causa di morte allestite prima della litispendenza della procedura di divorzio.

Art. 121 C. Abitazione familiare

C. Abitazione familiare

1 Quando lo giustifichino la presenza di figli o altri gravi motivi, il giudice può attribuire a uno soltanto dei coniugi i diritti e gli obblighi risultanti da un contratto di locazione relativo all’abitazione familiare, purché si possa ragionevolmente esigerlo dall’altro coniuge.

2 Il coniuge ex locatario risponde solidalmente della pigione fino al momento in cui il rapporto di locazione cessa o può essere sciolto per contratto o per legge, ma in ogni caso durante due anni al massimo; ove fosse citato in giudizio per il canone di locazione, egli può compensare l’importo versato con il contributo di mantenimento dovuto all’altro coniuge, mediante rate equivalenti al canone mensile.

3 Se l’abitazione familiare appartiene a uno dei coniugi, il giudice può, alle medesime condizioni, attribuire all’altro un diritto d’abitazione, per una durata limitata e contro adeguata indennità o imputazione sul contributo di mantenimento. Il diritto d’abitazione è limitato o soppresso ove lo esigano fatti nuovi rilevanti.

Art. 1221D. Previdenza professionale / I. Principio

D. Previdenza professionale

I. Principio

Le pretese di previdenza professionale acquisite durante il matrimonio fino al promovimento della procedura di divorzio sono oggetto di conguaglio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).

Art. 1231D. Previdenza professionale / II. Conguaglio delle prestazioni d’uscita

II. Conguaglio delle prestazioni d’uscita

1 Le prestazioni d’uscita acquisite, compresi gli averi di libero passaggio e i prelievi anticipati per la proprietà di un’abitazione, sono divisi per metà.

2 Il capoverso 1 non si applica ai versamenti unici di beni propri per legge.

3 Le prestazioni d’uscita da dividere sono calcolate conformemente agli articoli 15–17 e 22a o 22b della legge del 17 dicembre 19932 sul libero passaggio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).
2 RS 831.42

Art. 1241D. Previdenza professionale / III. Conguaglio delle rendite d’invalidità versate prima dell’età di pensionamento stabilita dal regolamento

III. Conguaglio delle rendite d’invalidità versate prima dell’età di pensionamento stabilita dal regolamento

1 Se, al momento del promovimento della procedura di divorzio, un coniuge percepisce una rendita d’invalidità e non ha ancora raggiunto l’età di pensionamento stabilita dal regolamento, l’importo che gli spetterebbe conformemente all’articolo 2 capoverso 1ter della legge del 17 dicembre 19932 sul libero passaggio in caso di soppressione della rendita d’invalidità vale come prestazione d’uscita.

2 Le disposizioni sul conguaglio delle prestazioni d’uscita si applicano per analogia.

3 Il Consiglio federale stabilisce in quali casi, in seguito alla riduzione della rendita d’invalidità per sovraindennizzo, l’importo di cui al capo-verso 1 non può essere utilizzato per il conguaglio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).
2 RS 831.42

Art. 124a1D. Previdenza professionale / IV. Conguaglio delle rendite d’invalidità versate dopo l’età di pensionamento stabilita dal regolamento o di rendite di vecchiaia

IV. Conguaglio delle rendite d’invalidità versate dopo l’età di pensionamento stabilita dal regolamento o di rendite di vecchiaia

1 Se, al momento del promovimento della procedura di divorzio, un coniuge percepisce una rendita d’invalidità e ha già raggiunto l’età di pensionamento stabilita dal regolamento, oppure percepisce una rendita di vecchiaia, il giudice decide secondo equità sulla divisione della rendita. A tal fine, tiene conto in particolare della durata del matrimonio e dei bisogni di previdenza di entrambi i coniugi.

2 La parte di rendita assegnata al coniuge creditore è convertita in una rendita vitalizia. Quest’ultima gli è versata dall’istituto di previdenza del coniuge debitore o è trasferita nella sua previdenza.

3 Il Consiglio federale disciplina:

1.
la conversione attuariale della parte di rendita in una rendita vitalizia;
2.
il modo di procedere in caso di differimento della prestazione di vecchiaia o di riduzione della rendita d’invalidità per sovraindennizzo.

1 Introdotto dal n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).

Art. 124b1D. Previdenza professionale / V. Eccezioni

V. Eccezioni

1 In una convenzione sugli effetti del divorzio i coniugi possono derogare al principio della divisione per metà o rinunciare al conguaglio della previdenza professionale, se rimane garantita un’adeguata previdenza per la vecchiaia e per l’invalidità.

2 Il giudice assegna al coniuge creditore meno della metà della prestazione d’uscita o rifiuta completamente la divisione se sussistono motivi gravi. Vi è motivo grave in particolare ove la divisione per metà appaia iniqua sotto il profilo:

1.
della liquidazione del regime dei beni oppure della situazione economica dei coniugi dopo il divorzio;
2.
dei bisogni previdenziali dei coniugi, in particolare tenuto conto della loro differenza di età.

3 Il giudice può assegnare più della metà della prestazione d’uscita al coniuge creditore che provvede alla cura dei figli comuni dopo il divorzio, se la previdenza per la vecchiaia e per l’invalidità del coniuge debitore rimane adeguata.


1 Introdotto dal n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).

Art. 124c1D. Previdenza professionale / VI. Compensazione di pretese reciproche

VI. Compensazione di pretese reciproche

1 Le pretese reciproche dei coniugi su prestazioni d’uscita o su parti di rendite sono compensate. La compensazione delle pretese su una rendita è compiuta prima di convertire la parte di rendita assegnata al coniuge creditore in una rendita vitalizia.

2 Le prestazioni d’uscita possono essere compensate con parti di rendite soltanto se i coniugi e i loro istituti di previdenza professionale vi acconsentono.


1 Introdotto dal n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).

Art. 124d1D. Previdenza professionale / VII. Conguaglio non ragionevolmente esigibile

VII. Conguaglio non ragionevolmente esigibile

Se la ponderazione dei bisogni previdenziali dei due coniugi rivela che il conguaglio dei fondi della previdenza professionale non può essere ragionevolmente preteso, il coniuge debitore deve al coniuge creditore una liquidazione in capitale.


1 Introdotto dal n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).

Art. 124e1D. Previdenza professionale / VIII. Conguaglio impossibile

VIII. Conguaglio impossibile

1 Se il conguaglio dei fondi della previdenza professionale è impossibile, il coniuge debitore deve al coniuge creditore un’indennità adeguata sotto forma di liquidazione in capitale o di rendita.

2 Una sentenza svizzera può essere modificata su richiesta del coniuge debitore, se pretese di previdenza sussistenti all’estero sono prima state conguagliate da un’indennità adeguata ai sensi del capoverso 1 e sono poi divise da una sentenza estera vincolante per il debitore estero della previdenza.


1 Introdotto dal n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).

Art. 125 E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio / I. Condizioni

E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio

I. Condizioni

1 Se non si può ragionevolmente pretendere che un coniuge provveda da sé al proprio debito mantenimento, inclusa un’adeguata previdenza per la vecchiaia, l’altro coniuge gli deve un adeguato contributo di mantenimento.

2 Per decidere dell’erogazione del contributo e se del caso per fissarne l’importo e la durata, il giudice tiene conto in particolare dei seguenti elementi:

1.
ripartizione dei compiti durante il matrimonio;
2.
durata del matrimonio;
3.
tenore di vita dei coniugi durante il matrimonio;
4.
età e salute dei coniugi;
5.
reddito e patrimonio dei coniugi;
6.
portata e durata delle cure ancora dovute ai figli;
7.
formazione professionale e prospettive di reddito dei coniugi nonché presumibile costo del reinserimento professionale del beneficiario del mantenimento;
8.
aspettative dell’assicurazione per la vecchiaia e i superstiti e della previdenza professionale o di altre forme di previdenza privata o pubblica, incluso il risultato prevedibile della divisione delle prestazioni d’uscita.

3 Un contributo può eccezionalmente essere rifiutato o ridotto, ove sia manifestamente iniquo soprattutto perché l’avente diritto:

1.
ha gravemente contravvenuto al suo obbligo di contribuire al mantenimento della famiglia;
2.
ha deliberatamente provocato la situazione di necessità nella quale versa;
3.
ha commesso un grave reato contro l’obbligato o una persona a lui intimamente legata.
Art. 126 E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio / II. Modalità del contributo di mantenimento

II. Modalità del contributo di mantenimento

1 Il giudice stabilisce il contributo di mantenimento sotto forma di una rendita e fissa l’inizio dell’obbligo di versamento.

2 Se lo giustificano circostanze particolari, invece della rendita può ordinare una liquidazione.

3 Può subordinare a determinate condizioni il contributo di mantenimento.

Art. 127 E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio / III. Rendita / 1. Disposizioni speciali

III. Rendita

1. Disposizioni speciali

I coniugi possono disporre nella convenzione che la rendita ivi fissata non sarà modificata o potrà esserlo soltanto in parte.

Art. 128 E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio / III. Rendita / 2. Adeguamento al rincaro

2. Adeguamento al rincaro

Il giudice può decidere che il contributo di mantenimento sia aumentato o ridotto automaticamente in funzione di determinati cambiamenti del costo della vita.

Art. 129 E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio / III. Rendita / 3. Modifica mediante sentenza

3. Modifica mediante sentenza

1 Se la situazione muta in maniera rilevante e durevole, la rendita può essere ridotta, soppressa o temporaneamente sospesa; un miglioramento della situazione dell’avente diritto deve essere preso in considerazione soltanto se nella sentenza di divorzio si è potuto fissare una rendita sufficiente a coprire il suo debito mantenimento.

2 L’avente diritto può esigere per il futuro un adattamento della rendita al rincaro allorché i redditi dell’obbligato aumentino in maniera imprevista dopo il divorzio.

3 Entro un termine di cinque anni dal divorzio l’avente diritto può esigere che sia fissata una rendita oppure che essa sia aumentata, qualora nella sentenza di divorzio sia stata constatata l’impossibilità di fissare una rendita sufficiente a coprire un debito mantenimento, ma la situazione economica dell’obbligato sia nel frattempo migliorata.

Art. 130 E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio / III. Rendita / 4. Estinzione per legge

4. Estinzione per legge

1 L’obbligo di mantenimento si estingue alla morte dell’avente diritto o dell’obbligato.

2 Fatte salve convenzioni contrarie, esso si estingue anche se l’avente diritto passa a nuove nozze.

Art. 1311E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio / IV. Esecuzione / 1. Aiuto all’incasso

IV. Esecuzione

1. Aiuto all’incasso

1 Se l’obbligo di mantenimento non è adempiuto, un ufficio specializzato designato dal diritto cantonale aiuta in maniera adeguata e di regola gratuitamente l’avente diritto che ne faccia richiesta a ottenere l’esecuzione della pretesa di mantenimento.

2 Il Consiglio federale definisce le prestazioni di aiuto all’incasso.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 131a1E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio / IV. Esecuzione / 2. Anticipi

2. Anticipi

1 È fatta salva la competenza del diritto pubblico di disciplinare l’erogazione di anticipi allorché l’obbligato non adempia l’obbligo di mantenimento.

2 La pretesa di mantenimento passa, con i diritti ad essa connessi, all’ente pubblico nella misura in cui quest’ultimo assuma il mantenimento dell’avente diritto.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 132 E. Obbligo di mantenimento dopo il divorzio / IV. Esecuzione / 3. Diffida ai debitori e garanzia

3. Diffida ai debitori e garanzia1

1 Quando l’obbligato trascura l’obbligo di mantenimento, il giudice può prescrivere ai suoi debitori di effettuare totalmente o in parte i loro pagamenti all’avente diritto.

2 Se persiste nel negligere l’obbligo di mantenimento o se si presume che prepari la fuga, dilapidi la sostanza o la faccia scomparire, il giudice può obbligarlo a prestare adeguate garanzie per i contributi di mantenimento futuri.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 1331F. Figli / I. Diritti e doveri dei genitori

F. Figli

I. Diritti e doveri dei genitori

1 Il giudice disciplina i diritti e i doveri dei genitori secondo le disposizioni che reggono gli effetti della filiazione. In particolare disciplina:

1.
l’autorità parentale;
2.
la custodia;
3.
le relazioni personali (art. 273) o la partecipazione di ciascun genitore alla cura del figlio; e
4.
il contributo di mantenimento.

2 Il giudice tiene conto di tutte le circostanze importanti per il bene del figlio. Prende in considerazione l’istanza comune dei genitori e, per quanto possibile, il parere del figlio.

3 Può stabilire il contributo di mantenimento anche per un periodo che va oltre la maggiore età del figlio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 134 F. Figli / II. Modificazione delle circostanze

II. Modificazione delle circostanze

1 A istanza di un genitore, del figlio o dell’autorità di protezione dei minori, il giudice modifica l’attribuzione dell’autorità parentale se fatti nuovi importanti lo esigono per il bene del figlio.

2 Le condizioni per la modifica degli altri diritti e doveri dei genitori sono rette dalle disposizioni sugli effetti della filiazione.1

3 Se i genitori hanno raggiunto un accordo, l’autorità di protezione dei minori è competente per un nuovo disciplinamento dell’autorità parentale e della custodia nonché per l’approvazione di un contratto di mantenimento. Negli altri casi decide il giudice cui compete la modifica della sentenza di divorzio.2

4 Se deve decidere sulla modifica dell’autorità parentale, della custodia o del contributo di mantenimento di un figlio minorenne, il giudice modifica se del caso anche le relazioni personali o la partecipazione di ciascun genitore alla cura del figlio; negli altri casi l’autorità di protezione dei minori decide circa la modifica delle relazioni personali o della partecipazione alla cura del figlio.3


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 135 a 1491

1 Abrogati dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 150 a 158

Abrogati


  Titolo quinto3 : Degli effetti del matrimonio in generale

Art. 159 A. Unione coniugale; diritti doveri dei coniugi

A. Unione coniugale; diritti doveri dei coniugi

1 La celebrazione del matrimonio crea l’unione coniugale.

2 I coniugi si obbligano a cooperare alla prosperità dell’unione ed a provvedere in comune ai bisogni della prole.

3 Essi si devono reciproca assistenza e fedeltà.

Art. 1601B. Cognome

B. Cognome

1 Ciascun coniuge conserva il proprio cognome.

2 Gli sposi possono tuttavia dichiarare all’ufficiale dello stato civile di voler assumere un cognome coniugale; possono scegliere tra il cognome da nubile o celibe della sposa o dello sposo.

3 Se mantengono ciascuno il proprio cognome, gli sposi determinano il cognome dei figli, scegliendolo tra i loro cognomi da celibe o nubile. In casi motivati, l’ufficiale dello stato civile può liberarli da quest’obbligo.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 1611C. Cittadinanza

C. Cittadinanza

Ciascun coniuge conserva la propria cittadinanza cantonale e attinenza comunale.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 162 D. Abitazione coniugale

D. Abitazione coniugale

I coniugi scelgono insieme l’abitazione coniugale.

Art. 163 E. Mantenimento della famiglia / I. In genere

E. Mantenimento della famiglia

I. In genere

1 I coniugi provvedono in comune, ciascuno nella misura delle sue forze, al debito mantenimento della famiglia.

2 Essi s’intendono sul loro contributo rispettivo, segnatamente circa le prestazioni pecuniarie, il governo della casa, la cura della prole o l’assistenza nella professione o nell’impresa dell’altro.

3 In tale ambito, tengono conto dei bisogni dell’unione coniugale e della loro situazione personale.

Art. 164 E. Mantenimento della famiglia / II. Somma a libera disposizione

II. Somma a libera disposizione

1 Il coniuge che provvede al governo della casa o alla cura della prole o assiste l’altro nella sua professione od impresa ha diritto di ricevere regolarmente da costui una congrua somma di cui possa disporre liberamente.

2 Tale somma va determinata tenendo conto degli introiti propri del coniuge avente diritto nonché di quanto, nella consapevolezza delle proprie responsabilità, l’altro coniuge impiega per la previdenza in favore della famiglia, della professione od impresa.

Art. 165 E. Mantenimento della famiglia / III. Contributi straordinari di un coniuge

III. Contributi straordinari di un coniuge

1 Il coniuge che ha collaborato nella professione o nell’impresa dell’altro in misura notevolmente superiore al contributo che gli incombe per il mantenimento della famiglia ha diritto a un’equa indennità.

2 Lo stesso vale per il coniuge che, con il suo reddito o la sua sostanza, ha contribuito al mantenimento della famiglia in misura notevolmente superiore a quanto era tenuto.

3 Tuttavia, l’indennità non può essere pretesa se i contributi straordinari sono stati prestati in base a un contratto di lavoro, di mutuo o di società o in base a un altro rapporto giuridico.

Art. 166 F. Rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale

F. Rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale

1 Durante la vita comune, ciascun coniuge rappresenta l’unione coniugale per i bisogni correnti della famiglia.

2 Per gli altri bisogni, un coniuge rappresenta l’unione coniugale soltanto se:

1.
è stato autorizzato dall’altro o dal giudice;
2.
l’affare non consente una dilazione e l’altro coniuge è impossibilitato a dare il proprio consenso per malattia, assenza o analoghi motivi.

3 Con i propri atti, ciascun coniuge obbliga se stesso e, in quanto non ecceda il potere di rappresentanza in modo riconoscibile dai terzi, solidalmente anche l’altro.

Art. 167 G. Professione e impresa dei coniugi

G. Professione e impresa dei coniugi

Nella scelta e nell’esercizio della propria professione od impresa ciascun coniuge usa riguardo nei confronti dell’altro e tiene conto del bene dell’unione coniugale.

Art. 168 H. Negozi giuridici dei coniugi / I. In genere

H. Negozi giuridici dei coniugi

I. In genere

Salvo diverso disposto della legge, ciascun coniuge può liberamente concludere negozi giuridici con l’altro o con terzi.

Art. 169 H. Negozi giuridici dei coniugi / II. Abitazione familiare

II. Abitazione familiare

1 Un coniuge non può, senza l’esplicito consenso dell’altro, disdire un contratto di locazione, alienare la casa o l’appartamento familiare o limitare con altri negozi giuridici i diritti inerenti all’abitazione familiare.

2 Il coniuge che non può procurarsi questo consenso, o cui il consenso è negato senza valido motivo, può ricorrere al giudice.

Art. 170 J. Obbligo d’informazione

J. Obbligo d’informazione

1 Ciascun coniuge può esigere che l’altro lo informi su i suoi redditi, la sua sostanza e i suoi debiti.

2 A sua istanza, il giudice può obbligare l’altro coniuge o terzi a dare le informazioni occorrenti e a produrre i documenti necessari.

3 Resta salvo il segreto professionale degli avvocati, dei notai, dei medici, degli ecclesiastici e dei loro ausiliari.

Art. 171 K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / I. Consultori

K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale

I. Consultori

I Cantoni provvedono affinché, in caso di difficoltà matrimoniali, i coniugi possano rivolgersi, insieme o separatamente, a consultori matrimoniali o familiari.

Art. 172 K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / II. Misure giudiziarie / 1. In genere

II. Misure giudiziarie

1. In genere

1 I coniugi possono, insieme o separatamente, chiedere la mediazione del giudice qualora uno di loro si dimostri dimentico dei suoi doveri familiari od essi siano in disaccordo in un affare importante per l’unione coniugale.

2 Il giudice richiama i coniugi ai loro doveri e cerca di conciliarli; con il loro consenso, può far capo a periti o indirizzarli a un consultorio matrimoniale o familiare.

3 Se necessario, il giudice, ad istanza di un coniuge, prende le misure previste dalla legge. La disposizione relativa alla protezione della personalità in caso di violenze, minacce o insidie è applicabile per analogia.1


1 Per. introdotto dal n. I della LF del 23 giu. 2006 (Protezione della personalità in caso di violenza, minacce o insidie), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2007 (RU 2007 137; FF 2005 6127 6151).

Art. 173 K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / II. Misure giudiziarie / 2. Durante la convivenza / a. Prestazioni pecuniarie

2. Durante la convivenza

a. Prestazioni pecuniarie

1 Ad istanza di un coniuge, il giudice stabilisce i contributi pecuniari per il mantenimento della famiglia.

2 Parimenti, ad istanza di uno dei coniugi, stabilisce la somma destinata a quello che provvede al governo della casa o alla cura della prole o assiste l’altro nella sua professione od impresa.

3 Le prestazioni possono essere pretese per il futuro e per l’anno precedente l’istanza.

Art. 174 K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / II. Misure giudiziarie / 2. Durante la convivenza / b. Privazione della rappresentanza

b. Privazione della rappresentanza

1 Se un coniuge eccede il suo potere di rappresentare l’unione coniugale o se ne dimostra incapace, il giudice, ad istanza dell’altro, può privarlo in tutto od in parte della rappresentanza.

2 Il coniuge istante può comunicare la privazione a terzi soltanto con avviso personale.

3 La privazione è opponibile ai terzi di buona fede soltanto quando sia stata pubblicata per ordine del giudice.

Art. 175 K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / II. Misure giudiziarie / 3. Sospensione della comunione domestica / a. Motivi

3. Sospensione della comunione domestica

a. Motivi

Un coniuge è autorizzato a sospendere la comunione domestica sintanto che la convivenza pone in grave pericolo la sua personalità, la sua sicurezza economica o il bene della famiglia.

Art. 176 K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / II. Misure giudiziarie / 3. Sospensione della comunione domestica / b. Organizzazione della vita separata

b. Organizzazione della vita separata

1 Ove sia giustificata la sospensione della comunione domestica, il giudice, ad istanza di uno dei coniugi:

1.1
stabilisce i contributi di mantenimento destinati ai figli e al coniuge;
2.
prende le misure riguardanti l’abitazione e le suppellettili domestiche;
3.
ordina la separazione dei beni se le circostanze la giustificano.

2 Un coniuge può parimenti proporre l’istanza quando la convivenza sia impossibile, segnatamente perché l’altro la rifiuta senza valido motivo.

3 Se i coniugi hanno figli minorenni, il giudice prende le misure necessarie secondo le disposizioni sugli effetti della filiazione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 176a1K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / II. Misure giudiziarie / 4. Esecuzione / a. Aiuto all’incasso e anticipi

4. Esecuzione

a. Aiuto all’incasso e anticipi

Sono applicabili le disposizioni relative all’aiuto all’incasso e agli anticipi previste in caso di divorzio e nell’ambito degli effetti della filiazione.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 177 K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / II. Misure giudiziarie / 4. Esecuzione / b. Diffida ai debitori

b. Diffida ai debitori1

Se un coniuge non adempie il suo obbligo di mantenimento, il giudice può ordinare ai suoi debitori che facciano i loro pagamenti, in tutto o in parte, all’altro.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 178 K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / II. Misure giudiziarie / 5. Restrizioni del potere di disporre

5. Restrizioni del potere di disporre

1 Se necessario per assicurare le basi economiche della famiglia o per adempire un obbligo patrimoniale derivante dall’unione coniugale, il giudice, ad istanza di un coniuge, può subordinare al consenso di questo la disposizione di determinati beni da parte dell’altro.

2 Il giudice prende le appropriate misure conservative.

3 Se vieta a un coniuge di disporre di un fondo, ne ordina d’ufficio la menzione nel registro fondiario.

Art. 1791K. Protezione dell’unione coniugale / II. Misure giudiziarie / 6. Modificazione delle circostanze

6. Modificazione delle circostanze

1 Il giudice, ad istanza di un coniuge, adatta le misure alle nuove circostanze e se non sono più giustificate le revoca. Le disposizioni sulla modificazione delle circostanze in caso di divorzio si applicano per analogia.2

2 Se i coniugi tornano a convivere, le misure ordinate per la vita separata decadono, eccetto la separazione dei beni e le misure di protezione del figlio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 1801

1 Abrogato dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).


  Titolo sesto:4  Del regime dei beni fra i coniugi

  Capo primo: Disposizioni generali

Art. 181 A. Regime ordinario

A. Regime ordinario

I coniugi sono sottoposti al regime della partecipazione agli acquisti in quanto non abbiano altrimenti disposto per convenzione matrimoniale o non sia loro applicato il regime straordinario.

Art. 182 B. Convenzione matrimoniale / I. Scelta del regime

B. Convenzione matrimoniale

I. Scelta del regime

1 Le convenzioni matrimoniali possono essere stipulate prima o dopo la celebrazione del matrimonio.

2 Gli sposi od i coniugi possono scegliere, revocare o modificare il loro regime dei beni soltanto nei limiti della legge.

Art. 183 B. Convenzione matrimoniale / II. Capacità di contrattare

II. Capacità di contrattare

1 Chi intende stipulare una convenzione matrimoniale dev’essere capace di discernimento.

2 I minorenni e i maggiorenni sotto curatela comprendente la stipulazione di una convenzione matrimoniale abbisognano del consenso del loro rappresentante legale.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 184 B. Convenzione matrimoniale / III. Forma

III. Forma

La convenzione matrimoniale si fa per atto pubblico firmato dalle persone contraenti e, se del caso, dal rappresentante legale.

Art. 185 C. Regime straordinario / I. Ad istanza di un coniuge / 1. Pronuncia

C. Regime straordinario

I. Ad istanza di un coniuge

1. Pronuncia

1 Ad istanza di un coniuge, il giudice pronuncia la separazione dei beni se vi è grave motivo.

2 Vi è grave motivo segnatamente se:

1.
l’altro coniuge è oberato o la sua quota di beni comuni è pignorata;
2.
l’altro coniuge mette in pericolo gli interessi dell’istante o della comunione;
3.
l’altro coniuge rifiuta senza giusto motivo il consenso richiesto per disporre di beni comuni;
4.
l’altro coniuge rifiuta di informare l’istante sui suoi redditi, sulla sua sostanza e sui suoi debiti o sui beni comuni;
5.
l’altro coniuge è durevolmente incapace di discernimento.

3 L’istanza di separazione dei beni per durevole incapacità di discernimento può essere proposta anche dal rappresentante legale del coniuge incapace.

Art. 1861C. Regime straordinario / I. Ad istanza di un coniuge / 2.

2.


1 Abrogato dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).

Art. 187 C. Regime straordinario / I. Ad istanza di un coniuge / 3. Revoca

3. Revoca

1 Per convenzione matrimoniale, i coniugi possono in ogni tempo ripristinare il precedente regime dei beni o adottarne uno nuovo.

2 Caduto il motivo della separazione dei beni, il giudice, ad istanza di un coniuge, può ordinare il ripristino del precedente regime.

Art. 188 C. Regime straordinario / II. In caso di esecuzione forzata / 1. Fallimento

II. In caso di esecuzione forzata

1. Fallimento

Se i coniugi vivono in comunione di beni, il fallimento dichiarato contro uno di loro li assoggetta per legge alla separazione dei beni.

Art. 189 C. Regime straordinario / II. In caso di esecuzione forzata / 2. Pignoramento / a. Pronuncia

2. Pignoramento

a. Pronuncia

Se i coniugi vivono in comunione di beni ed uno di loro sia escusso per un proprio debito con pignoramento della sua quota di beni comuni, l’autorità di vigilanza in materia di esecuzione può chiedere al giudice di pronunciare la separazione dei beni.

Art. 190 C. Regime straordinario / II. In caso di esecuzione forzata / 2. Pignoramento / b. Istanza

b.1 Istanza

1 L’istanza è diretta contro ambo i coniugi.

2 …2


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).
2 Abrogato dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).

Art. 191 C. Regime straordinario / II. In caso di esecuzione forzata / 3. Cessazione

3. Cessazione

1 Tacitati i creditori, il giudice, ad istanza di un coniuge, può ordinare il ripristino della comunione dei beni.

2 Per convenzione matrimoniale, i coniugi possono adottare la partecipazione agli acquisti.

Art. 192 C. Regime straordinario / III. Liquidazione del regime precedente

III. Liquidazione del regime precedente

In caso di separazione dei beni, la liquidazione fra i coniugi è retta dalle norme del loro precedente regime, salvo diversa disposizione della legge.

Art. 193 D. Protezione dei creditori

D. Protezione dei creditori

1 La costituzione o modificazione del regime dei beni e le liquidazioni fra i coniugi non possono sottrarre all’azione dei creditori di un coniuge o della comunione quei beni sui quali i creditori stessi avevano diritto di essere soddisfatti.

2 Se tali beni sono passati in proprietà di uno dei coniugi, questi è tenuto al pagamento dei debiti, ma può limitare questa responsabilità in quanto provi che i beni ricevuti non bastano per il pagamento integrale.

Art. 1941E.

E.


1 Abrogato dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).

Art. 195 F. Amministrazione della sostanza di un coniuge da parte dell’altro

F. Amministrazione della sostanza di un coniuge da parte dell’altro

1 Quando un coniuge abbia espressamente o tacitamente affidato all’altro l’amministrazione della sua sostanza, s’applicano, salvo patto diverso, le disposizioni sul mandato.

2 Sono salve le disposizioni sull’estinzione dei debiti fra coniugi.

Art. 195a G. Inventario

G. Inventario

1 Ciascun coniuge può in ogni tempo chiedere all’altro di concorrere alla compilazione per atto pubblico di un inventario dei loro beni.

2 Questo inventario si presume esatto se compilato entro un anno dal conferimento dei beni.


  Capo secondo: Del regime ordinario della partecipazione agli acquisti

Art. 196 A. Rapporti di proprietà / I. Composizione

A. Rapporti di proprietà

I. Composizione

Il regime della partecipazione agli acquisti comprende gli acquisti e i beni propri di ogni coniuge.

Art. 197 A. Rapporti di proprietà / II. Acquisti

II. Acquisti

1 Sono acquisti i beni acquisiti da un coniuge a titolo oneroso durante il regime.

2 Gli acquisti di un coniuge comprendono segnatamente:

1.
il guadagno del suo lavoro;
2.
le prestazioni di istituzioni di previdenza a favore del personale, di assicurazioni sociali e di istituzioni di previdenza sociale;
3.
il risarcimento per impedimento al lavoro;
4.
i redditi dei suoi beni propri;
5.
i beni acquisiti in sostituzione degli acquisti.
Art. 198 A. Rapporti di proprietà / III. Beni propri / 1. Per legge

III. Beni propri

1. Per legge

Sono beni propri per legge:

1.
le cose che servono esclusivamente all’uso personale di un coniuge;
2.
i beni appartenenti ad un coniuge all’inizio del regime o successivamente pervenutigli per eredità od altro titolo gratuito;
3.
le pretese di riparazione morale;
4.
i beni acquisiti in sostituzione dei beni propri.
Art. 199 A. Rapporti di proprietà / III. Beni propri / 2. Per convenzione matrimoniale

2. Per convenzione matrimoniale

1 Per convenzione matrimoniale, i coniugi possono dichiarare beni propri acquisti destinati all’esercizio di una professione od impresa.

2 Per convenzione matrimoniale, possono inoltre escludere redditi dei beni propri dagli acquisti.

Art. 200 A. Rapporti di proprietà / IV. Prova

IV. Prova

1 Chiunque affermi che un bene sia di proprietà dell’uno o dell’altro coniuge deve fornirne la prova.

2 Mancando tale prova, si presume che il bene sia di comproprietà dei coniugi.

3 Fino a prova del contrario, tutti i beni di un coniuge sono considerati acquisti.

Art. 201 B. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione

B. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione

1 Nei limiti della legge, ciascun coniuge amministra i suoi acquisti e i suoi beni propri, ne gode e ne dispone.

2 Se un bene è di comproprietà dei coniugi, nessuno di loro può, salvo patto contrario, disporre della sua quota senza il consenso dell’altro.

Art. 202 C. Responsabilità verso i terzi

C. Responsabilità verso i terzi

Ciascun coniuge risponde per i propri debiti con tutta la sua sostanza.

Art. 203 D. Debiti tra coniugi

D. Debiti tra coniugi

1 Il regime dei beni non influisce sulla scadenza dei debiti fra i coniugi.

2 Il coniuge debitore può tuttavia chiedere dilazioni qualora il pagamento di debiti pecuniari o la restituzione di cose gli arrecasse serie difficoltà tali da mettere in pericolo l’unione coniugale; se le circostanze lo giustificano, dovrà fornire garanzie.

Art. 204 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / I. Momento dello scioglimento

E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione

I. Momento dello scioglimento

1 Il regime dei beni è sciolto alla morte di un coniuge o allorquando sia convenuto un altro regime.

2 In caso di divorzio, separazione, nullità del matrimonio o separazione dei beni giudiziale, lo scioglimento si ha per avvenuto il giorno della presentazione dell’istanza.

Art. 205 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / II. Ripresa di beni e regolamento dei debiti / 1. In genere

II. Ripresa di beni e regolamento dei debiti

1. In genere

1 Ciascun coniuge riprende i suoi beni che si trovano in possesso dell’altro.

2 Se un bene è in comproprietà, il coniuge che provi d’avere un interesse preponderante può, oltre alle altre misure legali, chiedere che tale bene gli sia attribuito per intero contro compenso all’altro coniuge.

3 I coniugi regolano i loro debiti reciproci.

Art. 206 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / II. Ripresa di beni e regolamento dei debiti / 2. Partecipazione al plusvalore

2. Partecipazione al plusvalore

1 Se un coniuge ha contribuito senza corrispettivo all’acquisto, al miglioramento o alla conservazione di beni dell’altro e, al momento della liquidazione, ne risulta un plusvalore, il suo credito è proporzionale al contributo prestato ed è calcolato secondo il valore attuale dei beni; se ne risulta un deprezzamento, il credito equivale al contributo prestato.

2 Se uno di questi beni è stato precedentemente alienato, il credito è calcolato secondo il ricavo ottenuto al momento dell’alienazione ed è immediatamente esigibile.

3 I coniugi possono escludere o modificare per convenzione scritta la partecipazione al plusvalore.

Art. 207 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / III. Calcolo degli aumenti / 1. Separazione degli acquisti e dei beni propri

III. Calcolo degli aumenti

1. Separazione degli acquisti e dei beni propri

1 Gli acquisti e i beni propri di ogni coniuge sono disgiunti secondo il loro stato al momento dello scioglimento del regime dei beni.

2 Il capitale ricevuto da un coniuge da un’istituzione di previdenza o per impedimento al lavoro è ascritto ai beni propri fino a concorrenza del valore capitalizzato della rendita che gli sarebbe spettata allo scioglimento del regime dei beni.

Art. 208 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / III. Calcolo degli aumenti / 2. Reintegrazione negli acquisti

2. Reintegrazione negli acquisti

1 Sono reintegrate negli acquisti:

1.
le liberalità fatte da un coniuge negli ultimi cinque anni prima dello scioglimento del regime dei beni senza il consenso dell’altro, eccettuati i regali d’uso;
2.
le alienazioni fatte da un coniuge durante il regime dei beni con l’intenzione di sminuire la partecipazione dell’altro.

2 …1


1 Abrogato dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 209 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / III. Calcolo degli aumenti / 3. Compensi tra acquisti e beni propri

3. Compensi tra acquisti e beni propri

1 In caso di liquidazione, vi è diritto al compenso tra acquisti e beni propri di uno stesso coniuge qualora debiti gravanti gli uni siano stati pagati con gli altri.

2 Un debito grava la massa patrimoniale cui è materialmente connesso, ma nel dubbio gli acquisti.

3 Se una massa patrimoniale ha contribuito all’acquisto, al miglioramento o alla conservazione di beni dell’altra e ne è derivato un plusvalore o un deprezzamento, il diritto al compenso è proporzionale al contributo prestato ed è calcolato secondo il valore dei beni al momento della liquidazione o dell’alienazione.

Art. 210 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / III. Calcolo degli aumenti / 4. Aumento

4. Aumento

1 L’aumento è dato dal valore totale degli acquisti, inclusi i beni reintegrati ed i compensi e dedotti i debiti che li gravano.

2 Non è tenuto conto delle diminuzioni.

Art. 211 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / IV. Determinazione del valore / 1. Valore venale

IV. Determinazione del valore

1. Valore venale

In caso di liquidazione, i beni sono stimati secondo il valore venale.

Art. 212 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / IV. Determinazione del valore / 2. Valore di reddito / a. In genere

2. Valore di reddito

a. In genere

1 L’azienda agricola che un coniuge continua ad amministrare personalmente in qualità di proprietario o di cui il coniuge superstite o un discendente pretende legittimamente l’attribuzione per intero è stimata, per calcolare la quota di plusvalore e il credito di partecipazione, secondo il valore di reddito.

2 Il coniuge proprietario dell’azienda agricola o i suoi eredi possono opporre all’altro coniuge, a titolo di quota di plusvalore o di credito di partecipazione, soltanto l’importo che avrebbero ricevuto in caso di imputazione dell’azienda secondo il valore venale.

3 Le disposizioni successorie sulla stima e sulla partecipazione dei coeredi all’utile si applicano per analogia.

Art. 213 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / IV. Determinazione del valore / 2. Valore di reddito / b. Circostanze speciali

b. Circostanze speciali

1 Il valore d’imputazione può essere adeguatamente aumentato se circostanze speciali lo giustificano.

2 Sono circostanze speciali segnatamente i bisogni di sostentamento del coniuge superstite, il prezzo d’acquisto dell’azienda agricola, con gli investimenti, e la situazione finanziaria del coniuge cui appartiene l’azienda agricola.

Art. 214 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / IV. Determinazione del valore / 3. Momento determinante

3. Momento determinante

1 Per il valore degli acquisti esistenti allo scioglimento del regime dei beni, è determinante il momento della liquidazione.

2 Per i beni reintegrati negli acquisti, è determinante il momento in cui furono alienati.

Art. 215 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / V. Partecipazione all’aumento / 1. Per legge

V. Partecipazione all’aumento

1. Per legge

1 A ciascun coniuge od ai suoi eredi spetta la metà dell’aumento conseguito dall’altro.

2 I crediti sono compensati.

Art. 216 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / V. Partecipazione all’aumento / 2. Per convenzione / a. In genere

2. Per convenzione

a. In genere

1 Per convenzione matrimoniale può essere stabilita una diversa partecipazione all’aumento.

2 Tali convenzioni non devono pregiudicare i diritti alla legittima dei figli non comuni e dei loro discendenti.

Art. 217 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / V. Partecipazione all’aumento / 2. Per convenzione / b. In caso di divorzio, separazione, nullità del matrimonio o separazione dei beni giudiziale

b. In caso di divorzio, separazione, nullità del matrimonio o separazione dei beni giudiziale

In caso di divorzio, separazione, nullità del matrimonio o separazione dei beni giudiziale, le clausole che modificano la partecipazione legale all’aumento s’applicano soltanto se la convenzione matrimoniale lo prevede espressamente.

Art. 218 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / VI. Pagamento del credito di partecipazione e della quota di plusvalore / 1. Dilazione

VI. Pagamento del credito di partecipazione e della quota di plusvalore

1. Dilazione

1 Il coniuge debitore della partecipazione all’aumento e della quota di plusvalore può chiedere dilazioni qualora il pagamento immediato gli arrecasse serie difficoltà.

2 Se le parti non convengono altrimenti, il credito di partecipazione e la quota di plusvalore fruttano interessi a contare dalla chiusura della liquidazione e, se le circostanze lo giustificano, devono essere garantiti.

Art. 219 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / VI. Pagamento del credito di partecipazione e della quota di plusvalore / 2. Abitazione e suppellettili domestiche

2. Abitazione e suppellettili domestiche

1 Per poter mantenere l’attuale tenore di vita, il coniuge superstite può chiedere che la casa o l’appartamento in cui vivevano i coniugi e che apparteneva al defunto gli sia attribuito in usufrutto o in diritto d’abitazione, imputandolo sul suo credito di partecipazione; è fatto salvo un diverso disciplinamento pattuito per convenzione matrimoniale.

2 Alle stesse condizioni, può chiedere che gli sia attribuita la proprietà delle suppellettili domestiche.

3 Ove le circostanze lo giustifichino, invece dell’usufrutto o del diritto d’abitazione può essergli attribuita, ad istanza sua o degli altri eredi legittimi del defunto, la proprietà della casa o dell’appartamento.

4 Questi diritti del coniuge superstite non si estendono ai locali di cui un discendente ha bisogno per continuare la professione od impresa esercitatavi dal defunto; sono salve le disposizioni del diritto successorio rurale.

Art. 220 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / VI. Pagamento del credito di partecipazione e della quota di plusvalore / 3. Azione contro i terzi

3. Azione contro i terzi

1 Se i beni del coniuge debitore o della sua successione non bastano a soddisfare il credito di partecipazione all’aumento, il coniuge creditore o i suoi eredi possono esigere dai terzi beneficati la restituzione, fino a concorrenza dell’importo scoperto, delle liberalità reintegrabili negli acquisti.

2 L’azione dev’essere proposta entro un anno dal momento in cui il coniuge creditore o i suoi eredi hanno avuto conoscenza della lesione dei loro diritti, in ogni caso però entro dieci anni dallo scioglimento del regime dei beni.

3 Per altro, si applicano per analogia le disposizioni sull’azione di riduzione ereditaria.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).


  Capo terzo: Della comunione dei beni

Art. 221 A. Rapporti di proprietà / I. Composizione

A. Rapporti di proprietà

I. Composizione

Il regime della comunione dei beni comprende i beni comuni e i beni propri di ciascun coniuge.

Art. 222 A. Rapporti di proprietà / II. Beni comuni / 1. Comunione universale

II. Beni comuni

1. Comunione universale

1 La comunione universale dei beni riunisce in un’unica sostanza tutti i beni e tutti i redditi dei coniugi, eccetto i beni propri per legge.

2 La sostanza comune appartiene, indivisa, ad entrambi i coniugi.

3 Nessun coniuge può disporre della sua quota.

Art. 223 A. Rapporti di proprietà / II. Beni comuni / 2. Comunioni limitate / a. Comunione d’acquisti

2. Comunioni limitate

a. Comunione d’acquisti

1 Per convenzione matrimoniale, i coniugi possono limitare la comunione agli acquisti.

2 I redditi dei beni propri entrano nei beni comuni.

Art. 224 A. Rapporti di proprietà / II. Beni comuni / 2. Comunioni limitate / b. Altre comunioni

b. Altre comunioni

1 Per convenzione matrimoniale, i coniugi possono escludere dalla comunione determinati beni o categorie di beni, come i fondi, il reddito lavorativo di un coniuge o i beni che gli servono per esercitare una professione o un’impresa.

2 Salvo patto contrario, i redditi di questi beni non entrano nei beni comuni.

Art. 225 A. Rapporti di proprietà / III. Beni propri

III. Beni propri

1 I beni propri sono costituiti per convenzione matrimoniale, per liberalità di terzi o per legge.

2 Sono beni propri per legge le cose che servono esclusivamente all’uso personale di uno dei coniugi e le pretese di riparazione morale.

3 I beni spettanti a un coniuge a titolo di legittima non possono essergli devoluti a titolo di beni propri per liberalità dei suoi parenti se, secondo la convenzione matrimoniale, fanno parte dei beni comuni.

Art. 226 A. Rapporti di proprietà / IV. Prova

IV. Prova

Sono considerati comuni tutti i beni di cui non sia provato che siano beni propri di un coniuge.

Art. 227 B. Amministrazione e disposizione / I. Beni comuni / 1. Amministrazione ordinaria

B. Amministrazione e disposizione

I. Beni comuni

1. Amministrazione ordinaria

1 I coniugi amministrano i beni comuni nell’interesse dell’unione coniugale.

2 Nei limiti dell’amministrazione ordinaria, ciascun coniuge può obbligare la comunione e disporre dei beni comuni.

Art. 228 B. Amministrazione e disposizione / I. Beni comuni / 2. Amministrazione straordinaria

2. Amministrazione straordinaria

1 Al di là dell’amministrazione ordinaria, i coniugi possono obbligare la comunione e disporre dei beni comuni soltanto congiuntamente o con il consenso reciproco.

2 I terzi possono presumere il consenso sempreché non sappiano o non debbano sapere che manca.

3 Sono salve le disposizioni sulla rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale.

Art. 229 B. Amministrazione e disposizione / I. Beni comuni / 3. Professione od impresa comune

3. Professione od impresa comune

Il coniuge che, con il consenso dell’altro, eserciti da solo una professione od impresa attingendo ai beni comuni può compiere tutti gli atti giuridici connessi con tale esercizio.

Art. 230 B. Amministrazione e disposizione / I. Beni comuni / 4. Rinuncia e accettazione di eredità

4. Rinuncia e accettazione di eredità

1 Un coniuge non può, senza il consenso dell’altro, rinunciare a un’eredità che entrerebbe nei beni comuni o accettare un’eredità oberata.

2 Il coniuge che non può procurarsi questo consenso, o cui il consenso è negato senza valido motivo, può ricorrere al giudice.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 231 B. Amministrazione e disposizione / I. Beni comuni / 5. Responsabilità e spese dell’amministrazione

5. Responsabilità e spese dell’amministrazione

1 Allo scioglimento del regime dei beni, ciascun coniuge risponde degli atti concernenti i beni comuni al pari di un mandatario.

2 Le spese dell’amministrazione gravano i beni comuni.

Art. 232 B. Amministrazione e disposizione / II. Beni propri

II. Beni propri

1 Nei limiti della legge, ciascun coniuge amministra i suoi beni propri e ne dispone.

2 Se i redditi confluiscono nei beni propri, questi ne sopportano le spese.

Art. 233 C. Responsabilità verso i terzi / I. Debiti integrali

C. Responsabilità verso i terzi

I. Debiti integrali

Ciascun coniuge risponde con i suoi beni propri e con i beni comuni:

1.
per i debiti contratti nell’esercizio del suo potere di rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale o di amministrazione dei beni comuni;
2.
per i debiti contratti nell’esercizio della sua professione od impresa, sempreché essa sia esercitata attingendo ai beni comuni o i redditi della medesima confluiscano nei beni comuni;
3.
per i debiti che obbligano personalmente anche l’altro coniuge;
4.
per i debiti per i quali i coniugi hanno convenuto con il terzo che il debitore risponderà, oltre che con i suoi beni propri, anche con quelli comuni.
Art. 234 C. Responsabilità verso i terzi / II. Debiti propri

II. Debiti propri

1 Per tutti gli altri debiti, ciascun coniuge risponde soltanto con i suoi beni propri e con la metà del valore dei beni comuni.

2 Sono salve le pretese per arricchimento della comunione.

Art. 235 D. Debiti tra coniugi

D. Debiti tra coniugi

1 Il regime dei beni non influisce sulla scadenza dei debiti fra i coniugi.

2 Il coniuge debitore può tuttavia chiedere dilazioni qualora il pagamento di debiti pecuniari o la restituzione di cose gli arrecasse serie difficoltà tali da mettere in pericolo l’unione coniugale; se le circostanze lo giustificano, dovrà fornire garanzie.

Art. 236 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / I. Momento dello scioglimento

E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione

I. Momento dello scioglimento

1 Il regime dei beni è sciolto alla morte di un coniuge o allorquando sia convenuto un altro regime o dichiarato il fallimento di uno dei coniugi.

2 In caso di divorzio, separazione, nullità del matrimonio o separazione dei beni giudiziale, lo scioglimento si ha per avvenuto il giorno della presentazione dell’istanza.

3 Per lo stato dei beni comuni e dei beni propri è determinante il momento dello scioglimento del regime dei beni.

Art. 237 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / II. Attribuzione ai beni propri

II. Attribuzione ai beni propri

Il capitale ricevuto da un coniuge da un’istituzione di previdenza o per impedimento al lavoro e divenuto bene comune è ascritto ai beni propri fino a concorrenza del valore capitalizzato della rendita che gli sarebbe spettata allo scioglimento del regime dei beni.

Art. 238 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / III. Compensi tra beni comuni e beni propri

III. Compensi tra beni comuni e beni propri

1 In caso di liquidazione, vi è diritto al compenso tra beni comuni e beni propri di un coniuge qualora debiti gravanti gli uni siano stati pagati con gli altri.

2 Un debito grava la massa patrimoniale cui è materialmente connesso, ma nel dubbio i beni comuni.

Art. 239 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / IV. Partecipazione al plusvalore

IV. Partecipazione al plusvalore

Se i beni propri di un coniuge o i beni comuni hanno contribuito all’acquisto, al miglioramento o alla conservazione di un bene di un’altra massa patrimoniale, s’applicano per analogia le disposizioni sulla partecipazione al plusvalore previste nel regime della partecipazione agli acquisti.

Art. 240 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / V. Determinazione del valore

V. Determinazione del valore

Per il valore dei beni comuni esistenti allo scioglimento del regime dei beni è determinante il momento della liquidazione.

Art. 241 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / VI. Ripartizione / 1. In caso di morte o di pattuizione di un altro regime dei beni

VI. Ripartizione

1. In caso di morte o di pattuizione di un altro regime dei beni

1 In caso di scioglimento della comunione per la morte di un coniuge o per pattuizione di un altro regime, a ciascun coniuge od ai suoi eredi spetta la metà dei beni comuni.

2 Per convenzione matrimoniale può essere stabilito un altro modo di ripartizione.

3 Tali convenzioni non devono pregiudicare i diritti alla legittima dei discendenti.

Art. 242 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / VI. Ripartizione / 2. Negli altri casi

2. Negli altri casi

1 In caso di divorzio, separazione, nullità del matrimonio o separazione dei beni legale o giudiziale, ciascun coniuge riprende fra i beni comuni quelli che nel regime della partecipazione agli acquisti sarebbero stati suoi beni propri.

2 I beni comuni restanti spettano per metà a ciascuno dei coniugi.

3 Le clausole che modificano la ripartizione legale si applicano soltanto se la convenzione matrimoniale lo prevede espressamente.

Art. 243 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / VII. Esecuzione della ripartizione / 1. Beni propri

VII. Esecuzione della ripartizione

1. Beni propri

In caso di scioglimento della comunione per la morte di un coniuge, il coniuge superstite può chiedere di ricuperare i beni che nel regime della partecipazione agli acquisti sarebbero stati suoi beni propri, imputandoli sulla sua quota.

Art. 244 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / VII. Esecuzione della ripartizione / 2. Abitazione e suppellettili domestiche

2. Abitazione e suppellettili domestiche

1 Se la casa o l’appartamento, in cui vivevano i coniugi, o suppellettili domestiche appartengono ai beni comuni, il coniuge superstite può chiedere che gliene sia attribuita la proprietà imputandoli sulla sua quota.

2 Ove le circostanze lo giustifichino, invece della proprietà può essergli attribuito, ad istanza sua o degli altri eredi legittimi del defunto, l’usufrutto o un diritto d’abitazione.

3 Se lo scioglimento della comunione non è dovuto alla morte di un coniuge, l’istanza può essere proposta dal coniuge che provi di avere un interesse preponderante.

Art. 245 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / VII. Esecuzione della ripartizione / 3. Altri beni

3. Altri beni

Il coniuge che provi di avere un interesse preponderante può chiedere anche l’attribuzione di altri beni, imputandoli sulla sua quota.

Art. 246 E. Scioglimento del regime e liquidazione / VII. Esecuzione della ripartizione / 4. Altre norme di ripartizione

4. Altre norme di ripartizione

Per altro, s’applicano per analogia le disposizioni sulla ripartizione della comproprietà e sull’esecuzione della divisione dell’eredità.


  Capo quarto: Della separazione dei beni

Art. 247 A. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione / I. In genere

A. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione

I. In genere

Nei limiti della legge, ciascun coniuge amministra i suoi beni, ne gode e ne dispone.

Art. 248 A. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione / II. Prova

II. Prova

1 Chiunque affermi che un bene sia di proprietà dell’uno o dell’altro coniuge deve fornirne la prova.

2 Mancando tale prova, si presume che il bene sia di comproprietà dei coniugi.

Art. 249 B. Responsabilità verso i terzi

B. Responsabilità verso i terzi

Ciascun coniuge risponde per i propri debiti con tutta la sua sostanza.

Art. 250 C. Debiti fra coniugi

C. Debiti fra coniugi

1 Il regime dei beni non influisce sulla scadenza dei debiti fra i coniugi.

2 Il coniuge debitore può tuttavia chiedere dilazioni qualora il pagamento di debiti pecuniari o la restituzione di cose gli arrecasse serie difficoltà tali da mettere in pericolo l’unione coniugale; se le circostanze lo giustificano, dovrà fornire garanzie.

Art. 251 D. Attribuzione in caso di comproprietà

D. Attribuzione in caso di comproprietà

Se un bene è in comproprietà, il coniuge che provi d’avere un interesse preponderante può, al momento dello scioglimento del regime dei beni e oltre alle altre misure legali, chiedere che tale bene gli sia attribuito per intero contro compenso all’altro coniuge.


  Parte seconda: Della parentela

  Titolo settimo: Del sorgere della filiazione5 

  Capo primo: Disposizioni generali6 

Art. 2521A. Sorgere della filiazione in genere

A. Sorgere della filiazione in genere

1 Il rapporto di filiazione sorge, fra la madre ed il figlio, con la nascita.

2 Fra il padre ed il figlio, risulta dal matrimonio con la madre o è stabilito per riconoscimento o per sentenza del giudice.

3 Inoltre, il rapporto di filiazione sorge con l’adozione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2531B.

B.


1 Abrogato dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).

Art. 2541

1 Abrogato dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).


  Capo secondo: Della paternità del marito7 

Art. 2551A. Presunzione

A. Presunzione

1 Il marito è presunto essere il padre del figlio nato durante il matrimonio.

2 Se muore, il marito è presunto essere il padre del figlio nato entro trecento giorni dalla sua morte oppure, in caso di nascita più tardiva, se è provata l’anteriorità del concepimento rispetto alla morte.

3 Se è dichiarato scomparso, il marito è presunto essere il padre del figlio nato entro trecento giorni dal momento del pericolo di morte o dell’ultima notizia.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 2561B. Contestazione / I. Diritto all’azione

B. Contestazione

I. Diritto all’azione

1 La presunzione di paternità può essere contestata giudizialmente:

1.
dal marito;
2.
dal figlio, se la comunione domestica dei coniugi è cessata durante la sua minore età.

2 L’azione del marito è diretta contro il figlio e la madre, quella del figlio contro il marito e la madre.

3 L’azione è improponibile per il marito che ha consentito al concepimento da parte di un terzo. Riguardo il diritto di contestazione del figlio è fatta salva la legge del 18 dicembre 19982 sulla medicina della procreazione.3


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 RS 810.11
3 Nuovo testo giusta l’art. 39 della LF del 18 dic. 1998 sulla medicina della procreazione, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 3055; FF 1996 III 189).

Art. 256a1B. Contestazione / II. Motivo / 1. Concepimento nel matrimonio

II. Motivo

1. Concepimento nel matrimonio

1 Se il figlio è stato concepito durante il matrimonio, l’attore deve dimostrare che il marito non è il padre.

2 Si presume concepito durante il matrimonio il figlio nato non prima di centottanta giorni dalla celebrazione del matrimonio e non oltre trecento giorni dallo scioglimento di quest’ultimo per causa di morte.2


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 256b1B. Contestazione / II. Motivo / 2. Concepimento prima del matrimonio o durante la sospensione della comunione domestica

2. Concepimento prima del matrimonio o durante la sospensione della comunione domestica

1 Se il figlio è stato concepito prima della celebrazione del matrimonio o in un momento in cui la comunione domestica era sospesa, la contestazione non dev’essere ulteriormente motivata.

2 La paternità del marito è tuttavia presunta anche in questo caso quando sia reso verosimile ch’egli abbia avuto concubito con la madre al tempo del concepimento.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 256c1B. Contestazione / III. Termine

III. Termine

1 Il marito può proporre l’azione entro un anno dacché ebbe notizia della nascita e dell’esclusa sua paternità, o del concubito di un terzo con la madre al tempo del concepimento, in ogni caso però entro cinque anni dalla nascita.

2 L’azione del figlio può essere proposta al più tardi un anno dopo la raggiunta maggiore età.

3 Scaduto il termine, la contestazione è ammessa se il ritardo è scusato da gravi motivi.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2571C. Duplice presunzione

C. Duplice presunzione

1 Se il figlio è nato nei trecento giorni successivi allo scioglimento del matrimonio per causa di morte e la madre è nel frattempo passata a nuove nozze, il presunto padre è il secondo marito.2

2 Se questa presunzione è infirmata, si ha per padre il primo marito.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 2581D. Azione dei genitori

D. Azione dei genitori

1 L’azione di contestazione può essere proposta dal padre o dalla madre del marito morto o divenuto incapace di discernimento prima della scadenza del termine per proporla.

2 Le disposizioni sulla contestazione da parte del marito si applicano per analogia.

3 Il termine annuale per proporre l’azione decorre al più presto dal momento in cui si è avuto conoscenza della morte o dell’incapacità di discernimento del marito.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2591E. Matrimonio dei genitori

E. Matrimonio dei genitori

1 Se i genitori si uniscono in matrimonio, ai figli prenati s’applicano per analogia le disposizioni sui figli nati durante il matrimonio, tosto che la paternità del marito sia stata stabilita per riconoscimento o per sentenza del giudice.

2 Il riconoscimento può essere contestato:

1.
dalla madre;
2.
dal figlio o, dopo la sua morte, dai suoi discendenti, se la comunione domestica dei coniugi è cessata durante la sua minore età o il riconoscimento è stato pronunciato soltanto dopo il compimento del suo dodicesimo anno d’età;
3.
dal Comune di origine o di domicilio del marito;
4.
dal marito.

3 Le disposizioni sulla contestazione del riconoscimento sono applicabili per analogia.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).


  Capo terzo: Del riconoscimento e della sentenza di paternità8 

Art. 2601A. Riconoscimento / I. Condizioni e forma

A. Riconoscimento

I. Condizioni e forma

1 Se il rapporto di filiazione esiste soltanto nei confronti della madre, il padre può riconoscere il figlio.

2 Se l’autore del riconoscimento è minorenne o sotto curatela generale o se l’autorità di protezione degli adulti l’ha ordinato, occorre il consenso del rappresentante legale.2

3 Il riconoscimento avviene mediante dichiarazione davanti all’ufficiale di stato civile o per testamento o, se è pendente un’azione d’accertamento della paternità, davanti al giudice.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 260a1A. Riconoscimento / II. Contestazione / 1. Diritto all’azione

II. Contestazione

1. Diritto all’azione

1 Il riconoscimento può essere contestato davanti al giudice da ogni interessato, segnatamente dalla madre, dal figlio e, dopo la sua morte, dai suoi discendenti, nonché dal Comune di origine o di domicilio dell’autore del riconoscimento.

2 L’autore del riconoscimento può proporre l’azione soltanto se ha riconosciuto il figlio sotto l’influsso di una minaccia di grave ed imminente pericolo per la vita, la salute, l’onore o il patrimonio proprio o di una persona a lui intimamente legata ovvero trovandosi in errore circa la sua paternità.

3 L’azione è diretta contro l’autore del riconoscimento e il figlio, sempreché essi non siano attori.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 260b1A. Riconoscimento / II. Contestazione / 2. Motivo

2. Motivo

1 L’attore deve dimostrare che l’autore del riconoscimento non è il padre.

2 Madre e figlio devono tuttavia addurre questa prova soltanto se l’autore del riconoscimento rende verosimile di aver avuto concubito con la madre al tempo del concepimento.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 260c1A. Riconoscimento / II. Contestazione / 3. Termine

3. Termine

1 L’attore deve proporre l’azione entro un anno da quando ebbe conoscenza del riconoscimento e del fatto che l’autore di esso non è il padre o che un terzo ha avuto concubito con la madre al tempo del concepimento, ovvero dalla scoperta dell’errore o dalla cessazione della minaccia, in ogni caso però entro cinque anni dal riconoscimento.

2 Tuttavia, l’azione del figlio può essere proposta fino a un anno dopo la raggiunta maggiore età.

3 Scaduto il termine, la contestazione è ammessa se il ritardo è giustificato da gravi motivi.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2611B. Azione di paternità / I. Diritto all’azione

B. Azione di paternità

I. Diritto all’azione

1 Tanto la madre quanto il figlio possono proporre l’azione d’accertamento della filiazione paterna.

2 L’azione è diretta contro il padre o, dopo la sua morte e nell’ordine qui dato, contro i suoi discendenti, genitori o fratelli e sorelle ovvero, se questi mancano, contro l’autorità competente del suo ultimo domicilio.

3 Se il padre è morto, sua moglie, a salvaguardia dei propri interessi, è informata dal giudice che l’azione è stata proposta.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2621B. Azione di paternità / II. Presunzione

II. Presunzione

1 La paternità è presunta quando il convenuto ha avuto concubito con la madre nel tempo dal trecentesimo al centottantesimo giorno prima della nascita.

2 Questa presunzione vale anche se il figlio è stato concepito innanzi il trecentesimo giorno o dopo il centottantesimo giorno prima della nascita e il convenuto ha avuto concubito con la madre al tempo del concepimento.

3 La presunzione cade se il convenuto dimostra che la sua paternità è esclusa o meno verosimile di quella altrui.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2631B. Azione di paternità / III. Termine

III. Termine

1 L’azione può essere proposta prima o dopo il parto, ma al più tardi:

1.
dalla madre, entro un anno dalla nascita;
2.
dal figlio, entro un anno dalla raggiunta maggiore età.

2 Se già esiste rapporto di filiazione con un altro uomo, l’azione può essere in ogni caso proposta entro un anno dal giorno dell’estinzione di tale rapporto.

3 Scaduto il termine, l’azione è ammessa se il ritardo è scusato da gravi motivi.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).


  Capo quarto9 : Dell’adozione10 

Art. 2641A. Adozione di minorenni / I. Condizioni generali

A. Adozione di minorenni

I. Condizioni generali

1 Il minorenne può essere adottato quando gli aspiranti all’adozione abbiano provveduto alla sua cura ed educazione durante almeno un anno e l’insieme delle circostanze consenta di prevedere che il vincolo di filiazione servirà al suo bene, senza pregiudicare, in modo non equo, altri figli degli aspiranti all’adozione.

2 Un’adozione è possibile soltanto se, considerata la loro età e situazione personale, gli aspiranti all’adozione sono in grado di provvedere ai bisogni del minorenne presumibilmente sino al raggiungimento della maggiore età.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 264a1A. Adozione di minorenni / II. Adozione congiunta

II. Adozione congiunta

1 I coniugi possono adottare congiuntamente un minorenne se vivono in comunione domestica da almeno tre anni e se entrambi hanno almeno 28 anni.

2 È possibile derogare all’età minima se è necessario per tutelare il bene del minorenne. I coniugi devono motivare la richiesta di una deroga.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 11 85). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 264b1A. Adozione di minorenni / III. Adozione singola

III. Adozione singola

1 Una persona non coniugata e non vincolata da un’unione domestica registrata può adottare da sola un minorenne se ha almeno 28 anni.

2 Una persona coniugata di almeno 28 anni può adottare da sola un minorenne se il coniuge è durevolmente incapace di discernimento o è, da oltre due anni, assente con ignota dimora, oppure se vi è separazione giudiziale pronunciata da oltre tre anni.

3 Una persona di almeno 28 anni vincolata da un’unione domestica registrata può adottare da sola un minorenne se il partner registrato è durevolmente incapace di discernimento o è, da oltre due anni, assente con ignota dimora.

4 È possibile derogare all’età minima se è necessario per tutelare il bene del minorenne. L’aspirante all’adozione deve motivare la richiesta di una deroga.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 264c1A. Adozione di minorenni / IV. Adozione del figliastro

IV. Adozione del figliastro

1 Una persona può adottare il figlio del:

1.
coniuge;
2.
partner registrato;
3.
convivente di fatto.

2 La coppia deve vivere in comunione domestica da almeno tre anni.

3 I conviventi di fatto non possono essere né coniugati né vincolati da un’unione domestica registrata.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 264d1A. Adozione di minorenni / V. Differenza d’età

V. Differenza d’età

1 La differenza d’età tra l’adottando e gli aspiranti all’adozione non può essere né inferiore a 16 anni né superiore a 45 anni.

2 Sono possibili deroghe se è necessario per tutelare il bene dell’adottando. Gli aspiranti all’adozione devono motivare la richiesta di una deroga.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 2651A. Adozione di minorenni / VI. Consenso dell’adottando e dell’autorità di protezione dei minori

VI. Consenso dell’adottando e dell’autorità di protezione dei minori

1 Se l’adottando è capace di discernimento, il suo consenso è necessario perché possa essere adottato.

2 Se è sotto tutela o curatela, è necessario il consenso dell’autorità di protezione dei minori, quand’anche l’adottando sia capace di discernimento.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 265a1A. Adozione di minorenni / VII. Consenso dei genitori / 1. Forma

VII. Consenso dei genitori2

1. Forma

1 Per l’adozione è richiesto il consenso del padre e della madre dell’adottando.

2 Il consenso dev’essere dato, oralmente o per scritto, all’autorità di protezione dei minori3 del domicilio o della dimora dei genitori o dell’adottando e registrato a verbale.

3 È valido anche ove non indicasse gli aspiranti all’adozione o questi non fossero ancora designati.4


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).
3 Nuova espr. giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391). Di detta mod. é tenuto conto in tutto il presente testo.
4 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 265b1A. Adozione di minorenni / VII. Consenso dei genitori / 2. Termini

2. Termini

1 Il consenso non può essere dato prima di sei settimane dalla nascita dell’adottando.

2 Può essere revocato entro sei settimane dalla ricezione.

3 Se rinnovato dopo la revoca è definitivo.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973(RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).

Art. 265c1A. Adozione di minorenni / VII. Consenso dei genitori / 3. Astrazione / a. Condizioni

3. Astrazione

a. Condizioni

Si può prescindere dal consenso di un genitore se questi è sconosciuto, assente da lungo tempo con ignota dimora oppure durevolmente incapace di discernimento.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 265d1A. Adozione di minorenni / VII. Consenso dei genitori / 3. Astrazione / b. Decisione

b. Decisione

1 Se il minorenne è affidato in vista dell’adozione agli aspiranti all’adozione e fa difetto il consenso di uno dei genitori, l’autorità di protezione dei minori del domicilio del minorenne decide, a richiesta del tutore o del curatore, di un ufficio per il collocamento oppure degli aspiranti all’adozione e, di regola, prima dell’affidamento, se si possa prescindere da tale consenso.2

2 Negli altri casi, la decisione è presa al momento dell’adozione.

3 ...3


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).
3 Abrogato dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 2661B. Adozione di maggiorenni

B. Adozione di maggiorenni

1 Una persona maggiorenne può essere adottata se:

1.
è durevolmente bisognosa di aiuto per infermità fisica, mentale o psichica e gli aspiranti all’adozione hanno provveduto alla sua cura per almeno un anno;
2.
durante la sua minore età, gli aspiranti all’adozione hanno provveduto, per almeno un anno, alla sua cura ed educazione; o
3.
esistono altri motivi gravi ed essa ha vissuto, per almeno un anno, in comunione domestica con gli aspiranti all’adozione.

2 Per altro si applicano per analogia le disposizioni sull’adozione dei minorenni; è eccettuata la disposizione sul consenso dei genitori.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 2671C. Effetti / I. In generale

C. Effetti

I. In generale

1 L’adottato acquista lo stato giuridico di figlio dell’adottante.

2 I vincoli di filiazione anteriori sono sciolti.

3 Il vincolo di filiazione non è sciolto nei riguardi del:

1.
coniuge dell’adottante;
2.
partner registrato dell’adottante;
3.
convivente di fatto dell’adottante.

1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 267a1C. Effetti / II. Nome

II. Nome

1 In caso di adozione congiunta o di adozione singola può essere dato all’adottato minorenne, per motivi degni di rispetto, un nuovo prenome. Prima del cambiamento del prenome, il minorenne è sentito personalmente e appropriatamente dall’autorità competente o da un terzo incaricato, eccetto che la sua età o altri motivi gravi vi si oppongano. Se il minorenne ha almeno 12 anni è necessario il suo consenso.

2 Il cognome dell’adottato minorenne è retto dalle disposizioni sugli effetti della filiazione. Tali disposizioni si applicano per analogia se il minorenne è adottato dal partner registrato della madre o del padre.

3 L’autorità competente può, per motivi degni di rispetto, autorizzare un adottando maggiorenne a conservare il cognome precedente.

4 Il cambiamento del cognome di un adottando maggiorenne non ha ripercussioni sul cognome di terzi che derivi dal cognome precedente dell’adottando, a meno che essi acconsentano espressamente a un cambiamento del cognome.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 267b1C. Effetti / III. Cittadinanza

III. Cittadinanza

La cittadinanza dell’adottato minorenne è retta dalle disposizioni sugli effetti della filiazione.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 2681D. Procedura / I. In generale

D. Procedura

I. In generale

1 L’adozione è pronunciata dall’autorità cantonale competente del domicilio dei genitori adottivi.

2 Le condizioni di adozione devono essere adempiute già al momento della presentazione della domanda.2

3 Presentata la domanda, il sopravvenire della morte o dell’incapacità di discernimento dell’adottante non è di ostacolo all’adozione, purché siano ancora adempiute le altre condizioni.3

4 Se l’adottando diventa maggiorenne dopo la presentazione della domanda, rimangono applicabili le disposizioni sull’adozione di minorenni se le pertinenti condizioni erano precedentemente adempiute.4

5 La decisione di adozione contiene tutte le indicazioni necessarie per l’iscrizione del prenome, del cognome e della cittadinanza dell’adottato nel registro dello stato civile.5


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).
4 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).
5 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 268a1D. Procedura / II. Istruttoria

II. Istruttoria

1 L’adozione può essere pronunciata solo dopo istruttoria sulle circostanze essenziali, eventualmente con la collaborazione di periti.

2 Occorre specialmente indagare sulla personalità e la salute degli aspiranti all’adozione e dell’adottando, la compatibilità dei soggetti, l’idoneità ad educare il figlio, la situazione economica, i motivi e le condizioni familiari degli aspiranti all’adozione, come pure sul decorso dei rapporti d’assistenza.2

3 ...3


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).
3 Abrogato dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 268abis1D. Procedura / III. Audizione dell’adottando

III. Audizione dell’adottando

1 L’adottando è personalmente e appropriatamene sentito dall’autorità cantonale cui compete la procedura d’adozione o da un terzo incaricato, eccetto che la sua età o altri motivi gravi vi si oppongano.

2 L’audizione è messa a verbale.

3 L’adottando capace di discernimento può interporre reclamo contro la negata audizione.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 268ater1D. Procedura / IV. Rappresentanza dell’adottando

IV. Rappresentanza dell’adottando

1 Se necessario, l’autorità cantonale cui compete la procedura d’adozione ordina che l’adottando sia rappresentato da un esperto in questioni assistenziali e giuridiche.

2 La rappresentanza è ordinata in ogni caso se l’adottando capace di discernimento la chiede.

3 L’adottando capace di discernimento può interporre reclamo contro il diniego di istituire la rappresentanza.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 268aquater1D. Procedura / V. Considerazione dell’atteggiamento dei congiunti

V. Considerazione dell’atteggiamento dei congiunti

1 Va tenuto conto dell’atteggiamento dei discendenti degli aspiranti all’adozione.

2 Prima dell’adozione di un maggiorenne va considerato anche l’atteggiamento:

1.
del coniuge o del partner registrato dell’adottando;
2.
dei genitori biologici dell’adottando; e
3.
dei discendenti dell’adottando, eccetto che la loro età o altri motivi gravi vi si oppongano.

3 La decisione di adozione è, per quanto possibile, comunicata a tali persone.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 268b1Dbis. Segreto dell’adozione

Dbis. Segreto dell’adozione

1 L’adottato e i genitori adottivi hanno diritto al rispetto del segreto dell’adozione.

2 Le informazioni atte a identificare il minorenne adottato o i suoi genitori adottivi possono essere rese note ai genitori biologici soltanto se l’adottato è capace di discernimento e se i genitori adottivi e l’adottato vi hanno acconsentito.

3 Le informazioni atte a identificare l’adottato maggiorenne possono essere rese note ai genitori biologici e ai loro discendenti diretti soltanto se l’adottato vi ha acconsentito.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 268c1Dter. Informazione circa l’adozione, i genitori biologici e i loro discendenti

Dter. Informazione circa l’adozione, i genitori biologici e i loro discendenti

1 I genitori adottivi informano l’adottato circa la sua adozione tenendo conto della sua età e del suo grado di maturità.

2 L’adottato minorenne ha diritto di essere informato sui suoi genitori biologici, purché le informazioni non permettano di identificarli. Gli sono fornite informazioni atte a identificarli soltanto se dimostra un interesse degno di protezione.

3 L’adottato maggiorenne può in ogni tempo chiedere che gli siano rese note l’identità dei suoi genitori biologici e altre informazioni su di essi. Può inoltre chiedere che gli siano fornite informazioni sui discendenti diretti dei suoi genitori biologici, se questi sono maggiorenni e vi hanno acconsentito.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 2 della LF del 22 giu. 2001 relativa alla Convenzione dell’Aia sull’adozione e a provvedimenti per la protezione del minore nelle adozioni internazionali (RU 2002 3988; FF 1999 4799). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 268d1Dquater. Servizio cantonale preposto all’informazione e servizi di ricerca

Dquater. Servizio cantonale preposto all’informazione e servizi di ricerca

1 Le informazioni circa i genitori biologici e i loro discendenti diretti o l’adottato sono fornite dall’autorità cantonale cui compete la procedura d’adozione.

2 L’autorità cantonale informa in merito alla domanda d’informazione le persone oggetto di tale domanda e, se necessario, richiede il loro consenso a essere contattate dal richiedente. Può affidare tali compiti a un servizio specializzato nella ricerca di persone.

3 Se le persone oggetto della domanda d’informazione rifiutano di stabilire un contatto personale, l’autorità cantonale o il servizio incaricato delle ricerche ne informa i richiedenti e li rende attenti sui diritti della personalità delle persone oggetto della domanda d’informazione.

4 I Cantoni designano un ufficio incaricato di consigliare i genitori biologici, i loro discendenti diretti o l’adottato che ne facciano richiesta.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 268e1Dquinquies. Relazioni personali con i genitori biologici

Dquinquies. Relazioni personali con i genitori biologici

1 I genitori adottivi e i genitori biologici possono convenire che ai secondi sia concesso il diritto di intrattenere adeguate relazioni personali con l’adottato minorenne. Tale convenzione e le sue eventuali modifiche sono sottoposte per approvazione all’autorità di protezione dei minori del domicilio dell’adottato. Prima di decidere, l’autorità di protezione dei minori o un terzo incaricato sente personalmente e appropriatamente l’adottato, eccetto che la sua età o altri motivi gravi vi si oppongano. Se l’adottato è capace di discernimento è necessario il suo consenso alla convenzione.

2 Se il bene dell’adottato è minacciato o vi è disaccordo circa l’attuazione della convenzione, decide l’autorità di protezione dei minori.

3 L’adottato può rifiutare in ogni tempo il contatto con i genitori biologici. Contro la sua volontà i genitori adottivi non possono neppure fornire informazioni ai genitori biologici.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 2691E. Contestazione / I. Motivi / 1. Mancanza del consenso

E. Contestazione

I. Motivi

1. Mancanza del consenso

1 L’adozione può essere contestata giudizialmente da chi, senza motivo legale, non fu richiesto del consenso, purché il bene del figlio non risulti seriamente compromesso.

2 L’azione non è data ai genitori, qualora possano ricorrere al Tribunale federale contro la decisione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).

Art. 269a1E. Contestazione / I. Motivi / 2. Altri vizi

2. Altri vizi

1 L’adozione inficiata d’altri vizi gravi può essere contestata da ogni interessato, specialmente dal Comune d’origine o di domicilio.

2 L’azione è tuttavia esclusa, se il vizio è stato nel frattempo eliminato, oppure se concerne soltanto prescrizioni di procedura.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).

Art. 269b1E. Contestazione / II. Termine

II. Termine

L’azione deve essere proposta entro sei mesi dal momento in cui fu conosciuto il motivo della contestazione e, in ogni caso, entro due anni dall’adozione.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).

Art. 269c1F. Collocamento in vista d’adozione

F. Collocamento in vista d’adozione

1 La Confederazione esercita la vigilanza sul collocamento degli adottandi.

2 Chi si occupa di questi collocamenti a titolo professionale o in relazione alla sua professione deve avere un’autorizzazione; è fatto salvo il collocamento da parte dell’autorità di protezione dei minori.2

3 Il Consiglio federale emana le norme esecutive e disciplina il concorso dell’autorità cantonale competente in materia di collocamento in vista d’adozione, nell’accertamento delle condizioni per l’autorizzazione e nella vigilanza.

4 …3


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 30 giu. 1972 (FF 1971 II 85). Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 2 della LF del 22 giu. 2001 relativa alla Convenzione dell’Aia sull’adozione e a provvedimenti per la protezione del minore nelle adozioni internazionali, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2003 (RU 2002 3988; FF 1999 4799).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
3 Abrogato dall’all. n. 15 della L del 17 giu. 2005 sul Tribunale amministrativo federale, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2007 (RU 2006 2197; FF 2001 3764).


  Titolo ottavo: Degli effetti della filiazione11 

  Capo primo: Della comunione dei figli coi genitori12 

Art. 2701A. Cognome / I. Figlio di genitori coniugati

A. Cognome

I. Figlio di genitori coniugati

1 Se i genitori sono uniti in matrimonio e portano cognomi diversi, il figlio ne assume il cognome da celibe o nubile da essi scelto per i figli comuni in occasione del matrimonio.

2 Entro un anno dalla nascita del primo figlio, i genitori possono chiedere congiuntamente che il figlio porti il cognome da celibe o nubile dell’altro genitore.

3 Se i genitori portano un cognome coniugale, il figlio assume tale cognome.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 270a1A. Cognome / II. Figlio di genitori non coniugati

II. Figlio di genitori non coniugati

1 Se l’autorità parentale spetta a un solo genitore, il figlio ne assume il cognome da nubile o da celibe. Se l’autorità parentale è esercitata congiuntamente, i genitori stabiliscono se il figlio porterà il cognome da nubile della madre o il cognome da celibe del padre.

2 Se l’autorità parentale congiunta è istituita dopo la nascita del primo figlio, entro un anno dalla sua istituzione i genitori possono dichiarare all’ufficiale dello stato civile che il figlio porterà il cognome da nubile o da celibe dell’altro genitore. La dichiarazione vale per tutti i figli comuni, a prescindere dall’attribuzione dell’autorità parentale.

3 Se l’autorità parentale non spetta ad alcuno dei genitori, il figlio assume il cognome da nubile della madre.

4 Le modifiche dell’attribuzione dell’autorità parentale non hanno ripercussioni sul cognome. Sono fatte salve le disposizioni sul cambiamento del nome.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza) (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 270b1A. Cognome / III. Consenso del figlio

III. Consenso del figlio

Il cognome del figlio che ha compiuto il dodicesimo anno di età può essere cambiato soltanto con il suo consenso.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 2711B. Cittadinanza

B. Cittadinanza

1 Il figlio acquista la cittadinanza cantonale e l’attinenza comunale del genitore di cui porta il cognome.

2 Se assume il cognome dell’altro genitore, il figlio minorenne ne acquista anche la cittadinanza cantonale e l’attinenza comunale, in luogo e vece di quelle anteriori.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 2721C. Doveri vicendevoli

C. Doveri vicendevoli

I genitori ed i figli si devono vicendevolmente l’assistenza, i riguardi e il rispetto che il bene della comunione richiede.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2731D. Relazioni personali / I. Genitori e figlio / 1. Principio

D. Relazioni personali

I. Genitori e figlio

1. Principio

1 I genitori che non sono detentori dell’autorità parentale o della custodia nonché il figlio minorenne hanno reciprocamente il diritto di conservare le relazioni personali indicate dalle circostanze.

2 Se l’esercizio o il mancato esercizio delle relazioni personali è pregiudizievole al figlio, oppure altri motivi lo esigono, l’autorità di protezione dei minori può richiamare ai loro doveri i genitori, gli affilianti o il figlio e dare loro istruzioni.

3 Il padre o la madre può esigere che il suo diritto all’esercizio delle relazioni personali sia regolato.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 2741D. Relazioni personali / I. Genitori e figlio / 2. Limiti

2. Limiti

1 Padre e madre devono astenersi da tutto ciò che alteri i rapporti del figlio con l’altro genitore o intralci il compito dell’educatore.

2 Il diritto alle relazioni personali può essere negato o revocato se pregiudica il bene del figlio, se i genitori se ne sono avvalsi in violazione dei loro doveri o non si sono curati seriamente del figlio, ovvero per altri gravi motivi.

3 Se i genitori hanno acconsentito all’adozione del figlio o se si può prescindere da tale consenso, il diritto alle relazioni personali si estingue appena il figlio sia collocato in vista d’adozione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 274a1D. Relazioni personali / II. Terzi

II. Terzi

1 In circostanze straordinarie, il diritto alle relazioni personali può essere conferito anche a altre persone, segnatamente a parenti, in quanto ciò serva al bene del figlio.

2 I limiti del diritto di visita posti ai genitori vigono per analogia.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2751D. Relazioni personali / III. Competenza

III. Competenza

1 L’autorità di protezione dei minori del domicilio del figlio è competente per le misure in merito alle relazioni personali; è pure competente l’autorità di protezione dei minori del luogo di dimora del figlio se quest’ultima ha già preso o prende misure a protezione del figlio.

2 Se decide in merito all’autorità parentale, alla custodia o al contributo di mantenimento secondo le disposizioni sul divorzio e a tutela dell’unione coniugale, il giudice disciplina anche le relazioni personali.2

3 Se non sono state ancora prese misure circa il diritto del padre e della madre, le relazioni personali non possono essere esercitate contro la volontà della persona cui compete l’autorità parentale o la custodia.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 275a1E. Informazione e schiarimenti

E. Informazione e schiarimenti

1 I genitori senza autorità parentale devono essere informati sugli avvenimenti particolari sopraggiunti nella vita del figlio e devono essere sentiti prima di decisioni importanti per lo sviluppo del figlio.

2 Essi, alla stregua del detentore dell’autorità parentale, possono chiedere ai terzi che partecipano alle cure del figlio, segnatamente ai docenti e ai medici, informazioni sullo stato e sullo sviluppo di costui.

3 Le disposizioni sui limiti del diritto alle relazioni personali e sulla competenza si applicano per analogia.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).


  Capo secondo: Del mantenimento da parte dei genitori13 

Art. 2761A. In genere / I. Oggetto e estensione

A. In genere

I. Oggetto e estensione2

1 Il mantenimento consiste nella cura, nell’educazione e in prestazioni pecuniarie.3

2 I genitori provvedono in comune, ciascuno nella misura delle sue forze, al debito mantenimento del figlio e assumono in particolare le spese di cura, di educazione, di formazione e delle misure prese a sua tutela.4

3 I genitori sono liberati dall’obbligo di mantenimento nella misura in cui si possa ragionevolmente pretendere che il figlio vi provveda da sé con il provento del suo lavoro o con altri mezzi.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).
4 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 276a1A. In genere / II. Priorità dell’obbligo di mantenimento nei confronti del figlio minorenne

II. Priorità dell’obbligo di mantenimento nei confronti del figlio minorenne

1 L’obbligo di mantenimento nei confronti del figlio minorenne prevale sugli altri obblighi di mantenimento del diritto di famiglia.

2 In casi motivati, il giudice può derogare a questa regola, in particolare per non penalizzare il figlio maggiorenne avente diritto al mantenimento.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 2771B. Durata

B. Durata

1 L’obbligo di mantenimento dura fino alla maggiore età del figlio.

2 Se, raggiunta la maggiore età, il figlio non ha ancora una formazione appropriata, i genitori, per quanto si possa ragionevolmente pretendere da loro dato l’insieme delle circostanze, devono continuare a provvedere al suo mantenimento fino al momento in cui una simile formazione possa normalmente concludersi.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 7 ott. 1994, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1996 (RU 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 921).

Art. 2781C. Genitori coniugati

C. Genitori coniugati

1 Durante il matrimonio, i genitori sopportano le spese del mantenimento del figlio secondo le disposizioni del diritto matrimoniale.

2 I coniugi si devono vicendevolmente adeguata assistenza nell’adempimento dell’obbligo verso i figli nati prima del matrimonio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2791D. Azione / I. Diritto

D.2 Azione

I. Diritto

1 Il figlio può proporre azione contro il padre o la madre o contro ambedue per chiedere il mantenimento futuro e quello per l’anno precedente l’azione.

2 e 3 ...3


1 Nuovo testo il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).
3 Abrogati dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).

Art. 280 a 2841D. Azione / II e III

II e III


1 Abrogati dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 2851D. Azione / IV. Commisurazione del contributo di mantenimento / 1. Contributo dei genitori

IV. Commisurazione del contributo di mantenimento

1. Contributo dei genitori

1 Il contributo di mantenimento deve essere commisurato ai bisogni del figlio, alla situazione sociale e alle possibilità dei genitori; si tiene inoltre conto della sostanza e dei redditi del figlio.

2 Il contributo di mantenimento serve anche a garantire la cura del figlio da parte dei genitori o di terzi.

3 Il contributo è pagato anticipatamente. Il giudice fissa le scadenze del pagamento.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 285a1D. Azione / IV. Commisurazione del contributo di mantenimento / 2. Altre prestazioni destinate al mantenimento del figlio

2. Altre prestazioni destinate al mantenimento del figlio

1 Gli assegni familiari versati al genitore tenuto al mantenimento sono pagati in aggiunta al contributo di mantenimento.

2 Salvo diversa disposizione del giudice, le rendite delle assicurazioni sociali e analoghe prestazioni destinate al mantenimento del figlio, spettanti al genitore tenuto al mantenimento, sono pagate in aggiunta al contributo di mantenimento.

3 Il genitore tenuto al mantenimento che, per motivi d’età o d’invalidità, riceva successivamente rendite delle assicurazioni sociali o analoghe prestazioni destinate al mantenimento del figlio, che sostituiscono il reddito di un’attività lucrativa, deve pagare tali importi al figlio; il precedente contributo di mantenimento va diminuito per legge dell’importo di tali nuove prestazioni.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 2861D. Azione / V. Modificazione delle circostanze / 1. In genere

V. Modificazione delle circostanze

1. In genere2

1 Il giudice può ordinare che il contributo di mantenimento sia senz’altro aumentato o ridotto in caso di determinate modificazioni dei bisogni del figlio, delle possibilità dei genitori o del costo della vita.3

2 Se le circostanze siano notevolmente mutate, il giudice, ad istanza di un genitore o del figlio, modifica o toglie il contributo.

3 Il giudice può obbligare i genitori a versare un contributo speciale allorché lo richiedano bisogni straordinari e imprevisti del figlio.4


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).
4 Introdotto dal n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 286a1D. Azione / V. Modificazione delle circostanze / 2. Casi di ammanco

2. Casi di ammanco

1 Se in un contratto di mantenimento approvato o in una decisione è stabilito che non è stato possibile fissare un contributo sufficiente ad assicurare il debito mantenimento del figlio e se la situazione del genitore tenuto al mantenimento è da allora migliorata in modo straordinario, il figlio ha il diritto di esigere che tale genitore versi gli importi mancanti per coprire il debito mantenimento degli ultimi cinque anni nei quali il contributo di mantenimento era dovuto.

2 Tale diritto deve essere fatto valere entro un anno dal momento in cui si viene a conoscenza del miglioramento straordinario della situazione del genitore tenuto al mantenimento.

3 Tale diritto passa, con i diritti ad esso connessi, all’altro genitore o all’ente pubblico, in quanto abbia provveduto a versare l’importo mancante per coprire il debito mantenimento del figlio.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 2871E. Contratti circa l’obbligo di mantenimento / I. Prestazioni periodiche

E. Contratti circa l’obbligo di mantenimento

I. Prestazioni periodiche

1 I contratti circa l’obbligo di mantenimento vincolano il figlio soltanto se approvati dall’autorità di protezione dei minori.

2 I contributi di mantenimento contrattualmente stabiliti possono essere modificati, salvo stipulazione contraria approvata dall’autorità di protezione dei minori.2

3 Se il contratto è concluso in una procedura giudiziaria, l’approvazione è di competenza del giudice.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 287a1E. Contratti circa l’obbligo di mantenimento / II. Contenuto del contratto di mantenimento

II. Contenuto del contratto di mantenimento

Il contratto che fissa i contributi di mantenimento deve menzionare:

a.
quali elementi del reddito e della sostanza di ciascun genitore e di ciascun figlio sono stati presi in considerazione per il calcolo;
b.
quale importo è assegnato a ciascun figlio;
c.
quale importo manca per coprire il debito mantenimento di ciascun figlio;
d.
se e in quale misura i contributi di mantenimento devono essere adattati alle variazioni del costo della vita.

1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 2881E. Contratti circa l’obbligo di mantenimento / III. Tacitazione

III. Tacitazione2

1 La tacitazione della pretesa di mantenimento con un versamento unico può essere convenuta se l’interesse del figlio la giustifica.

2 Tale convenzione vincola il figlio soltanto se:

1.
sia stata approvata dell’autorità di protezione dei minori, o dal giudice se conclusa in una procedura giudiziaria, e
2.
la somma a titolo di tacitazione sia stata pagata all’ufficio designato.

1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 2891F. Adempimento / I. Creditore

F. Adempimento

I. Creditore

1 Salvo diversa disposizione del giudice, i contributi di mantenimento spettano al figlio e, per la durata della minore età, sono versati al suo rappresentante legale oppure al detentore della custodia.2

2 Tuttavia, la pretesa si trasmette con tutti i diritti all’ente pubblico che provveda al mantenimento.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 2901F. Adempimento / II. Esecuzione / 1. Aiuto all’incasso

II. Esecuzione

1. Aiuto all’incasso

1 Se il padre o la madre non adempie l’obbligo di mantenimento, un ufficio specializzato designato dal diritto cantonale aiuta in maniera adeguata e gratuitamente il figlio o l’altro genitore che ne faccia richiesta a ottenere l’esecuzione della pretesa di mantenimento.

2 Il Consiglio federale definisce le prestazioni di aiuto all’incasso..


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 2911F. Adempimento / II. Esecuzione / 2. Diffida ai debitori

2. Diffida ai debitori

Se i genitori trascurano i propri doveri verso il figlio, il giudice può ordinare ai loro debitori che facciano i pagamenti del tutto o in parte nelle mani del rappresentante legale del figlio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2921F. Adempimento / III. Garanzie

III. Garanzie

Se i genitori trascurano ostinatamente il loro obbligo di mantenimento o se vi è motivo di credere ch’essi facciano preparativi di fuga, dissipino o dissimulino il proprio patrimonio, il giudice può obbligarli a fornire adeguate garanzie per i contributi futuri.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2931G. Diritto pubblico

G. Diritto pubblico

1 Il diritto pubblico stabilisce chi debba sopportare le spese del mantenimento in quanto eccedano i mezzi dei genitori e dei figli, riservato l’obbligo di assistenza tra i parenti.

2 Inoltre, il diritto pubblico disciplina il pagamento di anticipazioni quando i genitori non soddisfacciano al loro obbligo di mantenimento del figlio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2941H. Genitori affilianti

H. Genitori affilianti

1 I genitori affilianti hanno diritto a un congruo compenso per le cure prestate, salvo deroghe convenute o risultanti con chiarezza dalle circostanze.

2 La gratuità è presunta ove trattasi di figli di stretti parenti o di figli accolti in vista d’adozione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2951J. Azione della donna nubile

J. Azione della donna nubile

1 La madre può, entro un anno dalla nascita del figlio, convenirne il padre o i suoi eredi chiedendo la rifusione:2

1.
delle spese di parto;
2.
delle spese di mantenimento per almeno quattro settimane prima e per almeno otto settimane dopo la nascita;
3.
delle altre spese necessarie a causa della gravidanza o del parto, incluso il primo corredo per il figlio.

2 In caso di fine prematura della gravidanza, il giudice può, per motivi di equità, accordare in tutto o in parte la rifusione delle spese corrispondenti.

3 Prestazioni di terzi, spettanti alla madre per legge o per contratto, sono da imputare in quanto le circostanze lo giustifichino.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all.1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).


  Capo terzo: Dell’autorità parentale14 

Art. 2961A. Principi

A. Principi

1 L’autorità parentale è volta a garantire il bene del figlio.

2 Finché minorenni, i figli sono soggetti all’autorità parentale congiunta del padre e della madre.

3 I genitori minorenni o sotto curatela generale non hanno autorità parentale. Raggiunta la maggiore età, ottengono l’autorità parentale. Se viene revocata la curatela generale, l’autorità di protezione dei minori decide in merito all’attribuzione dell’autorità parentale conformemente al bene del figlio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 2971Abis. Morte di un genitore

Abis. Morte di un genitore

1 Se era esercitata congiuntamente, alla morte di un genitore l’autorità parentale spetta al genitore superstite.

2 Se muore il genitore che deteneva l’autorità parentale esclusiva, l’autorità di protezione dei minori trasferisce l’autorità parentale al genitore superstite oppure nomina un tutore, scegliendo la soluzione più adatta a tutelare il bene del figlio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 2981Ater. Divorzio e altre procedure matrimoniali

Ater. Divorzio e altre procedure matrimoniali

1 Nell’ambito di una procedura di divorzio o di una procedura a tutela dell’unione coniugale il giudice attribuisce l’autorità parentale esclusiva a uno dei genitori se è necessario per tutelare il bene del figlio.

2 Può anche limitarsi a disciplinare la custodia, le relazioni personali o la partecipazione di ciascun genitore alla cura del figlio, se non vi sono prospettive di un accordo in merito tra i genitori.

2bis Per decidere sulla custodia, sulle relazioni personali o sulla partecipazione alla cura, il giudice tiene conto del diritto del figlio a intrattenere regolarmente relazioni personali con entrambi i genitori.2

2ter In caso di esercizio congiunto dell’autorità parentale, ad istanza di uno dei genitori o del figlio il giudice valuta se, per il bene del figlio, sia opportuno disporre la custodia alternata.3

3 Invita l’autorità di protezione dei minori a nominare un tutore se né la madre né il padre sono idonei ad assumere l’autorità parentale.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).
2 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).
3 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 298a1Aquater. Riconoscimento e sentenza di paternità / I. Dichiarazione comune dei genitori

Aquater. Riconoscimento e sentenza di paternità

I. Dichiarazione comune dei genitori

1 Se i genitori non sono uniti in matrimonio e il padre riconosce il figlio o se il rapporto di filiazione è stabilito per sentenza e al momento della pronuncia l’autorità parentale congiunta non è stata ancora disposta, l’autorità parentale congiunta viene istituita sulla base di una dichiarazione comune dei genitori.

2 In tale dichiarazione i genitori confermano di:

1.
essere disposti ad assumersi congiuntamente la responsabilità del figlio; e
2.
essersi accordati in merito alla custodia, alle relazioni personali o alla partecipazione alla cura del figlio e al suo contributo di mantenimento.

3 Prima di rilasciare la dichiarazione, i genitori possono valersi della consulenza dell’autorità di protezione dei minori.

4 La dichiarazione va indirizzata all’ufficio dello stato civile se i genitori la rilasciano contestualmente al riconoscimento del figlio. Se la rilasciano successivamente, la indirizzano all’autorità di protezione dei minori del domicilio del figlio.

5 Fintanto che non sia stata presentata la dichiarazione, l’autorità parentale spetta esclusivamente alla madre.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 298b1Aquater. Riconoscimento e sentenza di paternità / II. Decisione dell’autorità di protezione dei minori

II. Decisione dell’autorità di protezione dei minori

1 Se uno dei genitori si rifiuta di rilasciare la dichiarazione comune, l’altro può rivolgersi all’autorità di protezione dei minori del domicilio del figlio.

2 L’autorità di protezione dei minori dispone l’autorità parentale congiunta sempreché, per tutelare il bene del figlio, non si imponga di mantenere l’autorità parentale esclusiva della madre o di trasferirla al padre.

3 Contestualmente alla decisione sull’autorità parentale, l’autorità di protezione dei minori disciplina anche le altre questioni litigiose. È fatta salva l’azione di mantenimento dinanzi al giudice competente; in tal caso il giudice decide anche in merito all’autorità parentale e alle altre questioni riguardanti i figli.2

3bis Per decidere sulla custodia, sulle relazioni personali o sulla partecipazione alla cura, l’autorità di protezione dei minori tiene conto del diritto del figlio a intrattenere regolarmente relazioni personali con entrambi i genitori.3

3ter In caso di esercizio congiunto dell’autorità parentale, ad istanza di uno dei genitori o del figlio l’autorità di protezione dei minori valuta se, per il bene del figlio, sia opportuno disporre la custodia alternata.4

4 Se la madre è minorenne o sotto curatela generale, l’autorità di protezione dei minori trasferisce l’autorità parentale al padre o nomina un tutore, scegliendo la soluzione più adatta a tutelare il bene del figlio.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).
2 Nuovo testo del secondo per. giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).
3 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).
4 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 298c1Aquater. Riconoscimento e sentenza di paternità / III. Azione di paternità

III. Azione di paternità

Se accoglie un’azione di paternità, il giudice dispone l’autorità parentale congiunta sempreché, per tutelare il bene del figlio, non si imponga di mantenere l’autorità parentale esclusiva della madre o di trasferirla al padre.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 298d1Aquater. Riconoscimento e sentenza di paternità / IV. Modificazione delle circostanze

IV. Modificazione delle circostanze

1 A istanza di un genitore, del figlio o d’ufficio, l’autorità di protezione dei minori modifica l’attribuzione dell’autorità parentale se fatti nuovi importanti lo esigono per tutelare il bene del figlio.

2 Può anche limitarsi a disciplinare la custodia, le relazioni personali o la partecipazione di ciascun genitore alla cura del figlio.

3 È fatta salva l’azione di modifica del contributo di mantenimento dinanzi al giudice competente; in tal caso il giudice decide se necessario anche in merito all’autorità parentale e alle altre questioni riguardanti i figli.2


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).
2 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 298e1Aquinquies. Modificazione delle circostanze dopo l’adozione del figliastro del convivente di fatto

Aquinquies. Modificazione delle circostanze dopo l’adozione del figliastro del convivente di fatto

Se una persona ha adottato il figlio del convivente di fatto e si verificano fatti nuovi importanti, si applica per analogia la disposizione sulla modificazione delle circostanze in caso di riconoscimento e sentenza di paternità.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 2991Asexies. Patrigno e matrigna

Asexies. Patrigno e matrigna2

Ogni coniuge deve all’altro adeguata assistenza nell’esercizio dell’autorità parentale verso i di lui figli e rappresentarlo ove le circostanze lo richiedano.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 3001Asepties. Genitori affilianti

Asepties. Genitori affilianti2

1 I terzi cui è affidata la cura di un figlio rappresentano i genitori nell’esercizio dell’autorità parentale, per quanto ciò sia indicato per il debito adempimento del loro compito e riservate misure diverse.

2 I genitori affilianti devono essere uditi prima di ogni decisione importante.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 3011B. Contenuto / I. In genere

B. Contenuto

I. In genere

1 I genitori, in considerazione del bene del figlio, ne dirigono le cure e l’educazione e, riservata la sua capacità, prendono le decisioni necessarie.

1bis Il genitore che ha la cura del figlio può decidere autonomamente se:

1.
si tratta di affari quotidiani o urgenti;
2.
il dispendio richiesto per raggiungere l’altro genitore non risulta ragionevole.2

2 Il figlio deve obbedienza ai genitori; i genitori consentono al figlio, corrispondentemente alla sua maturità, di organizzare liberamente la sua vita e, in affari importanti, tengono quanto possibile conto della sua opinione.

3 Il figlio non può abbandonare la comunione domestica senza il consenso dei genitori; non può nemmeno esser loro tolto senza causa legittima.

4 I genitori scelgono il prenome del figlio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 301a1B. Contenuto / II. Determinazione del luogo di dimora

II. Determinazione del luogo di dimora

1 L’autorità parentale include il diritto di determinare il luogo di dimora del figlio.

2 Se i genitori esercitano l’autorità parentale congiuntamente, un genitore può modificare il luogo di dimora del figlio soltanto con il consenso dell’altro genitore oppure per decisione del giudice o dell’autorità di protezione dei minori, qualora:

a.
il nuovo luogo di dimora si trovi all’estero; o
b.
la modifica del luogo di dimora abbia ripercussioni rilevanti sull’esercizio dell’autorità parentale da parte dell’altro genitore e sulle relazioni personali.

3 Il genitore che detiene l’autorità parentale esclusiva informa tempestivamente l’altro genitore se intende modificare il luogo di dimora del figlio.

4 Il genitore che intende cambiare il proprio domicilio ha lo stesso obbligo di informazione.

5 Se necessario, i genitori si accordano, conformemente al bene del figlio, in merito a una modifica dell’autorità parentale, della custodia, delle relazioni personali e del contributo di mantenimento. Se non raggiungono un accordo, decide il giudice o l’autorità di protezione dei minori.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 3021B. Contenuto / III. Educazione

III. Educazione2

1 I genitori devono educare il figlio secondo la loro condizione, promuovendone e proteggendone lo sviluppo fisico, intellettuale e morale.

2 Essi devono procurare al figlio, particolarmente se infermo di corpo o di mente, un’appropriata istruzione generale e professionale, conforme quanto possibile alle sue attitudini e inclinazioni.

3 A tal fine, essi devono cooperare appropriatamente con la scuola e, ove le circostanze lo richiedano, con le istituzioni pubbliche e d’utilità pubblica per l’aiuto alla gioventù.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 3031B. Contenuto / IV. Educazione religiosa

IV. Educazione religiosa2

1 I genitori dispongono dell’educazione religiosa.

2 Ogni convenzione che limiti questo diritto è nulla.

3 Il figlio che ha compiuto il sedicesimo anno di età decide liberamente circa la propria confessione religiosa.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 3041B. Contenuto / V. Rappresentanza / 1. Verso i terzi / a. In genere

V. Rappresentanza

1. Verso i terzi

a. In genere2

1 I genitori rappresentano per legge il figlio verso i terzi, nella misura dell’autorità parentale che loro compete.

2 Se ambedue i genitori sono detentori dell’autorità parentale, i terzi di buona fede possono presumere che ciascun genitore agisca con il consenso dell’altro.3

3 I genitori non possono, in rappresentanza del figlio, contrarre fideiussioni, costituire fondazioni né fare donazioni, fatti salvi i regali d’uso.4


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
4 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 3051B. Contenuto / V. Rappresentanza / 1. Verso i terzi / b. Stato giuridico del figlio

b. Stato giuridico del figlio2

1 Il figlio capace di discernimento e sotto autorità parentale può, nei limiti posti dal diritto delle persone, acquistare diritti e contrarre obbligazioni con atti propri, nonché esercitare diritti strettamente personali.3

2 La sostanza del figlio risponde per le costui obbligazioni senza riguardo ai diritti dei genitori sulla medesima.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 3061B. Contenuto / V. Rappresentanza / 2. Nei rapporti interni della comunione

2. Nei rapporti interni della comunione

1 Il figlio sotto l’autorità parentale e capace di discernimento può agire per la comunione domestica col consenso dei genitori, e in tal caso non obbliga se stesso, ma i genitori.

2 Se i genitori sono impediti di agire o i loro interessi in un affare sono in collisione con quelli del figlio, l’autorità di protezione dei minori nomina un curatore o provvede essa stessa all’affare.2

3 In caso di collisione di interessi, i poteri dei genitori decadono per legge nell’affare di cui si tratta.3


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
3 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 3071C. Protezione del figlio / I. Misure opportune

C. Protezione del figlio

I. Misure opportune

1 Se il bene del figlio è minacciato e i genitori non vi rimediano o non sono in grado di rimediarvi, l’autorità di protezione dei minori ordina le misure opportune per la protezione del figlio.

2 L’autorità di protezione dei minori vi è parimenti tenuta riguardo ai figli collocati presso genitori affilianti o viventi altrimenti fuori della comunione domestica dei genitori.

3 L’autorità di protezione dei minori può segnatamente ammonire i genitori, gli affilianti od il figlio, impartire loro istruzioni per la cura, l’educazione o l’istruzione e designare una persona o un ufficio idoneo che abbia diritto di controllo e informazione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3081C. Protezione del figlio / II. Curatela

II. Curatela2

1 Se le circostanze lo richiedono, l’autorità di protezione dei minori nomina al figlio un curatore, perché consigli ed aiuti i genitori nella cura del figlio.

2 L’autorità di protezione dei minori può conferire al curatore speciali poteri, segnatamente la rappresentanza del figlio per l’accertamento della paternità, per salvaguardarne il diritto al mantenimento o diritti d’altra natura e la vigilanza delle relazioni personali.3

3 L’autorità parentale può essere corrispondentemente limitata.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 3091

1 Abrogato dal n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), con effetto dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 3101C. Protezione del figlio / III. Privazione del diritto di determinare il luogo di dimora

III. Privazione del diritto di determinare il luogo di dimora2

1 Quando il figlio non possa essere altrimenti sottratto al pericolo, l’autorità di protezione dei minori deve toglierlo alla custodia dei genitori, o dei terzi presso cui egli si trova, e ricoverarlo convenientemente.

2 L’autorità di protezione dei minori, ad istanza dei genitori o del figlio, prende la stessa misura nel caso in cui le relazioni siano così gravemente turbate che non si possa più esigere ragionevolmente la convivenza ulteriore e, secondo le circostanze, non si possa rimediare altrimenti.

3 L’autorità di protezione dei minori può vietare ai genitori di riprendere il figlio vissuto per lungo tempo presso genitori affilianti qualora il suo sviluppo possa esserne seriamente pregiudicato.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 3111C. Protezione del figlio / IV. Privazione dell’autorità parentale / 1. D’ufficio

IV. Privazione dell’autorità parentale

1. D’ufficio2

1 Se altre misure per la protezione del figlio sono rimaste infruttuose o sembrano a priori insufficienti, l’autorità di protezione dei minori priva i genitori dell’autorità parentale:3

1.4
quando per inesperienza, malattia, infermità, assenza, violenza o analoghi motivi non sono in grado di esercitarla debitamente;
2.
quando non si sono curati seriamente del figlio o hanno violato gravemente i loro doveri nei suoi confronti.

2 Quando l’autorità parentale sia tolta ad entrambi i genitori, si procede alla nomina di un tutore.

3 Salvo esplicita disposizione contraria, la privazione dell’autorità parentale vale anche riguardo ai figli nascituri.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).
4 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 3121C. Protezione del figlio / IV. Privazione dell’autorità parentale / 2. Col consenso dei genitori

2. Col consenso dei genitori2

L’autorità di protezione dei minori priva i genitori dell’autorità parentale:3

1.
quando ne facciano richiesta per motivi gravi;
2.
quando abbiano dato il consenso ad un’adozione futura del figlio da parte di terzi non designati.

1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto elle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 3131C. Protezione del figlio / V. Modificazione delle circostanze

V. Modificazione delle circostanze

1 In caso di modificazione delle circostanze, le misure prese per proteggere il figlio sono adattate alla nuova situazione.

2 In nessun caso può farsi luogo al ripristino dell’autorità parentale prima d’un anno dalla privazione.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II della LF del 6 ott. 1978, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1981 (RU 1980 31; FF 1977 III 1).

Art. 3141C. Protezione del figlio / VI. Procedura / 1. In genere

VI. Procedura

1. In genere

1 Le disposizioni sulla procedura davanti all’autorità di protezione degli adulti si applicano per analogia.

2 Nei casi idonei l’autorità di protezione dei minori può ingiungere ai genitori di tentare una mediazione.

3 Se istituisce una curatela, l’autorità di protezione dei minori stabilisce nel dispositivo della decisione i compiti del curatore e le eventuali restrizioni dell’autorità parentale.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 314a1C. Protezione del figlio / VI. Procedura / 2. Audizione del figlio

2. Audizione del figlio

1 Il figlio è sentito personalmente e in maniera adeguata dall’autorità di protezione dei minori o da un terzo incaricato, eccetto che la sua età o altri motivi gravi vi si oppongano.

2 Nel verbale dell’audizione sono registrate soltanto le risultanze essenziali per la decisione. I genitori vengono informati su tali risultanze.

3 Il figlio capace di discernimento può interporre reclamo contro la negata audizione.


1 Introdotto dal n. II della LF del 6 ott. 1978 (RU 1980 31; FF 1977 III 1). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 314abis1C. Protezione del figlio / VI. Procedura / 3. Rappresentanza del figlio

3. Rappresentanza del figlio

1 Se necessario, l’autorità di protezione dei minori ordina che il figlio sia rappresentato da un curatore, esperto in questioni assistenziali e giuridiche.

2 L’autorità di protezione dei minori esamina se occorra disporre una rappresentanza in particolare nei seguenti casi:

1.
il procedimento concerne il ricovero del figlio;
2.
gli interessati propongono conclusioni differenti in merito all’autorità parentale o a questioni importanti concernenti le relazioni personali.
3 Il curatore del figlio può proporre conclusioni e presentare impugnazioni.

1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 314b1C. Protezione del figlio / VI. Procedura / 4. Ricovero in un istituto chiuso o in una clinica psichiatrica

4. Ricovero in un istituto chiuso o in una clinica psichiatrica

1 Nel caso in cui il figlio debba essere ricoverato in un istituto chiuso o in una clinica psichiatrica, si applicano per analogia le disposizioni sulla protezione degli adulti relative al ricovero a scopo di assistenza.

2 Se è capace di discernimento, il figlio può adire da sé il giudice.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 314c1C. Protezione del figlio / VI. Procedura / 5. Diritti di avviso

5. Diritti di avviso

1 Quando l’integrità fisica, psichica o sessuale di un minorenne pare minacciata, chiunque può avvisarne l’autorità di protezione dei minori.

2 Se l’avviso è nell’interesse del minorenne, anche le persone vincolate dal segreto professionale secondo il Codice penale2 possono avvisare l’autorità di protezione dei minori. La presente disposizione non si applica agli ausiliari vincolati dal segreto professionale secondo il Codice penale.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Protezione dei minorenni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 2947; FF 2015 2751).
2 RS 311.0

Art. 314d1C. Protezione del figlio / VI. Procedura / 6. Obblighi di avviso

6. Obblighi di avviso

1 Salvo che siano vincolate dal segreto professionale secondo il Codice penale2, le seguenti persone sono tenute ad avvisare l’autorità di protezione dei minori se vi sono indizi concreti che l’integrità fisica, psichica o sessuale di un minorenne è minacciata ed esse non possono rimediarvi nell’ambito della loro attività:

1.
i professionisti dei settori della medicina, della psicologia, delle cure, dell’accudimento, dell’educazione, della formazione, della consulenza sociale, della religione e dello sport che nella loro attività professionale sono regolarmente in contatto con minorenni;
2.
le persone che apprendono nello svolgimento di un’attività ufficiale che un minorenne versa in tali condizioni.

2 Adempie l’obbligo di avviso pure chi avvisa il proprio superiore.

3 I Cantoni possono prevedere ulteriori obblighi di avviso.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Protezione dei minorenni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 2947; FF 2015 2751).
2 RS 311.0

Art. 314e1C. Protezione del figlio / VI. Procedura / 7. Collaborazione e assistenza amministrativa

7. Collaborazione e assistenza amministrativa

1 Le persone che partecipano al procedimento e i terzi sono tenuti a collaborare all’accertamento dei fatti. L’autorità di protezione dei minori prende le disposizioni necessarie per la salvaguardia di interessi degni di protezione. Se necessario, ordina l’esecuzione coattiva dell’obbligo di collaborare.

2 Le persone vincolate dal segreto professionale secondo il Codice penale2 possono collaborare senza farsi previamente liberare dal segreto professionale. La presente disposizione non si applica agli ausiliari vincolati dal segreto professionale secondo il Codice penale.

3 Le persone vincolate dal segreto professionale secondo il Codice penale sono tenute a collaborare se sono state autorizzate a farlo dal titolare del segreto o se, su richiesta dell’autorità di protezione dei minori, l’autorità superiore o l’autorità di vigilanza le ha liberate dal segreto professionale. È fatto salvo l’articolo 13 della legge del 23 giugno 20003 sugli avvocati.

4 Le autorità amministrative e giudiziarie consegnano gli atti necessari, fanno rapporto e forniscono informazioni, sempre che non vi si oppongano interessi degni di protezione.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Protezione dei minorenni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 2947; FF 2015 2751).
2 RS 311.0
3 RS 935.61

Art. 3151C. Protezione del figlio / VII. Competenza / 1. In genere

VII. Competenza

1. In genere2

1 Le misure per la protezione del figlio sono ordinate dall’autorità di protezione dei minori del domicilio del figlio.3

2 Se il figlio vive presso genitori affilianti o altrimenti fuori dalla comunione domestica dei genitori, ovvero se vi è pericolo nel ritardo, sono pure competenti le autorità del luogo di dimora del figlio.

3 L’autorità del luogo di dimora che ordina una misura per la protezione del figlio ne informa l’autorità del domicilio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 315a1C. Protezione del figlio / VII. Competenza / 2. Nella procedura matrimoniale / a. Competenza del giudice

2. Nella procedura matrimoniale

a. Competenza del giudice

1 Se è chiamato a decidere sulle relazioni personali dei genitori con i figli, il giudice competente per il divorzio o la tutela dell’unione coniugale prende anche le misure necessarie per proteggere il figlio e ne affida l’esecuzione all’autorità di protezione dei minori.2

2 Il giudice può anche adeguare alle nuove circostanze le misure di protezione del figlio che sono già state prese.

3 Spetta tuttavia all’autorità di protezione dei minori:3

1.
continuare una procedura di protezione del figlio introdotta prima della procedura giudiziaria;
2.
ordinare le misure immediatamente necessarie alla protezione del figlio, quando sia prevedibile che il giudice non possa prenderle tempestivamente.

1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 315b1C. Protezione del figlio / VII. Competenza / 2. Nella procedura matrimoniale / b. Modifica di misure giudiziarie

b. Modifica di misure giudiziarie

1 Il giudice è competente a modificare le misure giudiziarie relative all’attribuzione e alla protezione del figlio:

1.
durante la procedura di divorzio;
2.
nella procedura di modifica della sentenza di divorzio, secondo le norme disciplinanti il divorzio;
3.
nella procedura di modifica delle misure a tutela dell’unione coniugale; le disposizioni sul divorzio sono applicabili per analogia.

2 Negli altri casi è competente l’autorità di protezione dei minori.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 3161C. Protezione del figlio / VIII. Vigilanza sugli affiliati

VIII. Vigilanza sugli affiliati

1 L’affiliante abbisogna di un’autorizzazione dell’autorità di protezione dei minori o di un altro ufficio del suo domicilio designato dal diritto cantonale e soggiace alla loro vigilanza.

1bis Se un affiliando viene accolto a scopo di futura adozione, è competente un’unica autorità cantonale.2

2 Il Consiglio federale emana norme esecutive.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Introdotto dall’all. n. 2 della LF del 22 giu. 2001 relativa alla Convenzione dell’Aia sull’adozione e a provvedimenti per la protezione del minore nelle adozioni internazionali, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2003 (RU 2002 3988; FF 1999 4799).

Art. 3171C. Protezione del figlio / IX. Cooperazione dell’aiuto alla gioventù

IX. Cooperazione dell’aiuto alla gioventù

I Cantoni assicurano con appropriate prescrizioni l’acconcia cooperazione fra autorità ed uffici nel campo della protezione dell’infanzia secondo il diritto civile, in quello del diritto penale per gli adolescenti ed in genere dell’aiuto alla gioventù.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).


  Capo quarto: Della sostanza del figlio15 

Art. 3181A. Amministrazione

A. Amministrazione

1 I genitori hanno il diritto e il dovere di amministrare la sostanza del figlio finché è soggetto alla loro autorità.

2 Se muore uno dei genitori, il genitore superstite deve consegnare all’autorità di protezione dei minori un inventario della sostanza del figlio.2

3 L’autorità di protezione dei minori, se lo ritiene opportuno visti il genere e l’importanza della sostanza del figlio e le condizioni personali dei genitori, ordina la compilazione di un inventario o la consegna periodica di conti e rapporti.3


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 3191B. Impiego dei redditi

B. Impiego dei redditi

1 I genitori possono impiegare i redditi della sostanza del figlio per il suo mantenimento, la sua educazione e istruzione e, in quanto l’equità lo richieda, anche per i bisogni dell’economia domestica.

2 L’avanzo spetta alla sostanza del figlio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3201C. Prelevamento sulla sostanza del figlio

C. Prelevamento sulla sostanza del figlio

1 Versamenti a tacitazione, risarcimenti e analoghe prestazioni possono essere adoperati per il mantenimento del figlio, in rate corrispondenti ai bisogni correnti.

2 Se necessario per provvedere alle spese di mantenimento, educazione o istruzione, l’autorità di protezione dei minori può permettere ai genitori di attingere in misura determinata anche alla rimanente sostanza del figlio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3211D. Beni liberi / I. Liberalità

D. Beni liberi

I. Liberalità

1 I genitori non possono adoperare i redditi della sostanza che il figlio ha ricevuto sotto questa espressa condizione o che gli fu data perché frutti interesse a suo favore, o come libretto di risparmio.

2 L’amministrazione di questi beni da parte dei genitori può essere esclusa soltanto se espressamente stabilito all’atto della liberalità.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3221D. Beni liberi / II. Porzione legittima

II. Porzione legittima

1 Per disposizione a causa di morte, anche la porzione legittima del figlio può essere esclusa dall’amministrazione parentale.

2 Se il disponente affida l’amministrazione a un terzo, l’autorità di protezione dei minori può esigere rendiconti e rapporti periodici.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3231D. Beni liberi / III. Provento del lavoro, assegno professionale

III. Provento del lavoro, assegno professionale

1 Il figlio ha l’amministrazione e il godimento di ciò che guadagna col proprio lavoro e di quanto gli anticipano i genitori sulla sua sostanza per l’esercizio del mestiere o della professione.

2 I genitori possono esigere dal figlio che vive con essi in economia domestica un adeguato contributo per il suo mantenimento.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3241E. Protezione della sostanza del figlio / I. Misure opportune

E. Protezione della sostanza del figlio

I. Misure opportune

1 Se la diligente amministrazione non è sufficientemente garantita, l’autorità di protezione dei minori ordina le misure opportune per la protezione della sostanza del figlio.

2 Essa può segnatamente dare istruzioni per l’amministrazione e, se i rapporti e i rendiconti periodici non bastano, ordinare il deposito o la prestazione di garanzie.

3 Le disposizioni sulla protezione del figlio s’applicano per analogia alla procedura e alla competenza.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3251E. Protezione della sostanza del figlio / II. Privazione dell’amministrazione

II. Privazione dell’amministrazione

1 Quando la sostanza del figlio non possa essere altrimenti sottratta al pericolo, l’autorità di protezione dei minori ne affida l’amministrazione a un curatore.

2 L’autorità di protezione dei minori prende la stessa misura anche in caso di pericolo per la sostanza del figlio non amministrata dai genitori.

3 Se v’è da temere che i redditi o le parti della sostanza del figlio destinate all’uso o liberate non saranno impiegate conformemente alla destinazione, l’autorità di protezione dei minori può parimenti affidarne l’amministrazione a un curatore.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3261F. Fine dell’amministrazione / I. Restituzione

F. Fine dell’amministrazione

I. Restituzione

Cessando l’autorità o l’amministrazione parentale, i genitori devono consegnare la sostanza al figlio divenuto maggiorenne o al suo rappresentante legale sulla scorta di un rendiconto.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 3271F. Fine dell’amministrazione / II. Responsabilità

II. Responsabilità

1 I genitori sono responsabili per la restituzione come un mandatario.

2 Di quanto fu da loro alienato in buona fede devono restituire il prezzo ricavato.

3 Non devono alcun risarcimento per ciò che avessero consumato per il figlio o l’economia domestica nei limiti dei loro diritti.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).


  Capo quinto:16  Dei minorenni sotto tutela

Art. 327a A. Principio

A. Principio

L’autorità di protezione dei minori nomina un tutore al minorenne che non è sotto autorità parentale.

Art. 327b B. Stato giuridico / I. Del minorenne

B. Stato giuridico

I. Del minorenne

Il minorenne sotto tutela ha lo stesso stato giuridico del minorenne sotto autorità parentale.

Art. 327c B. Stato giuridico / II. Del tutore

II. Del tutore

1 Al tutore competono gli stessi diritti dei genitori.

2 Sono applicabili per analogia le disposizioni sulla protezione degli adulti, segnatamente quelle relative alla nomina del curatore, all’esercizio della curatela e al concorso dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti.

3 Se il minorenne deve essere ricoverato in un istituto chiuso o in una clinica psichiatrica, sono applicabili per analogia le disposizioni sulla protezione degli adulti relative al ricovero a scopo di assistenza.


  Titolo nono: Della comunione di famiglia

  Capo primo: Dell’assistenza tra i parenti

Art. 3281A. Persone obbligate

A. Persone obbligate

1 Chi vive in condizioni agiate è tenuto a soccorrere i parenti in linea ascendente e discendente quando senza di ciò essi cadessero nel bisogno.

2 È fatto salvo l’obbligo di mantenimento dei genitori e del coniuge o del partner registrato.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della L del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2007 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).

Art. 329 B. Oggetto e modo dell’azione

B. Oggetto e modo dell’azione1

1 L’azione di assistenza è proposta contro gli obbligati, secondo l’ordine dei loro diritti ereditari, ed ha per oggetto le prestazioni necessarie al mantenimento dell’istante, compatibilmente con le condizioni dell’obbligato.

1bis L’azione di assistenza non può essere proposta se la situazione di bisogno è dovuta a una limitazione dell’attività lucrativa al fine di prendersi cura dei propri figli.2

2 Se, per circostanze speciali, appaia iniquo esigere le prestazioni dall’obbligato, il giudice può limitare o togliere l’obbligo assistenziale.3

3 Le disposizioni sull’azione di mantenimento del figlio e sulla trasmissione del suo diritto all’ente pubblico si applicano per analogia.4


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
4 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 330 C. Assistenza di trovatelli

C. Assistenza di trovatelli

1 I trovatelli sono assistiti dal Comune nel quale sono incorporati.

2 Se poi è stabilita la discendenza di un trovatello, questo Comune può ripetere il rimborso delle spese cagionate dal mantenimento contro i parenti obbligati, ed in ultima linea contro l’ente pubblico tenuto all’assistenza.


  Capo secondo: Della potestà domestica

Art. 331 A. Condizioni

A. Condizioni

1 Quando le persone che in virtù di legge o di contratto o di consuetudine vivono in comunione domestica abbiano un capo, questo esercita la potestà domestica.

2 La potestà domestica si estende su tutte le persone che prendono parte all’economia comune quali parenti od affini, oppure in virtù di un rapporto di lavoro quali lavoratori od in qualità analoga1.2


1 RU 1973 642
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 3 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).

Art. 332 B. Effetti / I. Ordine interno e cura

B. Effetti

I. Ordine interno e cura

1 I membri della comunione devono conformarsi alla regola di casa, la quale dovrà tener conto degli interessi di tutti loro, secondo equità.

2 In ispecie dev’essere concessa ai conviventi la libertà necessaria per la loro educazione, per l’esercizio della professione e per l’adempimento delle pratiche religiose.

3 Il capo famiglia deve vegliare alla custodia ed alla sicurezza delle cose apportate dai membri della comunione con quella cura che usa nelle cose proprie.

Art. 333 B. Effetti / II. Responsabilità

II. Responsabilità

1 Il capo di famiglia è responsabile del danno cagionato da un membro della comunione minorenne o affetto da disabilità mentale o turba psichica o sotto curatela generale, in quanto non possa dimostrare di avere adoperato nella vigilanza la diligenza ordinaria e richiesta dalle circostanze.1

2 Il capo di famiglia deve provvedere affinché un membro della comunione affetto da disabilità mentale o da turba psichica non esponga sé stesso o altri a pericolo o danno.2

3 Ove occorra, si rivolgerà all’autorità competente per i provvedimenti necessari.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 3341B. Effetti / III. Credito dei figli e degli abiatici / 1. Condizioni

III. Credito dei figli e degli abiatici

1. Condizioni

1 I figli maggiorenni o gli abiatici che, convivendo coi genitori o con gli avi, hanno conferito alla comunione il loro lavoro od i loro guadagni, possono chiedere un’equa indennità.

2 In caso di contestazione, il giudice decide circa l’ammontare e la garanzia dell’indennità, il genere e il modo del pagamento.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 6 ott. 1972, in vigore dal 15 feb. 1973 (RU 1973 99; FF 1970 I 601, 1971 I 543).

Art. 334bis1B. Effetti / III. Credito dei figli e degli abiatici / 2. Procedura

2. Procedura

1 L’indennità spettante ai figli o agli abiatici può essere fatta valere alla morte del debitore.

2 Può essere fatta valere vivente il debitore se contro questo è eseguito un pignoramento o dichiarato il fallimento, se è sciolta la comunione o se l’azienda passa in altre mani.

3 L’indennità non è soggetta a prescrizioni ma dev’essere fatta valere al più tardi al momento della divisione dell’eredità del debitore.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 6 ott. 1972, in vigore dal 15 feb. 1973 (RU 1973 99; FF 1970 I 601, 1971 I 543).


  Capo terzo: Dei beni di famiglia

Art. 335 A. Fondazioni di famiglia

A. Fondazioni di famiglia

1 Possono essere erette delle fondazioni di famiglia secondo le norme del diritto delle persone o del diritto successorio, nel senso che si possono dedicare dei beni a beneficio di una famiglia per le spese di educazione, dotazione od assistenza dei suoi membri o per altro simile fine.

2 L’erezione di fedecommessi di famiglia non è più permessa.

Art. 336 B. Indivisione / I. Costituzione / 1. Facoltà

B. Indivisione

I. Costituzione

1. Facoltà

Una sostanza può essere dedicata a beneficio di una famiglia, se dei parenti lasciano indivisa una eredità o parte di essa, o mettono insieme altri beni per formare un’indivisione.

Art. 337 B. Indivisione / I. Costituzione / 2. Forma

2. Forma

Il contratto per costituire un’indivisione richiede per la sua validità l’atto pubblico firmato da tutti i membri o dai loro rappresentanti.

Art. 338 B. Indivisione / II. Durata

II. Durata

1 L’indivisione può essere stipulata a tempo determinato o indeterminato.

2 Se conchiusa a tempo indeterminato, ognuno dei partecipanti può dare la disdetta con un preavviso di sei mesi.

3 Quando trattisi di un’azienda agricola, la disdetta può essere data solo per il termine primaverile od autunnale, conforme all’uso del luogo.

Art. 339 B. Indivisione / III. Effetti / 1. Modo

III. Effetti

1. Modo

1 L’indivisione obbliga i suoi membri ad una comune attività economica.

2 Salvo patto contrario, tutti vi partecipano in egual misura.

3 Durante l’indivisione essi non possono domandare la divisione della sostanza comune né disporre delle loro parti.

Art. 340 B. Indivisione / III. Effetti / 2. Direzione e rappresentanza / a. In genere

2. Direzione e rappresentanza

a. In genere

1 Gli interessi dell’indivisione sono geriti in comune da tutti i partecipanti.

2 Ognuno di essi può fare da solo gli atti della ordinaria amministrazione.

Art. 341 B. Indivisione / III. Effetti / 2. Direzione e rappresentanza / b. Delegazione ad un capo

b. Delegazione ad un capo

1 I partecipanti possono designare uno di essi quale capo dell’indivisione.

2 Questi rappresenta l’indivisione in tutti gli interessi che la concernono, e ne dirige l’attività economica.

3 L’esclusione degli altri dal diritto di rappresentanza è opponibile ai terzi di buona fede solo quando il rappresentante sia iscritto nel registro di commercio.

Art. 342 B. Indivisione / III. Effetti / 3. Beni comuni e beni riservati

3. Beni comuni e beni riservati

1 Tutto ciò che appartiene all’eredità indivisa rimane proprietà comune di tutti i partecipanti.

2 I partecipanti sono solidalmente responsabili per i debiti.

3 Salvo patto contrario, è proprietà riservata di ogni partecipante ciò che egli possedeva all’infuori dei beni comuni e ciò che acquista privatamente durante l’indivisione, per eredità o per altro titolo gratuito.

Art. 343 B. Indivisione / IV. Scioglimento / 1. Cause

IV. Scioglimento

1. Cause

L’indivisione si scioglie:

1.
per convenzione o disdetta;
2.
per la decorrenza del termine per il quale era costituita, in quanto non sia continuata per tacito consenso;
3.
in caso di realizzazione della quota pignorata di un partecipante;
4.
in caso di fallimento di uno dei partecipanti;
5.
a richiesta di uno dei partecipanti, per motivi gravi.
Art. 344 B. Indivisione / IV. Scioglimento / 2. Disdetta, insolvenza, matrimonio

2. Disdetta, insolvenza, matrimonio

1 Nei casi di disdetta o di fallimento di un partecipante o di realizzazione della sua quota a seguito di pignoramento, gli altri partecipanti possono continuare la comunione tacitando il sortente o i suoi creditori.

2 In caso di matrimonio, un partecipante può chiedere la liquidazione dei suoi diritti anche senza disdetta.

Art. 345 B. Indivisione / IV. Scioglimento / 3. Morte di un partecipante

3. Morte di un partecipante

1 Morendo un partecipante, i suoi eredi non appartenenti all’indivisione possono pretendere solo la liquidazione dei loro diritti.

2 Se gli eredi sono suoi discendenti, essi possono, col consenso degli altri partecipanti, prendere il posto del defunto nella comunione.

Art. 346 B. Indivisione / IV. Scioglimento / 4. Norme per la divisione

4. Norme per la divisione

1 La divisione dei beni comuni, o la tacitazione dei diritti di un partecipante, avviene secondo la situazione patrimoniale del momento in cui si è verificata la causa di scioglimento.

2 La sua esecuzione non può essere domandata intempestivamente.

Art. 347 B. Indivisione / V. Compartecipazione / 1. Definizione

V. Compartecipazione

1. Definizione

1 I partecipanti possono rimettere la gestione dell’azienda e la rappresentanza ad uno di essi con l’obbligo di corrispondere agli altri una quota annua del guadagno netto.

2 Salvo patto contrario, questa quota è fissata equamente, secondo la rendita media dei beni comuni per un sufficiente periodo di tempo, avuto riguardo alle prestazioni dell’assuntore.

Art. 348 B. Indivisione / V. Compartecipazione / 2. Speciali motivi di scioglimento

2. Speciali motivi di scioglimento

1 Se l’assuntore non gerisce debitamente l’azienda o non adempie le sue prestazioni verso i partecipanti, l’indivisione può essere disciolta.

2 Qualunque partecipante può, per gravi motivi, chiedere al giudice di essere ammesso nell’azienda insieme con l’assuntore, avuto riguardo alle prescrizioni relative alle divisioni ereditarie.

3 Del resto la compartecipazione è soggetta alle regole generali della indivisione.

Art. 349 a 3581

1 Abrogati dal n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 3591

1 Abrogato dal n. II 21 della LF del 15 dic. 1989 concernente l’approvazione di atti legislativi dei Cantoni da parte della Confederazione, con effetto dal 1° feb. 1991 (RU 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1149).


  Parte terza:17  Della protezione degli adulti

  Titolo decimo: Delle misure precauzionali personali e delle misure applicabili per legge

  Capo primo: Delle misure precauzionali personali

  Sezione prima: Del mandato precauzionale

Art. 360 A. Principio

A. Principio

1 Chi ha l’esercizio dei diritti civili può incaricare una persona fisica o giuridica di provvedere alla cura della propria persona o dei propri interessi patrimoniali o di rappresentarlo nelle relazioni giuridiche, nel caso in cui divenga incapace di discernimento.

2 Egli definisce i compiti attribuiti al mandatario e può impartire istruzioni sull’adempimento degli stessi.

3 Può prendere disposizioni alternative per il caso in cui il mandatario non sia idoneo a svolgere il compito, non accetti il mandato o lo disdica.

Art. 361 B. Costituzione e revoca / I. Costituzione

B. Costituzione e revoca

I. Costituzione

1 Il mandato precauzionale è costituito per atto olografo o per atto pubblico.

2 Dall’inizio alla fine il mandato olografo è redatto, datato e firmato a mano dal mandante.

3 Su domanda, l’ufficio dello stato civile iscrive nella banca dati centrale la costituzione del mandato e il luogo in cui lo stesso è depositato. Il Consiglio federale emana le disposizioni necessarie, segnatamente sull’accesso ai dati.

Art. 362 B. Costituzione e revoca / II. Revoca

II. Revoca

1 Il mandante può revocare il mandato precauzionale in ogni tempo rispettando una delle forme prescritte per la sua costituzione.

2 Egli può revocare il mandato anche distruggendo il documento.

3 Un nuovo mandato sostituisce il precedente, anche senza revoca espressa, eccetto che se ne riveli un indubbio complemento.

Art. 363 C. Convalida e accettazione

C. Convalida e accettazione

1 Quando apprende che una persona è divenuta incapace di discernimento e ignora se sussiste un mandato precauzionale, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti si informa presso l’ufficio dello stato civile.

2 Qualora il mandato sussista, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti verifica se:

1.
è stato validamente costituito;
2.
ne sono adempiute le condizioni per l’efficacia;
3.
il mandatario è idoneo ai suoi compiti; e
4.
sono necessarie ulteriori misure di protezione degli adulti.

3 Se il mandatario accetta il mandato, l’autorità lo rende attento agli obblighi derivanti dalle disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni1 sul mandato e gli consegna un documento che attesta i poteri conferitigli.


1 RS 220

Art. 364 D. Interpretazione e completamento

D. Interpretazione e completamento

Il mandatario può chiedere all’autorità di protezione degli adulti di interpretare il mandato e di completarlo per quanto concerne punti secondari.

Art. 365 E. Adempimento

E. Adempimento

1 Il mandatario rappresenta il mandante nei limiti del mandato conferitogli e adempie i suoi compiti con diligenza e conformemente alle disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni1 sul mandato.

2 Se devono essere compiuti atti o negozi non contemplati dal mandato o se in un determinato affare gli interessi del mandatario sono in collisione con quelli del mandante, il mandatario ne informa senza indugio l’autorità di protezione degli adulti.

3 In caso di collisione di interessi, i poteri del mandatario decadono per legge.


1 RS 220

Art. 366 F. Compenso e spese

F. Compenso e spese

1 Qualora il mandato precauzionale non contenga disposizioni sul compenso del mandatario, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti stabilisce un compenso adeguato, se ciò appare giustificato dall’estensione dei compiti o se le prestazioni del mandatario sono abitualmente fornite a titolo oneroso.

2 Il compenso e le spese necessarie sono a carico del mandante.

Art. 367 G. Disdetta

G. Disdetta

1 Il mandatario può disdire il mandato precauzionale in ogni tempo mediante comunicazione scritta all’autorità di protezione degli adulti e preavviso di due mesi.

2 Per motivi gravi il mandatario può disdire il mandato senza preavviso.

Art. 368 H. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

H. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

1 Se gli interessi del mandante sono esposti a pericolo o non sono più salvaguardati, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti prende le misure necessarie, d’ufficio o su domanda di una persona vicina al mandante.

2 Essa può in particolare impartire istruzioni al mandatario, obbligarlo a compilare un inventario, a presentare periodicamente i conti e a fare rapporto oppure può privarlo in tutto o in parte dei poteri.

Art. 369 I. Ricupero della capacità di discernimento

I. Ricupero della capacità di discernimento

1 Se il mandante ricupera la capacità di discernimento, il mandato precauzionale si estingue per legge.

2 Se l’estinzione del mandato espone a pericolo gli interessi del mandante, il mandatario continua a svolgere i compiti assegnatigli fino a quando il mandante può salvaguardare da sé i propri interessi.

3 Il mandante permane obbligato dagli atti e negozi che il mandatario compie prima di apprendere l’estinzione del mandato.


  Sezione seconda: Delle direttive del paziente

Art. 370 A. Principio

A. Principio

1 Chi è capace di discernimento può, in direttive vincolanti, designare i provvedimenti medici ai quali accetta o rifiuta di essere sottoposto nel caso in cui divenga incapace di discernimento.

2 Egli può anche designare una persona fisica che discuta i provvedimenti medici con il medico curante e decida in suo nome nel caso in cui divenga incapace di discernimento. Può impartire istruzioni alla persona designata.

3 Può prendere disposizioni alternative per il caso in cui la persona designata non sia idonea a svolgere il compito, non accetti il mandato o lo disdica.

Art. 371 B. Costituzione e revoca

B. Costituzione e revoca

1 Le direttive del paziente sono costituite in forma scritta, nonché datate e firmate.

2 L’autore delle direttive può farne registrare la costituzione sulla tessera di assicurato con la menzione del luogo dove sono depositate. Il Consiglio federale emana le disposizioni necessarie, segnatamente sull’accesso ai dati.

3 La disposizione sulla revoca del mandato precauzionale si applica per analogia.

Art. 372 C. Verificarsi dell’incapacità di discernimento

C. Verificarsi dell’incapacità di discernimento

1 Se il paziente è incapace di discernimento e non è noto se sussistono sue direttive, il medico curante si informa consultando la tessera di assicurato. Sono fatte salve le situazioni d’urgenza.

2 Il medico ottempera alle direttive del paziente, salvo che violino le prescrizioni legali o sussistano dubbi fondati che esse esprimano la volontà libera o presumibile del paziente.

3 Il medico iscrive nel fascicolo del paziente le ragioni per le quali non ha ottemperato alle direttive di costui.

Art. 373 D. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

D. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

1 Ognuna delle persone vicine al paziente può adire per scritto l’autorità di protezione degli adulti facendo valere che:

1.
non è stato ottemperato alle direttive del paziente;
2.
gli interessi del paziente incapace di discernimento sono esposti a pericolo o non sono più salvaguardati;
3.
le direttive del paziente non esprimono la sua libera volontà.

2 La disposizione sull’intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti in caso di mandato precauzionale si applica per analogia.


  Capo secondo: Delle misure applicabili per legge alle persone incapaci di discernimento

  Sezione prima: Della rappresentanza da parte del coniuge o del partner registrato

Art. 374 A. Condizioni ed estensione del diritto di rappresentanza

A. Condizioni ed estensione del diritto di rappresentanza

1 Il coniuge o partner registrato che vive in comunione domestica con una persona che diviene incapace di discernimento o le presta di persona regolare assistenza ha per legge un diritto di rappresentanza se non sussiste un mandato precauzionale né una corrispondente curatela.

2 Il diritto di rappresentanza comprende:

1.
tutti gli atti giuridici abitualmente necessari al mantenimento;
2.
l’amministrazione ordinaria del reddito e dei rimanenti beni; e
3.
se necessario, il potere di aprire e sbrigare la corrispondenza.

3 Per gli atti giuridici inerenti all’amministrazione straordinaria dei beni il coniuge o il partner registrato deve ottenere il consenso dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti.

Art. 375 B. Esercizio del diritto di rappresentanza

B. Esercizio del diritto di rappresentanza

Le disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni1 sul mandato si applicano per analogia all’esercizio del diritto di rappresentanza.


1 RS 220

Art. 376 C. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

C. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

1 Se sussistono dubbi sull’adempimento delle condizioni per la rappresentanza, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti pronuncia in merito e, se del caso, consegna al coniuge o al partner registrato un documento che ne attesta i poteri.

2 Se gli interessi della persona incapace di discernimento sono esposti a pericolo o non sono più salvaguardati, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti, su domanda di una persona vicina o d’ufficio, revoca in tutto o in parte i poteri di rappresentanza del coniuge o del partner registrato oppure istituisce una curatela.


  Sezione seconda: Della rappresentanza in caso di provvedimenti medici

Art. 377 A. Piano terapeutico

A. Piano terapeutico

1 Se una persona incapace di discernimento deve ricevere un trattamento medico sul quale non si è pronunciata in direttive vincolanti, il medico curante definisce il trattamento necessario in collaborazione con la persona che ha diritto di rappresentarla in caso di provvedimenti medici.

2 Il medico informa la persona con diritto di rappresentanza su tutte le circostanze essenziali riguardo ai provvedimenti medici previsti, in particolare sui motivi, l’obiettivo, il genere, le modalità, i rischi, gli effetti secondari e i costi dei provvedimenti, sulle conseguenze di un mancato trattamento nonché su eventuali trattamenti alternativi.

3 Per quanto possibile, la persona incapace di discernimento è coinvolta nel processo decisionale.

4 Il piano terapeutico è adeguato in funzione degli sviluppi della situazione.

Art. 378 B. Persone con diritto di rappresentanza

B. Persone con diritto di rappresentanza

1 Le seguenti persone hanno diritto, nell’ordine, di rappresentare la persona incapace di discernimento e di dare o rifiutare il consenso per i provvedimenti ambulatoriali o stazionari previsti:

1.
la persona designata nelle direttive del paziente o nel mandato precauzionale;
2.
il curatore con diritto di rappresentanza in caso di provvedimenti medici;
3.
il coniuge o partner registrato che vive in comunione domestica con la persona incapace di discernimento o le presta di persona regolare assistenza;
4.
la persona che vive in comunione domestica con la persona incapace di discernimento e le presta di persona regolare assistenza;
5.
i discendenti, se prestano di persona regolare assistenza alla persona incapace di discernimento;
6.
i genitori, se prestano di persona regolare assistenza alla persona incapace di discernimento;
7.
i fratelli e le sorelle, se prestano di persona regolare assistenza alla persona incapace di discernimento.

2 Se più persone hanno diritto di rappresentanza, il medico di buona fede può presumere che ciascuna agisca di comune accordo con le altre.

3 Se mancano istruzioni nelle direttive del paziente, la persona con diritto di rappresentanza decide secondo la volontà presumibile e conformemente agli interessi della persona incapace di discernimento.

Art. 379 C. Situazioni d’urgenza

C. Situazioni d’urgenza

Nelle situazioni d’urgenza il medico prende provvedimenti medici conformi alla volontà presumibile e agli interessi della persona incapace di discernimento.

Art. 380 D. Trattamento di una turba psichica

D. Trattamento di una turba psichica

Il trattamento in una clinica psichiatrica della turba psichica di una persona incapace di discernimento è retto dalle disposizioni sul ricovero a scopo di assistenza.

Art. 381 E. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

E. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti istituisce una curatela di rappresentanza se non vi è una persona con diritto di rappresentanza o se la stessa non vuole esercitare il suo diritto.

2 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti designa la persona con diritto di rappresentanza o istituisce una curatela di rappresentanza se:

1.
è incerto a chi spetti la rappresentanza;
2.
i pareri delle persone con diritto di rappresentanza divergono; o
3.
gli interessi della persona incapace di discernimento sono esposti a pericolo o non sono più salvaguardati.

3 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti interviene su domanda del medico, di un’altra persona vicina o d’ufficio.


  Sezione terza: Del soggiorno in un istituto di accoglienza o di cura

Art. 382 A. Contratto d’assistenza

A. Contratto d’assistenza

1 Se per un lungo periodo una persona incapace di discernimento riceve assistenza in un istituto di accoglienza o di cura, un contratto di assistenza scritto deve stabilire quali siano le prestazioni fornite dall’istituto e quale ne sia il prezzo.

2 Per la determinazione delle prestazioni fornite dall’istituto si considerano per quanto possibile i desideri dell’interessato.

3 Il potere di rappresentare la persona incapace di discernimento per la conclusione, la modifica e la risoluzione del contratto di assistenza è retto per analogia dalle disposizioni sulla rappresentanza in caso di provvedimenti medici.

Art. 383 B. Restrizione della libertà di movimento / I. Condizioni

B. Restrizione della libertà di movimento

I. Condizioni

1 L’istituto di accoglienza o di cura può restringere la libertà di movimento soltanto se misure meno incisive sono o appaiono a priori insufficienti e se la misura serve a:

1.
evitare di esporre a grave pericolo la vita o l’integrità fisica dell’interessato o di terzi; oppure a
2.
eliminare un grave disturbo alla convivenza in seno all’istituto.

2 All’interessato è spiegato cosa stia per accadere, perché sia stata ordinata la misura e quale ne sia la presumibile durata; gli è pure indicato chi si prenderà cura di lui durante questo periodo. Sono fatte salve le situazioni d’urgenza.

3 La restrizione della libertà di movimento è soppressa non appena possibile e in ogni caso la sua legittimità è riesaminata a intervalli regolari.

Art. 384 B. Restrizione della libertà di movimento / II. Verbalizzazione e informazione

II. Verbalizzazione e informazione

1 È steso verbale riguardo a ciascuna misura restrittiva della libertà di movimento. Il verbale contiene in particolare il nome di chi ha ordinato la misura, nonché lo scopo, il genere e la durata della stessa.

2 La persona con diritto di rappresentanza in caso di provvedimenti medici è informata sulla misura restrittiva della libertà di movimento e può consultare il verbale in ogni tempo.

3 Il diritto di consultare il verbale spetta anche alle persone preposte alla vigilanza sull’istituto di accoglienza o di cura.

Art. 385 B. Restrizione della libertà di movimento / III. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

III. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

1 Contro una misura restrittiva della libertà di movimento l’interessato o una persona a lui vicina può adire per scritto in ogni tempo l’autorità di protezione degli adulti del luogo in cui ha sede l’istituto.

2 Se constata che la misura restrittiva non soddisfa le condizioni legali, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti la modifica o la revoca oppure ordina una misura ufficiale di protezione degli adulti. Se necessario informa l’autorità preposta alla vigilanza sull’istituto.

3 Ogni domanda che solleciti una decisione dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti deve esserle trasmessa senza indugio.

Art. 386 C. Protezione della personalità

C. Protezione della personalità

1 L’istituto di accoglienza o di cura protegge la personalità della persona incapace di discernimento e ne incoraggia per quanto possibile i contatti con persone fuori dell’istituto.

2 Se nessuno fuori dell’istituto si cura dell’interessato, l’istituto informa l’autorità di protezione degli adulti.

3 La libera scelta del medico è garantita, eccetto che motivi gravi vi si oppongano.

Art. 387 D. Vigilanza sugli istituti di accoglienza e di cura

D. Vigilanza sugli istituti di accoglienza e di cura

I Cantoni vigilano sugli istituti di accoglienza e di cura che assistono persone incapaci di discernimento, sempre che la vigilanza già non sia assicurata da altre prescrizioni del diritto federale.


  Titolo undicesimo: Delle misure ufficiali

  Capo primo: Principi generali

Art. 388 A. Scopo

A. Scopo

1 Le misure ufficiali di protezione degli adulti salvaguardano il benessere delle persone bisognose di aiuto e ne assicurano la protezione.

2 Per quanto possibile conservano e promuovono l’autodeterminazione dell’interessato.

Art. 389 B. Sussidiarietà e proporzionalità

B. Sussidiarietà e proporzionalità

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti ordina una misura se:

1.
il sostegno fornito dalla famiglia, da altre persone vicine alla persona bisognosa di aiuto o da servizi privati o pubblici è o appare a priori insufficiente;
2.
la persona bisognosa di aiuto è incapace di discernimento, non aveva adottato misure precauzionali personali, o non ne aveva adottate di sufficienti, e le misure applicabili per legge sono insufficienti.

2 Ogni misura ufficiale deve essere necessaria e idonea.


  Capo secondo: Delle curatele

  Sezione prima: Disposizioni generali

Art. 390 A. Condizioni

A. Condizioni

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti istituisce una curatela se una persona maggiorenne:

1.
non è in grado di provvedere ai propri interessi, o lo è solo in parte, a causa di una disabilità mentale, di una turba psichica o di un analogo stato di debolezza inerente alla sua persona;
2.
a causa di un’incapacità di discernimento temporanea o di assenza, non è in grado di agire lei stessa e non ha designato un rappresentante per provvedere ad affari che occorre sbrigare.

2 L’onere che sopportano i congiunti e i terzi e la loro protezione devono essere considerati.

3 La curatela è istituita su domanda dell’interessato, di una persona a lui vicina o d’ufficio.

Art. 391 B. Sfere di compiti

B. Sfere di compiti

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti definisce le sfere di compiti della curatela secondo i bisogni dell’interessato.

2 Le sfere di compiti riguardano la cura della persona, quella degli interessi patrimoniali o le relazioni giuridiche.

3 Il curatore può aprire la corrispondenza o accedere all’abitazione dell’interessato senza il suo consenso soltanto se l’autorità di protezione degli adulti gliene ha espressamente conferito il potere.

Art. 392 C. Rinuncia a una curatela

C. Rinuncia a una curatela

Se l’istituzione di una curatela appare manifestamente sproporzionata rispetto all’estensione dei compiti, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti può:

1.
provvedere di moto proprio a quanto necessario, segnatamente dando il consenso a un negozio giuridico;
2.
conferire a un terzo l’incarico di provvedere a singoli compiti; oppure
3.
designare una persona o un servizio idonei con diritto di controllo e informazione in determinati ambiti.

  Sezione seconda: Dei generi di curatela

Art. 393 A. Amministrazione di sostegno

A. Amministrazione di sostegno

1 Se la persona bisognosa di aiuto necessita di un sostegno per provvedere a determinati affari, con il suo consenso è istituita un’amministrazione di sostegno.

2 L’amministrazione di sostegno non limita l’esercizio dei diritti civili dell’interessato.

Art. 394 B. Curatela di rappresentanza / I. In genere

B. Curatela di rappresentanza

I. In genere

1 Se la persona bisognosa di aiuto non può provvedere a determinati affari e deve pertanto essere rappresentata, è istituita una curatela di rappresentanza.

2 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti può limitare di conseguenza l’esercizio dei diritti civili dell’interessato.

3 Anche se non sono posti limiti al suo esercizio dei diritti civili, l’interessato è obbligato dagli atti del curatore.

Art. 395 B. Curatela di rappresentanza / II. Amministrazione dei beni

II. Amministrazione dei beni

1 Se istituisce una curatela di rappresentanza per l’amministrazione dei beni, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti designa i beni che devono essere amministrati dal curatore. Può porre sotto amministrazione del curatore determinati elementi del reddito o del patrimonio, l’intero reddito o l’intero patrimonio o l’insieme di reddito e patrimonio.

2 Salvo che l’autorità di protezione degli adulti disponga altrimenti, i poteri d’amministrazione del curatore si estendono anche ai risparmi realizzati sul reddito o alle rendite maturate sul patrimonio.

3 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti può privare l’interessato dell’accesso a dati beni senza limitarne l’esercizio dei diritti civili.

4 Se vieta all’interessato di disporre di un fondo, ne ordina la menzione nel registro fondiario.

Art. 396 C. Curatela di cooperazione

C. Curatela di cooperazione

1 Una curatela di cooperazione è istituita se occorre che il curatore acconsenta a determinati atti della persona bisognosa d’aiuto, per proteggerla.

2 L’esercizio dei diritti civili dell’interessato è limitato di conseguenza per legge.

Art. 397 D. Combinazione di curatele

D. Combinazione di curatele

L’amministrazione di sostegno e le curatele di rappresentanza e di cooperazione possono essere combinate.

Art. 398 E. Curatela generale

E. Curatela generale

1 Una curatela generale è istituita se una persona ha un particolare bisogno d’aiuto, segnatamente a causa di durevole incapacità di discernimento.

2 La curatela generale comprende tutto quanto concerne la cura della persona e degli interessi patrimoniali e le relazioni giuridiche.

3 L’interessato è privato per legge dell’esercizio dei diritti civili.


  Sezione terza: Della fine della curatela

Art. 399

1 La curatela prende fine per legge con la morte dell’interessato.

2 Appena non vi sia più motivo di mantenerla, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti revoca la curatela su domanda dell’interessato, di una persona a lui vicina o d’ufficio.


  Sezione quarta: Del curatore

Art. 400 A. Nomina / I. Condizioni generali

A. Nomina

I. Condizioni generali

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti nomina quale curatore una persona fisica che sia idonea, dal profilo personale e delle competenze, ad adempiere i compiti previsti, disponga del tempo necessario e svolga personalmente i suoi compiti. In circostanze particolari possono essere nominati più curatori.

2 Può essere nominato curatore soltanto chi vi abbia acconsentito.1

3 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti si adopera affinché siano forniti al curatore l’istruzione, la consulenza e il sostegno necessari.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 29 set. 2017, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 2801; FF 2017 1565 2815).

Art. 401 A. Nomina / II. Desideri dell’interessato o delle persone a lui vicine

II. Desideri dell’interessato o delle persone a lui vicine

1 Quando l’interessato propone quale curatore una persona di sua fiducia, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti vi acconsente se la persona proposta è idonea e disposta a investirsi della curatela.

2 Per quanto possibile, l’autorità tiene conto dei desideri dei congiunti o di altre persone vicine all’interessato.

3 Se l’interessato non gradisce quale curatore una data persona, per quanto possibile l’autorità gli dà soddisfazione.

Art. 402 A. Nomina / III. Conferimento dell’ufficio a più persone

III. Conferimento dell’ufficio a più persone

1 Quando conferisce la curatela a più persone, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti stabilisce se l’ufficio va esercitato congiuntamente o ne ripartisce i compiti fra i singoli curatori.

2 L’esercizio congiunto di una curatela è disposto soltanto con l’accordo delle persone alle quali essa è conferita.

Art. 403 B. Impedimento e collisione di interessi

B. Impedimento e collisione di interessi

1 Quando il curatore è impedito di agire o i suoi interessi in un affare sono in collisione con quelli dell’interessato, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti nomina un sostituto o provvede essa stessa all’affare.

2 In caso di collisione di interessi, i poteri del curatore decadono per legge nell’affare di cui si tratta.

Art. 404 C. Compenso e spese

C. Compenso e spese

1 Il curatore ha diritto a un compenso adeguato e al rimborso delle spese necessarie, pagati con i beni dell’interessato. In caso di curatore professionale i relativi importi sono corrisposti al datore di lavoro.

2 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti stabilisce l’importo del compenso. A tal fine tiene conto in particolare dell’estensione e della complessità dei compiti conferiti al curatore.

3 I Cantoni emanano le disposizioni d’esecuzione e disciplinano il compenso e il rimborso delle spese per i casi in cui gli stessi non possano essere pagati con i beni dell’interessato.


  Sezione quinta: Dell’esercizio della curatela

Art. 405 A. Assunzione dell’ufficio

A. Assunzione dell’ufficio

1 Il curatore acquisisce le informazioni necessarie all’adempimento dei suoi compiti e prende contatto di persona con l’interessato.

2 Quando la curatela comprende l’amministrazione dei beni, il curatore, in collaborazione con l’autorità di protezione degli adulti, compila senza indugio l’inventario dei beni da amministrare.

3 Se le circostanze lo giustificano, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti può ordinare la compilazione di un inventario pubblico. Per i creditori questo inventario ha gli stessi effetti del beneficio d’inventario in materia di successione.

4 I terzi devono fornire tutte le informazioni necessarie alla compilazione dell’inventario.

Art. 406 B. Relazione con l’interessato

B. Relazione con l’interessato

1 Il curatore adempie i suoi compiti nell’interesse dell’assistito, tiene per quanto possibile conto delle opinioni di costui e ne rispetta la volontà di organizzare la propria vita corrispondentemente alle proprie capacità e secondo i propri desideri e le proprie idee.

2 Il curatore si adopera per instaurare una relazione di fiducia con l’interessato, per attenuarne lo stato di debolezza o per prevenire un peggioramento.

Art. 407 C. Atti autonomi dell’interessato

C. Atti autonomi dell’interessato

Anche se privato dell’esercizio dei diritti civili, l’interessato capace di discernimento può, nei limiti posti dal diritto delle persone, acquistare diritti e contrarre obbligazioni con atti propri, nonché esercitare diritti strettamente personali.

Art. 408 D. Amministrazione dei beni / I. Compiti

D. Amministrazione dei beni

I. Compiti

1 Il curatore amministra i beni con diligenza e procede a tutti i negozi giuridici connessi con l’amministrazione.

2 Il curatore può in particolare:

1.
accettare con effetto liberatorio per i terzi le prestazioni che gli stessi devono all’interessato;
2.
per quanto opportuno, pagare debiti;
3.
se necessario, rappresentare l’interessato per i bisogni correnti.

3 Il Consiglio federale emana disposizioni sull’investimento e la custodia dei beni.

Art. 409 D. Amministrazione dei beni / II. Importi a libera disposizione

II. Importi a libera disposizione

Il curatore mette a libera disposizione dell’interessato importi adeguati prelevati dai beni di costui.

Art. 410 D. Amministrazione dei beni / III. Contabilità

III. Contabilità

1 Il curatore tiene la contabilità e la presenta per approvazione all’autorità di protezione degli adulti alle scadenze da essa fissate, ma almeno ogni due anni.

2 Il curatore spiega la contabilità all’interessato e su richiesta gliene fornisce una copia.

Art. 411 E. Rapporto

E. Rapporto

1 Ogniqualvolta sia necessario, ma almeno ogni due anni, il curatore rimette all’autorità di protezione degli adulti un rapporto sulla situazione dell’interessato e sull’esercizio della curatela.

2 Per quanto possibile, il curatore coinvolge l’interessato nell’allestimento del rapporto e su richiesta gliene fornisce una copia.

Art. 412 F. Negozi particolari

F. Negozi particolari

1 In rappresentanza dell’interessato, il curatore non può contrarre fideiussioni, costituire fondazioni né fare donazioni, fatti salvi i regali d’uso.

2 Gli elementi del patrimonio che hanno un valore particolare per l’interessato o la sua famiglia non possono, per quanto possibile, essere alienati.

Art. 413 G. Obbligo di diligenza e di discrezione

G. Obbligo di diligenza e di discrezione

1 Il curatore adempie i suoi compiti con la stessa diligenza cui è tenuto il mandatario secondo le disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni1.

2 Il curatore è tenuto alla discrezione, eccetto che interessi preponderanti vi si oppongano.

3 I terzi sono informati sulla curatela per quanto sia necessario al debito adempimento dei compiti del curatore.


1 RS 220

Art. 414 H. Modificazione delle circostanze

H. Modificazione delle circostanze

Il curatore informa senza indugio l’autorità di protezione degli adulti sulle circostanze che richiedono una modifica della misura o consentono la revoca della curatela.


  Sezione sesta: Del concorso dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

Art. 415 A. Esame della contabilità e del rapporto

A. Esame della contabilità e del rapporto

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti verifica la contabilità, approvandola o rifiutandola; se necessario ne chiede la rettifica.

2 Essa esamina il rapporto e, se necessario, chiede che sia completato.

3 Se del caso, adotta misure adeguate per salvaguardare gli interessi dell’interessato.

Art. 416 B. Atti e negozi sottoposti a consenso / I. Per legge

B. Atti e negozi sottoposti a consenso

I. Per legge

1 Il curatore abbisogna del consenso dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti per compiere in rappresentanza dell’interessato gli atti e negozi seguenti:

1.
liquidazione dell’economia domestica, disdetta del contratto per l’abitazione nella quale vive l’interessato;
2.
contratti di lunga durata per il ricovero dell’interessato;
3.
accettazione o rinuncia a un’eredità, se a tal fine è necessaria una dichiarazione espressa, nonché contratti successori e convenzioni di divisione ereditaria;
4.
acquisto e alienazione di fondi, costituzione di pegno o di altri oneri reali sugli stessi, nonché costruzioni che eccedono i limiti dell’amministrazione ordinaria;
5.
acquisto, alienazione e costituzione in pegno di altri beni, nonché costituzione di un usufrutto sugli stessi, sempre che questi negozi non rientrino nell’amministrazione e gestione ordinarie;
6.
accensione o concessione di mutui considerevoli e stipulazione di obbligazioni cambiarie;
7.
contratti di rendita vitalizia e di vitalizio, nonché assicurazioni sulla vita, sempre che essi non siano connessi con un contratto di lavoro nell’ambito della previdenza professionale;
8.
assunzione o liquidazione di un’impresa, ingresso in una società con responsabilità personale o con considerevole partecipazione di capitale;
9.
dichiarazioni d’insolvenza, il piatire, stipulazione di una transazione, di un compromesso o di un concordato, fatti salvi i provvedimenti provvisori adottati dal curatore in casi urgenti.

2 Se l’interessato capace di discernimento dà il suo assenso e se la curatela non ne limita l’esercizio dei diritti civili, non occorre il consenso dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti.

3 Il consenso dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti è sempre necessario per i contratti stipulati tra il curatore e l’interessato, salvo che questi conferisca un mandato gratuito.

Art. 417 B. Atti e negozi sottoposti a consenso / II. Su ordine dell’autorità

II. Su ordine dell’autorità

Per motivi gravi l’autorità di protezione degli adulti può ordinare che siano subordinati al suo consenso altri atti e negozi.

Art. 418 B. Atti e negozi sottoposti a consenso / III. Mancanza del consenso

III. Mancanza del consenso

L’atto o negozio compiuto senza il necessario consenso dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti ha per l’interessato soltanto gli effetti previsti dalle disposizioni del diritto delle persone allorquando manca il consenso del rappresentante legale.


  Sezione settima: Dell’intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti

Art. 419

Gli atti o le omissioni del curatore o di un terzo o servizio al quale l’autorità di protezione degli adulti ha conferito un incarico possono essere contestati davanti all’autorità di protezione degli adulti dall’interessato o da una persona a lui vicina, nonché da qualsivoglia persona che vi abbia un interesse giuridicamente protetto.


  Sezione ottava: Delle disposizioni particolari per i congiunti

Art. 420

Se le circostanze lo giustificano, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti può dispensare in tutto o in parte il coniuge, il partner registrato, i genitori, un discendente, un fratello o una sorella oppure il convivente di fatto dell’interessato, qualora siano nominati curatori, dagli obblighi di compilare un inventario, di presentare periodicamente un rapporto e i conti e di ottenere il consenso per determinati atti o negozi.


  Sezione nona: Della fine dell’ufficio di curatore

Art. 421 A. Per legge

A. Per legge

L’ufficio di curatore termina per legge:

1.
alla scadenza della durata stabilita dall’autorità di protezione degli adulti, salvo riconferma;
2.
con la fine della curatela;
3.
con la fine del rapporto di lavoro quale curatore professionale;
4.
quando il curatore è sottoposto a curatela, diviene incapace di discernimento o muore.
Art. 422 B. Dimissione / I. Su richiesta del curatore

B. Dimissione

I. Su richiesta del curatore

1 Il curatore ha diritto di essere dimesso dalle sue funzioni se ha esercitato il suo ufficio per almeno quattro anni.

2 Per motivi gravi può chiedere di essere dimesso prima.

Art. 423 B. Dimissione / II. Altri casi

II. Altri casi

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti dimette il curatore se:

1.
non è più idoneo ai compiti conferitigli;
2.
sussiste un altro motivo grave.

2 La dimissione può essere chiesta dall’interessato o da una persona a lui vicina.

Art. 424 C. Atti e negozi indifferibili

C. Atti e negozi indifferibili

Salvo che l’autorità di protezione degli adulti disponga altrimenti, il curatore compie gli atti e negozi indifferibili finché non subentri il suo successore. La presente disposizione non si applica al curatore professionale.

Art. 425 D. Rapporto e conto finali

D. Rapporto e conto finali

1 Alla fine del suo ufficio il curatore rimette all’autorità di protezione degli adulti un rapporto finale e, se del caso, consegna il conto finale. L’autorità di protezione degli adulti può dispensare da questo obbligo il curatore professionale giunto al termine del rapporto di lavoro.

2 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti esamina e approva il rapporto e il conto finali come fa con i rapporti e i conti periodici.

3 Essa notifica il rapporto e il conto finali all’interessato o ai suoi eredi e, se del caso, al nuovo curatore, facendo loro presenti le disposizioni sulla responsabilità.

4 Comunica loro altresì se ha dimesso il curatore o rifiutato l’approvazione del rapporto o del conto finali.


  Capo terzo: Del ricovero a scopo di assistenza

Art. 426 A. Misure / I. Ricovero a scopo di cura o di assistenza

A. Misure

I. Ricovero a scopo di cura o di assistenza

1 Una persona che soffre di una turba psichica o di una disabilità mentale o versa in un grave stato di abbandono può essere ricoverata in un istituto idoneo se le cure o l’assistenza necessarie non possono esserle prestate altrimenti.

2 L’onere che sopportano i congiunti e i terzi e la loro protezione devono essere considerati.

3 L’interessato è dimesso non appena le condizioni per il ricovero non siano più adempiute.

4 L’interessato o una persona a lui vicina può chiedere la dimissione in ogni tempo. La decisione su questa richiesta è presa senza indugio.

Art. 427 A. Misure / II. Permanenza coatta di persone ricoverate volontariamente

II. Permanenza coatta di persone ricoverate volontariamente

1 Chi soffre di una turba psichica e vuole lasciare un istituto nel quale è entrato volontariamente può esservi trattenuto fino a un massimo di tre giorni dalla direzione medica dell’istituto se:

1.
espone a pericolo la propria integrità fisica o la propria vita; o
2.
espone a serio pericolo la vita o l’integrità fisica altrui.

2 Salvo che sussista una decisione di ricovero esecutiva, alla scadenza del termine l’interessato può lasciare l’istituto.

3 L’interessato è reso attento per scritto al suo diritto di adire il giudice.

Art. 428 B. Competenza per il ricovero e la dimissione / I. Autorità di protezione degli adulti

B. Competenza per il ricovero e la dimissione

I. Autorità di protezione degli adulti

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti è competente per ordinare il ricovero e la dimissione.

2 In singoli casi può delegare all’istituto la competenza in materia di dimissione.

Art. 429 B. Competenza per il ricovero e la dimissione / II. Medici / 1. Competenza

II. Medici

1. Competenza

1 I Cantoni possono designare medici abilitati a ordinare, in aggiunta all’autorità di protezione degli adulti, un ricovero per una durata stabilita dal diritto cantonale. Questa durata non può eccedere le sei settimane.

2 Il ricovero ordinato dal medico termina al più tardi alla scadenza della durata stabilita, sempre che non sussista una decisione di ricovero esecutiva dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti.

3 L’istituto decide sulla dimissione.

Art. 430 B. Competenza per il ricovero e la dimissione / II. Medici / 2. Procedura

2. Procedura

1 Il medico in persona esamina l’interessato e lo sente.

2 La decisione di ricovero contiene almeno le seguenti indicazioni:

1.
il luogo e la data dell’esame;
2.
il nome del medico;
3.
la diagnosi, i motivi e l’obiettivo del ricovero;
4.
l’indicazione dei mezzi d’impugnazione.

3 Salvo che il medico o il giudice competente decida altrimenti, l’impugnazione non ha effetto sospensivo.

4 All’interessato è consegnato un esemplare della decisione di ricovero; un altro esemplare è esibito all’istituto al momento dell’ammissione dell’interessato.

5 Per quanto possibile, il medico informa per scritto una persona vicina all’interessato sul ricovero e sul diritto di adire il giudice.

Art. 431 C. Verifica periodica

C. Verifica periodica

1 Al più tardi sei mesi dopo l’inizio del ricovero, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti accerta se le condizioni dello stesso sono ancora adempiute e se l’istituto è ancora idoneo.

2 Nel corso dei sei mesi seguenti effettua una seconda verifica. In seguito procede alla verifica quando sia necessario, ma almeno una volta all’anno.

Art. 432 D. Persona di fiducia

D. Persona di fiducia

Chi è ricoverato in un istituto può designare una persona di fiducia che l’assista durante il soggiorno e fino al termine di tutte le procedure connesse.

Art. 433 E. Provvedimenti medici in caso di turba psichica / I. Piano terapeutico

E. Provvedimenti medici in caso di turba psichica

I. Piano terapeutico

1 Se una persona è ricoverata in un istituto per il trattamento di una turba psichica, il medico curante allestisce per scritto un piano terapeutico in collaborazione con lei e se del caso con la persona di fiducia.

2 Il medico informa l’interessato e la persona di fiducia su tutte le circostanze essenziali riguardo ai provvedimenti medici prospettati, in particolare sui motivi, l’obiettivo, il genere, le modalità, i rischi e gli effetti secondari dei provvedimenti, sulle conseguenze di un mancato trattamento nonché su eventuali trattamenti alternativi.

3 Il piano terapeutico è sottoposto per consenso all’interessato. Se l’interessato è incapace di discernimento, vanno considerate le sue eventuali direttive di paziente.

4 Il piano terapeutico è adeguato in funzione degli sviluppi della situazione.

Art. 434 E. Provvedimenti medici in caso di turba psichica / II. Trattamento in assenza di consenso

II. Trattamento in assenza di consenso

1 In assenza del consenso dell’interessato, il medico capo del reparto può ordinare per scritto i provvedimenti medici previsti nel piano terapeutico se:

1.
l’omissione del trattamento espone a serio danno la salute dell’interessato o espone a serio pericolo la vita o l’integrità fisica di terzi;
2.
l’interessato è incapace di discernimento riguardo alla necessità del trattamento; e
3.
non vi è un altro provvedimento adeguato che sia meno incisivo.

2 La decisione è comunicata per scritto all’interessato e alla persona di fiducia con l’indicazione dei mezzi d’impugnazione.

Art. 435 E. Provvedimenti medici in caso di turba psichica / III. Situazioni d’urgenza

III. Situazioni d’urgenza

1 In una situazione d’urgenza possono essere immediatamente presi i provvedimenti medici indispensabili per proteggere l’interessato o i terzi.

2 Se all’istituto è noto come la persona voglia essere curata, ne va tenuto conto.

Art. 436 E. Provvedimenti medici in caso di turba psichica / IV. Colloquio d’uscita

IV. Colloquio d’uscita

1 Se vi è pericolo di ricaduta, prima di dimettere l’interessato il medico curante tenta di concordare con lui le linee fondamentali del trattamento per l’eventualità di un nuovo ricovero nell’istituto.

2 Il colloquio d’uscita va documentato.

Art. 437 E. Provvedimenti medici in caso di turba psichica / V. Diritto cantonale

V. Diritto cantonale

1 I Cantoni disciplinano l’assistenza e le cure successive al ricovero.

2 Possono prevedere misure ambulatoriali.

Art. 438 F. Misure restrittive della libertà di movimento

F. Misure restrittive della libertà di movimento

Alle misure restrittive della libertà di movimento in seno all’istituto si applicano per analogia le disposizioni sulla restrizione della libertà di movimento negli istituti di accoglienza o di cura. È fatto salvo il ricorso al giudice.

Art. 439 G. Ricorso al giudice

G. Ricorso al giudice

1 L’interessato o una persona a lui vicina può, per scritto, adire il giudice competente nei seguenti casi:

1.
ricovero ordinato dal medico;
2.
permanenza coatta disposta dall’istituto;
3.
rifiuto della richiesta di dimissione da parte dell’istituto;
4.
trattamento di una turba psichica in assenza di consenso;
5.
misure restrittive della libertà di movimento.

2 Il termine per adire il giudice è di dieci giorni dalla comunicazione della decisione. Per le misure restrittive della libertà di movimento, il giudice può essere adito in ogni tempo.

3 La procedura è retta per analogia dalle disposizioni sulla procedura dinanzi all’autorità giudiziaria di reclamo.

4 Ogni domanda che sollecita una decisione giudiziaria è trasmessa senza indugio al giudice competente.


  Titolo dodicesimo: Dell’organizzazione

  Capo primo: Delle autorità e della competenza per territorio

Art. 440 A. Autorità di protezione degli adulti

A. Autorità di protezione degli adulti

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti è un’autorità specializzata. Essa è designata dai Cantoni.

2 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti decide in collegio di almeno tre membri. I Cantoni possono prevedere eccezioni per determinati casi.

3 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti è anche investita dei compiti dell’autorità di protezione dei minori.

Art. 441 B. Autorità di vigilanza

B. Autorità di vigilanza

1 I Cantoni designano le autorità di vigilanza.

2 Il Consiglio federale può emanare disposizioni sulla vigilanza.

Art. 442 C. Competenza per territorio

C. Competenza per territorio

1 È competente l’autorità di protezione degli adulti del domicilio dell’interessato. Se è pendente un procedimento, la competenza permane in ogni caso fino alla chiusura dello stesso.

2 Se vi è pericolo nel ritardo, è pure competente l’autorità del luogo di dimora dell’interessato. Se prende una misura, essa ne informa l’autorità del domicilio.

3 Riguardo a una curatela istituita a causa d’assenza dell’interessato è pure competente l’autorità del luogo dove la maggior parte dei beni era amministrata o è pervenuta all’interessato.

4 I Cantoni hanno diritto di disporre che, riguardo ai loro propri cittadini domiciliati nel Cantone, sia competente l’autorità del luogo di origine invece di quella del domicilio, sempre che l’assistenza degli indigenti spetti in tutto o in parte al Comune di origine.

5 Se una persona sottoposta a una misura cambia domicilio, l’autorità del nuovo luogo di domicilio si investe senza indugio della misura, salvo che motivi gravi vi si oppongano.


  Capo secondo: Della procedura

  Sezione prima: Davanti all’autorità di protezione degli adulti

Art. 443 A. Diritti e obblighi di avviso

A. Diritti e obblighi di avviso

1 Quando una persona pare bisognosa d’aiuto, chiunque può avvisarne l’autorità di protezione degli adulti. Sono fatte salve le disposizioni sul segreto professionale.

2 Chiunque, nello svolgimento di un’attività ufficiale, apprende che una persona versa in tali condizioni è tenuto ad avvisarne l’autorità di protezione degli adulti se non può rimediarvi nell’ambito della sua attività. Sono fatte salve le disposizioni sul segreto professionale.1

3 I Cantoni possono prevedere ulteriori obblighi di avviso.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Protezione dei minorenni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 2947; FF 2015 2751).
2 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Protezione dei minorenni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 2947; FF 2015 2751).

Art. 444 B. Esame della competenza

B. Esame della competenza

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti esamina d’ufficio la propria competenza.

2 Se non si ritiene competente, essa rimette senza indugio il caso all’autorità che considera competente.

3 Se dubita di essere competente, procede a uno scambio di opinioni con l’autorità che potrebbe esserlo.

4 Se lo scambio di opinioni non consente di addivenire a un’intesa, l’autorità preventivamente adita sottopone la questione della propria competenza all’autorità giudiziaria di reclamo.

Art. 445 C. Provvedimenti cautelari

C. Provvedimenti cautelari

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti prende, ad istanza di una persona che partecipa al procedimento o d’ufficio, tutti i provvedimenti cautelari necessari per la durata del procedimento. Può in particolare ordinare a titolo cautelare una misura di protezione degli adulti.

2 In caso di particolare urgenza, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti può immediatamente prendere provvedimenti cautelari senza sentire le persone che partecipano al procedimento. Nel contempo dà loro l’opportunità di presentare osservazioni; in seguito prende una nuova decisione.

3 Le decisioni in materia di provvedimenti cautelari possono essere impugnate con reclamo entro dieci giorni dalla loro comunicazione.

Art. 446 D. Principi procedurali

D. Principi procedurali

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti esamina d’ufficio i fatti.

2 Essa raccoglie le informazioni occorrenti e assume le prove necessarie. Può incaricare degli accertamenti una persona o un servizio idonei. Se necessario ordina che uno specialista effettui una perizia.

3 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti non è vincolata dalle conclusioni delle persone che partecipano al procedimento.

4 Applica d’ufficio il diritto.

Art. 447 E. Audizione

E. Audizione

1 L’interessato è sentito personalmente, sempre che ciò non appaia sproporzionato.

2 Di regola, in caso di ricovero a scopo di assistenza l’autorità di protezione degli adulti sente collegialmente l’interessato.

Art. 448 F. Obbligo di collaborare e assistenza amministrativa

F. Obbligo di collaborare e assistenza amministrativa

1 Le persone che partecipano al procedimento e i terzi sono tenuti a collaborare all’accertamento dei fatti. L’autorità di protezione degli adulti prende le disposizioni necessarie per la salvaguardia di interessi degni di protezione. Se necessario, ordina l’esecuzione coattiva dell’obbligo di collaborare.

2 I medici, i dentisti, i farmacisti, le levatrici, i chiropratici e gli psicologi, nonché i loro ausiliari, sono tenuti a collaborare soltanto se sono stati autorizzati a farlo dal titolare del segreto o se, su loro richiesta o su richiesta dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti, l’autorità superiore o l’autorità di vigilanza li ha liberati dal segreto professionale.1

3 Non sono tenuti a collaborare gli ecclesiastici, gli avvocati, i difensori e i mediatori, nonché gli ex curatori che avevano patrocinato l’interessato nel procedimento.

4 Le autorità amministrative e giudiziarie consegnano gli atti necessari, fanno rapporto e forniscono informazioni, sempre che non vi si oppongano interessi degni di protezione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Protezione dei minorenni), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 2947; FF 2015 2751).

Art. 449 G. Ricovero per perizia

G. Ricovero per perizia

1 Se è indispensabile una perizia psichiatrica che non può essere eseguita ambulatorialmente, per effettuarla l’autorità di protezione degli adulti ricovera l’interessato in un istituto adeguato.

2 Le disposizioni sulla procedura in caso di ricovero a scopo di assistenza si applicano per analogia.

Art. 449a H. Designazione di un rappresentante

H. Designazione di un rappresentante

Se necessario, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti ordina che l’interessato sia rappresentato da un curatore, esperto in questioni assistenziali e giuridiche.

Art. 449b I. Consultazione degli atti

I. Consultazione degli atti

1 Le persone che partecipano al procedimento hanno diritto di consultare gli atti, salvo che interessi preponderanti vi si oppongano.

2 L’atto la cui consultazione è stata negata a una persona che partecipa al procedimento può essere utilizzato soltanto qualora l’autorità gliene abbia comunicato oralmente o per scritto il contenuto essenziale per il caso.

Art. 449c J. Obbligo di comunicazione

J. Obbligo di comunicazione

L’autorità di protezione degli adulti comunica all’ufficio dello stato civile se:

1.
sottopone una persona a curatela generale a causa di durevole incapacità di discernimento;
2.
per una persona durevolmente incapace di discernimento prende effetto un mandato precauzionale.

  Sezione seconda: Davanti all’autorità giudiziaria di reclamo

Art. 450 A. Oggetto del reclamo e legittimazione attiva

A. Oggetto del reclamo e legittimazione attiva

1 Le decisioni dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti possono essere impugnate con reclamo davanti al giudice competente.

2 Sono legittimate al reclamo:

1.
le persone che partecipano al procedimento;
2.
le persone vicine all’interessato;
3.
le persone che hanno un interesse giuridicamente protetto all’annullamento o alla modifica della decisione impugnata.

3 Il reclamo va presentato al giudice per scritto e motivato.

Art. 450a B. Motivi di reclamo

B. Motivi di reclamo

1 Il reclamante può censurare:

1.
la violazione del diritto;
2.
l’accertamento inesatto o incompleto di fatti giuridicamente rilevanti;
3.
l’inadeguatezza.

2 Può essere interposto reclamo anche per denegata o ritardata giustizia.

Art. 450b C. Termine di reclamo

C. Termine di reclamo

1 Il termine di reclamo è di trenta giorni dalla comunicazione della decisione. Lo stesso termine si applica anche alle persone legittimate al reclamo alle quali la decisione non deve essere comunicata.

2 In materia di ricovero a scopo di assistenza il termine di reclamo è di dieci giorni dalla comunicazione della decisione.

3 Il reclamo per denegata o ritardata giustizia può essere interposto in ogni tempo.

Art. 450c D. Effetto sospensivo

D. Effetto sospensivo

Il reclamo ha effetto sospensivo, salvo che l’autorità di protezione degli adulti o l’autorità giudiziaria di reclamo disponga altrimenti.

Art. 450d E. Osservazioni dell’autorità inferiore e riesame

E. Osservazioni dell’autorità inferiore e riesame

1 L’autorità giudiziaria di reclamo dà all’autorità di protezione degli adulti l’opportunità di presentare le proprie osservazioni.

2 Invece di presentare le proprie osservazioni, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti può riesaminare la decisione impugnata.

Art. 450e F. Disposizioni particolari per il ricovero a scopo di assistenza

F. Disposizioni particolari per il ricovero a scopo di assistenza

1 Il reclamo contro una decisione in materia di ricovero a scopo di assistenza non deve essere motivato.

2 Il reclamo non ha effetto sospensivo, salvo che l’autorità di protezione degli adulti o l’autorità giudiziaria di reclamo disponga altri-menti.

3 In caso di turbe psichiche la decisione è presa sulla base della perizia di uno specialista.

4 Di regola, l’autorità giudiziaria di reclamo sente collegialmente l’interessato. Se necessario, ordina che l’interessato sia rappresentato da un curatore, esperto in questioni assistenziali e giuridiche.

5 Di regola, l’autorità giudiziaria di reclamo decide entro cinque giorni feriali dal ricevimento del reclamo.


  Sezione terza: Disposizione comune

Art. 450f

Per il resto si applicano per analogia le disposizioni del diritto processuale civile, salvo che il diritto cantonale disponga altrimenti.


  Sezione quarta: Dell’esecuzione

Art. 450g

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti esegue le decisioni su domanda o d’ufficio.

2 Se l’autorità di protezione degli adulti o l’autorità giudiziaria di reclamo ha già ordinato misure di esecuzione nella decisione, la stessa può essere eseguita direttamente.

3 Se necessario, la persona incaricata dell’esecuzione può chiedere l’intervento della polizia. Di regola, le misure coercitive dirette vanno previamente comminate.


  Capo terzo: Dei rapporti con i terzi e dell’obbligo di collaborazione

Art. 451 A. Obbligo di discrezione e informazione

A. Obbligo di discrezione e informazione

1 L’autorità di protezione degli adulti è tenuta alla discrezione, salvo che interessi preponderanti vi si oppongano.

2 Chi rende verosimile un interesse può chiedere all’autorità di protezione degli adulti se sussiste una misura di protezione degli adulti e quali ne siano gli effetti.

Art. 452 B. Effetto delle misure nei confronti dei terzi

B. Effetto delle misure nei confronti dei terzi

1 Le misure di protezione degli adulti sono opponibili anche ai terzi di buona fede.

2 Se la curatela limita l’esercizio dei diritti civili dell’interessato, ai debitori va comunicato che la loro prestazione ha effetto liberatorio soltanto se è fatta al curatore. Prima di tale comunicazione, la curatela non è opponibile ai debitori di buona fede.

3 Se una persona sottoposta a una misura di protezione degli adulti ha indotto altri a credere erroneamente che possiede l’esercizio dei diritti civili, essa risponde del danno che gli ha cagionato in tal modo.

Art. 453 C. Obbligo di collaborazione

C. Obbligo di collaborazione

1 Se una persona bisognosa d’aiuto rischia seriamente di esporre sé stessa a pericolo o di commettere un crimine o un delitto cagionando ad altri un grave danno fisico, morale o materiale, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti, i servizi interessati e la polizia si prestano reciproca collaborazione.

2 In tal caso le persone tenute al segreto d’ufficio o al segreto professionale hanno diritto di informare l’autorità di protezione degli adulti.


  Capo quarto: Della responsabilità

Art. 454 A. Principio

A. Principio

1 Chiunque è leso da atti od omissioni illeciti nell’ambito di una misura ufficiale di protezione degli adulti ha diritto al risarcimento del danno e, sempre che la gravità della lesione lo giustifichi, alla riparazione morale.

2 Lo stesso diritto sussiste allorquando l’autorità di protezione degli adulti o l’autorità di vigilanza ha agito illecitamente negli altri settori della protezione degli adulti.

3 Il Cantone è responsabile; la persona lesa non ha diritto al risarcimento nei confronti della persona che ha cagionato il danno.

4 Il regresso del Cantone contro la persona che ha cagionato il danno è retto dal diritto cantonale.

Art. 455 B. Prescrizione

B. Prescrizione

1 Il diritto al risarcimento del danno o alla riparazione morale si prescrive secondo le disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni1 sugli atti illeciti.2

2 Se il fatto commesso dalla persona che ha cagionato il danno costituisce un fatto punibile, il diritto al risarcimento del danno o alla riparazione morale si prescrive al più presto alla scadenza del termine di prescrizione dell’azione penale. Se la prescrizione dell’azione penale si estingue a seguito di una sentenza penale di prima istanza, esso si prescrive al più presto in tre anni dalla comunicazione della sentenza.3

3 Se la lesione risulta dall’emanazione o dall’esecuzione di una misura permanente, la prescrizione del diritto nei confronti del Cantone non comincia prima che la misura stessa decada o sia continuata da un altro Cantone.


1 RS 220
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 3 della LF del 15 giu. 2018 (Revisione della disciplina della prescrizione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2020 (RU 2018 5343; FF 2014 211).
3 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 3 della LF del 15 giu. 2018 (Revisione della disciplina della prescrizione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2020 (RU 2018 5343; FF 2014 211).

Art. 456 C. Responsabilità secondo le norme sul mandato C. Responsabilità secondo le norme sul mandato

C. Responsabilità secondo le norme sul mandato

La responsabilità del mandatario designato con mandato precauzionale, nonché quella del coniuge o del partner registrato di una persona incapace di discernimento ovvero quella del rappresentante in caso di provvedimenti medici è retta dalle disposizioni del Codice delle obbligazioni1 sul mandato, sempre che gli stessi non siano investiti di una curatela.


1 RS 220


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 3 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).3 Nuovo testo del titolo quinto giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119). Vedi anche gli art. 8–8b del titolo finale, qui di seguito.4 Nuovo testo del titolo sesto giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119). Vedi anche gli art. 9–11a del titolo finale, qui di seguito.5 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).6 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).7 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).8 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).9 Originario capo terzo.10 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).11 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).12 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).13 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).14 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).15 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).16 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).17 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

  Libro terzo: Del diritto successorio

  Parte prima: Degli eredi

  Titolo tredicesimo: Degli eredi legittimi1 

Art. 457 A. Eredi parenti / I. Discendenti

A. Eredi parenti

I. Discendenti

1 I prossimi eredi del defunto sono i suoi discendenti.

2 I figli succedono in parti uguali.

3 I figli premorti sono rappresentati dai loro discendenti, i quali succedono per stirpe in ciascun grado.

Art. 458 A. Eredi parenti / II. Stirpe dei genitori

II. Stirpe dei genitori

1 Se il defunto non lascia discendenti, l’eredità si devolve ai parenti della stirpe dei genitori.

2 Il padre e la madre succedono in parti eguali.

3 Il padre e la madre premorti sono rappresentati dai loro discendenti, i quali succedono per stirpe in ciascun grado.

4 Se non vi sono discendenti di una linea, tutta la successione è devoluta agli eredi dell’altra linea.

Art. 459 A. Eredi parenti / III. Stirpe degli avi

III. Stirpe degli avi

1 Se il defunto non lascia né discendenti né eredi della stirpe dei genitori, l’eredità è devoluta ai parenti della stirpe degli avi.

2 Se al defunto sopravvivono gli avi delle linee paterna e materna, essi succedono in ogni linea in parti eguali.

3 L’avo e l’ava premorti sono rappresentati dai loro discendenti, i quali succedono per stirpe in ciascun grado.

4 Essendo premorto l’avo o l’ava della linea paterna o della linea materna senza lasciare discendenti propri, l’intera metà è devoluta agli altri eredi della medesima linea.

5 Se non vi sono eredi della linea paterna o materna, l’intera eredità è devoluta agli eredi dell’altra linea.

Art. 4601A. Eredi parenti / IV. Estensione del diritto di successione

IV. Estensione del diritto di successione

Il diritto di successione dei parenti cessa con la stirpe degli avi.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 4611

1 Abrogato dal n. I 2 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 4621B. Coniuge superstite e partner registrato superstite

B. Coniuge superstite e partner registrato superstite2

Il coniuge superstite o il partner registrato superstite riceve:3

1.
in concorso con i discendenti, la metà della successione;
2.
in concorso con eredi della stirpe dei genitori, tre quarti della successione;
3.
se non vi sono né discendenti né eredi della stirpe dei genitori, l’intera successione.

1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della L del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2007 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).
3 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della L del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2007 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).

Art. 463 e 4641

1 Abrogati dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 4651C. ...

C. ...


1 Abrogato dal n. I 3 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, con effetto dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85). Vedi nondimeno l’art. 12a del titolo finale.

Art. 4661D. Enti pubblici

D. Enti pubblici

Se il defunto non lascia eredi, la successione è devoluta al Cantone in cui egli ha avuto l’ultimo domicilio od al Comune designato dal diritto di questo Cantone.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).


  Titolo quattordicesimo: Delle disposizioni a causa di morte

  Capo primo: Della capacità di disporre

Art. 467 A. Per testamento

A. Per testamento

Chi è capace di discernimento ed ha compito gli anni diciotto può, nei limiti e nelle forme legali, disporre dei suoi beni per atto di ultima volontà.

Art. 4681B. Per contratto successorio

B. Per contratto successorio

1 Chi è capace di discernimento ed ha compiuto gli anni diciotto può concludere un contratto successorio in qualità di disponente.

2 Le persone sotto curatela comprendente la conclusione di un contratto successorio abbisognano del consenso del rappresentante legale.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 469 C. Disposizioni nulle

C. Disposizioni nulle

1 Sono nulle le disposizioni fatte sotto l’influenza di un errore, di un inganno doloso o di una violenza o minaccia.

2 Esse diventano però valide se il disponente non le ha revocate entro un anno dal momento in cui ha avuto conoscenza dell’errore o dell’inganno od in cui sono cessati gli effetti della violenza o minaccia.

3 Se la disposizione contiene un errore manifesto nella designazione di cose o di persone, essa è valida secondo la vera intenzione del disponente ove questa sia riconoscibile con certezza.


  Capo secondo: Della porzione disponibile

Art. 470 A. Porzione disponibile / I. Limiti

A. Porzione disponibile

I. Limiti

1 Chi muore lasciando discendenti, genitori, il coniuge o il partner registrato può disporre per causa di morte della parte dei suoi beni eccedente la loro porzione legittima.1

2 Chi non lascia eredi in questi gradi può disporre per causa di morte di tutti i suoi beni.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della L del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2007 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).

Art. 4711A. Porzione disponibile / II. Porzione legittima

II. Porzione legittima

La porzione legittima è:

1.
di tre quarti della quota ereditaria per i discendenti;
2.
della metà per ciascuno dei genitori;
3.2
della metà per il coniuge superstite o il partner registrato superstite.

1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 8 della L del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2007 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).

Art. 4721A. Porzione disponibile / III.

III.


1 Abrogato dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 473 A. Porzione disponibile / IV. Liberalità al coniuge superstite

IV. Liberalità al coniuge superstite

1 Mediante disposizione a causa di morte, il disponente può lasciare al coniuge superstite, in concorso con i discendenti comuni, l’usufrutto di tutta la porzione che competerebbe a questi.1

2 Questo usufrutto tien luogo della legittima del coniuge in concorso con questi discendenti. Oltre a tale usufrutto, la porzione disponibile è di un quarto della successione.2

3 Passando ad altre nozze, il coniuge superstite perde l’usufrutto di quella parte della successione che, al momento dell’aperta successione, non avrebbe potuto essere gravata di usufrutto secondo le disposizioni ordinarie sulla legittima dei discendenti.3


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 5 ott. 2001, in vigore dal 1° mar. 2002 (RU 2002 269; FF 2001 985 1764 1855).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 5 ott. 2001, in vigore dal 1° mar. 2002 (RU 2002 269; FF 2001 985 1764 1855).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 474 A. Porzione disponibile / V. Computo della porzione disponibile / 1. Deduzione dei debiti

V. Computo della porzione disponibile

1. Deduzione dei debiti

1 La porzione disponibile si determina secondo lo stato del patrimonio al momento della morte del disponente.

2 Se ne devono dedurre i debiti del testatore, le spese funerarie, di apposizione dei sigilli e d’inventario, e quelle per il mantenimento durante un mese delle persone conviventi col defunto.

Art. 475 A. Porzione disponibile / V. Computo della porzione disponibile / 2. Liberalità

2. Liberalità

Le liberalità fra vivi sono computate nella sostanza in quanto sono soggette all’azione di riduzione.

Art. 476 A. Porzione disponibile / V. Computo della porzione disponibile / 3. Polizze di assicurazione

3. Polizze di assicurazione

Le polizze di assicurazione sulla vita del disponente, costituite a favore di un terzo con atto tra i vivi o con disposizione a causa di morte, e quelle che vivendo il disponente furono trasferite a titolo gratuito ad un terzo, sono computate nella successione per il valore di riscatto al momento della morte del disponente stesso.

Art. 477 B. Diseredazione / I. Motivi di diseredazione

B. Diseredazione

I. Motivi di diseredazione

Mediante disposizione a causa di morte, l’erede può essere privato della legittima:

1.
quando abbia commesso un grave reato contro il disponente o contro una persona a lui intimamente legata;
2.
quando abbia gravemente contravvenuto ai suoi obblighi di famiglia verso il disponente o verso una persona appartenente alla famiglia del medesimo.
Art. 478 B. Diseredazione / II. Effetti della diseredazione

II. Effetti della diseredazione

1 Il diseredato non può prender parte alla divisione della eredità né proporre l’azione di riduzione.

2 Salvo contraria disposizione del defunto, la porzione del diseredato è devoluta agli eredi legittimi del disponente come se il diseredato fosse premorto.

3 I discendenti del diseredato hanno diritto alla di lui quota legittima come se egli fosse premorto.

Art. 479 B. Diseredazione / III. Onere della prova

III. Onere della prova

1 Perché la diseredazione sia valida, occorre che il testatore ne abbia indicata la causa nella sua disposizione.

2 Se il diseredato contesta la fondatezza della causa di diseredazione, l’erede od il legatario che ne profitta deve fornirne la prova.

3 Se non può essere fornita questa prova, o se la causa di diseredazione non è indicata, la disposizione vale per la parte che eccede la legittima del diseredato, salvo che sia la conseguenza di un manifesto errore del disponente circa la sussistenza della causa di diseredazione.

Art. 480 B. Diseredazione / IV. Diseredazione di un insolvente

IV. Diseredazione di un insolvente

1 Il discendente contro il quale esistono dei certificati di carenza di beni può essere privato della metà della sua porzione legittima a condizione che sia lasciata ai suoi discendenti, nati e nascituri.

2 Questa diseredazione cade, ad istanza del diseredato, se al momento dell’apertura della successione non esistono più certificati di carenza di beni o se il loro importo non supera il quarto della quota ereditaria.


  Capo terzo: Dei modi di disporre

Art. 481 A. In genere

A. In genere

1 Ognuno può disporre di tutti i suoi beni, o di parte di essi, per testamento o per contratto successorio, nei limiti della porzione disponibile.

2 La parte di cui il defunto non ha disposto è devoluta ai suoi eredi legittimi.

Art. 482 B. Oneri e condizioni

B. Oneri e condizioni

1 Le disposizioni possono essere gravate di oneri e condizioni, il cui adempimento può essere richiesto da qualsiasi interessato tosto che le disposizioni stesse abbiano spiegato il loro effetto.

2 Gli oneri e le condizioni immorali od illecite rendono nulla la disposizione.

3 Gli oneri e le condizioni senza senso o meramente vessatorie per i terzi si hanno per non apposti.

4 La liberalità per disposizione a causa di morte fatta a un animale equivale all’onere di prendersi cura dell’animale in maniera appropriata.1


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207).

Art. 483 C. Istituzione d’erede

C. Istituzione d’erede

1 Possono essere istituiti uno o più eredi per la intera successione o per una frazione di essa.

2 Si considera come istituzione d’erede ogni disposizione secondo la quale il chiamato debba raccogliere l’intera successione od una frazione di essa.

Art. 484 D. Legato / I. Oggetto

D. Legato

I. Oggetto

1 Il disponente può assegnare, a titolo di legato, una liberalità ad una persona senza istituirla erede.

2 Egli può assegnare al legatario una determinata cosa spettante all’eredità, o l’usufrutto dell’eredità o di una sua parte, od anche imporre agli eredi od ai legatari di fargli una data prestazione sul valore dei beni ereditari, o di liberarlo da un’obbligazione.

3 Il debitore del legato di una cosa determinata che non si trovi nella eredità non è tenuto a fornirla, salvo che dalla disposizione non risulti una diversa volontà del disponente.

Art. 485 D. Legato / II. Obblighi del debitore

II. Obblighi del debitore

1 La cosa legata dev’essere consegnata al legatario, con le sue deteriorazioni e coi suoi accrescimenti, libera o gravata, nello stato e nelle condizioni in cui si trova all’apertura della successione.

2 Il debitore del legato ha, circa le spese fatte per la cosa dopo l’apertura della successione e circa i deterioramenti sopravvenuti, i diritti e le obbligazioni del gestore d’affari senza mandato.

Art. 486 D. Legato / III. Rapporti con la successione

III. Rapporti con la successione

1 Quando i legati sorpassino l’importo della successione o delle liberalità fatte a colui che ne è gravato, o della porzione disponibile, se ne può chiedere una proporzionata riduzione.

2 I legati conservano il loro effetto ancorché i debitori degli stessi siano premorti al disponente o si siano resi indegni, od abbiano rinunciato al loro diritto ereditario.

3 L’erede legittimo od istituito può chiedere il legato disposto a suo favore ancorché rinunci all’eredità.

Art. 487 E. Sostituzione volgare

E. Sostituzione volgare

Il disponente può designare una o più persone, a cui debbano essere devoluti l’eredità od il legato nel caso di premorienza o rinuncia dell’erede o del legatario.

Art. 488 F. Sostituzione fedecommissaria / I. Designazione del sostituito

F. Sostituzione fedecommissaria

I. Designazione del sostituito

1 Il disponente può obbligare l’erede istituito a trasmettere l’eredità ad un altro quale erede sostituito.

2 Tale obbligazione non può essere imposta al sostituito.

3 Le stesse regole valgono per i legati.

Art. 489 F. Sostituzione fedecommissaria / II. Apertura della sostituzione

II. Apertura della sostituzione

1 La trasmissione dell’eredità al sostituito avviene, salvo contraria disposizione, alla morte dell’istituito.

2 Se la disposizione indica un altro momento non ancora trascorso alla morte dell’istituito, l’eredità passa agli eredi di questo, contro garanzia.

3 Se per un qualsiasi motivo quel momento non può più verificarsi, l’eredità è devoluta definitivamente agli eredi dell’istituito.

Art. 490 F. Sostituzione fedecommissaria / III. Garanzia

III. Garanzia

1 In ogni caso di sostituzione d’erede, l’autorità competente ordina la compilazione d’inventario.

2 Salvo dispensa espressa da parte del disponente, la consegna dell’eredità all’istituito ha luogo solo contro prestazione di garanzia, la quale, trattandosi di immobili, potrà consistere in un’annotazione dell’obbligo di trasmissione nel registro fondiario.

3 Se l’istituito non è in condizione di prestare questa garanzia, o se mette in pericolo le aspettative del sostituito, dev’essere ordinata l’amministrazione d’officio.

Art. 491 F. Sostituzione fedecommissaria / IV. Effetti / 1. Per l’istituito

IV. Effetti

1. Per l’istituito

1 L’erede gravato di sostituzione acquista l’eredità come ogni altro erede istituito.

2 Egli ne diventa proprietario coll’obbligo della trasmissione.

Art. 492 F. Sostituzione fedecommissaria / IV. Effetti / 2. Per il sostituito

2. Per il sostituito

1 L’erede sostituito acquista l’eredità se vive al momento previsto per la trasmissione.

2 Se egli premuore, la successione rimane all’istituito, salvo contraria disposizione del defunto.

3 Se l’istituito premuore al disponente, se si rende indegno, o se rinuncia all’eredità, il sostituito diventa erede diretto del disponente.

Art. 492a1F. Sostituzione fedecommissaria / V. Discendenti incapaci di discernimento

V. Discendenti incapaci di discernimento

1 Se un discendente durevolmente incapace di discernimento non lascia discendenti né coniuge, il disponente può prevedere la sostituzione fedecommissaria sulla rimanenza.

2 La sostituzione fedecommissaria si estingue per legge se il discendente, contro ogni aspettativa, diviene capace di discernimento.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 493 G. Fondazioni

G. Fondazioni

1 Il disponente può dedicare la porzione disponibile dei suoi beni o parte di essa ad una fondazione per uno scopo qualsiasi.

2 La validità della fondazione è però subordinata alle disposizioni della legge.

Art. 494 H. Contratto successorio / I. Istituzione d’erede e legato contrattuali

H. Contratto successorio

I. Istituzione d’erede e legato contrattuali

1 Il disponente può obbligarsi, mediante contratto successorio, a lasciare la sua successione od un legato alla controparte o ad un terzo.

2 Egli conserva la libera disposizione del suo patrimonio.

3 Le disposizioni a causa di morte e le donazioni incompatibili con le sue obbligazioni derivanti dal contratto successorio possono essere contestate.

Art. 495 H. Contratto successorio / II. Rinuncia d’eredità / 1. Condizioni

II. Rinuncia d’eredità

1. Condizioni

1 Il disponente può stipulare con un proprio erede un contratto di rinuncia o di fine ereditaria.

2 Il rinunciante non è più considerato come erede nella devoluzione dell’eredità.

3 Salvo contraria disposizione del contratto, la rinuncia vale anche in confronto dei discendenti del rinunciante.

Art. 496 H. Contratto successorio / II. Rinuncia d’eredità / 2. Devoluzione per vacanza

2. Devoluzione per vacanza

1 Se nel contratto successorio sono istituiti determinati eredi in luogo del rinunciante, la rinuncia cade se essi, per un qualsiasi motivo, non acquistano l’eredità.

2 Se la rinuncia fu fatta a favore di coeredi, si presume fatta solo in confronto con gli eredi della stirpe del prossimo comune ascendente e non vale in confronto di eredi più remoti.

Art. 497 H. Contratto successorio / II. Rinuncia d’eredità / 3. Diritti dei creditori

3. Diritti dei creditori

Se il contraente che ha disposto della sua eredità è insolvente al momento dell’apertura della sua successione, e gli eredi non soddisfano i creditori, il rinunciante ed i suoi eredi possono essere richiesti del pagamento dei debiti in quanto, negli ultimi cinque anni dalla morte del disponente, abbiano ricevuto una controprestazione sul di lui patrimonio e se ne trovino ancora arricchiti al momento dell’aperta successione.


  Capo quarto: Della forma delle disposizioni

Art. 498 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 1. In genere

A. Testamento

I. Confezione

1. In genere

Il testamento può essere fatto in forma pubblica od in forma olografa, od anche con una dichiarazione orale.

Art. 499 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 2. Testamento pubblico / a. In genere

2. Testamento pubblico

a. In genere

Il testamento pubblico si fa, con l’intervento di due testimoni, davanti un funzionario o notaio od altra persona officiale da designarsi dal diritto cantonale.

Art. 500 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 2. Testamento pubblico / b. Ufficio del funzionario

b. Ufficio del funzionario

1 Il testatore comunica la sua volontà al funzionario, il quale ne redige o ne fa redigere la scrittura e la dà a leggere al testatore stesso.

2 La scrittura dev’essere firmata dal testatore.

3 Il funzionario deve datarla ed apporvi anche la sua firma.

Art. 501 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 2. Testamento pubblico / c. Ufficio dei testimoni

c. Ufficio dei testimoni

1 Appena datata e firmata la scrittura, il testatore deve, in presenza del funzionario, dichiarare ai due testimoni che egli l’ha letta e ch’essa contiene le sue disposizioni d’ultima volontà.

2 I testimoni devono confermare con la loro firma, sulla scrittura stessa, che il testatore ha pronunciato tale dichiarazione in loro presenza e che, a loro giudizio, egli trovavasi in istato di capacità a disporre.

3 Non è necessario che ai testimoni sia data conoscenza del contenuto della scrittura.

Art. 502 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 2. Testamento pubblico / d. Omissione della lettura e della firma

d. Omissione della lettura e della firma

1 Se il testatore non legge o non firma egli stesso la scrittura, questa deve essergli letta dal funzionario alla presenza dei due testimoni, dopo di che il testatore deve dichiarare che l’atto contiene la sua disposizione.

2 In questo caso l’attestazione firmata dai testimoni deve indicare non solo il fatto dell’avvenuta dichiarazione del testatore ed il loro giudizio sul suo stato di capacità a disporre, ma anche che la scrittura fu letta dal funzionario al testatore in loro presenza.

Art. 503 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 2. Testamento pubblico / e. Persone cooperanti

e. Persone cooperanti

1 Non possono cooperare alla confezione del testamento, né come funzionari, né come testimoni, le persone che non hanno l’esercizio della capacità civile, o che sono private dell’esercizio dei diritti civici a seguito di sentenza penale1, o che non sanno leggere o scrivere, nonché i parenti in linea retta, i fratelli e le sorelle del testatore ed i loro coniugi, ed il coniuge del testatore stesso.2

2 Il testamento non può contenere alcuna disposizione a favore del funzionario che lo redige, né dei testimoni, né dei parenti consanguinei in linea retta o dei fratelli, sorelle o coniugi dei medesimi.


1 La privazione dei diritti civici pronunciata secondo il diritto penale è abolita (vedi RU 1971 777; FF 1965 I 474 e RU 1975 55; FF 1974 I 1385).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 3 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).

Art. 504 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 2. Testamento pubblico / f. Conservazione dei testamenti

f. Conservazione dei testamenti

I Cantoni devono provvedere affinché i funzionari incaricati della confezione di tali atti li conservino essi medesimi in originale od in copia o li depongano in custodia presso un ufficio pubblico.

Art. 505 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 3. Testamento olografo

3. Testamento olografo

1 Il testamento olografo dev’essere scritto e firmato a mano dal testatore stesso, dal principio alla fine, compresa l’indicazione dell’anno, del mese e del giorno in cui fu scritto.1

2 I Cantoni devono provvedere a che tali disposizioni possano essere consegnate, aperte o chiuse, in custodia ad un pubblico ufficio.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 23 giu. 1995, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1996 (RU 1995 4882; FF 1994 III 472, V 558).

Art. 506 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 4. Testamento orale / a. Disposizione

4. Testamento orale

a. Disposizione

1 Il testamento può essere fatto nella forma orale quando per effetto di circostanze straordinarie, quali pericoli di morte imminente, comunicazioni interrotte, epidemia, guerra, il testatore sia impedito di ricorrere ad una delle altre forme.

2 Il testatore deve dichiarare la sua ultima volontà a due testimoni ed incaricarli di procurarne la debita documentazione.

3 Le cause d’esclusione dei testimoni sono le stesse che nel testamento pubblico.

Art. 507 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 4. Testamento orale / b. Documentazione

b. Documentazione

1 La disposizione orale è immediatamente redatta per iscritto da uno dei testimoni con l’indicazione del luogo, anno, mese e giorno in cui avviene, è firmata da ambedue i testimoni, poscia deposta dagli stessi senza ritardo presso un’autorità giudiziaria, con la dichiarazione che il testatore ha loro manifestato tale sua ultima volontà, trovandosi in istato di capacità a disporre, nelle particolari circostanze da loro indicate.

2 In luogo di ciò i due testimoni possono comunicare la disposizione ad un’autorità giudiziaria con le menzionate dichiarazioni affinché sia messa a protocollo.

3 Se il testamento orale è fatto da un militare in servizio, l’autorità giudiziaria può essere surrogata da un officiale avente almeno il rango di capitano.

Art. 508 A. Testamento / I. Confezione / 4. Testamento orale / c. Caducità

c. Caducità

Il testamento orale perde ogni effetto dopo quattordici giorni dacché il testatore si è trovato in condizione di poter servirsi delle altre forme ordinarie.

Art. 509 A. Testamento / II. Revoca e distruzione / 1. Revoca

II. Revoca e distruzione

1. Revoca

1 Il testamento può essere revocato in ogni tempo in una delle forme prescritte per la sua confezione.

2 La revoca può essere totale o parziale.

Art. 510 A. Testamento / II. Revoca e distruzione / 2. Distruzione dell’atto

2. Distruzione dell’atto

1 Il testatore può revocare la sua disposizione distruggendone in un qualsiasi modo il documento.

2 Ove l’atto sia stato distrutto per caso fortuito o per colpa di un terzo e non sia possibile ricostituirne esattamente ed integralmente il tenore, la disposizione perde pure ogni effetto, riservata l’azione di danni.

Art. 511 A. Testamento / II. Revoca e distruzione / 3. Disposizione posteriore

3. Disposizione posteriore

1 Se il testatore fa un nuovo testamento senza revocare espressamente il primo, la disposizione posteriore revoca l’anteriore, in quanto non risulti con certezza che ne è un semplice complemento.

2 La disposizione testamentaria circa una cosa determinata rimane pure revocata quando il testatore ne abbia successivamente disposto in una maniera inconciliabile con la prima.

Art. 512 B. Contratto successorio / I. Forma

B. Contratto successorio

I. Forma

1 Il contratto successorio richiede per la sua validità le forme del testamento pubblico.

2 Le parti devono dichiarare simultaneamente la loro volontà al funzionario e firmare l’atto alla presenza del funzionario stesso e dei due testimoni.

Art. 513 B. Contratto successorio / II. Scioglimento / 1. Tra vivi / a. Per contratto o per testamento

II. Scioglimento

1. Tra vivi

a. Per contratto o per testamento

1 Il contratto successorio può sempre essere sciolto dalle parti contraenti, mediante convenzione scritta.

2 Il contraente che ha disposto della sua eredità può annullare unilateralmente l’istituzione d’erede od il legato quando l’erede od il legatario, dopo la conclusione del contratto, si fosse reso colpevole a suo riguardo di un atto costituente causa di diseredazione.

3 L’annullamento unilaterale deve essere fatto in una delle forme prescritte per i testamenti.

Art. 514 B. Contratto successorio / II. Scioglimento / 1. Tra vivi / b. Per recesso dal contratto

b. Per recesso dal contratto

Chi per effetto di un contratto successorio ha diritto di ricevere delle prestazioni tra vivi, può recedere dal contratto secondo il diritto delle obbligazioni, qualora le prestazioni non siano debitamente adempiute o garantite.

Art. 515 B. Contratto successorio / II. Scioglimento / 2. Premorienza dell’erede

2. Premorienza dell’erede

1 Il contratto è sciolto se l’erede o il legatario non sopravvive al disponente.

2 Se al momento della morte dell’erede il disponente si trova arricchito per effetto del contratto, gli eredi del defunto possono, salva disposizione contraria, pretendere la restituzione dell’arricchimento.

Art. 516 C. Limitazione della facoltà di disporre

C. Limitazione della facoltà di disporre

Verificandosi pel disponente, dopo la disposizione a causa di morte, una causa di limitazione della facoltà di disporre, la disposizione non è annullata, ma rimane soggetta all’azione di riduzione.


  Capo quinto: Degli esecutori testamentari

Art. 517 A. Nomina

A. Nomina

1 Il testatore può, mediante disposizione testamentaria, incaricare dell’esecuzione della sua ultima volontà una o più persone aventi l’esercizio dei diritti civili.

2 L’incarico dev’esser loro comunicato d’officio ed esse devono pronunciarsi sulla accettazione entro quattordici giorni. Il silenzio vale accettazione.

3 Esse hanno diritto ad un equo compenso per le loro prestazioni.

Art. 518 B. Poteri dell’esecutore

B. Poteri dell’esecutore

1 Salvo contraria disposizione del testatore, gli esecutori testamentari hanno gli stessi diritti e doveri dell’amministratore ufficiale di una successione.

2 Essi devono far rispettare la volontà del defunto e sono particolarmente incaricati di amministrare la successione, di pagarne i debiti, di soddisfare i legati e di procedere alla divisione conformemente alle disposizioni del testatore o a tenor di legge.

3 Se sono nominati più esecutori testamentari, essi esercitano il loro ufficio in comune, salvo contraria disposizione del testatore.


  Capo sesto: Della nullità e della riduzione delle disposizioni

Art. 519 A. Azione di nullità / I. Incapacità di disporre. Difetto di libera volontà. Causa illecita od immorale

A. Azione di nullità

I. Incapacità di disporre. Difetto di libera volontà. Causa illecita od immorale

1 La disposizione a causa di morte può essere giudizialmente annullata:

1.
se al momento in cui fu fatta, il disponente non aveva la capacità di disporre;
2.
se non è l’espressione di una libera volontà;
3.
se è illecita od immorale in sé stessa o per la condizione da cui dipende.

2 L’azione di nullità può essere proposta da chiunque come erede o legatario abbia interesse a far annullare la disposizione.

Art. 520 A. Azione di nullità / II. Vizi di forma / 1. In genere

II. Vizi di forma

1. In genere1

1 La disposizione affetta da un vizio di forma può essere annullata giudizialmente.

2 Se la causa di nullità consiste nella circostanza che l’atto contiene delle liberalità a favore di persone che vi hanno cooperato o di loro congiunti, la nullità si limita a queste disposizioni.

3 Circa il diritto all’azione, valgono le norme relative all’incapacità di disporre.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 23 giu. 1995, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1996 (RU 1995 4882; FF 1994 III 472, V 558).

Art. 520a1A. Azione di nullità / II. Vizi di forma / 2. In caso di testamento olografo

2. In caso di testamento olografo

Se l’indicazione dell’anno, del mese e del giorno della confezione di un testamento olografo manca o è inesatta, il testamento può essere annullato soltanto se i dati temporali necessari non possono essere determinati in altro modo e se la data è necessaria per determinare la capacità di disporre l’ordine cronologico di più testamenti o un’altra questione relativa alla validità del testamento.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 23 giu. 1995, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1996 (RU 1995 4882; FF 1994 III 472, V 558).

Art. 521 A. Azione di nullità / III. Prescrizione

III. Prescrizione

1 L’azione di nullità si prescrive in un anno dal giorno in cui l’attore ha avuto conoscenza della disposizione e della causa di nullità, ed in ogni caso, col decorso di dieci anni dalla pubblicazione della disposizione.

2 Nei casi di incapacità del disponente o di disposizione illecita od immorale, l’azione contro un beneficato di mala fede si prescrive solo dopo trent’anni.

3 La nullità può sempre essere opposta in via di eccezione.

Art. 522 B. Azione di riduzione / I. Condizioni / 1. In genere

B. Azione di riduzione

I. Condizioni

1. In genere

1 Gli eredi che non ottengono l’importo della loro legittima possono pretendere che le disposizioni eccedenti la porzione disponibile sieno ridotte alla giusta misura.

2 Se la disposizione contiene delle prescrizioni circa le quote dei singoli eredi legittimi, queste si devono considerare come semplici prescrizioni relative alla divisione, eccettoché una diversa intenzione non risulti dalla disposizione stessa.

Art. 523 B. Azione di riduzione / I. Condizioni / 2. Per gli eredi legittimari

2. Per gli eredi legittimari

Se la disposizione a causa di morte contiene liberalità a favore di più eredi legittimari, la riduzione in caso di sorpasso della porzione disponibile avviene tra i coeredi in proporzione degli importi attribuiti a ciascun d’essi in più della sua legittima.

Art. 524 B. Azione di riduzione / I. Condizioni / 3. Diritti dei creditori

3. Diritti dei creditori

1 Quando il disponente abbia pregiudicato la porzione legittima di un erede, la massa del suo fallimento od i creditori che al momento dell’aperta successione sono in possesso di certificati di carenza di beni, possono proporre l’azione di riduzione fino a concorrenza del loro avere, entro il termine concesso all’erede, se questi dietro loro invito non l’esercita direttamente.

2 Questo diritto è dato anche contro una diseredazione che il diseredato non contestasse.

Art. 525 B. Azione di riduzione / II. Effetti / 1. In genere

II. Effetti

1. In genere

1 La riduzione è sopportata nella medesima proporzione da tutti gli eredi e legatari istituiti, eccettoché una diversa intenzione non risulti dalla disposizione.

2 Dovendosi ridurre le liberalità ad un beneficato che sia debitore alla sua volta di legati, egli può chiedere, sotto la stessa riserva, che tali legati sieno ridotti in proporzione.

Art. 526 B. Azione di riduzione / II. Effetti / 2. Legato di cosa singola

2. Legato di cosa singola

Quando sia soggetto a riduzione il legato di una cosa determinata la quale non possa essere divisa senza scapito, il legatario può a sua scelta pretendere o che gli sia consegnata la cosa dietro rimborso del maggior valore o che gli sia versata la somma corrispondente al valore della porzione disponibile.

Art. 527 B. Azione di riduzione / II. Effetti / 3. Disposizioni fra vivi / a. Casi

3. Disposizioni fra vivi

a. Casi

Soggiacciono alla riduzione come le disposizioni a causa di morte:

1.
le liberalità fatte in acconto della quota ereditaria per causa di nozze, corredo o cessione di beni, in quanto non sieno soggette a collazione;
2.
i contratti di fine e rinuncia d’eredità;
3.
le donazioni liberamente revocabili e quelle fatte dal disponente negli ultimi cinque anni precedenti alla di lui morte, eccettuati i regali d’uso;
4.
le alienazioni fatte dal disponente con la manifesta intenzione di eludere le disposizioni sulla legittima.
Art. 528 B. Azione di riduzione / II. Effetti / 3. Disposizioni fra vivi / b. Restituzioni

b. Restituzioni

1 Chi è in buona fede, può essere tenuto alla restituzione solo di quanto, al momento dell’apertura della successione, si trovi ancora arricchito per effetto del negozio concluso col disponente.

2 Se la riduzione dev’essere sopportata dal beneficato di un contratto successorio, egli può ripetere una corrispondente parte della controprestazione fatta al disponente.

Art. 529 B. Azione di riduzione / II. Effetti / 4. Polizze di assicurazione

4. Polizze di assicurazione

Le polizze d’assicurazione sulla vita del disponente, costituite a favore di un terzo per atto tra i vivi o per disposizione a causa di morte e quelle che vivendo il disponente furono trasferite a titolo gratuito ad un terzo, sono soggette all’azione di riduzione per il loro valore di riscatto.

Art. 530 B. Azione di riduzione / II. Effetti / 5. Usufrutti e rendite

5. Usufrutti e rendite

Ove il disponente abbia gravato la sua successione di usufrutti o di rendite in modo che il loro valore capitalizzato, secondo la durata presumibile, eccede la porzione disponibile, gli eredi possono chiedere una proporzionale riduzione delle disposizioni o di esserne liberati abbandonando la porzione disponibile ai beneficati.

Art. 5311B. Azione di riduzione / II. Effetti / 6. Sostituzione di eredi

6. Sostituzione di eredi

La sostituzione fedecommissaria è nulla riguardo all’erede legittimario in quanto sia lesiva della legittima; è fatta salva la disposizione sui discendenti incapaci di discernimento.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 532 B. Azione di riduzione / III. Ordine della riduzione

III. Ordine della riduzione

Soggiacciono alla riduzione anzitutto le disposizioni a causa di morte, poscia le liberalità tra i vivi, procedendo dalla più recente alla più remota, finché sia reintegrata la legittima.

Art. 533 B. Azione di riduzione / IV. Prescrizione dell’azione

IV. Prescrizione dell’azione

1 L’azione di riduzione si prescrive col decorso di un anno dal momento in cui gli eredi hanno conosciuto la lesione dei loro diritti, ed in ogni caso col decorso di dieci anni computati, per le disposizioni testamentarie, dal momento della loro pubblicazione e per le altre liberalità dalla morte del disponente.

2 Qualora una disposizione anteriore sia diventata valida per l’annullamento di una posteriore, i termini decorrono dal momento della dichiarazione di nullità.

3 Il diritto alla riduzione può sempre essere opposto in via di eccezione.


  Capo settimo: Delle azioni derivanti dai contratti successori

Art. 534 A. Trapasso dei beni tra vivi

A. Trapasso dei beni tra vivi

1 L’erede contrattuale a cui il disponente prima di morire ha trasferito il possesso dei suoi beni, ne può far compilare l’inventario per atto pubblico.

2 Qualora il disponente non abbia trasferito tutti i suoi beni o ne abbia in seguito acquisiti di nuovi, il contratto non si estende che ai beni effettivamente trasferiti, salvo contraria disposizione.

3 Ove la consegna sia avvenuta in vita del disponente, i diritti e le obbligazioni derivanti dal contratto passano, salvo disposizione contraria, agli eredi dell’istituito.

Art. 535 B. Conguagli in caso di rinuncia / I. Riduzione

B. Conguagli in caso di rinuncia

I. Riduzione

1 I coeredi possono domandare la riduzione delle prestazioni eccedenti la porzione disponibile che il disponente avesse fatto in vita ad un erede rinunciante.

2 La disposizione è soggetta alla riduzione solo per l’importo che eccede la porzione legittima del rinunciante.

3 Le prestazioni sono imputate secondo le norme prescritte per la collazione.

Art. 536 B. Conguagli in caso di rinuncia / II. Restituzione

II. Restituzione

Il rinunciante che per effetto della riduzione sia obbligato a fare una restituzione all’eredità può, a sua scelta, o effettuare la restituzione, o riservare tutta la prestazione nell’eredità e prendere parte alla divisione come se non avesse rinunciato.


  Parte seconda: Della devoluzione dell’eredità

  Titolo quindicesimo: Dell’apertura della successione

Art. 537 A. Momento dell’apertura

A. Momento dell’apertura

1 La successione si apre con la morte di chi lascia l’eredità.

2 Le liberalità e le divisioni effettuate in vita del defunto, in quanto interessano il diritto di successione, sono considerate secondo lo stato in cui l’eredità si trova al momento della morte.

Art. 538 B. Luogo della apertura

B.1 Luogo della apertura

1 La successione si apre per l’intiero patrimonio nel luogo di ultimo domicilio del defunto.

2 …2


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).
2 Abrogato dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).

Art. 539 C. Erede / I. Capacità di ricevere / 1. Personalità

C. Erede

I. Capacità di ricevere

1. Personalità

1 Qualunque persona che non ne sia legalmente dichiarata incapace può succedere per legge o per disposizione a causa di morte.

2 Le liberalità fatte per uno scopo determinato ad una pluralità di persone che non costituisce persona giuridica, sono acquisite alle singole persone che vi appartengono, per essere applicate al fine stabilito dal disponente, ed ove ciò non sia fattibile, valgono come fondazione.

Art. 540 C. Erede / I. Capacità di ricevere / 2. Indegnità / a. Cause

2. Indegnità

a. Cause

1 È indegno di succedere e di ricevere alcuna cosa per disposizione a causa di morte:

1.
chi volontariamente ed illecitamente ha cagionato o tentato di cagionare la morte del defunto;
2.
chi volontariamente ed illecitamente lo ha posto in stato permanente d’incapacità di disporre;
3.
chi mediante dolo, minaccia o violenza lo ha indotto a fare o revocare, o lo ha impedito di fare o di revocare una disposizione a causa di morte;
4.
chi volontariamente ed illecitamente ha soppresso o distrutto una disposizione a causa di morte in circostanze tali che il defunto non l’ha più potuta rifare.

2 L’indegnità cessa quando il testatore abbia perdonato all’indegno.

Art. 541 C. Erede / I. Capacità di ricevere / 2. Indegnità / b. Effetti pei discendenti

b. Effetti pei discendenti

1 L’incapacità esiste solo per la persona indegna.

2 I suoi discendenti ereditano dal defunto come se l’indegno fosse premorto.

Art. 542 C. Erede / II. Sopravvivenza al defunto / 1. Per l’erede

II. Sopravvivenza al defunto

1. Per l’erede

1 Per raccogliere una successione, l’erede deve vivere ed essere capace di succedere al momento dell’apertura della successione stessa.

2 I diritti dell’erede morto dopo l’apertura della successione passano agli eredi di lui.

Art. 543 C. Erede / II. Sopravvivenza al defunto / 2. Per il legatario

2. Per il legatario

1 Il legatario acquista il diritto alla cosa legata se è vivo e capace di succedere al momento dell’apertura della successione.

2 Se premuore al disponente, il legato decade a favore di colui che era tenuto a soddisfarlo, eccettoché una diversa intenzione non risulti dalla disposizione.

Art. 544 C. Erede / II. Sopravvivenza al defunto / 3. Infante concepito

3. Infante concepito

1 L’infante è capace di succedere fin dal momento del concepimento, a condizione che nasca vivo.

1bis Se necessario per la tutela degli interessi dell’infante concepito, l’autorità di protezione dei minori istituisce una curatela.1

2 Se nasce morto, l’infante non è considerato erede.2


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 545 C. Erede / II. Sopravvivenza al defunto / 4. Eredi sostituiti

4. Eredi sostituiti

1 Mediante sostituzione nell’eredità o nel legato, l’eredità, od una cosa ad essa spettante, può essere attribuita a persona non ancora vivente al momento dell’apertura della successione.

2 Non essendo designato un primo erede, si considera come tale l’erede legittimo.

Art. 546 D. Scomparsa / I. Successione di uno scomparso / 1. Immissione in possesso e garanzie

D. Scomparsa

I. Successione di uno scomparso

1. Immissione in possesso e garanzie

1 Gli eredi e legatari che ottengono l’immissione in possesso dei beni una persona scomparsa devono prima fornire garanzia per la restituzione allo scomparso medesimo o ad altri che vi abbiano un diritto prevalente.

2 Nel caso di persona sparita in pericolo imminente di morte, le garanzie saranno fornite per cinque anni; nel caso di assenza senza notizie, per quindici anni; non mai però oltre il giorno in cui lo scomparso avrebbe compiuto gli anni cento.

3 I cinque anni decorrono dall’immissione in possesso ed i quindici dall’ultima notizia.

Art. 547 D. Scomparsa / I. Successione di uno scomparso / 2. Ricomparsa della persona e restituzione

2. Ricomparsa della persona e restituzione

1 Se lo scomparso ricompare o se dei terzi fanno valere diritti prevalenti, le persone immesse in possesso sono obbligate di restituire l’eredità secondo le norme del possesso.

2 Se sono in buona fede, rimangono obbligate verso i terzi che hanno diritti prevalenti, solo durante il termine per la petizione di eredità.

Art. 548 D. Scomparsa / II. Successione devoluta allo scomparso

II. Successione devoluta allo scomparso

1 Qualora un erede sia sparito e non si possa fornire la prova che al momento dell’aperta successione sia vivo o sia morto, la sua parte d’eredità è sottoposta all’amministrazione d’officio.

2 Coloro a cui la quota dell’erede sparito sarebbe pervenuta in di lui vece, possono, un anno dopo la sua disparizione in imminente pericolo di morte, o cinque anni dopo la sua ultima notizia, domandare al giudice la dichiarazione della sua scomparsa e quindi l’immissione nel possesso della sua quota.

3 La consegna della quota d’eredità si fa secondo le norme per la consegna agli eredi dello scomparso.

Art. 549 D. Scomparsa / III. Rapporti fra i due casi

III. Rapporti fra i due casi

1 Quando gli eredi di una persona scomparsa abbiano già ottenuto la consegna dei suoi beni ed alla stessa pervenga un’eredità, i di lei coeredi possono ottenere la consegna dei beni ad essa devoluti, senza nuova dichiarazione di scomparsa.

2 Parimenti gli eredi di una persona sparita possono prevalersi della dichiarazione di scomparsa ottenuta dai suoi coeredi.

Art. 550 D. Scomparsa / IV. Procedura d’ufficio

IV. Procedura d’ufficio

1 Quando l’amministrazione d’officio dei beni di una persona sparita sia durata dieci anni, o questa persona abbia compiuto i cento anni, l’autorità competente promuove avanti il giudice la procedura per la dichiarazione di scomparsa.

2 Se nessun avente diritto si annuncia nel termine indicato, l’eredità è devoluta all’ente pubblico chiamato alla successione, o se lo scomparso non ebbe mai domicilio nella Svizzera al Cantone di attinenza.

3 Questi rimangono responsabili della restituzione verso lo scomparso o verso i terzi che hanno diritti prevalenti, come gli eredi immessi nel possesso.


  Titolo sedicesimo: Degli effetti della devoluzione

  Capo primo: Provvedimenti assicurativi

Art. 551 A. In genere

A. In genere

1 L’autorità competente deve prendere le misure necessarie a salvaguardia della devoluzione dell’eredità.1

2 Queste misure sono particolarmente, nei casi previsti dalla legge, l’apposizione dei sigilli, l’inventario, la nomina di un amministratore e la pubblicazione dei testamenti.

3 …2


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).
2 Abrogato dall’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).

Art. 552 B. Apposizione dei sigilli

B. Apposizione dei sigilli

L’apposizione dei sigilli può essere ordinata nei casi previsti dal diritto cantonale.

Art. 553 C. Inventario

C. Inventario

1 La compilazione dell’inventario è ordinata se:

1.
un erede minorenne è sotto tutela o deve esservi sottoposto;
2.
un erede è durevolmente assente senza rappresentante;
3.
uno degli eredi o l’autorità di protezione degli adulti la richiede;
4.
un erede maggiorenne è sotto curatela generale o deve esservi sottoposto.1

2 Essa si eseguisce secondo le prescrizioni del diritto cantonale e deve esser compiuta, di regola, entro due mesi dalla morte del defunto.

3 La compilazione dell’inventario può essere prescritta dalla legislazione cantonale per altri casi.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 554 D. Nomina di amministratore / I. In genere

D. Nomina di amministratore

I. In genere

1 L’amministrazione dell’eredità è ordinata:

1.
se un erede è durevolmente assente senza rappresentante, in quanto i suoi interessi lo richiedano;
2.
se nessuno dei pretendenti può sufficientemente giustificare i suoi diritti ereditari e quando sia incerta l’esistenza di un erede;
3.
se non sono conosciuti tutti gli eredi;
4.
nei casi particolari previsti dalla legge.

2 Se il defunto ha nominato un esecutore testamentario l’amministrazione dell’eredità è affidata ad esso.

3 Se il defunto era sotto curatela comprendente l’amministrazione dei beni, il curatore assume anche l’amministrazione dell’eredità, salvo che sia disposto altrimenti.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 555 D. Nomina di amministratore / II. Eredi ignoti

II. Eredi ignoti

1 Quando l’autorità sia in dubbio se il defunto abbia o non abbia lasciato eredi, o se tutti gli eredi le sieno conosciuti, essa deve, mediante sufficienti pubblicazioni, diffidare gli interessati ad annunciarsi entro il termine di un anno.

2 Se entro questo termine nessun erede si annuncia e l’autorità non ne conosce alcuno, l’eredità decade a favore dell’ente pubblico chiamato alla successione, riservata la petizione d’eredità.

Art. 556 E. Pubblicazione delle disposizioni d’ultima volontà / I. Obbligo di consegnarle

E. Pubblicazione delle disposizioni d’ultima volontà

I. Obbligo di consegnarle

1 Se alla morte di una persona si rinviene un testamento, questo deve sollecitamente essere consegnato all’autorità competente, ancorché si considerasse nullo.

2 Il funzionario che ha rogato il testamento o presso il quale è deposto, ed ognuno che l’abbia ricevuto in custodia o che l’abbia trovato tra le cose del defunto, è tenuto ad adempiere questo obbligo, sotto sua personale responsabilità, appena gli sia nota la morte del testatore.

3 Dopo la consegna, l’autorità deve, uditi se possibile gli interessati, lasciare l’eredità nel possesso provvisorio degli eredi legittimi o nominare un amministratore.

Art. 557 E. Pubblicazione delle disposizioni d’ultima volontà / II. Pubblicazione

II. Pubblicazione

1 Il testamento dev’essere pubblicato dall’autorità competente entro il termine di un mese dall’avvenuta comunicazione.

2 Gli eredi sono invitati ad assistervi in quanto siano conosciuti dall’autorità.

3 Ove il defunto abbia lasciato più di un testamento, tutti devono essere presentati all’autorità e dalla medesima pubblicati.

Art. 558 E. Pubblicazione delle disposizioni d’ultima volontà / III. Comunicazione ai beneficati

III. Comunicazione ai beneficati

1 Tutti i partecipanti all’eredità ricevono, a spese della medesima, una copia della disposizione pubblicata, in quanto essa li concerne.

2 Ai beneficati di ignota dimora la comunicazione è fatta mediante pubblicazione.

Art. 559 E. Pubblicazione delle disposizioni d’ultima volontà / IV. Consegna dell’eredità

IV. Consegna dell’eredità

1 Trascorso un mese dalla comunicazione, gli eredi istituiti, i cui diritti non sieno espressamente contestati dagli eredi legittimi o dai beneficati di una disposizione anteriore, possono ottenere una dichiarazione dell’autorità, nel senso che essi sono riconosciuti eredi, riservate le azioni di nullità e di petizione di eredità.

2 Nello stesso tempo l’autorità invita, ove occorra, l’amministratore dell’eredità a farne loro la consegna.


  Capo secondo: Dell’acquisto dell’eredità

Art. 560 A. Acquisto / I. Eredi

A. Acquisto

I. Eredi

1 Gli eredi acquistano per legge l’universalità della successione dal momento della sua apertura.

2 Salve le eccezioni previste dalla legge, i crediti, la proprietà, gli altri diritti reali ed il possesso del defunto passano senz’altro agli eredi, ed i debiti del medesimo diventano loro debiti personali.

3 Per gli eredi istituiti, gli effetti dell’acquisto risalgono al momento dell’apertura della successione, e gli eredi legittimi sono tenuti a consegnar loro l’eredità secondo le regole del possesso.

Art. 5611A. Acquisto / II.

II.


1 Abrogato dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 562 A. Acquisto / III. Legatari / 1. Acquisto del legato

III. Legatari

1. Acquisto del legato

1 Il legatario ha un’azione personale contro il debitore del legato, o se questo non è specialmente nominato, contro gli eredi legittimi od istituiti.

2 Se altro non risulta dal testamento, il suo diritto diventa esigibile dal momento in cui il gravato ha accettato la successione o non può più rinunziare alla stessa.

3 Non adempiendo gli eredi alla loro obbligazione, essi possono essere convenuti per la consegna degli oggetti legati o, qualora il legato consista nell’adempimento di un atto qualsiasi, per il risarcimento dei danni.

Art. 563 A. Acquisto / III. Legatari / 2. Oggetto

2. Oggetto

1 Se al legatario è lasciato un usufrutto, una rendita od altra prestazione periodica, la sua azione, in quanto non sia altrimenti stabilito, è regolata dalle disposizioni sui diritti reali e sulle obbligazioni.

2 Se è legata una polizza d’assicurazione sulla vita del disponente, il legatario la può direttamente esigere.

Art. 564 A. Acquisto / III. Legatari / 3. Rapporti fra il creditore ed il legatario

3. Rapporti fra il creditore ed il legatario

1 I diritti dei creditori del disponente prevalgono a quelli del legatario.

2 I creditori dell’erede che ha accettato incondizionatamente la successione sono parificati ai creditori del defunto.

Art. 565 A. Acquisto / III. Legatari / 4. Regresso

4. Regresso

1 Gli eredi che, dopo il soddisfacimento dei legati, abbiano pagato dei debiti ereditari da loro non conosciuti prima, hanno un diritto di regresso verso i legatari nella proporzione medesima nella quale avrebbero potuto pretendere la riduzione dei legati.

2 I legatari non possono però essere costretti alla restituzione oltre alla misura del loro arricchimento al momento dell’azione di regresso.

Art. 566 B. Rinuncia / I. Dichiarazione / 1. Facoltà di rinunciare

B. Rinuncia

I. Dichiarazione

1. Facoltà di rinunciare

1 Gli eredi legittimi ed istituiti possono rinunciare alla successione loro devoluta.

2 La rinuncia si presume quando l’insolvenza del defunto al momento dell’aperta successione fosse notoria o risultasse da atti officiali.

Art. 567 B. Rinuncia / I. Dichiarazione / 2. Termini / a. In genere

2. Termini

a. In genere

1 Il termine per rinunciare è di tre mesi.

2 Esso decorre, per gli eredi legittimi, dal momento in cui ebbero conoscenza della morte del loro autore, a meno che provino di aver conosciuto più tardi l’apertura della successione; per gli eredi istituiti, dal momento in cui hanno ricevuto la comunicazione officiale della disposizione che li riguarda.

Art. 568 B. Rinuncia / I. Dichiarazione / 2. Termini / b. In caso di inventario

b. In caso di inventario

Quando l’inventario sia stato eseguito come provvedimento assicurativo, il termine decorre per ogni erede dalla comunicazione officiale della chiusura dell’inventario.

Art. 569 B. Rinuncia / I. Dichiarazione / 3. Trasmissione della facoltà di rinuncia

3. Trasmissione della facoltà di rinuncia

1 Morendo un erede prima di essersi dichiarato per l’accettazione o per la rinuncia dell’eredità, la facoltà di rinunciare si trasmette ai suoi eredi.

2 Il termine per rinunciare decorre dal giorno in cui essi eredi hanno saputo che la successione era devoluta al loro autore e non si compie prima che sia spirato il termine concesso a loro medesimi per rinunciare alla successione di quest’ultimo.

3 Se per rinuncia degli eredi la successione è devoluta ad altri eredi che prima non vi avevano diritto, il termine decorre a loro favore dal momento in cui hanno conosciuto la rinuncia dei primi.

Art. 570 B. Rinuncia / I. Dichiarazione / 4. Forma della rinuncia

4. Forma della rinuncia

1 La rinuncia è fatta dall’erede, a voce o per iscritto, all’autorità competente.

2 Dev’essere senza condizioni né riserve.

3 L’autorità tiene un registro speciale per le dichiarazioni di rinuncia.

Art. 571 B. Rinuncia / II. Decadenza dal diritto di rinunciare

II. Decadenza dal diritto di rinunciare

1 Se l’erede non rinuncia entro il termine fissato, egli acquista incondizionatamente l’eredità.

2 L’erede che prima dello spirare di detto termine si è ingerito negli affari della successione, o che ha compiuto atti non richiesti dalla semplice amministrazione e continuazione degli affari in corso, o che ha sottratto o dissimulato oggetti appartenenti all’eredità, non può più rinunciare alla stessa.

Art. 572 B. Rinuncia / III. Rinuncia di un coerede

III. Rinuncia di un coerede

1 Quando il defunto non abbia lasciato disposizioni a causa di morte, ed uno fra più eredi rinunci all’eredità, la parte di questo è devoluta come se fosse premorto.

2 Se esistono disposizioni a causa di morte, la parte a cui l’istituito rinuncia passa ai prossimi eredi legittimi del defunto, eccettochè una diversa intenzione non risulti dalla disposizione.

Art. 573 B. Rinuncia / IV. Rinuncia di tutti i prossimi eredi / 1. In genere

IV. Rinuncia di tutti i prossimi eredi

1. In genere

1 L’eredità a cui abbiano rinunciato tutti gli eredi legittimi del prossimo grado è liquidata dall’ufficio dei fallimenti.

2 Fatta la liquidazione, quanto rimane dopo il pagamento dei debiti appartiene agli aventi diritto come se non avessero rinunciato.

Art. 574 B. Rinuncia / IV. Rinuncia di tutti i prossimi eredi / 2. Facoltà del coniuge superstite

2. Facoltà del coniuge superstite

La rinuncia dei discendenti dev’essere notificata dall’autorità competente al coniuge superstite, il quale avrà un termine di un mese per accettare l’eredità.

Art. 575 B. Rinuncia / IV. Rinuncia di tutti i prossimi eredi / 3. Rinuncia a favore degli eredi del grado susseguente

3. Rinuncia a favore degli eredi del grado susseguente

1 Gli eredi possono rinunciare sotto riserva che prima di ordinare la liquidazione vengano interpellati gli eredi del grado susseguente.

2 In questo caso l’autorità notifica agli eredi susseguenti la rinuncia dei precedenti, e se questi non accettano l’eredità nel termine di un mese, si ritiene che essi pure vi abbiano rinunciato.

Art. 576 B. Rinuncia / V. Proroga del termine

V. Proroga del termine

Per motivi gravi, l’autorità competente può prorogare il termine o concederne uno nuovo sia agli eredi legittimi che agli istituiti.

Art. 577 B. Rinuncia / VI. Rinuncia al legato

VI. Rinuncia al legato

La rinuncia al legato fatta dal legatario profitta al debitore di esso, eccettochè una diversa intenzione non risulti dalla disposizione.

Art. 578 B. Rinuncia / VII. Diritti dei creditori dell’erede

VII. Diritti dei creditori dell’erede

1 Quando un erede oberato abbia rinunciato all’eredità al fine di sottrarla ai suoi creditori, questi, o la massa del fallimento, hanno il diritto di contestare la rinuncia entro sei mesi, ove i loro crediti non sieno loro garantiti.

2 Se la contestazione è ammessa, la successione è liquidata d’officio.

3 L’attivo eccedente serve in prima linea a soddisfare i creditori opponenti e, pagati gli altri debiti, è devoluto agli eredi a favore dei quali è stata fatta la rinuncia.

Art. 579 B. Rinuncia / VIII. Responsabilità in caso di rinuncia

VIII. Responsabilità in caso di rinuncia

1 Se gli eredi di una persona insolvente rinunciano alla eredità, essi sono tenuti verso i creditori in quanto abbiano ricevuto dal defunto, nei cinque anni precedenti alla sua morte, dei beni che sarebbero soggetti a collazione nella divisione ereditaria.

2 Sono esclusi da questa disposizione il consueto corredo nuziale e le spese di istruzione ed educazione.

3 Gli eredi di buona fede rispondono solo nella misura dell’attuale loro arricchimento.


  Capo terzo: Del beneficio d’inventario

Art. 580 A. Condizioni

A. Condizioni

1 L’erede che ha la facoltà di rinunciare alla successione può chiedere il beneficio d’inventario.

2 La domanda dev’essere fatta all’autorità competente entro il termine di un mese e nelle stesse forme della rinuncia.

3 La domanda di uno degli eredi giova anche agli altri.

Art. 581 B. Procedura / I. Compilazione dell’inventario

B. Procedura

I. Compilazione dell’inventario

1 L’inventario è compilato dall’autorità competente secondo le prescrizioni del diritto cantonale, e consiste in una distinta dei beni e dei debiti dell’eredità, con l’indicazione della stima di ogni singolo oggetto.

2 Chiunque possa dare informazioni sulla situazione patrimoniale del defunto è obbligato, sotto propria responsabilità, a fornirle all’autorità competente che ne lo richieda.

3 In ispecie gli eredi devono comunicare all’autorità i debiti del defunto da loro conosciuti.

Art. 582 B. Procedura / II. Grida

II. Grida

1 L’autorità incaricata dell’inventario fa pubblicare una grida, con la quale i creditori ed i debitori dell’eredità, compresivi i creditori per fideiussione, sono invitati a notificare i loro debiti e crediti entro un termine stabilito.

2 La grida deve avvertire i creditori delle conseguenze della mancata notificazione.

3 Il termine dev’essere di un mese almeno dal giorno della prima pubblicazione.

Art. 583 B. Procedura / III. Inscrizione d’officio

III. Inscrizione d’officio

1 I crediti ed i debiti risultanti dai registri pubblici o dalle carte dell’eredità devono essere inventariati d’officio.

2 L’iscrizione nell’inventario è comunicata ai rispettivi creditori e debitori.

Art. 584 B. Procedura / IV. Chiusura

IV. Chiusura

1 Decorso il termine per le notificazioni, l’inventario è chiuso, poi messo per almeno un mese a disposizione degli interessati.

2 Le spese dell’inventario sono a carico dell’eredità e, dove questa non basti, degli eredi che lo hanno richiesto.

Art. 585 C. Situazione degli eredi durante l’inventario / I. Amministrazione

C. Situazione degli eredi durante l’inventario

I. Amministrazione

1 Durante la procedura d’inventario non si possono fare che gli atti della necessaria amministrazione.

2 Se l’autorità permette ad un erede di continuare un’azienda del defunto, i coeredi possono chiedere garanzia.

Art. 586 C. Situazione degli eredi durante l’inventario / II. Esecuzione, cause in corso, prescrizione

II. Esecuzione, cause in corso, prescrizione

1 Durante la procedura d’inventario è sospesa ogni esecuzione per i debiti del defunto.

2 ...1

3 Le cause in corso sono sospese e non se ne possono proporre di nuove, riservati i casi d’urgenza.


1 Abrogato dall’all. n. 3 della LF del 15 giu. 2018 (Revisione della disciplina della prescrizione), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2020 (RU 2018 5343; FF 2014 211).

Art. 587 D. Effetti / I. Termine per deliberare

D. Effetti

I. Termine per deliberare

1 Chiuso l’inventario, ogni erede è invitato a dichiarare entro il termine di un mese se accetti l’eredità.

2 Quando sia giustificato dalle circostanze, l’autorità competente può accordare un nuovo termine per far procedere a stime, per la liquidazione di pretese controverse o per simili motivi.

Art. 588 D. Effetti / II. Dichiarazione

II. Dichiarazione

1 Entro il termine stabilito, l’erede può rinunciare all’eredità o chiedere che sia liquidata d’ufficio, oppure accettarla col beneficio di inventario od incondizionatamente.

2 Se non fa alcuna dichiarazione, s’intende che l’abbia accettata col beneficio d’inventario.

Art. 589 D. Effetti / III. Conseguenza dell’accettazione con beneficio d’inventario / 1. Responsabilità secondo l’inventario

III. Conseguenza dell’accettazione con beneficio d’inventario

1. Responsabilità secondo l’inventario

1 L’erede che accetta col beneficio d’inventario si assume i debiti inventariati e diventa proprietario dei beni ereditari.

2 Gli effetti dell’acquisto dell’eredità, coi suoi diritti e coi suoi obblighi, risalgono al momento dell’aperta successione.

3 L’erede risponde, tanto coi beni della successione quanto coi suoi propri, per tutti i debiti risultanti dall’inventario.

Art. 590 D. Effetti / III. Conseguenza dell’accettazione con beneficio d’inventario / 2. Responsabilità oltre l’inventario

2. Responsabilità oltre l’inventario

1 I creditori del defunto i cui crediti non risultano dall’inventario, perché hanno omesso di notificarli, non hanno azione né contro l’erede personalmente, né contro l’eredità.

2 Tuttavia l’erede rimane responsabile, nella misura in cui si trova arricchito dall’eredità, verso quei creditori che avessero tralasciato la notificazione senza loro colpa, od il cui credito fosse stato omesso nell’inventario benché notificato.

3 In ogni caso i creditori possono far valere i loro diritti, in quanto sieno garantiti da pegno sopra beni ereditari.

Art. 591 E. Responsabilità per le fideiussioni

E. Responsabilità per le fideiussioni

I debiti per fideiussioni del defunto sono inscritti separatamente nell’inventario, e l’erede ne è responsabile, anche se accetta la eredità, soltanto per l’ammontare corrispondente al riparto che loro verrebbe attribuito qualora l’eredità fosse liquidata in via di fallimento.

Art. 592 F. Devoluzione agli enti pubblici

F. Devoluzione agli enti pubblici

La grida deve essere pubblicata d’officio quando la successione sia devoluta ad un ente pubblico, il quale però risponde pei debiti della successione solo nella misura dei beni che acquista coll’eredità.


  Capo quarto: Della liquidazione d’officio

Art. 593 A. Condizioni / I. A istanza di un coerede

A. Condizioni

I. A istanza di un coerede

1 Ogni erede può chiedere la liquidazione d’officio, anzi che rinunciare all’eredità od accettarla con beneficio d’inventario.

2 La domanda non è ammessa quando uno dei coeredi abbia dichiarato l’accettazione.

3 In caso di liquidazione d’officio, gli eredi non sono tenuti per i debiti della successione.

Art. 594 A. Condizioni / II. A istanza dei creditori del defunto

II. A istanza dei creditori del defunto

1 I creditori del defunto che hanno fondati motivi di temere che i debiti della successione non sieno pagati, possono chiedere la liquidazione d’officio nei tre mesi dal giorno della morte, o dalla pubblicazione del testamento, salvo che sieno soddisfatti od ottengano delle garanzie.

2 I legatari possono, nelle medesime circostanze, chiedere dei provvedimenti assicurativi a tutela dei loro diritti.

Art. 595 B. Procedura / I. Amministrazione

B. Procedura

I. Amministrazione

1 La liquidazione d’officio è fatta dall’autorità competente o da uno o più amministratori da essa incaricati.

2 Essa comincia con la compilazione dell’inventario e la pubblicazione della grida.

3 L’amministratore è soggetto alla vigilanza dell’autorità alla quale gli eredi possono ricorrere contro gli atti che egli compie od intende di compiere.

Art. 596 B. Procedura / II. Liquidazione ordinaria

II. Liquidazione ordinaria

1 L’amministrazione dell’eredità liquida gli affari in corso del defunto, ne adempie le obbligazioni, ne incassa i crediti, ne soddisfa in quanto sia possibile i legali, ne fa riconoscere giudizialmente se occorre i diritti e le obbligazioni, e ne realizza i beni in quanto sia necessario.

2 L’alienazione di beni stabili della successione deve farsi ai pubblici incanti, e non può farsi a trattative private senza il consenso di tutti gli eredi.

3 Gli eredi possono domandare che già durante la liquidazione sieno loro consegnati, del tutto o in parte, le cose o il danaro non indispensabili alla medesima.

Art. 597 B. Procedura / III. Liquidazione in via di fallimento

III. Liquidazione in via di fallimento

La liquidazione delle eredità oberate è fatta dall’ufficio dei fallimenti a norma della legislazione sul fallimento.


  Capo quinto: Della petizione d’eredità

Art. 598 A. Condizioni

A. Condizioni

1 Chiunque creda di avere, quale erede legittimo od istituito, un diritto prevalente a quello del possessore sopra una successione, o sopra oggetti alla medesima appartenenti, può far valere il suo diritto mediante la petizione d’eredità.

2 …1


1 Abrogato dall’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, con effetto dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 599 B. Effetti

B. Effetti

1 Se l’azione è confermata, il possessore deve consegnare all’attore la successione o gli oggetti della medesima, secondo le norme del possesso.

2 Il convenuto nella petizione d’eredità non può opporre la prescrizione acquisitiva di beni della successione.

Art. 600 C. Prescrizione

C. Prescrizione

1 In confronto di un convenuto di buona fede, la petizione d’eredità si prescrive in un anno dal momento in cui l’attore ha avuto conoscenza del possesso del convenuto e del proprio diritto prevalente, ed in ogni caso col decorso di dieci anni dalla morte o dalla pubblicazione del testamento.

2 In confronto di un convenuto di mala fede, il termine della prescrizione è sempre di trent’anni.

Art. 601 D. Azione del legatario

D. Azione del legatario

L’azione del legatario si prescrive in dieci anni dal giorno della comunicazione della disposizione, o dal giorno dell’esigibilità del legato, o da quello in cui il legato diventò posteriormente esigibile.


  Titolo diciassettesimo: Della divisione dell’eredità

  Capo primo: Della comunione prima della divisione

Art. 602 A. Effetto della devoluzione dell’eredità / I. Comunione ereditaria

A. Effetto della devoluzione dell’eredità

I. Comunione ereditaria

1 Quando il defunto lasci più eredi, sorge fra i medesimi una comunione di tutti i diritti e di tutte le obbligazioni che dura dall’apertura dell’eredità fino alla divisione.

2 I coeredi diventano proprietari in comune di tutti i beni della successione e dispongono in comune dei diritti inerenti alla medesima, sotto riserva delle facoltà di rappresentanza o d’amministrazione particolarmente conferite per legge o per contratto.

3 A richiesta di un coerede l’autorità competente può nominare alla comunione ereditaria un rappresentante fino alla divisione.

Art. 603 A. Effetto della devoluzione dell’eredità / II. Responsabilità degli eredi

II. Responsabilità degli eredi

1 Gli eredi sono solidalmente responsabili per i debiti della successione.

2 L’equa indennità dovuta ai figli o agli abiatici per prestazioni conferite alla comunione domestica del defunto è computata nei debiti della successione, sempreché non ne derivi l’insolvenza di questa.1


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 6 ott. 1972, in vigore dal 15 feb. 1973 (RU 1973 99; FF 1970 I 601, 1971 I 543).

Art. 604 B. Azione di divisione

B. Azione di divisione

1 La divisione dell’eredità può essere domandata in ogni tempo da ciascun coerede, in quanto non sia tenuto per contratto o per legge a rimanere in comunione.

2 Ad istanza di un erede il giudice può sospendere provvisoriamente la divisione della sostanza o di singoli oggetti ove l’immediata sua esecuzione possa recare un pregiudizio considerevole al valore dell’eredità.

3 I coeredi di un erede insolvente possono domandare subito dopo l’apertura della successione dei provvedimenti conservativi a salvaguardia dei loro diritti.

Art. 605 C. Divisione differita

C. Divisione differita

1 Allorchè nella devoluzione dell’eredità debbano essere considerati i diritti di un infante concepito, la divisione deve essere differita fino alla nascita.

2 La madre conserva intanto i suoi diritti di godimento sui beni della comunione ereditaria, in quanto ciò sia richiesto per il suo mantenimento.

Art. 606 D. Diritti degli eredi conviventi

D. Diritti degli eredi conviventi

Gli eredi, che al tempo dell’aperta successione ricevevano il loro mantenimento nell’economia domestica del defunto, possono domandare che esso loro sia continuato a spese della successione fino ad un mese dopo la morte.


  Capo secondo: Del modo della divisione

Art. 607 A. In genere

A. In genere

1 Gli eredi legittimi fra loro, od in concorso con gli eredi istituiti, dividono secondo le medesime norme.

2 Salvo disposizione contraria, possono liberamente accordarsi circa il modo della divisione.

3 I coeredi possessori di oggetti della eredità o debitori del defunto sono tenuti, all’atto della divisione, di fornire ogni indicazione al riguardo.

Art. 608 B. Norme della divisione / I. Disposizioni del defunto

B. Norme della divisione

I. Disposizioni del defunto

1 Chi lascia l’eredità può, mediante disposizione a causa di morte, prescrivere determinate norme di divisione o di formazione dei lotti.

2 Tali prescrizioni sono vincolanti per gli eredi, sotto riserva del conguaglio per il caso di una disparità delle quote che non fosse nell’intenzione del disponente.

3 L’attribuzione di un oggetto della successione ad un erede vale come norma divisionale e non come legato, eccettochè una diversa intenzione non risulti dalla disposizione.

Art. 609 B. Norme della divisione / II. Intervento dell’autorità

II. Intervento dell’autorità

1 A richiesta di un creditore che abbia acquistate o pignorate le ragioni successorie di un erede, o che possieda un attestato di carenza di beni contro di lui, l’autorità interviene nella divisione in luogo dell’erede stesso.

2 È riservato al diritto cantonale di prescrivere anche per altri casi l’intervento dell’autorità nella divisione.

Art. 610 C. Esecuzione della divisione / I. Parità di diritto fra gli eredi

C. Esecuzione della divisione

I. Parità di diritto fra gli eredi

1 Ove non debbano essere applicate altre disposizioni, tutti gli eredi hanno uguali diritti sui beni della successione.

2 Essi devono comunicarsi vicendevolmente ogni loro rapporto col defunto che debba essere considerato per l’eguale e giusta divisione della eredità.

3 Ogni erede può chiedere che i debiti dell’eredità sieno soddisfatti o garantiti prima della divisione.

Art. 611 C. Esecuzione della divisione / II. Formazione dei lotti

II. Formazione dei lotti

1 Gli eredi formano coi beni ereditari altrettante parti o lotti quanti sono gli eredi stessi o le loro stirpi.

2 Se non possono accordarsi, la formazione dei lotti è eseguita, a richiesta di uno di essi, dall’autorità competente, tenuto calcolo dell’uso locale, delle condizioni personali e dei desideri della maggioranza dei coeredi.

3 L’attribuzione dei lotti succede per accordo o per sorteggio fra gli eredi.

Art. 612 C. Esecuzione della divisione / III. Attribuzione e vendita

III. Attribuzione e vendita

1 Gli oggetti, che divisi perderebbero considerevolmente di valore, devono essere attribuiti per intiero ad uno degli eredi.

2 Gli oggetti sulla cui divisione od attribuzione gli eredi non cadono d’accordo devono essere venduti per dividerne il prezzo.

3 Ciascun erede può chiedere che la vendita abbia luogo agli incanti, nel qual caso, in difetto di accordo, l’autorità decide se l’incanto debba essere pubblico o tra i soli eredi.

Art. 612a1C. Esecuzione della divisione / IV. Attribuzione dell’abitazione e delle suppellettili domestiche al coniuge superstite

IV. Attribuzione dell’abitazione e delle suppellettili domestiche al coniuge superstite

1 Se la casa o l’appartamento, in cui vivevano i coniugi, o suppellettili domestiche rientrano nell’eredità, il coniuge superstite può chiedere che gliene sia attribuita la proprietà imputandoli sulla sua quota.

2 Ove le circostanze lo giustifichino, invece della proprietà può essergli attribuito, ad istanza sua o degli altri eredi legittimi del defunto, l’usufrutto o un diritto d’abitazione.

3 Questi diritti del coniuge superstite non si estendono ai locali di cui un discendente ha bisogno per continuare la professione od impresa esercitatavi dal defunto; sono salve le disposizioni del diritto successorio rurale.

4 Il presente articolo si applica per analogia ai partner registrati.2


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. l; FF 1979 II 1119).
2 Introdotto dall’all. n. 8 della L del 18 giu. 2004 sull’unione domestica registrata, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2007 (RU 2005 5685; FF 2003 1165).

Art. 613 D. Oggetti particolari / I. Complessi di cose. Scritti di famiglia

D. Oggetti particolari

I. Complessi di cose. Scritti di famiglia

1 Gli oggetti che per loro natura formano un complesso non possono essere suddivisi se uno degli eredi vi si oppone.

2 Gli scritti e gli oggetti che rappresentano ricordi di famiglia non possono essere alienati senza l’accordo di tutti gli eredi.

3 In caso di disaccordo fra i coeredi, l’autorità competente decide se e come le dette cose debbano essere alienate od attribuite, con o senza imputazione, tenuto calcolo dell’uso locale, e in difetto di questo, delle condizioni personali degli eredi.

Art. 613a1D. Oggetti particolari / I.bis Pertinenze agricole

I.bis Pertinenze agricole

Alla morte dell’affittuario di un’azienda agricola, l’erede che prosegue da solo l’affitto può chiedere che tutte le pertinenze (bestiame, utensili, scorte, ecc.) gli siano attribuite in imputazione sulla sua quota, per il valore ch’esse rappresentano per l’azienda.


1 Introdotto dall’art. 92 n. 1 della LF del 4 ott. 1991 sul diritto fondiario rurale, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 614 D. Oggetti particolari / II. Crediti del defunto verso gli eredi

II. Crediti del defunto verso gli eredi

I crediti del defunto verso uno degli eredi sono imputati nella sua quota.

Art. 615 D. Oggetti particolari / III. Oggetti gravati di pegno

III. Oggetti gravati di pegno

Se ad un erede è attribuito un bene ereditario gravato di pegno per debiti del defunto, gli è pure accollato il debito relativo.

Art. 6161

1 Abrogato dall’art. 92 n. 1 della LF del 4 ott. 1991 sul diritto fondiario rurale, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 6171D. Oggetti particolari / IV. Fondi / 1. Ripresa / a. Valore d’imputazione

IV. Fondi

1. Ripresa

a. Valore d’imputazione

I fondi sono imputati agli eredi per il valore venale che hanno al momento della divisione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’art. 92 n. 1 della LF del 4 ott. 1991 sul diritto fondiario rurale, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 618 D. Oggetti particolari / IV. Fondi / 1. Ripresa / b. Procedura di stima

b. Procedura di stima

1 Quando gli eredi non siano d’accordo circa il valore di attribuzione, questo viene stimato da periti scelti dall’autorità.1

2 …2


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).
2 Abrogato dal n. I 1 della LF del 6 ott. 1972, con effetto dal 15 feb. 1973 (RU 1973 99; FF 1970 I 601, 1971 I 543).

Art. 6191D. Oggetti particolari / V. Aziende e fondi agricoli

V. Aziende e fondi agricoli

La ripresa e l’imputazione di aziende e fondi agricoli sono rette dalla legge federale del 4 ottobre 19912 sul diritto fondiario rurale.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’art. 92 n. 1 della LF del 4 ott. 1991 sul diritto fondiario rurale, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 821).
2 RS 211.412.11

Art. 620 a 6251

1 Abrogati dall’art. 92 n. 1 della LF del 4 ott. 1991 sul diritto fondiario rurale, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 821).


  Capo terzo: Della collazione

Art. 626 A. Obbligo di collazione

A. Obbligo di collazione

1 Gli eredi legittimi sono reciprocamente obbligati a conferire tutto ciò che il defunto ha loro dato per atto tra vivi in acconto della loro quota.

2 È soggetto a collazione, salvo espressa disposizione contraria del defunto, tutto ciò che il medesimo ha dato ai suoi discendenti per causa di nozze, corredo, cessione di beni, condono di debiti o simili liberalità.

Art. 627 B. Collazione in caso di incapacità o di rinuncia

B. Collazione in caso di incapacità o di rinuncia

1 Se prima o dopo l’apertura della successione, uno degli eredi ha perduto tale sua qualità, il suo obbligo di collazione passa agli eredi che subentrano in suo luogo.

2 I discendenti di un erede sono tenuti a conferire le liberalità a lui fatte quand’anche non siano loro pervenute.

Art. 628 C. Modalità / I. Conferimento od imputazione

C. Modalità

I. Conferimento od imputazione

1 Gli eredi hanno la scelta di conferire in natura la cosa ricevuta o d’imputarne il valore, ancorché le liberalità eccedano l’importo della loro quota.

2 Sono riservate le contrarie disposizioni del defunto nonché le ragioni dei coeredi per la riduzione delle liberalità.

Art. 629 C. Modalità / II. Liberalità eccedenti la quota ereditaria

II. Liberalità eccedenti la quota ereditaria

1 Se le liberalità eccedono l’importo di una quota ereditaria, ma è provato che con ciò il disponente ha voluto favorire l’erede di cui si tratta, l’eccedenza non è soggetta a collazione, riservata ai coeredi l’azione di riduzione.

2 Questo favore è presunto per i corredi donati nella consueta misura ai discendenti per causa di nozze.

Art. 630 C. Modalità / III. Computo della collazione

III. Computo della collazione

1 La collazione si fa a norma del valore della liberalità al momento dell’aperta successione o, per le cose precedentemente alienate, secondo il loro prezzo di vendita.

2 Le spese fatte, le deteriorazioni ed i frutti percepiti sono computati fra gli eredi secondo le regole del possesso.

Art. 631 D. Spese di educazione

D. Spese di educazione

1 Non essendo provata una diversa volontà del defunto, le spese per l’istruzione e l’educazione dei singoli figli non sono soggette a collazione, se non in quanto eccedano la misura consueta.

2 Ai figli in tenera età o colpiti da infermità deve essere concesso nella divisione un equo prelevamento.

Art. 632 E. Regali di occasione

E. Regali di occasione

I consueti regali d’occasione non devono essere conferiti.

Art. 6331

1 Abrogato dal n. I 1 della LF del 6 ott. 1972, con effetto dal 15 feb. 1973 (RU 1973 99; FF 1970 I 601, 1971 I 543).


  Capo quarto: Della Chiusura e degli effetti della divisione

Art. 634 A. Chiusura della divisione / I. Contratto di divisione

A. Chiusura della divisione

I. Contratto di divisione

1 La divisione produce i suoi effetti tra gli eredi dal momento della formazione ed accettazione dei lotti o della firma del contratto di divisione.

2 Il contratto di divisione richiede per la sua validità la forma scritta.

Art. 635 A. Chiusura della divisione / II. Convenzioni circa eredità devolute

II. Convenzioni circa eredità devolute

1 I contratti di cessione delle ragioni ereditarie fra coeredi richiedono per la loro validità la forma scritta.1

2 Se tali contratti sono stipulati da uno degli eredi con un terzo, essi non danno a questo il diritto d’intervenire nella divisione, ma solo di pretendere la parte che nella divisione sarà attribuita al cedente.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. l; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 636 A. Chiusura della divisione / III. Convenzioni circa eredità non devolute

III. Convenzioni circa eredità non devolute

1 Sono nulle e di nessun effetto le convenzioni stipulate a riguardo di una successione non ancora aperta dai coeredi fra loro o da alcuno d’essi con un terzo, senza l’intervento ed il consenso di quegli della cui eredità si tratta.

2 Le prestazioni date per tali contratti sono soggette a restituzione.

Art. 637 B. Responsabilità fra coeredi / I. Garanzia delle quote

B. Responsabilità fra coeredi

I. Garanzia delle quote

1 Compiuta la divisione, gli eredi sono fra di loro tenuti alla garanzia per i beni della divisione come il venditore e il compratore.

2 Essi sono reciprocamente garanti dell’esistenza dei crediti attribuiti nella divisione, ed in caso d’insolvenza del debitore rispondono reciprocamente come fideiussori semplici per l’importo del valore attribuito, eccettoché trattisi di cartevalori che hanno un prezzo di borsa o di mercato.

3 L’azione di garanzia si prescrive in un anno dalla chiusura della divisione o dalla scadenza dei crediti verificatasi più tardi.

Art. 638 B. Responsabilità fra coeredi / II. Contestazione della divisione

II. Contestazione della divisione

L’azione di rescissione del contratto di divisione è soggetta alle norme dell’azione di nullità dei contratti in genere.

Art. 639 C. Responsabilità verso i terzi / I. Solidarietà

C. Responsabilità verso i terzi

I. Solidarietà

1 Gli eredi rispondono solidalmente per i debiti della successione anche dopo la divisione e con tutti i loro beni, salvo che i creditori abbiano espressamente o tacitamente consentito alla divisione od all’assunzione dei debiti.

2 La responsabilità solidale si prescrive in cinque anni dalla divisione o dalla esigibilità del credito verificatasi più tardi.

Art. 640 C. Responsabilità verso i terzi / II. Regresso fra coeredi C. Responsabilità verso i terzi / II. Regresso fra coeredi

II. Regresso fra coeredi

1 L’erede che avesse pagato un debito dell’eredità non attribuitogli nella divisione, o che per un debito avesse pagato più di quanto si era assunto, ha diritto di regresso verso gli altri coeredi.

2 L’azione di regresso si propone anzitutto contro l’erede che aveva assunto il debito.

3 Salvo contraria disposizione, gli eredi devono del resto contribuire al pagamento dei debiti in proporzione delle loro quote.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

  Libro quarto: Dei diritti reali

  Parte prima: Della proprietà

  Titolo diciottesimo: Disposizioni generali

Art. 641 A. Caratteri della proprietà / I. In generale

A. Caratteri della proprietà

I.1 In generale

1 Il proprietario di una cosa ne può disporre liberamente entro i limiti dell’ordine giuridico.

2 Egli può rivendicarla contro chiunque la ritenga senza diritto e respingere qualsiasi indebita ingerenza.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207).

Art. 641a1A. Caratteri della proprietà / II. Animali

II. Animali

1 Gli animali non sono cose.

2 Salvo disciplinamenti particolari, le prescrizioni applicabili alle cose sono parimenti valide per gli animali.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207).

Art. 642 B. Estensione della proprietà / I. Parti costitutive

B. Estensione della proprietà

I. Parti costitutive

1 Chi è proprietario di una cosa lo è di tutte le sue parti costitutive.

2 È parte costitutiva di una cosa tutto ciò che secondo il concetto usuale del luogo s’immedesima con essa e non ne può essere separato senza distruggerla, deteriorarla od alterarla.

Art. 643 B. Estensione della proprietà / II. Frutti naturali

II. Frutti naturali

1 Chi è proprietario di una cosa lo è anche dei suoi frutti naturali.

2 I frutti naturali di una cosa sono i prodotti periodici ed i redditi che se ne ritraggono, conformemente alla sua destinazione, secondo il concetto comune.

3 Prima della loro separazione i frutti naturali sono considerati come parti costitutive della cosa.

Art. 644 B. Estensione della proprietà / III. Accessori / 1. Definizione

III. Accessori

1. Definizione

1 Ogni atto di disposizione di una cosa si estende, se non è fatta eccezione, anche ai suoi accessori.

2 Accessori sono le cose mobili che, secondo il concetto usuale del luogo o secondo la manifesta intenzione del proprietario, sono durevolmente destinate all’uso, al godimento od alla conservazione della cosa principale e che vi furono annesse, connesse od altrimenti poste perché servissero alla medesima.

3 La temporanea separazione della cosa principale non toglie ad una cosa la qualità di accessorio.

Art. 645 B. Estensione della proprietà / III. Accessori / 2. Esclusioni

2. Esclusioni

Non possono mai reputarsi accessori quelle cose mobili che servono solo all’uso temporaneo od al consumo del possessore della cosa principale, o che sono estranee alla naturale destinazione di questa, nonché quelle che furono connesse alla cosa principale solo a scopo di custodia, di vendita o di locazione.

Art. 646 C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 1. Rapporti fra i comproprietari

C. Proprietà collettiva

I. Comproprietà

1. Rapporti fra i comproprietari

1 Più persone che abbiano per frazioni la proprietà di una cosa, senza segni apparenti di divisione, sono comproprietarie.

2 Ove non sia diversamente stabilito, esse sono comproprietarie in parti eguali.

3 Ogni comproprietario ha per la sua parte i diritti e gli obblighi di un proprietario; essa parte può essere da lui alienata o costituita in pegno o pignorata dai suoi creditori.

Art. 6471C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 2. Regolamento per l’uso e l’amministrazione

2. Regolamento per l’uso e l’amministrazione

1 I comproprietari possono convenire un regolamento per l’uso e l’amministrazione derogante alle disposizioni legali e prevedervi la facoltà di modificarlo a maggioranza di tutti i comproprietari.2

1bis La modifica delle disposizioni del regolamento concernenti l’attribuzione di diritti d’uso preclusivi richiede inoltre il consenso dei comproprietari direttamente interessati.3

2 Il regolamento non può escludere né restringere la facoltà di ogni comproprietario:

1.
di chiedere e, se occorre, di far ordinare dal giudice l’esecuzione degli atti d’amministrazione necessari a conservare il valore della cosa e a mantenerla idonea all’uso;
2.
d’attuare, a spese di tutti i comproprietari, le misure urgenti, necessarie a preservare la cosa da un danno imminente o maggiore.

1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
3 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 647a1C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 3. Atti dell’ordinaria amministrazione

3. Atti dell’ordinaria amministrazione

1 Ogni comproprietario può fare gli atti dell’ordinaria amministrazione, come i lavori di miglioramento, coltivazione, raccolta, di custodia e vigilanza di breve durata, stipulare a tale fine contratti ed esercitare le facoltà che derivano dagli stessi o dai contratti di locazione o d’appalto, comprese quelle di pagare e riscuotere somme di denaro per tutti i comproprietari.

2 La competenza per tali atti d’amministrazione può essere regolata altrimenti a maggioranza di tutti i comproprietari, salvo le disposizioni della legge concernenti le misure necessarie e urgenti.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 647b1C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 4. Atti di amministrazione più importanti

4. Atti di amministrazione più importanti

1 Gli atti di amministrazione più importanti, in particolare i cambiamenti di cultura o d’utilizzazione, la stipulazione o lo scioglimento di contratti di locazione, la partecipazione al miglioramento del suolo e la nomina d’un amministratore con facoltà eccedenti l’ordinaria amministrazione sono decisi a una maggioranza di tutti i comproprietari che rappresenti in pari tempo la maggior parte della cosa.

2 Sono riservate le disposizioni concernenti i lavori di costruzione necessari.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 647c1C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 5. Lavori di costruzione / a. Necessari

5. Lavori di costruzione

a. Necessari

I lavori di manutenzione, di riparazione e di rinnovazione necessari a conservare il valore della cosa e a mantenerla idonea all’uso sono decisi a maggioranza di tutti i comproprietari, sempreché non siano atti d’ordinaria amministrazione che ognuno di essi può fare.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 647d1C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 5. Lavori di costruzione / b. Utili

b. Utili

1 I lavori di rinnovamento e di trasformazione diretti ad aumentare il valore della cosa oppure a migliorare il rendimento o l’idoneità all’uso sono deliberati a una maggioranza di tutti i comproprietari che rappresenti in pari tempo la maggior parte della cosa.

2 Per le modificazioni che rendano notevolmente e durevolmente più difficile o meno economico per un comproprietario l’uso o il godimento cui la cosa era fino allora destinata, occorre il consenso dello stesso.

3 Le modificazioni implicanti una spesa che non si possa ragionevolmente imporre a un comproprietario, segnatamente perché sproporzionata al valore della sua quota, possono essere fatte senza il suo consenso, purché la sua parte di spesa che superi la somma a lui imponibile, sia assunta dagli altri comproprietari.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 647e1C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 5. Lavori di costruzione / c. Diretti all’abbellimento e alla comodità

c. Diretti all’abbellimento e alla comodità

1 I lavori di costruzione diretti esclusivamente ad abbellire la cosa, a migliorarne l’aspetto o a renderne più comodo l’uso, possono essere fatti soltanto con il consenso di tutti i comproprietari.

2 Questi lavori possono, a una maggioranza di tutti i comproprietari che rappresenti in pari tempo la maggior parte della cosa, essere decisi anche contro la volontà d’un comproprietario che non ne risulti durevolmente impedito nel diritto d’uso e di godimento, qualora gli altri comproprietari gli risarciscano il pregiudizio temporaneo e assumano la sua parte di spesa.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 6481C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 6. Disposizione

6. Disposizione

1 Ogni comproprietario è autorizzato a rappresentare la cosa, ad usarne e goderne nella misura compatibile con i diritti degli altri.

2 Per alienare la cosa, per imporle degli aggravi o per cambiarne la destinazione, occorre il consenso di tutti i comproprietari, a meno che questi abbiano unanimemente stabilito un’altra norma.

3 I comproprietari non possono gravare la cosa di diritti di pegno o di oneri fondiari, qualora ne siano già gravate singole quote.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 6491C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 7. Contribuzione alle spese ed oneri

7. Contribuzione alle spese ed oneri

1 Le spese d’amministrazione, le imposte ed altri aggravi derivanti dalla comproprietà, o che incombono alla cosa comune, sono sopportati dai comproprietari in proporzione delle loro quote, salvo patto contrario.

2 Il comproprietario che ha sopportato più della sua parte di tali spese può chiederne compenso agli altri nella stessa proporzione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 649a1C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 8. Vincolatività di norme e decisioni e menzione nel registro fondiario

8. Vincolatività di norme e decisioni e menzione nel registro fondiario2

1 Il regolamento per l’uso e l’amministrazione convenuto dai comproprietari, le misure amministrative da essi decise, le sentenze e gli ordini del giudice sono vincolanti anche per il successore d’un comproprietario e per l’acquirente d’un diritto reale su una quota di comproprietà.

2 Se concernono quote di comproprietà d’un fondo, possono essere menzionati nel registro fondiario.3


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
3 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 649b1C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 9. Esclusione dalla comunione / a. Comproprietari

9. Esclusione dalla comunione

a. Comproprietari

1 Il comproprietario può essere escluso per sentenza del giudice dalla comunione, se il contegno suo ovvero delle persone cui ha ceduto l’uso della cosa o delle quali è responsabile, violi così gravemente gli obblighi verso tutti gli altri comproprietari o taluni di essi, da non potersi ragionevolmente pretendere che continuino la comunione.

2 Se i comproprietari sono soltanto due, l’azione spetta a ciascuno di essi; negli altri casi e salvo convenzione contraria, è necessaria l’autorizzazione della maggioranza di tutti i comproprietari meno il convenuto.

3 Il giudice che pronuncia l’esclusione condanna il convenuto ad alienare la sua quota di comproprietà e, per il caso in cui l’alienazione non sia attuata nel termine fissato, ordina che la quota sia venduta agli incanti pubblici secondo le disposizioni sulla realizzazione forzata degli immobili, eccetto quelle concernenti lo scioglimento della comproprietà.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 649c1C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 9. Esclusione dalla comunione / b. Titolari di altri diritti

b. Titolari di altri diritti

Le disposizioni concernenti l’esclusione d’un comproprietario si applicano per analogia all’usufruttuario della quota di comproprietà e al titolare di altri diritti di godimento reali oppure personali annotati nel registro fondiario.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 6501C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 10. Scioglimento / a. Azione di divisione

10. Scioglimento

a. Azione di divisione

1 Ogni comproprietario ha il diritto di chiedere la cessazione della comproprietà, a meno che ciò non sia escluso dal negozio giuridico, dalla suddivisione in proprietà per piani o dal fine a cui la cosa è durevolmente destinata.

2 La divisione può essere differita fino a 50 anni mediante convenzione; se concerne un fondo, la convenzione richiede per la sua validità l’atto pubblico e può essere annotata nel registro fondiario.2

3 Lo scioglimento non può essere chiesto intempestivamente.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 651 C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 10. Scioglimento / b. Modo della divisione

b. Modo della divisione

1 Lo scioglimento si effettua mediante divisione in natura, mediante la vendita a trattative private od agli incanti con divisione del ricavo, o mediante cessione della cosa ad uno o più dei comproprietari compensando gli altri.

2 Quando i comproprietari non si accordino circa il modo della divisione, il giudice ordina la divisione della cosa in natura, ed ove questa non si possa fare senza notevole diminuzione del valore, ne ordina la licitazione fra i comproprietari od ai pubblici incanti.

3 Trattandosi di divisione in natura la differenza dei lotti può essere conguagliata in denaro.

Art. 651a1C. Proprietà collettiva / I. Comproprietà / 10. Scioglimento / c. Animali domestici

c. Animali domestici

1 Per gli animali domestici non tenuti a scopo patrimoniale o lucrativo, in caso di litigio il tribunale ne attribuisce la proprietà esclusiva alla parte in grado di garantire loro la sistemazione migliore dal profilo della protezione degli animali.

2 Il giudice può obbligare la parte a cui è attribuito l’animale a versare un adeguato indennizzo alla controparte; egli ne determina liberamente l’ammontare secondo il suo apprezzamento.

3 Il tribunale adotta le necessarie misure provvisionali, segnatamente in relazione alla sistemazione provvisoria dell’animale.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207).

Art. 652 C. Proprietà collettiva / II. Proprietà comune / 1. Condizioni

II. Proprietà comune

1. Condizioni

Se più persone, vincolate ad una comunione per disposizione di legge o per contratto, hanno in comune la proprietà di una cosa, il diritto di ciascuna si estende a tutta la cosa.

Art. 653 C. Proprietà collettiva / II. Proprietà comune / 2. Effetti

2. Effetti

1 I diritti e gli obblighi dei proprietari in comune si determinano secondo le norme stabilite dalla legge o dal contratto per la relativa specie di comunione.

2 In difetto di altre disposizioni l’esercizio della proprietà e il diritto di disporre della cosa richiedono l’unanime decisione dei proprietari.

3 Durante la comunione nessuno dei proprietari può domandare la divisione né disporre di una frazione della cosa.

Art. 654 C. Proprietà collettiva / II. Proprietà comune / 3. Scioglimento

3. Scioglimento

1 Lo scioglimento si effettua con l’alienazione della cosa o con la fine della comunione.

2 Salvo disposizione contraria, la divisione si fa secondo le norme della comproprietà.

Art. 654a1C. Proprietà collettiva / III. Proprietà collettiva di aziende e fondi agricoli

III. Proprietà collettiva di aziende e fondi agricoli

Lo scioglimento della proprietà collettiva di aziende e fondi agricoli è inoltre retta dalla legge federale del 4 ottobre 19912 sul diritto fondiario rurale.


1 Introdotto dall’art. 92 n. 1 della LF del 4 ott. 1991 sul diritto fondiario rurale, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 821).
2 RS 211.412.11


  Titolo diciannovesimo: Della proprietà fondiaria

  Capo primo: Oggetto, acquisto e perdita della proprietà fondiaria

Art. 6551A. Oggetto / I. Fondi

A. Oggetto

I. Fondi2

1 La proprietà fondiaria ha per oggetto i fondi.

2 Sono fondi nel senso di questa legge:

1.
i beni immobili;
2.
i diritti per sé stanti e permanenti intavolati nel registro fondiario;
3.
le miniere;
4.
le quote di comproprietà d’un fondo.

3 La servitù su un fondo può essere intavolata nel registro fondiario come diritto per sé stante e permanente se:

1.
non è costituita né a favore di un fondo dominante né esclusivamente a favore di una determinata persona; e
2.
è costituita per almeno 30 anni o per un tempo indeterminato.3

1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
3 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 655a1A. Oggetto / II. Proprietà dipendente

II. Proprietà dipendente

1 Un fondo può essere connesso a un altro fondo in modo che il proprietario del fondo principale sia anche proprietario del fondo ad esso connesso. Quest’ultimo segue la sorte del fondo principale e non può essere alienato, costituito in pegno o gravato di un altro diritto reale separatamente.

2 Se i fondi sono connessi per un fine durevole, il diritto di prelazione legale dei comproprietari e il diritto di chiedere lo scioglimento della comproprietà non possono essere fatti valere.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 656 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / I. Iscrizione

B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria

I. Iscrizione

1 Per l’acquisto della proprietà fondiaria occorre l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

2 Nei casi di occupazione, successione, espropriazione, esecuzione forzata o sentenza, l’acquirente diventa proprietario già prima dell’iscrizione, ma può disporre del fondo nel registro fondiario solo dopo che l’iscrizione fu eseguita.

Art. 657 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 1. Trasmissione

II. Modi d’acquisto

1. Trasmissione

1 Il contratto traslativo della proprietà richiede per la sua validità l’atto pubblico.

2 Le disposizioni a causa di morte e le convenzioni matrimoniali devono essere fatte nelle forme prescritte dal diritto successorio e matrimoniale.

Art. 658 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 2. Occupazione

2. Occupazione

1 L’acquisto per occupazione di un fondo intavolato nel registro fondiario può solo avvenire allorquando risulti dal registro stesso che è cosa senza padrone.

2 L’occupazione di un terreno non intavolato nel registro soggiace alle disposizioni circa le cose senza padrone.

Art. 659 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 3. Formazione di nuovi terreni

3. Formazione di nuovi terreni

1 I terreni utilizzabili formatisi sopra un’area senza padrone a seguito di alluvione, colmata, spostamento di terra, cambiamento di corso o di livello di un’acqua pubblica o per simile causa, appartengono al Cantone nel cui territorio si trovano.

2 Il diritto cantonale li può assegnare ai fronteggianti.

3 Chiunque possa provare che porzioni di terreno furono staccate dalla sua proprietà, le può riprendere entro un congruo termine.

Art. 660 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 4. Spostamenti di terreno / a. In genere

4. Spostamenti di terreno

a. In genere1

1 Gli spostamenti di terreno dall’uno all’altro fondo non producono alcuna modificazione dei confini.

2 Le porzioni di terreno ed altri materiali che per tali spostamenti passano dall’uno all’altro fondo sono soggetti alle disposizioni sulle cose trasportate e sull’unione di cose.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 660a1B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 4. Spostamenti di terreno / b. Permanenti

b. Permanenti

1 Il principio secondo il quale gli spostamenti di terreno non producono alcuna modificazione dei confini non si applica ai territori interessati da spostamenti di terreno permanenti designati tali dai Cantoni.

2 Nella designazione dei territori dev’essere presa in considerazione la natura dei fondi interessati.

3 L’appartenenza di un fondo a un tale territorio dev’essere comunicata in maniera adeguata agli interessati e menzionata nel registro fondiario.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 660b1B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 4. Spostamenti di terreno / c. Nuova determinazione del confine

c. Nuova determinazione del confine

1 Se in seguito a uno spostamento di terreno un confine non è più appropriato, ogni proprietario fondiario interessato può esigere che esso sia fissato di nuovo.

2 Il plusvalore o il minor valore deve essere compensato.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 661 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 5. Prescrizione acquisitiva / a. Prescrizione ordinaria

5. Prescrizione acquisitiva

a. Prescrizione ordinaria

Ove taluno sia indebitamente iscritto nel registro quale proprietario, la sua proprietà non può più essergli contestata se egli ha posseduto il fondo in buona fede, pacificamente e senza interruzione per anni dieci.

Art. 662 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 5. Prescrizione acquisitiva / b. Prescrizione straordinaria

b. Prescrizione straordinaria

1 Colui che possiede da trent’anni, senza interruzione, pacificamente e come proprietario un fondo non intavolato nel registro, può domandare che sia intavolato come sua proprietà.

2 Lo stesso diritto appartiene alle medesime condizioni al possessore di un fondo del quale il registro non indica alcun proprietario od il cui proprietario al cominciare del termine della prescrizione di trent’anni era morto o dichiarato scomparso.

3 Tuttavia l’iscrizione può essere fatta solo per disposizione del giudice, previa pubblicazione di una grida, ed è concessa solo se non vi fu opposizione nel termine indicato o se l’opposizione fu respinta.

Art. 663 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 5. Prescrizione acquisitiva / c. Termini

c. Termini

Per il computo dei termini, per l’interruzione e la sospensione della prescrizione acquisitiva valgono le norme circa la prescrizione dei crediti.

Art. 664 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / II. Modi d’acquisto / 6. Cose senza padrone e cose di dominio pubblico

6. Cose senza padrone e cose di dominio pubblico

1 Le cose senza padrone e quelle di dominio pubblico sono soggette alla sovranità dello Stato nel cui territorio si trovano.

2 Non sono soggetti alla proprietà privata, salvo la prova del contrario, le acque pubbliche, i terreni non coltivabili, come le rupi, le franate, i ghiacciai, i nevati e le sorgenti che ne scaturiscono.

3 Il diritto cantonale emana le necessarie disposizioni circa l’occupazione delle terre senza padrone ed il godimento e l’uso delle cose di dominio pubblico, come le strade, le piazze, i corsi d’acqua ed il letto dei fiumi.

Art. 665 B. Acquisto della proprietà fondiaria / III. Diritto all’iscrizione

III. Diritto all’iscrizione

1 Il titolo d’acquisto conferisce all’acquirente una azione personale contro l’alienante per far eseguire la iscrizione nel registro fondiario e, in caso di rifiuto dell’alienante, il diritto di farsi giudizialmente riconoscere la proprietà.

2 Nei casi di occupazione, successione, espropriazione, esecuzione forzata e sentenza del giudice, l’acquirente può ottenere direttamente la iscrizione.

3 Le modificazioni della proprietà fondiaria derivanti per legge dalla comunione dei beni o dal suo scioglimento sono iscritte nel registro fondiario su notificazione di un coniuge.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 666 C. Perdita

C. Perdita

1 La proprietà fondiaria si estingue con la cancellazione dell’iscrizione o con la perdita totale del fondo.

2 Riguardo all’espropriazione, il momento del trapasso della proprietà è determinato dalle rispettive leggi federali e cantonali.

Art. 666a1D. Misure giudiziarie / I. Proprietario irreperibile

D. Misure giudiziarie

I. Proprietario irreperibile

1 Se la persona iscritta nel registro fondiario quale proprietario non è identificabile o se il suo domicilio o il nome o il domicilio di uno o più dei suoi eredi è sconosciuto, il giudice può, su richiesta, ordinare le misure necessarie.

2 Il giudice può in particolare nominare un rappresentante. Su richiesta, stabilisce l’estensione del potere di rappresentanza. Se il giudice non dispone altrimenti, il rappresentante si limita a interventi conservativi.

3 Le misure possono essere chieste:

1.
da chiunque abbia un interesse degno di protezione;
2.
dall’ufficio del registro fondiario del luogo di situazione del fondo.

4 Le misure non comportano interruzione del termine di prescrizione acquisitiva straordinaria.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 666b1D. Misure giudiziarie / II. Soggetti giuridici privi degli organi prescritti

II. Soggetti giuridici privi degli organi prescritti

Se una persona giuridica o un altro soggetto giuridico iscritti nel registro fondiario quali proprietari non dispongono più degli organi prescritti, chiunque abbia un interesse degno di protezione o l’ufficio del registro fondiario del luogo di situazione del fondo può chiedere al giudice di ordinare le misure necessarie riguardo al fondo.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).


  Capo secondo: Elementi e limiti della proprietà fondiaria

Art. 667 A. Elementi / I. Estensione

A. Elementi

I. Estensione

1 La proprietà del fondo si estende superiormente nello spazio ed inferiormente nella terra fin dove esiste per il proprietario un interesse ad esercitarla.

2 Essa comprende, salvo le restrizioni legali, tutto ciò che è piantato o costrutto sul terreno ed anche le sorgenti.

Art. 668 A. Elementi / II. Confini / 1. Modo di stabilirli

II. Confini

1. Modo di stabilirli

1 I confini sono indicati dalla mappa catastale e dai termini posti nel fondo.

2 In caso di disaccordo fra la mappa ed i termini, si presumono esatti i confini della mappa.

3 La presunzione non si applica ai territori con spostamenti di terreno permanenti designati tali dai Cantoni.1


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 669 A. Elementi / II. Confini / 2. Obbligo di porre i termini

2. Obbligo di porre i termini

Ogni proprietario di fondi è tenuto di prestarsi, a richiesta del vicino, all’accertamento dei rispettivi confini sia mediante rettificazione della mappa, sia piantando i termini.

Art. 670 A. Elementi / II. Confini / 3. Comproprietà delle opere divisorie

3. Comproprietà delle opere divisorie

Quando in confine tra due fondi esistano delle opere divisorie, come muri, siepi o steccati, si presumono comproprietà dei due vicini.

Art. 671 A. Elementi / III. Costruzioni sul fondo / 1. In rapporto al materiale / a. Proprietà del medesimo

III. Costruzioni sul fondo

1. In rapporto al materiale

a. Proprietà del medesimo

1 Ove taluno adoperi materiale altrui per costruire sul proprio fondo, o materiale proprio per costruire sul fondo altrui, il materiale diventa parte costitutiva del fondo.

2 Il proprietario dei materiali che furono adoperati senza il suo consenso ha il diritto di rivendicarli ed esigerne la rimozione, a spese del proprietario del fondo, in quanto si possa fare senza un danno sproporzionato.

3 Alle medesime condizioni il proprietario del fondo può domandare la rimozione a spese del costruttore dei materiali adoperati senza il suo consenso.

Art. 672 A. Elementi / III. Costruzioni sul fondo / 1. In rapporto al materiale / b. Risarcimento

b. Risarcimento

1 Non avvenendo la rimozione, il proprietario del fondo deve equamente risarcire l’altro per il suo materiale.

2 Se la costruzione fu fatta in mala fede dal proprietario del fondo, questo può essere condannato al completo risarcimento del danno.

3 Se fu fatta in mala fede dal proprietario del materiale, l’indennità può essere limitata al valore minimo che la costruzione può avere per il proprietario.

Art. 673 A. Elementi / III. Costruzioni sul fondo / 1. In rapporto al materiale / c. Attribuzione del fondo

c. Attribuzione del fondo

Nei casi in cui il valore della costruzione superi manifestamente quello del suolo, la parte in buona fede può domandare che la proprietà della costruzione e del fondo sia attribuita al proprietario del materiale mediante equa indennità.

Art. 674 A. Elementi / III. Costruzioni sul fondo / 2. Opere sporgenti sul fondo altrui

2. Opere sporgenti sul fondo altrui

1 Le costruzioni ed altre opere sporgenti da un fondo sopra un altro, rimangono parte costitutiva del fondo da cui sporgono, se il loro proprietario ha un diritto reale alla loro esistenza.

2 Tale diritto può essere iscritto nel registro fondiario come servitù.

3 Qualora l’opera sporgente sia fatta senza diritto, ma il vicino danneggiato non abbia fatto opposizione alla stessa a tempo debito, malgrado che fosse riconoscibile, il giudice può, se le circostanze lo esigono, accordare mediante equa indennità, al costruttore in buona fede il diritto reale sull’opera o la proprietà del terreno.

Art. 675 A. Elementi / III. Costruzioni sul fondo / 3. Diritto di superficie

3. Diritto di superficie

1 Le costruzioni ed altre opere scavate o murate nel fondo altrui, o in qualsiasi modo durevolmente incorporate al suolo o al sottosuolo, possono avere un proprietario speciale, quando la loro esistenza sia iscritta nel registro fondiario come servitù.

2 Questo diritto non è applicabile ai singoli piani di un edificio.

Art. 676 A. Elementi / III. Costruzioni sul fondo / 4. Condotte

4. Condotte

1 Le condotte di allacciamento che si trovano fuori del fondo a cui servono fanno parte dell’impianto da cui provengono o a cui conducono e appartengono al proprietario di questo, salvo disposizione contraria.1

2 La costituzione di tali diritti reali sui fondi altrui ha luogo a titolo di servitù, in quanto non siano applicabili le norme sui rapporti di vicinato.

3 La servitù nasce con la costruzione della condotta se questa è riconoscibile esteriormente. In caso contrario essa nasce con l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 677 A. Elementi / III. Costruzioni sul fondo / 5. Costruzioni mobiliari

5. Costruzioni mobiliari

1 Le capanne, baracche, tettoie e simili, costruite sul terreno altrui senza intenzione di incorporarvele durevolmente, rimangono del loro speciale proprietario.

2 Esse non sono inscritte nel registro fondiario.

Art. 678 A. Elementi / IV. Piantagioni sul fondo altrui

IV. Piantagioni sul fondo altrui

1 Ove alcuno collochi piante di altrui proprietà nel proprio fondo o piante proprie nel fondo altrui, ne derivano gli stessi diritti ed obblighi come se si trattasse dell’impiego di materiale di costruzione o di costruzioni mobiliari.

2 Una servitù analoga al diritto di superficie su singole piante e piantagioni può essere costituita per un minimo di dieci e un massimo di 100 anni.1

3 Il proprietario gravato può, prima della scadenza della durata pattuita, esigere il riscatto della servitù se ha concluso un contratto d’affitto sull’utilizzazione del suolo con il titolare della servitù e se tale contratto viene sciolto. Il giudice determina le conseguenze patrimoniali apprezzando tutte le circostanze.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 giu. 2003, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2004 (RU 2003 4121; FF 2002 4208).
2 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 giu. 2003, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2004 (RU 2003 4121; FF 2002 4208).

Art. 679 A. Elementi / V. Responsabilità del proprietario / 1. In caso di eccesso nell’esercizio del diritto di proprietà

V. Responsabilità del proprietario

1. In caso di eccesso nell’esercizio del diritto di proprietà1

1 Chiunque sia danneggiato o minacciato di danno per il fatto che un proprietario trascende nell’esercizio del suo diritto di proprietà, può chiedere la cessazione della molestia o un provvedimento contro il danno temuto e il risarcimento del danno.

2 Qualora una costruzione o un’istallazione privi un fondo vicino di determinate qualità, le pretese di cui al capoverso 1 sussistono soltanto se all’atto dell’edificazione della costruzione o dell’installazione non sono state osservate le norme allora vigenti.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 679a1A. Elementi / V. Responsabilità del proprietario / 2. In caso di gestione legittima del fondo

2. In caso di gestione legittima del fondo

Se, nell’ambito della gestione legittima di un fondo, segnatamente procedendo a una costruzione, il proprietario causa temporaneamente a un vicino inconvenienti eccessivi e inevitabili che gli arrecano un danno, il vicino può esigere dal proprietario soltanto il risarcimento del danno.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 680 B. Restrizioni / I. In genere

B. Restrizioni

I. In genere

1 Le restrizioni legali del diritto di proprietà sussistono senza iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

2 La loro soppressione o modificazione per negozio giuridico richiede per la sua validità l’atto pubblico e l’inscrizione nel registro fondiario.

3 Le restrizioni della proprietà aventi carattere di interesse pubblico non possono essere soppresse né modificate.

Art. 6811B. Restrizioni / II. Limitazioni del diritto di alienare; Diritti di prelazione legali / 1. Principi

II. Limitazioni del diritto di alienare; Diritti di prelazione legali

1. Principi

1 I diritti di prelazione legali possono essere esercitati anche in caso di incanto forzato, ma soltanto in occasione dell’asta stessa e alle condizioni dell’aggiudicazione; per il resto, i diritti di prelazione legali possono essere fatti valere alle condizioni applicabili ai diritti di prelazione convenzionali.

2 Il diritto di prelazione decade se il fondo è alienato a una persona titolare di un diritto di prelazione dello stesso grado o di grado preferenziale.

3 I diritti di prelazione legali non sono né trasmissibili per successione né cedibili. Essi prevalgono sui diritti di prelazione convenzionali.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 681a1B. Restrizioni / II. Limitazioni del diritto di alienare; Diritti di prelazione legali / 2. Esercizio

2. Esercizio

1 Il venditore ha l’obbligo di notificare ai titolari del diritto di prelazione la conclusione del contratto di vendita e il contenuto dello stesso.

2 Il titolare del diritto di prelazione, se intende esercitare il suo diritto, deve farlo valere entro tre mesi dal giorno nel quale ha avuto conoscenza della conclusione del contratto e del suo contenuto, ma al più tardi entro due anni dall’iscrizione del nuovo proprietario nel registro fondiario.

3 Entro tali termini, il titolare del diritto di prelazione può invocare il suo diritto contro qualsiasi proprietario del fondo.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 681b1B. Restrizioni / II. Limitazioni del diritto di alienare; Diritti di prelazione legali / 3. Modificazione, rinuncia

3. Modificazione, rinuncia

1 La convenzione che esclude o modifica un diritto di prelazione legale richiede per la sua validità l’atto pubblico. Essa può essere annotata nel registro fondiario se il diritto di prelazione spetta al proprietario attuale di un altro fondo.

2 Sopravvenuto il caso di prelazione, l’avente diritto può rinunciare per scritto ad esercitare un diritto di prelazione legale.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 6821B. Restrizioni / II. Limitazioni del diritto di alienare; Diritti di prelazione legali / 4. In caso di comproprietà e di diritto di superficie

4. In caso di comproprietà e di diritto di superficie2

1 I comproprietari hanno un diritto di prelazione verso qualunque terzo non comproprietario che acquisti una parte del fondo. Se più comproprietari fanno valere il diritto di prelazione, la parte è attribuita loro in proporzione alle rispettive quote di comproprietà.3

2 Il diritto di prelazione spetta anche al proprietario di un fondo gravato da un diritto di superficie per sé stante e permanente verso chiunque acquisti tale diritto, e al superficiario, nella misura in cui il fondo serva all’esercizio del suo diritto, verso chiunque acquisti il fondo.

3 …4


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).
4 Abrogato dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 682a1B. Restrizioni / II. Limitazioni del diritto di alienare; Diritti di prelazione legali / 5. Diritto di prelazione su aziende e fondi agricoli

5. Diritto di prelazione su aziende e fondi agricoli

I diritti di prelazione su aziende e fondi agricoli sono inoltre retti dalla legge federale del 4 ottobre 19912 sul diritto fondiario rurale.


1 Introdotto dall’art. 92 n. 1 della LF del 4 ott. 1991 sul diritto fondiario rurale, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 821).
2 RS 211.412.11

Art. 6831

1 Abrogato dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 684 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 1. Eccessi pregiudizievoli

III. Rapporti di vicinato

1. Eccessi pregiudizievoli1

1 Usando del diritto di proprietà, e specialmente esercitando sul suo fondo un’industria, ognuno è obbligato di astenersi da ogni eccesso pregiudicevole alla proprietà del vicino.

2 Sono vietati in particolare l’inquinamento dell’aria, i cattivi odori, i rumori, i suoni, gli scotimenti, le radiazioni e la privazione di insolazione o di luce diurna che sono di danno ai vicini e non sono giustificati dalla situazione e destinazione dei fondi o dall’uso locale.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 685 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 2. Scavi e costruzioni / a. Regola

2. Scavi e costruzioni

a. Regola

1 Il proprietario che intraprende scavi o costruzioni deve fare in modo di non danneggiare i fondi dei vicini, provocando scoscendimenti del loro terreno, o mettendolo in pericolo, o recando pregiudizio agli impianti che vi si trovano.

2 Alle costruzioni incompatibili col diritto di vicinato si applicano le disposizioni relative alle opere sporgenti sul fondo altrui.

Art. 686 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 2. Scavi e costruzioni / b. Riserva del diritto cantonale

b. Riserva del diritto cantonale

1 I Cantoni hanno facoltà di fissare le distanze da osservarsi negli scavi e costruzioni.

2 Essi possono emanare ulteriori norme edilizie.

Art. 687 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 3. Piante / a. Regola

3. Piante

a. Regola

1 Il vicino può tagliare ed appropriarsi i rami sporgenti e le radici penetranti quando danneggino la sua proprietà e dietro reclamo non sieno tolti entro un termine conveniente.

2 Se il proprietario tollera la sporgenza di rami sul suo suolo coltivato o fabbricato, egli ha diritto ai frutti che producono.

3 Queste prescrizioni non sono applicabili alle selve fra loro confinanti.

Art. 688 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 3. Piante / b. Prescrizioni cantonali

b. Prescrizioni cantonali

Il diritto cantonale può prescrivere determinate distanze dal fondo del vicino per le piantagioni, secondo la natura dei fondi e delle piante, e può obbligare il proprietario del fondo a permettere l’avanzamento dei rami o delle radici di piante fruttifere nonché regolare o togliere il diritto del proprietario sui frutti prodotti dai rami sporgenti sul suo terreno.

Art. 689 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 4. Scolo delle acque

4. Scolo delle acque

1 Ogni proprietario è tenuto a ricevere l’acqua che scola naturalmente dal fondo superiore, particolarmente l’acqua piovana, di disgelo e quella delle sorgenti non raccolte.

2 A nessuno è lecito modificare il deflusso naturale dell’acqua a danno del vicino.

3 L’acqua defluente necessaria ad un fondo inferiore gli può esser tolta solo in quanto sia indispensabile per il fondo superiore.

Art. 690 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 5. Prosciugamenti

5. Prosciugamenti

1 Il proprietario è tenuto a ricevere senza indennità le acque provenienti da opere di prosciugamento del fondo superiore, che prima scolavano naturalmente sul suo fondo.

2 Se ne subisce un danno, egli può esigere dal proprietario del fondo superiore che faccia a sue spese un acquedotto attraverso il proprio fondo inferiore.

Art. 691 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 6. Condotte / a. Obbligo di tollerarle

6. Condotte

a. Obbligo di tollerarle

1 Ogni proprietario è tenuto, dietro piena indennità, a tollerare nel suo fondo le linee e condutture destinate all’allacciamento di un altro fondo, se l’allacciamento non può essere eseguito altrimenti o può esserlo solo con spese eccessive.1

2 Queste prestazioni non possono essere richieste in virtù dei rapporti di vicinato nei casi per i quali il diritto federale o cantonale concede l’espropriazione.

3 Su richiesta dell’avente diritto o del proprietario gravato, tali condotte sono iscritte come servitù nel registro fondiario a spese dell’avente diritto. Il diritto di condotta è opponibile all’acquirente di buona fede anche senza iscrizione.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 692 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 6. Condotte / b. Tutela degli interessi dei gravati

b. Tutela degli interessi dei gravati

1 Il proprietario gravato può pretendere che i suoi interessi siano equamente considerati.

2 Quando ciò sia giustificato da speciali circostanze, e trattandosi di condotte aeree, egli può pretendere che gli sia comperato, contro integrale compenso e per una conveniente larghezza, il tratto di terreno sul quale dev’essere stabilita la condotta.

Art. 693 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 6. Condotte / c. Cambiamento di circostanze

c. Cambiamento di circostanze

1 Modificandosi le circostanze, il gravato può pretendere uno spostamento della condotta conforme ai propri interessi.

2 Le spese dello spostamento devono, di regola, essere sopportate dall’avente diritto.

3 Dove ciò sia giustificato da speciali circostanze un’equa parte delle spese può però essere posta a carico del gravato.

Art. 694 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 7. Diritti di passo / a. Accesso necessario

7. Diritti di passo

a. Accesso necessario

1 Il proprietario che non abbia un accesso sufficiente dal suo fondo ad una strada pubblica, può pretendere che i vicini gli consentano il passaggio necessario dietro piena indennità.

2 La domanda è diretta in primo luogo contro il vicino dal quale, a causa dello stato preesistente della proprietà e della viabilità, si può più ragionevolmente esigere la concessione del passo; in secondo luogo contro coloro per i quali il passaggio è di minor danno.

3 Nella determinazione del passo necessario devesi aver riguardo agli interessi delle due parti.

Art. 695 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 7. Diritti di passo / b. Altri diritti di passo

b. Altri diritti di passo

Rimane riservata ai Cantoni la facoltà di emanare ulteriori prescrizioni circa il diritto di servirsi del fondo del vicino per eseguire i lavori di coltivazione, miglioria o costruzione sul fondo proprio, circa i diritti di passaggio per arare od abbeverare, circa il transito nei fondi incolti od in stagione morta, la condotta del legname e simili diritti.

Art. 696 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 7. Diritti di passo / c. Iscrizione nel registro

c. Iscrizione nel registro

1 I diritti di passo stabiliti direttamente dalla legge sussistono senza iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

2 Devono però essere menzionati nel registro quando abbiano un carattere permanente.

Art. 697 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 8. Opere di cinta

8. Opere di cinta

1 Il proprietario sopporta le spese di cinta del proprio fondo, riservate le disposizioni circa la comproprietà delle opere divisorie.

2 Relativamente all’obbligo ed al modo di cintare i fondi è riservato il diritto cantonale.

Art. 698 B. Restrizioni / III. Rapporti di vicinato / 9. Manutenzione

9. Manutenzione

I proprietari devono contribuire in proporzione del loro interesse alle spese per le opere relative all’esercizio dei diritti di vicinato.

Art. 699 B. Restrizioni / IV. Diritto di accesso ed opposizione / 1. Accesso

IV. Diritto di accesso ed opposizione

1. Accesso

1 L’accesso ai boschi, alle selve ed ai pascoli e la raccolta di bacche selvatiche, funghi e simili cose sono concessi ad ognuno, secondo l’uso locale, riservate le disposizioni proibitive che l’autorità competente può emanare, limitatamente a certi fondi, nell’interesse delle colture.

2 Il diritto cantonale può decretare ulteriori disposizioni circa l’accesso ai fondi altrui per l’esercizio della caccia o della pesca.

Art. 700 B. Restrizioni / IV. Diritto di accesso ed opposizione / 2. Ripresa di cose o di animali

2. Ripresa di cose o di animali

1 Il proprietario deve permettere all’avente diritto la ricerca e la ripresa delle cose trasportate sul proprio fondo dall’acqua, dal vento, dalle valanghe, o da altra forza naturale od avvenimento fortuito, nonché del bestiame grosso o minuto, degli sciami d’api, volatili o pesci pervenuti sul proprio fondo.

2 Egli può pretendere il risarcimento del danno ed ha su dette cose il diritto di ritenzione.

Art. 701 B. Restrizioni / IV. Diritto di accesso ed opposizione / 3. Difesa da pericoli o danni

3. Difesa da pericoli o danni

1 Ove qualcuno non possa sottrarre sé od altri ad un danno sovrastante o ad un pericolo imminente se non violando la proprietà fondiaria di un terzo, questi è tenuto di soffrire la violazione, purché il danno effettivo o temuto sia assai maggiore del pregiudizio che risulta per lui.

2 Il danno che ne consegue dev’essere equamente risarcito.

Art. 702 B. Restrizioni / V. Restrizioni di diritto pubblico / 1. In genere

V. Restrizioni di diritto pubblico

1. In genere

Rimane riservata alla Confederazione, ai Cantoni ed ai Comuni la facoltà di emanare nell’interesse pubblico delle restrizioni al diritto di proprietà fondiaria, specialmente a riguardo della polizia edilizia e sanitaria, dei provvedimenti contro gli incendi, delle discipline forestali, della viabilità, delle strade di alaggio, dell’impianto dei termini e dei segnali trigonometrici, del miglioramento e frazionamento del suolo, del raggruppamento dei fondi rustici e dei terreni da costruzione, della conservazione delle antichità e delle rarità naturali, delle deturpazioni del paesaggio, della protezione dei punti di vista e delle sorgenti d’acque salubri.

Art. 7031B. Restrizioni / V. Restrizioni di diritto pubblico / 2. Miglioramenti del suolo

2. Miglioramenti del suolo

1 Quando le opere di miglioramento del suolo, come correzioni di corsi d’acqua, prosciugamenti, irrigazioni, rimboschimenti, strade, raggruppamenti di terreni e simili lavori, non possono essere compiute se non da una comunione di proprietari e siano consentite dalla maggioranza dei medesimi, rappresentanti più della metà del terreno, gli altri proprietari sono obbligati a prendervi parte. I proprietari interessati che non prendono parte alla decisione sono considerati consenzienti. L’adesione è menzionata nel registro fondiario.

2 I Cantoni stabiliscono la procedura. Essi devono, segnatamente per i raggruppamenti, emanare prescrizioni particolareggiate.

3 La legislazione cantonale può facilitare maggiormente l’esecuzione di tali miglioramenti del suolo ed estendere le stesse prescrizioni anche alle zone edificabili e ai territori interessati da spostamenti di terreno permanenti.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’art. 121 della L del 3 ott. 1951 sull’agricoltura, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1954 (RU 1953 1133; FF 1951 II 141 ediz. franc.).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 704 C. Sorgenti e fontane / I. Proprietà e diritto sulle sorgenti

C. Sorgenti e fontane

I. Proprietà e diritto sulle sorgenti

1 Le sorgenti sono parti costitutive del fondo e la loro proprietà può essere acquisita soltanto col suolo dal quale esse scaturiscono.

2 I diritti sopra le sorgenti nel suolo altrui sono costituiti quali servitù mediante iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

3 L’acqua del sottosuolo è parificata alle sorgenti.

Art. 705 C. Sorgenti e fontane / II. Derivazione di sorgenti

II. Derivazione di sorgenti

1 Il diritto cantonale può regolare, limitare od interdire, nel pubblico interesse, la derivazione delle sorgenti.

2 Nascendo conflitti fra Cantoni, decide definitivamente il Consiglio federale.

Art. 706 C. Sorgenti e fontane / III. Sorgenti tagliate / 1. Indennità

III. Sorgenti tagliate

1. Indennità

1 Chi, facendo costruzioni, scavi od altre opere qualsiasi, taglia, inquina, od altrimenti danneggia sorgenti o fontane considerevolmente utilizzate o raccolte a scopo di utilizzazione, è tenuto al risarcimento dei danni verso il proprietario o l’utente delle medesime.

2 Quando il danno non sia stato cagionato per dolo od imprudenza, o quando il danneggiato stesso sia in colpa, il giudice decide con libero apprezzamento se, in quale misura ed in qual modo il risarcimento sia dovuto.

Art. 707 C. Sorgenti e fontane / III. Sorgenti tagliate / 2. Ripristino

2. Ripristino

1 Essendo tagliate od inquinate sorgenti o fontane indispensabili per la coltivazione di un fondo, o per l’abitazione di un immobile, o per una condotta d’acqua potabile, può essere domandato il ripristino dello stato anteriore in quanto sia possibile.

2 Negli altri casi il ripristino può solo essere domandato se è giustificato da speciali circostanze.

Art. 708 C. Sorgenti e fontane / IV. Comunione di sorgenti

IV. Comunione di sorgenti

1 Se più sorgenti vicine, che appartengono a diversi proprietari e defluiscono da un medesimo bacino d’alimentazione, formano insieme un gruppo, ognuno dei proprietari può proporre che le sorgenti sieno raccolte in comunione e distribuite agli aventi diritto in proporzione del getto anteriore.

2 Le spese per l’impianto comune sono sopportate dagli aventi diritto in ragione del rispettivo interesse.

3 Opponendosi qualcuno degli interessati, ognuno ha diritto di raccogliere a regola d’arte e di derivare la propria sorgente, ancorché ne venga pregiudizio al getto delle altre e non deve indennità se non in quanto la sua sorgente sia aumentata in conseguenza del nuovo adattamento.

Art. 709 C. Sorgenti e fontane / V. Utilizzazione di sorgenti

V. Utilizzazione di sorgenti

È riservato al diritto cantonale lo stabilire se ed in quale misura le sorgenti, le fontane ed i rivi di proprietà privata possono essere utilizzati anche dai vicini o da altre persone per attingervi acqua, per abbeverare o per simili usi.

Art. 710 C. Sorgenti e fontane / VI. Fontana necessaria

VI. Fontana necessaria

1 Qualora manchi ad un fondo l’acqua necessaria per la casa e le sue dipendenze, e non sia possibile condurvela da altro luogo senza un lavoro ed una spesa sproporzionati, il proprietario può chiedere che il vicino gli ceda, dietro completa indennità, una parte della sorgente o fontana, di cui egli possa privarsi senza detrimento pei propri bisogni.

2 Nel determinare le modalità devesi principalmente aver riguardo all’interesse di colui che è obbligato a fornire l’acqua.

3 Mutandosi le circostanze, può essere chiesta una modificazione delle disposizioni precedenti.

Art. 711 C. Sorgenti e fontane / VII. Obbligo di cessione / 1. Dell’acqua

VII. Obbligo di cessione

1. Dell’acqua

1 Se delle sorgenti, delle fontane o dei rivi non sono di alcun utile od hanno solo un infimo vantaggio per il loro proprietario in confronto della loro possibile utilizzazione, il proprietario può essere obbligato a cederli, dietro completa indennità, per servizi di acque potabili, idranti od altre imprese di pubblica utilità.

2 L’indennità potrà consistere nella concessione di acqua dalla nuova opera.

Art. 712 C. Sorgenti e fontane / VII. Obbligo di cessione / 2. Circa il terreno

2. Circa il terreno

I proprietari di servizi d’acqua potabile possono domandare in via di espropriazione i terreni circostanti alle loro sorgenti, necessari ad impedire che sieno inquinate.


  Capo terzo:1  Della proprietà per piani

Art. 712a A. Elementi e oggetto / I. Elementi

A. Elementi e oggetto

I. Elementi

1 La proprietà per piani è la quota di comproprietà d’un fondo, alla quale è inerente il diritto esclusivo del comproprietario di godere e di sistemare internamente una parte determinata di un edificio.

2 Il comproprietario ha facoltà di amministrare, godere e sistemare i suoi locali, sempreché non comprometta l’esercizio del diritto corrispondente degli altri comproprietari, non danneggi in alcun modo le parti edilizie, le opere e gli impianti comuni e non ne pregiudichi la funzione e l’aspetto esteriore.

3 Egli è tenuto a mantenere i suoi locali in modo che sia assicurato all’edificio uno stato irreprensibile e un buon aspetto.

Art. 712b A. Elementi e oggetto / II. Oggetto

II. Oggetto

1 Possono essere oggetto del diritto esclusivo i singoli piani o porzioni di piano ordinati in appartamenti o in unità di locali per il commercio o altro scopo; essi devono costituire un tutto e avere un proprio accesso, ma possono comprendere locali accessori disgiunti.

2 Non possono essere oggetto del diritto esclusivo:

1.
il suolo su cui sorge l’edificio e il diritto di superficie in virtù del quale l’edificio è costruito;
2.
le parti della costruzione che sono importanti per l’esistenza, la membratura e la solidità dell’edificio o dei locali di altri comproprietari, oppure determinano la forma esteriore e l’aspetto dell’edificio;
3.
le opere e gli impianti che servono anche agli altri comproprietari per l’uso dei loro locali.

3 I comproprietari possono, nell’atto costitutivo o in una convenzione successiva avente la medesima forma, dichiarare comuni anche altre parti dell’edificio, le quali in caso diverso si presumono assoggettate al diritto esclusivo.

Art. 712c A. Elementi e oggetto / III. Disposizione

III. Disposizione

1 Il comproprietario non ha per legge il diritto di prelazione verso qualunque terzo che acquisti una quota, ma un tale diritto può essere stabilito nell’atto costitutivo o in una convenzione successiva ed essere annotato nel registro fondiario.

2 Nello stesso modo può essere stabilito che l’alienazione d’un piano o d’una porzione di piano, la costituzione d’usufrutto o d’un diritto d’abitazione sullo stesso e la sua locazione siano valide solo se gli altri comproprietari, con decisione della maggioranza, non facciano opposizione entro quattordici giorni dal ricevimento della comunicazione.

3 L’opposizione dev’essere giustificata da gravi motivi.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 712d B. Costituzione e cessazione / I. Atto costitutivo

B. Costituzione e cessazione

I. Atto costitutivo

1 La proprietà per piani è costituita con l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

2 L’iscrizione può essere chiesta sul fondamento di:

1.
un contratto con il quale i comproprietari sottopongono le loro quote all’ordinamento della proprietà per piani;
2.
una dichiarazione del proprietario del fondo o del titolare di un diritto di superficie per sè stante e permanente, attestante la costituzione di quote di comproprietà secondo l’ordinamento della proprietà per piani.

3 Il negozio richiede per la sua validità l’atto pubblico e, se è un testamento o una convenzione di divisione ereditaria, la forma prescritta dal diritto successorio.

Art. 712e B. Costituzione e cessazione / II. Delimitazione e quote di valore

II. Delimitazione e quote di valore1

1 L’atto costitutivo deve determinare i piani o le porzioni di piano e indicare, in frazioni aventi un denominatore comune, il valore di ciascuno di essi come quota del valore dell’immobile o del diritto di superficie.2

2 La modificazione delle quote di valore richiede per la sua validità il consenso di tutti gli interessati diretti e l’approvazione dell’assemblea dei comproprietari; ogni comproprietario può tuttavia domandare la rettificazione della sua quota, se sia stata determinata erroneamente o sia divenuta inesatta per le mutate condizioni dell’edificio o delle sue adiacenze.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 712f B. Costituzione e cessazione / III. Estinzione

III. Estinzione

1 La proprietà per piani si estingue con la perdita dell’immobile o del diritto di superficie e con la cancellazione dal registro fondiario.

2 La cancellazione può essere domandata in virtù d’una convenzione di scioglimento, oppure dal comproprietario che accentra tutte le quote, sempreché vi consentano i titolari di diritti reali su piani o porzioni di piano, che non siano trasferibili su tutto il fondo senza pregiudizio.

3 Ogni comproprietario può chiedere lo scioglimento se l’edificio:

1.
perisce per più della metà del suo valore e la ricostruzione comporterebbe per lui un onere difficilmente sopportabile; o
2.
è suddiviso in proprietà per piani da oltre 50 anni e, a causa del cattivo stato della costruzione, non può più essere utilizzato conformemente alla sua destinazione.1

4 I comproprietari che intendono continuare la comunione possono evitare lo scioglimento tacitando gli altri.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 712g C. Amministrazione e uso / I. Disposizioni applicabili

C. Amministrazione e uso

I. Disposizioni applicabili

1 Per la competenza a fare atti d’amministrazione e lavori di costruzione si applicano le norme sulla comproprietà.

2 A tali norme, qualora non dispongano altrimenti, può essere sostituito un altro ordinamento da stabilirsi nell’atto costitutivo o per decisione unanime di tutti i comproprietari.

3 Del rimanente, ogni comproprietario può chiedere che sia stabilito e menzionato nel registro fondiario un regolamento per l’amministrazione e l’uso, il quale dev’essere approvato da una maggioranza dei comproprietari che rappresenti in pari tempo la maggior parte del valore della cosa; con la medesima maggioranza può essere modificato il regolamento, anche se esso sia stabilito nell’atto costitutivo.

4 La modifica dell’attribuzione per regolamento di diritti d’uso preclusivi richiede inoltre il consenso dei comproprietari direttamente interessati.1


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 712h C. Amministrazione e uso / II. Spese ed oneri comuni / 1. Definizione e ripartizione

II. Spese ed oneri comuni

1. Definizione e ripartizione

1 I comproprietari devono contribuire agli oneri comuni e alle spese dell’amministrazione comune proporzionalmente al valore delle loro quote.

2 Tali oneri e spese sono segnatamente:

1.
le spese per la manutenzione ordinaria, le riparazioni e le rinnovazioni delle parti comuni del fondo e dell’edificio, delle opere e impianti comuni;
2.
le spese d’amministrazione, compresa l’indennità all’amministratore;
3.
i contributi di diritto pubblico e le imposte dovuti collettivamente dai comproprietari;
4.
gli interessi e gli ammortamenti dovuti ai creditori garantiti da pegno sull’immobile o verso i quali i comproprietari sono solidalmente responsabili.

3 Se si tratta di parti dell’edificio, di opere o d’impianti che non servono o servono minimamente a taluni comproprietari, ne deve essere tenuto conto nella ripartizione delle spese.

Art. 712i C. Amministrazione e uso / II. Spese ed oneri comuni / 2. Garanzia dei contributi / a. Ipoteca legale

2. Garanzia dei contributi

a. Ipoteca legale

1 Al fine di garantire i suoi crediti per i contributi decorsi negli ultimi tre anni, la comunione ha il diritto di ottenere la costituzione di un’ipoteca legale sulla quota di ciascun comproprietario.

2 L’iscrizione dell’ipoteca può essere domandata dall’amministratore o, in mancanza di questo, da ciascun comproprietario autorizzato per decisione della maggioranza dei comproprietari, o dal giudice, e dal creditore in favore del quale sia stato pignorato il credito per contributi.

3 Del rimanente, si applicano per analogia le disposizioni concernenti la costituzione dell’ipoteca legale degli artigiani e imprenditori.

Art. 712k C. Amministrazione e uso / II. Spese ed oneri comuni / 2. Garanzia dei contributi / b. Diritto di ritenzione

b. Diritto di ritenzione

Per i crediti da contributi decorsi negli ultimi tre anni, la comunione ha, come un locatore, il diritto di ritenzione sulle cose mobili che si trovano nei locali del comproprietario e servono all’uso o al godimento dei medesimi.

Art. 712l C. Amministrazione e uso / III. Esercizio dei diritti civili

III. Esercizio dei diritti civili

1 La comunione acquista in proprio nome i beni risultanti dalla sua amministrazione, in particolare i contributi dei comproprietari e le disponibilità che ne risultano, come il fondo di rinnovazione.

2 Essa può, in proprio nome, stare in giudizio come attrice o convenuta, escutere o essere escussa.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).

Art. 712m D. Ordinamento / I. Assemblea dei comproprietari / 1. Competenza e stato giuridico

D. Ordinamento

I. Assemblea dei comproprietari

1. Competenza e stato giuridico

1 Oltre le competenze menzionate in altre disposizioni, spetta all’assemblea dei comproprietari:

1.
decidere in tutti gli affari amministrativi che non competono all’amministratore;
2.
nominare l’amministratore e vegliare sulla sua opera;
3.
nominare un comitato o un delegato con compiti amministrativi, come quelli di consigliare l’amministratore, esaminarne la gestione e fare rapporto e proposte all’assemblea a questo riguardo;
4.
approvare ogni anno il preventivo, il resoconto e la ripartizione delle spese fra i comproprietari;
5.
decidere la costituzione di un fondo di rinnovazione per i lavori di manutenzione e di rinnovazione;
6.
assicurare l’edificio contro il fuoco ed altri pericoli, stipulare le assicurazioni usuali di responsabilità civile e obbligare il comproprietario che abbia fatto delle spese straordinarie per sistemare i suoi locali, a pagare una parte del premio aggiuntivo, se non ha stipulato per suo conto un’assicurazione completiva.

2 Ove la legge non disponga altrimenti, all’assemblea e al comitato sono applicabili le norme sull’associazione concernenti gli organi e la contestazione delle risoluzioni sociali.

Art. 712n D. Ordinamento / I. Assemblea dei comproprietari / 2. Convocazione e presidenza

2. Convocazione e presidenza

1 L’assemblea dei comproprietari è convocata e presieduta dall’amministratore, salvo che essa non disponga altrimenti.

2 Delle deliberazioni è steso verbale, custodito dall’amministratore o dal comproprietario che presiede all’assemblea.

Art. 712o D. Ordinamento / I. Assemblea dei comproprietari / 3. Diritto di voto

3. Diritto di voto

1 Ove un piano o una porzione di piano appartenga in comune a più persone, esse hanno diritto collettivamente a un voto, reso da un loro rappresentante.

2 Il proprietario e l’usufruttuario di un piano o d’una porzione di piano si accordano circa l’esercizio del diritto di voto; altrimenti il voto spetta in tutte le questioni amministrative all’usufruttuario, salvo per i lavori di costruzione meramente utili oppure diretti ad abbellire o a rendere più comoda la cosa.

Art. 712p D. Ordinamento / I. Assemblea dei comproprietari / 4. Costituzione dell’assemblea

4. Costituzione dell’assemblea

1 L’assemblea dei comproprietari è legalmente costituita con l’intervento o la rappresentanza della metà degli stessi, ma di almeno due, che rappresentino in pari tempo almeno la metà del valore della cosa.

2 Se l’assemblea non è in numero, è convocata una seconda, che può essere tenuta almeno dieci giorni dopo la prima.

3 L’assemblea di seconda convocazione delibera validamente con l’intervento o la rappresentanza di un terzo di tutti i comproprietari, ma di almeno due.

Art. 712q D. Ordinamento / II. Amministratore / 1. Nomina

II. Amministratore

1. Nomina

1 Se l’assemblea dei comproprietari non s’accorda sulla nomina dell’amministratore, ciascuno di essi può chiedere al giudice di nominarlo.

2 Il medesimo diritto spetta a chiunque abbia un interesse legittimo, come il creditore pignoratizio e l’assicuratore.

Art. 712r D. Ordinamento / II. Amministratore / 2. Revoca

2. Revoca

1 L’assemblea dei comproprietari può revocare in ogni tempo l’amministratore, riservata l’azione di risarcimento.

2 Se, nonostante un grave motivo, l’assemblea nega di revocare l’amministratore, ogni comproprietario può, entro un mese, domandarne la revoca al giudice.

3 L’amministratore nominato dal giudice non può, senza il consenso di questo, essere revocato prima del decorso del tempo fissato al suo ufficio.

Art. 712s D. Ordinamento / II. Amministratore / 3. Competenze / a. Esecuzione delle disposizioni e decisioni su l’amministrazione e l’uso

3. Competenze

a. Esecuzione delle disposizioni e decisioni su l’amministrazione e l’uso

1 L’amministratore compie tutti gli atti dell’amministrazione comune in conformità della legge, del regolamento e delle decisioni dell’assemblea dei comproprietari, e prende direttamente tutte le misure urgenti a impedire o a rimuovere un danno.

2 Egli ripartisce tra i comproprietari gli oneri e le spese comuni, ne comunica loro il conto, riscuote i loro contributi, amministra ed eroga il danaro disponibile agli scopi cui è destinato.

3 Egli veglia affinché nell’esercizio dei diritti esclusivi e nell’uso delle parti e degli impianti comuni del fondo e dell’edificio siano osservati la legge, il regolamento della comunione e quello della casa.

Art. 712t D. Ordinamento / II. Amministratore / 3. Competenze / b. Rappresentanza verso i terzi

b. Rappresentanza verso i terzi

1 L’amministratore rappresenta la comunione e i comproprietari in tutti gli affari dell’amministrazione comune che gli competono per legge.

2 Egli non può stare in un giudizio civile come attore o come convenuto senz’esserne precedentemente autorizzato dall’assemblea dei comproprietari, salvo si tratti di procedura sommaria; nei casi urgenti, l’autorizzazione può essere chiesta ulteriormente.

3 Le dichiarazioni, le ingiunzioni, le sentenze e le decisioni destinate collettivamente ai comproprietari possono essere comunicate validamente all’amministratore nel suo domicilio o nel luogo dove trovasi la cosa.


  Titolo ventesimo: Della proprietà mobiliare

Art. 713 A. Oggetto

A. Oggetto

Sono oggetto della proprietà mobiliare le cose corporee che per loro natura sono mobili, nonché le forze naturali in quanto sieno suscettibili di diritti e non sieno considerate come fondi.

Art. 714 B. Modi di acquisto / I. Trasmissione / 1. Trasferimento del possesso

B. Modi di acquisto

I. Trasmissione

1. Trasferimento del possesso

1 Per la trasmissione della proprietà mobiliare è necessario il trasferimento del possesso all’acquirente.

2 Chi riceve in buona fede una cosa mobile in proprietà ne diventa proprietario anche se l’alienante non aveva diritto di trasmettere la proprietà, purché il possesso della cosa sia garantito all’acquirente secondo le regole del possesso.

Art. 715 B. Modi di acquisto / I. Trasmissione / 2. Riserva della proprietà / a. In genere

2. Riserva della proprietà

a. In genere

1 Perché la riserva della proprietà sopra una cosa mobile consegnata all’acquirente sia valida, occorre che sia iscritta in un pubblico registro tenuto dall’ufficiale delle esecuzioni nel luogo del costui attuale domicilio.

2 La riserva della proprietà non è ammessa nel commercio del bestiame.

Art. 716 B. Modi di acquisto / I. Trasmissione / 2. Riserva della proprietà / b. Vendita a pagamenti rateali

b. Vendita a pagamenti rateali

Il proprietario non può chiedere la restituzione degli oggetti consegnati sotto riserva della proprietà se non a condizione di restituire all’acquirente gli acconti già versati, sotto deduzione di una equa mercede per il nolo e di un’indennità per il deprezzamento.

Art. 717 B. Modi di acquisto / I. Trasmissione / 3. Acquisto senza il possesso

3. Acquisto senza il possesso

1 Quando in forza di uno speciale rapporto giuridico, la cosa sia rimasta presso l’alienante, il trasferimento della proprietà è inefficace di fronte ai terzi, se fu fatto nell’intenzione di pregiudicarli, o di eludere le disposizioni relative al pegno manuale.

2 Il giudice decide in proposito con libero apprezzamento.

Art. 718 B. Modi di acquisto / II. Occupazione / 1. Cose senza padrone

II. Occupazione

1. Cose senza padrone

Le cose senza padrone diventano proprietà di colui che se ne impossessa con l’intenzione di divenirne proprietario.

Art. 719 B. Modi di acquisto / II. Occupazione / 2. Animali sfuggiti

2. Animali sfuggiti

1 Gli animali presi e ritenuti diventano senza padrone se ricuperano la libertà, ed il loro padrone non li insegue immediatamente e senza interruzione e non cerca di riprenderli.

2 Gli animali addomesticati diventano senza padrone quando siano ridiventati selvatici e non ritornino più dal proprietario.

3 Gli sciami d’api non diventano senza padrone per il solo fatto che si trasportino sul fondo altrui.

Art. 720 B. Modi di acquisto / III. Oggetti trovati / 1. Pubblicazione ed indagine / a. In generale

III. Oggetti trovati

1. Pubblicazione ed indagine

a.1 In generale

1 Chi trova una cosa smarrita è tenuto a darne avviso al proprietario e, non conoscendolo, a darne avviso alla polizia od a fare egli stesso le indagini e le pubblicazioni indicate dalle circostanze.

2 L’avviso alla polizia è obbligatorio se il valore della cosa è manifestamente superiore ai dieci franchi.

3 Chi ritrova una cosa in una casa abitata o in uno stabilimento destinato al servizio od al trasporto pubblico, deve consegnarla al padrone di casa, al locatario od alle persone incaricate della sorveglianza.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207).

Art. 720a1B. Modi di acquisto / III. Oggetti trovati / 1. Pubblicazione ed indagine / b. Nel caso di animali

b. Nel caso di animali

1 Chi trova un animale smarrito è tenuto, fatto salvo l’articolo 720 capoverso 3, a darne avviso al proprietario e, non conoscendolo, a darne avviso agli oggetti smarriti.

2 I Cantoni designano l’ufficio a cui rivolgere l’avviso.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207). Il cpv. 2 entra in vigore il 1° apr. 2004.

Art. 721 B. Modi di acquisto / III. Oggetti trovati / 2. Custodia ed incanto pubblico

2. Custodia ed incanto pubblico

1 Le cose trovate devono essere debitamente custodite.

2 Esse possono essere vendute agli incanti pubblici, previa pubblicazione, col permesso dell’autorità competente quando richiedano spese di conservazione o sieno esposte a rapido deterioramento, o da più di un anno sieno custodite dalla polizia o da uno stabilimento pubblico.

3 Il ricavo della vendita sostituisce la cosa.

Art. 722 B. Modi di acquisto / III. Oggetti trovati / 3. Acquisto della proprietà, riconsegna

3. Acquisto della proprietà, riconsegna

1 Chi ha trovato la cosa ed ha adempiuto agli obblighi che gli incombevano, l’acquista in sua proprietà, qualora non se ne scopra il proprietario, entro cinque anni dalla pubblicazione o dall’avviso dato.

1bis Per gli animali domestici non tenuti a scopo patrimoniale o lucrativo, il termine è di due mesi.1

1ter Qualora la persona che trova l’animale affida quest’ultimo a un rifugio con il proposito di rinunciare definitivamente al suo possesso, il rifugio può, trascorsi due mesi dal momento in cui gli è stato affidato l’animale, disporne liberamente.2

2 Se la cosa può essere riconsegnata, egli ha diritto al rimborso di tutte le spese e ad un’equa mercede.

3 Se una cosa fu trovata in una casa abitata o in uno stabilimento destinato al servizio od al trasporto pubblico, il padrone di casa, il locatario o lo stabilimento è considerato come ritrovatore, ma non ha diritto alla mercede.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207).
2 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207).

Art. 723 B. Modi di acquisto / III. Oggetti trovati / 4. Tesoro

4. Tesoro

1 Si considera tesoro qualsiasi oggetto di pregio del quale si debba, secondo le circostanze, ritenere con certezza che sia sotterra o nascosto da molto tempo e che più non abbia padrone.

2 Il tesoro appartiene al proprietario della cosa mobile od immobile nella quale fu trovato, riservate le disposizioni sugli oggetti di pregio scientifico.

3 Lo scopritore ha il diritto ad un equo compenso che però non deve eccedere la metà del valore del tesoro.

Art. 724 B. Modi di acquisto / III. Oggetti trovati / 5. Oggetti di pregio scientifico

5. Oggetti di pregio scientifico

1 Le rarità naturali e le antichità senza padrone e di pregio scientifico sono proprietà del Cantone nel cui territorio sono state scoperte.1

1bis Tali cose non possono essere alienate senza il consenso delle autorità cantonali competenti. Esse non possono essere acquistate né per usucapione né in buona fede. Il diritto alla riconsegna è imprescrittibile.2

2 Il proprietario nel cui fondo sono scoperti è tenuto a permetterne gli scavi, mediante il risarcimento dei danni che gliene derivano.

3 Lo scopritore, e trattandosi di tesoro anche il proprietario, hanno diritto ad un equo compenso, che non può oltrepassare, nel suo complesso, il valore degli oggetti.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’art. 32 n. 1 della L del 20 giu. 2003 sul trasferimento dei beni culturali, in vigore dal 1° giu. 2005 (RU 2005 1869; FF 2002 457).
2 Introdotto dall’art. 32 n. 1 della L del 20 giu. 2003 sul trasferimento dei beni culturali, in vigore dal 1° giu. 2005 (RU 2005 1869; FF 2002 457).

Art. 725 B. Modi di acquisto / IV. Cose trasportate e animali sfuggiti

IV. Cose trasportate e animali sfuggiti

1 Il detentore di cose mobili trasportate nell’altrui fondo dall’acqua, dal vento, dalle valanghe, o da altre forze naturali od avvenimenti fortuiti, e il detentore di animali sfuggiti al loro padrone hanno i diritti e gli obblighi di chi li avesse ritrovati.

2 Lo sciame d’api immigrato in un altrui alveare popolato appartiene al proprietario di questo, senz’obbligo d’indennità.

Art. 726 B. Modi di acquisto / V. Specificazione

V. Specificazione

1 Se alcuno ha lavorato o trasformato una cosa altrui, la nuova cosa appartiene all’artefice ove il lavoro valga più della materia; al padrone della materia, nel caso opposto.

2 Se l’artefice è in mala fede, il giudice può aggiudicare la nuova cosa al padrone della materia, anche se il lavoro valga di più.

3 Sono riservate le disposizioni sul risarcimento dei danni e sull’arricchimento.

Art. 727 B. Modi di acquisto / VI. Unione e mescolanza

VI. Unione e mescolanza

1 Quando due o più cose mobili di diversi proprietari sieno siffattamente mescolate od incorporate da non poter più essere separate senza notevole deterioramento, o senza un lavoro od una spesa sproporzionati, gli interessati diventano comproprietari della nuova cosa, in proporzione del valore che le sue singole parti avevano al momento della loro unione o mescolanza.

2 Quando una cosa mobile sia stata siffattamente mescolata od unita con un’altra da sembrare una parte accessoria di questa, il tutto appartiene al proprietario della parte principale.

3 Sono riservate le disposizioni sul risarcimento del danno e sull’arricchimento.

Art. 728 B. Modi di acquisto / VII. Prescrizione acquisitiva

VII. Prescrizione acquisitiva

1 Chi per cinque anni possiede un’altrui cosa mobile, in buona fede, pacificamente, senza interruzione ed a titolo di proprietà, ne diventa proprietario per prescrizione acquisitiva.

1bis Per gli animali domestici non tenuti a scopo patrimoniale o lucrativo, il termine è di due mesi.1

1ter Fatte salve le eccezioni stabilite dalla legge, il termine di prescrizione acquisitiva per beni culturali ai sensi dell’articolo 2 capoverso 1 della legge del 20 giugno 20032 sul trasferimento dei beni culturali è di 30 anni.3

2 La perdita involontaria del possesso non interrompe questa prescrizione, se il possessore ricupera la cosa nel termine di un anno o mediante azione proposta nel medesimo termine.

3 Per il computo dei termini, l’interruzione e la sospensione della prescrizione acquisitiva valgono le norme circa la prescrizione dei crediti.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207).
2 RS 444.1
3 Introdotto dall’art. 32 n. 1 della L del 20 giu. 2003 sul trasferimento dei beni culturali, in vigore dal 1° giu. 2005 (RU 2005 1869; FF 2002 457).

Art. 729 C. Perdita della proprietà mobiliare

C. Perdita della proprietà mobiliare

La proprietà mobiliare non si estingue con la perdita del possesso, finché il proprietario non abbia rinunciato al suo diritto o la proprietà della cosa non sia stata acquistata da un altro.


  Parte seconda: Dei diritti reali limitati

  Titolo ventesimoprimo: Delle servitù e degli oneri fondiari

  Capo primo: Delle servitù prediali

Art. 730 A. Oggetto

A. Oggetto

1 I fondi possono essere gravati da servitù l’uno a favore dell’altro nel senso che il proprietario del fondo serviente debba sopportare determinati atti del proprietario del fondo dominante, od astenersi a favore del medesimo dall’usare di qualche diritto inerente alla sua proprietà immobiliare.

2 Un obbligo di fare può essere connesso a una servitù prediale soltanto a titolo accessorio. Vincola l’acquirente del fondo dominante o del fondo serviente soltanto se risulta dall’iscrizione nel registro fondiario.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 731 B. Costituzione e cessazione / I. Costituzione / 1. Iscrizione

B. Costituzione e cessazione

I. Costituzione

1. Iscrizione

1 Per la costituzione di una servitù prediale è necessaria l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

2 Per l’acquisto e l’iscrizione valgono, salvo disposizione contraria, le norme relative alla proprietà.

3 L’acquisto della servitù mediante prescrizione è possibile solo a riguardo di fondi la cui proprietà può essere essa medesima acquistata con la prescrizione.

Art. 7321B. Costituzione e cessazione / I. Costituzione / 2. Negozio giuridico

2. Negozio giuridico

1 Il negozio giuridico di costituzione di una servitù prediale richiede per la sua validità l’atto pubblico.

2 Qualora l’esercizio della servitù sia limitato a una parte del fondo, il luogo d’esercizio dev’essere rappresentato graficamente in un estratto del piano per il registro fondiario se non è definito con sufficiente precisione nell’attestazione del titolo giuridico.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 733 B. Costituzione e cessazione / I. Costituzione / 3. Servitù sul proprio fondo

3. Servitù sul proprio fondo

Il proprietario può costituire sopra un suo fondo una servitù a favore di un altro suo fondo.

Art. 734 B. Costituzione e cessazione / II. Estinzione / 1. In genere

II. Estinzione

1. In genere

Ogni servitù si estingue con la cancellazione dell’iscrizione, o con la perdita totale del fondo serviente o del fondo dominante.

Art. 735 B. Costituzione e cessazione / II. Estinzione / 2. Riunione dei fondi

2. Riunione dei fondi

1 L’utente della servitù che diventa proprietario del fondo serviente può ottenerne la cancellazione.

2 Finché la cancellazione non sia fatta, la servitù sussiste come diritto reale.

Art. 736 B. Costituzione e cessazione / II. Estinzione / 3. Per sentenza

3. Per sentenza

1 Quando una servitù abbia perduto ogni interesse per il fondo dominante, il proprietario del fondo serviente ne può chiedere la cancellazione.

2 Se pel fondo dominante vi è ancora un interesse, ma di lieve importanza in confronto alla gravità dell’onere, la servitù può essere riscattata o ridotta mediante indennità.

Art. 737 C. Effetti / I. Estensione / 1. In genere

C. Effetti

I. Estensione

1. In genere

1 L’avente diritto ad una servitù può fare tutto ciò che è necessario per la sua conservazione e per il suo esercizio.

2 È però tenuto ad usare del suo diritto con ogni possibile riguardo.

3 Il proprietario del fondo serviente non può intraprendere nulla che possa impedire o rendere più difficile l’esercizio della servitù.

Art. 738 C. Effetti / I. Estensione / 2. Secondo l’iscrizione

2. Secondo l’iscrizione

1 L’iscrizione fa fede circa l’estensione della servitù in quanto determini chiaramente i diritti e le obbligazioni che ne derivano.

2 Entro i limiti dell’iscrizione, l’estensione della servitù può risultare dal titolo di acquisto o dal modo con cui fu esercitata per molto tempo, pacificamente ed in buona fede.

Art. 739 C. Effetti / I. Estensione / 3. Nuovi bisogni del fondo

3. Nuovi bisogni del fondo

I nuovi bisogni del fondo dominante non legittimano un aggravamento della servitù.

Art. 740 C. Effetti / I. Estensione / 4. Diritto cantonale ed usi locali

4. Diritto cantonale ed usi locali

L’estensione dei diritti di passaggio, quali i sentieri nei campi e nei boschi aperti, le vie carreggiabili, i transiti in stagione morta e per condur legna, non che dei diritti di pascolo, di far legna, di abbeveratoio, d’irrigazione e simili, è regolata, in quanto non esistano speciali disposizioni per i singoli casi, dal diritto cantonale e dall’uso locale.

Art. 740a1C. Effetti / I. Estensione / 5. Più aventi diritto

5. Più aventi diritto

1 Se più aventi diritto sono partecipi di un’installazione comune in virtù della medesima servitù, sono applicabili per analogia le norme concernenti la comproprietà, salvo diversa convenzione.

2 Il diritto di uscire dalla comunione rinunciando alla servitù può essere escluso per 30 anni al massimo mediante una convenzione stipulata nella forma prescritta per il contratto di costituzione della servitù. Tale convenzione può essere annotata nel registro fondiario.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 741 C. Effetti / II. Manutenzione

II. Manutenzione

1 Se per l’esercizio della servitù sono necessarie delle opere, spetta all’avente diritto il mantenerle.

2 Se le opere servono anche gli interessi del fondo serviente, la manutenzione è fatta in comune, in proporzione dei rispettivi vantaggi. Una diversa convenzione vincola l’acquirente del fondo dominante o del fondo serviente se risulta dai documenti giustificativi del registro fondiario.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 742 C. Effetti / II. Manutenzione / III. Spostamento della servitù

III. Spostamento della servitù1

1 Se l’uso della servitù richiede solo una parte del fondo, il proprietario che giustifica un interesse può chiederne il trasporto a sue spese sopra un’altra parte non meno adatta per il fondo dominante.

2 Ciò può avvenire anche se il posto della servitù è determinato nel registro fondiario.

3 ...2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Abrogato dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 7431C. Effetti / IV. Divisione del fondo

IV. Divisione del fondo

1 Se il fondo dominante o serviente è diviso, la servitù sussiste su tutte le sue parti.

2 Se risulta dai documenti giustificativi o dalle circostanze che l’esercizio della servitù è limitato a talune parti, la servitù è cancellata relativamente alle parti non interessate.

3 La procedura di aggiornamento è retta dalle disposizioni concernenti la cancellazione e la modifica delle iscrizioni nel registro fondiario.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 7441

1 Abrogato dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).


  Capo secondo: Dell’usufrutto e delle altre servitù

Art. 745 A. Usufrutto / I. Oggetto

A. Usufrutto

I. Oggetto

1 L’usufrutto può essere costituito sopra beni mobili, fondi, diritti o un’intera sostanza.

2 Esso attribuisce all’usufruttuario il pieno godimento della cosa, salvo contraria disposizione.

3 L’esercizio dell’usufrutto su un fondo può anche essere limitato a una determinata parte di un edificio o del fondo.1


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 giu. 2003, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2004 (RU 2003 4121; FF 2002 4208).

Art. 746 A. Usufrutto / II. Costituzione / 1. In genere

II. Costituzione

1. In genere

1 Per la costituzione dell’usufrutto è necessaria la tradizione all’usufruttuario se si tratta di mobili o crediti, e l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario se si tratta di fondi.

2 Per l’acquisto dell’usufrutto su cose mobili e fondi e per l’iscrizione valgono, salvo disposizione contraria, le prescrizioni circa la proprietà.

Art. 7471A. Usufrutto / II. Costituzione / 2.

2.


1 Abrogato dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 748 A. Usufrutto / III. Cessazione / 1. Cause

III. Cessazione

1. Cause

1 L’usufrutto si estingue con la perdita totale della cosa ed inoltre, trattandosi di fondi, con la cancellazione dell’iscrizione, se questa era necessaria a costituirlo.

2 Le altre cause di cessazione, come la decorrenza del termine o la rinuncia o la morte dell’usufruttuario, trattandosi di fondi, non danno al proprietario che l’azione per la cancellazione dal registro.

3 L’usufrutto legale cessa con la cessazione della sua causa.

Art. 749 A. Usufrutto / III. Cessazione / 2. Durata

2. Durata

1 L’usufrutto cessa con la morte dell’usufruttuario e, per le persone giuridiche, col loro scioglimento.

2 Per quest’ultime non può in nessun caso durare più di cento anni.

Art. 750 A. Usufrutto / III. Cessazione / 3. Usufrutto sulla cosa sostituita

3. Usufrutto sulla cosa sostituita

1 Il proprietario non è tenuto a ristabilire la cosa perita.

2 Se la ristabilisce, rinasce l’usufrutto.

3 Quando in luogo della cosa perita ne sia fornita un’altra, come nei casi di espropriazione o d’assicurazione, l’usufrutto continua sulla cosa sostituita.

Art. 751 A. Usufrutto / III. Cessazione / 4. Restituzione / a. Obbligo

4. Restituzione

a. Obbligo

Alla fine dell’usufrutto, il possessore ne deve restituire l’oggetto al proprietario.

Art. 752 A. Usufrutto / III. Cessazione / 4. Restituzione / b. Responsabilità

b. Responsabilità

1 L’usufruttuario risponde per la perdita e la deteriorazione della cosa, in quanto non provi che il danno si è verificato senza sua colpa.

2 Egli deve sostituire le cose mancanti che in virtù dell’usufrutto non aveva diritto di consumare.

3 Non è tenuto a risarcire il minor valore degli oggetti deteriorati dall’uso ordinario.

Art. 753 A. Usufrutto / III. Cessazione / 4. Restituzione / c. Spese

c. Spese

1 L’usufruttuario che avesse fatto spese o migliorie a cui non era tenuto, può chiederne il risarcimento all’atto della restituzione, come un gestore d’affari senza mandato.

2 Quando il proprietario non gli voglia rimborsare il valore degli impianti ed apparecchi da lui fatti, egli li può togliere, ma è tenuto a rimettere le cose nel pristino stato.

Art. 754 A. Usufrutto / III. Cessazione / 5. Prescrizione dell’azione di risarcimento

5. Prescrizione dell’azione di risarcimento

Le azioni di risarcimento del proprietario per alterazioni o deprezzamento della cosa, come quelle dell’usufruttuario per rimborso di spese o per rimozione di apparecchi ed impianti, si prescrivono in un anno dalla restituzione della cosa.

Art. 755 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 1. Diritti dell’usufruttuario / a. In genere

IV. Effetti

1. Diritti dell’usufruttuario

a. In genere

1 L’usufruttuario ha diritto al possesso, all’uso ed al godimento della cosa.

2 Egli ne cura l’amministrazione.

3 Nell’esercizio di questi diritti egli deve attenersi alle norme di una diligente amministrazione.

Art. 756 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 1. Diritti dell’usufruttuario / b. Godimento dei frutti naturali

b. Godimento dei frutti naturali

1 I frutti naturali maturati durante l’usufrutto appartengono all’usufruttuario.

2 Chi ha fatto i lavori di coltivazione ha diritto di farsi equamente rimborsare le spese da colui che percepisce i frutti maturi, non però oltre il valore di questi.

3 Le parti costitutive, che non sono né frutti né prodotti, rimangono al proprietario della cosa.

Art. 757 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 1. Diritti dell’usufruttuario / c. Interessi

c. Interessi

Gli interessi dei capitali usufruiti e le altre prestazioni periodiche appartengono all’usufruttuario dal giorno in cui comincia a quello in cui finisce il suo diritto, anche se scadono più tardi.

Art. 758 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 1. Diritti dell’usufruttuario / d. Cedibilità

d. Cedibilità

1 L’usufruttuario il cui diritto non abbia un carattere strettamente personale può cederne l’esercizio ad un terzo.

2 Il proprietario può far valere i suoi diritti direttamente verso il terzo.

Art. 759 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 2. Diritti del proprietario / a. Sorveglianza

2. Diritti del proprietario

a. Sorveglianza

Il proprietario può fare opposizione ad ogni uso illecito o non conforme alla natura della cosa.

Art. 760 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 2. Diritti del proprietario / b. Garanzie

b. Garanzie

1 Il proprietario può chiedere garanzia all’usufruttuario, quando provi che i suoi diritti sono esposti a pericolo.

2 Indipendentemente da questa prova, e già prima della consegna della cosa, può chiedere garanzia quando gli oggetti dell’usufrutto sieno cartevalori o cose che si consumano coll’uso.

3 A garantire le cartevalori basta che sieno collocate in deposito.

Art. 761 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 2. Diritti del proprietario / c. Garanzia in caso di donazione e di usufrutto legale

c. Garanzia in caso di donazione e di usufrutto legale

1 La garanzia non può essere chiesta a quegli che donando l’oggetto se ne è riservato l’usufrutto.

2 In caso di usufrutto legale, il diritto alla garanzia è regolato dalle speciali disposizioni del rapporto giuridico di cui si tratta.

Art. 762 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 2. Diritti del proprietario / d. Conseguenze della omissione di garanzia

d. Conseguenze della omissione di garanzia

Quando l’usufruttuario non presti, entro un congruo termine assegnatogli, la garanzia per la cosa usufruita, o non desiste dall’uso illecito della cosa, malgrado l’opposizione del proprietario, il giudice gliene toglie il possesso ed ordina la nomina di un curatore fino a nuova disposizione.

Art. 763 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 3. Obbligo dell’inventario

3. Obbligo dell’inventario

Tanto il proprietario quanto l’usufruttuario hanno diritto di chiedere in ogni tempo la compilazione, a spese comuni, di un pubblico inventario degli oggetti in usufrutto.

Art. 764 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 4. Oneri dell’usufrutto / a. Conservazione della cosa

4. Oneri dell’usufrutto

a. Conservazione della cosa

1 L’usufruttuario deve conservare la cosa nel suo stato e fare direttamente le migliorie e le rinnovazioni richieste dalla manutenzione ordinaria.

2 Essendo necessari dei lavori o provvedimenti più importanti per la conservazione della cosa, l’usufruttuario deve avvertirne il proprietario e permettergli che li intraprenda.

3 Se questo non provvede, l’usufruttuario può prendere le misure opportune a spese del proprietario.

Art. 765 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 4. Oneri dell’usufrutto / b. Manutenzione ed esercizio

b. Manutenzione ed esercizio

1 Le spese di manutenzione ordinaria e di amministrazione della cosa, gli interessi dei debiti che la gravano, le imposte e le tasse, sono sopportate dall’usufruttuario, per la durata del suo usufrutto.

2 Ove le imposte e le tasse sieno pagate dal proprietario, l’usufruttuario gliele deve risarcire nella stessa misura.

3 Gli altri aggravi sono a carico del proprietario, il quale ha però il diritto di adoperare a questo scopo dei beni dell’usufrutto, quando l’usufruttuario, così richiesto, non gli anticipi gratuitamente il denaro necessario.

Art. 766 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 4. Oneri dell’usufrutto / c. Interessi sopra una sostanza

c. Interessi sopra una sostanza

Quando l’usufrutto comprenda un’intera sostanza, l’usufruttuario deve sopportare gli interessi dei debiti, ma se le circostanze lo giustificano, può domandare di esserne liberato limitando il suo usufrutto all’eccedenza attiva dopo pagati i debiti.

Art. 767 A. Usufrutto / IV. Effetti / 4. Oneri dell’usufrutto / d. Assicurazione

d. Assicurazione

1 L’usufruttuario deve assicurare la cosa, a favore del proprietario, contro il fuoco ed altri pericoli, in quanto, secondo l’uso locale, l’assicurazione sia richiesta da un’amministrazione diligente.

2 I premi di assicurazione sono sopportati dall’usufruttuario per la durata del suo usufrutto, così in questo caso come quando riceve in usufrutto una cosa già assicurata.

Art. 768 A. Usufrutto / V. Casi particolari / 1. Fondi / a. Frutti

V. Casi particolari

1. Fondi

a. Frutti

1 L’usufruttuario di un fondo deve usarne in modo che non sia sfruttato oltre la misura ordinaria.

2 In quanto i frutti ottenuti oltrepassino questa misura, appartengono al proprietario.

Art. 769 A. Usufrutto / V. Casi particolari / 1. Fondi / b. Destinazione economica

b. Destinazione economica

1 L’usufruttuario non può introdurre nella destinazione economica del fondo alcun cambiamento che pregiudichi notevolmente il proprietario.

2 L’immobile non può essere trasformato né essenzialmente modificato.

3 L’apertura di cave di pietra o di marna, di torbiere e simili, è permessa solo dopo averne avvertito il proprietario ed alla condizione che non ne risulti essenzialmente alterata la destinazione economica del fondo.

Art. 770 A. Usufrutto / V. Casi particolari / 1. Fondi / c. Selve

c. Selve

1 L’usufruttuario di una selva può pretenderne il godimento nella misura corrispondente ad un sistema normale di coltivazione.

2 Così il proprietario come l’usufruttuario possono esigere che il godimento avvenga secondo un piano di utilizzazione conforme ai loro diritti.

3 Se per causa di bufera, neve, incendio, invasione di insetti, o per altra causa, si verifica un ricavo considerevolmente superiore all’ordinario, il godimento successivo sarà ridotto in modo da compensare a poco a poco il danno, oppure sarà adattato alle nuove circostanze il piano di utilizzazione; il ricavo straordinario è collocato ad interesse e serve a compensare la diminuzione del reddito.

Art. 771 A. Usufrutto / V. Casi particolari / 1. Fondi / d. Miniere e simili

d. Miniere e simili

Le disposizioni circa l’usufrutto delle selve sono applicabili per analogia agli usufrutti sopra le cose, la cui utilizzazione consiste nell’estrazione di parti costitutive del suolo, come le miniere.

Art. 772 A. Usufrutto / V. Casi particolari / 2. Cose che si consumano e cose stimate

2. Cose che si consumano e cose stimate

1 L’usufruttuario acquista, salvo contraria disposizione, la proprietà delle cose delle quali non si può far uso senza consumarle, ma è tenuto al risarcimento fino a concorrenza del valore che avevano al principio dell’usufrutto.

2 Se altre cose mobili gli vengono consegnate dietro stima, l’usufruttuario può disporne liberamente, salvo patto contrario, ma disponendone si assume l’obbligo di compensarne il valore.

3 Trattandosi di arredamenti agricoli, di mandre o greggi, fondi di negozio e simili, il compenso può consistere nel procurare oggetti della medesima specie e qualità.

Art. 773 A. Usufrutto / V. Casi particolari / 3. Crediti / a. Misura del godimento

3. Crediti

a. Misura del godimento

1 L’usufruttuario può incassare il reddito dei crediti usufruiti.

2 Le disdette al debitore e gli atti di disposizione circa le cartevalori devono seguire da parte dell’usufruttuario e del creditore; le disdette del debitore devono essere date ad entrambi.

3 Il creditore e l’usufruttuario hanno diritto di esigere l’uno dall’altro il consenso necessario alle misure suggerite da una diligente amministrazione, per il caso in cui un credito sia esposto a pericolo.

Art. 774 A. Usufrutto / V. Casi particolari / 3. Crediti / b. Rimborsi e reimpieghi

b. Rimborsi e reimpieghi

1 Quando il debitore non sia autorizzato a fare il pagamento al creditore o all’usufruttuario, egli deve farlo ai due congiuntamente o procedere al deposito.

2 L’oggetto della prestazione, specialmente il capitale restituito, soggiace all’usufrutto.

3 Tanto il creditore quanto l’usufruttuario hanno diritto ad un nuovo impiego sicuro e rimunerativo del capitale.

Art. 775 A. Usufrutto / V. Casi particolari / 3. Crediti / c. Cessione del credito all’usufruttuario

c. Cessione del credito all’usufruttuario

1 Entro tre mesi dall’apertura dell’usufrutto, l’usufruttuario ha diritto di domandare la cessione delle cartevalori e dei crediti usufruiti.

2 Avvenendo la loro cessione, egli diventa debitore verso il primo proprietario per il valore di questi titoli al momento della stessa e deve fornire cauzione per questo importo salvo che il proprietario non rinunci a chiederla.

3 Il trapasso della proprietà si verifica con la prestazione della garanzia se alla stessa non si è rinunciato.

Art. 776 B. Diritto di abitazione / I. In genere

B. Diritto di abitazione

I. In genere

1 Il diritto di abitazione consiste nella facoltà di abitare in un edificio o in una parte di esso.

2 Non si può cedere, né si trasmette per successione.

3 Soggiace alle disposizioni circa l’usufrutto, in quanto la legge non disponga altrimenti.

Art. 777 B. Diritto di abitazione / II. Diritto dell’usuario

II. Diritto dell’usuario

1 Il diritto di abitazione è generalmente commisurato ai bisogni personali dell’usuario.

2 Gli è però lecito, ove il diritto non sia espressamente limitato alla sua persona, di tener presso di sè i membri della propria famiglia e le persone con lui conviventi.

3 Quando il diritto d’abitazione sia limitato ad una parte di un edificio, l’usuario partecipa al godimento degli adattamenti fatti per l’uso comune.

Art. 778 B. Diritto di abitazione / III. Oneri

III. Oneri

1 L’usuario sopporta gli oneri della manutenzione ordinaria quando il suo diritto di abitazione sia esclusivo di ogni altro.

2 Se ha solo un diritto di coabitazione, le spese di manutenzione incombono al proprietario.

Art. 779 C. Diritto di superficie / I. Oggetto e intavolazione nel registro fondiario

C. Diritto di superficie

I. Oggetto e intavolazione nel registro fondiario1

1 Il proprietario può costituire una servitù a favore di alcuno, consistente nel diritto di fare e mantenere una costruzione sul suo fondo, sopra o sotto la superficie del suolo.

2 Questo diritto si può cedere e si trasmette per successione, salvo patto contrario.

3 Trattandosi di un diritto di costruzione per sé stante e permanente, può essere iscritto2 nel registro come fondo.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. 1 della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).
2 Nel testo tedesco «aufgenommen» e in quello francese «immatriculée», ossia «intavolato».

Art. 779a1C. Diritto di superficie / II. Negozio giuridico

II. Negozio giuridico

1 Il negozio giuridico di costituzione di un diritto di superficie richiede per la sua validità l’atto pubblico.

2 Se devono essere annotati nel registro fondiario, anche il canone del diritto di superficie e le eventuali altre disposizioni contrattuali richiedono per la loro validità l’atto pubblico.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 779b1C. Diritto di superficie / III. Effetti, estensione e annotazione

III. Effetti, estensione e annotazione2

1 Le disposizioni contrattuali sugli effetti e l’estensione del diritto di superficie, segnatamente circa la situazione, la struttura, il volume e la destinazione delle costruzioni, come anche l’uso delle superficie non costruite necessarie per l’esercizio del diritto sono vincolanti per qualsiasi acquirente del diritto di superficie e del fondo gravato.

2 Se le parti lo convengono, altre disposizioni contrattuali possono essere annotate nel registro fondiario.3


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
3 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 779c1C. Diritto di superficie / IV. Conseguenze della scadenza / 1. Riversione

IV. Conseguenze della scadenza

1. Riversione

All’estinzione del diritto di superficie, le costruzioni sono devolute al proprietario del fondo, di cui diventano parti costitutive.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).

Art. 779d1C. Diritto di superficie / IV. Conseguenze della scadenza / 2. Indennità

2. Indennità

1 Il proprietario del fondo deve al superficiario una equa indennità per le costruzioni devolute; tuttavia, l’indennità garantisce i creditori, in favore dei quali il diritto di superficie era costituito in pegno, per il saldo dei loro crediti e non può essere pagata al superficiario senza il loro consenso.

2 Se l’indennità non è pagata né garantita, il superficiario o un creditore, in favore del quale il diritto di superficie era costituito in pegno, può esigere che, in vece del diritto di superficie cancellato, un’ipoteca dello stesso grado sia iscritta in garanzia dell’indennità dovuta.

3 L’iscrizione deve essere effettuata entro tre mesi dalla estinzione del diritto di superficie.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).

Art. 779e1

1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537). Abrogato dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 779f1C. Diritto di superficie / V. Riversione anticipata / 1. Condizioni

V. Riversione anticipata

1. Condizioni

Se il superficiario eccede gravemente nel suo diritto reale o viola gli obblighi contrattuali, il proprietario del fondo può provocare la riversione anticipata, domandando il trasferimento a sè del diritto di superficie, con tutti i diritti e gli oneri.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).

Art. 779g1C. Diritto di superficie / V. Riversione anticipata / 2. Esercizio

2. Esercizio

1 Il diritto di riversione può essere esercitato solo se una equa indennità è pagata per le costruzioni devolute al proprietario del fondo; per il calcolo dell’indennità, la colpa del superficiario può essere considerata motivo di riduzione.

2 Il diritto di superficie è trasferito al proprietario del fondo solo quando l’indennità è pagata o garantita.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).

Art. 779h1C. Diritto di superficie / V. Riversione anticipata / 3. Altri casi di applicazione

3. Altri casi di applicazione

Le disposizioni sull’esercizio del diritto di riversione sono applicabili a ogni diritto, che il proprietario del fondo si è riservato per lo scioglimento anticipato o la restituzione del diritto di superficie in caso di violazione di obblighi da parte del superficiario.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).

Art. 779i1C. Diritto di superficie / VI. Garanzia per il canone / 1. Diritto alla costituzione di un’ipoteca

VI. Garanzia per il canone

1. Diritto alla costituzione di un’ipoteca

1 Il proprietario del fondo può domandare a qualunque superficiario di garantire il canone del diritto di superficie mediante una ipoteca dell’importo massimo di tre prestazioni annue costituita sul diritto di superficie intavolato nel registro fondiario.

2 Se il canone non consta di prestazioni annue uguali, l’ipoteca è iscritta per l’importo che, ripartendo uniformemente il canone, rappresenta tre prestazioni annue.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).

Art. 779k1C. Diritto di superficie / VI. Garanzia per il canone / 2. Iscrizione

2. Iscrizione

1 L’ipoteca può essere iscritta in ogni tempo durante l’esistenza del diritto di superficie e non è cancellata nel caso di realizzazione forzata.

2 Nel rimanente, le disposizioni sulla costituzione dell’ipoteca degli artigiani e imprenditori sono applicabili per analogia.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).

Art. 779l1C. Diritto di superficie / VII. Durata massima

VII. Durata massima

1 Il diritto di superficie, come diritto per sé stante, può essere costituito per cento anni al massimo.

2 Esso può, in ogni tempo, essere prolungato, nella forma prescritta per la costituzione, per una nuova durata di cento anni al massimo, ma qualsiasi obbligo assunto prima a tale scopo non è vincolante.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 19 mar. 1965, in vigore dal 1° lug. 1965 (RU 1965 443; FF 1963 537).

Art. 780 D. Diritti sulle sorgenti

D. Diritti sulle sorgenti

1 Il diritto ad una sorgente nel fondo altrui grava il fondo su cui nasce la sorgente con una servitù di presa e di condotta dell’acqua sorgiva.

2 Esso è cedibile e passa in eredità, salvo patto contrario.

3 Trattandosi di un diritto per sé stante e permanente, può essere iscritto1 nel registro come fondo.


1 Nel testo tedesco «aufgenommen» e in quello francese «immatriculée», ossia «intavolato».

Art. 781 E. Altre servitù

E. Altre servitù

1 Possono essere costituite delle servitù d’altra natura, a favore di qualsiasi persona o collettività, sopra determinati fondi, in quanto questi possano servire a determinati usi come all’esercizio del tiro a segno od al transito.

2 Salvo patto contrario, essi non sono cedibili e la loro estensione si determina secondo i bisogni ordinari degli aventi diritto.

3 Soggiacciono del resto alle disposizioni sulle servitù fondiarie.

Art. 781a1F. Misure giudiziarie

F. Misure giudiziarie

Ai titolari di una servitù iscritti nel registro fondiario si applicano per analogia le disposizioni concernenti le misure giudiziarie in caso di proprietario irreperibile o in caso di persona giuridica o altro soggetto giuridico privi degli organi prescritti.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).


  Capo terzo: Degli oneri fondiari

Art. 782 A. Oggetto

A. Oggetto

1 L’onere fondiario assoggetta il proprietario attuale di un fondo ad una prestazione a favore di un avente diritto, per la quale risponde col solo fondo.

2 Quale avente diritto può essere designato il proprietario di un altro fondo.

3 Fatti salvi gli oneri di diritto pubblico, l’onere fondiario può consistere solo in una prestazione dipendente dalla natura economica del fondo gravato o destinata ai bisogni economici del fondo a favore del quale è costituito.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 783 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / I. Costituzione / 1. Iscrizione e modi di acquisto

B. Costituzione ed estinzione

I. Costituzione

1. Iscrizione e modi di acquisto

1 Per la costituzione dell’onere fondiario è necessaria l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

2 Nell’iscrizione dev’essere indicato il valore dell’onere in una somma determinata in moneta svizzera, il quale valore, ove trattisi di prestazioni periodiche, corrisponderà, salvo patto contrario, a venti volte la prestazione di un anno.

3 Per l’acquisto e l’iscrizione valgono, salvo contraria disposizione, le norme sulla proprietà fondiaria.

Art. 7841B. Costituzione ed estinzione / I. Costituzione / 2. Oneri di diritto pubblico

2. Oneri di diritto pubblico

Le disposizioni concernenti le ipoteche legali di diritto cantonale sono applicabili per analogia alla costituzione degli oneri fondiari di diritto pubblico e ai loro effetti nei confronti dei terzi di buona fede.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 7851

1 Abrogato dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 786 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 1. In genere

II. Estinzione

1. In genere

1 L’onere fondiario si estingue con la cancellazione dell’iscrizione o con la perdita totale del fondo gravato.

2 La rinuncia, il riscatto e le altre cause di estinzione danno un’azione al proprietario del fondo gravato per chiedere dal debitore1 che l’iscrizione sia cancellata.


1 Nel testo tedesco «Berechtigte» e in quello francese «créancier», ossia «creditore».

Art. 787 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 2. Riscatto / a. Da parte del creditore

2. Riscatto

a. Da parte del creditore

1 Il creditore può chiedere il riscatto dell’onere fondiario a norma del contratto e inoltre:1

1.2
se il fondo gravato è diviso ed egli non accetta il trasferimento del debito sulle singole parti;
2.
se il proprietario diminuisce il valore del fondo e non offre altre garanzie in sostituzione;
3.
se il debitore è in arretrato delle prestazioni di tre anni.

2 Se chiede il riscatto a causa della divisione del fondo, il creditore deve disdire l’onere fondiario, con preavviso di un anno, entro un mese dal giorno in cui il trasferimento del debito è divenuto definitivo.3


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
3 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 788 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 2. Riscatto / b. Da parte del debitore

b. Da parte del debitore

1 Il debitore può chiedere il riscatto dell’onere fondiario a norma del contratto ed inoltre:

1.
se l’avente diritto non rispetta il contratto costitutivo dell’onere;
2.
dopo trent’anni dalla costituzione, anche se l’onere fu convenuto per una durata maggiore od in perpetuo.

2 Se il riscatto ha luogo dopo trent’anni, esso deve essere preceduto in ogni caso dalla disdetta di un anno.

3 Non può essere chiesto il riscatto quando l’onere fondiario sia collegato con una servitù prediale non riscattabile.

Art. 789 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 2. Riscatto / c. Prezzo del riscatto

c. Prezzo del riscatto

Il riscatto si fa per la somma iscritta nel registro come valore totale dell’onere fondiario, riservata la prova del minor valore effettivo.

Art. 790 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 3. Prescrizione

3. Prescrizione

1 Gli oneri fondiari non si prescrivono.

2 La singola prestazione soggiace alla prescrizione dal momento in cui diventa un debito personale dell’obbligato.

Art. 791 C. Effetti / I. Diritto del creditore

C. Effetti

I. Diritto del creditore

1 Il creditore dell’onere fondiario non ha un credito personale contro il debitore, ma solo il diritto di essere soddisfatto sul valore del fondo gravato.

2 Col decorso di tre anni dalla sua esigibilità, la singola prestazione diventa un debito personale, per il quale il fondo non è più vincolato.

Art. 792 C. Effetti / II. Obbligo del debitore

II. Obbligo del debitore

1 Se il fondo cambia di proprietario, l’acquirente diventa senz’altro debitore dell’onere.

2 Se il fondo è diviso, i proprietari delle singole parti diventano debitori dell’onere. Il debito è trasferito sulle singole parti secondo le disposizioni concernenti la divisione dei fondi gravati da ipoteca.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).


  Titolo ventesimosecondo: Del pegno immobiliare

  Capo primo: Disposizioni generali

Art. 793 A. Condizioni / I. Specie

A. Condizioni

I. Specie

1 Il pegno immobiliare può essere costituito come ipoteca o come cartella ipotecaria.1

2 Non è ammessa la costituzione di pegno immobiliare sotto altra forma.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 794 A. Condizioni / II. Forma / 1. Importo

II. Forma

1. Importo

1 Nella costituzione del pegno immobiliare dev’essere in ogni caso determinato l’importo del credito in moneta svizzera.

2 Se l’obbligazione è indeterminata, deve essere indicato l’importo massimo della garanzia immobiliare per tutte le pretese del creditore.

Art. 795 A. Condizioni / II. Forma / 2. Interesse

2. Interesse

1 Gli interessi possono essere fissati liberamente, riservate le disposizioni contro l’usura.

2 La legislazione cantonale può determinare il saggio massimo dell’interesse per i crediti garantiti da pegno immobiliare.

Art. 796 A. Condizioni / III. Fondo / 1. Condizioni per il pegno

III. Fondo

1. Condizioni per il pegno

1 Il pegno immobiliare può essere costituito solamente sopra fondi intavolati nel registro fondiario.

2 I Cantoni sono autorizzati a sottoporre a speciali disposizioni od anche a vietare la costituzione in pegno di fondi del demanio pubblico, di terreni patriziali o pascoli appartenenti a corporazioni, e degli inerenti diritti d’uso.

Art. 797 A. Condizioni / III. Fondo / 2. Designazione / a. Fondo unico

2. Designazione

a. Fondo unico

1 Nella costituzione del pegno immobiliare si deve specialmente indicare il fondo dato in pegno.

2 Le parti di un fondo non possono essere costituite in pegno prima che la divisione sia iscritta nel registro fondiario.

Art. 798 A. Condizioni / III. Fondo / 2. Designazione / b. Più fondi

b. Più fondi

1 Il pegno immobiliare può essere costituito per il medesimo credito sopra più fondi, se questi appartengono al medesimo proprietario o sono proprietà di più condebitori solidali.

2 In tutti gli altri casi, a costituire più fondi in pegno per il medesimo credito, occorre che ognuno di essi ne sia gravato per una determinata parte.

3 Salvo patto contrario, l’onere è ripartito in proporzione del valore di ogni fondo.

Art. 798a1A. Condizioni / III. Fondo / 3. Fondi agricoli

3. Fondi agricoli

La costituzione in pegno dei fondi agricoli è inoltre retta dalla legge federale del 4 ottobre 19912 sul diritto fondiario rurale.


1 Introdotto dall’art. 92 n. 1 della LF del 4 ott. 1991 sul diritto fondiario rurale, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 821).
2 RS 211.412.11

Art. 799 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / I. Costituzione / 1. Iscrizione

B. Costituzione ed estinzione

I. Costituzione

1. Iscrizione

1 Il pegno immobiliare nasce coll’iscrizione nel registro fondiario, riservate le eccezioni stabilite dalla legge.

2 Il negozio giuridico di costituzione del pegno immobiliare richiede per la sua validità l’atto pubblico.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 800 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / I. Costituzione / 2. Proprietà collettiva

2. Proprietà collettiva

1 Se il fondo è una comproprietà, ogni comproprietario può costituire in pegno la sua quota.

2 Se è una proprietà comune, non può essere costituito in pegno che nel suo complesso ed in nome di tutti i proprietari.

Art. 801 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione

II. Estinzione

1 Il pegno immobiliare si estingue colla cancellazione dell’iscrizione o con la perdita totale del fondo.

2 L’estinzione a seguito di espropriazione è regolata dalle relative leggi della Confederazione e dei Cantoni.

Art. 802 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / III. Pegni immobiliari in caso di raggruppamento / 1. Trasferimento dei diritti di pegno

III. Pegni immobiliari in caso di raggruppamento

1. Trasferimento dei diritti di pegno

1 In caso di raggruppamento di fondi eseguito col concorso o sotto la sorveglianza di pubbliche autorità, i diritti di pegno gravanti sui fondi ceduti devono essere trasferiti sopra i fondi dati in sostituzione e conservano il loro grado.

2 Quando un fondo sia assegnato in luogo di più fondi che erano gravati per crediti diversi, o che non erano tutti gravati, i diritti di pegno si trasferiscono su tutto il nuovo fondo, conservando possibilmente il loro grado originario.

Art. 803 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / III. Pegni immobiliari in caso di raggruppamento / 2. Disdetta del debitore

2. Disdetta del debitore

Il debitore può riscattare i diritti di pegno esistenti sopra i fondi compresi nel raggruppamento, all’atto della sua esecuzione, con un preavviso di tre mesi.

Art. 804 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / III. Pegni immobiliari in caso di raggruppamento / 3. Indennità

3. Indennità

1 Il danaro pagato come indennità per fondi gravati da pegno, è distribuito ai creditori pignoratizi secondo il loro grado, o proporzionalmente al totale dei loro crediti, se sono nel medesimo grado.

2 Se l’indennità supera la ventesima parte del credito pignoratizio o se il nuovo fondo non offre più una sufficiente garanzia, il denaro non può essere versato al debitore senza il consenso dei creditori.

Art. 805 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / I. Estensione della garanzia

C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare

I. Estensione della garanzia

1 Il pegno immobiliare grava sul fondo con tutte le sue parti costitutive e gli accessori.

2 Sono ritenuti accessori gli oggetti che nell’atto costitutivo del pegno e nel registro fondiario sono menzionati come tali, così le macchine od il mobilio di un albergo, finché non sia dimostrato che per disposizione di legge non può esser loro attribuita questa qualità.

3 Sono riservati i diritti dei terzi sugli accessori.

Art. 806 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / II. Pigioni e fitti

II. Pigioni e fitti

1 Se il fondo gravato è dato in locazione, il diritto del creditore si estende anche ai crediti per pigioni e fitti decorrenti dopo introdotta l’esecuzione per realizzazione del pegno o dopo la dichiarazione di fallimento del debitore, fino alla realizzazione.

2 Tale diritto è opponibile ai locatari dal momento in cui fu loro notificata l’esecuzione o fu pubblicato il fallimento.

3 Le convenzioni con cui il proprietario avesse disposto delle mercedi non ancora scadute ed i pignoramenti di queste da parte di altri creditori, non sono opponibili al creditore pignoratizio, che avesse promosso l’esecuzione in via di realizzazione del pegno, prima della scadenza delle mercedi stesse.

Art. 807 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / III. Prescrizione

III. Prescrizione

I crediti garantiti da pegno immobiliare iscritto non sono soggetti a prescrizione.

Art. 808 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / IV. Provvedimenti conservativi / 1. In caso di deprezzamento / a. Misure di difesa

IV. Provvedimenti conservativi

1. In caso di deprezzamento

a. Misure di difesa

1 Se il proprietario diminuisce il valore del pegno, il creditore può fargli interdire dal giudice ogni ulteriore atto pregiudicevole.

2 Il creditore può farsi autorizzare dal giudice a prendere egli medesimo le misure opportune e, se c’è pericolo nel ritardo, può agire anche senza autorizzazione.

3 Il creditore può pretendere dal proprietario il rimborso delle relative spese e ha per esse un diritto di pegno sul fondo. Tale diritto nasce senza iscrizione nel registro fondiario e prevale su ogni altro onere iscritto.1

4 Se supera l’importo di 1000 franchi e non è stato iscritto entro quattro mesi dalla fine delle misure, il diritto di pegno non è opponibile ai terzi che si riferiscono in buona fede al registro fondiario.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 809 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / IV. Provvedimenti conservativi / 1. In caso di deprezzamento / b. Garanzia, ripristino dello stato anteriore, pagamento di acconti

b. Garanzia, ripristino dello stato anteriore, pagamento di acconti

1 Verificatosi un deprezzamento del fondo, il creditore può esigere che il debitore fornisca garanzia per i suoi diritti o ristabilisca lo stato anteriore.

2 In caso di pericolo di deprezzamento, può chiedere garanzia.

3 Non ottemperando il debitore alla richiesta entro il termine fissato dal giudice, può pretendere il pagamento di una parte del credito sufficiente a garantirlo.

Art. 810 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / IV. Provvedimenti conservativi / 2. Deprezzamento senza colpa

2. Deprezzamento senza colpa

1 I deprezzamenti che si verificano senza colpa del proprietario conferiscono al creditore il diritto alle garanzie od al pagamento parziale, solo in quanto il proprietario sia risarcito del danno.

2 Tuttavia il creditore può prendere le misure opportune per togliere o evitare il deprezzamento. Per le spese incorse a tal fine ha un diritto di pegno sul fondo, senza responsabilità personale del proprietario. Tale diritto nasce senza iscrizione nel registro fondiario e prevale su ogni altro onere iscritto.1

3 Se supera l’importo di 1000 franchi e non è stato iscritto entro quattro mesi dalla fine delle misure, il diritto di pegno non è opponibile ai terzi che si riferiscono in buona fede al registro fondiario.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 811 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / IV. Provvedimenti conservativi / 3. Alienazione di parcelle

3. Alienazione di parcelle

Qualora venga alienata una parte del fondo di un valore inferiore al ventesimo del credito pignoratizio, il creditore non può rifiutare lo svincolo di questa parcella, purché gli sia rimborsata una parte proporzionata del credito od il rimanente del fondo gli offra una garanzia sufficiente.

Art. 812 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / V. Oneri ulteriori

V. Oneri ulteriori

1 La rinuncia del proprietario del fondo costituito in pegno al diritto di imporre altri oneri sul medesimo, è nulla.

2 Se dopo il pegno viene costituito sul fondo una servitù od un onere fondiario senza il consenso del creditore, il pegno ha la precedenza sul nuovo onere e questo è cancellato, tostoché risulti dalla procedura di realizzazione del pegno che esso è di pregiudizio al creditore.

3 In confronto di creditori posteriormente iscritti, l’avente diritto alla servitù od all’onere fondiario può però pretendere di essere soddisfatto in precedenza per il valore dell’onere o della servitù sul ricavo della realizzazione.

Art. 813 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / VI. Posto del pegno / 1. Effetti

VI. Posto del pegno

1. Effetti

1 La garanzia del pegno immobiliare è limitata al posto risultante dall’iscrizione.

2 Possono essere costituiti diritti di pegno immobiliare in secondo grado o in qualsiasi altro, purché nell’iscrizione sia riservata la precedenza per una determinata somma.

Art. 814 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / VI. Posto del pegno / 2. Relazioni tra i posti

2. Relazioni tra i posti

1 Se sul medesimo fondo sono costituiti diritti pignoratizi di diverso grado, il creditore di grado posteriore non ha diritto di subentrare nel posto anteriore rimasto vacante per cancellazione.

2 Il proprietario può costituire un nuovo diritto di pegno nello stesso grado di quello estinto.

3 Le convenzioni che danno ad un creditore il diritto di subentrare in un posto anteriore hanno efficacia di diritto reale solo in quanto siano annotate nel registro.

Art. 815 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / VI. Posto del pegno / 3. Posto vacante

3. Posto vacante

Qualora un diritto di pegno sia stato costituito in grado posteriore senza che ne esista uno anteriore, o quando un titolo di pegno anteriore non sia stato utilizzato, od un credito anteriore sia di una somma minore di quella iscritta, il ricavo del pegno, in caso di realizzazione, è attribuito ai creditori pignoratizi effettivi secondo il loro grado, senza riguardo ai posti rimasti vacanti.

Art. 816 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / VII. Realizzazione del pegno / 1. Modo

VII. Realizzazione del pegno

1. Modo

1 Il creditore ha il diritto di essere pagato sul ricavo del fondo nel caso che non sia altrimenti soddisfatto.

2 Il patto che in difetto di pagamento il pegno immobiliare debba decadere in proprietà del creditore, è nullo.

3 Se più fondi sono costituiti in pegno per il medesimo credito, l’esecuzione in via di realizzazione del pegno deve essere intrapresa simultaneamente su tutti, ma la realizzazione sarà compiuta solo nella misura ritenuta necessaria dall’ufficio delle esecuzioni.

Art. 817 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / VII. Realizzazione del pegno / 2. Riparto del ricavo

2. Riparto del ricavo

1 Il ricavo della vendita del fondo è ripartito fra i creditori secondo il loro grado.

2 I creditori del medesimo grado hanno fra di loro diritto ad un pagamento proporzionale.

Art. 818 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / VII. Realizzazione del pegno / 3. Estensione della garanzia

3. Estensione della garanzia

1 Il pegno immobiliare garantisce il creditore:

1.
per il credito capitale;
2.
per le spese dell’esecuzione e per gli interessi di mora;
3.1
per tre interessi annuali scaduti all’epoca della dichiarazione di fallimento o della domanda di realizzazione e per gli interessi decorsi dall’ultima scadenza; la cartella ipotecaria garantisce il creditore soltanto per gli interessi effettivamente dovuti.

2 L’interesse originariamente convenuto non può essere elevato oltre il cinque per cento a pregiudizio dei creditori pignoratizi posteriori.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 8191C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / VII. Realizzazione del pegno / 4. Garanzia per le spese di conservazione

4. Garanzia per le spese di conservazione

1 Se ha sostenuto spese necessarie per la conservazione del fondo costituito in pegno, segnatamente pagando i premi di assicurazione dovuti dal proprietario, il creditore pignoratizio ha per esse un diritto di pegno sul fondo. Tale diritto nasce senza iscrizione nel registro fondiario e prevale su ogni altro onere iscritto.

2 Se supera l’importo di 1 000 franchi e non è stato iscritto entro quattro mesi dal compimento dell’atto in questione, il diritto di pegno non è opponibile ai terzi che si riferiscono in buona fede al registro fondiario.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 820 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / VIII. Pegno per miglioramenti del suolo / 1. Grado

VIII. Pegno per miglioramenti del suolo

1. Grado

1 Quando il valore di un fondo rustico sia aumentato in conseguenza di miglioramenti compiuti col concorso di pubbliche autorità, il proprietario può far iscrivere per l’importo della sua parte di spese, a favore dei suoi creditori, un diritto di pegno prevalente ad ogni altro onere iscritto.

2 Se il miglioramento è stato compiuto senza sussidio dello Stato, il proprietario non può far iscrivere questo credito per una somma maggiore dei due terzi della detta spesa.

Art. 821 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / VIII. Pegno per miglioramenti del suolo / 2. Estinzione del credito e del pegno

2. Estinzione del credito e del pegno

1 In caso di miglioramento del suolo senza sussidio dello Stato, il debito pignoratizio dev’essere rimborsato in rate annuali non minori del cinque per cento della somma iscritta.

2 Il diritto di pegno si estingue, così per il credito come per ogni rata, col decorso di tre anni dalla scadenza e vi subentrano secondo il loro grado i creditori posteriori.

Art. 822 C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / IX. Indennità d’assicurazione

IX. Indennità d’assicurazione

1 Una indennità d’assicurazione scaduta non può essere pagata al proprietario del fondo assicurato senza il consenso di tutti i creditori garantiti sul fondo.

2 Quando però sia data garanzia sufficiente, la somma deve essere rimessa al proprietario per la ricostituzione del fondo soggetto al pegno.

3 Sono riservate del resto le prescrizioni dei Cantoni sopra l’assicurazione contro gli incendi.

Art. 8231C. Effetti del pegno immobiliare / X. Creditore irreperibile

X. Creditore irreperibile

Se un creditore pignoratizio non è identificabile o se il suo domicilio è sconosciuto, il giudice, ad istanza del debitore o di altri interessati, può ordinare le misure necessarie nei casi in cui la legge preveda l’intervento personale del creditore e occorra decidere d’urgenza.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).


  Capo secondo: Dell’ipoteca

Art. 824 A. Scopo e carattere

A. Scopo e carattere

1 Qualsiasi credito, presente, futuro od anche solamente possibile può essere garantito con ipoteca.

2 Non è necessario che il fondo ipotecato sia proprietà del debitore.

Art. 825 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / I. Costituzione

B. Costituzione ed estinzione

I. Costituzione

1 L’ipoteca è costituita in un posto di pegno determinato, anche pei crediti di somma variabile od indeterminata, e conserva il suo grado, secondo la iscrizione nel registro fondiario, malgrado qualsiasi variazione del credito.

2 Il creditore può ottenere, a richiesta, un estratto del registro fondiario relativo all’ipoteca iscritta, il quale però vale soltanto come mezzo di prova e non come cartavalore.

3 Questo mezzo di prova può essere sostituito da un certificato d’iscrizione sul contratto.

Art. 826 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 1. Diritto alla cancellazione

II. Estinzione

1. Diritto alla cancellazione

Se il credito è estinto, il proprietario del fondo ipotecato può esigere dal creditore che autorizzi la cancellazione dell’iscrizione.

Art. 827 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 2. Posizione del proprietario

2. Posizione del proprietario

1 Il proprietario del fondo, che non è personalmente debitore, può riscattare il pegno alle medesime condizioni alle quali il debitore è autorizzato all’estinzione del debito.

2 Pagando il creditore, il proprietario è surrogato nei di lui diritti.

Art. 828 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 3. Purgazione delle ipoteche / a. Condizioni e procedura

3. Purgazione delle ipoteche

a. Condizioni e procedura

1 Il diritto cantonale può autorizzare l’acquirente di un fondo non personalmente responsabile per i debiti che lo gravano, e finché non sia promossa un’esecuzione, a purgare il fondo stesso dalle ipoteche che ne sorpassano il valore, pagando ai creditori il prezzo d’acquisto, od in caso di acquisto a titolo gratuito, il valore ch’egli attribuisce al fondo.

2 Egli deve notificare per iscritto ai creditori la sua offerta col preavviso di sei mesi.

3 Il prezzo offerto è ripartito fra i creditori secondo il grado dei loro crediti.

Art. 829 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 3. Purgazione delle ipoteche / b. Incanti pubblici

b. Incanti pubblici

1 I creditori possono chiedere, entro un mese dalla notificazione dell’acquirente ed anticipandone le spese, che il fondo gravato sia venduto agli incanti pubblici, i quali avranno luogo, previa pubblicazione, entro un altro mese dalla richiesta.

2 Essendo raggiunto un prezzo maggiore di quello d’acquisto od offerto, la purgazione avviene in base a questo maggior prezzo.

3 Le spese degli incanti pubblici sono a carico dell’acquirente se fu raggiunto un prezzo maggiore; in caso diverso, a carico dei creditori istanti.

Art. 830 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 3. Purgazione delle ipoteche / c. Stima officiale

c. Stima officiale

In luogo degli incanti pubblici, il diritto cantonale può prescrivere una stima officiale il cui importo debba valere per la purgazione delle ipoteche.

Art. 831 B. Costituzione ed estinzione / II. Estinzione / 4. Disdetta

4. Disdetta

La disdetta del creditore per il pagamento non è efficace in confronto del proprietario del fondo ipotecato ove non sia data tanto a lui quanto al debitore.

Art. 832 C. Effetti dell’ipoteca / I. Proprietà e rapporti di debito / 1. Alienazione totale

C. Effetti dell’ipoteca

I. Proprietà e rapporti di debito

1. Alienazione totale

1 In caso di alienazione totale del fondo ipotecato, i vincoli del debitore e del fondo rimangono invariati, salvo convenzione contraria.

2 Nel caso però in cui il nuovo proprietario si sia assunto di pagare il debito ipotecario, il primo debitore è liberato, se il creditore non gli dichiara per iscritto entro il termine di un anno di tenerlo ancora obbligato.

Art. 833 C. Effetti dell’ipoteca / I. Proprietà e rapporti di debito / 2. Frazionamento del fondo

2. Frazionamento del fondo

1 In caso di alienazione parziale del fondo ipotecato, o di uno tra più fondi ipotecati del medesimo proprietario ed in caso di divisione, il vincolo dell’ipoteca, in difetto di accordo speciale, dev’essere suddiviso in modo che ogni parte rimanga gravata proporzionalmente al suo valore.

2 Il creditore che non accetta questo riparto può domandare, entro un mese dal giorno in cui divenne definitivo, che il credito gli sia pagato entro un anno.

3 Se gli acquirenti si sono assunti l’obbligo di pagare i debiti gravanti le loro parti, il primo debitore è liberato, ove il creditore non gli dichiari per iscritto entro il termine di un anno di tenerlo ancora obbligato.

Art. 834 C. Effetti dell’ipoteca / I. Proprietà e rapporti di debito / 3. Comunicazione dell’assunzione del debito

3. Comunicazione dell’assunzione del debito

1 L’assunzione del debito da parte dell’acquirente dev’essere notificata al creditore dall’ufficiale del registro.

2 Il termine di un anno per la dichiarazione del creditore decorre da questa notificazione.

Art. 835 C. Effetti dell’ipoteca / II. Cessione del credito

II. Cessione del credito

La cessione del credito ipotecario non richiede per la sua validità l’iscrizione nel registro.

Art. 8361D. Ipoteche legali / I. Di diritto cantonale

D. Ipoteche legali

I. Di diritto cantonale

1 Se il diritto cantonale accorda al creditore il diritto alla costituzione di un pegno immobiliare per crediti direttamente connessi con il fondo gravato, tale pegno nasce con l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

2 Scaduti i termini di cui al presente capoverso, le ipoteche legali di importo superiore a 1 000 franchi che nascono senza iscrizione in virtù del diritto cantonale non sono opponibili ai terzi che si riferiscono in buona fede al registro fondiario se non vi sono state iscritte entro quattro mesi dall’esigibilità del credito su cui si fondano, ma in ogni caso entro due anni dalla nascita dello stesso.

3 Sono fatte salve le normative cantonali più restrittive.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 8371D. Ipoteche legali / II. Di diritto privato federale / 1. Casi

II. Di diritto privato federale

1. Casi

1 Danno diritto di ottenere la costituzione di un’ipoteca legale:

1.
il credito del venditore, sopra il fondo venduto;
2.
i crediti derivanti dalla divisione fra coeredi o membri di un’indivisione, sopra i fondi che spettavano alla comunione;
3.
i crediti di artigiani o imprenditori che avessero fornito materiali e lavoro, o lavoro soltanto, per una costruzione o per altre opere, per la demolizione delle stesse, il montaggio di impalcature, il consolidamento di scavi o lavori simili su un dato fondo, e ciò sopra il fondo stesso, se il debitore è il proprietario, un artigiano o un imprenditore, un conduttore, un affittuario o un altro titolare di diritti sul fondo.

2 Qualora il debitore dei crediti degli artigiani o degli imprenditori sia un conduttore, un affittuario o un altro titolare di diritti sul fondo, il diritto di ottenere la costituzione di un’ipoteca legale sussiste soltanto se il proprietario del fondo ha acconsentito all’esecuzione dei lavori.

3 Gli aventi diritto non possono rinunciare preventivamente ai diritti di ipoteca legale di cui al presente articolo.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 838 D. Ipoteche legali / II. Di diritto privato federale / 2. Venditori, coeredi, ecc.

2. Venditori, coeredi, ecc.

L’iscrizione dell’ipoteca del venditore, dei coeredi o dei membri di un’indivisione dev’essere fatta al più tardi entro tre mesi dalla trasmissione della proprietà.

Art. 8391D. Ipoteche legali / II. Di diritto privato federale / 3. Artigiani e imprenditori / a. Iscrizione

3. Artigiani e imprenditori

a. Iscrizione

1 L’ipoteca degli artigiani e imprenditori può essere iscritta nel registro fondiario dal momento in cui si sono assunti il lavoro.

2 L’iscrizione dev’essere fatta al più tardi entro quattro mesi dal compimento del lavoro.

3 L’iscrizione può farsi soltanto se la somma garantita dall’ipoteca è riconosciuta dal proprietario o giudizialmente accertata; non può inoltre essere chiesta se il proprietario presta sufficiente garanzia per il credito preteso.

4 Se è incontroverso che il fondo appartiene al patrimonio amministrativo e se il debito del proprietario non deriva da obblighi contrattuali, questi risponde verso gli artigiani o imprenditori, per i crediti riconosciuti o giudizialmente accertati, secondo le disposizioni sulla fideiussione semplice, purché il credito gli sia stato notificato per scritto nei quattro mesi dal compimento del lavoro con esplicito richiamo alla fideiussione legale.

5 Nel caso in cui sia controverso se il fondo appartenga al patrimonio amministrativo, l’artigiano o l’imprenditore può, nei quattro mesi dal compimento del lavoro, chiedere l’iscrizione provvisoria della sua ipoteca nel registro fondiario.

6 Se è accertato con sentenza che il fondo appartiene al patrimonio amministrativo, l’iscrizione provvisoria dell’ipoteca è cancellata. Questa è sostituita dalla fideiussione legale, purché siano adempiute le condizioni di cui al capoverso 4. Il termine è considerato osservato con l’iscrizione provvisoria dell’ipoteca.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 840 D. Ipoteche legali / II. Di diritto privato federale / 3. Artigiani e imprenditori / b. Grado

b. Grado

Essendo iscritte più ipoteche legali di artigiani ed imprenditori esse danno eguale diritto ai creditori di essere soddisfatti sul pegno, anche se le iscrizioni sieno di diversa data.

Art. 841 D. Ipoteche legali / II. Di diritto privato federale / 3. Artigiani e imprenditori / c. Privilegio

c. Privilegio

1 Se nella realizzazione del pegno i crediti degli artigiani od imprenditori subiscono una perdita, la differenza dovrà essere risarcita sulla quota del ricavo assegnata ai creditori pignoratizi anteriori, dedotto il valore del suolo, in quanto questi potevano riconoscere che la costituzione dei loro diritti di pegno tornava di pregiudizio agli artigiani ed imprenditori.

2 Se il creditore di grado anteriore aliena il suo titolo di pegno, egli deve compensare gli artigiani ed imprenditori di ciò che perdono per il fatto dell’alienazione.

3 Dal momento in cui il principiare dei lavori è menzionato nel registro fondiario ad istanza di un interessato, non si possono inscrivere, fino a decorrenza del termine, altri pegni immobiliari fuorché le ipoteche.


  Capo terzo:2  Della cartella ipotecaria

Art. 842 A. Disposizioni generali / I. Scopo; relazione con il credito derivante dal rapporto fondamentale

A. Disposizioni generali

I. Scopo; relazione con il credito derivante dal rapporto fondamentale

1 La cartella ipotecaria costituisce un credito personale garantito da pegno immobiliare.

2 Salvo diversa convenzione, il credito risultante dalla cartella ipotecaria sussiste, se del caso, accanto a quello da garantire derivante dal rapporto fondamentale tra il creditore e il debitore.

3 Per quanto concerne il credito risultante dalla cartella ipotecaria, il debitore può opporre al creditore e ai suoi aventi causa che non siano in buona fede le eccezioni personali derivanti dal rapporto fondamentale.

Art. 843 A. Disposizioni generali / II. Tipi

II. Tipi

La cartella ipotecaria è costituita come cartella ipotecaria registrale o come cartella ipotecaria documentale.

Art. 844 A. Disposizioni generali / III. Diritti del proprietario

III. Diritti del proprietario

1 La posizione giuridica del proprietario della cosa costituita in pegno che non è personalmente debitore è regolata secondo le norme relative all’ipoteca.

2 Le eccezioni del debitore a riguardo della cartella ipotecaria competono anche al proprietario della cosa costituita in pegno.

Art. 845 A. Disposizioni generali / IV. Alienazione, divisione

IV. Alienazione, divisione

Per le conseguenze dell’alienazione e della divisione del fondo valgono le disposizioni relative all’ipoteca.

Art. 846 A. Disposizioni generali / V. Credito risultante dalla cartella ipotecaria e convenzioni accessorie / 1. In genere

V. Credito risultante dalla cartella ipotecaria e convenzioni accessorie

1. In genere

1 Il credito risultante dalla cartella ipotecaria non può riferirsi al rapporto fondamentale né implicare condizioni o controprestazioni.

2 La cartella ipotecaria può contenere convenzioni accessorie concernenti l’interesse, l’ammortamento del debito e la disdetta nonché altre clausole accessorie relative al credito risultante dalla cartella. È ammesso il rinvio a una convenzione separata.

Art. 847 A. Disposizioni generali / V. Credito risultante dalla cartella ipotecaria e convenzioni accessorie / 2. Disdetta

2. Disdetta

1 Salvo diversa convenzione, il creditore o il debitore può disdire la cartella ipotecaria per la fine di un mese con preavviso di sei mesi.

2 Una tale convenzione non può accordare al creditore un termine di preavviso inferiore a tre mesi, salvo che il debitore sia in mora riguardo all’ammortamento o agli interessi.

Art. 848 A. Disposizioni generali / VI. Protezione della buona fede

VI. Protezione della buona fede

Il credito risultante dalla cartella ipotecaria e il diritto di pegno sussistono a norma dell’iscrizione per chiunque in buona fede si sia riferito al registro fondiario.

Art. 849 A. Disposizioni generali / VII. Eccezioni del debitore

VII. Eccezioni del debitore

1 Il debitore può far valere soltanto le eccezioni risultanti dall’iscrizione nel registro fondiario e quelle che gli spettano personalmente contro il creditore procedente nonché, per la cartella ipotecaria documentale, quelle risultanti dal titolo.

2 Le convenzioni che prevedono clausole accessorie relative al credito risultante dalla cartella ipotecaria sono opponibili all’acquirente di buona fede della stessa soltanto se risultano dal registro fondiario e, per la cartella ipotecaria documentale, anche dal titolo.

Art. 850 A. Disposizioni generali / VIII. Procuratore

VIII. Procuratore

1 Nell’ambito della costituzione delle cartelle ipotecarie può essere designato un procuratore. Questi è incaricato di fare e ricevere i pagamenti, di ricevere le notificazioni, di accordare gli svincoli del pegno e, in generale, di provvedere con ogni diligenza e imparzialità alla tutela dei diritti dei creditori, del debitore e del proprietario.

2 Il nome del procuratore deve figurare nel registro fondiario e nel titolo di pegno.

3 Se la procura cessa e gli interessati non riescono ad accordarsi, il giudice prende le misure necessarie.

Art. 851 A. Disposizioni generali / IX. Luogo di pagamento

IX. Luogo di pagamento

1 Salvo diversa convenzione, il debitore deve fare ogni pagamento al domicilio del creditore.

2 Se il creditore non ha un domicilio conosciuto o ha cambiato domicilio a pregiudizio del debitore, questi può liberarsi mediante deposito presso l’autorità competente del proprio domicilio o del domicilio precedente del creditore.

Art. 852 A. Disposizioni generali / X. Modifica del rapporto giuridico

X. Modifica del rapporto giuridico

1 Se il rapporto giuridico è modificato a favore del debitore, segnatamente mediante un ammortamento parziale, questi può esigere che il creditore acconsenta all’iscrizione della modifica nel registro fondiario.

2 Per la cartella ipotecaria documentale, l’ufficio del registro fondiario menziona tale modifica anche nel titolo.

3 Senza l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario o la menzione nel titolo, le modifiche sopravvenute non sono opponibili all’acquirente di buona fede della cartella ipotecaria.

Art. 853 A. Disposizioni generali / XI. Pagamento integrale

XI. Pagamento integrale

Se il debito risultante dalla cartella ipotecaria è integralmente pagato, il debitore può esigere che il creditore:

1.
consenta che la cartella ipotecaria registrale gli sia intestata;
2.
gli rimetta il titolo della cartella ipotecaria documentale non invalidato.
Art. 854 A. Disposizioni generali / XII. Estinzione / 1. Mancanza del creditore

XII. Estinzione

1. Mancanza del creditore

1 Se non c’è più un creditore o se il creditore ha rinunciato al diritto di pegno, il debitore è libero o di far cancellare l’iscrizione dal registro fondiario o di lasciarla sussistere.

2 Il debitore può anche reimpiegare la cartella ipotecaria.

Art. 855 A. Disposizioni generali / XII. Estinzione / 2. Cancellazione

2. Cancellazione

La cartella ipotecaria documentale non può essere cancellata dal registro fondiario prima che il titolo sia stato invalidato o giudizialmente annullato.

Art. 856 A. Disposizioni generali / XIII. Diffida al creditore

XIII. Diffida al creditore

1 Se il creditore di una cartella ipotecaria è ignoto da dieci anni, durante i quali non sono stati chiesti gli interessi, il proprietario del fondo gravato può esigere che il giudice diffidi pubblicamente il creditore ad annunciarsi entro sei mesi.

2 Se il creditore non si annuncia entro tale termine e se dalle indagini risulta che secondo ogni probabilità il credito non sussiste più, il giudice ordina:

1.
per la cartella ipotecaria registrale, la cancellazione del diritto di pegno dal registro fondiario;
2.
per la cartella ipotecaria documentale, l’annullamento della stessa e la cancellazione del diritto di pegno dal registro fondiario.
Art. 857 B. Cartella ipotecaria registrale / I. Costituzione

B. Cartella ipotecaria registrale

I. Costituzione

1 La cartella ipotecaria registrale nasce con l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

2 È iscritta a nome del creditore o del proprietario del fondo.

Art. 858 B. Cartella ipotecaria registrale / II. Trasmissione

II. Trasmissione

1 La cartella ipotecaria registrale è trasmessa mediante iscrizione del nuovo creditore nel registro fondiario, effettuata in base a una dichiarazione scritta del creditore precedente.

2 Il debitore può eseguire le proprie prestazioni con effetto liberatorio soltanto pagando al creditore iscritto nel registro fondiario.

Art. 859 B. Cartella ipotecaria registrale / III. Costituzione in pegno, pignoramento e usufrutto

III. Costituzione in pegno, pignoramento e usufrutto

1 La cartella ipotecaria registrale è costituita in pegno mediante iscrizione del creditore pignoratizio nel registro fondiario, effettuata in base a una dichiarazione scritta del creditore iscritto.

2 Il pignoramento avviene mediante iscrizione della restrizione della facoltà di disporre nel registro fondiario.

3 L’usufrutto è costituito mediante iscrizione nel registro fondiario.

Art. 860 C. Cartella ipotecaria documentale / I. Costituzione / 1. Iscrizione

C. Cartella ipotecaria documentale

I. Costituzione

1. Iscrizione

1 Per ogni cartella ipotecaria documentale iscritta nel registro fondiario è rilasciato un titolo.

2 Come creditori delle cartelle ipotecarie documentali possono essere designati il portatore o una determinata persona, segnatamente il proprietario del fondo.

3 L’iscrizione produce gli effetti della cartella ipotecaria già prima della confezione del titolo.

Art. 861 C. Cartella ipotecaria documentale / I. Costituzione / 2. Titolo di pegno

2. Titolo di pegno

1 I titoli delle cartelle ipotecarie documentali sono rilasciati dall’ufficio del registro fondiario.

2 I titoli sono validi soltanto se firmati dall’ufficiale del registro fondiario. Per il rimanente, il Consiglio federale ne definisce la forma.

3 I titoli possono essere consegnati al creditore o al suo mandatario soltanto con il consenso esplicito del debitore e del proprietario del fondo gravato.

Art. 862 C. Cartella ipotecaria documentale / II. Protezione della buona fede

II. Protezione della buona fede

1 Il titolo rilasciato in forma regolare come cartella ipotecaria documentale fa stato secondo il suo tenore letterale per chiunque vi si sia riferito in buona fede.

2 Se il tenore letterale non corrisponde all’iscrizione o l’iscrizione non è stata eseguita, fa stato il registro fondiario.

3 Chi ha acquistato il titolo in buona fede ha tuttavia diritto al risarcimento dei danni secondo le norme concernenti il registro fondiario.

Art. 863 C. Cartella ipotecaria documentale / III. Diritti del creditore / 1. Esercizio

III. Diritti del creditore

1. Esercizio

1 Il credito risultante da una cartella ipotecaria documentale non può essere alienato, dato in pegno o in qualsiasi modo negoziato se non con il possesso del titolo.

2 Rimane salvo il diritto di far valere il credito nei casi in cui il titolo sia stato annullato o non sia ancora stato rilasciato.

Art. 864 C. Cartella ipotecaria documentale / III. Diritti del creditore / 2. Trasmissione

2. Trasmissione

1 Per la trasmissione del credito risultante da una cartella ipotecaria documentale occorre la consegna del titolo all’acquirente.

2 Se il titolo è nominativo, occorre inoltre la menzione della trasmissione sul titolo, con l’indicazione dell’acquirente.

Art. 865 C. Cartella ipotecaria documentale / IV. Annullamento

IV. Annullamento

1 Qualora un titolo sia stato smarrito o sia stato distrutto senza intenzione di estinguere il debito, il creditore può farlo annullare dal giudice e chiedere il pagamento o, se il credito non è ancora esigibile, il rilascio di un nuovo titolo.

2 L’annullamento avviene secondo le norme concernenti l’ammortamento dei titoli al portatore previa diffida a produrre il titolo entro sei mesi.

3 Il debitore può, nello stesso modo, chiedere l’annullamento di un titolo pagato che è stato smarrito.

Art. 866 a 874

Abrogati


  Capo quarto: Della emissione di titoli di prestito con garanzia immobiliare

Art. 875 A. Obbligazioni di prestiti con garanzia immobiliare

A. Obbligazioni di prestiti con garanzia immobiliare

Le obbligazioni di un prestito, nominative od al portatore, possono essere garantite con pegno immobiliare:

1.
mediante costituzione di un’ipoteca o di una cartella ipotecaria per l’intiero prestito, con designazione di un rappresentante dei creditori e del debitore;
2.
mediante costituzione di un pegno immobiliare per l’intiero prestito a favore dell’istituto o della persona incaricata dell’emissione e la costituzione, a favore dei creditori delle obbligazioni, di un diritto di pegno sul titolo ipotecario complessivo.
Art. 876 a 8831

1 Abrogati dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).


  Titolo ventesimoterzo: Del pegno mobiliare

  Capo primo: Del pegno manuale e del diritto di ritenzione

Art. 884 A. Pegno manuale / I. Costituzione / 1. Possesso del creditore

A. Pegno manuale

I. Costituzione

1. Possesso del creditore

1 Salvo le eccezioni previste dalla legge, una cosa mobile può essere costituita in pegno soltanto col trasferimento del possesso al creditore pignoratizio.

2 Chi in buona fede riceve la cosa in pegno acquista il diritto di pegno sulla stessa, riservati i diritti dei terzi derivanti da un possesso anteriore, ancorché il pignorante non ne avesse la libera disposizione.

3 Il diritto di pegno non è costituito finché il datore del pegno conservi la cosa in suo esclusivo potere.

Art. 885 A. Pegno manuale / I. Costituzione / 2. Pegno sul bestiame

2. Pegno sul bestiame

1 La costituzione di pegno sul bestiame senza trasferimento del possesso può essere fatta soltanto a garanzia di crediti di istituti di prestito e società cooperative autorizzati a far tali operazioni dall’autorità competente del Cantone di domicilio e mediante iscrizione in un registro pubblico, notificata all’ufficio delle esecuzioni.

2 La tenuta del registro è regolata dal Consiglio federale.1

3 I Cantoni possono riscuotere tasse per le iscrizioni nel registro e per le operazioni connesse; essi designano i circondari e i funzionari incaricati della tenuta del registro.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 886 A. Pegno manuale / I. Costituzione / 3. Pegno posteriore

3. Pegno posteriore

Il diritto di pegno posteriore è costituito mediante avviso scritto dato al primo creditore pignoratizio con diffida di rilasciare il pegno, dopo che sarà soddisfatto, al creditore pignoratizio susseguente.

Art. 887 A. Pegno manuale / I. Costituzione / 4. Dazione in pegno da parte del creditore

4. Dazione in pegno da parte del creditore

Il creditore pignoratizio non può senza il consenso del pignorante dare in pegno ad altri la cosa impegnata.

Art. 888 A. Pegno manuale / II. Estinzione / 1. Perdita del possesso

II. Estinzione

1. Perdita del possesso

1 Il diritto di pegno si estingue tostoché il creditore non abbia più il possesso della cosa impegnata e non possa rivendicarla da terzi.

2 Esso non ha effetto alcuno finché il pegno rimanga, col consenso del creditore, nell’esclusivo potere di chi l’ha costituito.

Art. 889 A. Pegno manuale / II. Estinzione / 2. Obbligo di riconsegna

2. Obbligo di riconsegna

1 Cessando il diritto di pegno, sia per estinzione del credito che per altro motivo, il creditore deve riconsegnare la cosa a chi di diritto.

2 Il creditore non è tenuto a riconsegnare la cosa impegnata neppure in parte, se prima non è completamente soddisfatto.

Art. 890 A. Pegno manuale / II. Estinzione / 3. Responsabilità del creditore

3. Responsabilità del creditore

1 Il creditore risponde del danno derivante dal deterioramento o dalla perdita della cosa impegnata, in quanto non provi che si è verificato senza sua colpa.

2 Se il creditore di suo arbitrio ha alienato od ulteriormente impegnato la cosa, risponde di tutti i danni che ne derivano.

Art. 891 A. Pegno manuale / III. Effetti / 1. Diritti del creditore

III. Effetti

1. Diritti del creditore

1 Il creditore ha il diritto di essere pagato sul ricavo del pegno in caso che non venga soddisfatto.

2 Il diritto di pegno gli garantisce il credito, compresi gli interessi convenzionali, le spese di esecuzione e gli interessi di mora.

Art. 892 A. Pegno manuale / III. Effetti / 2. Estensione della garanzia

2. Estensione della garanzia

1 Il diritto di pegno si estende alla cosa ed ai suoi accessori.

2 Salvo diversa pattuizione, i frutti naturali della cosa impegnata devono essere consegnati dal creditore al proprietario, dal momento in cui cessano di essere parti costitutive della stessa.

3 Il pegno si estende ai frutti che al momento della realizzazione sono parti costitutive della cosa.

Art. 893 A. Pegno manuale / III. Effetti / 3. Grado dei diritti pignoratizi

3. Grado dei diritti pignoratizi

1 Ove più diritti di pegno sieno costituiti sulla stessa cosa, i creditori devono essere soddisfatti secondo il loro grado.

2 Il grado è determinato dal tempo della costituzione del pegno.

Art. 894 A. Pegno manuale / III. Effetti / 4. Patto di caducità

4. Patto di caducità

È nullo qualunque patto che autorizza il creditore ad appropriarsi il pegno in difetto di pagamento.

Art. 895 B. Diritto di ritenzione / I. Condizioni

B. Diritto di ritenzione

I. Condizioni

1 Le cose mobili e le cartevalori che per volontà del debitore si trovano in possesso del creditore possono da questi essere ritenute in garanzia del suo credito, purché il credito sia scaduto e, secondo la sua natura, vi sia connessione fra il credito e la cosa.

2 Fra commercianti, tale connessione esiste già pel fatto che tanto il possesso della cosa quanto il credito derivano dalle loro relazioni di affari.

3 Il creditore ha il diritto di ritenzione, ancora che la cosa da lui ricevuta in buona fede non appartenga al debitore, riservati i diritti dei terzi derivanti da un possesso anteriore.

Art. 896 B. Diritto di ritenzione / II. Eccezioni

II. Eccezioni

1 Il diritto di ritenzione non può essere esercitato sulle cose che secondo la loro natura non possono essere realizzate.

2 Il diritto di ritenzione è escluso quando sia incompatibile con una obbligazione assunta dal creditore, o con la disposizione data dal debitore prima o al momento della consegna della cosa, o coll’ordine pubblico.

Art. 897 B. Diritto di ritenzione / III. Insolvenza

III. Insolvenza

1 In caso d’insolvenza del debitore, il diritto di ritenzione si esercita anche per i crediti non esigibili.

2 Se l’insolvenza si è verificata o fu conosciuta dal creditore solo dopo la consegna della cosa, questo può far valere il diritto di ritenzione ancora che vi si opponga un’obbligazione precedentemente da lui assunta od una particolare disposizione del debitore.

Art. 898 B. Diritto di ritenzione / IV. Effetti

IV. Effetti

1 Non adempiendo il debitore alle sue obbligazioni, il creditore può, se non è sufficientemente garantito, realizzare la cosa ritenuta, come se fosse un pegno manuale, previa diffidazione al debitore.

2 Per la realizzazione di titoli di credito nominativi, l’ufficiale delle esecuzioni o dei fallimenti, provvede agli atti necessari in luogo del debitore.


  Capo secondo: Del diritto di pegno sui crediti e su altri diritti

Art. 899 A. In genere

A. In genere

1 I crediti ed altri diritti possono essere dati a pegno purché sieno cedibili.

2 Il diritto di pegno sugli stessi soggiace, salvo contraria disposizione, alle norme del pegno manuale.

Art. 900 B. Costituzione / I. Per crediti con o senza titolo di riconoscimento

B. Costituzione

I. Per crediti con o senza titolo di riconoscimento

1 Per impegnare un credito che non risulta da documento o che risulta da un semplice riconoscimento scritto del debito, occorre la scrittura del contratto di pegno e la consegna del titolo se esiste.

2 Il creditore ed il pignorante possono notificare la costituzione del pegno al debitore.

3 Per la costituzione di pegno sopra altri diritti, è necessaria, oltre la scrittura di pegno, l’osservanza delle formalità prescritte per la loro trasmissione.

Art. 901 B. Costituzione / II. Per cartevalori

II. Per cartevalori

1 Per la costituzione del pegno su titoli al portatore basta la loro consegna al creditore pignoratizio.

2 Per quella di altre cartevalori occorre la consegna del documento con la girata o la dichiarazione di cessione.

3 La costituzione in pegno di titoli contabili è retta esclusivamente dalla legge del 3 ottobre 20081 sui titoli contabili.2


1 RS 957.1
2 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della L del 3 ott. 2008 sui titoli contabili, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2010 (RU 2009 3577; FF 2006 8533).

Art. 902 B. Costituzione / III. Per titoli rappresentanti merci

III. Per titoli rappresentanti merci

1 Il pegno di cartevalori che rappresentano delle merci conferisce il diritto di pegno sulle merci stesse.

2 Se oltre alla cartavalore esiste uno speciale atto di pegno (warrant), la costituzione in pegno di questo titolo basta per impegnare la merce, purché la costituzione del pegno sia annotata nella cartavalore, con la indicazione della somma garantita e della scadenza.

Art. 903 B. Costituzione / IV. Pegno posteriore

IV. Pegno posteriore

Il pegno posteriore di un credito richiede per la sua validità l’avviso scritto dato dal titolare del credito o dal creditore pignoratizio posteriore al creditore pignoratizio anteriore.

Art. 904 C. Effetti / I. Estensione della garanzia

C. Effetti

I. Estensione della garanzia

1 Il diritto di pegno sopra un credito produttivo d’interessi o di altri redditi periodici, come i dividendi, si estende, salvo patto contrario, solo alla prestazione corrente; il creditore non ha diritto alle prestazioni già scadute.

2 Se però tali redditi accessori risultano da titoli speciali si ritengono compresi nel pegno in quanto siano formalmente impegnati essi medesimi e salvo patto contrario.

Art. 905 C. Effetti / II. Rappresentanza di azioni e di quote sociali di una società a garanzia limitata costituite in pegno

II. Rappresentanza di azioni e di quote sociali di una società a garanzia limitata costituite in pegno1

1 Nelle assemblee generali, le azioni costituite in pegno sono rappresentate dall’azionista e non dal creditore pignoratizio.

Nelle assemblee dei soci, le quote sociali di una società a garanzia limitata costituite in pegno sono rappresentate dal socio e non dal creditore pignoratizio.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).
2 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).

Art. 906 C. Effetti / III. Amministrazione e riscossione

III. Amministrazione e riscossione

1 Qualora la diligente amministrazione richieda la disdetta e la riscossione del credito impegnato, il creditore le può fare ed il creditore pignoratizio può pretendere che le compia.

2 Il debitore avvertito della costituzione del pegno, non può fare il pagamento ad uno di essi senza il consenso dell’altro.

3 In difetto di consenso, egli deve depositare la somma dovuta.


  Capo terzo: Del prestito a pegno

Art. 907 A. Istituti di prestiti a pegno / I. Autorizzazione

A. Istituti di prestiti a pegno

I. Autorizzazione

1 Chi intende esercitare un istituto di prestiti a pegno deve ottenere l’autorizzazione del governo cantonale.

2 I Cantoni possono stabilire che questa autorizzazione sia data soltanto ad istituti pubblici del Cantone o dei Comuni o ad istituti di utilità pubblica.

3 Essi possono imporre tasse particolari sull’esercizio di tali imprese.

Art. 908 A. Istituti di prestiti a pegno / II. Durata

II. Durata

1 Agli istituti privati l’autorizzazione può essere data solo per un determinato tempo, ma può essere rinnovata.

2 L’autorizzazione può essere in ogni tempo revocata, se l’istituto non osserva le prescrizioni a cui è sottoposto il suo esercizio.

Art. 909 B. Prestito a pegno / I. Costituzione

B. Prestito a pegno

I. Costituzione

Il pegno è costituito con la consegna dell’oggetto impegnato all’istituto e col distacco della relativa polizza.

Art. 910 B. Prestito a pegno / II. Effetti / 1. Vendita del pegno

II. Effetti

1. Vendita del pegno

1 Se il pegno non è riscattato nel termine convenuto, l’istituto può far vendere l’oggetto dall’autorità, dopo aver diffidato con bando pubblico il debitore.

2 L’istituto non può far valere un credito personale.

Art. 911 B. Prestito a pegno / II. Effetti / 2. Diritto sull’eccedenza

2. Diritto sull’eccedenza

1 Se dal ricavo della vendita risulta un’eccedenza sulla somma garantita, l’avente diritto ne può chiedere il pagamento.

2 Più crediti verso lo stesso debitore possono essere addizionati per il calcolo dell’eccedenza.

3 Il diritto sull’eccedenza si prescrive in cinque anni dalla vendita della cosa.

Art. 912 B. Prestito a pegno / III. Riscatto del pegno / 1. Diritto al riscatto

III. Riscatto del pegno

1. Diritto al riscatto

1 Finché il pegno non sia venduto, l’interessato può riscattarlo contro restituzione della polizza.

2 Non potendo produrre la polizza, egli può ancora riscattare il pegno, dopo la scadenza del termine, se può altrimenti provare il proprio diritto.

3 Questa facoltà spetta all’interessato, dopo sei mesi dalla scadenza, anche se l’istituto si è espressamente riservato di riconsegnare l’oggetto soltanto contro restituzione della polizza.

Art. 913 B. Prestito a pegno / III. Riscatto del pegno / 2. Diritto dell’istituto

2. Diritto dell’istituto

1 L’istituto ha diritto di esigere, al momento del riscatto, l’interesse di tutto il mese corrente.

2 Se l’istituto si è riservato di riconsegnare il pegno a qualunque persona, dietro presentazione della polizza, esso è autorizzato alla riconsegna in quanto non sappia o non debba sapere che il portatore si è illecitamente impossessato della polizza.

Art. 914 C. Compera a patto di ricupera

C. Compera a patto di ricupera

La compera a patto di ricupera, professionalmente esercitata, è parificata al prestito a pegno.

Art. 915 D. Regolamenti cantonali

D. Regolamenti cantonali

1 I Cantoni possono emanare ulteriori disposizioni circa l’esercizio del prestito a pegno.

2 …1


1 Abrogato dal n. II 21 della LF del 15 dic. 1989 concernente l’approvazione di atti legislativi dei Cantoni da parte della Confederazione, con effetto dal 1° feb. 1991 (RU 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1149).


  Capo quarto:

Art. 916 a 9181

1 Abrogati dall’art. 52 cpv. 2 della L del 25 giu. 1930 sulle obbligazioni fondiarie, con effetto dal 1° feb. 1931 (CS 2 732; BBl 1925 III 527, FF 1925 III 547).


  Parte terza: Del possesso e del registro fondiario

  Titolo ventesimoquarto: Del possesso

Art. 919 A. Nozione e specie / I. Concetto

A. Nozione e specie

I. Concetto

1 È possessore di una cosa colui che la tiene effettivamente in suo potere.

2 Trattandosi di servitù prediali ed oneri fondiari, l’effettivo esercizio del diritto è parificato al possesso della cosa.

Art. 920 A. Nozione e specie / II. Possesso originario e derivato

II. Possesso originario e derivato

1 Se il possessore ha consegnato la cosa ad un altro per conferirgli un diritto reale limitato od un diritto personale, ambedue ne sono possessori.

2 Chi possiede la cosa quale proprietario ne ha il possesso originario, ogni altro un possesso derivato.

Art. 921 A. Nozione e specie / III. Interruzione transitoria

III. Interruzione transitoria

Il possesso non si perde per un impedimento od un’interruzione del suo esercizio che sia di natura transitoria.

Art. 922 B. Trasferimento / I. Tra presenti

B. Trasferimento

I. Tra presenti

1 Il possesso viene trasferito con la consegna della cosa medesima, oppure col mettere a disposizione dell’acquirente i mezzi di avere la cosa in suo potere.

2 La consegna è adempiuta tosto che l’acquirente si trovi in condizione, per volontà del possessore precedente, di esercitare la potestà sulla cosa.

Art. 923 B. Trasferimento / II. Fra assenti

II. Fra assenti

Se la consegna ha luogo fra assenti, essa è compiuta con la consegna della cosa all’acquirente od al suo rappresentante.

Art. 924 B. Trasferimento / III. Senza consegna

III. Senza consegna

1 Il possesso di una cosa può essere acquistato senza consegna quando un terzo o l’alienante medesimo rimane in possesso della cosa in causa di uno speciale rapporto giuridico.

2 Questa trasmissione di possesso è efficace in confronto del terzo solo allora che l’alienante ne lo ha avvertito.

3 Il terzo può rifiutare la consegna all’acquirente per gli stessi motivi per i quali l’avrebbe potuta rifiutare all’alienante.

Art. 925 B. Trasferimento / IV. Titoli rappresentanti merci

IV. Titoli rappresentanti merci

1 Se per merci consegnate ad un vettore o ad un magazzino di deposito sono state emesse cartevalori che le rappresentino, la trasmissione di tali documenti vale come consegna delle merci.

2 Tuttavia in confronto di chi ha ricevuto il titolo in buona fede, prevale il diritto di chi in buona fede ha ricevuto la merce stessa.

Art. 926 C. Effetti / I. Protezione del possesso / 1. Diritto di difesa

C. Effetti

I. Protezione del possesso

1. Diritto di difesa

1 Ogni possessore ha il diritto di difendersi con la forza contro l’altrui illecita violenza.

2 Se la cosa gli è tolta violentemente o clandestinamente egli può riprenderne immediatamente il possesso espellendone l’usurpatore se si tratta di un immobile o, se si tratta di una cosa mobile, togliendola all’usurpatore colto sul fatto od immediatamente inseguito.

3 Egli deve astenersi da ogni via di fatto non giustificata dalle circostanze.

Art. 927 C. Effetti / I. Protezione del possesso / 2. Azione di reintegra

2. Azione di reintegra

1 Chi ha tolto altrui una cosa con atti di illecita violenza è tenuto a restituirla, ancorché pretenda avere sulla medesima un diritto prevalente.

2 Non è tenuto a restituire la cosa il convenuto che giustifica immediatamente un diritto prevalente in virtù del quale egli potrebbe subito ritoglierla all’attore.

3 L’azione ha per oggetto la restituzione della cosa ed il risarcimento del danno.

Art. 928 C. Effetti / I. Protezione del possesso / 3. Azione di manutenzione

3. Azione di manutenzione

1 Quando il possessore sia turbato nel suo possesso da un atto di illecita violenza, egli può proporre l’azione di manutenzione contro l’autore della turbativa anche se questi pretende di agire con diritto.

2 L’azione ha per oggetto la cessazione della turbativa, il divieto di turbative ulteriori ed il risarcimento dei danni.

Art. 929 C. Effetti / I. Protezione del possesso / 4. Ammissibilità e prescrizione dell’azione

4. Ammissibilità e prescrizione dell’azione

1 Le azioni contro l’illecita violenza sono ammissibili solo quando il possessore abbia immediatamente reclamato la restituzione della cosa o la cessazione della turbativa, appena conosciuto l’atto di violenza e l’autore di esso.

2 L’azione si prescrive in un anno, il quale comincia a decorrere dalla spogliazione o dalla turbativa, anche se il possessore ha avuto più tardi conoscenza del fatto e del suo autore.

Art. 930 C. Effetti / II. Protezione giuridica / 1. Presunzione della proprietà

II. Protezione giuridica

1. Presunzione della proprietà

1 Il possessore di una cosa mobile ne è presunto proprietario.

2 Ogni precedente possessore è presunto essere stato proprietario al tempo del suo possesso.

Art. 931 C. Effetti / II. Protezione giuridica / 2. Presunzione in caso di possesso derivato

2. Presunzione in caso di possesso derivato

1 Chi possiede una cosa mobile senza l’intenzione di esserne proprietario, può far valere la presunzione di proprietà di colui dal quale l’ha ricevuta in buona fede.

2 Se uno possiede una cosa mobile allegando un diritto reale limitato od un diritto personale, si presume l’esistenza di questo diritto, ma la presunzione cessa verso colui dal quale l’ha ricevuta.

Art. 932 C. Effetti / II. Protezione giuridica / 3. Azione contro il possessore

3. Azione contro il possessore

Il possessore di una cosa mobile può opporre a qualsiasi azione la presunzione nascente dal possesso a favore del proprio diritto, riservate le disposizioni circa lo spoglio o la turbativa violenta del possesso.

Art. 933 C. Effetti / II. Protezione giuridica / 4. Diritto di disposizione e di rivendicazione / a. Cose affidate

4. Diritto di disposizione e di rivendicazione

a. Cose affidate

Chi in buona fede ha ricevuto una cosa mobile a titolo di proprietà o di un diritto reale limitato dev’essere protetto nel suo possesso, anche se la cosa fosse stata affidata all’alienante senza facoltà di disporne.

Art. 934 C. Effetti / II. Protezione giuridica / 4. Diritto di disposizione e di rivendicazione / b. Cose smarrite o sottratte

b. Cose smarrite o sottratte

1 Il possessore, a cui fu rubata una cosa mobile, o che l’ha smarrita, o che ne fu altrimenti privato contro la sua volontà, la può rivendicare entro cinque anni da qualsiasi acquirente. È fatto salvo l’articolo 722.1

1bis Il diritto di rivendicazione per beni culturali ai sensi dell’articolo 2 capoverso 1 della legge del 20 giugno 20032 sul trasferimento dei beni culturali, andati persi contro la volontà del proprietario, si prescrive in un anno dopo che il proprietario è venuto a conoscenza dell’ubicazione e del detentore dei beni, ma al più tardi in 30 anni dopo la perdita dei beni.3

2 Se la cosa è stata acquistata all’asta pubblica, in un mercato, o da un negoziante di cose della medesima specie, essa può del pari essere rivendicata contro il primo od ogni successivo acquirente di buona fede, ma solo dietro compenso del prezzo sborsato.

3 Del resto la restituzione ha luogo secondo le norme relative ai diritti del possessore di buona fede.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 2002 (Articolo di principio sugli animali), in vigore dal 1° apr. 2003 (RU 2003 463; FF 2002 3734 5207).
2 RS 444.1
3 Introdotto dall’art. 32 n. 1 della L del 20 giu. 2003 sul trasferimento dei beni culturali, in vigore dal 1° giu. 2005 (RU 2005 1869; FF 2002 457).

Art. 935 C. Effetti / II. Protezione giuridica / 4. Diritto di disposizione e di rivendicazione / c. Denaro e titoli al portatore

c. Denaro e titoli al portatore

Il denaro ed i titoli al portatore non possono essere rivendicati contro il detentore di buona fede, anche se il precedente possessore ne sia stato privato contro la sua volontà.

Art. 936 C. Effetti / II. Protezione giuridica / 4. Diritto di disposizione e di rivendicazione / d. Mala fede

d. Mala fede

1 Chi ha acquistato il possesso della cosa mobile non essendo in buona fede, può sempre essere costretto alla restituzione da parte del precedente possessore.

2 Se però lo stesso possessore precedente non l’aveva acquistata in buona fede, egli non può rivendicarla da un possessore susseguente.

Art. 937 C. Effetti / II. Protezione giuridica / 5. Presunzione per i fondi

5. Presunzione per i fondi

1 Per i fondi iscritti1 nel registro fondiario, la presunzione del diritto e le azioni possessorie stanno solo a favore della persona iscritta.

2 Chi però esercita sul fondo un effettivo potere, può proporre le azioni possessorie di spoglio e di turbativa contro ogni illecita violenza.


1 Nel testo tedesco «aufgenommen» e in quello francese «immatriculés», ossia «intavolati».

Art. 938 C. Effetti / III. Responsabilità / 1. Possessore di buona fede / a. Godimento

III. Responsabilità

1. Possessore di buona fede

a. Godimento

1 Chi possiede una cosa in buona fede non è tenuto a risarcire il rivendicante per l’uso ed il profitto che ne ha avuto conformemente al suo presunto diritto.

2 Egli non è responsabile della perdita o del deterioramento che ne sono derivati.

Art. 939 C. Effetti / III. Responsabilità / 1. Possessore di buona fede / b. Indennità

b. Indennità

1 Se l’avente diritto rivendica la cosa, il possessore di buona fede può chiedere dal rivendicante un’indennità per le spese necessarie ed utili e rifiutare la consegna fino al pagamento della medesima.

2 Egli non può pretendere indennità per altre spese, ma ha diritto, nel caso che l’indennità non gli sia offerta, di togliere, prima di restituire la cosa, ciò che vi avesse aggiunto, in quanto si possa fare senza danneggiarla.

3 I frutti percepiti dal possessore sono compensati con le spese che gli sono dovute.

Art. 940 C. Effetti / III. Responsabilità / 2. Possessore di mala fede

2. Possessore di mala fede

1 Chi possiede una cosa in mala fede deve restituirla all’avente diritto, e risarcire tutti i danni cagionati dalla illecita detenzione, nonché i frutti che ha percepito o trascurato di percepire.

2 Egli può farsi rimborsare solo quelle spese, che sarebbero state necessarie anche per il rivendicante.

3 Fintanto che il possessore non sa a chi deve restituire la cosa, risponde solo dei danni cagionati per sua colpa.

Art. 941 C. Effetti / IV. Prescrizione acquisitiva

IV. Prescrizione acquisitiva

Il possessore che vuol far valere la prescrizione acquisitiva ha diritto di aggiungere al suo possesso quello del suo autore, in quanto fosse idoneo a prescrivere.


  Titolo ventesimoquinto: Del registro fondiario

Art. 942 A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 1. In genere

A. Impianto

I. Oggetto

1. In genere

1 È istituito un registro dei diritti sui fondi.

2 Il registro fondiario consiste nel libro mastro cogli atti che lo completano, mappa catastale, sommarione, documenti giustificativi, descrizioni degli immobili, e nel libro giornale.

3 Il registro fondiario può essere tenuto su carta o su supporti informatici.1

4 In caso di tenuta informatizzata del registro fondiario, i dati iscritti sono giuridicamente efficaci se sono correttamente registrati nel sistema e se gli apparecchi dell’ufficio del registro fondiario ne permettono la lettura sotto forma di cifre e di lettere mediante procedimenti tecnici o la loro presentazione sotto forma di piani.2


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 19 dic. 2003 sulla firma elettronica, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2005 (RU 2004 5085; FF 2001 5109).
2 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 19 dic. 2003 sulla firma elettronica, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2005 (RU 2004 5085; FF 2001 5109).

Art. 9431A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 2. Intavolazione / a. Oggetto

2. Intavolazione

a. Oggetto

1 Nel registro fondiario sono intavolati come fondi:

1.
i beni immobili;
2.
i diritti per sè stanti e permanenti costituiti sui fondi;
3.
le miniere;
4.
le quote di comproprietà d’un fondo.

2 Un regolamento del Consiglio federale darà le norme particolari su le condizioni e il modo d’intavolazione dei diritti per sé stanti e permanenti, delle miniere e delle quote di comproprietà d’un fondo.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. III della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 944 A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 2. Intavolazione / b. Eccezioni

b. Eccezioni

1 I fondi che non sono di proprietà privata e quelli che servono all’uso pubblico, si intavolano solo in quanto debbano essere iscritti dei diritti reali sopra i medesimi, o se il diritto cantonale lo prescrive.

2 Ove un fondo intavolato sia convertito in uno non soggetto all’intavolazione, viene eliminato dal registro.

3 …1


1 Abrogato dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 945 A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 3. Registri / a. Libro mastro

3. Registri

a. Libro mastro

1 Ogni fondo è intavolato nel mastro in un foglio e con un numero proprio.

2 Le norme da seguirsi in caso di divisione di un fondo o di riunione di più fondi, verranno stabilite con regolamento del Consiglio federale.

Art. 946 A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 3. Registri / b. Foglio del mastro

b. Foglio del mastro

1 Ogni foglio è diviso in rubriche speciali dove sono iscritti:

1.
la proprietà;
2.
le servitù e gli oneri fondiari a favore od a carico del fondo;
3.
i diritti di pegno di cui il fondo è gravato.

2 Gli accessori possono essere menzionati a richiesta del proprietario e, quando sono menzionati, non possono essere cancellati senza il consenso di tutti gli aventi diritto risultanti dal registro.

Art. 947 A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 3. Registri / c. Foglio collettivi

c. Foglio collettivi

1 Col consenso del proprietario, possono essere intavolati in un foglio unico più fondi sebbene non contigui.

2 Le iscrizioni in questo foglio valgono per tutti i fondi insieme, eccezion fatta per le servitù prediali.

3 Il proprietario può sempre domandare che una singola parcella sia intavolata a parte, sotto riserva dei diritti acquisiti.

Art. 948 A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 3. Registri / d. Libro giornale, documenti

d. Libro giornale, documenti

1 Le notificazioni per l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario sono registrate senza indugio in un giornale nell’ordine cronologico della loro presentazione, con l’indicazione del richiedente e della relativa domanda.

2 I documenti all’appoggio dei quali sono fatte le iscrizioni devono essere debitamente allegati e conservati.

3 Nei Cantoni che avranno incaricato l’ufficiale del registro della celebrazione degli atti pubblici, i documenti potranno essere sostituiti da un protocollo avente i caratteri del documento pubblico.

Art. 949 A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 4. Regolamenti / a. In genere

4. Regolamenti

a. In genere1

1 Il Consiglio federale stabilisce i formulari per il registro fondiario, emana i necessari regolamenti e può prescrivere l’uso di altri registri ausiliari.

2 I Cantoni possono prescrivere delle norme speciali per l’iscrizione di quei diritti immobiliari che rimangono soggetti al diritto cantonale; esse richiedono per la loro validità l’approvazione della Confederazione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 3 della L del 19 dic. 2003 sulla firma elettronica, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2005 (RU 2004 5085; FF 2001 5109).

Art. 949a1A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 4. Regolamenti / b. Tenuta informatizzata del registro fondiario

b. Tenuta informatizzata del registro fondiario

1 Il Cantone che intenda tenere il registro fondiario su supporti informatici dev’esserne autorizzato dal Dipartimento federale di giustizia e polizia.

2 Il Consiglio federale disciplina:

1.
la procedura di autorizzazione;
2.
l’estensione e i dettagli tecnici della tenuta del registro informatizzato, in particolare il processo attraverso il quale le iscrizioni sono giuridicamente efficaci;
3.
se e a quali condizioni le pratiche con il registro fondiario possono svolgersi per via elettronica;
4.
se e a quali condizioni i dati del libro mastro consultabili senza dover far valere un interesse sono messi a disposizione del pubblico;
5.
l’accesso ai dati, la registrazione delle interrogazioni e le condizioni che giustificano la revoca del diritto d’accesso in caso di abuso;
6.
la protezione dei dati;
7.
la conservazione dei dati a lungo termine e la loro archiviazione.

3 Il Dipartimento federale di giustizia e polizia e il Dipartimento federale della difesa, della protezione della popolazione e dello sport definiscono modelli di dati e interfaccia uniformi per il registro fondiario e per la misurazione catastale.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821). Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 19 dic. 2003 sulla firma elettronica, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2005 (RU 2004 5085; FF 2001 5109).

Art. 949b1A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 4a. ...

4a. ...


1 Non ancora in vigore (RU 2018 4017).

Art. 949c1A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 4b. ...

4b. ...


1 Non ancora in vigore (RU 2018 4017).

Art. 949d1A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 4c. Ricorso a privati per l’uso del registro fondiario informatizzato

4c. Ricorso a privati per l’uso del registro fondiario informatizzato

1 I Cantoni che tengono il registro fondiario su supporti informatici possono incaricare organizzazioni private di realizzare i compiti seguenti:

1.
garantire l’accesso ai dati del registro fondiario mediante procedura di richiamo;
2.
garantire l’accesso pubblico ai dati del libro mastro consultabili senza dover far valere un interesse;
3.
svolgere le pratiche con l’ufficio del registro fondiario per via elettronica.

2 Le organizzazioni incaricate sottostanno alla vigilanza dei Cantoni e all’alta vigilanza della Confederazione.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 15 dic. 2017 (Atti dello stato civile e registro fondiario), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2019 (RU 2018 4017; FF 2014 3059).

Art. 9501A. Impianto / I. Oggetto / 5. Misurazione ufficiale

5. Misurazione ufficiale

1 L’iscrizione e la descrizione dei singoli fondi nel registro fondiario ha luogo sulla base della misurazione ufficiale, segnatamente sulla base di un piano per il registro fondiario.

2 La legge del 5 ottobre 20072 sulla geoinformazione disciplina i requisiti qualitativi e tecnici della misurazione ufficiale.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. II della L del 5 ott. 2007 sulla geoinformazione, in vigore dal 1° lug. 2008 (RU 2008 2793; FF 2006 7165).
2 RS 510.62

Art. 951 A. Impianto / II. Tenuta del registro / 1. Circondari / a. Competenza

II. Tenuta del registro

1. Circondari

a. Competenza

1 Per la tenuta dei registri fondiari sono stabiliti dei circondari.

2 I fondi sono intavolati nel registro del circondario in cui si trovano.

Art. 952 A. Impianto / II. Tenuta del registro / 1. Circondari / b. Fondi i più circondari

b. Fondi i più circondari

1 Ove un fondo si trovi in più circondari, deve essere intavolato registro di ognuno d’essi con richiamo al registro degli altri.

2 Le notificazioni e le iscrizioni costitutive di diritti reali devono aver luogo nel registro del circondario dove si trova la maggior parte del fondo.

3 Le iscrizioni in questo registro sono comunicate dall’ufficiale del registro agli altri uffici.

Art. 953 A. Impianto / II. Tenuta del registro / 2. Uffici del registro

2. Uffici del registro

1 L’organizzazione degli uffici di registro fondiario, la delimitazione dei circondari, la nomina e la retribuzione dei funzionari nonché l’ordinamento della vigilanza spettano ai Cantoni.

2 Le prescrizioni cantonali, eccettuate quelle sulla nomina e lo stipendio dei funzionari, richiedono l’approvazione della Confederazione.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II 21 della LF del 15 dic. 1989 concernente l’approvazione di atti legislativi dei Cantoni da parte della Confederazione, in vigore dal 1° feb. 1991 (RU 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1149).

Art. 954 A. Impianto / II. Tenuta del registro / 3. Tariffe

3. Tariffe

1 I Cantoni possono stabilire delle tasse per le iscrizioni nel registro fondiario e per le operazioni geometriche che richiedono.

2 Sono dispensate da ogni tassa le iscrizioni dipendenti da lavori di miglioramento del suolo o da permute a scopo di arrotondare una tenuta agricola.

Art. 955 A. Impianto / III. Responsabilità

III. Responsabilità1

1 I Cantoni sono responsabili di tutti i danni derivanti dalla tenuta dei registri.

2 Essi hanno regresso verso i funzionari ed impiegati e verso gli organi della vigilanza immediata che fossero in colpa.

3 Possono esigere che i funzionari e gli impiegati prestino garanzia.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 9561A. Impianto / IV. Vigilanza amministrativa

IV. Vigilanza amministrativa

1 La gestione degli uffici del registro fondiario sottostà alla vigilanza amministrativa dei Cantoni.

2 La Confederazione esercita l’alta vigilanza.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 956a1A. Impianto / V. Tutela giurisdizionale / 1. Diritto di ricorso

V. Tutela giurisdizionale

1. Diritto di ricorso

1 Le decisioni dell’ufficio del registro fondiario sono impugnabili con ricorso all’autorità designata dal Cantone; è considerato decisione anche l’indebito diniego o ritardo nel compimento di un’operazione ufficiale.

2 Ha diritto di interporre ricorso:

1.
chiunque è particolarmente toccato da una decisione dell’ufficio del registro fondiario e ha un interesse degno di protezione all’annullamento o alla modifica della stessa;
2.
l’autorità cantonale di vigilanza amministrativa, in quanto il diritto cantonale le accordi tale diritto;
3.
l’autorità federale di alta vigilanza.

3 Contro l’avvenuta iscrizione, modifica o cancellazione di diritti reali o annotazioni nel libro mastro non può essere interposto ricorso.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 956b1A. Impianto / V. Tutela giurisdizionale / 2. Procedura di ricorso

2. Procedura di ricorso

1 Il termine di ricorso alle autorità cantonali è di 30 giorni.

2 Contro l’indebito diniego o ritardo nel compimento di un’operazione ufficiale può essere interposto ricorso in ogni tempo.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 9571

1 Abrogato dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 958 B. Iscrizione / I. Diritti da iscriversi / 1. Proprietà e diritti reali

B. Iscrizione

I. Diritti da iscriversi

1. Proprietà e diritti reali

Nel registro fondiario sono iscritti i seguenti diritti fondiari:

1.
La proprietà;
2.
le servitù e gli oneri fondiari;
3.
i diritti di pegno.
Art. 959 B. Iscrizione / I. Diritti da iscriversi / 2. Annotazioni / a. Diritti personali

2. Annotazioni

a. Diritti personali

1 Possono essere annotati nel registro i diritti personali, quando la loro annotazione sia espressamente prevista dalla legge come nei casi di prelazione, di ricupera, di promessa di vendita, di affitto o di pigione.

2 Mediante l’annotazione diventano efficaci in confronto ai diritti posteriormente acquisiti.

Art. 960 B. Iscrizione / I. Diritti da iscriversi / 2. Annotazioni / b. Restrizioni della facoltà di disporre

b. Restrizioni della facoltà di disporre

1 Le restrizioni della facoltà di disporre possono essere annotate per singoli fondi:

1.
in virtù di un ordine dell’autorità a garanzia di pretese contestate od esecutive;
2.1
per effetto di un pignoramento;
3.2
in virtù di un negozio giuridico per il quale l’annotazione è prevista dalla legge, come nel caso di sostituzioni fedecommissarie.

2 Mediante l’annotazione, le limitazioni della facoltà di disporre diventano efficaci, in confronto ai diritti posteriormente acquisiti.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 4 della LF del 16 dic. 1995, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1997 (RU 1995 1227; FF 1991 III 1).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 4 della LF del 26 giu. 1998, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2000 (RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 961 B. Iscrizione / I. Diritti da iscriversi / 2. Annotazioni / c. Iscrizioni provvisorie

c. Iscrizioni provvisorie

1 Possono essere fatte iscrizioni provvisorie:

1.
a sicurezza di asserti diritti reali;
2.
nei casi in cui sia ammessa per legge la completazione della prova.

2 Esse hanno luogo per consenso di tutti gli interessati o per ordine del giudice e fanno sì che il diritto diventi efficace dal momento dell’iscrizione, per il caso in cui venga posteriormente confermato.

3 Il giudice decide queste domande, accorda l’iscrizione provvisoria dietro giustificazione di un interesse da parte del richiedente, ne stabilisce esattamente la durata e gli effetti e fissa, se occorre, un termine per far valere giudizialmente la pretesa.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 961a1B. Iscrizione / I. Diritti da iscriversi / 2. Annotazioni / d. Iscrizione di diritti di grado posteriore

d. Iscrizione di diritti di grado posteriore

Un’annotazione non impedisce l’iscrizione di un diritto di grado posteriore.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 9621B. Iscrizione / II. Menzioni / 1. Di restrizioni di diritto pubblico della proprietà

II. Menzioni

1. Di restrizioni di diritto pubblico della proprietà

1 L’ente pubblico o un altro titolare di un compito pubblico deve far menzionare nel registro fondiario la restrizione di diritto pubblico di cui ha gravato un determinato fondo con decisione che limita durevolmente l’uso del fondo o la facoltà di disporne o che impone durevolmente al proprietario un obbligo inerente al fondo.

2 Se la restrizione della proprietà decade, l’ente pubblico o il titolare di un compito pubblico deve chiedere la cancellazione della relativa menzione dal registro fondiario. Se la cancellazione non è chiesta, l’ufficio del registro fondiario può procedervi d’ufficio.

3 Il Consiglio federale determina in quali materie del diritto cantonale le restrizioni della proprietà devono essere menzionate nel registro fondiario. I Cantoni possono prevedere altre menzioni. Stabiliscono un elenco dei casi di specie da menzionare e lo comunicano alla Confederazione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 962a1B. Iscrizione / II. Menzioni / 2. Di rappresentanti

2. Di rappresentanti

Nel registro fondiario può essere menzionata l’identità:

1.
del rappresentante legale, su sua richiesta o su quella dell’autorità competente;
2.
dell’amministratore dell’eredità, del rappresentante degli eredi, del liquidatore ufficiale e dell’esecutore testamentario, su loro richiesta o su quella di un erede o dell’autorità competente;
3.
del rappresentante di un proprietario, di un creditore pignoratizio o del titolare di una servitù irreperibili, su sua richiesta o su quella del giudice;
4.
del rappresentante di una persona giuridica o di un altro soggetto giuridico privi degli organi prescritti, su sua richiesta o su quella del giudice;
5.
dell’amministratore della comunione dei comproprietari per piani, su sua richiesta o su quella dell’assemblea dei comproprietari o del giudice.

1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 963 B. Iscrizione / III. Condizioni dell’iscrizione / 1. Indicazioni / a. Per le iscrizioni

III. Condizioni dell’iscrizione

1. Indicazioni

a. Per le iscrizioni

1 Le iscrizioni hanno luogo in virtù di una dichiarazione scritta del proprietario del fondo al quale si riferisce la disposizione.

2 Non occorre una dichiarazione del proprietario se il richiedente si appoggia ad una disposizione di legge, ad una sentenza esecutiva o ad un documento parificato ad una sentenza.

3 I funzionari ai quali è commessa dal diritto cantonale la celebrazione degli atti pubblici, possono essere incaricati dai Cantoni di notificare per l’iscrizione nel registro fondiario i rapporti giuridici risultanti dai loro atti.

Art. 964 B. Iscrizione / III. Condizioni dell’iscrizione / 1. Indicazioni / b. Per le cancellazioni

b. Per le cancellazioni

1 Per cancellare o per variare un’iscrizione occorre una dichiarazione scritta delle persone che vi hanno diritto a norma della medesima.

2 Quest’autorizzazione può essere data con la loro firma nel libro giornale.

Art. 965 B. Iscrizione / III. Condizioni dell’iscrizione / 2. Legittimazione / a. Prova

2. Legittimazione

a. Prova

1 Le operazioni del registro fondiario, come le iscrizioni, le modificazioni, le cancellazioni, possono esser fatte solo quando il richiedente fornisca la prova del diritto di disporre e del titolo giuridico.

2 La prova del diritto di disporre consiste nello stabilire che il richiedente è quella persona che secondo i dati del registro può chiedere l’operazione, od è un suo procuratore.

3 La prova del titolo giuridico consiste nella dimostrazione che sono state osservate le forme richieste per la sua validità.

Art. 966 B. Iscrizione / III. Condizioni dell’iscrizione / 2. Legittimazione / b. Complemento della prova

b. Complemento della prova

1 Quando non siano fornite le prove richieste per un’operazione del registro fondiario, la notificazione deve essere rifiutata.

2 Se però il titolo giuridico è stabilito e si tratta solo di completare la prova del diritto di disporre, si può far luogo ad un’iscrizione provvisoria col consenso del proprietario o per ordine del giudice.

Art. 967 B. Iscrizione / IV. Modo dell’iscrizione / 1. In genere

IV. Modo dell’iscrizione

1. In genere

1 Le iscrizioni nel libro mastro avvengono nell’ordine in cui le notificazioni furono presentate, od in cui furono firmati i documenti o fatte le dichiarazioni davanti all’ufficiale del registro.

2 Di ogni iscrizione è rilasciato agli interessati un estratto a loro richiesta.

3 La forma dell’iscrizione, della cancellazione e degli estratti, è stabilita da un regolamento del Consiglio federale.

Art. 968 B. Iscrizione / IV. Modo dell’iscrizione / 2. Servitù

2. Servitù

L’iscrizione e la cancellazione delle servitù prediali devono aver luogo sui fogli del fondo dominante e del fondo servente.

Art. 969 B. Iscrizione / V. Comunicazione d’officio

V. Comunicazione d’officio

1 L’ufficiale del registro deve notificare agli interessati le operazioni che avvengono a loro insaputa; in particolare, comunica l’acquisto della proprietà da parte di un terzo alle persone il cui diritto di prelazione è annotato nel registro fondiario o è dato per legge e risulta dal registro fondiario.1

2 I termini stabiliti per contestarle decorrono dalla notificazione.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 9701C. Pubblicità del registro / I. Comunicazione di informazioni e consultazione

C. Pubblicità del registro

I. Comunicazione di informazioni e consultazione

1 Chi rende verosimile un interesse ha diritto di consultare il registro fondiario o di farsene rilasciare estratti.

2 Anche senza far valere un interesse, ognuno ha diritto di essere informato sui dati seguenti del libro mastro:

1.
la designazione e la descrizione del fondo;
2.
il nome e l’identità del proprietario;
3.
la forma di proprietà e la data d’acquisto.

3 Il Consiglio federale stabilisce quali altre indicazioni in materia di servitù, di oneri fondiari e di menzioni possono essere messe a disposizione del pubblico senza che si debba rendere verosimile un interesse. Esso tiene conto della protezione della personalità.

4 Nessuno può eccepire di non aver avuto conoscenza di un’iscrizione nel registro fondiario.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 19 dic. 2003 sulla firma elettronica, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2005 (RU 2004 5085; FF 2001 5109).

Art. 970a1C. Pubblicità del registro / II. Pubblicazioni

II. Pubblicazioni

1 I Cantoni possono prevedere la pubblicazione degli acquisti di proprietà fondiaria.

2 Non possono però pubblicare la controprestazione in caso di divisione ereditaria, acconto della quota ereditaria, convenzione matrimoniale o liquidazione dei rapporti patrimoniali tra i coniugi.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821). Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 19 dic. 2003 sulla firma elettronica, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2005 (RU 2004 5085; FF 2001 5109).

Art. 971 D. Effetti / I. Conseguenze della mancata iscrizione

D. Effetti

I. Conseguenze della mancata iscrizione

1 Ove per la costituzione di un diritto reale sia prevista la iscrizione nel registro fondiario, il diritto reale esiste solo in virtù della iscrizione medesima.

2 L’estensione del diritto può essere dimostrata coi documenti od in altro modo entro i limiti dell’iscrizione.

Art. 972 D. Effetti / II. Effetti dell’iscrizione / 1. In genere

II. Effetti dell’iscrizione

1. In genere

1 I diritti reali nascono e ricevono grado e data dall’iscrizione nel libro mastro.

2 Il loro effetto risale al giorno dell’iscrizione nel giornale a condizione che siano in pari tempo prodotti i documenti giustificativi prescritti dalla legge, o che, trattandosi di iscrizioni provvisorie, questi siano posteriormente prodotti in tempo utile.

3 Dove, secondo il diritto cantonale, la celebrazione degli atti pubblici è fatta dall’ufficiale del registro mediante iscrizione in un protocollo, questa tiene luogo dell’iscrizione nel giornale.

Art. 973 D. Effetti / II. Effetti dell’iscrizione / 2. Terzi di buona fede

2. Terzi di buona fede

1 Chi in buona fede, riferendosi ad un’iscrizione nel registro, ha acquistato una proprietà od altri diritti reali, dev’essere protetto nel suo acquisto.

2 La presente disposizione non si applica ai confini dei fondi compresi nei territori interessati da spostamenti di terreno permanenti designati tali dai Cantoni.1


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 4 ott. 1991, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1994 (RU 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 821).

Art. 974 D. Effetti / II. Effetti dell’iscrizione / 3. Terzi di mala fede

3. Terzi di mala fede

1 Quando un diritto reale sia stato iscritto indebitamente, il terzo che ne conosceva o ne doveva conoscere il vizio, non può invocare l’iscrizione.

2 È indebita l’iscrizione avvenuta senza titolo giuridico o per un atto giuridico non vincolante.

3 Chi da una simile iscrizione è pregiudicato in un diritto reale, può opporre direttamente il vizio dell’iscrizione al terzo di mala fede.

Art. 974a1E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni / I. Aggiornamento / 1. In caso di divisione del fondo

E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni

I. Aggiornamento

1. In caso di divisione del fondo

1 Se un fondo è diviso, le iscrizioni relative alle servitù, alle annotazioni e alle menzioni sono aggiornate per ogni sua parte.

2 Il proprietario del fondo da dividere indica all’ufficio del registro fondiario le iscrizioni che devono essere cancellate e quelle che devono essere riportate. In caso contrario la richiesta di divisione è respinta.

3 Se risulta dai documenti giustificativi o dalle circostanze che un’iscrizione non concerne una parte, l’iscrizione è cancellata relativamente a tale parte. La procedura è retta dalle disposizioni concernenti la cancellazione integrale delle iscrizioni.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 974b1E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni / I. Aggiornamento / 2. In caso di riunione di fondi

2. In caso di riunione di fondi

1 Più fondi appartenenti allo stesso proprietario possono essere riuniti soltanto se nessun pegno immobiliare od onere fondiario dev’essere trasferito sul nuovo fondo o se i creditori vi acconsentono.

2 Qualora siano iscritte servitù, annotazioni o menzioni a carico di tali fondi, gli stessi possono essere riuniti soltanto se gli aventi diritto vi acconsentono o non sono pregiudicati nei loro diritti, data la natura dell’onere.

3 Qualora siano iscritte servitù, annotazioni o menzioni a favore di tali fondi, gli stessi possono essere riuniti soltanto se i proprietari dei fondi gravati vi acconsentono o se la riunione non comporta un aggravamento dell’onere.

4 Le disposizioni concernenti l’aggiornamento in caso di divisione del fondo sono applicabili per analogia.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 975 E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni / II. In caso di iscrizione indebita

II. In caso di iscrizione indebita1

1 Essendo stato indebitamente iscritto un diritto reale, od essendo stata indebitamente cancellata o modificata una giusta iscrizione, ognuno che ne sia pregiudicato nei propri diritti reali può chiedere che l’iscrizione sia cancellata o modificata.

2 Rimangono riservati i diritti reali acquisiti da terzi in buona fede in conseguenza dell’iscrizione, e le azioni di risarcimento.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 9761E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni / III. Cancellazione agevolata / 1. Di iscrizioni manifestamente irrilevanti

III. Cancellazione agevolata

1. Di iscrizioni manifestamente irrilevanti

L’ufficio del registro fondiario può cancellare d’ufficio un’iscrizione se:

1.
è limitata nel tempo e ha perso ogni valore giuridico per scadenza del termine;
2.
concerne un diritto che non si può cedere e non si trasmette per successione di cui è titolare una persona defunta;
3.
per ragioni territoriali, essa non può concernere il fondo in questione;
4.
concerne un fondo perito.

1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 976a1E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni / III. Cancellazione agevolata / 2. Di altre iscrizioni / a. In genere

2. Di altre iscrizioni

a. In genere

1 Se un’iscrizione non ha con ogni probabilità valore giuridico, in particolare poiché risulta dai documenti giustificativi o dalle circostanze che essa non concerne il fondo in questione, chiunque ne sia gravato può chiederne la cancellazione.

2 Qualora consideri giustificata la richiesta, l’ufficio del registro fondiario comunica all’avente diritto che, se non fa opposizione entro 30 giorni, l’iscrizione sarà cancellata.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 976b1E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni / III. Cancellazione agevolata / 2. Di altre iscrizioni / b. In caso di opposizione

b. In caso di opposizione

1 Se l’avente diritto fa opposizione, l’ufficio del registro fondiario, ad istanza del gravato, riesamina la richiesta di cancellazione.

2 Qualora concluda che la richiesta debba essere accolta nonostante l’opposizione, l’ufficio del registro fondiario comunica all’avente diritto che, se non propone entro tre mesi un’azione giudiziaria volta ad accertare che l’iscrizione ha valore giuridico, questa sarà cancellata dal libro mastro.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 976c1E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni / III. Cancellazione agevolata / 3. Procedura di aggiornamento pubblica

3. Procedura di aggiornamento pubblica

1 Se in una determinata area le circostanze giuridiche o di fatto sono mutate, sicché un gran numero di servitù, annotazioni o menzioni è divenuto totalmente o in gran parte privo di oggetto o l’ubicazione non è più determinabile, l’autorità designata dal Cantone può ordinare il relativo aggiornamento.

2 Questa misura è menzionata nei fogli dei fondi interessati.

3 I Cantoni disciplinano i dettagli e la procedura. Possono facilitare ulteriormente l’aggiornamento o emanare disposizioni deroganti al diritto federale.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 977 E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni / IV. Rettificazioni E. Cancellazione e modifica delle iscrizioni / IV. Rettificazioni

IV. Rettificazioni1

1 L’ufficiale del registro non può eseguire una rettificazione senza il consenso scritto degli interessati, se non per disposizione del giudice.

2 Invece di rettificarla, si può cancellare l’iscrizione erronea e farne una nuova.

3 La correzione di meri errori di scritturazione si fa d’officio, a norma di analogo regolamento da emanarsi dal Consiglio federale.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).


1 Introdotto dal n. II della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 1 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

  Titolo finale: Dell’entrata in vigore e dell’applicazione del Codice civile

  Capo primo: Dell’applicazione del vecchio e del nuovo diritto

Art. 1 A. Disposizioni generali / I. Regola della non retroattività

A. Disposizioni generali

I. Regola della non retroattività

1 Gli effetti giuridici di fatti anteriori all’entrata in vigore di questo codice sono regolati, anche posteriormente, dalle disposizioni del diritto federale e cantonale che vigevano al tempo in cui detti fatti si sono verificati.

2 Perciò gli atti compiuti prima dell’entrata in vigore del codice sono regolati, per quanto riguarda la loro forza obbligatoria ed i loro effetti, anche per l’avvenire, dalle disposizioni vigenti quando vennero compiuti.

3 Invece i fatti compiutisi posteriormente sono regolati dal diritto nuovo, salve le eccezioni previste dalla legge.

Art. 2 A. Disposizioni generali / II. Retroattività / 1. Ordine pubblico e buoni costumi

II. Retroattività

1. Ordine pubblico e buoni costumi

1 Le disposizioni di questo codice fondate sull’ordine pubblico e sui buoni costumi sono applicabili in tutti i casi dal momento della sua entrata in vigore, salvo le eccezioni previste dalla legge.

2 Perciò le disposizioni del diritto anteriore incompatibili con l’ordine pubblico ed i buoni costumi secondo il concetto della nuova legge si ritengono abrogate.

Art. 3 A. Disposizioni generali / II. Retroattività / 2. Rapporti regolati dalla legge

2. Rapporti regolati dalla legge

I rapporti giuridici, il cui oggetto è regolato dalla legge indipendentemente dalla volontà delle parti, sono sottoposti alla nuova legge dal momento della sua entrata in vigore, anche se compiuti anteriormente.

Art. 4 A. Disposizioni generali / II. Retroattività / 3. Diritti non acquisiti

3. Diritti non acquisiti

I fatti verificatisi sotto l’impero del diritto anteriore, ma dai quali al momento dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice non derivava ancora un diritto acquisito, sono da questo momento regolati nei loro effetti giuridici dalla legge nuova.

Art. 5 B. Diritto delle persone / I. Esercizio dei diritti civili

B. Diritto delle persone

I. Esercizio dei diritti civili

1 L’esercizio dei diritti civili è sottoposto in ogni caso alle disposizioni di questo codice.

2 Tuttavia se al momento dell’entrata in vigore della legge nuova qualcuno avesse l’esercizio dei diritti civili secondo la legge anteriore, ma non secondo la legge nuova, egli sarà riconosciuto capace anche posteriormente.

Art. 6 B. Diritto delle persone / II. Scomparsa

II. Scomparsa

1 La dichiarazione di scomparsa è sottoposta alla legge nuova dal momento della sua entrata in vigore.

2 La dichiarazione di morte o di assenza del diritto precedente avrà, dopo l’entrata in vigore di questo codice, gli effetti della dichiarazione di scomparsa della legge nuova, rimanendo però in vigore le conseguenze giuridiche verificatesi precedentemente secondo la legge anteriore, come la devoluzione d’eredità o lo scioglimento del matrimonio.

3 Le procedure in corso al momento dell’entrata in vigore del Codice civile saranno ricominciate secondo le disposizioni della legge nuova, tenuto calcolo del tempo già trascorso, oppure, a richiesta degli interessati, saranno proseguite secondo la legge anteriore, osservati i termini della medesima.

Art. 6a1B. Diritto delle persone / IIa. Banca dati centrale dello stato civile

IIa. Banca dati centrale dello stato civile

1 Il Consiglio federale disciplina il passaggio alla gestione elettronica dei registri.

2 La Confederazione si assume le spese d’investimento fino a 5 milioni di franchi.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 5 ott. 2001 (Gestione elettronica dei registri dello stato civile), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2004 (RU 2004 2911; FF 2001 1417).

Art. 6b1B. Diritto delle persone / III. Persone giuridiche / 1. In genere

III. Persone giuridiche

1. In genere2

1 Le organizzazioni corporative, gli istituti e le fondazioni che hanno acquisito la personalità giuridica sotto la legge precedente, la conservano sotto questo codice, anche se non potessero acquistarla secondo le sue disposizioni.

2 Le persone giuridiche già esistenti, per la cui costituzione, secondo le prescrizioni della nuova legge sarebbe necessaria l’iscrizione in un registro pubblico, devono, entro il termine di cinque anni dall’entrata in vigore della medesima, ottenere questa iscrizione, anche se non era prescritta dal diritto anteriore; decorso questo termine senza essere iscritte, la loro personalità non è più riconosciuta.

2bis Le fondazioni ecclesiastiche e le fondazioni di famiglia che al momento dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del 12 dicembre 2014 (art. 52 cpv. 2) non sono iscritte nel registro di commercio conservano la personalità giuridica. Devono tuttavia farsi iscrivere nel registro di commercio entro cinque anni. Nello stabilire i requisiti dell’iscrizione, il Consiglio federale tiene conto della situazione particolare delle fondazioni ecclesiastiche.3

3 I diritti inerenti alla personalità sono determinati per tutte le persone giuridiche da questo codice, dal momento della sua entrata in vigore.


1 Originario art. 7 e art. 6a.
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).
3 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 12 dic. 2014 concernente l’attuazione delle Raccomandazioni del Gruppo d’azione finanziaria rivedute nel 2012, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2016 (RU 2015 1389; FF 2014 563).

Art. 6c1B. Diritto delle persone / IV. Protezione della personalità da violenze, minacce e insidie 

2. Contabilità e ufficio di revisione

Le disposizioni della modifica del 16 dicembre 20052 concernenti la contabilità e l’ufficio di revisione si applicano dal primo esercizio che comincia con l’entrata in vigore della presente legge o successivamente.

Art. 6d3

IV. Protezione della personalità da violenze, minacce e insidie 

Ai procedimenti pendenti al momento dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del 14 dicembre 2018 si applica la legge nuova.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 1 della LF del 16 dic. 2005 (Diritto della società a garanzia limitata; adeguamento del diritto della società anonima, della società cooperativa, del registro di commercio e delle ditte commerciali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2008 (RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545).
2RU 2007 4791; FF 2002 2841, 2004 3545
3 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 14 dic. 2018 intesa a migliorare la protezione delle vittime di violenza, in vigore dal 1° lug. 2020 (RU 2019 2273; FF 2017 6267).

Art. 71C. Diritto di famiglia / I. Celebrazione del matrimonio

C. Diritto di famiglia

I. Celebrazione del matrimonio

1 Il matrimonio è retto dalla legge nuova dopo l’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 26 giugno 19982.

2 Dall’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, i matrimoni per cui il diritto anteriore prevede una causa di nullità possono essere annullati solo secondo le disposizioni della nuova legge, computando tuttavia nei termini il tempo decorso anteriormente.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 4 della LF del 16 dic. 1995, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1997 (RU 1995 1227; FF 1991 III 1).
2RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1

Art. 7a1C. Diritto di famiglia / Ibis. Divorzio / 1. Principio

Ibis. Divorzio

1. Principio

1 Il divorzio è retto dalla legge nuova dopo l’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 26 giugno 19982.

2 I divorzi passati in giudicato secondo il diritto anteriore conservano i loro effetti; le nuove disposizioni sull’esecuzione sono applicabili alle rendite o alle liquidazioni in capitale statuite per sopperire alla perdita del diritto al mantenimento o a titolo di contributi di mantenimento.

3 La modifica della sentenza di divorzio è retta dalla legge anteriore, fatte salve le disposizioni relative ai figli e alla procedura.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 4 della LF del 16 dic. 1995, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1997 (RU 1995 1227; FF 1991 III 1).
2RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1

Art. 7b1C. Diritto di famiglia / Ibis. Divorzio / 2. Processi di divorzio pendenti

2. Processi di divorzio pendenti

1 Ai processi di divorzio pendenti al momento dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 26 giugno 19982 e che devono essere giudicati da un’istanza cantonale, si applica la legge nuova.

2 Le parti possono presentare nuove conclusioni sulle questioni toccate dal cambiamento del diritto applicabile; i punti della sentenza che non sono stati impugnati rimangono vincolanti, a meno che siano così strettamente connessi con le conclusioni non ancora giudicate da giustificarsi una decisione complessiva.

3 Il Tribunale federale applica la legge anteriore allorché la decisione impugnata è stata pronunciata prima dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 26 giugno 1998; lo stesso vale anche in caso di rinvio all’autorità cantonale.


1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 4 della LF del 16 dic. 1995, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1997 (RU 1995 1227; FF 1991 III 1).
2RU 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1

Art. 7c1C. Diritto di famiglia / Ibis. Divorzio / 3. Termine di separazione nei processi di divorzio pendenti

3. Termine di separazione nei processi di divorzio pendenti

Nei processi di divorzio pendenti al momento dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 19 dicembre 20032 e che devono essere giudicati da un’istanza cantonale si applica il termine di separazione previsto dalla legge nuova.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 19 dic. 2003 (Termine di separazione nel diritto del divorzio), in vigore dal 1° giu. 2004 (RU 2004 2161; FF 2003 7101 5066).
2RU 2004 2161

Art. 7d1C. Diritto di famiglia / Ibis. Divorzio / 4. Previdenza professionale

4. Previdenza professionale

1 La previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio è retta dalla legge nuova dopo l’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 19 giugno 2015.

2 Ai processi di divorzio pendenti dinanzi a un’autorità cantonale al momento dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 19 giugno 2015 si applica la legge nuova.

3 Il Tribunale federale applica la legge anteriore allorché la decisione impugnata è stata pronunciata prima dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 19 giugno 2015; lo stesso vale anche in caso di rinvio all’autorità cantonale.


1 Introdotto dal n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).

Art. 7e1C. Diritto di famiglia / Ibis. Divorzio / 5. Conversione di rendite in corso

5. Conversione di rendite in corso

1 Se, in un divorzio pronunciato dopo che sia sopraggiunto un caso di previdenza, il giudice ha assegnato al coniuge creditore, secondo la legge anteriore, un’indennità sotto forma di rendita che si estingue soltanto con la morte del coniuge debitore o del coniuge creditore, quest’ultimo può chiedere al giudice, entro un anno dall’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 19 giugno 2015, di assegnargli invece una rendita vitalizia secondo l’articolo 124a, sempre che il coniuge debitore percepisca una rendita d’invalidità e abbia già raggiunto l’età di pensionamento stabilita dal regolamento oppure percepisca una rendita di vecchiaia.

2 Per quanto concerne le decisioni straniere, la competenza è regolata secondo l’articolo 64 della legge federale del 18 dicembre 19872 sul diritto internazionale privato.

3 La rendita secondo la legge anteriore vale come parte di rendita assegnata.


1 Introdotto dal n. 1 della LF del 19 giu. 2015 (Conguaglio della previdenza professionale in caso di divorzio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 2313; FF 2013 4151).
2 RS 291

Art. 81C. Diritto di famiglia / Iter. Effetti del matrimonio in generale / 1. Principio

Iter. Effetti del matrimonio in generale

1. Principio

Gli effetti del matrimonio in generale sono retti dalla legge nuova dopo l’entrata in vigore della legge federale del 5 ottobre 1984.


1 Nuovo testo giusta dall’all. n. 4 della LF del 16 dic. 1995, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1997 (RU 1995 1227; FF 1991 III 1).

Art. 8a1C. Diritto di famiglia / Iter. Effetti del matrimonio in generale / 2. Cognome

2. Cognome

Il coniuge che ha cambiato cognome in occasione del matrimonio prima dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 30 settembre 2011 può in ogni tempo dichiarare all’ufficiale dello stato civile di voler riprendere il proprio cognome da celibe o nubile.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 8b1C. Diritto di famiglia / Iter. Effetti del matrimonio in generale / 3. Cittadinanza

3. Cittadinanza

La svizzera maritatasi sotto la legge anteriore può entro un anno dall’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, dichiarare all’autorità competente del suo vecchio Cantone d’origine di voler riprendere la cittadinanza che aveva da nubile.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 91C. Diritto di famiglia / II. Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati prima del 1° gennaio 1912

II. Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati prima del 1° gennaio 1912

Gli effetti patrimoniali dei matrimoni celebrati prima del 1° gennaio 1912 sono retti dalle disposizioni del presente codice sull’applicazione del vecchio e del nuovo diritto, entrate in vigore a quella data.2


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).
2 Per l’applicazione del diritto transitorio vedi anche le previgenti disposizioni del titolo sesto, alla fine del Codice civile.

Art. 9a1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 1. In genere

II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912

1. In genere

1 Salvo diversa disposizione, i matrimoni esistenti al momento dell’entrata in vigore della legge federale del 5 ottobre 1984 sono sottoposti alla legge nuova.

2 Gli effetti patrimoniali dei matrimoni sciolti prima dell’entrata in vigore della legge federale del 5 ottobre 1984 sono retti dalla legge anteriore.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 9b1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 2. Passaggio dall’unione dei beni alla partecipazione agli acquisti / a. Modificazione delle masse patrimoniali

2. Passaggio dall’unione dei beni alla partecipazione agli acquisti

a. Modificazione delle masse patrimoniali

1 I coniugi che vivevano nel regime dell’unione dei beni sotto la legge anteriore sottostanno, nei loro rapporti reciproci e verso i terzi, alle nuove norme sulla partecipazione agli acquisti.

2 I beni appartenenti a ciascun coniuge diventano suoi beni propri o suoi acquisti conformemente alle norme sulla partecipazione agli acquisti; i beni riservati costituiti per convenzione matrimoniale diventano beni propri.

3 La moglie ricupera la proprietà dei suoi apporti passati in proprietà del marito o ha un credito compensativo corrispondente.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 9c1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 2. Passaggio dall’unione dei beni alla partecipazione agli acquisti / b. Privilegio

b. Privilegio

Le disposizioni della legge anteriore sui crediti della moglie per gli apporti che più non si rinvenissero in caso di fallimento del marito o di pignoramento dei beni del medesimo rimangono applicabili per dieci anni dopo l’entrata in vigore della legge nuova.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 9d1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 2. Passaggio dall’unione dei beni alla partecipazione agli acquisti / c. Liquidazione del regime dei beni sotto la legge nuova

c. Liquidazione del regime dei beni sotto la legge nuova

1 Dopo l’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, la liquidazione fra i coniugi del regime dei beni è retta, per tutta la durata del precedente regime comune e del nuovo regime ordinario, dalle norme sulla partecipazione agli acquisti, salvo che i coniugi, al momento di questa entrata in vigore, abbiano già terminato la liquidazione secondo le disposizioni sull’unione dei beni.

2 Prima dell’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, ogni coniuge può comunicare per scritto all’altro che il loro regime d’unione dei beni sarà sciolto secondo le disposizioni della legge anteriore.

3 Se il regime dei beni è sciolto in seguito all’accoglimento di un’azione proposta prima dell’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, la liquidazione si fa secondo la legge anteriore.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 9e1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 3. Mantenimento dell’unione dei beni

3. Mantenimento dell’unione dei beni

1 I coniugi che vivevano nel regime comune dell’unione dei beni sotto la legge anteriore possono, entro un anno dall’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, dichiarare per scritto e congiuntamente all’ufficio del registro dei beni matrimoniali del loro domicilio di voler mantenere questo regime purché non l’abbiano modificato per convenzione matrimoniale; l’ufficio del registro dei beni matrimoniali tiene un elenco pubblico di queste dichiarazioni.

2 Il regime dei beni è però opponibile ai terzi soltanto se ne sono o ne dovevano essere a conoscenza.

3 I beni riservati dei coniugi sono sottoposti alle nuove norme sulla separazione dei beni.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 9f1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 4. Mantenimento della separazione dei beni legale o giudiziale

4. Mantenimento della separazione dei beni legale o giudiziale

I coniugi che vivevano nel regime della separazione dei beni legale o giudiziale sotto la legge anteriore sottostanno alle nuove norme sulla separazione dei beni.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 101C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 5. Convenzioni matrimoniali / a. In genere

5. Convenzioni matrimoniali

a. In genere

1 Se i coniugi hanno conchiuso una convenzione matrimoniale giusta le disposizioni del Codice civile svizzero del 10 dicembre 1907, tale convenzione conserva la sua validità e, salve le disposizioni del presente titolo concernenti i beni riservati, l’efficacia verso i terzi e la separazione convenzionale dei beni, il loro intero regime dei beni rimane sottoposto alle norme della legge anteriore.

2 I beni riservati dei coniugi sottostanno alle nuove norme sulla separazione dei beni.

3 Le convenzioni che modificano la partecipazione all’aumento o alle diminuzioni nel regime dell’unione dei beni non devono pregiudicare i diritti alla legittima dei figli non comuni e dei loro discendenti.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 10a1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 5. Convenzioni matrimoniali / b. Efficacia verso i terzi

b. Efficacia verso i terzi

1 Il regime dei beni è opponibile ai terzi soltanto se ne sono o ne dovevano essere a conoscenza.

2 Se la convenzione matrimoniale non è giuridicamente efficace verso i terzi, rispetto a loro valgono le nuove norme sulla partecipazione agli acquisti.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 10b1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 5. Convenzioni matrimoniali / c. Sottoposizione alla legge nuova

c. Sottoposizione alla legge nuova

1 I coniugi che vivevano nel regime comune dell’unione dei beni sotto la legge anteriore, ma lo avevano modificato per convenzione matrimoniale, possono, entro un anno dall’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, dichiarare per scritto e congiuntamente all’ufficio del registro dei beni matrimoniali del loro domicilio di voler sottoporre i loro rapporti giuridici al nuovo regime ordinario della partecipazione agli acquisti.

2 In tal caso, la partecipazione convenzionale all’aumento vale per la somma totale degli aumenti della sostanza d’ambo i coniugi, salvo che si sia altrimenti stabilito per convenzione matrimoniale.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 10c1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 5. Convenzioni matrimoniali / d. Separazione convenzionale dei beni secondo la legge anteriore

d. Separazione convenzionale dei beni secondo la legge anteriore

I coniugi che avevano adottato la separazione dei beni sotto la legge anteriore sono sottoposti alle nuove norme sulla separazione dei beni.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 10d1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 5. Convenzioni matrimoniali / e. Convenzioni matrimoniali concluse in vista dell’entrata in vigore della legge nuova

e. Convenzioni matrimoniali concluse in vista dell’entrata in vigore della legge nuova

Le convenzioni matrimoniali concluse prima dell’entrata in vigore della legge federale del 5 ottobre 1984 ma efficaci soltanto sotto la legge nuova non sottostanno all’approvazione dell’autorità tutoria.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 10e1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 5. Convenzioni matrimoniali / f. Registro dei beni matrimoniali

f. Registro dei beni matrimoniali

1 Con l’entrata in vigore della legge federale del 5 ottobre 1984 non saranno più fatte nuove iscrizioni nel registro dei beni matrimoniali.

2 Il diritto di consultare il registro rimane garantito.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 111C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 6. Estinzione di debiti in caso di liquidazione del regime dei beni

6. Estinzione di debiti in caso di liquidazione del regime dei beni

Il coniuge che, in una liquidazione connessa con l’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, deve pagare debiti pecuniari o restituire cose può, qualora dovesse per ciò incorrere in serie difficoltà, chiedere dilazioni; se le circostanze lo giustificano, dovrà fornire garanzie.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 11a1C. Diritto di famiglia / II.bis Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati dopo il 1o gennaio 1912 / 7. Protezione dei creditori

7. Protezione dei creditori

Le norme sulla protezione dei creditori in caso di modificazione del regime dei beni s’applicano, quanto alla responsabilità, anche alle modificazioni determinate dall’entrata in vigore della legge federale del 5 ottobre 1984.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1119).

Art. 121C. Diritto di famiglia / III. Filiazione in genere

III. Filiazione in genere

1 Il sorgere e gli effetti della filiazione sono soggetti alla legge nuova dall’entrata in vigore di questo codice; è riservato l’acquisto del cognome e della cittadinanza verificatosi sotto la legge anteriore.

2 Se all’entrata in vigore della legge nuova si trovano sotto tutela dei figli che secondo la stessa soggiacciono per legge all’autorità parentale, la tutela, al più tardi un anno dopo, sarà sostituita da questa salvo che non sia stato ordinato il contrario giusta le disposizioni sulla privazione dell’autorità parentale.

3 Il trasferimento o la privazione dell’autorità parentale deciso dall’autorità secondo la legge anteriore rimane efficace anche dopo l’entrata in vigore della legge nuova.

4 Se all’entrata in vigore della modifica del 21 giugno 2013 l’autorità parentale spetta a un solo genitore, l’altro genitore può, entro un anno dall’entrata in vigore del nuovo diritto, chiedere all’autorità competente di disporre l’autorità parentale congiunta. L’articolo 298b si applica per analogia.2

5 Il genitore che in occasione del divorzio è stato privato dell’autorità parentale può rivolgersi individualmente al giudice competente soltanto se il divorzio non risale a più di cinque anni dall’entrata in vigore della modifica del 21 giugno 2013.3


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).
3 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 21 giu. 2013 (Autorità parentale), in vigore dal 1° lug. 2014 (RU 2014 357; FF 2011 8025).

Art. 12a1C. Diritto di famiglia / IIIbis. Adozione / 1. Mantenimento del diritto anteriore

IIIbis. Adozione

1. Mantenimento del diritto anteriore

1 L’adozione pronunciata prima dell’entrata in vigore delle nuove norme della legge federale del 30 giugno 1972 che modifica il Codice civile svizzero rimane sottoposta al diritto entrato in vigore il lo gennaio 19122; i consensi dati validamente secondo tale diritto rimangono in ogni caso efficaci.

Le persone che non hanno ancora compiuto venti anni al momento dell’entrata in vigore della legge federale del 7 ottobre 1994, anche se sono maggiorenni, possono ancora essere adottate secondo le disposizioni applicabili ai minorenni nella misura in cui la domanda sia presentata prima del compimento del ventesimo anno d’età e nei due anni successivi all’entrata in vigore della legge suddetta.3


1 Introdotto dal n. I 3 della LF del 30 giu. 1972, in vigore dal 1° apr. 1973 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85).
2 Art. 465 CC nel testo del 1° gen. 1912: 1 Il figlio adottivo ed i suoi discendenti hanno, verso l’adottante, i medesimi diritti ereditari dei discendenti legittimi. 2 L’adottante ed i suoi parenti consanguinei non hanno diritto all’eredità dell’adottato.
3 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 7 ott. 1994, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1996 (RU 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 921).

Art. 12b1C. Diritto di famiglia / IIIbis. Adozione / 2. Procedure pendenti

2. Procedure pendenti

Alle procedure di adozione pendenti all’entrata in vigore della modifica del 17 giugno 2016 si applica il nuovo diritto.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 3 della LF del 30 giu. 1972 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 12c1C. Diritto di famiglia / IIIbis. Adozione / 3. Soggezione al nuovo diritto

3. Soggezione al nuovo diritto

Le disposizioni della modifica del 17 giugno 2016 relative al segreto dell’adozione, all’informazione circa i genitori biologici e i loro discendenti nonché alla possibile convenzione sulle relazioni personali tra i genitori biologici e l’adottato si applicano anche alle adozioni pronunciate prima dell’entrata in vigore o pendenti al momento dell’entrata in vigore di dette disposizioni.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 3 della LF del 30 giu. 1972 (RU 1972 2653; FF 1971 II 85). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 12cbis1

1 Introdotto dall’all. n. 2 della LF del 22 giu. 2001 relativa alla Convenzione dell’Aia sull’adozione e a provvedimenti per la protezione del minore nelle adozioni internazionali, (RU 2002 3988; FF 1999 4799). Abrogato dal n. I della LF del 17 giu. 2016 (Adozione), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2018 (RU 2017 3699; FF 2015 793).

Art. 12d1C. Diritto di famiglia / IIIter. Contestazione della legittimazione

IIIter. Contestazione della legittimazione

Le disposizioni della legge nuova sulla contestazione del riconoscimento dopo il matrimonio dei genitori si applicano per analogia alla contestazione della legittimazione avvenuta sotto la legge anteriore.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 131C. Diritto di famiglia / IV. Azione di paternità / 1. Azioni pendenti

IV. Azione di paternità

1. Azioni pendenti

1 Le azioni pendenti al momento dell’entrata in vigore della legge nuova sono giudicate secondo questa.

2 Gli effetti fino all’entrata in vigore della legge nuova sono determinati secondo la legge anteriore.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 13a1C. Diritto di famiglia / IV. Azione di paternità / 2. Nuove azioni

2. Nuove azioni

1 Se l’obbligo del padre di fornire prestazioni pecuniarie è stato costituito mediante decisione giudiziale o contratto prima dell’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, il figlio che al momento dell’entrata in vigore della legge nuova non ha ancora compiuto il decimo anno di età può, entro due anni, proporre l’azione di accertamento della filiazione paterna secondo le nuove disposizioni.

2 Se il convenuto dimostra che la sua paternità è esclusa o meno verosimile di quella altrui, il diritto al mantenimento futuro si estingue.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF del 25 giu. 1976, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1978 (RU 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 13b1C. Diritto di famiglia / IVbis. Termine per l’accertamento e la contestazione del rapporto di filiazione

IVbis. Termine per l’accertamento e la contestazione del rapporto di filiazione

Chi raggiunge la maggiore età in virtù dell’entrata in vigore della legge federale del 7 ottobre 1994 può in ogni caso proporre ancora entro un anno azione di accertamento o contestazione del rapporto di filiazione.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 7 ott. 1994, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1996 (RU 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 921).

Art. 13c1C. Diritto di famiglia / IVter. Contributi di mantenimento / 1. Titoli di mantenimento esistenti

IVter. Contributi di mantenimento

1. Titoli di mantenimento esistenti

I contributi di mantenimento del figlio fissati prima dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del 20 marzo 2015 in un contratto di mantenimento approvato o in una decisione sono ridefiniti ad istanza del figlio. Se sono stati fissati unitamente ai contributi di mantenimento per il genitore, possono essere modificati soltanto se le circostanze sono notevolmente mutate.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 1 della LF del 7 ott. 1994 (RU 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 921). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 13cbis1C. Diritto di famiglia / IVter. Contributi di mantenimento / 2. Procedimenti pendenti

2. Procedimenti pendenti

1 Ai procedimenti pendenti al momento dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del 20 marzo 2015 si applica il nuovo diritto.

2 Il Tribunale federale applica il diritto anteriore se la decisione impugnata è stata pronunciata prima dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del 20 marzo 2015; lo stesso vale anche in caso di rinvio all’autorità cantonale.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 20 mar. 2015 (Mantenimento del figlio), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2015 4299; FF 2014 489).

Art. 13d1C. Diritto di famiglia / IVquater. Cognome del figlio

IVquater. Cognome del figlio

1 Se dopo l’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 30 settembre 2011 non portano più un cognome coniugale in virtù di una dichiarazione secondo l’articolo 8a del presente titolo, i genitori possono, entro un anno dall’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, dichiarare che il figlio assume il cognome da celibe o nubile del genitore che ha fatto la dichiarazione suddetta.

2 Se l’autorità parentale su un figlio di genitori non uniti in matrimonio è stata attribuita in comune ai genitori o soltanto al padre prima dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice del 30 settembre 2011, la dichiarazione di cui all’articolo 270a capoversi 2 e 3 può essere fatta entro un anno dall’entrata in vigore della legge nuova.

3 È fatto salvo il consenso del figlio secondo l’articolo 270b.


1 Introdotto dal n. I della LF del 30 set. 2011 (Cognome e cittadinanza), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2012 2569; FF 2009 6577 6585).

Art. 141C. Diritto di famiglia / V. Protezione degli adulti / 1. Misure sussistenti

V. Protezione degli adulti

1. Misure sussistenti

1 La protezione degli adulti è retta dal nuovo diritto non appena la modifica del 19 dicembre 20082 entra in vigore.

2 Con l’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, le persone interdette secondo il diritto anteriore sono sottoposte a curatela generale. Non appena possibile, l’autorità di protezione degli adulti provvede d’ufficio ai necessari adeguamenti al nuovo diritto. In caso di autorità parentale protratta, i genitori sono dispensati dagli obblighi di compilare un inventario, di presentare periodicamente un rapporto e i conti e di ottenere il consenso per determinati atti o negozi, finché l’autorità di protezione degli adulti non decida altrimenti.

3 Le altre misure ordinate secondo il diritto anteriore decadono al più tardi tre anni dopo l’entrata in vigore della modifica del 19 dicembre 2008, eccetto che l’autorità di protezione degli adulti le abbia convertite in una misura prevista dal nuovo diritto.

4 Sono mantenute le misure di privazione della libertà a scopo d’assistenza che un medico ha ordinato per una durata illimitata, in virtù dell’articolo 397b capoverso 2 nel tenore del 1° gennaio 19813, per una persona affetta da malattia psichica. Al più tardi sei mesi dopo l’entrata in vigore della legge nuova, l’istituto comunica all’autorità di protezione degli adulti se considera che permangono adempite le condizioni del ricovero. L’autorità di protezione degli adulti procede agli accertamenti necessari secondo le disposizioni sulla verifica periodica e, se del caso, conferma la decisione di ricovero.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
2RU 2011 725
3 RU 1980 31

Art. 14a1C. Diritto di famiglia / V. Protezione degli adulti / 2. Procedimenti pendenti

2. Procedimenti pendenti

1 Con l’entrata in vigore della modifica del 19 dicembre 20082, i procedimenti pendenti sono continuati dalla nuova autorità competente.

2 Si applica il nuovo diritto di procedura.

3 L’autorità decide se e in quale misura il procedimento di cui si tratta debba essere completato.


1 Introdotto dal n. II della LF del 6 ott. 1978 (RU 1980 3l; FF 1977 III 1). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
2RU 2011 725

Art. 15 D. Diritto successorio / I. Eredi e devoluzione

D. Diritto successorio

I. Eredi e devoluzione

1 I rapporti di diritto successorio e gli effetti del regime matrimoniale inseparabilmente collegati cogli stessi secondo la legge cantonale e che nascono dalla morte di un padre, di una madre, o di un coniuge avvenuta prima dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice, sono regolati anche dopo quest’epoca dal diritto anteriore.

2 Questa disposizione si riferisce tanto agli eredi quanto alla devoluzione dell’eredità.

Art. 16 D. Diritto successorio / II. Disposizioni a causa di morte

II. Disposizioni a causa di morte

1 La confezione o l’annullazione di una disposizione a causa di morte, compiuta prima dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice, da una persona capace di disporre conformemente alla legge allora vigente, non può essere impugnata per il motivo che il disponente è morto dopo l’entrata in vigore del nuovo codice e che, secondo le disposizioni di questo, non sarebbe capace di disporre.

2 Una disposizione d’ultima volontà non può essere impugnata per difetto di forma, quando sieno state osservate le formalità richieste al tempo della confezione o al tempo della morte.

3 Quando il disponente sia morto dopo l’entrata in vigore di questo codice, l’azione di riduzione per sorpasso della porzione disponibile e quella di nullità circa il modo di disporre, sono regolate dal nuovo codice, per tutte le disposizioni a causa di morte.

Art. 17 E. Diritti reali / I. In genere

E. Diritti reali

I. In genere

1 I diritti reali acquisiti prima dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice continuano a sussistere sotto riserva delle disposizioni sul registro fondiario.

2 Tuttavia l’estensione della proprietà e dei diritti reali limitati è soggetta al diritto nuovo dopo l’entrata in vigore del Codice civile, in quanto non sia fatta da questo una eccezione.

3 Se questi diritti non potessero essere costituiti secondo il nuovo codice, rimangono sottoposti alla legge anteriore.

Art. 18 E. Diritti reali / II. Azione per l’iscrizione nel registro

II. Azione per l’iscrizione nel registro

1 Le azioni personali per la costituzione di un diritto reale, nate prima dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice, sono riconosciute, in quanto corrispondano ai requisiti formali del precedente o del nuovo diritto.

2 Il regolamento sulla tenuta del registro fondiario conterrà le disposizioni circa le giustificazioni da fornirsi per la iscrizione di tali diritti.

3 L’estensione di un diritto reale costituito mediante atto giuridico, prima dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice, è mantenuta anche sotto l’impero della legge nuova, in quanto non sia incompatibile con la stessa.

Art. 19 E. Diritti reali / III. Prescrizione acquisitiva

III. Prescrizione acquisitiva

1 La prescrizione acquisitiva è sottoposta alla nuova legge dal momento dell’entrata in vigore di questa.

2 Se però una prescrizione acquisitiva, ammessa anche dalla nuova legge, era già cominciata sotto la legge anteriore, il tempo trascorso fino all’entrata in vigore di questo codice è computato proporzionalmente nel termine della legge nuova.

Art. 201E. Diritti reali / IV. Diritti di proprietà speciali / 1. Alberi nell’altrui fondo

IV. Diritti di proprietà speciali

1. Alberi nell’altrui fondo

1 I preesistenti diritti di proprietà sopra gli alberi nel fondo altrui sono ancora riconosciuti secondo il diritto cantonale.

2 I Cantoni sono autorizzati ad abolire od a restringere questi diritti preesistenti.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. IV della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 20bis1E. Diritti reali / IV. Diritti di proprietà speciali / 2. Proprietà per piani / a. Originaria

2. Proprietà per piani

a. Originaria

La proprietà per piani secondo il vecchio diritto cantonale è assoggettata alle nuove disposizioni, anche se i piani o le porzioni di piano non siano appartamenti o locali commerciali costituenti un tutto.


1 Introdotto dal n. IV della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 20ter1E. Diritti reali / IV. Diritti di proprietà speciali / 2. Proprietà per piani / b. Trasformata

b. Trasformata

1 Cantoni possono assoggettare alle nuove prescrizioni anche la proprietà per piani iscritta nel registro fondiario nelle forme previste dalla legge entrata in vigore il 1° gennaio 1912.

2 L’assoggettamento avrà effetto non appena l’iscrizione del registro fondiario sia stata modificata in maniera corrispondente.


1 Introdotto dal n. IV della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 20quater1E. Diritti reali / IV. Diritti di proprietà speciali / 2. Proprietà per piani / c. Epurazione dei registri fondiari

c. Epurazione dei registri fondiari

Per assoggettare alla nuova legge la proprietà per piani trasformata e iscrivere quella vecchia originaria, i Cantoni possono ordinare l’epurazione dei registri fondiari ed emanare a questo scopo disposizioni speciali di procedura.


1 Introdotto dal n. IV della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 21 E. Diritti reali / V. Servitù

V. Servitù

1 Le servitù costituite prima dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice rimangono in vigore senza iscrizione anche dopo l’introduzione del registro fondiario, ma finché non sono iscritte non sono opponibili ai terzi di buona fede.

2 Gli obblighi connessi a titolo accessorio a una servitù costituiti prima dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice dell’11 dicembre 20091 e risultanti soltanto dai documenti giustificativi del registro fondiario rimangono opponibili ai terzi che si riferiscono in buona fede al registro fondiario.2


1RU 2011 4637
2 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 22 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 1. Riconoscimento dei titoli preesistenti

VI. Pegno immobiliare

1. Riconoscimento dei titoli preesistenti

1 I titoli di pegno immobiliare costituiti prima dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice, rimangono in vigore senza bisogno di essere coordinati con la legge nuova.

2 È però riservato ai Cantoni di prescrivere la rinnovazione dei titoli preesistenti entro dati termini, secondo le norme della legge nuova.

Art. 23 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 2. Costituzione di diritti nuovi

2. Costituzione di diritti nuovi

1 Dopo l’entrata in vigore del nuovo codice, i nuovi diritti di pegno immobiliare potranno essere costituiti solo nei modi da esso stabiliti.

2 Fino all’introduzione del registro fondiario rimangono però in vigore per la loro costituzione le precedenti forme del diritto cantonale.

Art. 24 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 3. Estinzione di titoli

3. Estinzione di titoli

1 L’estinzione e la conversione dei titoli, la liberazione del pegno e simili operazioni sono soggette alla legge nuova dall’entrata in vigore di questo codice.

2 Fino all’introduzione del registro fondiario si osservano le forme del diritto cantonale.

Art. 25 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 4. Estensione della garanzia

4. Estensione della garanzia

1 L’estensione della garanzia del pegno immobiliare è determinata, in ogni caso, dalla legge nuova.

2 Però se con speciale convenzione, il creditore avesse validamente ricevuto in pegno determinati oggetti insieme con un fondo, il diritto di pegno sui medesimi sussiste anche se non sia conforme alle disposizioni del nuovo codice.

Art. 26 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 5. Diritti ed obblighi delle parti / a. In genere

5. Diritti ed obblighi delle parti

a. In genere

1 I diritti e le obbligazioni del creditore e del debitore circa i pegni immobiliari esistenti al momento dell’entrata in vigore del Codice civile, sono regolati dalla legge anteriore, in quanto trattisi di effetti contrattuali.

2 Gli effetti stabiliti per legge e che non possono essere modificati mediante convenzione sono regolati da quel momento dalla legge nuova anche per i diritti di pegno precedentemente costituiti.

3 Se il diritto di pegno si estende a più fondi, l’estensione del diritto rimane regolata dalla legge precedente.

Art. 27 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 5. Diritti ed obblighi delle parti / b. Provvedimenti conservativi

b. Provvedimenti conservativi

I diritti del creditore per tutta la durata del vincolo pignoratizio, in ispecie i diritti di ottenere provvedimenti conservativi, sono regolati dalla nuova legge, per tutte le forme di pegno immobiliare, a datare dall’entrata in vigore di questo codice; lo stesso avviene per i diritti del debitore.

Art. 28 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 5. Diritti ed obblighi delle parti / c. Disdetta e trasmissione

c. Disdetta e trasmissione

La disdetta dei crediti garantiti da pegno immobiliare e la trasmissione dei titoli sono regolati dalla legge anteriore per tutti i diritti già costituiti al momento dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice, riservate le prescrizioni imperative del diritto nuovo.

Art. 29 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 6. Grado

6. Grado

1 Il grado dei diritti di pegno è determinato dal diritto anteriore fino alla iscrizione1 dei fondi nel registro fondiario.

2 Dopo l’introduzione del registro il grado dei crediti sarà determinato dalle disposizioni di questo codice.


1 Nel testo tedesco «Aufnahme» e in quello francese «immatriculation», ossia «intavolazione».

Art. 30 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 7. Posto di pegno

7. Posto di pegno

1 Il diritto ad un posto di pegno fisso od il diritto del creditore di subentrare in un altro posto sarà regolato dalla legge nuova, dopo cinque anni dall’entrata in vigore del nuovo codice, o prima d’allora con l’introduzione del registro, sotto riserva dei diritti particolari garantiti al creditore.

2 I Cantoni possono emanare disposizioni transitorie complementari.1


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II 21 della LF del 15 dic. 1989 concernente l’approvazione di atti legislativi dei Cantoni da parte della Confederazione, in vigore dal 1° feb. 1991 (RU 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1149).

Art. 31 e 321E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 8.

8.


1 Abrogati dal n. I 2 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), con effetto dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 33 E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 9. Parificazione di forme precedenti con forme nuove

9. Parificazione di forme precedenti con forme nuove

1 Le leggi introduttive cantonali possono decretare che determinate forme di pegno immobiliare previste dal diritto anteriore siano parificate in genere, o per determinati effetti, alle corrispondenti forme di questo codice.

2 In questo caso le disposizioni della nuova legge diventano applicabili, con la sua entrata in vigore, anche a tali diritti di pegno delle leggi cantonali.

3 …1


1 Abrogato dal n. II 21 della LF del 15 dic. 1989 concernente l’approvazione di atti legislativi dei Cantoni da parte della Confederazione, con effetto dal 1° feb. 1991 (RU 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1149).

Art. 33a1E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 10. Applicazione della legge anteriore alle forme di pegno da essa previste

10. Applicazione della legge anteriore alle forme di pegno da essa previste

1 Le rendite fondiarie nonché le cartelle ipotecarie emesse per serie rimangono iscritte nel registro fondiario.

2 Esse rimangono disciplinate dalle disposizioni della legge anteriore.

3 Il diritto cantonale può prevedere che le rendite fondiarie costituite in virtù del diritto federale o del diritto cantonale anteriore siano trasformate in forme di pegno secondo la legge nuova. Per gli importi di lieve entità, può essere inoltre prevista una responsabilità personale del proprietario del fondo costituito in pegno.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 33b1E. Diritti reali / VI. Pegno immobiliare / 11. Trasformazione del tipo di cartella ipotecaria

11. Trasformazione del tipo di cartella ipotecaria

Il proprietario del fondo e gli aventi diritto sulla cartella possono, di comune accordo, chiedere per scritto che una cartella ipotecaria documentale iscritta prima dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice dell’11 dicembre 20092 sia trasformata in cartella ipotecaria registrale.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2RU 2011 4637

Art. 34 E. Diritti reali / VII. Pegno mobiliare / 1. Formalità

VII. Pegno mobiliare

1. Formalità

1 Dall’entrata in vigore di questo codice, il pegno mobiliare si potrà costituire soltanto nelle forme dal medesimo previste.

2 In quanto un pegno mobiliare fosse costituito in una forma diversa già prima di tal momento, esso si estinguerà nel termine di sei mesi dall’entrata in vigore della nuova legge per i crediti esigibili, e dalla scadenza o dal giorno in cui potrà essere data la disdetta, per quelli che diventeranno esigibili più tardi.

Art. 35 E. Diritti reali / VII. Pegno mobiliare / 2. Effetti

2. Effetti

1 Gli effetti del pegno mobiliare, i diritti e le obbligazioni del creditore, del terzo datore del pegno e del debitore saranno determinati dalla legge nuova, dal momento della entrata in vigore di questo codice, sebbene il pegno fosse costituito anteriormente.

2 Il patto di decadenza del pegno a favore del creditore, stipulato prima dell’entrata in vigore del nuovo codice diventa inefficace a partire da questo momento.

Art. 36 E. Diritti reali / VIII. Diritto di ritenzione

VIII. Diritto di ritenzione

1 Il diritto di ritenzione di questo codice si estende anche alle cose venute in potere del creditore prima della sua entrata in vigore.

2 Compete al creditore anche per i crediti nati prima di questo momento.

3 Gli effetti dei diritti di ritenzione già costituiti sono soggetti alle disposizioni della legge nuova.

Art. 37 E. Diritti reali / IX. Possesso

IX. Possesso

Il possesso è soggetto alla legge nuova dall’entrata in vigore di questo codice.

Art. 38 E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 1. Impianto del registro

X. Registro fondiario

1. Impianto del registro

1 Il Consiglio federale stabilisce, sentito il parere dei Cantoni, il calendario d’introduzione del registro fondiario. Può delegare tale competenza al dipartimento o all’ufficio competente.1

2 …2


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. II della L del 5 ott. 2007 sulla geoinformazione, in vigore dal 1° lug. 2008 (RU 2008 2793; FF 2006 7165).
2 Abrogato dall’all. n. II della L del 5 ott. 2007 sulla geoinformazione, con effetto dal 1° lug. 2008 (RU 2008 2793; FF 2006 7165).

Art. 391E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 2. Misurazione ufficiale / a.

2. Misurazione ufficiale

a.


1 Abrogato dall’all. n. II della L del 5 ott. 2007 sulla geoinformazione, con effetto dal 1° lug. 2008 (RU 2008 2793; FF 2006 7165).

Art. 40 E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 2. Misurazione ufficiale / b. Relazione col registro fondiario

b. Relazione col registro fondiario

1 Di regola la misurazione del terreno deve precedere l’impianto del registro fondiario.

2 Tuttavia questo può essere introdotto anche prima con l’autorizzazione della Confederazione, in quanto esistano registri d’estimo sufficienti.

Art. 41 E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 2. Misurazione ufficiale / c. Epoca dell’esecuzione

c. Epoca dell’esecuzione

1 …1

2 La misurazione e l’introduzione del registro fondiario possono avvenire successivamente per i singoli distretti di un medesimo Cantone.


1 Abrogato dall’all. n. II della L del 5 ott. 2007 sulla geoinformazione, con effetto dal 1° lug. 2008 (RU 2008 2793; FF 2006 7165).

Art. 421

1 Abrogato dall’all. n. II della L del 5 ott. 2007 sulla geoinformazione, con effetto dal 1° lug. 2008 (RU 2008 2793; FF 2006 7165).

Art. 43 E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 3. Iscrizione dei diritti reali / a. Procedura

3. Iscrizione dei diritti reali

a. Procedura

1 I diritti reali preesistenti devono essere iscritti nel registro fondiario all’atto della sua introduzione.

2 A questo fine sarà pubblicato un bando per la notificazione e la iscrizione dei diritti reali preesistenti.

3 I diritti reali già iscritti nei libri pubblici conformemente al diritto anteriore, saranno trascritti d’officio nel registro fondiario in quanto possano essere costituiti secondo la legge nuova.

Art. 44 E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 3. Iscrizione dei diritti reali / b. Conseguenza della non iscrizione

b. Conseguenza della non iscrizione

1 I diritti reali preesistenti che non vengono iscritti conserveranno bensì la loro validità, ma non saranno opponibili ai terzi di buona fede che si fossero affidati al registro fondiario.

2 Rimane riservato alla futura legislazione della Confederazione e dei Cantoni il dichiarare perenti, dopo una certa epoca ed a seguito di un bando, tutti i diritti reali non ancora iscritti nel registro.

3 Gli oneri fondiari di diritto pubblico e le ipoteche legali di diritto cantonale non iscritti ma costituiti prima dell’entrata in vigore della modifica del presente Codice dell’11 dicembre 20091 rimangono opponibili, nei dieci anni successivi all’entrata in vigore di tale modifica, ai terzi di buona fede che si affidano al registro fondiario.2


1RU 2011 4637
2 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 451E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 4. Diritti reali soppressi

4. Diritti reali soppressi

1 I diritti reali che non potrebbero più essere costituiti secondo le disposizioni sul registro fondiario, come le piante nel fondo altrui, i diritti di anticresi e simili non vi possono essere iscritti, ma vi devono essere menzionati in modo opportuno.

2 Estinguendosi per qualsiasi causa, questi diritti eccezionali non possono più essere ristabiliti.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. IV della LF del 19 dic. 1963, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1965 (RU 1964 1009; FF 1962 1809).

Art. 46 E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 5. Introduzione del registro differita

5. Introduzione del registro differita

1 L’introduzione del registro fondiario secondo le prescrizioni di questa legge può essere differita dai Cantoni, con l’autorizzazione del Consiglio federale, in quanto le forme prescritte dai Cantoni, completate o meno, sembrino sufficienti per garantire gli effetti del registro fondiario nel senso della legge nuova.

2 A questo fine sarà esattamente stabilito a quali forme del diritto cantonale sono attribuiti gli effetti previsti dalla nuova legge.

Art. 47 E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 6. Applicazione del diritto reale prima del registro fondiario

6. Applicazione del diritto reale prima del registro fondiario

Le disposizioni di questo codice sui diritti reali sono applicabili in generale anche prima dell’impianto del registro fondiario.

Art. 48 E. Diritti reali / X. Registro fondiario / 7. Effetti delle forme del diritto cantonale

7. Effetti delle forme del diritto cantonale

1 Coll’entrata in vigore delle disposizioni sui diritti reali e prima dell’introduzione del registro fondiario, i Cantoni possono designare le forme, come l’omologazione, l’iscrizione nei catasti, nei registri delle ipoteche e delle servitù, alle quali sono attribuiti immediatamente gli effetti del registro stesso.

2 I Cantoni possono prescrivete che queste forme, anche prima o senza l’introduzione del registro fondiario, abbiano gli effetti di questo per la nascita, la trasmissione, le modificazioni e l’estinzione dei diritti reali.

3 Per contro, fin che non sia introdotto il registro fondiario od un altro organo di pubblicità parificato al medesimo, non possono verificarsi gli effetti derivanti dal registro a favore dei terzi di buona fede.

Art. 491F. Prescrizione

F. Prescrizione

1 Se il nuovo diritto stabilisce un termine più lungo rispetto al diritto anteriore, si applica il nuovo diritto, purché secondo il diritto anteriore non sia ancora sopravvenuta la prescrizione.

2 Se il nuovo diritto stabilisce un termine più breve, si applica il diritto anteriore.

3 L’entrata in vigore del nuovo diritto non ha effetti sull’inizio di una prescrizione in corso, salvo che la legge disponga altrimenti.

4 Per il resto, il nuovo diritto si applica alla prescrizione dalla sua entrata in vigore.


1 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 3 della LF del 15 giu. 2018 (Revisione della disciplina della prescrizione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2020 (RU 2018 5343; FF 2014 211).

Art. 50 G. Forme dei contratti

G. Forme dei contratti

I contratti conchiusi prima dell’entrata in vigore di questo codice rimangono validi anche se la loro forma non corrisponde alle prescrizioni della legge nuova.


  Capo secondo: Disposizioni introduttive e transitorie

Art. 51 A. Abrogazione del diritto civile cantonale

A. Abrogazione del diritto civile cantonale

Con l’entrata in vigore di questo codice rimangono abrogate le disposizioni di diritto civile dei Cantoni, salvo diversa disposizione del diritto federale.

Art. 52 B. Leggi cantonali complementari / I. Diritti e doveri dei Cantoni

B. Leggi cantonali complementari

I. Diritti e doveri dei Cantoni

1 I Cantoni emanano le disposizioni di complemento di questo codice, in ispecie a riguardo della competenza delle autorità, dell’organizzazione degli uffici di stato civile, di tutela1 e di registro fondiario.

2 In quanto tali disposizioni complementari siano richieste per l’esecuzione della nuova legge, i Cantoni sono obbligati ad emanarle, e possono farlo provvisoriamente in via di regolamento.2

3 Le disposizioni di complemento dei Cantoni in materia di registri sottostanno all’approvazione della Confederazione.3

4 Le altre disposizioni di complemento dei Cantoni devono essere comunicate all’Ufficio federale di giustizia.4


1 Ora: le autorità di vigilanza (vedi art. 440).
2 Nuovo testo giusta il n. II 21 della LF del 15 dic. 1989 concernente l’approvazione di atti legislativi dei Cantoni da parte della Confederazione, in vigore dal 1° feb. 1991 (RU 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1149).
3 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).
4 Introdotto dal n. II 21 della LF del 15 dic. 1989 concernente l’approvazione di atti legislativi dei Cantoni da parte della Confederazione (RU 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1149). Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF del 19 dic. 2008 (Protezione degli adulti, diritto delle persone e diritto della filiazione), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2013 (RU 2011 725; FF 2006 6391).

Art. 53 B. Leggi cantonali complementari / II. Disposizioni della Confederazione in luogo dei Cantoni

II. Disposizioni della Confederazione in luogo dei Cantoni

1 Se un Cantone non adempie in tempo debito all’obbligo di emanare le complementari disposizioni necessarie, il Consiglio federale le emana provvisoriamente in sua vece, dandone avviso all’Assemblea federale.

2 Se un Cantone non fa uso delle facoltà di emanare disposizioni complementari in una materia nella quale non sono necessarie si applicheranno semplicemente le disposizioni di questo codice.

Art. 54 C. Designazione delle autorità competenti

C. Designazione delle autorità competenti

1 Dove questo codice parla di un’autorità competente, i Cantoni stabiliscono quale essa sia fra le autorità costituite o da costituirsi.

2 Se non parla espressamente del giudice o dell’autorità amministrativa, i Cantoni possono dichiarare competente una autorità dell’ordine amministrativo o giudiziario.

3 Per quanto non sia applicabile il Codice di procedura civile del 19 dicembre 20081, la procedura è stabilita dai Cantoni.2


1 RS 272
2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. 1 n. II 3 del Codice di procedura civile del 19 dic. 2008, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2011 (RU 2010 1739; FF 2006 6593).

Art. 55 D. Atti pubblici / I. In genere

D. Atti pubblici

I. In genere1

1 I Cantoni possono stabilire per il loro territorio le norme relative alla celebrazione degli atti pubblici.

2 Stabiliscono pure le norme relative alla celebrazione degli atti pubblici in lingua straniera.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I 2 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).

Art. 55a1D. Atti pubblici / II. Copie e certificazioni elettroniche

II. Copie e certificazioni elettroniche

1 I Cantoni possono autorizzare i pubblici ufficiali rogatori a realizzare copie elettroniche degli atti pubblici da loro redatti.

2 Possono inoltre autorizzare i pubblici ufficiali rogatori a certificare elettronicamente la conformità agli originali cartacei di copie da loro realizzate in forma elettronica nonché l’autenticità di firme.

3 Il pubblico ufficiale rogatore deve utilizzare una firma elettronica qualificata fondata su un certificato qualificato di un prestatore di servizi di certificazione riconosciuto ai sensi della legge del 18 marzo 20162 sulla firma elettronica.3

4 Il Consiglio federale emana disposizioni di esecuzione atte a garantire l’interoperabilità dei sistemi informatici nonché l’integrità, l’autenticità e la sicurezza dei dati.


1 Introdotto dal n. I 2 della LF dell’11 dic. 2009 (Cartella ipotecaria registrale e diritti reali), in vigore dal 1° gen. 2012 (RU 2011 4637; FF 2007 4845).
2 RS 943.03
3 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. 1 n. II 3 del L del 18 mar. 2016 sulla firma elettronica, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2017 (RU 2016 4651; FF 2014 913).

Art. 561E. Concessioni idrauliche

E. Concessioni idrauliche

Fino all’emanazione di una legge federale sulle concessioni di diritti d’acqua vale la disposizione seguente:

Le concessioni di acque pubbliche, in quanto siano date per almeno trent’anni od a tempo indeterminato e non costituiscano una servitù a favore di un dato fondo dominante, possono essere intavolate nel registro fondiario come diritti reali per sé stanti e permanenti.


1 Vedi ora l’art. 59 della LF del 22 dic. 1916 sulla utilizzazione delle forze idriche (RS 721.80).

Art. 571F. a H.

F. a H.


1 Abrogato dall’art. 53 cpv. 1 lett. b della LF dell’8 nov. 1934 su le banche e le casse di risparmio, con effetto dal 1° mar. 1935 (RU 51 129 e CS 10 331; ediz. ted. BBl 1934 I 171, ediz. franc. FF 1934 I 172).

Art. 581J. Modificazioni della legge sull’esecuzione e sul fallimento

J. Modificazioni della legge sull’esecuzione e sul fallimento

La legge federale dell’11 aprile 18892 sulla esecuzione e sul fallimento rimarrà modificata come segue dall’entrata in vigore del presente codice:

3


1 Nuova numerazione degli ultimi quattro articoli, risultante dall’abrogazione degli articoli 58 e 59 originari, giusta il n. I delle disp. trans. CO, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1912 (RU 27 377 e CS 2 193; ediz. ted. BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845, ediz. franc. FF 1905 II 1, 1909 III 747, 1911 I 695).
2 RS 281.1
3 Le mod. possono essere consultate alla RU 24 233. Per il testo degli art. 132bis, 141 cpv. 3 e 258 cpv. 4 vedi RU 24 233 tit. fin. art. 60.

Art. 591K. Applicazione del diritto svizzero e straniero

K. Applicazione del diritto svizzero e straniero

1 La legge federale del 25 giugno 18912 sui rapporti di diritto civile dei domiciliati e dei dimoranti rimane in vigore per ciò che riguarda i rapporti giuridici degli svizzeri all’estero e degli stranieri nella Svizzera e per i casi di conflitto di leggi cantonali.

2 …3

3 La stessa legge è completata come segue:

4


1 Nuova numerazione degli ultimi quattro articoli, risultante dall’abrogazione degli articoli 58 e 59 originari, giusta il n. I delle disp. trans. CO, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1912 (RU 27 377 e CS 2 193; ediz. ted. BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845, ediz. franc. FF 1905 II 1, 1909 III 747, 1911 I 695).
2 [CS 2 723; RU 1972 2653 n. II 1, 1977 237 n. II 1, 1986 122 n. II 1. RU 1988 1776 all. n. I lett. a]. Vedi ora la LF del 18 dic. 1987 sul diritto internazionale privato (RS 291).
3 Abrogato dal n. I 2 della LF del 5 ott. 1984, con effetto dal 1° gen. 1988 (RU 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1119).
4 Le mod. possono essere consultate alla RU 24 233

Art. 601L. Abrogazione di leggi federali

L. Abrogazione di leggi federali

1 Colla entrata in vigore di questa legge rimangono abrogate le disposizioni di diritto civile federale incompatibili colla medesima.

2 Sono abrogate in particolare:

La legge federale del 24 dicembre 18742 sugli atti dello stato civile e sul matrimonio.

La legge federale del 22 giugno 18813 sulla capacità civile.

Il Codice federale delle obbligazioni del 14 giugno 18814.

3 Rimangono in vigore le leggi speciali sul diritto delle strade ferrate, dei battelli a vapore, delle poste, dei telefoni e dei telegrafi, sulla costituzione d’ipoteca e la liquidazione forzata delle ferrovie, quelle relative al lavoro delle fabbriche e alla responsabilità civile dei padroni di fabbrica e di altre imprese, nonché tutte le leggi federali sopra materie del diritto delle obbligazioni, che furono emanate allato della legge federale sul diritto delle obbligazioni.


1 Nuovo testo giusta il n. I delle disp. trans. CO, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1912 (RU 27 377 e CS 2 193; ediz. ted. BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845, ediz. franc. FF 1905 II 1, 1909 III 747, 1911 I 695).
2 [RU 1 508]
3 [RU 5 556]
4 [RU 5 577, 11 490; RS 221.229.1 art. 103 cpv. 1]

Art. 611M. Disposizioni finali M. Disposizioni finali

M. Disposizioni finali

1 La presente legge entrerà in vigore col 1° gennaio 1912.

2 Il Consiglio federale potrà, con l’autorizzazione dell’Assemblea federale, anticipare l’entrata in vigore di singole disposizioni.


1 Nuova numerazione degli ultimi quattro articoli, risultante dall’abrogazione degli articoli 58 e 59 originari, giusta il n. I delle disp. trans. del CO, in vigore dal 1° gen. 1912 (RU 27 377 e CS 2 193; ediz. ted. BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845, ediz. franc. FF 1905 II 1, 1909 III 747, 1911 I 695).

  Testo delle disposizioni previgenti del titolo sesto1 

  Titolo sesto: Del regime dei beni fra i coniugi

  Capo primo: Disposizioni generali

Art. 178 A. Regime comune

A. Regime comune

I coniugi sono sottoposti al regime dell’unione dei beni in quanto non abbiano altrimenti disposto per convenzione matrimoniale o non sia loro applicato il regime eccezionale.

Art. 179 B. Regime convenzionale / I. Scelta del regime

B. Regime convenzionale

I. Scelta del regime

1 Le convenzioni matrimoniali possono essere stipulate sia prima che dopo la celebrazione del matrimonio.

2 Gli sposi od i coniugi devono adottare nel loro contratto uno dei regimi previsti da questo codice.

3 Il contratto stipulato dopo la celebrazione del matrimonio non può però pregiudicare i diritti dei terzi sopra i beni che precedentemente li garantivano.

Art. 180 B. Regime convenzionale / II. Capacità di contrattare

II. Capacità di contrattare

1 Per concludere, modificare o sciogliere una convenzione matrimoniale, le parti contraenti devono essere capaci di discernimento.

2 Se sono minorenni od interdette abbisognano del consenso del legale rappresentante.

Art. 181 B. Regime convenzionale / III. Forma del contratto

III. Forma del contratto

1 Per concludere, modificare o sciogliere validamente una convenzione matrimoniale è necessario un atto pubblico firmato dalle persone contraenti e dai loro rappresentanti legali.

2 Le convenzioni stipulate durante il matrimonio richiedono inoltre l’approvazione dell’autorità tutoria.

3 La convenzione matrimoniale diventa opponibile ai terzi secondo le prescrizioni relative al registro dei beni matrimoniali.

Art. 182 C. Regime eccezionale / I. Separazione legale

C. Regime eccezionale

I. Separazione legale

1 Se nel fallimento di uno dei coniugi rimangono dei creditori insoddisfatti, subentra per legge la separazione dei beni.

2 Qualora una persona, i cui creditori possiedono dei certificati di carenza di beni, voglia contrarre matrimonio, il regime di separazione dei beni può essere conseguito da ciascuno degli sposi mediante iscrizione nel registro dei beni matrimoniali fatta prima della celebrazione.

Art. 183 C. Regime eccezionale / II. Separazione giudiziale / 1. Ad istanza della moglie

II. Separazione giudiziale

1. Ad istanza della moglie

Il giudice ordina la separazione dei beni ad istanza della moglie:

1.
se il marito non provvede debitamente al mantenimento della moglie e dei figli;
2.
se non fornisce le garanzie richieste per i beni apportati dalla moglie;
3.
se il marito o la comunione risultano oberati.
Art. 184 C. Regime eccezionale / II. Separazione giudiziale / 2. Ad istanza del marito

2. Ad istanza del marito

Il giudice ordina la separazione dei beni ad istanza del marito:

1.
se la moglie è oberata;
2.
se la moglie rifiuta al marito senza giusto motivo il consenso richiesto dalla legge o dal regime dei beni per disporre della sostanza coniugale;
3.
se la moglie domanda garanzia per i suoi apporti.
Art. 185 C. Regime eccezionale / II. Separazione giudiziale / 3. Ad istanza dei creditori

3. Ad istanza dei creditori

Il giudice ordina la separazione dei beni ad istanza di un creditore ove questi sia rimasto perdente in una procedura di pignoramento contro uno dei coniugi.

Art. 186 C. Regime eccezionale / III. Data della separazione

III. Data della separazione

1 La separazione dei beni per causa di fallimento comincia dal rilascio dei certificati di carenza di beni, ma per i beni pervenuti ai coniugi dopo l’apertura del fallimento, per successione o in altro modo, ha effetto dal tempo dell’acquisto.

2 La separazione giudiziale ha effetto dal momento della presentazione dell’istanza.

3 In caso di fallimento o di decisione giudiziaria, la separazione è comunicata d’officio al registro dei beni matrimoniali perché vi sia iscritta.

Art. 187 C. Regime eccezionale / IV. Cessazione della separazione

IV. Cessazione della separazione

1 La separazione per causa di fallimento o di perdita in una procedura di pignoramento non cessa per il solo fatto della tacitazione dei creditori.

2 Tuttavia il giudice può ordinare il ripristino del regime anteriore ad istanza di ognuno dei coniugi.

3 Il ripristino è comunicato d’officio, per la sua iscrizione, al registro dei beni matrimoniali.

Art. 188 D. Cambiamento di regime / I. Garanzie dei creditori

D. Cambiamento di regime

I. Garanzie dei creditori

1 Le liquidazioni fra i coniugi ed i cambiamenti di regime non possono sottrarre all’azione dei creditori di un coniuge o della comunione quei beni sui quali i creditori stessi avevano diritto di essere soddisfatti.

2 Se tali beni sono passati in proprietà di uno dei coniugi, questo è tenuto al pagamento dei debiti, ma può limitare questa responsabilità in quanto provi che i beni ricevuti non bastano per il pagamento integrale.

3 I creditori del marito non hanno diritto su ciò che la moglie percepisce nel fallimento o nella partecipazione al pignoramento dei beni del marito, se non in quanto sieno creditori anche della moglie.

Art. 189 D. Cambiamento di regime / II. Liquidazione a seguito della separazione

II. Liquidazione a seguito della separazione

1 Se la separazione dei beni si verifica durante il matrimonio, la sostanza coniugale passa nei beni propri di ciascun coniuge, impregiudicati i diritti dei creditori.

2 Gli aumenti sono attribuiti ai coniugi secondo il loro precedente regime; le diminuzioni sono sopportate dal marito in quanto non provi che furono cagionate dalla moglie.

3 Il marito è obbligato, a richiesta della moglie, a fornire garanzia per i beni di questa che rimangono a sua disposizione durante la liquidazione.

Art. 190 E. Beni riservati / I. Costituzione / 1. In genere

E. Beni riservati

I. Costituzione

1. In genere

1 I beni riservati sono costituiti per contratto matrimoniale, per liberalità di terzi o per legge.

2 La porzione legittima di un coniuge nella successione di un parente non può essergli assegnata a titolo di bene riservato.

Art. 191 E. Beni riservati / I. Costituzione / 2. Per legge

2. Per legge

Sono beni riservati per legge:

1.
le cose che servono esclusivamente all’uso personale di uno dei coniugi;
2.
i beni della moglie che servono all’esercizio della sua professione o del suo mestiere;
3.
il guadagno che la moglie fa lavorando per conto proprio.
Art. 192 E. Beni riservati / II. Effetti

II. Effetti

1 I beni riservati sono soggetti in generale alle regole della separazione dei beni, specialmente riguardo al dovere della moglie di concorrere a sopportare gli oneri del matrimonio.

2 La moglie deve convertire il guadagno del proprio lavoro ai bisogni dell’economia domestica, in quanto essi lo richiedano.

Art. 193 E. Beni riservati / III. Onere della prova

III. Onere della prova

Se un coniuge afferma che un oggetto è bene riservato deve fornirne la prova.


  Capo secondo: Dell’unione dei beni

Art. 194 A. Proprietà / I. Sostanza coniugale

A. Proprietà

I. Sostanza coniugale

1 L’unione dei beni riunisce in una sola sostanza coniugale tutti i beni che i coniugi possiedono al momento della celebrazione o che acquistano durante il matrimonio.

2 Non vi sono compresi i beni riservati della moglie.

Art. 195 A. Proprietà / II. Proprietà del marito e della moglie

II. Proprietà del marito e della moglie

1 La parte di sostanza coniugale che apparteneva alla moglie al momento della celebrazione del matrimonio o che le perviene per eredità od altro titolo gratuito durante il matrimonio, costituisce il di lei apporto e rimane di sua proprietà.

2 Il marito è proprietario dei beni da lui apportati e di ogni sostanza coniugale che non sia apporto della moglie.

3 Le rendite della moglie ed i frutti naturali dei di lei apporti diventano proprietà del marito dal momento della scadenza o della separazione, sotto riserva delle disposizioni circa i beni riservati.

Art. 196 A. Proprietà / III. Prova

III. Prova

1 Se un coniuge afferma che un bene sia apporto della moglie deve fornirne la prova.

2 Gli acquisti fatti durante il matrimonio in sostituzione di altri beni della moglie si presumono apporti di lei.

Art. 197 A. Proprietà / IV. Inventario / 1. Compilazione e valore probatorio

IV. Inventario

1. Compilazione e valore probatorio

1 Così il marito come la moglie possono in ogni tempo domandare che sia fatto per atto pubblico un inventario dei loro apporti.

2 L’inventario così compilato nei sei mesi dall’apporto dei beni si presume esatto.

Art. 198 A. Proprietà / IV. Inventario / 2. Effetti della stima

2. Effetti della stima

1 Se all’inventario va unita una stima risultante da pubblico documento, l’obbligo reciproco dei coniugi di risarcire gli oggetti mancanti si determina secondo la medesima.

2 Se durante il matrimonio furono alienati in buona fede degli oggetti al disotto del valore di stima, il prezzo ricavato sostituisce il prezzo d’inventario.

Art. 199 A. Proprietà / V. Proprietà del marito sull’apporto della moglie

V. Proprietà del marito sull’apporto della moglie

Insieme con la stima, ed entro il termine di sei mesi dall’apporto della moglie, può essere convenuto, con le norme stabilite per le convenzioni matrimoniali, che il marito diventi proprietario dell’apporto medesimo e che il credito della moglie per il valore di stima rimanga invariato.

Art. 200 B. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione / I. Amministrazione

B. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione

I. Amministrazione

1 Il marito amministra la sostanza coniugale.

2 Le spese dell’amministrazione sono a suo carico.

3 Alla moglie compete l’amministrazione nella misura in cui le spetta la rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale.

Art. 201 B. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione / II. Godimento

II. Godimento

1 Il marito ha il godimento della sostanza apportata dalla moglie e ne risponde come un usufruttuario.

2 La stima degli apporti della moglie risultante dall’inventario non aggrava questa responsabilità.

3 Il denaro contante, le altre cose fungibili ed i titoli al portatore indicati soltanto nella specie passano in proprietà del marito e la moglie diventa creditrice del loro valore.

Art. 202 B. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione / III. Facoltà di disporre / 1. Da parte del marito

III. Facoltà di disporre

1. Da parte del marito

1 Il marito non può, senza il consenso della moglie, fare atti eccedenti la ordinaria amministrazione sui beni da essa apportati e che non sono passati in sua proprietà.

2 Il terzo può però presumere questo consenso a meno che sappia o debba sapere che manca, o si tratti di beni da tutti riconoscibili come proprietà della moglie.

Art. 203 B. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione / III. Facoltà di disporre / 2. Da parte della moglie / a. In genere

2. Da parte della moglie

a. In genere

La moglie dispone della sostanza coniugale nella misura in cui rappresenta l’unione coniugale.

Art. 204 B. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione / III. Facoltà di disporre / 2. Da parte della moglie / b. Rinuncia di eredità

b. Rinuncia di eredità

1 La moglie non può rinunciare ad una eredità senza il consenso del marito.

2 Se il marito lo rifiuta, la moglie può ricorrere all’autorità tutoria.

Art. 205 C. Garanzia degli apporti della moglie

C. Garanzia degli apporti della moglie

1 Il marito è sempre tenuto ad informare la moglie che ne lo richieda circa lo stato dei di lei apporti.

2 La moglie può chiedere in ogni tempo che questi siano garantiti.

3 È riservata l’azione rivocatoria secondo la legge federale dell’11 aprile 18891 sulla esecuzione e sul fallimento.


1 RS 281.1

Art. 206 D. Responsabilità / I. Del marito

D. Responsabilità

I. Del marito

Il marito è responsabile:

1.
per i propri debiti anteriori al matrimonio;
2.
per quelli da esso contratti durante il matrimonio;
3.
per quelli contratti dalla moglie in rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale.
Art. 207 D. Responsabilità / II. Della moglie / 1. Con tutta la sostanza

II. Della moglie

1. Con tutta la sostanza

1 La moglie risponde con tutta la sua sostanza senza riguardo ai diritti che il regime matrimoniale conferisce al marito:

1.
per i propri debiti anteriori al matrimonio;
2.
per i debiti da essa contratti con consenso del marito, o mediante obbligazione da essa assunta a favore di lui col consenso della autorità tutoria;
3.
per i debiti risultanti dal normale esercizio della sua professione o del suo mestiere;
4.
per i debiti gravanti eredità ad essa pervenute;
5.
per i debiti derivanti da atti illeciti.

2 La moglie non è tenuta per i debiti fatti dal marito o da lei stessa per l’economia domestica comune, se non in caso di insolvenza del marito.

Art. 208 D. Responsabilità / II. Della moglie / 2. Col valore dei beni riservati

2. Col valore dei beni riservati

1 Durante e dopo il matrimonio la moglie risponde, ma solo col valore dei suoi beni riservati:

1.
per i debiti da essa contratti sotto questa espressa riserva;
2.
per i debiti che essa ha contratto senza il consenso del marito;
3.
per i debiti da essa contratti eccedendo i suoi diritti di rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale.

2 È riservata in ogni caso l’azione di indebito arricchimento.

Art. 209 E. Compensi / I. Scadenza

E. Compensi

I. Scadenza

1 Qualora con beni del marito sieno stati estinti debiti gravanti gli apporti della moglie, o con beni apportati dalla moglie sieno stati estinti debiti del marito, nasce per ciascuno dei coniugi il diritto al compenso; il quale però, se la legge non dispone altrimenti, diventa esigibile soltanto con lo scioglimento dell’unione dei beni.

2 Il conguaglio può essere già chiesto durante il matrimonio, se coi denari della sostanza coniugale sono stati pagati debiti contratti dalla moglie a carico dei suoi beni riservati, o se con denaro della sostanza riservata della moglie furono pagati debiti gravanti la sostanza coniugale.

Art. 210 E. Compensi / II. Fallimento del marito e pignoramento / 1. Credito della moglie

II. Fallimento del marito e pignoramento

1. Credito della moglie

1 In caso di fallimento del marito o di pignoramento dei beni del medesimo, la moglie può far valere un credito per i suoi beni apportati che più non si rinvenissero.

2 Se esistono dei crediti del marito, sono dedotti.

3 La moglie ricupera in proprietà gli enti patrimoniali che si rinvengono in natura.

Art. 211 E. Compensi / II. Fallimento del marito e pignoramento / 2. Privilegio

2. Privilegio

1 Se colla restituzione della sua proprietà, o colle garanzie date per i suoi apporti, la moglie consegue meno della metà degli apporti stessi, il di lei credito per il complemento di questa metà è privilegiato a norma della legge federale dell’11 aprile 18891 sulla esecuzione e sul fallimento.

2 La cessione di questo privilegio nonché la rinuncia del medesimo a favore di singoli creditori sono nulle.


1 RS 281.1

Art. 212 F. Scioglimento della unione dei beni / I. Premorienza della moglie

F. Scioglimento della unione dei beni

I. Premorienza della moglie

1 Morendo la moglie, gli apporti passano ai di lei eredi riservati i diritti di successione del marito.

2 Il marito deve risarcire tutto ciò che manca, in quanto ne sia responsabile, salvo compensazione dei suoi crediti verso la moglie.

Art. 213 F. Scioglimento della unione dei beni / II. Premorienza del marito

II. Premorienza del marito

Morendo il marito, la moglie ricupera i beni da lei apportati che si rinvenissero in natura e può domandare agli eredi il risarcimento di ciò che manca.

Art. 214 F. Scioglimento della unione dei beni / III. Aumenti e diminuzioni

III. Aumenti e diminuzioni

1 Se, fatta la separazione dei beni apportati da ciascuno dei coniugi, risulta un aumento, questo appartiene per un terzo alla moglie e suoi discendenti e per il resto al marito od a’ suoi eredi.

2 Se risulta una diminuzione della sostanza coniugale, essa è a carico del marito o dei suoi eredi in quanto non sia provato che fu cagionata dalla moglie.

3 Le convenzioni matrimoniali possono stabilire un altro modo di ripartire gli aumenti e le diminuzioni.


  Capo terzo: Della comunione di beni

Art. 215 A. Comunione universale / I. Beni matrimoniali

A. Comunione universale

I. Beni matrimoniali

1 La comunione universale dei beni riunisce tutti i beni e tutti i redditi del marito e della moglie in un’unica sostanza indivisa che appartiene ad entrambi i coniugi.

2 Nessuno dei coniugi può disporre della sua parte.

3 Se un coniuge afferma che un bene non appartiene alla comunione deve fornirne la prova.

Art. 216 A. Comunione universale / II. Amministrazione e disposizione / 1. Ordinaria

II. Amministrazione e disposizione

1. Ordinaria

1 Il marito amministra la comunione.

2 Le spese dell’amministrazione sono a carico della medesima.

3 Alla moglie compete l’amministrazione nella misura in cui le spetta la rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale.

Art. 217 A. Comunione universale / II. Amministrazione e disposizione / 2. Facoltà di disporre / a. Sui beni della comunione

2. Facoltà di disporre

a. Sui beni della comunione

1 Per disporre dei beni della comunione è necessario il concorso dei due coniugi od il consenso dell’uno agli atti di disposizione dell’altro, in quanto eccedano la semplice amministrazione.

2 Il terzo può però presumere il consenso a meno che sappia o debba sapere che manca o si tratti di beni da tutti riconoscibili come appartenenti alla sostanza comune.

Art. 218 A. Comunione universale / II. Amministrazione e disposizione / 2. Facoltà di disporre / b. Rinuncia di eredità

b. Rinuncia di eredità

1 Durante il matrimonio uno dei coniugi non può rinunciare ad una eredità senza il consenso dell’altro.

2 Se il consenso gli è rifiutato, può ricorrere all’autorità tutoria.

Art. 219 A. Comunione universale / III. Responsabilità per i debiti / 1. Debiti del marito

III. Responsabilità per i debiti

1. Debiti del marito

Il marito risponde personalmente e con la sostanza comune:

1.
per i debiti d’ambedue i coniugi anteriori al matrimonio;
2.
per quelli contratti dalla moglie in rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale;
3.
per tutti gli altri debiti fatti da lui durante il matrimonio, o dalla moglie a carico della comunione.
Art. 220 A. Comunione universale / III. Responsabilità per i debiti / 2. Debiti della moglie / a. Della moglie e della comunione

2. Debiti della moglie

a. Della moglie e della comunione

1 A lato della comunione la moglie risponde personalmente:

1.
per i propri debiti anteriori al matrimonio;
2.
per i debiti contratti da lei col consenso del marito o mediante obbligazione assunta a favore di lui col consenso dell’autorità tutoria;
3.
per i debiti risultanti dal normale esercizio della sua professione o del suo mestiere;
4.
per i debiti gravanti eredità ad essa pervenute;
5.
per i debiti derivanti da atti illeciti.

2 La moglie non è tenuta per i debiti fatti da lei o dal marito per l’economia domestica comune, se non in caso d’insolvenza della comunione.

3 Non risponde personalmente per gli altri debiti della comunione.

Art. 221 A. Comunione universale / III. Responsabilità per i debiti / 2. Debiti della moglie / b. Debiti della sostanza riservata della moglie

b. Debiti della sostanza riservata della moglie

1 Durante e dopo il matrimonio la moglie risponde per il solo valore dei suoi beni riservati:

1.
per i debiti da essa contratti sotto questa espressa riserva;
2.
per i debiti che essa ha contratto senza il consenso del marito;
3.
per i debiti da essa contratti eccedendo i suoi diritti di rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale.

2 È in ogni caso riservata l’azione di indebito arricchimento.

Art. 222 A. Comunione universale / III. Responsabilità per i debiti / 3. Procedura esecutiva

3. Procedura esecutiva

Durante la comunione le procedure di esecuzione per debiti a carico dei beni comuni si promuovono contro il marito.

Art. 223 A. Comunione universale / IV. Compensi / 1. In genere

IV. Compensi

1. In genere

1 I debiti a carico della comunione estinti coi beni della stessa non danno ragione di compenso tra i coniugi.

2 Ove coi beni riservati sieno stati estinti dei debiti della comunione o dei debiti della sostanza riservata coi beni della comunione, nasce il diritto al compenso esercibile già durante il matrimonio.

Art. 224 A. Comunione universale / IV. Compensi / 2. Pei crediti della mogli

2. Pei crediti della mogli

1 In caso di fallimento del marito o di pignoramento dei beni della comunione, la moglie può far valere il credito per i suoi apporti e gode per la metà dello stesso il privilegio previsto dalla legge federale dell’11 aprile 18891 sulla esecuzione e sul fallimento.

2 La cessione del privilegio nonché la rinuncia dello stesso a favore di singoli creditori sono nulle.


1 RS 281.1

Art. 225 A. Comunione universale / V. Scioglimento della comunione / 1. Divisione / a. Per legge

V. Scioglimento della comunione

1. Divisione

a. Per legge

1 Alla morte di uno dei coniugi la metà della sostanza comune passa al coniuge superstite.

2 L’altra metà passa agli eredi del defunto, riservati i diritti ereditari del coniuge superstite.

3 Se il coniuge superstite è indegno di succedere non può in alcun caso pretendere una parte della sostanza comune maggiore di quella che gli sarebbe spettata in caso di divorzio.

Art. 226 A. Comunione universale / V. Scioglimento della comunione / 1. Divisione / b. Per contratto

b. Per contratto

1 Invece della divisione per metà si può, mediante convenzione matrimoniale, stabilire un altro modo di riparto.

2 Tuttavia i discendenti del coniuge defunto non possono essere privati del quarto della sostanza comune esistente al tempo della morte.

Art. 227 A. Comunione universale / V. Scioglimento della comunione / 2. Responsabilità del superstite

2. Responsabilità del superstite

1 Il marito superstite rimane personalmente responsabile per tutti i debiti della comunione.

2 La moglie superstite può, rinunciando alla sua porzione, liberarsi da ogni debito per cui non sia tenuta anche personalmente.

3 Accettando la sua parte, essa è tenuta al pagamento dei debiti, ma può limitare questa responsabilità in quanto provi che i beni ricevuti non bastano al pagamento integrale.

Art. 228 A. Comunione universale / V. Scioglimento della comunione / 3. Attribuzione degli apporti

3. Attribuzione degli apporti

Il coniuge superstite può domandare che nella divisione i beni da esso apportati nella comunione gli sieno attribuiti imputandoli alla sua quota.

Art. 229 B. Comunione prorogata / I. Condizioni

B. Comunione prorogata

I. Condizioni

1 Il coniuge superstite può continuare la comunione coi figli nati dallo stesso matrimonio.

2 Se i figli sono minorenni è necessario il consenso della autorità tutoria.

3 Continuando la comunione, l’esercizio dei diritti ereditari è sospeso fino allo scioglimento.

Art. 230 B. Comunione prorogata / II. Oggetto

II. Oggetto

1 La comunione prorogata comprende, oltre i beni della sostanza coniugale, le rendite ed i guadagni delle parti, eccettuata la sostanza riservata.

2 I beni che durante tale comunione pervengono al coniuge superstite od ai figli, per successione od altro titolo gratuito, appartengono alla loro sostanza riservata salvo contraria disposizione.

3 La procedura esecutiva fra i membri della comunione è soggetta alle restrizioni stabilite per i coniugi.

Art. 231 B. Comunione prorogata / III. Amministrazione e rappresentanza

III. Amministrazione e rappresentanza

1 Se i figli sono minorenni, l’amministrazione e la rappresentanza della comunione prorogata appartengono al coniuge superstite.

2 Se sono maggiorenni, può essere altrimenti convenuto.

Art. 232 B. Comunione prorogata / IV. Scioglimento / 1. Per volontà delle parti

IV. Scioglimento

1. Per volontà delle parti

1 Il coniuge superstite può sciogliere in ogni tempo la comunione prorogata.

2 I figli maggiorenni possono in ogni tempo uscire dalla comunione, individualmente od insieme.

3 Per i figli minorenni lo scioglimento può essere dichiarato dall’autorità tutoria.

Art. 233 B. Comunione prorogata / IV. Scioglimento / 2. Per legge

2. Per legge

1 La comunione prorogata è sciolta in virtù di legge:

1.
per morte o per nuove nozze del coniuge superstite;
2.
per fallimento del coniuge superstite o dei figli.

2 In caso di fallimento di uno solo dei figli, gli altri membri della comunione possono domandare la sua esclusione.

3 In caso di fallimento del padre o di pignoramento dei beni della comunione, i figli subentrano nei diritti della madre defunta.

Art. 234 B. Comunione prorogata / IV. Scioglimento / 3. Per sentenza

3. Per sentenza

1 Il creditore rimasto perdente in una procedura di pignoramento contro il coniuge superstite o contro uno dei figli può domandare al giudice lo scioglimento della comunione.

2 Se lo scioglimento è chiesto dal creditore di uno dei figli, gli altri membri della comunione possono domandare la sua esclusione.

Art. 235 B. Comunione prorogata / IV. Scioglimento / 4. Per matrimonio o per morte di un figlio

4. Per matrimonio o per morte di un figlio

1 In caso di matrimonio di uno dei figli, gli altri membri della comunione possono domandare la sua esclusione.

2 Se muore uno dei figli lasciando discendenti, gli altri membri della comunione possono domandarne l’esclusione.

3 Morendo senza discendenti, la sua parte rimane in comune, riservato ogni diritto degli eredi estranei alla comunione.

Art. 236 B. Comunione prorogata / IV. Scioglimento / 5. Modo della divisione

5. Modo della divisione

1 In caso di scioglimento della comunione prorogata o di esclusione di un figlio, la divisione o la tacitazione delle ragioni di quest’ultimo avviene secondo la situazione patrimoniale di quel momento.

2 Il genitore superstite conserva i suoi diritti di successione sulle parti spettanti ai figli.

3 La liquidazione non può essere fatta intempestivamente.

Art. 237 C. Comunione limitata / I. Con separazione di beni

C. Comunione limitata

I. Con separazione di beni

1 I coniugi possono adottare per convenzione matrimoniale una comunione limitata, escludendo dalla comunione determinati beni o categorie di beni, come gli immobili.

2 I beni esclusi sono soggetti alle norme della separazione dei beni.

Art. 238 C. Comunione limitata / II. Comunione dei beni

II. Comunione dei beni

1 Gli apporti della moglie esclusi dalla comunione possono per convenzione matrimoniale essere sottoposti alle norme dell’unione dei beni.

2 Tale patto si presume quando per convenzione matrimoniale la moglie abbia lasciato al marito l’amministrazione od il godimento di questi beni.

Art. 239 C. Comunione limitata / III. Comunione d’acquisti / 1. Concetto

III. Comunione d’acquisti

1. Concetto

1 La comunione di beni può, per convenzione matrimoniale, essere limitata agli acquisti.

2 I beni acquisiti durante il matrimonio, salvo che fossero acquistati in sostituzione di beni apportati, costituiscono gli acquisti e sono soggetti al regime della comunione.

3 Gli apporti dei singoli coniugi, compresi i beni che loro pervengono durante il matrimonio, sono soggetti alle norme dell’unione dei beni.

Art. 240 C. Comunione limitata / III. Comunione d’acquisti / 2. Aumenti e diminuzioni

2. Aumenti e diminuzioni

1 L’aumento risultante allo scioglimento della comunione viene diviso per metà fra i coniugi od i loro eredi.

2 La diminuzione è sopportata dal marito o dai suoi eredi in quanto non sia provato che fu cagionata dalla moglie.

3 Le convenzioni matrimoniali possono stabilire un altro modo di ripartire gli aumenti e le diminuzioni.


  Capo quarto: Della separazione dei beni

Art. 241 A. In genere

A. In genere

1 La separazione dei beni prescritta per legge o per sentenza del giudice si riferisce sempre all’intiera sostanza di ciascuno dei coniugi.

2 Se è stabilita per convenzione matrimoniale, si riferisce pure all’intiera sostanza in quanto il contratto medesimo non contenga speciali eccezioni.

Art. 242 B. Proprietà, amministrazione e godimento

B. Proprietà, amministrazione e godimento

1 Ognuno dei coniugi conserva la proprietà, l’amministrazione ed il godimento della propria sostanza.

2 Quando la moglie ne abbia rimesso l’amministrazione al marito, si presume che questo non sia tenuto a darne conto durante il matrimonio e che possa convertire le rendite di quella sostanza a sopportare gli oneri del matrimonio.

3 La rinuncia della moglie al diritto di riprendere in ogni tempo l’amministrazione della sua sostanza è nulla.

Art. 243 C. Responsabilità pei debiti / I. In genere

C. Responsabilità pei debiti

I. In genere

1 Il marito risponde personalmente per i propri debiti anteriori al matrimonio e per i debiti contratti durante il matrimonio da esso o dalla moglie in rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale.

2 La moglie risponde personalmente per i suoi debiti anteriori al matrimonio e per quelli risultanti a suo carico durante il matrimonio.

3 In caso di insolvenza del marito, la moglie è tenuta per i debiti contratti dall’uno o dall’altro dei coniugi per l’economia domestica comune.

Art. 244 C. Responsabilità pei debiti / II. Fallimento del marito o pignoramento

II. Fallimento del marito o pignoramento

1 La moglie non ha alcun privilegio nel fallimento del marito o nel pignoramento dei di lui beni, anche se gli abbia rimesso l’amministrazione dei propri.

2 Sono riservate le disposizioni circa la dote.

Art. 245 D. Rendite e guadagni

D. Rendite e guadagni

Le rendite ed i guadagni appartengono al coniuge dalla cui sostanza o dal cui lavoro provengono.

Art. 246 E. Contribuzioni della moglie alle spese comuni

E. Contribuzioni della moglie alle spese comuni

1 Il marito può esigere che la moglie contribuisca in equa misura a sostenere gli oneri del matrimonio.

2 Ove i coniugi non possono accordarsi, l’ammontare del contributo è stabilito dall’autorità competente a richiesta di uno di essi.

3 Il marito non è tenuto a restituire i contributi della moglie.

Art. 247 F. Dote

F. Dote

1 La convenzione matrimoniale può fissare un determinato importo della sostanza della moglie che questa conferisce al marito, a titolo di dote, per sopportare gli oneri del matrimonio.

2 I beni così conferiti al marito soggiacciono alle norme dell’unione dei beni, salva convenzione contraria.


  Capo quinto: Del registro dei beni matrimoniali

Art. 248 A. Effetti

A. Effetti

1 Le convenzioni matrimoniali, le decisioni giudiziarie relative al regime dei beni matrimoniali ed i negozi giuridici fra coniugi concernenti gli apporti della moglie o la sostanza comune, diventano opponibili ai terzi mediante l’inscrizione nel registro dei beni matrimoniali e la pubblicazione.

2 Gli eredi del coniuge defunto non sono considerati come terzi.

Art. 249 B. Iscrizione / I. Oggetto

B. Iscrizione

I. Oggetto

1 L’iscrizione deve contenere le disposizioni che i coniugi intendono rendere opponibili ai terzi.

2 L’iscrizione può essere domandata da ciascuno dei coniugi a meno che la legge non disponga altrimenti o la convenzione matrimoniale espressamente lo escluda.

Art. 250 B. Iscrizione / II. Luogo della iscrizione

II. Luogo della iscrizione

1 L’iscrizione avviene nel registro del luogo di domicilio del marito.

2 Se il marito trasferisce il proprio domicilio in un altro circondario di registro, l’iscrizione deve avvenire anche al nuovo domicilio, entro tre mesi dal trasferimento.

3 L’iscrizione nel registro del domicilio precedente perde i suoi effetti col decorso di tre mesi dal trasferimento del domicilio.

Art. 251 C. Tenuta dei registri C. Tenuta dei registri

C. Tenuta dei registri

1 Il registro dei beni matrimoniali è tenuto dall’ufficio del registro di commercio in quanto i Cantoni non designino speciali circondari ed ufficiali.

2 Ognuno ha il diritto di esaminare il registro dei beni matrimoniali e di chiederne degli estratti.

3 La pubblicazione delle convenzioni matrimoniali indica soltanto il regime dei beni adottato dai coniugi.


1 CS 2 3. Tuttora applicabile come diritto transitorio in quanto previsto dagli art. 9a e segg. del titolo finale (revisione del diritto matrimoniale, del 5 ott. 1984).

  Indice

A. Applicazione del diritto Art. 1

I. Osservanza della buona fede Art. 2

II. Effetti della buona fede Art. 3

III. Apprezzamento del giudice Art. 4

I. Diritto civile dei Cantoni ed uso locale Art. 5

II. Diritto pubblico cantonale Art. 6

D. Disposizioni generali del Codice delle obbligazioni Art. 7

I. Onere della prova Art. 8

II. Prova dei documenti pubblici Art. 9

Art. 10

I. Godimento dei diritti civili Art. 11

1. Oggetto Art. 12

2. Condizioni

a. In genere Art. 13

b. Maggiore età Art. 14

c. Art. 15

d. Capacità di discernimento Art. 16

1. In genere Art. 17

2. Mancanza di discernimento Art. 18

3. Persone capaci di discernimento ma incapaci di agire

a. Principio Art. 19

b. Consenso del rappresentante legale Art. 19a

c. Difetto di ratifica Art. 19b

4. Diritti strettamente personali Art. 19c

IIIbis. Limitazione dell’esercizio dei diritti civili Art. 19d

1. Parentela Art. 20

2. Affinità Art. 21

1. Cittadinanza Art. 22

2. Domicilio

a. Nozione Art. 23

b. Cambiamento di domicilio o dimora Art. 24

c. Domicilio dei minorenni Art. 25

d. Domicilio dei maggiorenni sotto curatela generale Art. 26

I. Contro impegni eccessivi Art. 27

1. Principio Art. 28

2. Azioni

a. In genere Art. 28a

b. Violenza, minacce o insidie Art. 28b

3. Art. 28c a 28f

4. Diritto di risposta

a. Principio Art. 28g

b. Forma e contenuto Art. 28h

c. Procedura Art. 28i

d. Diffusione Art. 28k

e. Intervento del giudice Art. 28l

1. Protezione Art. 29

2. Cambiamento del nome

a. In genere Art. 30

b. In caso di morte di un coniuge Art. 30a

I. Nascita e morte Art. 31

1. Onere della prova Art. 32

2. Mezzi di prova

a. In genere Art. 33

b. Indizio di morte Art. 34

1. In genere Art. 35

2. Procedura Art. 36

3. Caducità della istanza Art. 37

4. Effetti della scomparsa Art. 38

I. In genere Art. 39

II. Obbligo di notificazione Art. 40

III. Prova di dati non controversi Art. 41

1. Da parte del giudice Art. 42

2. Da parte delle autorità dello stato civile Art. 43

V. Protezione e divulgazione dei dati Art. 43a

1. Ufficiali dello stato civile Art. 44

2. Autorità di vigilanza Art. 45

Ia. Sistema centrale d’informazione sulle persone Art. 45a

II. Responsabilità Art. 46

III. Misure disciplinari Art. 47

I. Diritto federale Art. 48

II. Diritto cantonale Art. 49

Art. 50 e 51

A. Personalità Art. 52

B. Godimento dei diritti civili Art. 53

I. Condizioni Art. 54

II. Modo Art. 55

D. Sede Art. 56

I. Devoluzione del patrimonio Art. 57

II. Liquidazione Art. 58

F. Riserve di diritto pubblico e di diritto particolare Art. 59

I. Unioni corporative Art. 60

II. Iscrizione nel registro di commercio Art. 61

III. Associazioni senza personalità Art. 62

IV. Relazioni fra gli statuti e la legge Art. 63

1. Funzioni e convocazione Art. 64

2. Competenze Art. 65

3. Risoluzioni sociali

a. Forma Art. 66

b. Diritto di voto e maggioranza Art. 67

c. Esclusione dal diritto di voto Art. 68

1. Diritti e doveri in generale Art. 69

2. Contabilità Art. 69a

III. Ufficio di revisione Art. 69b

IV. Lacune nell’organizzazione Art. 69c

I. Ammissione e dimissione Art. 70

II. Contributi Art. 71

III. Esclusione Art. 72

IV. Effetti della dimissione e dell’esclusione Art. 73

V. Protezione del fine Art. 74

VI. Protezione dei diritti dei soci Art. 75

Cbis. Responsabilità Art. 75a

1. Per risoluzione Art. 76

2. Per legge Art. 77

3. Per sentenza del giudice Art. 78

II. Cancellazione dal registro Art. 79

I. In genere Art. 80

II. Forma Art. 81

III. Contestazione Art. 82

I. In genere Art. 83

II. Contabilità Art. 83a

1. Obbligo di revisione e diritto applicabile Art. 83b

2. Rapporto con l’autorità di vigilanza Art. 83c

IV. Lacune nell’organizzazione Art. 83d

C. Vigilanza Art. 84

Cbis. Misure in caso di eccedenza dei debiti e d’insolvenza Art. 84a

Abrogato Art. 84b

I. Dell’organizzazione Art. 85

1. Su proposta dell’autorità di vigilanza o dell’organo superiore della fondazione Art. 86

2. Su richiesta del fondatore o in virtù di una sua disposizione a causa di morte Art. 86a

III. Modifiche accessorie dell’atto di fondazione Art. 86b

E. Fondazioni di famiglia ed ecclesiastiche Art. 87

I. Soppressione da parte dell’autorità competente Art. 88

II. Legittimazione attiva, cancellazione dal registro Art. 89

G. Fondazioni di previdenza a favore del personale Art. 89a

A. Difetto di amministrazione Art. 89b

B. Competenza Art. 89c

A. Promessa nuziale Art. 90

I. Regali Art. 91

II. Partecipazione finanziaria Art. 92

III. Prescrizione Art. 93

A. Capacità al matrimonio Art. 94

I. Parentela Art. 95

II. Matrimonio antecedente Art. 96

A. Principi Art. 97

Abis. Elusione del diritto in materia di stranieri Art. 97a

I. Domanda Art. 98

II. Esecuzione e chiusura della procedura preparatoria Art. 99

III. Termine Art. 100

I. Luogo Art. 101

II. Forma Art. 102

D. Disposizioni d’esecuzione Art. 103

A. Principio Art. 104

I. Cause Art. 105

II. Azione Art. 106

I. Cause Art. 107

II. Azione Art. 108

D. Effetti della sentenza Art. 109

Abrogato Art. 110

I. Accordo completo Art. 111

II. Accordo parziale Art. 112

Abrogato Art. 113

I. Dopo la sospensione della vita comune Art. 114

II. Rottura del vincolo coniugale Art. 115

Abrogato Art. 116

A. Condizioni e procedura Art. 117

B. Effetti della separazione Art. 118

A. Cognome Art. 119

B. Regime matrimoniale e diritto successorio Art. 120

C. Abitazione familiare Art. 121

I. Principio Art. 122

II. Conguaglio delle prestazioni d’uscita Art. 123

III. Conguaglio delle rendite d’invalidità versate prima dell’età di pensionamento stabilita dal regolamento Art. 124

IV. Conguaglio delle rendite d’invalidità versate dopo l’età di pensionamento stabilita dal regolamento o di rendite di vecchiaia Art. 124a

V. Eccezioni Art. 124b

VI. Compensazione di pretese reciproche Art. 124c

VII. Conguaglio non ragionevolmente esigibile Art. 124d

VIII. Conguaglio impossibile Art. 124e

I. Condizioni Art. 125

II. Modalità del contributo di mantenimento Art. 126

1. Disposizioni speciali Art. 127

2. Adeguamento al rincaro Art. 128

3. Modifica mediante sentenza Art. 129

4. Estinzione per legge Art. 130

1. Aiuto all’incasso Art. 131

2. Anticipi Art. 131a

3. Diffida ai debitori e garanzia Art. 132

I. Diritti e doveri dei genitori Art. 133

II. Modificazione delle circostanze Art. 134

Abrogati Art. 135 a 158

A. Unione coniugale; diritti doveri dei coniugi Art. 159

B. Cognome Art. 160

C. Cittadinanza Art. 161

D. Abitazione coniugale Art. 162

I. In genere Art. 163

II. Somma a libera disposizione Art. 164

III. Contributi straordinari di un coniuge Art. 165

F. Rappresentanza dell’unione coniugale Art. 166

G. Professione e impresa dei coniugi Art. 167

I. In genere Art. 168

II. Abitazione familiare Art. 169

J. Obbligo d’informazione Art. 170

I. Consultori Art. 171

1. In genere Art. 172

2. Durante la convivenza

a. Prestazioni pecuniarie Art. 173

b. Privazione della rappresentanza Art. 174

3. Sospensione della comunione domestica

a. Motivi Art. 175

b. Organizzazione della vita separata Art. 176

4. Esecuzione

a. Aiuto all’incasso e anticipi Art. 176a

b. Diffida ai debitori Art. 177

5. Restrizioni del potere di disporre Art. 178

6. Modificazione delle circostanze Art. 179

Abrogato Art. 180

A. Regime ordinario Art. 181

I. Scelta del regime Art. 182

II. Capacità di contrattare Art. 183

III. Forma Art. 184

1. Pronuncia Art. 185

2. Art. 186

3. Revoca Art. 187

1. Fallimento Art. 188

2. Pignoramento

a. Pronuncia Art. 189

b. Istanza Art. 190

3. Cessazione Art. 191

III. Liquidazione del regime precedente Art. 192

D. Protezione dei creditori Art. 193

E. Art. 194

F. Amministrazione della sostanza di un coniuge da parte dell’altro Art. 195

G. Inventario Art. 195a

I. Composizione Art. 196

II. Acquisti Art. 197

1. Per legge Art. 198

2. Per convenzione matrimoniale Art. 199

IV. Prova Art. 200

B. Amministrazione, godimento e disposizione Art. 201

C. Responsabilità verso i terzi Art. 202

D. Debiti tra coniugi Art. 203

I. Momento dello scioglimento Art. 204

1. In genere Art. 205

2. Partecipazione al plusvalore Art. 206

1. Separazione degli acquisti e dei beni propri Art. 207

2. Reintegrazione negli acquisti Art. 208

3. Compensi tra acquisti e beni propri Art. 209

4. Aumento Art. 210

1. Valore venale Art. 211

2. Valore di reddito

a. In genere Art. 212

b. Circostanze speciali Art. 213

3. Momento determinante Art. 214

1. Per legge Art. 215

2. Per convenzione

a. In genere Art. 216

b. In caso di divorzio, separazione, nullità del matrimonio o separazione dei beni giudiziale Art. 217

1. Dilazione Art. 218

2. Abitazione e suppellettili domestiche Art. 219

3. Azione contro i terzi Art. 220

I. Composizione Art. 221

1. Comunione universale Art. 222

2. Comunioni limitate

a. Comunione d’acquisti Art. 223

b. Altre comunioni Art. 224

III. Beni propri Art. 225

IV. Prova Art. 226

1. Amministrazione ordinaria Art. 227

2. Amministrazione straordinaria Art. 228

3. Professione od impresa comune Art. 229

4. Rinuncia e accettazione di eredità Art. 230

5. Responsabilità e spese dell’amministrazione Art. 231

II. Beni propri Art. 232

I. Debiti integrali Art. 233

II. Debiti propri Art. 234

D. Debiti tra coniugi Art. 235

I. Momento dello scioglimento Art. 236

II. Attribuzione ai beni propri Art. 237

III. Compensi tra beni comuni e beni propri Art. 238

IV. Partecipazione al plusvalore Art. 239

V. Determinazione del valore Art. 240

1. In caso di morte o di pattuizione di un altro regime dei beni Art. 241

2. Negli altri casi Art. 242

1. Beni propri Art. 243

2. Abitazione e suppellettili domestiche Art. 244

3. Altri beni Art. 245

4. Altre norme di ripartizione Art. 246

I. In genere Art. 247

II. Prova Art. 248

B. Responsabilità verso i terzi Art. 249

C. Debiti fra coniugi Art. 250

D. Attribuzione in caso di comproprietà Art. 251

A. Sorgere della filiazione in genere Art. 252

B. Art. 253 e 254

Abrogati

A. Presunzione Art. 255

I. Diritto all’azione Art. 256

1. Concepimento nel matrimonio Art. 256a

2. Concepimento prima del matrimonio o durante la sospensione della comunione domestica Art. 256b

III. Termine Art. 256c

C. Duplice presunzione Art. 257

D. Azione dei genitori Art. 258

E. Matrimonio dei genitori Art. 259

I. Condizioni e forma Art. 260

1. Diritto all’azione Art. 260a

2. Motivo Art. 260b

3. Termine Art. 260c

I. Diritto all’azione Art. 261

II. Presunzione Art. 262

III. Termine Art. 263

I. Condizioni generali Art. 264

II. Adozione congiunta Art. 264a

III. Adozione singola Art. 264b

IV. Adozione del figliastro Art. 264c

V. Differenza d’età Art. 264d

VI. Consenso dell’adottando e dell’autorità di protezione dei minori Art. 265

1. Forma Art. 265a

2. Termini Art. 265b

3. Astrazione

a. Condizioni Art. 265c

b. Decisione Art. 265d

B. Adozione di maggiorenni Art. 266

I. In generale Art. 267

II. Nome Art. 267a

III. Cittadinanza Art. 267b

I. In generale Art. 268

II. Istruttoria Art. 268a

III. Audizione dell’adottando Art. 268abis

IV. Rappresentanza dell’adottando Art. 268ater

V. Considerazione dell’atteggiamento dei congiunti Art. 268aquater

Dbis. Segreto dell’adozione Art. 268b

Dter. Informazione circa l’adozione, i genitori biologici e i loro discendenti Art. 268c

Dquater. Servizio cantonale preposto all’informazione e servizi di ricerca Art. 268d

Dquinquies. Relazioni personali con i genitori biologici Art. 268e

1. Mancanza del consenso Art. 269

2. Altri vizi Art. 269a

II. Termine Art. 269b

F. Collocamento in vista d’adozione Art. 269c

I. Figlio di genitori coniugati Art. 270

II. Figlio di genitori non coniugati Art. 270a

III. Consenso del figlio Art. 270b

B. Cittadinanza Art. 271

C. Doveri vicendevoli Art. 272

1. Principio Art. 273

2. Limiti Art. 274

II. Terzi Art. 274a

III. Competenza Art. 275

E. Informazione e schiarimenti Art. 275a

I. Oggetto e estensione Art. 276

II. Priorità dell’obbligo di mantenimento nei confronti del figlio minorenne Art. 276a

B. Durata Art. 277

C. Genitori coniugati Art. 278

I. Diritto Art. 279

II e III Art. 280 a 284

1. Contributo dei genitori Art. 285

2. Altre prestazioni destinate al mantenimento del figlio Art. 285a

1. In genere Art. 286

2. Casi di ammanco Art. 286a

I. Prestazioni periodiche Art. 287

II. Contenuto del contratto di mantenimento Art. 287a

III. Tacitazione Art. 288

I. Creditore Art. 289

1. Aiuto all’incasso Art. 290

2. Diffida ai debitori Art. 291

III. Garanzie Art. 292

G. Diritto pubblico Art. 293

H. Genitori affilianti Art. 294

J. Azione della donna nubile Art. 295

A. Principi Art. 296

Abis. Morte di un genitore Art. 297

Ater. Divorzio e altre procedure matrimoniali Art. 298

I. Dichiarazione comune dei genitori Art. 298a

II. Decisione dell’autorità di protezione dei minori Art. 298b

III. Azione di paternità Art. 298c

IV. Modificazione delle circostanze Art. 298d

Aquinquies. Modificazione delle circostanze dopo l’adozione del figliastro del convivente di fatto Art. 298e

Asexies. Patrigno e matrigna Art. 299

Asepties. Genitori affilianti Art. 300

I. In genere Art. 301

II. Determinazione del luogo di dimora Art. 301a

III. Educazione Art. 302

IV. Educazione religiosa Art. 303

1. Verso i terzi

a. In genere Art. 304

b. Stato giuridico del figlio Art. 305

2. Nei rapporti interni della comunione Art. 306

I. Misure opportune Art. 307

II. Curatela Art. 308

Abrogato Art. 309

III. Privazione del diritto di determinare il luogo di dimora Art. 310

1. D’ufficio Art. 311

2. Col consenso dei genitori Art. 312

V. Modificazione delle circostanze Art. 313

1. In genere Art. 314

2. Audizione del figlio Art. 314a

3. Rappresentanza del figlio Art. 314abis

4. Ricovero in un istituto chiuso o in una clinica psichiatrica Art. 314b

5. Diritti di avviso Art. 314c

6. Obblighi di avviso Art. 314d

7. Collaborazione e assistenza amministrativa Art. 314e

1. In genere Art. 315

2. Nella procedura matrimoniale

a. Competenza del giudice Art. 315a

b. Modifica di misure giudiziarie Art. 315b

VIII. Vigilanza sugli affiliati Art. 316

IX. Cooperazione dell’aiuto alla gioventù Art. 317

A. Amministrazione Art. 318

B. Impiego dei redditi Art. 319

C. Prelevamento sulla sostanza del figlio Art. 320

I. Liberalità Art. 321

II. Porzione legittima Art. 322

III. Provento del lavoro, assegno professionale Art. 323

I. Misure opportune Art. 324

II. Privazione dell’amministrazione Art. 325

I. Restituzione Art. 326

II. Responsabilità Art. 327

A. Principio Art. 327a

I. Del minorenne Art. 327b

II. Del tutore Art. 327c

A. Persone obbligate Art. 328

B. Oggetto e modo dell’azione Art. 329

C. Assistenza di trovatelli Art. 330

A. Condizioni Art. 331

I. Ordine interno e cura Art. 332

II. Responsabilità Art. 333

1. Condizioni Art. 334

2. Procedura Art. 334bis

A. Fondazioni di famiglia Art. 335

1. Facoltà Art. 336

2. Forma Art. 337

II. Durata Art. 338

1. Modo Art. 339

2. Direzione e rappresentanza

a. In genere Art. 340

b. Delegazione ad un capo Art. 341

3. Beni comuni e beni riservati Art. 342

1. Cause Art. 343

2. Disdetta, insolvenza, matrimonio Art. 344

3. Morte di un partecipante Art. 345

4. Norme per la divisione Art. 346

1. Definizione Art. 347

2. Speciali motivi di scioglimento Art. 348

Abrogati Art. 349 a 359

A. Principio Art. 360

I. Costituzione Art. 361

II. Revoca Art. 362

C. Convalida e accettazione Art. 363

D. Interpretazione e completamento Art. 364

E. Adempimento Art. 365

F. Compenso e spese Art. 366

G. Disdetta Art. 367

H. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti Art. 368

I. Ricupero della capacità di discernimento Art. 369

A. Principio Art. 370

B. Costituzione e revoca Art. 371

C. Verificarsi dell’incapacità di discernimento Art. 372

D. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti Art. 373

A. Condizioni ed estensione del diritto di rappresentanza Art. 374

B. Esercizio del diritto di rappresentanza Art. 375

C. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti Art. 376

A. Piano terapeutico Art. 377

B. Persone con diritto di rappresentanza Art. 378

C. Situazioni d’urgenza Art. 379

D. Trattamento di una turba psichica Art. 380

E. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti Art. 381

A. Contratto d’assistenza Art. 382

I. Condizioni Art. 383

II. Verbalizzazione e informazione Art. 384

III. Intervento dell’autorità di protezione degli adulti Art. 385

C. Protezione della personalità Art. 386

D. Vigilanza sugli istituti di accoglienza e di cura Art. 387

A. Scopo Art. 388

B. Sussidiarietà e proporzionalità Art. 389

A. Condizioni Art. 390

B. Sfere di compiti Art. 391

C. Rinuncia a una curatela Art. 392

A. Amministrazione di sostegno Art. 393

I. In genere Art. 394

II. Amministrazione dei beni Art. 395

C. Curatela di cooperazione Art. 396

D. Combinazione di curatele Art. 397

E. Curatela generale Art. 398

Abrogato Art. 399

I. Condizioni generali Art. 400

II. Desideri dell’interessato o delle persone a lui vicine Art. 401

III. Conferimento dell’ufficio a più persone Art. 402

B. Impedimento e collisione di interessi Art. 403

C. Compenso e spese Art. 404

A. Assunzione dell’ufficio Art. 405

B. Relazione con l’interessato Art. 406

C. Atti autonomi dell’interessato Art. 407

I. Compiti Art. 408

II. Importi a libera disposizione Art. 409

III. Contabilità Art. 410

E. Rapporto Art. 411

F. Negozi particolari Art. 412

G. Obbligo di diligenza e di discrezione Art. 413

H. Modificazione delle circostanze Art. 414

A. Esame della contabilità e del rapporto Art. 415

I. Per legge Art. 416

II. Su ordine dell’autorità Art. 417

III. Mancanza del consenso Art. 418

Abrogato Art. 419

Abrogato Art. 420

A. Per legge Art. 421

I. Su richiesta del curatore Art. 422

II. Altri casi Art. 423

C. Atti e negozi indifferibili Art. 424

D. Rapporto e conto finali Art. 425

I. Ricovero a scopo di cura o di assistenza Art. 426

II. Permanenza coatta di persone ricoverate volontariamente Art. 427

I. Autorità di protezione degli adulti Art. 428

1. Competenza Art. 429

2. Procedura Art. 430

C. Verifica periodica Art. 431

D. Persona di fiducia Art. 432

I. Piano terapeutico Art. 433

II. Trattamento in assenza di consenso Art. 434

III. Situazioni d’urgenza Art. 435

IV. Colloquio d’uscita Art. 436

V. Diritto cantonale Art. 437

F. Misure restrittive della libertà di movimento Art. 438

G. Ricorso al giudice Art. 439

A. Autorità di protezione degli adulti Art. 440

B. Autorità di vigilanza Art. 441

C. Competenza per territorio Art. 442

A. Diritti e obblighi di avviso Art. 443

B. Esame della competenza Art. 444

C. Provvedi- menti cautelari Art. 445

D. Principi procedurali Art. 446

E. Audizione Art. 447

F. Obbligo di collaborare e assistenza amministrativa Art. 448

G. Ricovero per perizia Art. 449

H. Designazione di un rappresentante Art. 449a

I. Consultazione degli atti Art. 449b

J. Obbligo di comunicazione Art. 449c

A. Oggetto del reclamo e legittimazione attiva Art. 450

B. Motivi di reclamo Art. 450a

C. Termine di reclamo Art. 450b

D. Effetto sospensivo Art. 450c

E. Osservazioni dell’autorità inferiore e riesame Art. 450d

F. Disposizioni particolari per il ricovero a scopo di assistenza Art. 450e

Abrogato Art. 450f

Abrogato Art. 450g

A. Obbligo di discrezione e informazione Art. 451

B. Effetto delle misure nei confronti dei terzi Art. 452

C. Obbligo di collaborazione Art. 453

A. Principio Art. 454

B. Prescrizione Art. 455

C. Responsa- bilità secondo le norme sul mandato Art. 456

I. Discendenti Art. 457

II. Stirpe dei genitori Art. 458

III. Stirpe degli avi Art. 459

IV. Estensione del diritto di successione Art. 460

Abrogato Art. 461

B. Coniuge superstite e partner registrato superstite Art. 462

Abrogati Art. 463 e 464

C. ... Art. 465

D. Enti pubblici Art. 466

A. Per testamento Art. 467

B. Per contratto successorio Art. 468

C. Disposizioni nulle Art. 469

I. Limiti Art. 470

II. Porzione legittima Art. 471

III. Art. 472

IV. Liberalità al coniuge superstite Art. 473

1. Deduzione dei debiti Art. 474

2. Liberalità Art. 475

3. Polizze di assicurazione Art. 476

I. Motivi di diseredazione Art. 477

II. Effetti della diseredazione Art. 478

III. Onere della prova Art. 479

IV. Diseredazione di un insolvente Art. 480

A. In genere Art. 481

B. Oneri e condizioni Art. 482

C. Istituzione d’erede Art. 483

I. Oggetto Art. 484

II. Obblighi del debitore Art. 485

III. Rapporti con la successione Art. 486

E. Sostituzione volgare Art. 487

I. Designazione del sostituito Art. 488

II. Apertura della sostituzione Art. 489

III. Garanzia Art. 490

1. Per l’istituito Art. 491

2. Per il sostituito Art. 492

V. Discendenti incapaci di discernimento Art. 492a

G. Fondazioni Art. 493

I. Istituzione d’erede e legato contrattuali Art. 494

1. Condizioni Art. 495

2. Devoluzione per vacanza Art. 496

3. Diritti dei creditori Art. 497

1. In genere Art. 498

2. Testamento pubblico

a. In genere Art. 499

b. Ufficio del funzionario Art. 500

c. Ufficio dei testimoni Art. 501

d. Omissione della lettura e della firma Art. 502

e. Persone cooperanti Art. 503

f. Conservazione dei testamenti Art. 504

3. Testamento olografo Art. 505

4. Testamento orale

a. Disposizione Art. 506

b. Documentazione Art. 507

c. Caducità Art. 508

1. Revoca Art. 509

2. Distruzione dell’atto Art. 510

3. Disposizione posteriore Art. 511

I. Forma Art. 512

1. Tra vivi

a. Per contratto o per testamento Art. 513

b. Per recesso dal contratto Art. 514

2. Premorienza dell’erede Art. 515

C. Limitazione della facoltà di disporre Art. 516

A. Nomina Art. 517

B. Poteri dell’esecutore Art. 518

I. Incapacità di disporre. Difetto di libera volontà. Causa illecita od immorale Art. 519

1. In genere Art. 520

2. In caso di testamento olografo Art. 520a

III. Prescrizione Art. 521

1. In genere Art. 522

2. Per gli eredi legittimari Art. 523

3. Diritti dei creditori Art. 524

1. In genere Art. 525

2. Legato di cosa singola Art. 526

3. Disposizioni fra vivi

a. Casi Art. 527

b. Restituzioni Art. 528

4. Polizze di assicurazione Art. 529

5. Usufrutti e rendite Art. 530

6. Sostituzione di eredi Art. 531

III. Ordine della riduzione Art. 532

IV. Prescrizione dell’azione Art. 533

A. Trapasso dei beni tra vivi Art. 534

I. Riduzione Art. 535

II. Restituzione Art. 536

A. Momento dell’apertura Art. 537

B. Luogo della apertura Art. 538

1. Personalità Art. 539

2. Indegnità

a. Cause Art. 540

b. Effetti pei discendenti Art. 541

1. Per l’erede Art. 542

2. Per il legatario Art. 543

3. Infante concepito Art. 544

4. Eredi sostituiti Art. 545

1. Immissione in possesso e garanzie Art. 546

2. Ricomparsa della persona e restituzione Art. 547

II. Successione devoluta allo scomparso Art. 548

III. Rapporti fra i due casi Art. 549

IV. Procedura d’ufficio Art. 550

A. In genere Art. 551

B. Apposizione dei sigilli Art. 552

C. Inventario Art. 553

I. In genere Art. 554

II. Eredi ignoti Art. 555

I. Obbligo di consegnarle Art. 556

II. Pubblicazione Art. 557

III. Comunicazione ai beneficati Art. 558

IV. Consegna dell’eredità Art. 559

I. Eredi Art. 560

II. Art. 561

1. Acquisto del legato Art. 562

2. Oggetto Art. 563

3. Rapporti fra il creditore ed il legatario Art. 564

4. Regresso Art. 565

1. Facoltà di rinunciare Art. 566

2. Termini

a. In genere Art. 567

b. In caso di inventario Art. 568

3. Trasmissione della facoltà di rinuncia Art. 569

4. Forma della rinuncia Art. 570

II. Decadenza dal diritto di rinunciare Art. 571

III. Rinuncia di un coerede Art. 572

1. In genere Art. 573

2. Facoltà del coniuge superstite Art. 574

3. Rinuncia a favore degli eredi del grado susseguente Art. 575

V. Proroga del termine Art. 576

VI. Rinuncia al legato Art. 577

VII. Diritti dei creditori dell’erede Art. 578

VIII. Responsabilità in caso di rinuncia Art. 579

A. Condizioni Art. 580

I. Compilazione dell’inventario Art. 581

II. Grida Art. 582

III. Inscrizione d’officio Art. 583

IV. Chiusura Art. 584

I. Amministrazione Art. 585

II. Esecuzione, cause in corso, prescrizione Art. 586

I. Termine per deliberare Art. 587

II. Dichiarazione Art. 588

1. Responsabilità secondo l’inventario Art. 589

2. Responsabilità oltre l’inventario Art. 590

E. Responsabilità per le fideiussioni Art. 591

F. Devoluzione agli enti pubblici Art. 592

I. A istanza di un coerede Art. 593

II. A istanza dei creditori del defunto Art. 594

I. Amministrazione Art. 595

II. Liquidazione ordinaria Art. 596

III. Liquidazione in via di fallimento Art. 597

A. Condizioni Art. 598

B. Effetti Art. 599

C. Prescrizione Art. 600

D. Azione del legatario Art. 601

I. Comunione ereditaria Art. 602

II. Responsabilità degli eredi Art. 603

B. Azione di divisione Art. 604

C. Divisione differita Art. 605

D. Diritti degli eredi conviventi Art. 606

A. In genere Art. 607

I. Disposizioni del defunto Art. 608

II. Intervento dell’autorità Art. 609

I. Parità di diritto fra gli eredi Art. 610

II. Formazione dei lotti Art. 611

III. Attribuzione e vendita Art. 612

IV. Attribuzione dell’abitazione e delle suppellettili domestiche al coniuge superstite Art. 612a

I. Complessi di cose. Scritti di famiglia Art. 613

I.bis Pertinenze agricole Art. 613a

II. Crediti del defunto verso gli eredi Art. 614

III. Oggetti gravati di pegno Art. 615

Abrogato Art. 616

1. Ripresa

a. Valore d’imputazione Art. 617

b. Procedura di stima Art. 618

V. Aziende e fondi agricoli Art. 619

Abrogati Art. 620 a 625

A. Obbligo di collazione Art. 626

B. Collazione in caso di incapacità o di rinuncia Art. 627

I. Conferimento od imputazione Art. 628

II. Liberalità eccedenti la quota ereditaria Art. 629

III. Computo della collazione Art. 630

D. Spese di educazione Art. 631

E. Regali di occasione Art. 632

Abrogato Art. 633

I. Contratto di divisione Art. 634

II. Convenzioni circa eredità devolute Art. 635

III. Convenzioni circa eredità non devolute Art. 636

I. Garanzia delle quote Art. 637

II. Contestazione della divisione Art. 638

I. Solidarietà Art. 639

II. Regresso fra coeredi Art. 640

I. In generale Art. 641

II. Animali Art. 641a

I. Parti costitutive Art. 642

II. Frutti naturali Art. 643

1. Definizione Art. 644

2. Esclusioni Art. 645

1. Rapporti fra i comproprietari Art. 646

2. Regolamento per l’uso e l’amministrazione Art. 647

3. Atti dell’ordinaria amministrazione Art. 647a

4. Atti di amministrazione più importanti Art. 647b

5. Lavori di costruzione

a. Necessari Art. 647c

b. Utili Art. 647d

c. Diretti all’abbellimento e alla comodità Art. 647e

6. Disposizione Art. 648

7. Contribuzione alle spese ed oneri Art. 649

8. Vincolatività di norme e decisioni e menzione nel registro fondiario Art. 649a

9. Esclusione dalla comunione

a. Comproprietari Art. 649b

b. Titolari di altri diritti Art. 649c

10. Scioglimento

a. Azione di divisione Art. 650

b. Modo della divisione Art. 651

c. Animali domestici Art. 651a

1. Condizioni Art. 652

2. Effetti Art. 653

3. Scioglimento Art. 654

III. Proprietà collettiva di aziende e fondi agricoli Art. 654a

I. Fondi Art. 655

II. Proprietà dipendente Art. 655a

I. Iscrizione Art. 656

1. Trasmissione Art. 657

2. Occupazione Art. 658

3. Formazione di nuovi terreni Art. 659

4. Spostamenti di terreno

a. In genere Art. 660

b. Permanenti Art. 660a

c. Nuova determinazione del confine Art. 660b

5. Prescrizione acquisitiva

a. Prescrizione ordinaria Art. 661

b. Prescrizione straordinaria Art. 662

c. Termini Art. 663

6. Cose senza padrone e cose di dominio pubblico Art. 664

III. Diritto all’iscrizione Art. 665

C. Perdita Art. 666

I. Proprietario irreperibile Art. 666a

II. Soggetti giuridici privi degli organi prescritti Art. 666b

I. Estensione Art. 667

1. Modo di stabilirli Art. 668

2. Obbligo di porre i termini Art. 669

3. Comproprietà delle opere divisorie Art. 670

1. In rapporto al materiale

a. Proprietà del medesimo Art. 671

b. Risarcimento Art. 672

c. Attribuzione del fondo Art. 673

2. Opere sporgenti sul fondo altrui Art. 674

3. Diritto di superficie Art. 675

4. Condotte Art. 676

5. Costruzioni mobiliari Art. 677

IV. Piantagioni sul fondo altrui Art. 678

1. In caso di eccesso nell’esercizio del diritto di proprietà Art. 679

2. In caso di gestione legittima del fondo Art. 679a

I. In genere Art. 680

1. Principi Art. 681

2. Esercizio Art. 681a

3. Modificazione, rinuncia Art. 681b

4. In caso di comproprietà e di diritto di superficie Art. 682

5. Diritto di prelazione su aziende e fondi agricoli Art. 682a

Abrogato Art. 683

1. Eccessi pregiudizievoli Art. 684

2. Scavi e costruzioni

a. Regola Art. 685

b. Riserva del diritto cantonale Art. 686

3. Piante

a. Regola Art. 687

b. Prescrizioni cantonali Art. 688

4. Scolo delle acque Art. 689

5. Prosciugamenti Art. 690

6. Condotte

a. Obbligo di tollerarle Art. 691

b. Tutela degli interessi dei gravati Art. 692

c. Cambiamento di circostanze Art. 693

7. Diritti di passo

a. Accesso necessario Art. 694

b. Altri diritti di passo Art. 695

c. Iscrizione nel registro Art. 696

8. Opere di cinta Art. 697

9. Manutenzione Art. 698

1. Accesso Art. 699

2. Ripresa di cose o di animali Art. 700

3. Difesa da pericoli o danni Art. 701

1. In genere Art. 702

2. Miglioramenti del suolo Art. 703

I. Proprietà e diritto sulle sorgenti Art. 704

II. Derivazione di sorgenti Art. 705

1. Indennità Art. 706

2. Ripristino Art. 707

IV. Comunione di sorgenti Art. 708

V. Utilizzazione di sorgenti Art. 709

VI. Fontana necessaria Art. 710

1. Dell’acqua Art. 711

2. Circa il terreno Art. 712

I. Elementi Art. 712a

II. Oggetto Art. 712b

III. Disposizione Art. 712c

I. Atto costitutivo Art. 712d

II. Delimitazione e quote di valore Art. 712e

III. Estinzione Art. 712f

I. Disposizioni applicabili Art. 712g

1. Definizione e ripartizione Art. 712h

2. Garanzia dei contributi

a. Ipoteca legale Art. 712

b. Diritto di ritenzione Art. 712k

III. Esercizio dei diritti civili Art. 712l

1. Competenza e stato giuridico Art. 712m

2. Convocazione e presidenza Art. 712n

3. Diritto di voto Art. 712o

4. Costituzione dell’assemblea Art. 712p

1. Nomina Art. 712q

2. Revoca Art. 712r

3. Competenze

a. Esecuzione delle disposizioni e decisioni su l’amministrazione e l’uso Art. 712s

b. Rappresentanza verso i terzi Art. 712t

A. Oggetto Art. 713

1. Trasferimento del possesso Art. 714

2. Riserva della proprietà

a. In genere Art. 715

b. Vendita a pagamenti rateali Art. 716

3. Acquisto senza il possesso Art. 717

1. Cose senza padrone Art. 718

2. Animali sfuggiti Art. 719

1. Pubblicazione ed indagine

a. In generale Art. 720

b. Nel caso di animali Art. 720a

2. Custodia ed incanto pubblico Art. 721

3. Acquisto della proprietà, riconsegna Art. 722

4. Tesoro Art. 723

5. Oggetti di pregio scientifico Art. 724

IV. Cose trasportate e animali sfuggiti Art. 725

V. Specificazione Art. 726

VI. Unione e mescolanza Art. 727

VII. Prescrizione acquisitiva Art. 728

C. Perdita della proprietà mobiliare Art. 729

A. Oggetto Art. 730

1. Iscrizione Art. 731

2. Negozio giuridico Art. 732

3. Servitù sul proprio fondo Art. 733

1. In genere Art. 734

2. Riunione dei fondi Art. 735

3. Per sentenza Art. 736

1. In genere Art. 737

2. Secondo l’iscrizione Art. 738

3. Nuovi bisogni del fondo Art. 739

4. Diritto cantonale ed usi locali Art. 740

5. Più aventi diritto Art. 740a

II. Manutenzione Art. 741

III. Spostamento della servitù Art. 742

IV. Divisione del fondo Art. 743

Abrogato Art. 744

I. Oggetto Art. 745

1. In genere Art. 746

2. Art. 747

1. Cause Art. 748

2. Durata Art. 749

3. Usufrutto sulla cosa sostituita Art. 750

4. Restituzione

a. Obbligo Art. 751

b. Responsabilità Art. 752

c. Spese Art. 753

5. Prescrizione dell’azione di risarcimento Art. 754

1. Diritti dell’usufruttuario

a. In genere Art. 755

b. Godimento dei frutti naturali Art. 756

c. Interessi Art. 757

d. Cedibilità Art. 758

2. Diritti del proprietario

a. Sorveglianza Art. 759

b. Garanzie Art. 760

c. Garanzia in caso di donazione e di usufrutto legale Art. 761

d. Conseguenze della omissione di garanzia Art. 762

3. Obbligo dell’inventario Art. 763

4. Oneri dell’usufrutto

a. Conservazione della cosa Art. 764

b. Manutenzione ed esercizio Art. 765

c. Interessi sopra una sostanza Art. 766

d. Assicurazione Art. 767

1. Fondi

a. Frutti Art. 768

b. Destinazione economica Art. 769

c. Selve Art. 770

d. Miniere e simili Art. 771

2. Cose che si consumano e cose stimate Art. 772

3. Crediti

a. Misura del godimento Art. 773

b. Rimborsi e reimpieghi Art. 774

c. Cessione del credito all’usufruttuario Art. 775

I. In genere Art. 776

II. Diritto dell’usuario Art. 777

III. Oneri Art. 778

I. Oggetto e intavolazione nel registro fondiario Art. 779

II. Negozio giuridico Art. 779a

III. Effetti, estensione e annotazione Art. 779b

1. Riversione Art. 779c

2. Indennità Art. 779d

Abrogato Art. 779e

1. Condizioni Art. 779f

2. Esercizio Art. 779g

3. Altri casi di applicazione Art. 779h

1. Diritto alla costituzione di un’ipoteca Art. 779i

2. Iscrizione Art. 779k

VII. Durata massima Art. 779l

D. Diritti sulle sorgenti Art. 780

E. Altre servitù Art. 781

F. Misure giudiziarie Art. 781a

A. Oggetto Art. 782

1. Iscrizione e modi di acquisto Art. 783

2. Oneri di diritto pubblico Art. 784

Abrogato Art. 785

1. In genere Art. 786

2. Riscatto

a. Da parte del creditore Art. 787

b. Da parte del debitore Art. 788

c. Prezzo del riscatto Art. 789

3. Prescrizione Art. 790

I. Diritto del creditore Art. 791

II. Obbligo del debitore Art. 792

I. Specie Art. 793

1. Importo Art. 794

2. Interesse Art. 795

1. Condizioni per il pegno Art. 796

2. Designazione

a. Fondo unico Art. 797

b. Più fondi Art. 798

3. Fondi agricoli Art. 798a

1. Iscrizione Art. 799

2. Proprietà collettiva Art. 800

II. Estinzione Art. 801

1. Trasferimento dei diritti di pegno Art. 802

2. Disdetta del debitore Art. 803

3. Indennità Art. 804

I. Estensione della garanzia Art. 805

II. Pigioni e fitti Art. 806

III. Prescrizione Art. 807

1. In caso di deprezzamento

a. Misure di difesa Art. 808

b. Garanzia, ripristino dello stato anteriore, pagamento di acconti Art. 809

2. Deprezzamento senza colpa Art. 810

3. Alienazione di parcelle Art. 811

V. Oneri ulteriori Art. 812

1. Effetti Art. 813

2. Relazioni tra i posti Art. 814

3. Posto vacante Art. 815

1. Modo Art. 816

2. Riparto del ricavo Art. 817

3. Estensione della garanzia Art. 818

4. Garanzia per le spese di conservazione Art. 819

1. Grado Art. 820

2. Estinzione del credito e del pegno Art. 821

IX. Indennità d’assicurazione Art. 822

X. Creditore irreperibile Art. 823

A. Scopo e carattere Art. 824

I. Costituzione Art. 825

1. Diritto alla cancellazione Art. 826

2. Posizione del proprietario Art. 827

3. Purgazione delle ipoteche

a. Condizioni e procedura Art. 828

b. Incanti pubblici Art. 829

c. Stima officiale Art. 830

4. Disdetta Art. 831

1. Alienazione totale Art. 832

2. Frazionamento del fondo Art. 833

3. Comunicazione dell’assunzione del debito Art. 834

II. Cessione del credito Art. 835

I. Di diritto cantonale Art. 836

1. Casi Art. 837

2. Venditori, coeredi, ecc. Art. 838

3. Artigiani e imprenditori

a. Iscrizione Art. 839

b. Grado Art. 840

c. Privilegio Art. 841

I. Scopo; relazione con il credito derivante dal rapporto fondamentale Art. 842

II. Tipi Art. 843

III. Diritti del proprietario Art. 844

IV. Alienazione, divisione Art. 845

1. In genere Art. 846

2. Disdetta Art. 847

VI. Protezione della buona fede Art. 848

VII. Eccezioni del debitore Art. 849

VIII. Procuratore Art. 850

IX. Luogo di pagamento Art. 851

X. Modifica del rapporto giuridico Art. 852

XI. Pagamento integrale Art. 853

1. Mancanza del creditore Art. 854

2. Cancellazione Art. 855

XIII. Diffida al creditore Art. 856

I. Costituzione Art. 857

II. Trasmissione Art. 858

III. Costituzione in pegno, pignoramento e usufrutto Art. 859

1. Iscrizione Art. 860

2. Titolo di pegno Art. 861

II. Protezione della buona fede Art. 862

1. Esercizio Art. 863

2. Trasmissione Art. 864

IV. Annullamento Art. 865

Abrogatti Art. 866 a 874

A. Obbligazioni di prestiti con garanzia immobiliare Art. 875

Abrogati Art. 876 a 883

1. Possesso del creditore Art. 884

2. Pegno sul bestiame Art. 885

3. Pegno posteriore Art. 886

4. Dazione in pegno da parte del creditore Art. 887

1. Perdita del possesso Art. 888

2. Obbligo di riconsegna Art. 889

3. Responsabilità del creditore Art. 890

1. Diritti del creditore Art. 891

2. Estensione della garanzia Art. 892

3. Grado dei diritti pignoratizi Art. 893

4. Patto di caducità Art. 894

I. Condizioni Art. 895

II. Eccezioni Art. 896

III. Insolvenza Art. 897

IV. Effetti Art. 898

A. In genere Art. 899

I. Per crediti con o senza titolo di riconoscimento Art. 900

II. Per cartevalori Art. 901

III. Per titoli rappresentanti merci Art. 902

IV. Pegno posteriore Art. 903

I. Estensione della garanzia Art. 904

II. Rappresentanza di azioni e di quote sociali di una società a garanzia limitata costituite in pegno Art. 905

III. Amministrazione e riscossione Art. 906

I. Autorizzazione Art. 907

II. Durata Art. 908

I. Costituzione Art. 909

1. Vendita del pegno Art. 910

2. Diritto sull’eccedenza Art. 911

1. Diritto al riscatto Art. 912

2. Diritto dell’istituto Art. 913

C. Compera a patto di ricupera Art. 914

D. Regolamenti cantonali Art. 915

I. Concetto Art. 919

II. Possesso originario e derivato Art. 920

III. Interruzione transitoria Art. 921

I. Tra presenti Art. 922

II. Fra assenti Art. 923

III. Senza consegna Art. 924

IV. Titoli rappresentanti merci Art. 925

1. Diritto di difesa Art. 926

2. Azione di reintegra Art. 927

3. Azione di manutenzione Art. 928

4. Ammissibilità e prescrizione dell’azione Art. 929

1. Presunzione della proprietà Art. 930

2. Presunzione in caso di possesso derivato Art. 931

3. Azione contro il possessore Art. 932

4. Diritto di disposizione e di rivendicazione

a. Cose affidate Art. 933

b. Cose smarrite o sottratte Art. 934

c. Denaro e titoli al portatore Art. 935

d. Mala fede Art. 936

5. Presunzione per i fondi Art. 937

1. Possessore di buona fede

a. Godimento Art. 938

b. Indennità Art. 939

2. Possessore di mala fede Art. 940

IV. Prescrizione acquisitiva Art. 941

1. In genere Art. 942

2. Intavolazione

a. Oggetto Art. 943

b. Eccezioni Art. 944

3. Registri

a. Libro mastro Art. 945

b. Foglio del mastro Art. 946

c. Foglio collettivi Art. 947

d. Libro giornale, documenti Art. 948

4. Regolamenti

a. In genere Art. 949

b. Tenuta informatizzata del registro fondiario Art. 949a

4a. ... Art. 949b

4b. ... Art. 949c

4c. Ricorso a privati per l’uso del registro fondiario informatizzato Art. 949d

5. Misurazione ufficiale Art. 950

1. Circondari

a. Competenza Art. 951

b. Fondi i più circondari Art. 952

2. Uffici del registro Art. 953

3. Tariffe Art. 954

III. Responsabilità Art. 955

IV. Vigilanza amministrativa Art. 956

1. Diritto di ricorso Art. 956a

2. Procedura di ricorso Art. 956b

Abrogato Art. 957

1. Proprietà e diritti reali Art. 958

2. Annotazioni

a. Diritti personali Art. 959

b. Restrizioni della facoltà di disporre Art. 960

c. Iscrizioni provvisorie Art. 961

d. Iscrizione di diritti di grado posteriore Art. 961a

1. Di restrizioni di diritto pubblico della proprietà Art. 962

2. Di rappresentanti Art. 962a

1. Indicazioni

a. Per le iscrizioni Art. 963

b. Per le cancellazioni Art. 964

2. Legittimazione

a. Prova Art. 965

b. Complemento della prova Art. 966

1. In genere Art. 967

2. Servitù Art. 968

V. Comunicazione d’officio Art. 969

I. Comunicazione di informazioni e consultazione Art. 970

II. Pubblicazioni Art. 970a

I. Conseguenze della mancata iscrizione Art. 971

1. In genere Art. 972

2. Terzi di buona fede Art. 973

3. Terzi di mala fede Art. 974

1. In caso di divisione del fondo Art. 974a

2. In caso di riunione di fondi Art. 974b

II. In caso di iscrizione indebita Art. 975

1. Di iscrizioni manifestamente irrilevanti Art. 976

2. Di altre iscrizioni

a. In genere Art. 976a

b. In caso di opposizione Art. 976b

3. Procedura di aggiornamento pubblica Art. 976c

IV. Rettificazioni Art. 977

I. Regola della non retroattività Art. 1

1. Ordine pubblico e buoni costumi Art. 2

2. Rapporti regolati dalla legge Art. 3

3. Diritti non acquisiti Art. 4

I. Esercizio dei diritti civili Art. 5

II. Scomparsa Art. 6

IIa. Banca dati centrale dello stato civile Art. 6a

1. In genere Art. 6b

2. Contabilità e ufficio di revisione Art. 6c

VI. Protezione della personalità da violenze, minacce e insidie Art. 6d

I. Celebrazione del matrimonio Art. 7

1. Principio Art. 7a

2. Processi di divorzio pendenti Art. 7b

3. Termine di separazione nei processi di divorzio pendenti Art. 7c

4. Previdenza professionale Art. 7d

5. Conversione di rendite in corso Art. 7e

1. Principio Art. 8

2. Cognome Art. 8a

3. Cittadinanza Art. 8b

II. Regime dei beni nei matrimoni celebrati prima del 1° gennaio 1912 Art. 9

1. In genere Art. 9a

2. Passaggio dall’unione dei beni alla partecipazione agli acquisti

a. Modificazione delle masse patrimoniali Art. 9b

b. Privilegio Art. 9c

c. Liquidazione del regime dei beni sotto la legge nuova Art. 9d

3. Mantenimento dell’unione dei beni Art. 9e

4. Mantenimento della separazione dei beni legale o giudiziale Art. 9f

5. Convenzioni matrimoniali

a. In genere Art. 10

b. Efficacia verso i terzi Art. 10a

c. Sottoposizione alla legge nuova Art. 10b

d. Separazione convenzionale dei beni secondo la legge anteriore Art. 10c

e. Convenzioni matrimoniali concluse in vista dell’entrata in vigore della legge nuova Art. 10d

f. Registro dei beni matrimoniali Art. 10e

6. Estinzione di debiti in caso di liquidazione del regime dei beni Art. 11

7. Protezione dei creditori Art. 11a

III. Filiazione in genere Art. 12

1. Mantenimento del diritto anteriore Art. 12a

2. Procedure pendenti Art. 12b

3. Soggezione al nuovo diritto Art. 12c

Abrogato Art. 12cbis

IIIter. Contestazione della legittimazione Art. 12d

1. Azioni pendenti Art. 13

2. Nuove azioni Art. 13a

IVbis. Termine per l’accertamento e la contestazione del rapporto di filiazione Art. 13b

1. Titoli di mantenimento esistenti Art. 13c

2. Procedimenti pendenti Art. 13cbis

IVquater. Cognome del figlio Art. 13d

1. Misure sussistenti Art. 14

2. Procedimenti pendenti Art. 14a

I. Eredi e devoluzione Art. 15

II. Disposizioni a causa di morte Art. 16

I. In genere Art. 17

II. Azione per l’iscrizione nel registro Art. 18

III. Prescrizione acquisitiva Art. 19

1. Alberi nell’altrui fondo Art. 20

2. Proprietà per piani

a. Originaria Art. 20bis

b. Trasformata Art. 20ter

c. Epurazione dei registri fondiari Art. 20quater

V. Servitù Art. 21

1. Riconoscimento dei titoli preesistenti Art. 22

2. Costituzione di diritti nuovi Art. 23

3. Estinzione di titoli Art. 24

4. Estensione della garanzia Art. 25

5. Diritti ed obblighi delle parti

a. In genere Art. 26

b. Provvedimenti conservativi Art. 27

c. Disdetta e trasmissione Art. 28

6. Grado Art. 29

7. Posto di pegno Art. 30

8. Art. 31 e 32

9. Parificazione di forme precedenti con forme nuove Art. 33

10. Applicazione della legge anteriore alle forme di pegno da essa previste Art. 33a

11. Trasformazione del tipo di cartella ipotecaria Art. 33b

1. Formalità Art. 34

2. Effetti Art. 35

VIII. Diritto di ritenzione Art. 36

IX. Possesso Art. 37

1. Impianto del registro Art. 38

2. Misurazione ufficiale

a. Art. 39

b. Relazione col registro fondiario Art. 40

c. Epoca dell’esecuzione Art. 41

Abrogato Art. 42

3. Iscrizione dei diritti reali

a. Procedura Art. 43

b. Conseguenza della non iscrizione Art. 44

4. Diritti reali soppressi Art. 45

5. Introduzione del registro differita Art. 46

6. Applicazione del diritto reale prima del registro fondiario Art. 47

7. Effetti delle forme del diritto cantonale Art. 48

F. Prescrizione Art. 49

G. Forme dei contratti Art. 50

A. Abrogazione del diritto civile cantonale Art. 51

I. Diritti e doveri dei Cantoni Art. 52

II. Disposizioni della Confederazione in luogo dei Cantoni Art. 53

C. Designazione delle autorità competenti Art. 54

I. In genere Art. 55

II. Copie e certificazioni elettroniche Art. 55a

E. Concessioni idrauliche Art. 56

F. a H. Art. 57

J. Modificazioni della legge sull’esecuzione e sul fallimento Art. 58

K. Applicazione del diritto svizzero e straniero Art. 59

L. Abrogazione di leggi federali Art. 60

M. Disposizioni finali Art. 61

A. Regime comune Art. 178

I. Scelta del regime Art. 179

II. Capacità di contrattare Art. 180

III. Forma del contratto Art. 181

I. Separazione legale Art. 182

1. Ad istanza della moglie Art. 183

2. Ad istanza del marito Art. 184

3. Ad istanza dei creditori Art. 185

III. Data della separazione Art. 186

IV. Cessazione della separazione Art. 187

I. Garanzie dei creditori Art. 188

II. Liquidazione a seguito della separazione Art. 189

1. In genere Art. 190

2. Per legge Art. 191

II. Effetti Art. 192

III. Onere della prova Art. 193

I. Sostanza coniugale Art. 194

II. Proprietà del marito e della moglie Art. 195

III. Prova Art. 196

1. Compilazione e valore probatorio Art. 197

2. Effetti della stima Art. 198

V. Proprietà del marito sull’apporto della moglie Art. 199

I. Amministrazione Art. 200

II. Godimento Art. 201

1. Da parte del marito Art. 202

2. Da parte della moglie

a. In genere Art. 203

b. Rinuncia di eredità Art. 204

C. Garanzia degli apporti della moglie Art. 205

I. Del marito Art. 206

1. Con tutta la sostanza Art. 207

2. Col valore dei beni riservati Art. 208

I. Scadenza Art. 209

1. Credito della moglie Art. 210

2. Privilegio Art. 211

I. Premorienza della moglie Art. 212

II. Premorienza del marito Art. 213

III. Aumenti e diminuzioni Art. 214

I. Beni matrimoniali Art. 215

1. Ordinaria Art. 216

2. Facoltà di disporre

a. Sui beni della comunione Art. 217

b. Rinuncia di eredità Art. 218

1. Debiti del marito Art. 219

2. Debiti della moglie

a. Della moglie e della comunione Art. 220

b. Debiti della sostanza riservata della moglie Art. 221

3. Procedura esecutiva Art. 222

1. In genere Art. 223

2. Pei crediti della mogli Art. 224

1. Divisione

a. Per legge Art. 225

b. Per contratto Art. 226

2. Responsabilità del superstite Art. 227

3. Attribuzione degli apporti Art. 228

I. Condizioni Art. 229

II. Oggetto Art. 230

III. Amministrazione e rappresentanza Art. 231

1. Per volontà delle parti Art. 232

2. Per legge Art. 233

3. Per sentenza Art. 234

4. Per matrimonio o per morte di un figlio Art. 235

5. Modo della divisione Art. 236

I. Con separazione di beni Art. 237

II. Comunione dei beni Art. 238

1. Concetto Art. 239

2. Aumenti e diminuzioni Art. 240

A. In genere Art. 241

B. Proprietà, amministrazione e godimento Art. 242

I. In genere Art. 243

II. Fallimento del marito o pignoramento Art. 244

D. Rendite e guadagni Art. 245

E. Contribuzioni della moglie alle spese comuni Art. 246

F. Dote Art. 247

A. Effetti Art. 248

I. Oggetto Art. 249

II. Luogo della iscrizione Art. 250

C. Tenuta dei registri Art. 251


 RU 24 233, 27 263 e CS 2 3


1 [CS 1 3]. A questa disp. corrisponde ora l’art. 122 della Cost. del 18 apr. 1999 (RS 101).2 Nuovo testo giusta l’all. n. 2 della L del 24 mar. 2000 sul foro, in vigore dal 1° gen. 2001 (RU 2000 2355; FF 1999 2427).



Il presente documento non è una pubblicazione ufficiale. Fa unicamente fede la pubblicazione della Cancelleria federale. Ordinanza sulle pubblicazioni ufficiali, OPubl.
Droit-bilingue.ch (2009-2021) - A propos
Page générée le: 2021-01-16T19:35:18
A partir de: http://www.admin.ch/opc/en/classified-compilation/19070042/index.html
Script écrit en Powered by Perl